Oracle Eloqua

http://docs.oracle.
com
Oracle Eloqua
User Guide
2015 Oracle Corporation. All rights reserved
22/06/2015
Contents
1 Getting Started with Oracle Eloqua
20
1.0.1 My Eloqua
20
1.0.2 The Campaign Canvas
20
1.0.3 Assets
20
1.0.4 Contacts
21
1.1 Certified and supported environments

1.1.1 Profiler certified and supported environments
21
22
1.2 Configuring Your User Profile
23
1.3 Language Support
24
1.4 Template choosers
25
1.4.1 Using the template chooser

2 Administration
2.1 Email groups
25
28
28
2.1.1 Creating email groups
29
2.1.2 Deleting email groups
32
2.1.3 Editing email groups
32
2.2 Client security configuration
33
2.2.1 Overview
33
2.2.2 Setting up General Security
33
2.2.3 Setting up Password Complexity
34
2.2.4 Setting up SSH Keys
36
2.2.5 Setting up IPWhitelist security
37
2.2.6 Setting up FrameablePage Whitelist
40
2.2.7 User Password Expiration
40
2.3 Single Sign-On (SSO)
42
2.3.1 Overview
42
2.3.2 Configuring Single Sign-On (SSO)
44
2.3.3 Configuring SSO with OKTA
46
2.3.4 Configuring SSO with Salesforce
50
2.3.5 Configuring SSOwith Salesforce (IDP and User Provisioning)
56
2 of 1162
2.4 HIPAA
63
2.4.1 Configuring the HIPAA add-On
70
2.4.2 Using Eloqua with the HIPAA add-on
93
2.5 Microsites
2.5.1 Creating basic microsites
98
99
2.5.2 Secure microsites
102
2.5.3 Authenticated microsites
106
2.6 Replication Sandbox
112
2.6.1 Initiating instance replication
113
2.6.2 Cancelling instance replication
113
2.7 Security Groups
114
2.7.1 Select List Asset Security
116
2.7.2 Adding users to security groups
119
2.7.3 Licensing
120
2.7.4 Changing license availability for members of a security group
121
2.7.5 Configuring Asset Creation Settings
122
2.7.6 Navigating the Security Settings Interface
126
2.7.7 Action Permissions
127
2.7.8 Default asset permissions
133
2.7.9 Interface Access
134
2.7.10 Licensing
135
2.7.11 User Licensing
136
2.8 Asset Security

2.8.1 Granting rights to assets
138
139
2.9 Configuring campaign details and financials
140
2.10 Configuring company display defaults
140
2.11 Creating custom campaign fields
142
2.12 Creating custom login URLs for CRMintegration
144
2.13 Setting up the master exclude list
150
2.14 Uploading users using a CSV file
153
2.15 Managing image permissions (access rights)
156
2.16 Eloqua asynchronous tracking scripts
157
3 of 1162
2.17 Cookie law country list
158
2.18 Database Encryption
159
2.19 Stopping a batch from sending
161
2.20 "Run As User" for Campaigns and Programs
162
3 Oracle Eloqua AppCloud Apps
166
3.1 Available apps
166
3.2 Push IO app
167
3.2.1 Installing the Push IOapp
167
3.2.2 Adding the Push IO cloud action to your campaign
168
3.3 Salesforce.com Campaign Association app
170
3.3.1 Installing the Salesforce.com Campaign Association app
170
3.3.2 Adding the Salesforce.com cloud action to your campaign
171
3.4 Social Sharing app
172
3.4.1 Installing the Social Sharing app
173
3.4.2 Adding the Social Sharing service to your assets
174
3.5 Static Content app
175
3.5.1 Installing the Static Content app
175
3.5.2 Adding the Static Content service to your landing pages
176
3.6 Form Submit Action app
177
3.6.1 Installing the Form Submit Action app
177
3.6.2 Adding the Form Submit Action to your campaign
178
3.7 Oracle Service Cloud app
179
3.7.1 Installing the Oracle Service Cloud app
179
3.7.2 Adding the Oracle Service Cloud decision to your campaign
180
3.8 Oracle SRM SmartCap app
181
3.8.1 Installing the Oracle SRM SmartCap app
181
3.8.2 Pushing a landing page to the Oracle SRM SmartCap service
182
3.9 WebEx app
184
3.9.1 Installing the WebEx app
185
3.9.2 Registering contacts for a WebEx meeting or event
186
3.9.3 Routing contacts based on WebEx attendance or registration
187
3.9.4 Adding contacts to a campaign based on WebEx attendance
188
4 of 1162
3.9.5 Adding contacts to a campaign based on WebEx registration

3.10 GoToWebinar app
190
191
3.10.1 Installing the GoToWebinar app
191
3.10.2 Registering contacts for a GoToWebinar event
192
3.10.3 Routing contacts based on GoToWebinar attendance
193
3.10.4 Routing contacts based on GoToWebinar registration
194
3.11 YouTube Embed app
194
3.11.1 Installing the YouTube Embed app
195
3.11.2 Adding the YouTube Embed service to an email
195
3.11.3 Adding the YouTube Embed service to a landing page
197
3.12 Twitter Social Sign On app
198
3.12.1 Installing the Twitter Social Sign On app
199
3.12.2 Adding the Twitter Social Sign On service to your landing pages
200
3.13 Twitter Widgets app
202
3.13.1 Installing the Twitter Widgets app
202
3.13.2 Adding the Embedded Tweet service to your landing pages
204
3.13.3 Adding the Twitter Card service to your landing page
205
3.13.4 Adding a Twitter Follow button to your landing page
207
3.13.5 Adding the Twitter Timeline service to your landing pages
207
3.14 Facebook Social Sign On app
209
3.14.1 Installing the Facebook Social Sign On app
210
3.14.2 Adding the Facebook Social Sign On service to your landing pages
211
3.15 RSS app
213
3.15.1 Installing the RSS app
213
3.15.2 Adding the RSS service to your assets
214
3.16 Contact Washing Machine app
215
3.16.1 Installing the Contact Washing Machine app
215
3.16.2 Adding the Contact Washing Machine action to your campaign
216
3.17 External Activity app
218
3.17.1 Installing the External Activity app
218
3.17.2 Adding the External Activity action to your campaign
219
4 Asset choosers
221
5 of 1162
4.1 Using asset favorites
221
4.2 Navigating asset choosers
222
4.3 Moving asset files and folders
223
5 Assets
224
5.1 Using the live preview HTML editor for emails and landing pages
224
5.2 Adding CSS, HTML, JavaScript, or meta tags to emails and landing pages
228
5.2.1 Emails and landing pages
228
5.2.2 HTML emails and landing pages
229
5.3 Formatting HTML in asset editors
229
5.4 Adding borders to images in emails and landing pages
229
5.5 Updating images in emails and landing pages using the design editor
231
5.6 Updating images in emails and landing pages using the HTML editor
233
6 Campaigns
236
6.1 Campaign examples
236
6.2 Creating multi-step campaigns
239
6.3 Adding elements to the campaign canvas
242
6.4 Activating and deactivating campaigns
243
6.5 Editing Campaigns
246
6.6 Deleting campaigns
246
6.7 Accessing operational reports for campaigns
247
6.8 Search for existing opportunities
248
6.9 Configuring opportunity settings
249
6.10 Campaign canvas elements
251
6.10.1 Example of Using Elements in Campaigns
253
6.10.2 Configuring campaign canvas elements: Actions
255
6.10.3 Configuring campaign canvas elements: Assets
260
6.10.4 Configuring campaign canvas elements: Audience
263
6.10.5 Configuring campaign canvas elements: Decisions
264
6.11 Campaign approvals
270
6.11.1 Campaign approvals frequently asked questions
270
6.11.2 Configuring the campaign approvals workflow
271
6.11.3 Enabling campaign approvals for groups
274
6 of 1162
6.11.4 Granting campaign activation permission
275
6.11.5 Requesting campaign approval
275
6.11.6 Checking the approval status of campaigns
278
6.11.7 Approving or rejecting campaign stages
279
6.12 Campaign activation security
282
6.12.1 Changing activation permissions for existing campaigns
282
6.12.2 Granting default activation permissions for campaigns
283
6.13 Mobile campaign manager
284
6.13.1 Activating a Campaign with the Mobile Campaign Manager
290
6.13.2 Deactivating a Campaign with the Mobile Campaign Manager
295
6.13.3 Scheduling and Unscheduling a Campaign with the Mobile Campaign Manager
298
6.14 External (non-Eloqua) assets
304
6.14.1 Creating the external activites CSV file
304
6.14.2 Creating Non-Eloqua (External) Assets
305
6.14.3 Uploading the External Activites CSV file
307
6.14.4 Viewing External Activity on Contact Records
312
6.15 Simple email campaigns
313
6.15.1 Creating simple email campaigns
313
6.15.2 Modifying simple email campaigns
317
6.15.3 Copying simple email campaigns
318
6.15.4 Deleting simple email campaigns
319
6.15.5 Simple email campaign reports
319
6.15.6 Creating A/Btesting email campaigns
323
6.15.7 Closing A/B testing campaigns
329
6.15.8 A/Btesting campaign reports
330
7 Component library
7.1 Shared content
337
338
7.1.1 Shared content examples
339
7.1.2 Copying shared content
340
7.1.3 Creating shared content
340
7.1.4 Deleting shared content
343
7.1.5 Renaming shared content
343
7 of 1162
7.1.6 Creating new folders for shared content
344
7.1.7 Editing shared content
344
7.2 Dynamic content
345
7.2.1 Examples of using dynamic content sections
346
7.2.2 Creating dynamic content
349
7.2.3 Copying dynamic content
351
7.2.4 Editing dynamic content
352
7.2.5 Renaming dynamic content
352
7.2.6 Deleting dynamic content
353
7.2.7 Creating a new folder for dynamic content
353
7.2.8 Embedding dynamic content in an external landing page
354
7.3 Images
356
7.3.1 Downloading an image from the component library
357
7.3.2 Renaming images
357
7.3.3 Updating images
358
7.3.4 Uploading images to the component library
360
7.3.5 Adding borders to images in emails and landing pages
363
7.3.6 Viewing and modifying image details
364
7.4 File storage
365
7.4.1 Deleting files from file storage
365
7.4.2 Uploading files to the component library
366
7.4.3 Updating files in the component library
369
7.4.4 Renaming files in the component library
371
7.5 Field merges
371
7.6
371
7.6.1 Creating field merges

7.7 Signature layouts
371
373
7.7.1 Signature layout examples
373
7.7.2 Creating signature layouts
375
7.7.3 Creating plain-text signature layouts
379
7.7.4 Deleting signature layouts
380
7.7.5 Editing Signature Layouts
381
8 of 1162
7.7.6 Renaming signature layouts

7.8 Signature rules
381
381
7.8.1 Signature rule examples
382
7.8.2 Creating signature rules
383
7.8.3 Deleting signature rules
385
7.8.4 Editing signature rules
385
7.8.5 Renaming signature rules
386
7.8.6 Uploading and exporting mappings for signature rules
386
7.9 Email footers
388
7.9.1 Email footer examples
389
7.9.2 Creating email footers
392
7.9.3 Creating new folders in the email footer list
396
7.9.4 Deleting email footers
396
7.9.5 Renaming emailfooters
396
7.9.6 Editing emailfooters
397
7.9.7 Copying email footers
397
7.10 Email headers
398
7.10.1 Creating email headers
399
7.10.2 Deleting email headers
402
7.10.3 Renaming email headers
402
7.10.4 Editing email headers
403
7.10.5 Copying email headers
403
7.10.6 Creating new folders in the email header list
403
8 Contacts
405
8.1 Creating contacts
406
8.2 Uploading multiple contacts
407
8.3 Copying contacts
410
8.4 Searching and viewing contact records
411
8.5 Editing contacts
413
8.6 Flagging contacts to receive plain-text emails
415
8.7 Deleting contacts
415
8.8 Profile confusion
416
9 of 1162
8.9 Contacts without an email address
421
8.9.1 Contacts without an email address frequently asked questions
421
8.9.2 Creating contact records without an email address
423
8.9.3 Creating contact records without an email address using data import
423
8.9.4 Creating contact records without an email address using CRM auto synch
424
8.9.5 Creating contact records without an email address using contact list uploads
427
9 Custom objects
429
9.0.1 Custom object terminology
429
9.0.2 Custom object characteristics
429
9.1 Creating custom objects
430
9.2 Editing custom objects
430
9.3 Managing custom object record services
432
9.4 Viewing custom object record reports
434
9.5 Custom Objects Enhancements
435
10 Data Tools
10.1 Deduplication Rules
442
442
10.1.1 Examples of Deduplication Precisions
445
10.1.2 Applying a Filter Before Deduplication
459
10.1.3 Copying Deduplication Rules
461
10.1.4 Creating Deduplication Handler Sets
461
10.1.5 Creating Deduplication Rules
463
10.1.6 Deleting Deduplication Handler Sets
464
10.1.7 Deleting Deduplication Rules
465
10.1.8 Editing Deduplication Handler Sets
466
10.1.9 Editing Deduplication Rules
466
10.2 Validation Rules
467
10.2.1 Creating Validation Rules
467
10.2.2 Deleting Validation Rules
469
10.2.3 Editing Validation Rules
469
11 Emails
470
11.1 Examples of Emails
472
11.2 Email groups
483
10 of 1162
484
487
487
11.2.4 Managing global subscription for email groups
488
11.3 Email template manager
489
11.3.1 Granting template manager permission
490
11.3.2 Accessing responsive email templates
490
11.3.3 Creating new email templates from the template manager
495
11.3.4 Modifying email templates from the template manager
498
11.3.5 Defining editable elements in email templates using the HTML editor
498
11.3.6 Defining editable elements in email templates using the design editor
500
11.4 Creating new emails using the HTML editor
503
11.5 Creating new emails or templates using the HTML upload wizard
506
11.6 Email authoring
510
11.6.1 Adding borders to images in emails
510
11.6.2 Adding email footers to emails
511
11.6.3 Adding email headers to emails
512
11.6.4 Adding field merges to emails
512
11.6.5 Adding hyperlinks to emails
514
11.6.6 Adding images to emails
516
11.6.7 Adding text boxes to emails
518
11.6.8 Copying objects in the email editor
519
11.6.9 Customizing images and text boxes in emails
520
11.6.10 Editing the plain-text version of emails
526
11.6.11 Editing HTML emails using theHTMLeditor
527
11.6.12 Grouping objects in emails
528
11.6.13 Locking and unlocking email canvas objects
530
11.6.14 Using email editor components
533
11.6.15 Using emailrecovery checkpoints
535
11.7 Saving emails as templates
537
11.8 Creating folders for emails
539
11.9 Sending emails to a single contact
540
11 of 1162
11.10 Previewing emails
540
11.11 Sending test emails
543
11.12 Testing email deliverability
544
11.13 Batch sending emails from the email editor
545
11.14 Searching for emails using the email chooser
546
11.15 Copying emails
547
11.16 Deleting emails
550
11.17 Setting global email defaults
551
11.18 Code requirements for HTML email uploads
553
11.19 Using the email visual click-through report
555
12 Event Management
559
12.0.1 Using Events
559
12.0.2 Examples of Events
559
12.0.3 Examples of Associated Emails
560
12.0.4 The Role of Forms
561
12.1 Examples of Event Marketing
561
12.2 Event Management FAQs
566
12.3 Creating an Add to Calendar Feature for Events
567
12.4 Creating a New Event
569
12.5 Creating a New Event from a Form
570
12.6 Creating a New Registrant
605
12.7 Creating a Webinar
608
12.8 Deleting an Event
636
12.9 Editing an Event
637
12.10 Managing Unmapped Registrants
669
12.11 Searching for Registrants
675
12.12 Setting Up Value Choices
676
12.13 Updating Event Registrations Using Form Processing Steps
679
12.14 Uploading Registrants
679
12.15 Viewing and Managing Event Reports
685
12.16 Viewing Registrants
696
12.17 Accessing Events
697
12 of 1162
12.18 Copying an Event
697
13 Fields and Views
700
13.0.1 Examples
700
13.1 Account fields
700
13.1.1 Creating account fields
701
13.1.2 Editing account fields
702
13.1.3 Deleting account fields
703
13.1.4 Viewing account field population details
704
13.1.5 Modifying account fields in bulk
705
13.2 Account views
706
13.2.1 Creating account views
706
13.2.2 Editing account views
707
13.2.3 Setting default account views
708
13.2.4 Deleting account views
709
13.3 Contact fields
710
13.3.1 Creating contact fields
711
13.3.2 Deleting Contact Fields
713
13.3.3 Editing Contact Fields
713
13.3.4 Viewing contact field population details
715
13.4 Contact views
716
13.4.1 Changing a contact view
716
13.4.2 Creating contact views
717
13.4.3 Deleting contact views
717
13.4.4 Editing contact views
718
13.4.5 Setting default contact views
720
13.5 Data Types
721
13.5.1 Creating Data Type Formats
724
13.5.2 Deleting Data Type Formats
726
13.5.3 Editing Data Type Formats
726
13.6 Select Lists (Picklists)
727
13.6.1 Copying select lists
727
13.6.2 Creating select lists
727
13 of 1162
13.6.3 Deleting select lists
728
13.6.4 Editing select lists
729
14 Forms
730
14.1 Form examples
731
14.2 Form field types
737
14.3 Creating forms
740
14.4 Configuring form fields
742
14.5 Rearranging and deleting form fields
745
14.6 Adding form processing steps
746
14.7 Configuring form processing steps
747
14.8 Editing forms
765
14.9 Copying forms
765
14.10 Deleting forms
766
14.11 Creating folders for forms
766
14.12 Viewing the HTML code for forms
767
768
14.14 Viewing and exporting form submission data
773
14.15 Excluding form submission data from reports
774
15 Hyperlinks
776
15.1 Hyperlink examples
777
15.2 Creating hyperlinks
780
15.3 Deleting hyperlinks
781
15.4 Editing hyperlinks
782
15.5 Renaming hyperlinks
782
15.6 Tracking hyperlinks using the hyperlink manager
782
16 Insight (Reporting)
785
16.1 Insight Data Model (Attributes and Metrics)
785
16.2 Insight Subject Areas
806
16.3 Exporting Insight Reports
808
16.4 Reporting on Custom Fields withInsight
808
16.5 Saving Insight reports
810
16.6 Creating a Heat Map in Insight
811
14 of 1162
16.7 Insight Dashboards
815
16.7.1 Benchmark Dashboard
817
16.7.2 Campaign Activity Performance Dashboard
819
16.7.3 Database Health Dashboard
825
16.7.4 Email Performance Dashboard
830
16.7.5 Form Performance Dashboard
835
16.7.6 Lead Scoring Dashboard
837
16.7.7 Website Traffic Analysis Dashboard
838
16.7.8 Landing Page AnalysisDashboard
840
16.7.9 Campaign and Email Engagement Analysis Dashboard
841
17 Integrations
17.1 Data Importing and Exporting
842
842
17.1.1 Creating and configuring Data Imports
842
17.1.2 Creating Data Exports
845
17.1.3 Deleting Data Imports and Exports
848
17.1.4 Editing Data Imports and Exports
848
17.1.5 Scheduling and Running Data Exports and Imports
849
17.1.6 Viewing Data Export/Import history
849
17.2 CRM integration
850
17.2.1 Understanding CRM integration
850
17.2.2 Join Your Community!
853
17.2.3 CRM integration: auto-synchs
854
17.2.4 CRM integration: external calls
856
17.2.5 CRM integration: status and reporting
864
17.2.6 CRM capability matrix and supported platforms
871
17.2.7 Sales cloud integration
871
17.2.8 Integration with Oracle CRM On Demand
872
17.3 Integration with Oracle Social Relationship Management
873
17.4 Oracle Data Management Platform Integration
874
17.4.1 Overview
874
17.4.2 How It Works
874
18 Landing Pages
876
15 of 1162
18.1 Landing page examples
877
18.2 Code requirements for uploading HTML landing pages
884
18.3 Creating newlanding pages using the HTML editor
886
18.4 Creating new landing pages using the design editor
888
18.5 Creating new landing pages and templates using the HTMLupload wizard
891
18.6 Adding text boxes to landing pages
896
18.7 Customizing landing page text boxes and images
897
18.8 Copying objects in the landing page editor
906
18.9 Grouping objects in landing pages
907
18.10 Locking and unlocking objects in landing pages
909
18.11 Previewing landing pages
911
18.12 Creating folders for landing pages
913
18.13 Saving landing pages as templates
913
18.14 Editing landing pages
915
18.15 Editing HTML landing pages using the HTML editor
916
18.16 Deactivating landing pages
917
18.17 Deleting landing pages
918
18.18 Making copies of landing pages
919
18.19 Using landing page recovery checkpoints
920
18.20 Landing page template manager
921
922
18.20.2 Creating new landing page templates from the template manager
922
18.20.3 Modifying landing page templates from the template manager
925
18.20.4 Defining editable elements in landing page templates using the design editor
926
18.20.5 Defining editable elements in landing page templates using the HTML editor
929
19 Lead Scoring
19.0.1 Introduction To Lead Scoring Models
931
931
19.1 Lead Scoring Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
933
19.2 Configuring lead scoring
935
19.2.1 Configuration
935
19.3 Filtering on specific Campaign Response Activity
943
19.4 Viewing the lead score history for a contact
944
16 of 1162
20 Marketing Operations Center

20.0.1 Understanding the marketing operation center user interface
946
946
20.1 Accessing the Marketing Operations Center
952
20.2 Creating Announcements
953
20.3 Deleting Announcements
957
20.4 Editing Announcements
957
20.5 Ending Announcements
958
20.6 Stopping all services using the Marketing Operations Center
958
21 Page Tagging
961
21.1 Creating page tags
962
21.2 Using page tags
966
21.3
968
21.4 Uploading page tags
968
21.5 Deleting page tags
972
21.6 Creating page tag groups
974
21.7 Deleting page tags groups
975
21.8 Creating auto tagging rules
976
21.9 Managing auto tagging rules
977
21.10 Creating meta tagging rules
978
21.11 Managing auto meta tagging rules
982
22 Program Builder
22.0.1 Program run mode throughputs
985
986
22.1 Program Builder Feeders
987
22.2 Program Builder Step Actions
987
22.3 Accessing Program Builder
994
22.4 Adding Feeders
995
22.5 Archiving Programs
998
22.6 Copying Programs
1000
22.7 Creating Programs
1000
22.8 Deleting Programs
1009
22.9 Editing the Program Flow
1010
22.10 Managing Program Builder Folders
1011
17 of 1162
22.11 Troubleshooting feeders
1012
22.12 Viewing the path of a contact through a program
1014
22.13 View or Edit Program Details
1014
22.14 Accessing/Viewing Feeders
1016
23 Sales Tools
1018
23.1 Profiler
1018
23.1.1 Installing Profiler
1019
23.1.2 Re-configuring Profiler
1020
23.1.3 Accessing Profiler
1021
23.1.4 Accessing contact records in Profiler
1022
23.1.5 Viewing data in Profiler
1025
23.1.6 Adjusting the lead score model used in Profiler
1027
23.1.7 Setting up activity notifications in Profiler
1028
23.1.8 Profiler integration
1030
23.2 Profiler Stream
1044
23.2.1 Configuring Profiler Stream settings
1045
23.2.2 Accessing Profiler Stream
1048
23.2.3 Filtering contact activity in Profiler Stream
1049
23.2.4 Adjusting the lead score model used in Profiler Stream
1051
23.2.5 Setting up activity notifications in Profiler Stream
1052
23.2.6 Configuring Twitter fields in Profiler Stream
1054
23.2.7 Configuring Profiler Stream for Salesforce
1057
23.2.8 Configuring Profiler Stream for Microsoft Dynamics CRM
1063
23.3 Engage
1071
23.3.1 Accessing Engage
1071
23.3.2 Adding attachments to Engage emails
1072
23.3.3 Adding field merges to Engage emails
1073
23.3.4 Adding hyperlinks to engage emails
1075
23.3.5 Adding images to Engage emails
1075
23.3.6 Adding recipients (contacts) and a subject to Engage emails
1077
23.3.7 Adding signatures to Engage emails
1085
23.3.8 Creating Engage emails using a blank template
1086
18 of 1162
23.3.9 Creating Engage emails using existing templates
1089
23.3.10 Previewing Engage emails
1095
23.3.11 Deleting saved templates inEngage
1096
23.3.12 Saving Engage emails as templates
1097
23.3.13 Viewing advanced reports in Engage
1098
23.3.14 Viewing reports in Engage
1101
23.3.15 Engage integration
1105
23.4 Discover for Salesforce

23.4.1 Overview
23.5 Sales prioritization views
23.5.1 Configuring salesprioritization views in Salesforce.com
23.6 Sales Tools Administration
1115
1115
1115
1115
1122
23.6.1 Configuring settings for Engage
1123
1126
24 Segments
24.0.1 Examples
1130
1130
24.1 Creating new segments
1132
24.2 Adding individual contacts to segments
1133
24.3 Adding contacts to segments using filter criteria
1134
24.4 Adding uploaded contacts to segments
1136
24.5 Adding shared filters and shared lists to segments
1137
24.6 Filter and list operations
1138
24.7 Excluding segment elements
1140
24.8 Sharing filters and lists
1141
24.9 Editing segments
1142
24.10 Deleting segments
1142
24.11 Viewing segment contacts
1143
25 Shared Filters
1146
25.1 Viewing the number of contacts in a filter
1147
25.2 Viewing contacts in a filter
1148
26 Oracle Eloqua Glossary
1149
19 of 1162
1 Getting Started with Oracle Eloqua

Eloqua's central focus is on creating targeted campaigns, and collecting the data necessary to help
you better tailor your communications.
1.0.1 My Eloqua
When you first log into Eloqua, you'll see the My Eloqua area. Let's take a quick tour of My Eloqua.
At the top of the page, you'll find the navigation toolbar, where you can access the core components of
Eloqua: Campaigns, Assets, Contacts, Reporting tools, and the Settings menu. On the right, you have
a powerful search tool, access to the help menu, and the logout button.
The main area is yours to configure: using the "Plus" icon in the bottom left corner, you can add various
widgets to the page, giving you quick access to reporting metrics, recently-accessed campaigns, most
used forms - whatever you use more frequently.
1.0.2 The Campaign Canvas

The Campaign Canvas is the heart of Eloqua: this is where you create campaigns that bring together
segments, emails, forms, landing pages, decision-making and even calls to external systems, and
drive your marketing success.
The Campaign Canvas makes it easy to visualize how your contacts flow through your campaign,
what assets (emails, landing pages, forms) the contacts will be interacting with.
Check out the Campaigns and Campaign Canvas documentation for more information, and tutorials
that can help you build your first campaign.
1.0.3 Assets
The Assets area provides access to your emails, landing pages, forms, and the component library that
you can use to build them. Emails and landing pages are central to your contacts' experience. Creating
rich, targeted emails and landing pages greatly improves your campaign success, and makes it easier
to track campaign performance. The component library is a repository for images, frequently used text
snippets, shared content, and signature layouts and rules. They are scaffolding that you can create
once and reuse repeatedly, helping you be consistent in your messaging and imagery, and saving time.
See Emails, Landing Pages, Forms, and Component Library for more about Eloqua's assets.
20 of 1162
1.0.4 Contacts
Not to be forgotten, contact information is essential to your marketing effort. Contacts and their
associated meta data are the primary building blocks for segments, which let you target your message
to the right audience. The Contacts menu gives access to contact information, lets you access lead
scoring, custom objects, create segments, and access your shared library of filters, lists, and update
rules.
The Contacts, Segments, Lead Scoring, and Segmentation pages provide more information about the
ways you can work with contact data in Eloqua.
1.1 Certified and supported environments

Eloqua runs on most modern web browsers, on both the Windows and MacOSoperating systems.
Certified (C): The certified browsers and operating systems are those that have been fully tested and
certified by Oracle Eloqua as compatible with the indicated Eloqua products.
Supported (S): While you can use Eloqua with 'Supported' (i.e. later versions) of these browsers, we
do not guarantee full compatibility with our products.If in the event you experience an issue that is
specific to an environment not listed as Certified, please log a Service Request (SR) through My
Oracle Support (MOS).You can also try out one of the certified browsers.
Not Supported (N): This product may work, but it hasn't been tested by Oracle.
Browser support
Microsoft
Mozilla Firefox
Product
34.x
Mozilla Firefox
Internet Explorer (IE)
22.x
Google Chrome
35.x
and later
8.x
9.x
Eloqua
Certified
Supported
Supported
Eloqua Engage
Certified
Supported
Supported
Eloqua Profiler Stream
Certified
Supported
Certified
Supported
Eloqua Discover
Certified
Supported
Certified
Supported
Eloqua Insight
Certified
Supported
--
Supported
*Internet Explorer is not supported out-of-the-box.If you wish to beta test IE with Eloqua, you must
install Google Chrome Frame in IE 8 or 9. For more information on installing Google Chrome Frame,
refer to www.google.com/chromeframe.
21 of 1162
Important: Google has retired Chrome Frame, and will cease support and updates for the
product in January 2014. This means that no further updates or support will be provided from
Google, however if you wish to try Eloqua with IE, you can still install Chrome Frame as before.
If you wish to use Eloqua Engage in Internet Explorer, please note, only IE 9 is supported.
Operating system support

Operating System Support Status
Microsoft Windows 7Certified
Windows 8**
Supported
Mac OS X
Supported
**Only on computers that do not have touchscreen displays.There is no support for Windows 8 tablets.
1.1.1 Profiler certified and supported environments

Below is a list of devices on which Profiler can be accessed, along with the current support status:
Apple
Mac
Hardware
Operating
System
Browser
Windows
PC
Mac OS X
Windows 7
Windows 8
FF
FF
FF
Chrome
IE IE
IE
Chrome
(34,
(34,
(34,
(38)
(8) (9) (10,11)
(38)
35)
35)
35)
Support
Status
Apple
IE
(8)
IE
IE
Chrome
(9) (10,11)
(38)
N/A N/A
Samsung
Galaxy TabS
iPad 4G Galaxy S4 Galaxy S5
10.5
KitKat
KitKat
iOS7.x
KitKat 4.4.4
4.4.4
4.4.4
Hardware
iPhone
6/6+
Operating
System
iOS8.x
iOS7.x
iOS7.x
Safari
(Native)
Safari
(Native)
Safari
(Native)
Safari
(Native)
Chrome
(Native)
Chrome
(Native)
Chrome
(Native)
Browser
Support
Status
iPhone 5 iPhone 5s
22 of 1162
1.2 Configuring Your User Profile

The User Profile page allows a user to configure his or her own settings, including changing the
password.
To configure your User (agent) settings:

1. Navigate to Settings > Profile.
2. Configure the following settings:
Login Info: The Display Name, Username, First Name, Last Name and Email address for
the current user are shown here. You can change any in the field except the Login, which is
read-only.
To change the password, click Change Password; fill in the New Password and enter it again
to confirm in the next field. When the New Password and the Confirm Password fields match,
a checkmark appears. Note that the password must adhere to the rules outlined on the righthand side of the page.
System Settings: Set the timezone for the user. This controls most of the time stamps, last
modified dates related to this user's account.
Salesforce Details: If you have an integrated Salesforce system, this option is shown on the
page. You can enter the Salesforce User ID.
General Info (Signature Fields): These settings allow you to define the content for a number
of standard fields commonly used in a signature for the current agent that can be inserted into an
email. You can define signature elements such as the Email Sender Display Name, Email
Reply-To Address, Company and Website URL, Department and Job Title. Additionally,
Contact Information (address and phone numbers), Personal Photo, and Digital Signature (an
image of the user's signature) and Default Signature Layout (the fields, images and text that will
be used in this user's signature by default) can be entered if appropriate. For the Personal Photo
and Digital Signature, click the button in the field to search for and select the relevant asset of
this type. From the Search window, you can also upload a new asset of that type from the
menu.
3. When you have finished configuring these settings, click Save.
23 of 1162
1.3 Language Support

Localized versions of Eloqua are now generally available in French (Canadian and European), German,
Spanish and Brazilian Portuguese.
Eloqua uses the language settings in your web browser to determine which language the login page
and user interface is displayed.
Note: To enable this feature, please log in to My Oracle Support (http://support.oracle.com) and
create a service request.
Note: Eloqua Sales Tools (Profiler, Engage and Discover), Eloqua Insight (reporting) and the
Product Documentation are not included as part of this localization program at the current time.
They are still displayed in English regardless of your browser settings.
Additional Languages
An additional group of 14 languages are now available.
Note:This feature is currently released under our Controlled Availability program. To request
access to this feature, please log in to My Oracle Support (http://support.oracle.com) and
These 14 languages are:

Chinese (Simplified)
Chinese (Traditional)
Czech
Danish
Dutch
Finnish
Hungarian
Italian
Japanese
Korean
Norwegian
24 of 1162
Polish
Russian
Swedish
Turkish
1.4 Template choosers

The process of creating new assets in Eloqua begins with selecting a template on which the asset is to
be based. A template can be completely blank, allowing you to add elements to an empty canvas, or it
can have content already added to it that can be reused by usersat your organization.
Eloqua gives you the option to lock the elements of email and landing page templates in place using the
template manager. Locking templates prevents users from editing, deleting, or modifying any elements
that are not specifically defined as editable. For example, you may wish to have a block of text that is
required for legal or other reasons that must not be changed, you can set the template to protected
mode to ensure compliance with your organization's needs. Learn more about the email template
manager and the landing page template manager.
Templates are the building blocks from which all assets are created, Eloqua provides a common
interface between assets that creates a seamless experience when navigating through the application.
The template chooser lets you select a blank or pre-designed template for campaigns, emails, landing
pages, forms, segments and lead scoring models to be used when creating new assets.
1.4.1 Using the template chooser

The template chooser behaves the same way for all assets in Eloqua (campaigns, emails, landing
pages, forms, segments, and lead scoring models). Once you understand the navigation steps for one
template chooser, you can apply the same steps for any other asset.
To open the template chooser:

1. From the navigation toolbar at the top of the Eloqua window, click the name of the asset you
wish to create, the corresponding launchpad opens. To access campaigns or segments click
Campaigns or Contacts, respectively. For all other assets, click Assets.
2. Click Create a(n) <AssetName>, where <AssetName>is the type of asset you are creating,
the Template Chooser opens.
25 of 1162
Example: For emails, click Create an Email
3. Select the template that you want to use, then click Choose, or double-click on its name, the
corresponding editor opens to a new asset based on that template.
You can toggle between two views in the Template Chooser by clicking the corresponding button in the
upper right-hand corner of the window:
Grid: This is the default view, it shows a thumbnail or an icon for each template as shown in the
image below:
26 of 1162
List: This view lists each of the templates with their modification details and creation details as
shown in the image below:
Note:When you close the chooser after switching to list view, it will automatically revert
back to grid view the next time the chooser opens. You must change the view to list
view each time you want to use that view.
27 of 1162
2 Administration
Oracle Eloqua provides a rich suite of administration tools, most of which are located conveniently in
the Settings menu, under Setup.
2.1 Email groups

Email Groups are used to control default settings for similar types of emails. For instance, you can set
the default header, footer, subscription landing page, and unsubscribe landing page for a set of email
newsletters. Then your contacts can subscribe or unsubscribe at the group level to simplify
subscription management. As an administrator, you can add or delete groups as required to control
email subscriptions.
Examples of using email groups

Email groups allow you to configure settings on the group level for defaults such as the email headers
and footers and subscription landing page options. This makes it easier to manage different types of
emails and the subscribers to each.
Here are a few of the different types of categorizations you could use for setting up different email
groups for emails:
By department: You can group the emails by the department from which they are sent. This is
particularly useful if you have several different departments sending different types of emails to
users. For larger companies, the top-level categories might be by department, with functional
groupings within each department area.
28 of 1162
By campaign: You could separate your emails into different campaign email groups. This will
make it easier for you to isolate the responses to each campaign. Again, this structure could be
within a department structure if more than one department (for instance: Marketing, Sales,
Support) is distributing email to recipients.
By event: In some cases, particularly for larger events (such as trade shows), you may want to
have an email group for each event. In other instances, it may make more sense to organize by
the type of event, such as seminars, trade shows, and webinars.
By user or agent: In a really large operation, you may want to allow individual marketers or
sales personnel to run their own email groups.
By industry: If you are addressing multiple industry verticals, it may make sense to organize
email groups by different industries.
By product or service: If you have a large catalog of products and/or services, you may want
to organize email groups by the different types of products.
By marketing asset type: One of the more common setups is to organize email groups by the
type and even instance of the marketing asset. For example, you may have different email
groups for different newsletters, notifications, PRs, emergency bulletins, etc.

You can create an email group and set its default parameters so you can manage the emails at the
group level for a particular content asset, such as an email or newsletter.
To create an email group:

1. Navigate to Settings > Setup, then click Email Groups (under Assets), the Email Groups page
opens listing all the existing email groups.
2. Click the
button in the bottom left-hand corner to add a new group, the new group
appears in the left-hand pane as Untitled Email Group.

3. Click on the name and the group settings appear in the right hand pane, configure the group
settings as needed:
Name: Enter a new name for the email group.
Default Email Header: Select a header from the drop-down list, or click the file icon to
the right of the field to open the Email Header Chooser. This header will be the default for
emails sent from this group. If necessary, you can change which header is used in a
specific email by clicking on it in the email editing page. Learn more about email headers.
29 of 1162
Default Email Footer: Select a footer from the drop-down list, or click the file icon to the
right of the field to open the Email Footer Chooser. This footer will be the default for
emails sent from this group. If necessary, you can change which footer is used in a
specific email by clicking on it in the email editing page. Learn more about email footers.
Subscribe confirmation page: Select an option from the drop-down list, or click the
folder icon to the right of the field to open the Landing Page Chooser. The subscribe
confirmation page is the page that is displayed when a user clicks on a hyperlink in an
email to subscribe (opt-in) for an email group.
Unsubscribe confirmation page: Select an option from the drop-down list, or click the
folder icon to the right of the field to open the Landing Page Chooser. The unsubscribe
email to unsubscribe (opt-out) for an email group.
Make this Email Group available in Eloqua for Sales: (Optional) Select this check
box if you want to be able to use this email group when sending Eloqua emails.
Include this Email Group on the Subscription Management Page:(Optional) Select
this check box if you want the recipient of an email to be able to see the name of this
group on the Subscription Management Page (after the contact has clicked on the "Send
to Subscription List" hyperlink in an email). When you click this check box the following
fields appear:
Name of the Email Group As It Appears to Contacts:Enter the name of the
group as you want it to be displayed on the landing page.
Description of Email Group As It Appears to Contacts:(Optional) Enter a
description to make it clear what types of information this group provides. We
recommend you provide a clear description, this ensures that a user who is
subscribed to several different groups will not mistakenly unsubscribe to the
wrong group.
30 of 1162
4. Click Save to save the settings for the email group.

To verify that your email group has been successfully added to the list of groups, navigate to Assets >
Emails > Create an Email. In the email group drop-down list in the top-right corner, scroll through the
list until you have located your email group.If you are unable to locate your group, verify that you have
clicked Save on the settings page when creating your group.
Important: Once you assign and save an email to an email group, it cannot be reassigned or
changed. In order to change the email group, you must delete the email and recreate it, then
assign it to the correct group.
31 of 1162

You can delete any email group that you are no longer using, provided there are no emails associated
with that group.
To delete an email group:

opens listing all of the existing email groups.
2. Click on the name of the group that you want to delete, the group settings are displayed in the
right-hand pane.
3. Click the
button in the bottom left-hand corner to delete the email group, a
confirmation box opens.

4. Click Delete to delete the email group, the group is removed from the email groups list.
Note: If there are any emails associated with this group, you will receive an error
message when you try to delete it. You must delete the emails in the group before being
able to delete the group itself. To see which emails belong to your email group, select the
group you wish to delete, then click the Emails tab in the right-hand pane, all emails in
the group are listed.

You can edit the settings of a pre-existing email group from the settings area of the application.
To edit an email group:

2. Click on the name of the group that you wish to modify, the group settings are displayed in the
right-hand pane.
3. Change the settings as needed, then click Save to save your changes.
32 of 1162
Note: When you change the name of the email group, the name on the associated
subscription page is also updated.
To view the emails that are associated with this group, click the Emails tab for that group.The emails
are presented in a read-only list.
2.2 Client security configuration

2.2.1 Overview
As an Eloqua Administrator, you can manage the security policies Eloqua users must meet to be able
to access the Eloqua application. The settings you can control include:
General security settings to control logging out and locking out users after a specified number of
failed login attempts. The values entered in these settings should match your organization's
strictest policies for network and desktop access, based on a user's status in the current
session.
Password complexity settings to preset password requirements, i.e. the number and type of
characters that must be included in a password for it to be valid.
SSH keys to manage keys used to authenticate users using an SFTP server rather than a
password.
IP whitelist settings to restrict login by IP address (you can specify a range of valid
IPaddresses that Eloqua will detect when a user attempts to log in). By specifying valid
IPranges and addresses ("whitelisting"), only users who are directly connected to your network
or connected through a VPNwill be able to log in. Any attempts to connect from IPaddresses
other than those you have specified will be denied.
Frameable page whitelist settings to prevent security vulnerabilities at the frameable page level.
It is critical that you configure these settings to ensure that users accessing Eloqua adhere to the same
security requirements that are deployed across your organization.
2.2.2 Setting up General Security

The General Security Configuration page is where you manage the requirements for how Eloqua
determines a user's session timeout, lockout, failed login attempts and password expiration/reset
values. Each requirement is described below.
33 of 1162
To manage General Security settings:

1. Navigate to Settings >Setup > Security > General Security Configuration.
2. Configure the security requirements user sessions as described below:
User Password Expiration in Days.The password expiration time frame in days.
Selecting 0 (zero) means the password never expires; the maximum that you can set is
one year (365 days).
Maximum Number of Invalid Login Attempts.The number of unsuccessful attempts at
logging in before a users account is locked out. The default is ten (10). If a user tries ten
times to log in to the application without success, their account will be locked out from
further login attempts.
Account Lockout Effective Period in Minutes.The value indicated here is in minutes.
The default number of minutes is five (5), meaning the account will be locked for five
minutes. If you set this value to 0 (zero), accounts will be locked until an administrator
(manager) manually unlocks it.
Invalid Login Attempt Reset in Minutes. The number you enter here is in minutes. The
default is five (5) minutes.The value for this setting determines the number of minutes
that must pass before the lockout threshold is reset. For example, if a user tries
unsuccessfully to login to Eloqua six times, he or she can allow five minutes to elapse,
thereby resetting the login attempts counter back to zero.The account lockout threshold
will be reset, in this case, five minutes after the last failed attempt. At that point, the user
has ten more attempts at logging in.Note that if this value is set to 0, the counter will not
be reset and an administrator must be contacted to unlock the account.
Session Timeout in Minutes (10-720).The default timeout (in minutes) is 120. This
means that after two hours, if a user has abandoned his or her work in Eloqua (for
example, leaves the desk for an appointment, etc.), the current session on the current
computer will expire, requiring a re-login at the next attempt to use the application.
Forgot Password Reset Time in Minutes (30-1440).The default value for this setting
is 720 minutes (12 hours), and sets the number of minutes that must elapse before a user
can get a new Forgot Password email.
3. Click Save to save your settings.
2.2.3 Setting up Password Complexity

You have granular control of the password requirements for Eloqua users.
There are two preconfigured levels of password security complexity in Eloqua:Eloqua security
complexity and Windows security complexity.
34 of 1162
If this is the first time you are accessing these settings, the Eloqua security complexity settings have
been preconfigured as the default. However, you can change any of the settings required to coincide
with your organization's security policies by editing the corresponding settings on this page.
To configure password complexity:

1. Navigate to Settings >Setup > Security > Password Complexity Configuration.
2. Click Password Complexity Configuration.
3. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click Edit.
4. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click either Eloqua or Windows to populate the field values
with the standard Eloqua or Windows security requirements. Depending on which security
complexity you choose, the default settings will be as follows:
Minimum Password Length (5-15): Determines the required password length. This
value must be between 5-15 characters.
Eloqua security complexity
Windows security complexity
8 characters
8 characters
Number of Days before a Password can be Reused (0 - 365): Prohibits a user from
using the same password that was used in the previous Xdays, where Xrepresents the
number of days between 0 and 365. If set to 0, a password can be reused on the same
day.
0 days
2 days
Number of Passwords before a Password can be Reused (0 - 50): Determines the

maximum number of times a password can be reset to the same one used within the
time period specified in the previous setting. For example, if you have selected 50 as the
value for this setting, if a user selects Password123 as the password on January 1,
when selecting a new password in the next 49 instances before the one used on January
1 can be reused.
0 Passwords
24 Passwords
Require at Least One Uppercase Character: Requires users to select a password

containing an uppercase character from A to Z, and is enabled (checked) for both
complexity levels.
Require at Least One Lowercase Character.Requires the user to select a password
containing at least one character between a and z, and is enabled by default for both
complexity levels.
35 of 1162
Require at Least One Digit: Requires that the user incorporate at least one digit
(numeral) in the password.Valid values are 0 through 9. Enabled by default for both
complexities.
Require at Least One Punctuation Character:Requires every password to contain at
least one non-alphabetic character, i.e. special characters. Valid values are:
~!@#$%^&*()-+={}[];:<>?.,\/|. Disabled by default for all complexity levels.
Password Cannot Contain More than 2 characters from the
Username:Determines the maximum number of characters in the user name that can
be used in the password.
Disabled
Enabled
Password Cannot Contain Users Account Name.Specifies that the user account
name and password cannot be the same and the account name cannot be part of the
password. For example, if the user name is jsmith, the password cannot be jsmith or
jsmith123.This option is enabled by default.
Disabled
Enabled
Require the First Character to be Alphanumeric. Requires the first character of the
users password to be alphanumeric (cannot be a special or Unicode character). This
option is disabled by default for all complexity levels.
Require the Last Character to be Alphanumeric. Requires the last character of a
users password must be alphanumeric, i.e. cannot be a special or Unicode character.
This option is disabled by default for all complexity levels.
2.2.4 Setting up SSH Keys

Manage SSH keys saved in Eloqua for SFTP authentication instead of using a password. See one of
the following procedures to set up your SSH keys.
To create an SSH key
1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Security > Manage SSH Keys > Create Key.
2. Enter a name for the key.
3. Click Save.
To upload an SSH key

1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Security > Manage SSH Keys > Upload Key.
36 of 1162
2. Enter a name for the key.

3. Click Browse under Public Key and/or Private Key to upload a key.
4. Navigate to the key file and click Open.
5. Click Save.
Once you have setup your SSH keys. You can use the SSH keys for authentication when performing
data imports and exports.
2.2.5 Setting up IPWhitelist security

This feature restricts the ability to log into the clients instance of Eloqua to computers whose IP
addresses fall within a specified range. It offers two areas of protection: 1) it prevents unauthorized
users from using Eloqua credentials, and 2) it ensures that former employees no longer have access to
Eloqua (since internal and VPN network access is generally disabled immediately upon an employees
termination).
To configure IPWhitelist restrictions:

1. Navigate to Settings >Setup > Security > IPWhitelist Configuration.
2. By default, this setting is disabled. In order to add IPaddress range restrictions to your Eloqua
instance, click Enable IPAddress Restriction. The following screen appears:
3. After clicking Enable IPAddress Restriction, you must have at least one valid IPrange
configured for users to be able to access the Eloqua application. By default, the IPaddress of
the current user is populated in both the Minimum and Maximum boxes.
37 of 1162
WARNING:Do not delete an IPAddress Range if it is the only Range that has been
configured. By doing so, you will effectively block all users from accessing Eloqua.
4. Click Create IPAddress Range to begin configuring the valid IPaddress ranges for accessing
your Eloqua instance.
5. Select an IP address range:
By IP Range
Specify the start of the range of IP addresses you wish to allow, followed by the end of the
range. For example, you can enter 1.1.1.1 in the minimum value and 1.1.1.255 as the
maximum. Any user who tries to log in to Eloqua from a computer whose IP address falls
outside of this range will not be able to log in. For example, using the range indicated in the
illustration below, suppose 1.1.1.15 is not a valid IP address. In that case, you would create
two ranges, one from 1.1.1.1 to 1.1.1.14 and the other from 1.1.1.16 to 1.1.1.255.
By Specific IP Block
Enter a specific (individual) IP address, most used in environments where IP addresses are not
dynamically assigned.
38 of 1162
By Network Mask
Enter the beginning IP address of the IP range you wish to add, followed by the network mask in
slash notation. The online subnet mask calculator is helpful in finding the mask (called mask
bits in the calculator).For more information on how to calculate a subnet mask, refer to:
http://www.subnet-calculator.com.
The /24 subnet mask is equal to a 255.255.255.0 subnet mask and includes the addresses
1.1.1.0 to 1.1.1.254 in the example shown below.
6. Click Save to save your changes.
39 of 1162
2.2.6 Setting up FrameablePage Whitelist

To prevent security vulnerabilities, by default Eloqua pages are not frameable. However, you are able
to configure exceptions through whitelisting.
To configure yourEloqua Frameable Page Whitelist:

1. Navigate to Settings >Setup > Security > FrameablePage Whitelist Configuration.
2. Click Create Frameable Page Whitelist Entry.
3. Enter the filename pattern for the page or pages you wish to whitelist. The string you enter will
be used as a search term for your Eloqua instance's pages (after your base URL). For instance,
if your base URL is "https://secure.eloqua.com" and you enter the filename pattern "Main.aspx"
then this service will whitelist "https://secure.eloqua.com/Main.aspx" and all of its
subdirectories. Likewise, if you enter "announcements.aspx" any page whose directory has an
exact match of that string in its filepath will be whitelisted.
2.2.7 User Password Expiration

This document covers the two configuration areas and steps required to customize password
expiration. By default, all Eloqua users have password expiration enabled and are required to change
their password every 90 days. You must have customer administrator privileges in order to customize
the following settings. This functionality is available for both Eloqua 9 and Eloqua10 customers.
Enabling User Password Expiration

To enable user password expiration:
1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Users.
2. Select the user you want to modify.
40 of 1162
3. Select Yes to indicate if you want this user's password to expire.
Setting Password Expiration Length

To set the password expiration length:
1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Security.
2. Change the Account Policy to Custom Security Complexity.
3. Under Password Complexity Settings, change the value User passwords expire in to the
number of days a user's password is active.
41 of 1162
2.3 Single Sign-On (SSO)

2.3.1 Overview
Eloqua's SSO capabilities allow you to seamlessly access the Eloqua platform from your internal SSO
provider without having to enter Eloqua user credentials. Eloqua offers several Single Sign-On (SSO)
capabilities and options. At a high level, SSO with Eloqua allows users seamless access to the Eloqua
platform or any of the Eloqua Sales Tools.
Basic SSO capabilities for seamless access to Eloqua products are included as part of Eloqua Basic,
Standard, and Enterprise.
Below are all the details and guidelines you need to get SSO up and running within your organization.
Technical Details
The following information about Eloqua SSO can he helpful for your IT team:
Eloqua SSO uses industry-standard Security Authentication Markup Language (SAML 2)
authentication to pass authenticated user data between the Identity Provider and Service
Providers.
Eloqua supports SAML assertions by POST.
Eloqua supports both SP initiated and Identity Provider (IdP) initiated authentication.
Eloqua does not support Single SAML logout.
42 of 1162
Eloqua does not support SAML 1 authentication.

In either the SAML subject or attributes, you must provide one of the following: User Email,
User Name, or User ID.
All SSO communications occur over HTTPS/SSL channels.
Eloqua currently supports SHA-1 hashes. SHA-256 is under evaluation.
Eloqua requires SAML assertions to be signed using X.509 certificates.
SP certificate, metadata, and URLs are available on demand to admin users in the Eloqua SSO
setup area. These can be both uploaded and downloaded for ease of use.
Eloqua does not yet support auto user provisioning, so the users must first exist in Eloqua for
SSO to work.
Eloqua's ACS URL is https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/acs.
Eloqua's SP entity ID is generated during SSO configuration. Each Eloqua site and IdP
configuration has a unique SP entity ID in the form
https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/idp2/ABCDEFGHI...XYZ.
Eloqua does not use a third-party federation system.
Configuration prerequisites
1. Decide which Eloqua products you want setup with SSO. The most common scenarion is for
sales users to have seamless access to Eloqua Profiler and/or Engage from within the CRM.
2. Talk to your IT team to understand what SSO product you use. Common SSO products include
OKTA, OneLogin, Oracle Identity Federation, and Ping Identity. It is also okay if your IT dept.
wishes you to use a "home grown" SSO product.
3. Ensure you have resources that have administrative access to Eloqua and your SSO product to
work through the configuration.
4. Review the links below and select which one meets your requirements and follow the linked
documentation.
Choosing an appropriate SSO strategy

If you require seamless access to Eloqua Profiler, Engage, or the core platform, refer to one of the
following:
SSO With OKTA
SSO With Salesforce.com
Generic Single Sign-On (SSO) (For use in setting up SSO with any other SSO product)
43 of 1162
If your sales team wants seamless access to Eloqua Profiler / Engage or the core platform and you
want users to automatically be created in Eloqua from CRM. (Only available for Salesforce.com and is
a paid upgrade.), refer to the following:
Salesforce SSO (IDP and User Provisioning)
2.3.2 Configuring Single Sign-On (SSO)

To setup Single Sign-On:
1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Users > Single Sign-On.
2. From the drop-down list select Identity Provider Settings.
3. If your Identity Provider provides the ability to export/download the XML metadata, click
Upload Identity Provider From Metadata and follow the on-screen instructions. Or, to
manually create a new IDP in Eloqua, click Create Identity Provider and fill in the required
fields.
44 of 1162
Select the appropriate Protocol Binding option required by your identity provider for
SAML messages. You have the ability to specify either HttpPost or HttpRedirect.
Set the correct User Identity Location and Mapping Criteria. It is your responsibility to
know the configuration of your SAML IDP and how it passes these details to Eloqua.
Typically the identity location is in the subject. The best identity mapping value to use is
Email Address. User name can be selected, but the Eloqua user name must exactly
match the username in your Identity Provider system.
Note: If you have more than one Identity Provider defined in Eloqua, be sure to
check off the default IDP (the one to use) so the system knows which IDP to use
when making or receiving requests.
4. Click Save.
5. Click the name of the Identity Provider you have configured to open it in view mode (not edit
mode).
6. Click Download to download the IDP. This will produce a metadata xml file. You now need to
upload this file into your Identity Provider system as a Service Provider. This process varies
depending on the SSO vendor you are using.
7. While viewing the Identity Provider you have configured, click the link under Service Provider
45 of 1162
Certificate.
8. Download the certificate and upload into your SSO vendor system.
9. To test that your setup has been successfully completed, navigate to login.eloqua.com and
click Sign in using another account. Enter your company name and press Enter. This should
redirect you to your SSO vendor's IDP login page. If your browser already has a SAML session
with your provider, then you will be logged in directly to Eloqua.
2.3.3 Configuring SSO with OKTA

This guide explains how to seamlessly access the Eloqua application or Eloqua Sales tools through
OKTA. Configuration is needed in both Eloqua and OKTA so it will require users with admin access in
both systems. SSO integration with OKTA allows for the following:
Configuration
The high level configuration steps are as follows:
1. Configure OKTA
2. Configure Eloqua
3. Test the configuration
Step 1: Configuring OKTA

1. Navigate to Administration > Applications > Add Application.
2. Search for Template SAML 2.0 App and select it.
46 of 1162
3. Populate the fields in the template using the values below:
Application label = define your own name for this app

Post Back URL = https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/acs
Force Authentication = (unchecked)
Name ID Format = EmailAddress
Recipient = https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/acs
Audience Restriction = www.example.com (we will come back and fill this in later)
authnContextClassRef = Unspecified
47 of 1162
Destination = https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/acs
Response = Signed
Assertion = Signed
Request = Uncompressed
Default Relay State = (empty)
Attribute Statements = (empty)
Group Name = (empty)
Group filter = (empty)
Application Visibility = (both unchecked)
4. Click Next.
5. Select which users will have access to the service provider.
6. Click Next and then click Done.

7. Select the Sign On tab and click the link SAML 2.0 setup instructions for Template SAML
2.0 App. Scroll down to step 4, labeled Provide the following IDP metadata to your SP
provider. Save the code in this text box as a .xml file to your hard drive (via copy-paste to a text
editor).
48 of 1162
Step 2: Configuring Eloqua

1. Navigate to Setup > User Management > Single Sign-On > Identity Provider Settings.
2. Click Upload Identity Provider From Metadata and upload the .xml file you saved in the
previous section from OKTA. Give the IDP a name and click Save.
3. Once saved, click to edit the Identity Provider you just created. Set the User Identity Mapping to
Assertion contains the Email Address from the User object and click Save.
49 of 1162
4. From the Identity Provider Details, copy the Service Provider Entity URL. You will need this
URL in the next step.
Inside OKTA
1. Navigate to Administration > Applications Tab > Click name of your SAML template >
Select the General Tab > Click Edit
2. Paste the Service Provider Entity URL you copied from Eloqua into the Audience Restriction
URL in OKTA.
3. Click Save.
Step 3: Testing the Configuration

1. Log in to OKTA with a user that has a corresponding user in Eloqua with the same email
address.
2. Click the SAML 2 template for Eloqua that you just configured.
3. A new browser tab should open and your user should be auto logged into Eloqua.
2.3.4 Configuring SSO with Salesforce

This document walks through setting up Single Sign-On (SSO) between Eloqua and Salesforce, using
Salesforce as the Identity Provider. It will cover setting up the SSO for the Eloqua platform and SSO
for Eloqua Profiler and/or Engage embedded with Salesforce. The difference between this type of SSO
and Salesforce SSO (IDP and User Provisioning) - Configuration Guide is the referenced type of SSO
includes the automatic provisioning of users in Eloqua from Salesforce. If you are new to SSO, it is
recommended to follow the guide below and continue creating users as you have been to date.
1. Step 1: Setup SSOIdentify Provider in Salesforce
2. Step 2: Setup SSO Identify Provider in Eloqua
3. Step 3: Setup SAMLin Salesforce
4. Step 4: Test the single Sign on
50 of 1162
Step 1: Setting up SSO in Salesforce
To setup SSO Identify Provider in Salesforce:

1. Login to your Salesforce instance and click the down arrow next to your name at the top of the
Salesforce page. Click Setup.
2. In the left-hand pane, navigate to Administration Setup > Security Controls > Identity
Provider.
3. Navigate to Identity Provider Setup > Download Metadata (NOTE: You must have
configured a Salesforce sub domain for your organization before using Salesforce as an Identity
Provider.)
4. Save the metadata file to a location of your choosing.
Step 2: Setting up SSOIdentify Provider in Eloqua
To Setup SSO in Eloqua:

1. Navigate to to Settings > Setup > Users.
2. Select Single Sign-On > Identity Provider Settings from the links at the top of the application
window.
51 of 1162
3. Select Identity Providers > Upload Identity Provider From Metadata.
4. Enter a name for the identity provider, select the metadata file downloaded from
Salesforce.com, and click Save.
52 of 1162
Note: SSO is now configured to take the Salesforce.com user's username and map it to
an Eloqua user's username. However, Salesforce.com usernames must be in the form
of an email address, while Eloqua usernames must not contain special characters
including the '@' character. In order for SSO to work, we must configure it to take the
Salesforce.com user's email address. You must create a user in Eloqua whose Email
address matches the Email address of the Salesforce user.
5. Copy the Service Provider Entity and ACS URL to your computer's clipboard.
53 of 1162
6. Click Edit in the Identity Provider Details screen to edit the Identity Provider you just saved
above.
7. Select The user identity is located in an assertion attribute value.
8. Enter email in the field The name of the attribute that contains the user identity.
9. For the User Identity Mapping, select Assertion contains the Email Address from the User
object.
10. Click Save.
11. On the Identity Provider Details screen, click on the link shown for the Service Provider
Certificate.
12. Click to download the certificate and save to disk.
54 of 1162
Step 3: Configuring SAML in Salesforce
To create a SAML-enabled Web App in Salesforce:

1. In Salesforce, navigate to App Setup > Create > Apps.
2. Scroll to the bottom of the Salesforce window and in the Connected Apps section, click New.
3. In the Basic Information section, enter the desired name for the Connected App Name.
Salesforce automatically assigns an API Name, however you can change this to something
other than the default, if desired.
4. Scroll to the App Settings section and select Enable SAML.
5. Populate the Entity Id and ACS URL with the values saved in Step 9 above.
6. Also in the App Settings section in Salesforce, check the Service Provider Certificate box
and upload the Eloqua certificate downloaded from Step 11 of the wizard by clicking Browse
and navigating to the location where your certificate was saved.
7. Click Save.
To associate a profile with your app:
55 of 1162
1. In Salesforce, navigate to Administration Setup > Manage Apps > Connected Apps.
2. Select the app that you created in the previous section.
3. In the Profiles section, select Manage Profiles.
4. Select the appropriate profile(s) for the user(s) who should have access to this application.
5. Click Save.
Note: Users can now log in to the Eloqua platform using their Salesforce credentials. If they are
already logged in to Salesforce, it will be seamless. To test, follow the instructions below.
Step 4: Testing the single sign on
To test the single sign on:

1. Navigate to Login.eloqua.com and click Use Another Account.
2. Enter your Company name and click Sign In.
3. If you are already authenticated with Salesforce, you will be logged in to Eloqua. If not, you will
be redirected to enter your Salesforce user credentials. Once you click Log in to Salesforce,
you will be logged in to Eloqua.
2.3.5 Configuring SSOwith Salesforce (IDP and User Provisioning)

Important: You must contact Eloqua Product Support to request this feature to be enabled in
your Eloqua instance, otherwise you will be unable to perform the configuration steps.
This document provides a step-by-step walk through for configuring Salesforce.com as the Identity
Provider for Eloqua. Configuration is required for both Eloqua and Salesforce, which can only be done
using Administrator level access to both systems.
The high level configurations steps are as follows:
1. Configure your Salesforce Domain
2. Test the single sign on configuration
3. Map existing Eloqua users to Salesforce users
4. Configure the Eloqua application SSO access from Salesforce
Step 1: Configure Your Salesforce Domain

1. Login to Eloqua as an Administrator and navigate toSettings > Setup > Users. Click on the
Single Sign-On drop down and select Salesforce.com Identity Provider Settings. This will
56 of 1162
start the four-step configuration wizard for deploying Salesforce as the Identity Provider for your
instance of Eloqua.
2. Login to Salesforce.com and navigate to Administration Setup > Security Controls > Identity
Provider.
3. Click Configure a Domain Name and complete the process for creating a Salesforce.com
domain for your organization (this is a one-time process and will not be required if you have
already configured the Domain Name). It is important to educate your Salesforce users to start
using this new Salesforce login URL specific to your organization to take advantage of the SSO
capabilities.
4. Create a SAML-enabled Web App in Salesforce.
5. In Eloqua, from the Service Provider tab, follow the instructions to download the Eloqua
certificate using the link provided in the step.
6. In Salesforce, navigate to App Setup > Create > Apps.
7. Scroll to the bottom of the Salesforce window and in the Connected Apps section, click New.
8. Scroll to the App Settings section and select Enable SAML.
9. The information required to fill out the fields for the new app are provided in Step 2 of the
deployment wizard in Eloqua.
57 of 1162
10. Also in the App Settings section in Salesforce, check the Service Provider Certificate box
and upload the Eloqua certificate downloaded from Step 2 of the wizard by clicking Browse and
navigating to the location where your certificate was saved.
11. Click Save.
To associate a profile with your App:

1. Select the app that you created in the preceding section.
2. In the Profiles section, select Manage Profiles.
3. Select the appropriate profile(s) for the user(s) who should have access to this application.
4. Click Save.
To configure Metadata:
1. In Salesforce, navigate to Administration Setup > Security Controls > Identity Provider.
2. Navigate to Identity Provider Setup > Download Metadata and save to a location of your
choosing.
3. Switch back to Eloqua and in Step 3 of the Deployment Wizard upload the Metadata file from
Salesforce by selecting the XML file you downloaded in step b) and clicking Upload.
4. Click Next Step in the lower-right corner of the window.
To configure User Mapping:

1. Select which Salesforce user Eloqua will use to authenticate with Salesforce. This is typically
the same user configured for your standard Eloqua-Salesforce Integration. It is important that
this user has access to the User Entity and Profile Entity in Salesforce.
2. Click the Test button to verify that this user can authenticate with Salesforce, access the User
entity and access the Profile entity.
58 of 1162
3. Click Save once all three validations are successful.
4. Check Enable Single Sign on using Salesforce.
5. Under Eloqua Security Mapping, specify a Salesforce User Profile and check the box to grant
users with that Salesforce User Profile access to Eloqua.
6. In order to specify what level of access a Salesforce user has in Eloqua, you must map
59 of 1162
Salesforce User Profiles to a corresponding Eloqua Security Group. Under Eloqua Security
Groups, select the Eloqua Security Group(s) the corresponding Salesforce User Profile will
have access to. Click Add. One Salesforce User Profile can be granted access to many
Eloqua Security Groups. In the example below, Users with the Salesforce Profile selected
above (Authenticated Website) will be assigned to both the Customer Administrator and
Active Users "Sales security groups.
7. Click Save.
Step 2: Testing Single Sign-on Configuration

1. Navigate to login.eloqua.com.
2. Click Use Another Account.
60 of 1162
3. Enter the name of your Company.
.
4. Click Sign In.
5. If you are already authenticated with Salesforce, you will be logged in to Eloqua. If not, you will
be redirected to enter your Salesforce user credentials. Once you click Log in to Salesforce,
you will be logged in to Eloqua.
61 of 1162
6. To verify that a user was created in Eloqua for this account, navigate to Settings > Setup >
Usersand search for the user using the Email address registered with Salesforce.
Step 3: Mapping Existing Eloqua Users to Salesforce Users

This section explains how to map existing Eloqua users to their corresponding Salesforce User in order
for them to be managed by Salesforce.
To map a single user:

1. Login to Eloqua and navigate to Settings > Setup > Users.
2. Select the specific user you wish to map and scroll down to the Salesforce Details section.
3. Enter the 18 digit Salesforce User ID for this user and click Link To Salesforce.
To map users in bulk:

1. Login to Eloqua and navigate to Settings > Setup > Users.
2. Export a list of all Eloqua users by clicking Users > Download Users > Export > Export to
CSV or Export to Excel.
3. Open the file on your computer and find the CRMUsername Column.
4. Populate this column with the 18 digit Salesforce user IDs for each user.
5. Save your changes and update the users in Eloqua by navigating to User Management >
Users > Upload Users and completing the wizard.
6. To complete the mapping, you must contact the Eloqua Product Support in order to bulk link the
Eloqua users to their corresponding Salesforce users.
Step 4: Configure Eloqua application SSO access from Salesforce

This section describes how to configure accessing the Eloqua application from within Salesforce
without having to enter an Eloqua user name and password. There are multiple implementation options
to choose from depending on your preferred user experience. The steps below will enable the user to
use SSO for logging in to Eloqua via a new Salesforce Tab with the application embedded inside
Salesforce.
62 of 1162
1. In Salesforce, navigate to Administration Setup > Manage Apps > Connected Apps.
2. Select the app that you created in Section 2 above.
3. Copy the IdP-Initiated Login URL to the clipboard.
4. Navigate to App Setup > Create > Tabs and begin the wizard to create a new Salesforce Tab.
5. Configure the tab to your preference, but ensure on Step 1 the Tab Layout is Full-page width
and on Step 2, the Tab Type is URL.
6. On the final step of the wizard, paste the IdP-Initiated Login URL you copied from the Service
Provider setup into the Button or Link URL section.
7. You have now configured a new Salesforce tab to launch Eloqua seamlessly from within
Salesforce. As mentioned previously, you may wish to implement this URL for the SSO using
an alternative method, for example using a Salesforce Visualforce page or to open in a new
browser tab.
2.4 HIPAA
The Oracle Eloqua HIPAAAdvanced Data Security Add-On Cloud Service (that is, the HIPAAadd-on)
enables marketers to interact directly with healthcare consumers in a secure and compliant way.
Note: The HIPAA add-on is included in some industry specific trims. The add-on is also
available for all Eloqua trims(Basic, Standard and Enterprise). Contact your account
representative for more information.
What is HIPAA?
The Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996 (HIPAA)was enacted by the United
States Congress and signed by President Bill Clinton. HIPAAconsists of two parts called Titles. Title
Iregulates the limits that insurance companies can place on insuring people with pre-existing
conditions, the continuation of healthcare services for a person who loses his or job, and other
insurance-related rights.
Title II was created to ensure the privacy and security of the transmission of personal identifiable
information related to a person's medical history and health records. HIPAAensures that there are
severe consequences to companies who violate the stipulations of this Act.
Protected Health Information (PHI)is the core concept behind using the HIPAA-compliant add-on.
Contacts must be certain that their data is not accessible to anyone other than the medical
organization requesting it, and only to those within the organization who have the required permissions
for that access. More information on PHIand how it relates to HIPAA can be found on the
HIPAAwebsite at the HIPAA PHI Discussion.
63 of 1162
The Oracle Eloqua HIPAAAdd-on Secure Communications Process

In order for marketers to be compliant with HIPAA regulations, interactions with contacts follow a strict
path that assures security throughout the process.
HIPAA Opt-In Process

The following diagram illustrates the HIPAAopt-in process:
Here is a detailed outline of the interaction between Eloqua and contacts:

1. The contact opts-in to receive secure content, by submitting a form for instance.
Important: To support HIPAA compliance, users must specifically opt-inand be

subscribed to the HIPAACommunications group. For more information, refer to the
whitepaper titled "The HIPAA-Compliant Application" by Andrew Hicks on
http://www.coalfire.com.
64 of 1162
2. Eloqua subscribes the contact to the HIPAA email group. A temporary access token is
automatically created for the contact, which is stored encrypted in the Contact Database in
Eloqua and mapped directly to this contact.
3. Eloqua periodicallyapproximately every 5 minutespolls the HIPAAemail group for newly
opted-in contacts. When a new opt-in contact is identified, the contact is automatically sent a
Welcome email that includes a link to the set password page.
Note: The Welcome email is not associated with the HIPAAemail group because it
does not contain secure content.
4. The contact opens the Welcome email and clicks the Set Password link.
5. Eloqua displays the Set Password landing page.
6. The contact submits their desired password on the Set Password page.
7. Eloqua verifies the password:
If the password is set correctly, Eloqua displays the Password Set Successful Landing
Page. The contact can now access secure content from their personal secure portal.
If the password is not set correctly, Eloqua displays the Set Password Failure Landing
Page.
HIPAA Secure Content Communication Process

The following diagram illustrates the HIPAA communication process that is applicable after a contact
has opted-in:
65 of 1162
Here is a detailed outline of the interaction between Eloqua and contacts:

1. When secure content needs to be communicated to the contact, Eloqua sends a notification
email to the contact notifying them about the new message. This notification email typically
contains a link to the login page contacts can also navigate to the login page directly.
Note: The notification email is not associated with the HIPAAemail group because it
does not contain secure content.
2. The contact clicks the login link in the notification email, or navigates to the login page directly.
3. Eloqua displays the login page.
4. The contact submits their username and password on the login page.
If the credentials are correct, a landing page (containing the secure content) is displayed
to the contact.
If the credentials are incorrect or if an error occurs, an authentication failure landing page
is displayed.
66 of 1162
Roles (Personas)
There are a few roles associated with the installation, configuration, management (that is,
administration), and usage of the Oracle Eloqua HIPAAAdvanced Data Security Add-on Cloud
Service:
Customer Administrator
Oracle Eloqua User (Marketer) Campaign Manager
Contacts
Note: In addition, there is an internal Oracle Eloqua Provisioning team that is responsible for
enabling the Add-on in your Eloqua instance as a prerequisite for your portion of the
implementation.
Customer Administrator Responsibilities and Tasks

If you are a member of the Customer Administrator Security Group in Eloqua, you have the ability to
perform the following steps in the configuration of your HIPAAenvironment:
Configure the Secure Communications application.
Create a Secure Microsite certificate.
Manage membership to the ePHI Security Group that is created by default during the installation
of the HIPAA add-on, and membership in that group is required in order to view any contact or
account data.
Create segments in the case that Marketers do not have access to ePHI group, the customer
administrator may create customer segments to be used by marketers in their campaigns.
Create a set of test contacts visible to marketers who need to create segments and campaigns
but do not have access to the ePHI group.
Execute Insight Reports.
Marketing User (Campaign Manager) Responsibilities and Tasks

AMarketing User in a HIPAAenvironment in Oracle Eloqua typically does not have visibility to any
contact records that contain PIIor PHI. Marketing users have the following rights and responsibilities:
Oracle Eloqua Customer Administratorscreate the Emails, Landing Pages and other assets for
use in HIPAA-compliant campaigns. In order for your environment and campaigns to be HIPAA-
67 of 1162
compliant, a user must create a group of assets that contain specific content.
Note: Eloqua offers an industry solution for Life Sciences Direct to Consumer marketing
that contains best practice campaign workflows and assets to support HIPAA compliant
marketing. Contact your account manager for more information.
Create campaigns.
Run Operational Reports via the Action Menu on the Campaign Canvas.
Contacts
Contacts are your target audience for email communications.Contacts have secure access to their
PHI and must log in to your HIPAAsite via secure landing pages before being to access their data.
Oracle Eloqua and HIPAA

The Oracle Eloqua HIPAA Advanced Data Security Add-on Cloud Service is designed to enable your
organization to develop marketing assets and campaigns that follow the requirements of the latest
revisions of HIPAAregulations (http://www.hhs.gov/news/press/2013pres/01/20130117b.html). This
HIPAA add-on includes specific checkpoints that safeguard and enable this compliance.
1. Authenticate Users and Authorize User Access - Electronic Protected Health Information
(ePHI) applications must employ authentication mechanisms capable of validating user identity
prior to the user accessing application resources (authentication).
The Eloqua application and HIPAA add-on provides methods of validating user identity prior to
the user accessing application resources. The Eloqua application has the capability to create,
modify, and deactivate or remove contacts and user IDs from the system. The Eloqua
application also has authentication mechanisms capable of validating user identity prior to the
user accessing application resources. All email contacts who access the Secure
Communications portal must first be subscribed to secure communications and specify the
correct username and password.
ePHI applications should also be capable of assigning user rights and privileges that are aligned
to sensitive functions (authorization), and restrict the user's access to the minimum necessary
application functionality, resources and data they need to perform their duties.
During HIPAA add-on provisioning, a new ePHI security group and label marking is created and
only the Customer Administrator has access to this group. Membership in the ePHI Security
Group in Eloqua is required for viewing contact and account data related to the HIPAAsubmitted data. Marketing users, by default, are denied rights from viewing any contact
Personally Identifiable Information (PII)or PHI data unless they are explicitly added to the ePHI
Security Group.
68 of 1162
2. Fortify Safeguards Over User Accounts - When using password authentication, special controls
must be implemented in an ePHI application to prevent application security compromises due to
weak password policies.
During provisioning of the HIPAA add-on the Eloqua password policy is applied by default to all
HIPAA sites. In addition, the HIPAA add-on limits the password reset attempts, which prevent
third party denial-of-service attacks. It also requires a minimum password complexity to ensure
no weak passwords are allowed to view secure content. The HIPAA add-on service also limits
the number of simultaneous sessions a Secure Communications user may sustain within the
application by disabling ability to share the secure content URL with another user.
3. Maintain Accountable Access to Sensitive Information - Organizations must implement strong
user account management processes to maintain the validity of application access lists and
prevent access to sensitive information by unauthorized individuals. These processes seek to
ensure that the minimum necessary, "business need-to-know," and "least possible privilege"
principles are rigorously observed.
The HIPAA add-on will assist organizations in meeting this control in multiple ways:
Only authorized users can access PII and PHI of contacts. Users are only authorized if
they are part of the ePHI security group. By default, marketing users are denied access
to all healthcare contacts that are part of the HIPAA email group.
Contacts cannot receive emails sent as part of the HIPAA email group unless they have
specifically opted-in or subscribed to the group via a Form Submission or other means.
Logs are available that provide audit trails on the following activities: access to contacts,
accounts in the Eloqua system, access to contacts and accounts via data export, Email
Security Group subscriptions and unsubscriptions, and access to contact and account
data via Cloud API components. All contact access and changes to email group
members are tracked by the application.
Contact fields can be marked as Protected, preventing unauthorized viewing or access
via Web Data Lookups. Web Data Lookups allow for dynamically pulling data from
Eloqua by way of Javascript or Form default values. Fields marked as Protected will not
be accessible by way of Web Data Lookups.
Operational reports that access contacts are limited to marketing users who have
access to ePHI groups.
Insight reports that access contact and account data are disabled for all marketing users.
4. Encrypt Sensitive Information at Rest and in Flight ePHI applications implement effective
cryptography technologies to ensure the continued integrity and confidentiality of its sensitive
69 of 1162
information. This requires implementation of methods to encrypt and decrypt ePHI at rest and in
flight.
The HIPAA add-on meets this control in multiple ways:
Email communications over a secure channel. A new Secure Communications
application has been created for use with the HIPAA add-on in your Eloqua instance. The
Secure Communications application leverages new email group functionality for explicit
opt in and send emails via secure channel. . All email communications are displayed in
secure landing pages with SSL encryption, secure microsites that use an SSL certificate
provide an extra layer of data security.
PII and PHI are encrypted while being held temporarily in a secure area before being
imported or exported during a bulk operation.
PII and PHI are encrypted in the database.
5. Fortify applications for secure networks, creating audit trails and actionable event information.
ePHI application need to ensure a secure network configuration has been deployed to protect
the transmission and storage of sensitive information. They also need to create audit trails and
actionable event information
Changes to the security group membership are logged so there is an audit trail on membership
access. Audit logs include for application access, contact access, and security group access
are included with the HIPAA add-on. Cloud security operations creates event logs reports and
periodically monitors the event logs for possible security breaches.
2.4.1 Configuring the HIPAA add-On

Configuration prerequisites:
The HIPAA add-on must first be enabled by Oracle.
You must have a secure microsite configured in your Eloqua environment.
You must be an experienced Eloqua user with the knowledge and experience necessary to
create assets.
The configuration will take approximately three hours to complete. This does not include
additional time necessary to customize the look and feel of the assets.
High level configuration steps:
70 of 1162
1. Verify the HIPAA add-on is installed correctly

2. Create the required assets
3. Configure the HIPAAsecure communication application (Customer Administrator)
4. Creating a secure content campaign
5. Verify the HIPAA configuration (Customer Administrator)
6. (optional) Apply optional configurations
Step 1: Verifying the HIPAA Add-On is enabled

Prior to beginning the configuration and installation of the HIPAAadd-on, please perform the steps
below to ensure the HIPAA add-on is enabled in your environment and that all provisioning and
database requirements are met.
1. Verify that the HIPAA Communications email group has been created.
a. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Email Groups.
b. Check to ensure that two HIPAACommunications email group have been created
(secure and not secure).
2. Verify that the ePHI security group has been created successfully during your HIPAA add-on
installation.
a. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Users, then click the Groups tab on the left-side pane,
ePHI security group should be listed.
b. Click the drop-down to view security group details.
3. Verify that the HIPAA contact category and ePHI Labels are enabled, by performing the
following steps:
a. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Users.
b. Click Contact Security and select Manage Labels.
c. Verify that the HIPAA category is shown as the available category.
d. Click Edit next to the name of the HIPAA category.
e. In the pop-up dialog box, verify that ePHI is listed as the label that will be applied to users
in the corresponding Security Group.
71 of 1162
Important: If the changes outlined above are not reflected in your environment, do not continue
with the configuration of the add-on. Contact your account representative to inquire about the
status of your add-on deployment.
Step 2: Creating the required assets

Note: This step can be performed by the Customer Administrator or Marketing User.
The HIPAA add-on is made up of many components. In order for a HIPAA-enabled campaign to be
successful and to adhere to regulatory requirements, users must create assets that contain elements
approved as part of the HIPAAadd-on. Templates are provided with the Oracle Eloqua Marketing for
Life Sciences Consumers Cloud Service, but are not included by default with the HIPAA add-on.
Please contact your account representative to learn more about this offering that will ensure your
adherence to all corresponding requirements.
After the assets are created, your users can customize the look and feel of the content rendered by the
HIPAA add-on. For more information, refer to the section about styling the application. Depending on
the type of content that is rendered by the Cloud Content services, it is best to design your pages such
that the HTML that is displayed fits contextually with the rest of the page.
Important: To ensure a smooth configuration, we recommend creating the assets in the order
specified below to ensure that all dependencies are created.
The following are the required assets that must be created in your Eloqua instance before making use
of the secure email portal:
Required Asset
Type
Description
Set Password Landing This page is rendered if the contact sets his or her password
Success
Page
successfully for the first time.
Set Password Failure
Landing This page is displayed for failures that occur when the contact attempts
Page
to set his or her password for the first time.
HIPAA
Landing
Page
Reset Password Landing
Request - Success Page
HIPAA
Reset Password
Landing
Request
Page
Set Password
Reset Password
Secure Content -
This page contains the Set Password Widget, which renders a form that
contacts can use to set a password for the first time.
This page is displayed after a contact successfully requests to change

his or her password.
This landing page contains the Reset Password Widget, which renders a
form that contacts can use to specify their email address and request a
password reset.
Email sent to contacts to reset their password. This email is sent to an
Email email group without the Require Opt in or Use Secure channel flags
enabled
Landing This landing page is displayed when a user logs in successfully but there
72 of 1162
Required Asset
Type
Description
Default Content
Page
is no secure content waiting for the contact.
Defines the Landing Page to render if a failure occurs when rendering
Secure Content - Landing
secure content. For example if a contact attempts to access this page
Failure
Page
without first providing credentials.
HIPAA This landing page contains the Secure Content Cloud Service in order to
Secure Content Landing display the secure content (that is, the most recent HIPAA
Container
Page
Communication).
Email sent to the HIPAA Communications email group which has the
Secure Content Require Opt in or Use Secure channel flags enabled. This email will not
HIPAA
Email be sent via SMTP. The contents of the email will be held for pickup and
Communication
displayed inside a secure landing page after a contact clicks on a link in
the Secure Content - Notification email.
Email sent to contacts informing them they have secure content with a
Secure Content Email link to login and view secure content. This email is sent to an email group
Notification
without the Require Opt in or Use Secure channel flags enabled.
This landing page renders the Login Form Widget in which contacts must
use to access their secure content from a Landing Page. Contacts are
HIPAA
required to login in order to access their secure content. The Login Form
Login
Landing
can be added to any Landing Page hosted on a Secure Microsite. This
Page
Form is a simple Form with User Name and Password, as well as a
Submit button, however you can customize it as needed.
When contacts subscribe to HIPAA Communications, they are
automatically delivered a Welcome Email with a link to set their
password. A windows service (HIPAA Management Service)
periodically checks for contacts that have subscribed to HIPAA
Welcome Email
Email Communications and automatically delivers an email containing the
Access Token Cloud Content Service. The Access Token Email service
provides a link where contacts can go to Set Password. This email is
sent to an email group without the Require Opt in or Use Secure channel
flags enabled
Set Password - Success (Landing Page)
This page is rendered after the contact sets his or her password successfully for the first time.
To create a Set Password - Success landing page:

1. Create a new landing page.
2. Add content so the user understands the password was set successfully.
3. Specify an appropriate name for your landing page (example: LandingPage_
SetPasswordSuccess).
4. Save your landing page.
73 of 1162
Set Password - Success (Landing Page) Example
Set Password - Failure (Landing Page)
This Landing Page is used for failures that occur when the contact attempts to set his or her password.
The failure can be due to one of several reasons, including but not limited to connection timeouts,
required fields missing data, etc.
To create a Set Password Failure landing page:

2. Add content so the user understands the password was not set successfully on the Set
Password landing page.
SetPasswordFailure).
Set Password - Failure (Landing Page) Example
Set Password (Landing Page)
This service is responsible for rendering a form that contacts can use to set their passwords.
Note: This service requires a valid access token and should only be accessed via the
Welcome Email (Access Token Email).
To create the Set Password landing page:
74 of 1162

2. Add the Set Password Widget to the landing page.
a. Double-click Cloud Content on the left panel.
b. Drag the Set Password Widget from the Cloud Content toolbar onto the canvas.
3. Double-click the Set Password Widget on the canvas to access the configuration page:
4. Specify the correct values for the Set Password widget configuration options:
Landing Page for Successful Authentication: Landing page that is rendered if the
contacts password was successfully reset.
Landing Page for Failed Authentication: Landing page that is rendered if an error
occurs while setting the password.
Password Field Label: Defines the text that appears for the password label.
Password Confirm Field Label: Defines the text that appears for the password
confirmation label.
Submit Button Label: Defines the text that appears on the submit button.
Click Save and then click X to close the Cloud Content Configuration dialog box.
5. Specify an appropriate name for your landing page (example: LandingPage_SetPassword).
75 of 1162
Set Password (Landing Page)Example
The following is an example of the Set Password widget (i.e. form) after it is rendered on the landing
page:
Reset Password Request - Success (Landing Page)
Upon successfully requesting the link to reset the password, a contact is redirected to this landing
page. This landing page is only rendered if the request to reset password was successful. The content
on this page should inform the contact that their request was successfully submitted.
To create the Reset Password Request Success landing page:

2. Add content to the landing page so the user understands the password reset was successful
and that they will receive an email shortly.
3. Specify a microsite.
ResetPasswordRequestSuccess).
5. Save the landing page.
Reset Password Request - Success (Landing Page) Example
76 of 1162
Reset Password Request (Landing Page)
This landing page contains the Reset Password widget, which cloud content service. This service is
responsible for rendering a form that contacts can use to reset their password. On submission, the
form will deliver the Welcome Email (Access Token Email), containing a link where the contact can set
their password.
To create the Reset Password Request landing page:

2. Add the Password Reset widget to the landing page.
b. Drag the Password Reset widget from the Cloud Content toolbar onto the canvas.
3. Double-click the widget on the canvas to access the configuration page:
4. Specify the correct values for the following Reset Password widget configuration option:
Landing Page on Success: Defines the reset password request success landing page
that is displayed if the request to reset password is successful.
Password Reset email: Defines the reset password email that is sent to the user to
facilitate the password reset (example: Email_ResetPassword).
77 of 1162
5. Specify a microsite.
ResetPasswordRequest).
Reset Password Request (Landing Page) Example
When displayed to the user, the Reset Password widget (i.e. form) portion of the landing page looks
like this:
Reset Password (Email)
This email is sent to contacts to reset their password. This email is sent to an email group without the
Require Opt In or Use Secure channel options enabled.
To create the Reset Password email:

1. Create a new email.
2. Add the Access Token Email to the landing page by performing the following steps:
b. Drag the Access Token Email from the Cloud Content toolbar onto the canvas.
78 of 1162
4. Specify the correct values for the following Access Reset Password widget configuration
option:
Landing Page for Set Password Form: Defines the set password landing page that is
displayed so the user can reset the password.
Set Password Link Text: Defines the text for the set password link.
5. Choose an email group that does not have the Require Opt in or Use Secure channel options
enabled.
6. Specify an appropriate name for your email (example: Email_ResetPassword)
7. Save your email.
Reset Password (Email) Example
Secure Content - Default Content (Landing Page)
This landing page is displayed when a user logs in successfully but there is no secure content waiting
for the contact.
This will act as a place holder until there is some secure content for the contact.
79 of 1162
To create a Secure Content - Default Content landing page:

2. Add appropriate content so the user understands there are no secure messages waiting.
SecureContentDefaultContent)
Secure Content - Default Content (Landing Page) Example
Secure Content - Failure (Landing Page)
Defines the Landing Page to render if a failure occurs when rendering secure content. For example if a
contact attempts to access this page without first providing credentials.
To create a Secure Content - Failure landing page:

2. Add content so the user understands there was an issue rendering the secure content.
3. (optional) Add a link to the reset password request landing page so the user can easily request a
password change, if required.
SecureContentFailure).
Secure Content - Failure (Landing Page) Example
80 of 1162
Secure Content - Container (Landing Page)
The Secure Content landing page must contain a Secure Content Widget. The Secure Content Widget
is a Cloud Service that renders the secure content (that is, most recent HIPAA Communication) on the
landing page.
Note: This page requires a valid temporary access token and should be accessed by the Login
Form as the Landing Page to render on Success.
To create the Secure Content - Container landing page:

2. Add the Secure Content service to your landing page by performing the following steps:
b. Drag the Secure Content from the Cloud Content toolbar onto the canvas.
4. Specify the correct values for the following Secure Content widget configuration options:
Display Content from the following Email Group: The cloud content service is
responsible for rendering the most recent Email. This option allows you to isolate Emails
that are part of a specific email group, for example the HIPAA Communications group.
81 of 1162
You can also create a new HIPAA email group.

Default Content Landing Page: Defines the landing page to display if there is no
secure content to display (example: LandingPage_SecureContentDefaultContent).
Landing Page on Failure: Defines the landing page to display if there is problem
rendering the secure content.
5. Specify an appropriate name for your landing page (example:LandingPage_
SecureContentContainer)
Secure Content - Container (Landing Page) Example
Secure Content - HIPAA Communication (Email)
Email sent to the HIPAA Communications email group which has the Require Opt in or Use Secure
channel flags enabled. This email will not be sent via SMTP. The contents of the email will be held for
pickup and displayed inside a secure landing page after a contact clicks on a link in the Secure Content
- Notification email.
To create a Secure Content - HIPAA Communication email:

1. Create a new email
2. Add your secure content to the email.
Note:This email is not sent directly to the content. The user will login to view the
secure content contained in this email.
82 of 1162
3. Specify an email subject.

4. Specify a from address.
5. Specify an email group (example: HIPAA Communications).
Important: The selected email group must be a HIPAA email group.
6. Specify an appropriate name for your email (Example: Email_

SecureContentHIPAACommunication).
7. Save your email.
Secure Content - HIPAACommunication (Email) Example
Login (Landing Page)
The Login landing page contains the Login Form Widget. The Login Form Widget is a Cloud Content
Service that allows contacts to login to access their secure content.
Note: The Login Form Widget can be added to any Landing Page hosted on a Secure Microsite.
To create a new Login landing page:

2. Add the Login Form Widget to the landing page by performing the following steps:
b. Drag the Login Form Widget from the Cloud Content toolbar onto the canvas.
83 of 1162
4. Specify the correct values for the following Login Form Widget configuration options:
Landing Page for Password Reset Form: Provides a link to the landing page
containing the password reset form in the event that a contact has forgotten their
password. (Example: LandingPage_PasswordResetRequest)
Landing Page for Successful Authentication: Defines the landing page to render
when a contact successfully logs in (Example: LandingPage_SecureContent).
Note: This is typically set to the landing page that contains the Secure Content
service. However, to provide flexibility, you can choose any landing page.
Landing Page for Failed Authentication: Defines the landing page to display when an
authentication failure occurs. This page is typically defined as the Login Page, and on
failure, an error message is displayed indicating that an error has occurred. For flexibility,
Marketing Users can choose to define any page as the Failure Landing Page. Please
keep in mind that this page should indicate that a failure occurred when trying to
authenticate the contacts credentials. (Example: LandingPage_
SecureContentFailure)
Username Field Label: Defines the text displayed for the username field label.
84 of 1162
Password Field Label: Defines the text that is displayed for the password field label.
Submit Button Label: Defines the text that is displayed for the submit button.
Forgot Password Link Label: Defines the text that is displayed for the forgotton
password link. Users can click this link to access the password reset request page.
Invalid Username or Password Label: Defines the error text that is displayed if a user
enters an invalid username or password.
5. Specify an appropriate name for your landing page (example: LandingPage_Login).
Login (Landing Page) Example
When rendered, the Login Form Widget portion of the landing page looks like this:
Secure Content - Notification (Email)
Email sent to contacts informing them they have secure content with a link to login and view secure
content. This email is sent to an email group without the Require Opt in or Use Secure channel flags
enabled.
To create a Secure Content - Notification email:

2. Add content to the email so the user understands there is a secure message waiting.
3. Include a link to your login landing page so the user can login easily.
85 of 1162

6. Specify an email group.
Important: The selected email group must be NOT be a HIPAA email group.
7. Specify an appropriate name for your email (example: Email_SecureContentNotification).

8. Save your email.
Secure Content - Notification (Email) Example
Welcome Email (Access Token Email)
When a new contact opts-in (that is, the contact subscribes to the HIPAA Communications email
group), the Welcome Email is sent to the user. This email includes a link that directs the user to the set
password landing page. The user can click the link, set a password, and then login to view their secure
communication.
Note: The Oracle Eloqua Platform runs a service in the background that periodically checks for
contacts who have recently opted in. Therefore, after a contact opts in, it can take 5-10 minutes
for the Welcome Email to be sent.
Important: Once created, the email name must be communicated to the Customer
Administrator because it is required in one of the configuration steps.
To create a Welcome email:
86 of 1162

2. Add the appropriate content to the welcome email.
The email text that is placed directly above the cloud content could be: Welcome to
HIPAA Communications
Followed by the HTML that will be rendered by the Cloud Content service: Click here to
set your password
3. Add the Access Token Email to the landing page by performing the following steps:
b. Drag the Access Token Email service from the Cloud Content toolbar onto the canvas.
Note: The Cloud Content service should be contextually placed in the Email, such that
the language flows.
5. Specify the correct values for the following Welcome Email Widget configuration option:
Landing Page for Set Password Form: You must select a landing page that contains
the Set Password widget (i.e. Set Password Landing Page )
Set Password Link Text: Defines the text that is displayed for the link that directs the
user to the set password landing page.
8. Specify an email group.
87 of 1162
Important: The selected email group must NOT be a HIPAA email group.
9. Specify an appropriate name for your email (example: Email_Welcome)

10. Save your email.
Welcome Email Example
Step 3: Configuring the HIPAAsecure communication application

Note: This step must be configured by a Customer Administrator.
The Oracle Eloqua HIPAA Advanced Data Security Add-on Cloud Service, as is the case with any
HIPAA-enabled application, is designed to protect confidential information submitted via the web from
being accessed by unauthorized parties. This section provides information on how the HIPAAadd-on
for Oracle Eloqua enables this protection.
Prior to completing the steps outlined in this document, the Oracle Eloqua Provisioning and Database
Management team must have enabled the HIPAAadd-on for your Eloqua instance, as described in the
Provisioning chapter entitled.
To configure the HIPAA secure communications application:

1. Login to Eloqua.
2. Navigate to Settings > Setup, then click HIPAA Configuration located in the Administration
section.
88 of 1162
The HIPAA Configuration button is only available if your instance of Eloqua includes
this add-on. Contact your account representative if you wish to obtain this add-on.
The HIPAA configuration page looks like this:
3. Specify the correct Welcome Email that was created in a previous configuration step (example:
Email_Welcome).
4. Click Save.
Step 4: Creating a secure content campaign

A campaign must be configured to send your email communications. The campaigns can trigger emails
to be sent to contacts for them to log in and view their secure content. Contacts flow through the
Campaign Steps based on how you create your campaign. While there is no set structure for creating a
campaign which uses secure content delivery, you must adhere to the regulatory requirements for
logins, the delivery of content over secure channels.
To create a campaign for secure content delivery:

1. Create a new campaign.
2. Add a segment to the campaign canvas. Ideally, this segment will include one or two test users.
3. Add your secure content email to the canvas.
4. Add your secure content notification email to the canvas.
5. Add a wait object to the canvas.
6. Connect the objects in the order outlined above.
7. Specify an appropriate name for your campaign (example: Campaign_
HIPAACommunicationTest).
8. Save your campaign.
89 of 1162
Secure Content Campaign Example
Step 5: Verifying the HIPAA add-on configuration

High level verification steps:
1. Verify that the Welcome email is sent and that the password can be set
2. Verify the delivery of the secure content
Verifying that the Welcome email is sent and that the password can be set
1. Subscribe a user to a HIPAA email group (example: HIPAACommunications):
Note: For testing purposes, ensure you subscribe an internal user instead of actual
contacts.
2. Verify the Welcome Email is sent to the user.
Note: It can take up to 5 minutes for the email to be sent to the user.
3. Verify the set password page is displayed when the user clicks the link in the welcome email.
4. Verify the user can successfully set a password on the set password page.
90 of 1162
Verifying the delivery of secure content
1. Activate a test campaign (example: Campaign_HIPAACommunicationTest)
Note: For testing purposes, ensure the segment in your campaign only includes internal
users and not actual contacts.
2. Verify the secure content email is NOT emailed directly to the user.
3. Verify the notification email is sent to the user.
4. Verify the login page is displayed when you click the link contained in the notification email.
5. Verify the secure content email is displayed on the secure content container landing page after
you login successfully.
Step 6: Applying Optional Configurations

Applying Custom Labels
All of the default labels that are used in the HIPAA widgets can be customized from the widget
configuration pages:
Styling the application
The various Cloud Content services provided by the HIPAA application display HTML content within
Eloqua landing pages and emails. The Cloud Content elements each contain unique identifiers that can
be accessed by the hosting asset (Landing Page or Email), such that CSS styles can be applied.
Style Customization Example: Login Form Widget

<form method="POST"
91 of 1162
action="https://devsecure.eloquacorp.com/apps/HIPAA/WebHandler/LoginForm
/HandleLoginRequest">
Username: <input type="text" id="username" name="username" />
<br />
Password: <input type="password" id="password" name="password" />
<br />
<input type="hidden" id="content-service-site-id"
name="content-service-site-id" value="3" />
<input type="hidden" id="content-service-instance-id"
name="content-service-instance-id" value="4a6937b9-b05e-4a1d-9f73faae6f128cd5" />
<p><input type="submit" value="Login" /></p>
<a href="https://lsvertical.test234.com/LP=14">Forgot your
password?</a>
</form>
To access and apply styles to any of the HTML controls, refer to their ID or CSS Class name in your
CSS.
Creating a custom HIPAA email group
You can use the default HIPAA Communications email group, or you can create a new one.
To configure a HIPAAemail group:

1. Navigate to Settings >Setup.
2. Click Email Groups.
3. Create a new email group.
4. Ensure the following options are enabled:
Require opt-in: This setting ensures that HIPAA-secured emails are not sent to
contacts until they have specifically selected to opt-in to this email group, either through
a Form Submission or by your manually Subscribing them to the email group. This
setting is enabled by default on the HIPAA Communications email group and must
remain enabled for HIPAA compliance.
Use secure channel: This setting ensures emails are not sent from Eloqua directly but
instead are marked for processing using a special process. This setting is enabled by
default on the HIPAA Communications email group and must remain enabled for HIPAA
compliance.
5. Choose the appropriate Subscribe confirmation page that will be used to subscribe users to
92 of 1162
the HIPAAemail group.

Note: There are some email group settings (example: Name of the emailgroup As It
Appears to contacts and Description of email group as it appears to contacts (optional))
that are pre-populated and cannot be changed. This is to ensure consistency throughout all
HIPAA-compliant emails.
2.4.2 Using Eloqua with the HIPAA add-on

Warning: Do not delete the HIPAAcategory or the ePHIlabel. These components are required
for any user in your organization who requires access to protected data.
Marketing secure content to contacts

This section describes how to send marketing emails (containing ePHI data) to contacts that have
subscribed to HIPAA Communications.
Since emails containing ePHI data are not delivered, your campaign must send a second email that
informs the contact that there is a message waiting for them in their secure message center.
ePHI Email: This is the email containing PII and PHI data, that is not sent.
Note: This email must be linked to a HIPAA email group (that is, one with
UseSecureChannel = True and Require Opt In = True.
Notification Email: Informs contacts that a message (that is, the ePHIemail) is available for
them in their secure portal
Note: This notification email must be linked to an email group with UseSecureChannel
= False so it can be successfully delivered.
Example Campaign
The following campaign is a common example of how a marketing user would deliver secure content:
93 of 1162
1. Segment Members (Patient List): This is the list of contacts that will receive email.
2. Email (ePHI Content): This is the email containing secure content. These emails MUST be a
member of a HIPAA email group so the email is not delivered directly to the contact via email.
3. Email (Notification Message Awaiting): This email notifies the contact that a message is
awaiting in their secure message center. This email typically contains a link to the login page so
users can login and view the secure content.
Reporting with the HIPAA add-on enabled

Oracle Eloqua provides reporting in two ways:through operational reports directly or through Eloqua
Insight.
For full reporting privileges, a user must be a member of the ePHISecurity Group, which grants them
access to ePHIdata.
Using Operational Reports
Note:You must be a member of the ePHI Security Group to run contact level reports. If you
attempt to run an operational report from a campaign and no data is returned, it is either because
no activity has occurred (the campaign has not yet been activated), or you are not a member of
the ePHISecurity Group.
To run an Operational Report for a Campaign:

1. Navigate to Campaigns >Campaigns.
2. Click Open an Existing Campaign.
94 of 1162
3. Select the Campaign you wish to open from the Chooser, or search for the Campaign by typing
its name in the search field in the top-right corner.
4. Once the Campaign Canvas is open, click the Action Menu (gear icon)in the top-right corner.
5. Select Operational Reports. A list of the available operational reports is displayed in a flyout
menu.
6. Click the name of the operational report you wish to view.
Using Insight Reports
When the HIPAA add-on is enabled, Insight reports are filtered so they do not include any contact or
account information. The user can still see high-level reports such as the number of people who have
opened an email. However, an error is displayed if the user attempts to view a report that contains
contact or account information.
Note:If you have created a custom report prior to your HIPAAinstallation that contains contact
metrics, the report will fail to run as all HIPAAContact Data is hidden in Insight.
When creating custom reports, some filters are disabled in order to protect contact information. For
example, a user will be unable to create custom reports that includes data such as FirstName and
LastName.
The only reports that can be run on a HIPAAcampaign from within Eloqua Insight are the same
Operational Reports as shown in the preceding section. There are no reports or dashboards for
contacts in Eloqua Insight for any user, even if you are a member of the ePHIGroup.
Configuring Password Restrictions

When the HIPAA add-on is first enabled, the HIPAA Security Domain is enabled and used for site-level
access.
You can configure password restrictions using the Password Complexity Configuration located at
Settings > Users > Users > Security Domain Settings > HIPAA.
95 of 1162
Data Protection
Using the ePHI label, customer data is protected from users who do not have this security permission
granted to them. This rule applies to all users except system administrators.
ePHI permissions can be granted at the user level from Settings > Setup > Users > UserSecurity.
HIPAASecurity Groups
One of the roles of a Customer Administrator in any Eloqua instance is to manage security groups.
Security group membership defines what actions users can perform, such as creating, modifying, and
viewing data.
In the case of the HIPAAadd-on, being a member of the Customer Administrator SecurityGroup
allows you to create assets but does not inherently provide the ability to view data submitted securely
96 of 1162
by contacts through Form Submissions from their HIPAAemails. In order to view that ePHIdata,
users must also be a member of the new Security Group called ePHI.
To add an Eloqua User to the ePHISecurity Group:

1. Log in to Eloqua as a Customer Administrator.
2. Navigate to Settings >Setup.
3. Click Users.
4. Click the down-arrow next to the name of the User you wish to assign permissions to the
ePHISecurity Group.
5. Click Edit User Settings.
6. On the right-hand pane, scroll to the Security Groups section. Select ePHIfrom the list of All
Security Groups on the left and click the >arrow to move it to the Selected Security Groups
column.
7. Click Save. The User is now a member of the ePHISecurity Group and can see and report on
data submitted by contacts.
To confirm ePHIaccess rights are assigned to a user:

1. Log in to Eloqua as the User to which you want to confirm access rights.
2. Navigate to Contacts >Contacts.
3. In the Search field, type the name of a contact in your contact database and press Enter.
4. If you are certain that the contact exists, the contact record should be listed in the search
results, and you should be able to open the contact record.
5. If the contact record exists but no results are returned, it means that you have either mistyped
the name or you do not have membership in the ePHISecurity Group. If you try to add a contact
that you do not see in the contact list as a result of not having ePHISecurity Group
membership, an error is displayed stating the email address is already in use. However, you
cannot open the record to view the information unless a Customer Administrator adds you to the
ePHIGroup.
HIPAA Email Groups
97 of 1162
After the HIPAA add-on is installed, a new group called HIPAACommunications is automatically
created. You can also create additional HIPAA email groups.
All emails in Eloqua must be associated with an email group. However, emails that contain ePHI data
must be associated with a HIPAAemail group. The HIPAA email groups (example: HIPAA
Communications) are similar to other email groups but always have the following enabled attributes:
UseSecureChannel = True
Require Opt In = True
2.5 Microsites
A microsite is a miniature website, often dedicated to a specific campaign, product, or keyword. The
purpose is to give a visitor (whether channeled through your website, social media assets, emails,
SMS, or other channels) precise information that they can use to better understand your products and
services or to make a buying decision. There are three types of microsites: basic, secure and
authenticated. Each landing page that you create in Eloqua must have an associated microsite.
98 of 1162
A microsite can be one page or a number of pages. Each page could also contain personalization so
that details specific to the viewer (such as the First Name) are reflected on the page using field
merges.
Example: Oracle Eloqua's ModernMarketingTour site, http://events.eloqua.com/MMT, is a

microsite:it is separate from theOracle Eloqua corporate website, but is consistently branded.
TheModernMarketingTour microsite enables Eloqua to group content specifically related to its
Modern Marketing Tour into one area, making it easier to track visitors that are interested in
theModern MarketingTour, track conversions, and so on.
Types of Microsites
A basic microsite is the most straightforward type of microsite: a simple http:// domain. You can
register your own domain, use an existing domain, or register a new domain using Eloqua's
built-in domain registration tool. Basic microsites are ideal in most contexts, where no
sensistive data will be transmitted between the browser and the web server. The Modern
Marketing Tour site is a basic microsite.
A secure microsite is similar to a basic microsite, but it uses SSL(Secure Sockets Layer)to
encrypt the data that is passed between a visitor's browser, and the web server. Normally, data
sent between the browser and the webserver is transmitted in plain text. SSLencypts the data
so it cannot be intercepted by a third party, making it ideal for microsites that will involve the
exchange of sensitive information, like passwords.
Learn more about secure microsites.
An authenticatedmicrosite is a secure microsite that requires visitors to log in before they can
view the site's content. Authenticated microsites use SSL protocol to encrypt the connection
between the browser and the web server, and user credentials to restrict access. These
security features allow you to create microsites that include sensitive information, or simply
information that you want to restrict to a specific audience.
2.5.1 Creating basic microsites

99 of 1162
When you create a new microsite, you need to configure a subdomain for your website, and set up the
microsite in Eloqua.
To create a subdomain on your website:

1. Determine your Eloqua site ID by navigating to Settings>Setup>Company Defaults. The
SiteID is listed - in the following example, the SiteIDis 1231231234.
2. Go to the site where you normally configure your website's domain settings and create a new
subdomain. This will be the domain for your microsite. For If your company website was
example.com, your subdomain could be welcome.example.com, for example.
3. Set the CNAME record to s[site id].t.en25.com. For the example above, the
CNAMe record would point to s1231231234.t.en25.com.
If you cannot edit the CNAME record for your domain, update your domains A record to point to
the Eloqua IPaddress for your Eloqua instance.The possibleIPs are summarized in the
following table:
URL base after you have successfully logged into Eloqua
POD
IPAddress
secure.eloqua.com
209.167.231.15
www02.secure.eloqua.com
209.167.231.23
secure.p03.eloqua.com
142.0.160.10
Your subdomain should now be properly configured, and you can proceed to set up your microsite in
Eloqua.
To register a new microsite in Eloqua:

1. Navigate to Settings >Setup. Choose Microsites in the Websites area. The Microsite Setup
screen opens.
100 of 1162
The left-hand column lists all of your microsites, and the right-hand pane allows you to edit the
currently-selected microsite.
2. Click Add. A new microsite, 'Untitled Microsite' will be listed in the left-hand area.
3. Under General, name the microsite. This name is only used for reference within Eloqua.
4. Add your domain
a. Click Add Domain. You will now be able to enter a domain name in the DomainList
b. Type in your subdomain's base URL. Do not include a leading http://
c. Click Save.
Your microsite is now configured.
The landing pages associated with each microsite are listed in the LandingPages pane of theMicrosite
Setup screen.
You can now associate landing pages with the microsite:
101 of 1162
2.5.2 Secure microsites

A secure microsite is similar to a basic microsite, but it uses SSL(Secure Sockets Layer)to encrypt
the data that is passed between a visitor's browser, and the web server. Normally, data sent between
the browser and the webserver is transmitted in plain text. SSLencypts the data so it cannot be
intercepted by a third party, making it ideal for microsites that will involve the exchange of sensitive
information, like passwords.
Note: If this feature is not included in your Eloqua solution by default, contact your account
representative to obtain this add-on.
You use SSL-enabled websites every day. Any https:// domain is using SSLto encrypt your
connection. Most modern web browsers include a visual indicator showing that the connection is
secure. For example, Eloqua's login page uses SSL, as indicated by the green lock symbol, and
OracleCorporation (US) information in the left side of the URL bar:
Setting up a secure microsite is similar to a basic microsite, but does require acquiring and configuring
an SSLcertification. Secure Microsites are available as an add-on for all Eloqua packages.
Creating secure microsites

Note: Secure microsites are not available to all customers. Please refer to the Eloqua Service
Description (http://www.oracle.com/us/corporate/contracts/eloqua-service-descriptions1958979.pdf) for more information.
102 of 1162
Secure microsites use SSLprotocol to encrypt communication between the visitor's web browser and
the server. Using this feature is recommended for all sites dealing with sensitive information. When
you set up a secure microsite, you need to register a new SSLcertificate with Eloqua to use for your
microsite -- you cannot reuse an existing SSLcertificate that your company owns.
To set up a secure microsite:

1. Navigate to Settings>Setup>Microsites.
2. Click Manage SSL Certificates. A new browser window or tab will open on the Manage
SSLCertificates screen, which lists your pending andapproved SSLcertificates.
3. Select Register New SSL Certificate and follow these instructions.
4. You can view pending requests on the Manage SSLCertificates screen.
5. Once your request has been approved, navigate to Settings >Setup > Microsites The lefthand column lists all of your microsites, and the right-hand pane allows you to edit the currentlyselected microsite.
6. Click Add > Secure Microsite. A new secure microsite called 'Untitled Microsite' will be listed
in the left-hand area.
7. Under the Settings tab, under General > Microsite Name enter a meaningful name for your
secure microsite. This name is only used for reference within Eloqua.
8. Under Web Domains click Add Domain. You will now be able to enter a domain name in the
DomainList.
9. Under DomainList, type in your subdomain's base URL. Do not include a leading http://
10. Click Save.
Your microsite is now configured. The landing pages associated with each microsite are listed in the
LandingPages pane of theMicrosite Setup screen. You can now associate landing pages with the
microsite.
Registering SSL certificates for secure microsites

An SSLcertificate is required in order to create a secure microsite.
To register an SSLcertificate:
103 of 1162
1. Navigate to Settings > Setup.

2. Click Microsites.
3. Click Manage SSL Certificates.
The Manage SSLCertificates button is only available if your instance of Eloqua

includes Secure Microsites. Contact your account representative if you wish to obtain
this add-on.
4. Click Register New SSL Certificate, in the bottom right corner. You will be directed to the
RegisterNew SSLCertificate window.
104 of 1162
5. Complete the form:

Purchasing Party: Choose the following option: I will handle the purchase and
management of the certificate.
Organization Details: this is the company information that is associated with the SSL
certificate.
Contact Details: the contact information for the individual responsible for the SSL
certificate.
105 of 1162
Certificate Type: Choose between a Wildcard Certificate, or an EV Certificate.

Wildcard Certificates displays https:// in the address bar and a lock icon to
demonstrate valid SSL encryption. Wildcard Certificates also allow you to secure
unlimited subdomains for a given domain using a single certificate. For example, a
wildcard domain issued to example.com secures welcome.example.com,
sales.example.com, adventures.example.com, and so on.
EV (Extended Validation) SSL Certificates secure a single domain, but also provide
the green address bar indicator in modern browsers, displaying the authenticated
company name for the site owner, and includes the Norton Secured Seal.
Domain and URL for Certification: select a domain from the drop-down list, or choose
to use a self-managed domain.
2.5.3 Authenticated microsites

An authenticatedmicrosite is a secure microsite that requires visitors to log in before they can view the
site's content. Authenticated microsites use SSL protocol to encrypt the connection between the
browser and the web server, and user credentials to restrict access. These security features allow you
to create microsites that include sensitive information, or simply information that you want to restrict to
a specific audience.
Creating authenticated microsites

A typical use of an authenticated microsite would be to allow partners or resellers to submit information
(i.e. register a lead, enter product registration, request samples, etc.) through a form that is only
available to them.
To set up an authenticated microsite:
106 of 1162
1. Create a new Security Domain This domain will hold the account information and security
credentials for the users of your authenticated microsite.
2. Create a secure microsite - This site will be modified into an authenticated microsite.
3. Create a Default Page. Authenticated microsites require several landing pages to control and
manage user access, the first of which is the default page. Learn more about creating HTML
landing pages. When creating any of the HTML landing pages in steps 3 - 6 (below), be sure to
select the secure microsite you created in step 2 (above) for all the landing pages you create for
your authenticated microsite.
The first landing page you need to create is a Default Page. This will be the main page that
users will see after logging into the microsite (unless a specific URL is requested). The
following code may be helpful to get you started: download HTML default page example.
Navigate to Assets > Landing Pages > Upload a Landing Page to upload a landing page.
Warning: We recommend that a developer with HTML and javascript experience

finalizes and validates your code prior to publishing.
4. Create a Login Page - Users will be directed to this page where they will enter their credentials
and gain access to the microsite. The following code may be helpful to get you started:
download HTML login page example. Navigate to Assets > Landing Pages > Upload a
Landing Page to upload a landing page.

5. Create a Set Password Page - This page should allow users to set their password upon initial
account creation or upon resetting their existing password. Users are linked to this page through
the following default notification emails:
107 of 1162
The following code may be helpful to get you started: download HTML set password page
example. Navigate to Assets > Landing Pages > Upload a Landing Page to upload a landing
page.

6. Create an Email Confirmation Page - This is a simple confirmation page where users are sent
after they set or reset their password. The following code may be helpful to get you started:
download HTML email confirmation page example. Navigate to Assets > Landing Pages >
Upload a Landing Page to upload a landing page.

7. Now that all required landing pages have been created, go back to the microsite configuration
area and complete the configuration of the microsite for authentication. Navigate to Settings >
Setup > Microsites and select your secure microsite (step 2 above).
8. Select the proper default page.
9. Click the Authentication tab and select the Require Authentication checkbox. This will allow
you to configure the rest of the options on this page.
10. Click the SecurityDomain drop down list and select your new security domain (step 1 above).
11. Match the Login Page, Set Password Page and Email Confirmation Page drop down lists to
the appropriate landing pages.
12. Select the Landing Pages tab and check Exclude from Authentication for the following
pages: Login Page, Set Password Page and Email ConfirmationPage. This is required so
users are able to access these pages in order to authenticate. No one will be able to access
108 of 1162
your microsite unless these boxes are checked. You may also want to create other pages on
this microsite that do not require authentication. This feature allows you to specify which pages
require authentication and which do not.
Creating a new security domain

All instances of the Eloqua Marketing Platform are delivered with one security domain as standard.
This security domain holds the account information and credentials for all users of the marketing
automation platform and sales tools for your organization.
Eloqua customer administrators have the ability to add additional security domains to their instance of
Eloqua. It is a best practice to create a unique security domain for every new authenticated microsite
so you can easily manage administrative options.
To set up a new security domain:
109 of 1162

2. From the Users drop down menu select Security Domain Settings.
3. Click on Create Security Domain.
4. Enter a name for your domain and click Save.
Important: Your security domain's name will be used in the email sent to users when an
account is created. Be sure to use a name that will be clear and intelligible to users.
5. A security domain holds a certain number of configuration options pertaining to such things as
password complexity and maximum login attempts. Please visit the client security
configuration page for more information on administering a security domain configuration.
Creating contact users

Contact users are records of authentication credentials for a given security domain. In order to test a
secure, authenticated microsite you will need to create a Contact User.
To create a new contact user:

110 of 1162
2. From the Users drop down menu select Create New Contact User.
3. Enter an email address for the new user.

4. Select the newly created authenticated microsite from the dropdown.
5. Click Save. This action sends an email to the specified email address.
6. Open the email, and click on the link within the email, this should take you to the previously
created set password landing page. Upon entering credentials, you should be directed to the
default page for your microsite.
111 of 1162
2.6 Replication Sandbox

A sandbox is an environment used for testing new or current functionality prior to deploying the feature
or data to your production Eloqua environment, without affecting the original (production) system.With
an Eloqua sandbox, you have the ability to link a sandbox to your organization's production instance.
This can serve multiple purposes, such as testing campaigns, CRM integration changes or training, all
without compromising the data and automation of your production instance.
Note: If you are using the Enterprise trim of Eloqua, you are automatically entitled to requesting
a sandbox. If you are on the Basic or Standard trims of Eloqua, this is an add-on
functionality.For more information on how to request access to the Replication Sandbox,
please contact your account representative.
During sandbox replication, your Eloqua environment structure (including assets, campaigns, exports,
recently accessed assets, and integrations) is replicated from production to a sandbox. All Program
Builder programs, integration calls, and auto syncs are included as part of the replication. Data
including contact records, account records, custom objects and prospects are not replicated from
production to a sandbox. All types of automation and anything that has the concept of being "active" is
automatically disabled, such as campaigns. All users are included as part of the replication process but
marked as disabled. A Customer Administrator user must enable any additional users that require
access to the Sandbox and trigger the password reset. Each time you initiate replication, everything in
your Sandbox is overwritten by an updated replica of your production environment.
IMPORTANT: Replicating your production environment cannot occur during an Eloqua version
rollout. Please check the Release Resource Center
(https://community.oracle.com/docs/DOC-895407) for upcoming rollout dates.
Your production instance can be linked to more than one sandbox. There is no hard limit on how many
sandboxes can be linked to a production instance and you can trigger the replication for any linked
Sandbox individually.However, the production instances and the sandboxes must be located on the
same POD.
The amount of time required for the replication completion depends on many factors, the most
important being the amount of data in your Eloqua instance and current server load. Larger Eloqua
environments will take longer to replicate. The average replication time is approximately 4 to 8 hours;
the sandbox interface will indicate once it is complete. Once complete, you can log in to your sandbox
and begin testing.
112 of 1162
Note: The Replication Console indicates the status of your replication. If there have been any
failures, the entire replication will not be successful and the console indicates a replication
failure. Should that occur, please log a Service Request (SR) with Oracle Eloqua Product
Support via My Oracle Support (http://support.oracle.com/) (MOS).
2.6.1 Initiating instance replication

Important: You can only access your sandbox after it is linked to your production instance. If
you do not see your sandbox listed on the Sandbox Manager page, please log in to My Oracle
Support(http://support.oracle.com) and create a service request.
To replicate an instance:
1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Sandbox.
2. Click Refresh to begin the process of replicating your production instance into your sandbox.
A configuration-only sandbox includes the following in the replication process:
All Assets (segments, campaigns, emails, forms, headers, footers and so on)
All configurations (users, CRM Integration, workflow)
Essentially, this type of sandbox replicates everything in your instance except for record data such as
contacts, accounts, custom data objects, and prospects.
Warning: Triggering this process will permanently delete all existing data and configurations in
your sandbox instance. Make sure you no longer need any of those configurations prior to
running this process.
2.6.2 Cancelling instance replication

A Cancel option may appear after initiating instance replication. It indicates that your replication has
not yet started, due to poor configuration or a service interruption. Clicking Cancel will reset your
sandbox and enable the Refresh option, allowing you to re-initiate replication.
113 of 1162
Note: The Cancel option is not visible if the replication is currently running.
To cancel instance replication:

1. Click the Cancel option in the Sandbox.
Accessing Sandbox Manager
To access the Sandbox Manager: Navigate to Settings > Setup > Sandbox
When the replication is successfully cancelled, the Refresh appears and you are able to re-initiate
replication.
2.7 Security Groups

As an Eloqua administrator, you can manage and control the access rights and permissions that other
users of the Eloqua application at your organization can access, modify, create, and configure using
Security Groups. Eloqua provides deep levels of granularity in this regard.
Security Groups allow administrators to control what levels of access users have to assets, features,
interfaces and so on. There are several out of the box security groups; however, many of our
customers prefer to build their own security groups to suit their business needs.
Here is a screen shot of the new Security Group Overview interface. The overview has quick links to
all the types of security you can configure for a particular security group, with a brief description so you
understand what's possible.
114 of 1162
Default Asset Permissions

With default asset permissions, an administrator can configure the default permissions applied when a
user creates an asset. For example, all users in an organization are very protective of their assets and
content. An administrator can configure Eloqua so that by default the user who creates an asset has
full control and all other users have read-only permission. This means everybody can see each other's
assets and content, but only the user who created it can edit or delete it.
115 of 1162
2.7.1 Select List Asset Security

Note: The terms Select List and Picklist are used interchanbeably in Eloqua, however they
refer to the same functionality.
Security permissions allow an administrator to control accessibility, ensuring that only the appropriate
users have the ability to view, edit or create a select list. As an example, you may want the majority of
your users to only be able to view select lists, allowing them to be used in campaigns, segmentation
and other areas of the application. Only granting users View permission ensures users do not
accidentally modify the select list, thereby impacting campaigns, segments etc. in which it is
referenced (used). You must have Customer Administrator privileges to be able to make these
changes.
Changing security levels on existing select lists

To change security levels on already existing Select Lists:
1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Manage Picklists, the Select List Value Choices window
opens.
2. Click the drop-down next to the list that you wish to modify, then select Edit Security, the Edit
Security Rights window opens.

3. Select a user or security group from the boxes to the left, then click the arrow to add them to the
list.
4. Select or clear the check boxes as needed to define the permissions granted to that user/group.
116 of 1162
5. Click Close when you are done.
Configuring the default select list security

Setting up defaults allows an administrator to define who has access when a particular group of users
creates a new select list.
To configure the default select list security options:

2. Select the Groups tab and click on the security group for the users you want to change.
3. Click Default Asset Permissions, then click Edit.
4. Click Select Lists, on the list of asset types to the left.
Important: Only the asset types that the selected security group has the ability to create
will be displayed. If you do not see Select Lists, follow the steps above for enabling
creation of select lists.
5. In the type-ahead search field, enter and add the specific users and/or security groups who
should have access to Select Lists created by users in this security group. You can also change
the Asset Creator permissions to control the level of access the user will have to a select list
they create. For example, if you want users to be able to create new Select Lists but never
117 of 1162
delete:
6. For each of the users and/or security groups you added, specify the level of security access you
want them to inherit.
7. Click Save. Now whenever a user in the security group you are editing creates a Select List, all
of the users and/or security groups of users that you indicated will have some level of access to
the newly created Select List.
Modifying select list access

To create a Select List:
2. Select the Security Groups tab and click on the security group for the users you want to
change.
3. Click Asset Creation.
4. Click Edit.
118 of 1162
5. Check (or uncheck) the Select Lists option.
6. Click Save.
If left checked, the users in the security group you selected will have the ability to create new select
lists.
2.7.2 Adding users to security groups

To add users to a security group:
2. Search for or select the user you wish to add to the security group.
3. In the Security groups section at the middle of the page, single left-click (highlight) the name of
this Security Group under the All Security Groups column (on the left).
4. Click the > button to move the User to that Group. Repeat this process for all Users you wish to
add. Once you have moved the User to the new Group, the Group name is displayed in the
Selected Security Groups column on the right. When all Users have been added to the Group,
navigate back to the Security Group Overview, and click View Users in Group. The Group
119 of 1162
Members dialog box opens:
5. To remove a User from the Group, navigate back to Setup > Users, search for the User, select
the name of the Group in the right-hand column and click the < button to move it back to the All
Security Groups column
If you have a large number of Users to add to a Security Group, you can bulk upload them using a
wizard-based process.
2.7.3 Licensing
In order to use any functionality that is associated with a Security Group in Eloqua, the User must have
a valid license for that area of the application.
To view for which product(s) Users of a particular Security Group have access to licenses, click
Licensing from the Security Group Overview page. Any currently selected licenses for this group are
shown. (Note that by default, no licenses are shown. You must manually add or remove licenses.)
120 of 1162
In the example above, members of this Security Group only have access to the Eloqua Marketing
Platform. They will not be able to access any of the other areas until corresponding licenses are
granted to this Group.
2.7.4 Changing license availability for members of a security group

A license determines what products users can access; the interfaces and actions you specify for this
group then determine the level of access users have within that product. For example, access to use
the core platform requires the Eloqua Marketing Platform license.
To change license availability for members of this Security Group:

1. Click Edit on the Licensing page of the Security Group Overview.
121 of 1162
2. On the page that opens, select (or deselect) to enable, or disable, respectively licenses
according to your needs:
3. Important: Be sure to click Save in the bottom right-hand corner to save your changes.
4. To verify your changes have been saved, navigate back to the Security Overview page and
verify that the options you have selected (or changed) are reflected properly (they will be
selected and greyed out).
2.7.5 Configuring Asset Creation Settings

The types of Assets that Users have the ability to create are specified in this section of the Security
Group Overview panel. Any Asset that is not specifically enabled (checked) in this section of the
Security Group panel will not be available to members of the Group.
The Assets from which you can choose are shown here:
122 of 1162
As with all areas of the Security Group settings, by default none of the checkboxes are enabled. You
must specify each type of Asset that a member of this Security Group is able to create. If you do not
select a particular Asset, that functionality is removed from the application.
By simply selecting a box, you can easily define whether users in a security group can create a certain
asset type. For example, maybe you want a content manager to be able to create emails, forms and
landing pages, but not segments and campaigns. This is now extremely straightforward and easy to
configure.
123 of 1162
To enable or disable Asset Creation settings:

2. Make sure the Groups tab is selected in the left-hand (tree) view.
3. Click the down arrow next to the Group you wish to configure and select Security Group
Details.
4. On the right-hand pane, select Asset Creation.
5. Click the Edit button above or below the list of Assets to proceed to the configuration page.
6. Check (or uncheck) the Assets to which you wish these users should (or should not) have
access.
For example, select all Assets except for Campaigns.

7. Click Save.
The new Asset Creation Overview will look like this:
124 of 1162
To test that your changes have been successfully applied, log in to Eloqua as a User who only has
rights to this Security Group and the Everyone Group.
For example, if Campaign was unchecked, now when logging in as a member of this Security Group
(with no other Group membership other than Everyone), when he or she clicks Campaigns, this is what
is displayed:
125 of 1162
You may wish to create such an environment for a group of Users who only need to see the flow of a
Campaign, but do not need to create new ones.
Just as with the Campaign Asset, by editing the Asset Creation page, you can tailor your Eloqua
environment for your instance based on the needs of your business.
Once the Asset Creation permissions are configured according to your preferences, the next step is to
specify the default permissions that are applied to these Assets for each Security Group and/or
individual Eloqua User in your organization.
2.7.6 Navigating the Security Settings Interface

The following section describes how to manage Security settings for a Security Group in Eloqua.
1. Navigate to Settings > Setup in the navigation toolbar at the top of the application window.
2. Under the Administration section, click Users.
3. Make sure the Groups tab in the left-hand panel is selected.
1. To modify the settings for an existing User Security Group, search for the Group by typing its
name in the search field, then click Search.
2. Once you have located the desired group, click the down arrow next to its name and click
Security Group Details.
3. To configure a new Security Group, click New Security Group from the Users drop-down above
the left-hand navigation pane.
4. The Security Group Overview is displayed on the right-hand pane.
126 of 1162
Notice the name of the Group you selected is indicated at the top of the Overview. The four-letter
acronym is also displayed.
To view a list of Users in this Group, click View Users in Group. This list will initially be blank until you
begin to add Users.
2.7.7 Action Permissions

Actions go hand in hand with interfaces. Interfaces determine what page or navigational area the users
can access, while actions determine what users can do while on that interface. Now you can simply
select or clear permissions for a security group to perform a specific action. Definitions for every action
can be found here.
127 of 1162
Eloqua gives you the ability to control specifically which actions can be performed by a member of a
particular Security Group at a very granular level. After selecting the areas of the application that are
available to these members, you must then configure the permissions within those areas or no
functionality will be available.
The initial Application Permissions page, as with all other Security Group settings pages initially shows
all settings disabled. To enable, modify or disable settings, click the Edit button at the top of the lists.
The following table describes what capabilities users will be given, by area of the application, by
selecting that option on the Edit screen.
API
Consume API
The ability to make calls to the Eloqua system using the

Eloqua API.
Campaign
Campaign Customer Administrators
Gives Customer Administrators the ability to edit

Opportunity Contact Attribution and their Methods.
Contacts
The ability to change a Contacts Bounceback Status for
Change ContactBounceback Status
Emails that were sent to him or her (hard vs. soft vs. valid
address).
Delete a Contact Record
User can delete a Contact Record.
Delete Contacts via a Report
The ability to delete Contacts
Manage Contacts
Add, modify and delete Contacts in Eloqua.
Manage Data Import
Configure and run the process of importing Contact and

Account data into Eloqua via an SFTP Server.
128 of 1162
Run Automated Data Services
Gives you the ability to run Automated Data Services.

User can set (or modify) the subscription status for a
Set Contact Subscription Status
Contact (to Subscribe, Unsubscribe, Global Subscribe,

Global Unsubscribe).
Show Automated Data Services
Displays option for Automated Data Services.
Unsubscribe Contacts via a Report
The ability to unsubscribe contacts using report data.

Use the Contact Upload Wizard to upload Contacts,
Upload Contact/Prospects/Companies
Prospects and Companies (Accounts) via a file (e.g.

.csv, .txt., xls).
CRM
CRM Integrations must be performed as a User with
CRM Username and Password
proper credentials. This setting allows the User to

specify the Username and Password for that User
account.
Edit Integration Rules
Gives the User the ability to modify the rules that are
defined for integrating Eloqua with a CRM system.
Integration Reports
The ability to process (run) rules that have been
Run Integration Rules
configured for an integration between Eloqua and a CRM

system.
Custom Object Records

Copy Custom Object Record
Create Conditional Services
Make a copy of a Custom Object Record to create a new

Card using (some or all of the existing settings.
Allows the creation of Conditional criteria when creating
Custom Object Records.
Delete Custom Object Record
The ability to delete a Custom Object Record.
Edit Custom Object Record
The ability to edit a Custom Object Record.
Map Custom Object Record
Map Fields in Custom Object Records to Eloqua Fields.
Move Custom Object Record
The ability to move a Custom Object Record from one

location to another.
Eloqua for MS Outlook

Add Delivery Receipt Tracking
Add Website History Tracking
Download Eloqua for Microsoft Outlook
Enables the user to report on when an Email generated

from Eloqua for Microsoft Outlook was delivered.
(Deprecated- will be removed in a future release)
Enables a user to download the Eloqua for Microsoft
Outlook client software.
Log the Inbound Email
Add inbound Emails to logs.
Log the Outbound Email
Add outbound Emails to logs.
Templated Email for Microsoft Outlook
Create an Email in Microsoft Outlook that can be used as
129 of 1162
a template when sending Emails from Eloqua.

Track Links in Emails
Enable the ability to track links to other web sites that

were clicked by the contact in the Email.
Allows the user to update a Contact record in Eloqua
Update Contact from Outlook
based on information submitted by the recipient of the

Email.
Email
Administer Email Batches
Apply Signature to Email Batch
Allows the user to create and modify Email Batches.

Enables a user to add a personalized signature to an
Email being sent through an Email Batch.
Gives the user rights to create an Email Group. All
Create an email group
Emails in Eloqua must be associated with an Email

Group, for formatting, subscription and other purposes.
External Testing Reports

Manage Dynamic Content
Manage External Tracking
Manage Signatures
User can create and modify Dynamic Content in an

Eloqua Email.
Enable or disable the Use Omniture checkbox in the
Email Administration area.
User can create and modify Signatures used in an Email
in Eloqua for personalization.
When sending an Email from the Email Editor (e.g. for
Send as any User
testing purposes), User can change the name of the User

that will appear in the From: field in the recipients Email
client.
Send Email Batch
User can send an Email Batch.

User has access to the Test Content and Deliverability
Use email testing options
area of the application to verify Email client previews,

check for spam content and validity of links to websites,
Email addresses, etc.
When creating an Email in the Email Editor, user has
Use Email Tools
access to the Tools icon, providing the ability to format

text, page and border layout, colors, and more.
Email Footer
Create New Footer
User can create an Email Footer (in the Component

Library).
Email Header
Create New Header
User can create an Email Header (in the Component

Library).
130 of 1162
External Assets
Using the Campaign Canvas, a user can add and
Define External Assets and Activities
manage external (non-Eloqua) assets and activities,

which can then be used for reporting purposes.
External Assets can be uploaded to Eloqua using a
Upload External Assets
wizard-based process from the Campaign Canvas via a

single (.csv, .xls or other delimited) file. The process is
considered a Data Import.
Forms
Create Form
User can create a new Form.
Delete Form Data
User can remove data collected via Form submissions.

User can create customized Form notifications (the
Manage Form Notification Setup
Emails that an Eloqua user receives based on certain

criteria performed by a Contact).
Hypersites (Microsites)
Create Hypersite
Register Hypersite DNS Entry
User can create a Hypersite (Microsite).

User can register the DNS record information for an
existing (or new) Hypersite (Microsite).
Lead Generation
Delete a Company Record
Manage Companies
User can delete Lead Scoring Record for a Company

(Account).
User can add, modify and delete Companies (Accounts).
Management
Install Cloud Applications
Enables Cloud Developer and Cloud Catalog capability

(buttons).
Enables Label-Based Access Control (LBAC) in the
Manage Contact Level Security
Setup > Users > Contact Security menu. Also enables

the Business Unit Defaults (Sharing) option in the
Security Group settings.
Manage ELQA Integration

Manage Notifications
Manage Run as User
Manage Security Groups
Manage SSO Settings
Enables the ability to create Contacts in Salesforce from

Eloqua.
Create and edit Visitor Notifications for an Eloqua
instance.
The right to run a Campaign as a different User.
With this capability you can create and modify Security
Groups.
Create and edit Single Sign-On (SSO) settings for logging
into Eloqua.
131 of 1162
Manage System Access

Manage System Configuration
Manage System Settings
Manage User Security
Manage Users (Email)
Gives users the ability to access the Eloqua System.

Gives Users the ability to change and configure the
system configuration.
Users can edit global system settings for their Eloqua
instance.
The ability to specify security rights (permissions) for
individual Eloqua Users.
Enables the Email Template Setup context menu.
Enables current user to manage other users settings, for
Manage Users (General)
example, view the users settings, delete the user,

enable or disable a user, or switch to that user.
Create and configure Visitor Notification Emails that are
Manage Visitor Notification Setup
sent to the Eloqua administrator when certain criteria are

met.
Manage Web Integration
Create and modify Eloqua integration with a CRM.
Perform quick search
Allows you to perform a quick search.

Manage Contact and Company (Account) Views for all
Set Agent Settings
Eloqua Users in an instance (Global Settings) or specify

custom settings for one individual User.
The ability to login to Eloqua as another user in the
Switch to User
currently open session without having to log out. This

can be useful for testing User settings that have been
configured for one particular user.
Synchronize Sandboxes
If provided, this is the ability to synchronize (replicate)

data between a sandbox and a production environment.
Program Builder
Drop an individual member from program
User can remove a single member from a step in a

program.
Drop multiple from program
Delete multiple contacts from a Program.
Edit Task
Edit a Program task.
Manually re-assign ownership of multiple

members
Manually re-assign ownership within a
program
Manually set ownership of program
members
Program Builder Test Mode
User can run a Program in Test Mode.
Remove from program
User can remove a Contact from a Program.
132 of 1162
Set Step Ownership To Open
Change the ownership of a Program step to Open.
Update Ownership for Source Contact

Template Library
Administer Template Library
Export Item
Manage Templates for inclusion in the Template Library.

Enables the following options in the Template Library:
Publish Theme, Export Theme, and Publish Program.
Import Items
Publish to Library
This setting gives the user to save a Template to the

Template Library for use by other Users.
Users with this setting can view the Global Template
View Global Library
Library, which are Templates available to all Users (All

Templates).
View Local Library
Users with this setting can view the Templates that are
available only to him or her (My Templates).
2.7.8 Default asset permissions

You have the ability to customize default asset permissions per security group. Asset permissions are
important for customers who want to control different levels of access for various users. When a user
creates a new asset, there are a default set of permissions on that asset for which other users /
security groups have access to that asset. These default permissions can be configured at the security
group level.
Aside from the default asset permissions you can configure, a user will always have full control on
an asset they create. If needed, this can be changed after the asset has been saved.
Eloqua provides the ability for controlling the default permissions on any of these Assets in the Default
Asset Permissions section of the Security Group settings.
The creator of the Asset has Full Control. If you wish for any other Group or User to have rights to an
Asset that you have created, you must explicitly give rights for this type of Asset (for example,
Campaigns, Emails, Landing Pages, etc.).
133 of 1162
Example: If John Smith creates an Email and is a member of the Security Group that has no
default permissions set in the application, John Smith is the only Eloqua user who has Full
Control (Read and Write). Until John Smith gives other users permission to view or edit an
Asset (or both), those users will not see the protected asset(s). This can be accomplished via a
Security Group or on an individual level.
2.7.9 Interface Access

Interfaces provide a method with which to control access. An interface is essentially a page within the
application and in this area you can control which interfaces users can see or click to access. The
interface access tree is nicely organized in a hierarchy that matches the hierarchy of how you actually
navigate the platform. You can simply select the interfaces you want users in this group to access. A
solid green box indicates the interfaces within the hierarchy that are selected.
The Interface Access section controls the features and areas of the application that are visible to
Users in this Security Group. Note that enabling an asset in this section does not necessarily mean
the User can create, modify or delete such an asset; that capability is specified in the Asset Creation
section of the Group Settings.
By default, no areas of the application are selected. You must manually select each area and asset to
which Users in this Security Group will have access. Any asset or area of the application that is not
checked will not appear in the user interface when a member of this Security Group logs into Eloqua
and navigates through the application.
134 of 1162
2.7.10 Licensing
In order to use any functionality that is associated with a Security Group in Eloqua, the User must have
a valid license for that area of the application.
To view for which product(s) Users of a particular Security Group have access to licenses, click
Licensing from the Security Group Overview page. Any currently selected licenses for this group are
shown. (Note that by default, no licenses are shown. You must manually add or remove licenses.)
135 of 1162
In the example above, members of this Security Group only have access to the Eloqua Marketing
Platform. They will not be able to access any of the other areas until corresponding licenses are
granted to this Group.
2.7.11 User Licensing

The purpose of user licenses is to give administrators control over users' access to products, providing
an understanding of usage at the product level. You can think of it this way: Licensing determines what
products a user has access to and Security groups determine what feature/function a user can access
within that product.
License Types
The following licenses are available:
1. Marketing Platform User: When a user has this license they have access to the core platform.
This will be the most common user license needed. If a user does not have this license and logs
in, all they will be able to access is their user profile.
2. Eloqua Profiler: When a user has this license they can access Eloqua Profiler. Users require
the Eloqua Profiler License in order to access Profiler.
3. Eloqua Engage: When a user has this license they can access Engage from any platform Web or via CRM.
4. Eloqua Discover: If you are using Discover V1 this license is not required.
136 of 1162
5. Eloqua Insight (Reporting): While the feature access this license provides is included in the
Basic Platform User license, it is still important to have a license that only allows for reporting.
For example, if you have an Executive who is only going to run Eloqua reports and you have the
Basic Eloqua product, you might not want to waste one of your five Marketing platform user
licenses just so one person can run reports. In this example, you could give the Executive just a
Reporting license, which will give them access to reporting and get their job done without
burning through licenses.
Important Notes
Enforcement - A user must have a license in order to access a product, but there are currently
no hard limits on how many licenses a user can have. This ensures you have the flexibility to
grow your use of Eloqua as needed. For example if you are have purchased Eloqua Basic and
add a sixth Marketing platform user, you will not be prevented from adding that user. As your
usage grows you can have conversations with your Account Manager to evaluate what
products are best for your organization.
Initial Roll Out - As part of the release, we are taking steps to ensure we auto apply licenses to
users to ensure that no users get locked out of products.
Granting Licenses to Users - Users can be granted a license either directly to their user account
or inherit a license through a security group to which they belong. This makes it easy to grant
licenses in bulk to large volumes of users. For example, to ensure users have access to the
core platform on the day of the release, several security groups such as Advanced Marketing
users as well as any custom security groups will get the Marketing Platform user license.
The configuration panel looks like this:
137 of 1162
2.8 Asset Security

In Eloqua there are several different types of assets. For administrators, controlling access to these
assets can be critical to meeting business requirements and ensuring users operate with effective
guardrails in place.
To control access to assets, Eloqua has a standard security framework that behaves the same across
all assets.
138 of 1162
Asset
Description
Permission
View
Edit
Delete
Set
Security
Asset is searchable and usable. Configuration can be viewed but no changes made. For
assets that contain data such as Custom Data Objects, data inside the asset can be
viewed, but not modified.
All capabilities of View rights but user can make any change to the asset configuration.
The only things the user cannot do are delete the asset and change the security settings
for the asset.
All capabilities of Edit rights, but user can delete assets.
All of the permissions of View, Edit, and Delete, plus the ability to change the asset
permissions, controlling what other users can do with the asset.
2.8.1 Granting rights to assets

You can specify the level of access at which users or security groups can use specific assets.
1. With your asset open, click the action menu (gear icon), then select Permissions.
2. Select the level of access you want to grant users and groups to this asset.
For more information on these rights, see Asset Security.

3. Click Save.
The selected user(s) and group(s) will be granted access to this asset. You can also modify the rights
users are granted upon creating assets. For more information, see Default Asset Permissions.
139 of 1162
2.9 Configuring campaign details and financials

As a customer administrator you can setup default campaign details and financial information. These
settings are usually configured when campaigns are initially implemented in the application, so that all
subsequent campaigns use the same baselines and are directly comparable. These defaults are
applied to all campaigns but can be adjusted at any time.
To configure campaign details and financials:

1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Campaigns.
2. Configure the Campaign Details & Financials section.
Fiscal Year Begins In: Set the month in which fiscal reporting for your company begins
for a new financial year. This allows you to align marketing reports with financial reports.
Default Currency: Set the currency that will be used by default for financial
calculations.
Note: Default currency in the Campaign Details & Financials section, maps to
the field called Base Currency in the financial set-up details.
2.10 Configuring company display defaults

The company display settings allow you to set up your official company name, URL, and logo for your
instance of the Eloqua application.
To configure company display settings:
140 of 1162
1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Company Defaults. The Client Info window opens.
Note: Company Defaults and Client Info refer to the same functionality.
2. Enter the company name and company URL (make sure the URL begins with http://).
3. Set up the company image (logo). You can do one of the following:
Choose Select available image, then select an image that is in the image library: Click
the Select Image button, then View All or search for an image by name, date (range) or
owner. When you see the image you want to use, click Select, then OK.
Choose Select available image, then upload a new image: Click Select Image, then
choose Tools > Upload New Image. Browse to the image. You can alter the name in
the field if required.
Click Upload to add it to the image library, then click OK to close the dialog box and add
the image to the client info page.
141 of 1162
Choose Enter image URL , then enter a publicly-available path and image name for the
image file. Make sure that the image will always be available at this URL.
4. Select Preview if you want to preview the logo on saving.
5. Click Save to save the Company information.
2.11 Creating custom campaign fields

Custom campaign fields are used in Eloqua to provide additional metadata related to your campaigns,
primarily for reporting purposes. You configure the fields and their acceptable values and formats in the
142 of 1162
setup area of the application.
To create a custom campaign field:

1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Fields and Views, the fields editing window opens.
2. Click the + button at the bottom of the screen and choose Add Campaign Field.
3. Enter a Display name. Choose something descriptive to make the purpose of the field clear and
to make it easier to locate for future use.
4. Enter a Description (optional). This is useful in instances where more information would be
helpful in determining the field's purpose.
5. Select the Field type from the drop-down list. The options are:
Multi-Select Picklist: allows the user to select more than one item from the picklist
Picklist: allows the user to select one item from the picklist
Textbox: allows the user to type in their answer.
6. Select the Picklist Values from the drop-down list.
Note: The Picklist Values drop-down list only appears when you choose Picklist as the
Field type .
7. Click the checkbox next to Campaign Field is required to make this a required field. You will
not be able to successfully save a campaign if you do not provide a value for a required custom
campaign field.
143 of 1162
8. Click the checkbox next to Campaign Field is read onlyto make the field read only.
9. Click Save to save the custom campaign field.
2.12 Creating custom login URLs for CRMintegration

In order to link your Eloqua assets to assets in your Salesforce.com CRM, and to be able to update the
information in both systems, you must use a special Eloqua loginURL.
When you use https://login.eloqua.com/ to log in to your Eloqua environment, you have the ability to
customize the URL to log you in directly to the application and bring you to a specific area of the
application without having to navigate through the user interface.
Example: If you want to be logged in automatically and then go directly to an insight report, you
can add parameters to the end of the URL. It will log you in to Eloqua and then route you directly
to Eloqua Insight.
Customizing the Eloqua login URL

There are three methods for customizing the login URL for Eloqua. The method that you use will
depend on the security model that is implemented at your organization. While all methods provide login
security, you may be using authentication via a CRM system and therefore your authentication method
might be configured through Autologin, or Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML). The three
options for logging in to Eloqua are discussed in the following sections.
Using Autologin
When logging in to an Eloqua instance for the first time, you can enable the checkbox called
Remember me which will save your company name, user name and password for that Eloqua
environment. The next time you access that page (as long as you have not cleared the corresponding
cookie from your computer), the company, user name and password will be pre-populated for you.
Provided you have enabled the Remember me checkbox on the login screen when you last logged in
to your Eloqua instance, the only qualifier (parameter) that is required is the autologin? in order to
bypass the login screen, as in the following examples:
https://login.eloqua.com/autologin?Url={Url}
https://login.eloqua.com/autologin?SiteId={SiteId}&Url={Url}
https://login.eloqua.com/autologin?LoginPrefix={LoginPrefix}&Url={Url}
144 of 1162
As shown in the syntax examples above, you can be automatically redirected to a specific page in the
application after being logged in. The only differences between this method of arriving directly on the
desired page within the application and using a CVP format are:
In a CVP-formatted URL, you are required to enter either the LoginPrefix= or SiteID=, whereas
for an Autologin URL, these parameters are optional.
User name and password are not used in the autologin URL, since that information is already
stored in a cookie on your computer from a previous login.
You do not need to contact Eloqua product support via My Oracle Support, as there is no
encrypted password required for the CVP link; it is already stored in your cookie from when you
previously saved the credentials.
The following URLs perform the same functionality as the URLs indicated at the end of the previous
section discussing CVP-formatted URLs, however the login credentials are not shown, as expected:
https://login.eloqua.com/cvp?SiteId=10011&Username=Orion.Full&Password=B1D8C85F3E
2DBB3CE2757F6AD56306333EA4D641F8FB441FFCAB17928CBB57D9&Url=FlexReports%
2FDisplayReport2.aspx%3FStandardReportID%3D1297%26EmailAddress%3Dintegration.te
sting%2540eloqua.qa.com%26ShowPrintOption%3DTrue
https://login.eloqua.com/cvp?SiteId=10011&Username=Orion.Full&Password=B1D8C85F3E
2DBB3CE2757F6AD56306333EA4D641F8FB441FFCAB17928CBB57D9&Url=FlexReports%
2FDisplayReport2.aspx%3FStandardReportID%3D1297%26EmailAddress%3Dintegration.te
sting%2540eloqua.qa.com%26ShowPrintOption%3DTrue
https://login.eloqua.com/cvp?LoginPrefix=ORNT&Username=Orion.Full&Password=B1D8C8
5F3E2DBB3CE2757F6AD56306333EA4D641F8FB441FFCAB17928CBB57D9&Url=FlexRep
orts%2FDisplayReport2.aspx%3FStandardReportID%3D1297%26EmailAddress%3Dintegrati
on.testing%2540eloqua.qa.com%26ShowPrintOption%3DTrue
Note: If you are attempting to use this method of autologin to Eloqua, and you have not
previously saved your login credentials, the following warning message is displayed:
145 of 1162
In such a case, navigate to login.eloqua.com and login with your company name, user name
and credentials, making sure to click Remember me. Log out of Eloqua, then try the autologin
again, and you will be logged in automatically provided the information matches your cookie.
Using Security Assertion Markup Language 2 (SAML2) autologin

If your Eloqua instance is integrated with a CRM system, you can create URLs that will allow you to
log in directly to Eloqua using your SAML2 identity provider credentials. The advantages of using this
method of authentication revolve around your company's internal security policies around Single Signon (SSO) and can make using Eloqua within your CRM seamless and one unified environment. Your
administrators have to enable the ability to use Eloqua in an iFrame within Salesforce (or other CRM) in
order for you to be able to use Eloqua in the CRM window, otherwise you can still log in to Eloqua using
your IDP credentials and data will still be shared between the two systems.
The acceptable syntax statements for a SAML2 autologin URL is one of the following:
https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/autologin?SiteId={SiteId}&Url={Url}
https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/autologin?LoginPrefix={LoginPrefix}&Url={Url}
https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/autologin?SiteId={SiteId}&IdentityProviderId=
{IdentityProviderId}&Url={Url}
https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/autologin?LoginPrefix={LoginPrefix}&IdentityProviderId=
{IdentityProviderId}&Url={Url}
The differences between this type of autologin capability and either CVP or Autologin as described in
the preceding two sections lie in the following:
No user credentials are passed in the URL. They are authenticated from the CRM system
during login.
146 of 1162
You must include either a SiteID or LoginPrefix, as with a CVP link, but in contrast with the
Autologin method.
Since you are using authentication via your CRM (Identity Provider), you can also, if desired,
include the Identity Provider ID.
Just as with the sample URLs shown in the preceding two sections (CVP and Autologin), you can craft
the same autologin URLs that will take you to a specific area of the application using one URL:
https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/autologin?SiteId=10011&Url=FlexReports%2FDisplayReport2.a
spx%3FStandardReportID%3D1297%26EmailAddress%3Dintegration.testing%2540eloqua.qa.com
%26ShowPrintOption%3DTrue
https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/autologin?LoginPrefix=ORNT&Url=FlexReports%2FDisplayRep
ort2.aspx%3FStandardReportID%3D1297%26EmailAddress%3Dintegration.testing%2540eloqua.qa.
com%26ShowPrintOption%3DTrue
https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/autologin?SiteId=10011&IdentityProviderId=8ee8ff5b-87f0-414ab247f17a123855b8&Url=FlexReports%2FDisplayReport2.aspx%3FStandardReportID%3D1297%26Email
Address%3Dintegration.testing%2540eloqua.qa.com%26ShowPrintOption%3DTrue
https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/autologin?LoginPrefix=ORNT&IdentityProviderId=8ee8ff5b-87f0414a-b247f17a123855b8&Url=FlexReports%2FDisplayReport2.aspx%3FStandardReportID%3D1297%26Email
Address%3Dintegration.testing%2540eloqua.qa.com%26ShowPrintOption%3DTrue
The information included in the URLs above perform the exact same functionality as the similarlyformatted URLs in the CVP and Autologin sections above, however they use your CRM system's
authentication mechanism for logging in to Eloqua and creating the bond between the two systems.
Using CVP
Warning: This URL contains your password as a URL parameter, albeit an encrypted version.
Anyone with the URL will be able to access your Eloqua account.
CVP is a way of customizing the Eloqua login URL with specific parameters to automatically log you in
to Eloqua (bypassing the standard login page). The basic format for such a URL is:
https://login.eloqua.com/cvp?
Samples of accepted syntax for creating CVP-formatted URLs are as follows:
https://login.eloqua.com/cvp?SiteId=%7bSiteId%7d&Username=%7bUsername%7d&Password=%7
bPassword%7d&Url=%7bUrl%7dhttps://login.eloqua.com/cvp?LoginPrefix=%7bLoginPrefix%7d&Us
ername=%7bUsername%7d&Password=%7bPassword%7d&Url=%7bUrl%7d
147 of 1162
https://login.eloqua.com/cvp?SiteId=%7bSiteId%7d&Username=%7bUsername%7d&Password=%7
bPassword%7d&Url=%7bUrl%7dhttps://login.eloqua.com/cvp?LoginPrefix=%7bLoginPrefix%7d&Us
ername=%7bUsername%7d&Password=%7bPassword%7d&Url=%7bUrl%7d
The parameters shown above do not make up the entire list of available parameters, but are the most
commonly used set. This will be discussed in another document at a later date.
Note : All parameters added following cvp? must be preceded by an ampersand (&) in order to
pass the desired values and followed by an equal sign (=):
LoginPrefix: This is a four-character code for the company name that you enter in the Company
field on the login page. To add this parameter to your URL, enter LoginPrefix=<prefix> where
<prefix> is replaced with the four characters company name. You can obtain your company's
login prefix in Eloqua by navigating to Settings > Setup > Company Defaults
Example: https://login.eloqua.com/cvp?LP=ELQA The login prefix is ELQA.
SiteID: This is the three-digit numeric code assigned to your Eloqua site. You can obtain your
site ID in Eloqua by navigating to Settings > Setup > Company Defaults.
For example, https://login.eloqua.com/cvp?SiteID=351. The site ID is 351.
UserName=This is the actual user name you use when logging in to Eloqua.
Password=This is the password used when logging in to Eloqua. The password parameter in a
CVP linked URL is encrypted. As a customer, you do not have the encrypted version of that
password. You must, therefore, log a case in My Oracle Support (MOS) to obtain your
encrypted password for a CVP URL and a support representative will provide you with that
information.
148 of 1162
URL= (Optional) This is the direct URL to an area (page) in the Eloqua application to which you
want to be directed once pressing Enter in the browser address field.
Example: The URL for creating an insight report in Eloqua can be used in this scenario
and include many different parameters, including, but not limited to, running a report
automatically when opening it, and displaying print options.
You must use either the LoginPrefix or SiteID in order for the URL to log you in successfully. The other
parameters are optional. If your URL is malformed, or is missing a required component, the following
error message appears
:
Click Back to login page or the Back button on your browser to return to the default login page
(login.eloqua.com).
Here are two examples of customized login URLs for accessing Eloqua:
https://login.eloqua.com/cvp?SiteId=10011&Username=Orion.Full&Password=B1D8C85F3E2DBB3
CE2757F6AD56306333EA4D641F8FB441FFCAB17928CBB57D9&Url=FlexReports%2FDisplayRe
port2.aspx%3FStandardReportID%3D1297%26EmailAddress%3Dintegration.testing%2540eloqua.q
a.com%26ShowPrintOption%3DTrue
https://login.eloqua.com/cvp?LoginPrefix=ORCA&Username=Orion.Full&Password=B1D8C85F3E2
DBB3CE2757F6AD56306333EA4D641F8FB441FFCAB17928CBB57D9&Url=FlexReports%2FDispl
ayReport2.aspx%3FStandardReportID%3D1297%26EmailAddress%3Dintegration.testing%2540elo
qua.qa.com%26ShowPrintOption%3DTrue
In the first URL above, the user (Test.User), with the encrypted password will be directed to the
following URL upon login:
149 of 1162
The second URL, instead of using the SiteID as the Eloqua instance uses the LoginPrefix parameter,
since one of those two values is required. Since both the SiteID and LoginPrefix refer to the same
environment you may choose either one.
2.13 Setting up the master exclude list

As the Eloqua administrator, you can set up the list contacts or criteria for contacts that will not be
included in any segment. You can do this using a number of different criteria categories such as filters,
individual contacts, domains, etc.
To set up the master exclude list:

1. Navigate to Settings> Setup >Master Exclude.
2. Click Excluded to expand the table of excluded contacts, if it is not already expanded.
3. Set one or more exclusions by selecting categories under the Type column;
Contact Group Members: Navigate to Contact Group Members> Add contact

group. Search for contact groups to add to the master excludes list, or click View All,
then select the checkboxes next to all groups that you want to exclude. Click OK,
thenClose.
150 of 1162
Filter Contacts: Navigate to Filter Contacts >Add Contact Filters. Search for or create
filters, or click View All, then select the checkboxes next to the ones you want to add to
the master exclude list. Click OK, thenClose.
Important: A contact filter in the master exclude list will only exclude that
specific contact. The filter will not apply to other entities (whether contact or
CDO) that share the same email address.
151 of 1162
Search for Individuals: Navigate to Search for Individuals >Add Contact. Search for
individuals or click View All, then select the checkboxes next to the ones you want to
add to the master exclude list. Click OK, thenClose.
Email Recipients: Used to add contacts that received particular emails to the exclude
list. Navigate to Email Recipients >Add Email. Search for emails or click View All, then
select the checkboxes next to the ones for which you want to add the recipient contacts
to the master exclude list. Click OK, then Close.
Email Group Members: Used to add contacts that are subscribers to particular email
groups to the exclude list. Navigate to Email Group Members > Add Email Groups.
Search for email groups or click View All, then select the checkboxes next to the ones
for which you want to add the subscriber contacts to the master exclude list. Click OK,
then Close.
Domains: Used to add contacts with a specified domain in their email address to the
exclude list. Click Domains. You will see two example URLs in the window; replace
these with the domain name(s) for the domains you want to exclude, then click Save
and Close.
Custom Object Members: Navigate to Custom Object Members>Add Custom

Objects. Search for custom objects or click View All, then select the checkboxes next
to the ones you want to add to the master exclude list. Click OK, then Close.
4. To make changes to an exclusion, click on the type in theType list, then click the drop-down list
next to the exclusion. Click Remove from List or Edit as needed. Click OK, then Close.:
152 of 1162
5. Click the Update button to update the total possible recipients number after making changes.
2.14 Uploading users using a CSV file

Uploading Eloqua users at your organization can be accomplished by entering their information one at a
time, or you can use an upload wizard to upload them simultaneously using values populated in a CSV
file.
Time Zone Requirements

The CSV file that you use for the upload must conform to certain naming conventions or the upload can
fail. In the case of time zones, your column heading (if you are creating the CSV file in Microsoft
Excel), must be TimeZone, and the values selected from one of the following:
The valid time zones are:
Morocco Standard Time (GMT) Casablanca
GMT Standard Time (GMT) Greenwich Mean Time : Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London
Greenwich Standard Time (GMT) Monrovia, Reykjavik
W. Europe Standard Time (GMT+01:00) Amsterdam, Berlin, Bern, Rome, Stockholm, Vienna
Central Europe Standard Time (GMT+01:00) Belgrade, Bratislava, Budapest, Ljubljana, Prague
Romance Standard Time (GMT+01:00) Brussels, Copenhagen, Madrid, Paris
Central European Standard Time (GMT+01:00) Sarajevo, Skopje, Warsaw, Zagreb
W. Central Africa Standard Time (GMT+01:00) West Central Africa
153 of 1162
Jordan Standard Time (GMT+02:00) Amman

GTB Standard Time (GMT+02:00) Athens, Bucharest, Istanbul
Middle East Standard Time (GMT+02:00) Beirut
Egypt Standard Time (GMT+02:00) Cairo
South Africa Standard Time (GMT+02:00) Harare, Pretoria
FLE Standard Time (GMT+02:00) Helsinki, Kyiv, Riga, Sofia, Tallinn, Vilnius
Israel Standard Time (GMT+02:00) Jerusalem
E. Europe Standard Time (GMT+02:00) Minsk
Namibia Standard Time (GMT+02:00) Windhoek
Arabic Standard Time (GMT+03:00) Baghdad
Arab Standard Time (GMT+03:00) Kuwait, Riyadh
Russian Standard Time (GMT+03:00) Moscow, St. Petersburg, Volgograd
E. Africa Standard Time (GMT+03:00) Nairobi
Georgian Standard Time (GMT+03:00) Tbilisi
Arabian Standard Time (GMT+04:00) Abu Dhabi, Muscat
Azerbaijan Standard Time (GMT+04:00) Baku
Caucasus Standard Time (GMT+04:00) Caucasus Standard Time
Armenian Standard Time (GMT+04:00) Yerevan
Ekaterinburg Standard Time (GMT+05:00) Ekaterinburg
Pakistan Standard Time (GMT+05:00) Islamabad, Karachi
West Asia Standard Time (GMT+05:00) Tashkent
N. Central Asia Standard Time (GMT+06:00) Almaty, Novosibirsk
Central Asia Standard Time (GMT+06:00) Astana, Dhaka
SE Asia Standard Time (GMT+07:00) Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakarta
North Asia Standard Time (GMT+07:00) Krasnoyarsk
China Standard Time (GMT+08:00) Beijing, Chongqing, Hong Kong, Urumqi
North Asia East Standard Time (GMT+08:00) Irkutsk, Ulaan Bataar
Singapore Standard Time (GMT+08:00) Kuala Lumpur, Singapore
W. Australia Standard Time (GMT+08:00) Perth
Taipei Standard Time (GMT+08:00) Taipei
Tokyo Standard Time (GMT+09:00) Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo
Korea Standard Time (GMT+09:00) Seoul
Yakutsk Standard Time (GMT+09:00) Yakutsk
E. Australia Standard Time (GMT+10:00) Brisbane
154 of 1162
AUS Eastern Standard Time (GMT+10:00) Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney

West Pacific Standard Time (GMT+10:00) Guam, Port Moresby
Tasmania Standard Time (GMT+10:00) Hobart
Vladivostok Standard Time (GMT+10:00) Vladivostok
Central Pacific Standard Time (GMT+11:00) Magadan, Solomon Is., New Caledonia
New Zealand Standard Time (GMT+12:00) Auckland, Wellington
Fiji Standard Time (GMT+12:00) Fiji, Kamchatka, Marshall Is.
Tonga Standard Time (GMT+13:00) Nuku'alofa
Azores Standard Time (GMT-01:00) Azores
Cape Verde Standard Time (GMT-01:00) Cape Verde Is.
Mid-Atlantic Standard Time (GMT-02:00) Mid-Atlantic
E. South America Standard Time (GMT-03:00) Brasilia
Argentina Standard Time (GMT-03:00) Buenos Aires
SA Eastern Standard Time (GMT-03:00) Georgetown
Greenland Standard Time (GMT-03:00) Greenland
Montevideo Standard Time (GMT-03:00) Montevideo
Atlantic Standard Time (GMT-04:00) Atlantic Time (Canada)
SA Western Standard Time (GMT-04:00) La Paz
Central Brazilian Standard Time (GMT-04:00) Manaus
Pacific SA Standard Time (GMT-04:00) Santiago
SA Pacific Standard Time (GMT-05:00) Bogota, Lima, Quito, Rio Branco
Eastern Standard Time (GMT-05:00) Eastern Time (US & Canada)
US Eastern Standard Time (GMT-05:00) Indiana (East)
Central America Standard Time (GMT-06:00) Central America
Central Standard Time (GMT-06:00) Central Time (US & Canada)
Central Standard Time (Mexico) (GMT-06:00) Guadalajara, Mexico City, Monterrey - New
Mexico Standard Time (GMT-06:00) Guadalajara, Mexico City, Monterrey - Old
Canada Central Standard Time (GMT-06:00) Saskatchewan
US Mountain Standard Time (GMT-07:00) Arizona
Mountain Standard Time (Mexico) (GMT-07:00) Chihuahua, La Paz, Mazatlan - New
Mexico Standard Time 2 (GMT-07:00) Chihuahua, La Paz, Mazatlan - Old
Mountain Standard Time (GMT-07:00) Mountain Time (US & Canada)
Pacific Standard Time (GMT-08:00) Pacific Time (US & Canada)
Pacific Standard Time (Mexico) (GMT-08:00) Tijuana, Baja California
155 of 1162
Alaskan Standard Time (GMT-09:00) Alaska

Hawaiian Standard Time (GMT-10:00) Hawaii
Samoa Standard Time (GMT-11:00) Midway Island, Samoa
Dateline Standard Time (GMT-12:00) International Date Line West
While you can use any of the two variants for populating the TimeZone field: the display name of the
zone (for example, Mountain Standard Time), or the GMT offset (for example, GMT-07:00), we
recommend using the display name in order to maintain the correct geographical location specific to
that user. However, either of those two will populate the uploaded user profiles.
Note: If you leave the TimeZone field value blank (or type in anything other than the above) for
any of your users, during the upload those profiles will be populated with Eastern Standard Time
(GMT-05:00) Eastern Time (US & Canada) as the default, then it would be up to you or the user
to update his or her profile to correct it if it is wrong.
2.15 Managing image permissions (access rights)

To change, add or delete access rights (permissions) for images, refer to the Eloqua user
management: security groups documentation.
By default, permissions for images in the component library correspond with the settings in security
groups from the setup area. However, permissions on individual images can be changed using the
permissions drop-down available on the image details window.
To access the permissions settings for an image, click the Permissions... button in the top-right corner
of the image details window, the permissions window opens. All default permissions are already
applied to your image as shown in the following screenshot:
156 of 1162
2.16 Eloqua asynchronous tracking scripts

Important: Support for first-party cookies is available under our Controlled Availability program.
To request access to this feature, please log a service request through My Oracle Support
(support.oracle.com).
Note: You may need to work with your organization's IT department in order to set up a tracking
domain for first-party cookies to be enabled. Please contact Oracle Eloqua Product Support for
further information.
The Eloqua asynchronous tracking scripts allow you to track visits to your website seamlessly without
affecting the page load time for your visitors.They are supported and tested in all major browsers,
including:
Internet Explorer 6+
Firefox 1.5+
Opera 9+
Safari 3+
Chrome
In order to ensure the highest probability that Eloqua can track the page before the visitor leaves it, the
scripts are executed after the entire Document Object Model (DOM) is loaded, but before all content is
loaded in all browsers (except IE8 and below).The DOM specifies how the objects in a web page are
represented, what attributes are associated with each object, and how the objects and attributes can
be manipulated.While the DOM is a standard, different browsers support different levels of the DOM
and Javascript standards.For IE8 and below, the entire page must be loaded before requests to the
Eloqua servers are made, they do not support the event that indicates that the DOM has been
completely loaded.
Visitors are remembered based on a cookie value stored in their browser.There are two types of
cookies: first-party and third-party.How they are tracked in Eloqua varies from one to the other.
In the case of third-party cookies, a cookie with the .eloqua.com domain is created and populated with
a unique identifier upon the first request made by a visitor to the tracked website, even if the website is
not on the eloqua.com domain.This unique identifier (GUID) does not contain any information about
the visitor and is only used to correlate return visits by the same visitor. Unless the visitor clears their
browser cookies, this GUID remains constant and will continue to track his or her online activity.
157 of 1162
Safari browser on Apple's iOS platform already block third-party cookies by default and, Mozilla,
Microsoft, and Google may soon follow suit in Firefox, Internet Explorer and Chrome, respectively.
This would prevent Eloqua from tracking a visitor's online viewing habits. To get around this restriction,
you as an Eloqua user can add tracking scripts to your web pages to enable first-party cookies, with
certain limitations.
It is possible to drop a first-party cookie on the visitor's machine for branded domains configured to
support first-party cookies.If an existing third-party cookie already exists on that machine, its GUID is
used for the first-party cookie in order for Eloqua to continue to capture the visitor's activity.If no thirdparty cookie exists, a first-party cookie with a unique GUID is dropped on the visitor's machine.
Note: First-party cookies enabled on secure external (SSL-enabled) web pages require that the
first-party cookie tracking domain be an Eloqua microsite with an SSL certificate applied to it.
The following are now supported (previously unsupported):

Eloqua-hosted landing pages.
Branded and non-branded domains.
Secure websites (accessed via HTTPS:).
Strict mode tracking is not supported.
2.17 Cookie law country list

Below is an example list of countries that had cookies laws implemented at one point in time:
Austria
Belgium
Bulgaria
Cyprus
Czech Republic (opt-out)
Denmark
Estonia
Finland
France
Hungary
Ireland
Italy
158 of 1162
Latvia
Lithuania
Luxembourg
Malta
Netherlands
Poland
Portugal
Slovakia
Slovenia
Spain
Sweden
United Kingdom
2.18 Database Encryption

The Oracle Eloqua Advanced Data Security Cloud Service is an optional database encryption
offering which can solve a compliance need for customers who have a requirement or internal policy
that their data be encrypted at rest. This offering mitigates the risk associated with customer data
being leaked through lost or stolen hardware.
Note: Database encryption is also enabled by the Oracle Eloqua HIPAA Advanced Security
Add-on Cloud Service, and is included in the Oracle Eloqua Marketing for Life Sciences
Consumers Cloud Service. Learn more about the HIPAA add-on.
How does it work?

When Oracle Eloqua Advanced Data Security Cloud Service is selected as an add-on to an Eloqua
deployment, Eloqua will encrypt the customer database, the transaction logs and all backups
associated with that database. Eloqua currently uses AES-256 encryption with our Transparent Data
Encryption (TDE) implementation. The database encryption keys are backed up in our secure
password server. This password server is encrypted itself and requires a two-factor RSA token code to
access.
What technology is used?

The Database Encryption Offering utilizes Transparent Data Encryption (TDE). Here is a description of
TDE:
159 of 1162
You can take several precautions to help secure the database such as designing a secure system,
encrypting confidential assets, and building a firewall around the database servers. However, in a
scenario where the physical media (such as drives or backup tapes) are stolen, a malicious party can
just restore or attach the database and browse the data. One solution is to encrypt the sensitive data in
the database and protect the keys that are used to encrypt the data with a certificate. This prevents
anyone without the keys from using the data, but this kind of protection must be planned in advance.
Transparent data encryption (TDE) performs real-time I/O encryption and decryption of the data and log
files. The encryption uses a database encryption key (DEK), which is stored in the database boot
record for availability during recovery. The DEK is a symmetric key secured by using a certificate
stored in the master database of the server or an asymmetric key protected by an EKM module. TDE
protects data "at rest," meaning the data and log files. It provides the ability to comply with many laws,
regulations, and guidelines established in various industries. This enables software developers to
encrypt data by using AES and 3DES encryption algorithms without changing existing applications.
Are backups encrypted?

Backups of TDE-protected databases are encrypted. We also encrypt any archival tapes that go
offsite (again AES-256), so any TDE-protected data that leaves our data center is encrypted twice,
with different keys.
Why TDE?
TDE was selected because it offers a well-supported and industry-standard method of providing
complete encryption of a database. Eloqua investigated the encryption of individual fields, but this had
two serious drawbacks which precluded us from using that method:
Most customers who are interested in this would want email addresses encrypted, because
those are often considered sensitive information. Email addresses are used in a large number of
fields in Oracle Eloqua and could be used in areas not always used to store addresses (for
example, datacards). This would result in a large number of fields requiring encryption, and it
runs the risk that some fields containing sensitive data would not be encrypted.
If a database column is encrypted, we can't create an index of that field, seriously degrading
performance for any processes that need to search on that field (such as a search for an email
address, or an automated operation like an email batch).
How is this provisioned?

If the application instance has not been provisioned yet, the database provisioning team will set up the
new instance on a database server that supports the encryption offering. If the instance has already
been provisioned, the database will need to be migrated to a database server that supports TDE, and
then the database will need to be encrypted. If the database is still small, this should only require an
hour or so of downtime. If this is an older database that is much larger, the downtime associated with
the move depends on the size of the database.
160 of 1162
Caveats
Consult your Oracle Cloud Services Agreement for details regarding data protection. Go to
www.oracle.com/contracts, select Oracle Cloud Services and choose the appropriate agreement
based on your location.
2.19 Stopping a batch from sending

If you need to stop a batch from sending, there are three options:
Force Complete
Lock Batch
Delete Batch (Only if the batch has not sent any emails out)
Force Complete
Force Complete essentially snatches the Email Batch out of the email batch servers. All emails that
have been sent would remain sent, but any still "waiting in line" would be instantly pulled out and
marked as unsuccessful sends. However, please note that this is an "emergency" method of stopping
batches. Contacts within a campaign remain in those steps as scheduled or In progress. Once the
Force Complete is done, the batch is sealed off and will not re-activate or send out any more emails.
Lock Batch
In the case where a batch was sent / scheduled a bit later than intended, but you'd like to send out the
rest of the emails the next day, you'd choose to lock the batch. As such, locking it can be thought of as
a "pause" that is reversible. If an email was locked at 8:00 pm, you can go back into the same batch
and send it out at 8:00 am the next morning without having to schedule a new batch.
Delete Batch
If you catch the batch before a single email was sent out, it would also be possible to delete the batch
by clicking on the delete option.
For instructions in how to navigate to the batch control options, click here.
161 of 1162
2.20 "Run As User" for Campaigns and Programs

Contact Security allows you to restrict users' access to contact data. One of the concepts that
changes when using Contact Security is the activation of Eloqua campaigns and Program Builder
programs. When a user activates a campaign or a program, only contacts the user who activated the
campaign/program has access to are processed in the Campaign. This feature ensures that security
permissions and access rights are respected during an automated marketing Campaign.
Eloqua Campaigns
There is no change when activating a newly-created campaign. The changes for when you are
activating a previously activated Campaign and/or when you are an administrator are as follows:
When activating a campaign that was previously activated by a different user, you will receive a
warning that you are about to activate this campaign as a user other than the user who
previously activated the Campaign. This is important because if you have different contact
security permissions from the previous user, it will impact the contact currently in the campaign
and any Contacts that will flow into the campaign as it progresses.
Eloqua Campaign
Program Builder Program
162 of 1162
There may be instances in which you are doing work for another user who has specific contact
security access that will be applied to this Campaign. As an Eloqua Administrator, when you
begin the Campaign activation process, the Run As setting is available, where you can select
to activate the campaign as your user account or as any other user in your Eloqua organization.
.
Eloqua Campaign
Bonus Tip!
As an Eloqua administrator, you can see the name of the last person to activate the Campaign.
163 of 1162
To see the name of the last person to activate the Campaign:

In Campaign Canvas:
1. From the Action Menu (gear icon), select Settings.
2. On the Settings tab, the name of the last person to activate this Campaign is indicated at the
bottom of the panel, labeled Last Ran as User.
In Program Builder:
On the Program Details window, the name of the last person to activate the Campaign is shown
in Programs Run As field.
Eloqua Campaign
164 of 1162
165 of 1162
3 Oracle Eloqua AppCloud Apps

The OracleMarketing AppCloud lets Eloqua clients integrate with various external systems when
creating campaigns, emails, and landing pages. AppCloud apps include services that you add to the
campaign canvas, email, or landing page editors as you would any other element.
When contacts flow in to an action service, Eloqua calls out the external system to tell it to perform
the action. For example, theSalesforce.com Campaign Association action service lets you associate
a contact to a Salesforce campaign directly from the campaign canvas.
AppCloud decision services delegate decision-making to an external system: instead of needing to
bring the external system's data into Eloqua so that Eloqua can make the decision, decision services
call out to the external system, which returns 'yes' or 'no' for each client, routing them into the next
stages of the campaign. For example, the WebEx integration has decision services that calls out to
WebEx to check if a contact is registered for a meeting.
AppCloud audience services act much like a segment created in Eloqua, only contacts are fed
directly into the campaignfrom an external system. When the contacts are fed into the campaign, they
are also stored in Eloqua, so this saves a step.
In the email and landing page editors, AppCloud content services let marketers include content from
external systems in their assets. Other content services provide easy ways for marketers to include
links to other systems. For example, the Social Sharing content service for landing pages adds a
series of buttons that visitors can use to share the content on their social networks.
You are able to search for and install new apps in the Oracle Cloud Marketplace
(https://cloud.oracle.com/marketplace).
Apps that are already installed in your Eloqua instance can be viewed in the AppCloud Catalog
(Settings > Setup > AppCloud Catalog). The AppCloud Catalog allows you to re-configure the app,
check its status, and uninstall it.
3.1 Available apps

Push IO app
Salesforce.com Campaign Association app
Social Sharing app
Static Content app
Form Submit Action app
Oracle Service Cloud app
166 of 1162
Oracle SRM SmartCap app

WebEx app
GoToWebinar app
YouTube Embed app
Twitter Social Sign On app
Twitter Widgets app
Facebook Social Sign On app
RSS app
Contact Washing Machine app
External Activity app
3.2 Push IO app

Push IO is an enterprise class push notification platform built to satisfy the requirements of the worlds
best apps and meet the needs of modern marketers. It allows mobile app developers to quickly
integrate push capabilities into their apps by adding a few lines of code.
The integration between Eloqua and Push IO allows marketers to push messages to their integrated
mobile apps as an outbound channel within Eloqua, just like email. Push notifications can be
personalized. Use the Push IO- Eloqua integration to message mobile app users about offers and
discounts, event reminders, or other marketing activities.
3.2.1 Installing the Push IOapp

You must add the Push IOApp to your catalog and install it before you can start using its services. In
order to use the Push IO/Eloqua integration, you must be able to take a unique identifier from your
mobile app and sent it to Eloqua. This can be done using the Eloqua APIs. We are working on
streamlining this process so that information will come directly from the Push IO SDK.
Note: You must add the app to your catalog and install it before you can start using the service.
Important:The installation process must be done by a user with Client Administrator rights.
To install the Push IO app:
167 of 1162
1. Follow the URL provided:

https://cloud.oracle.com/marketplace/app/AppPushIO
2. Click Get App.
3. Log in with your Eloqua credentials, if required.
4. Click Accept to add the app to your AppCloud Catalog.
5. Configure the app:
i. Complete the following fields:
App name: this is the name of your app.
App Key: your app's key, provided by Push IO.
App Secret:your app's secret, provided by Push IO.
User identifier: the Eloqua contact field that stores the PushID user identifier.
ii. If you have multiple apps to add, click Add App to add another app, and complete its
details.
iii. ClickSave.
6. Click Accept to grant permission for the app to communicate with Eloqua on your behalf.
7. Click Proceed to complete the setup.
The app is now installed. If you look in your AppCloud Catalog (Settings >Setup > AppCloud
Catalog), you are able re-configure the app, check its status, and uninstall it.
Warning:If you click Re-Configure, you must go through the entire configuration process
again. The app will otherwise be unavailable for all users.
3.2.2 Adding the Push IO cloud action to your campaign

In order to use the Push IO cloud action service, the Push IOapp must be installed by a Customer
Administrator.
To add the Push IOcloud action to your campaign:

1. Open an existing campaign or create a new one.
2. Click on the Actions section to expand it, and view all available action elements, including
installed apps.
3. Drag the Push IOelement onto the campaign canvas, then double-click on it to open the
configure screen.The window that opens enables you to do the following:
168 of 1162
Change the name of the step to something more meaningful

Configure the element
Choose to route contacts that resulted in an error to another step (see the cloud decision
section in Configuring campaign canvas elements- Decisions for more information).
4. Click the Edit icon to configure the action. The Add PushIO App setup screen will appear in a
new window.
i. Push NotificationMessage:the message that will be sent to your contacts. You can
use the left brace ({) to include field merges, such as the contact's name.
ii. Push IODeep Link: deep linking is the ability for someone to receive the push
message, click on it, and be driven to a specific page in the app.Your mobile app
developer can provide you with the URL, which you can then paste into the deep link
URLfield.
iii. Push IOApp Name: you can store multiple Push IOapps in Eloqua.
Example: You might have a mobile event app, and another information app. To
specify which app the push notification should be sent from, pick it from the dropdown menu.
5. Click Save.
The Push IOcloud action should now be properly configured. When contacts flow into the step, Eloqua
calls out to Push IOto trigger the push notification.
169 of 1162
3.3 Salesforce.com Campaign Association app

OracleEloqua's Salesforce.com(SFDC) Campaign Association app lets you associate a contact to a
campaign from directly within the campaign canvas using a Cloud Action service.
This provide more granular control over when to send records to Salesforce, and allows for better
reporting of marketing effectiveness in both Eloqua and Salesforce.
3.3.1 Installing the Salesforce.com Campaign Association app

To install the Salesforce.com (SFDC)Campaign Association app:

https://cloud.oracle.com/marketplace/app/AppSFDCCampaignAss
2. Click Get App.
i. Pick the desired campaign association rule:
Associate Lead Only: Create a campaign response in Salesforce.com and
associate it to a Lead. A campaign response will only be created if the
Salesforce.com Lead ID is present on the Eloqua contact.
Associate Contact Only: Create a campaign response in Salesforce.com and
associate it to a contact . A campaign response will only be created if the
Salesforce.com Contact ID is present on the Eloqua contact.
Associate Lead and Contact: If Salesforce.com Lead and Contact IDs exist in
Eloqua, create campaign responses for each. If either a Salesforce Lead or a
Contact ID exist, create a campaign response for that one. This can result in the
creation of two campaign responses.
170 of 1162
Associate Lead First: If a Salesforce.com Lead ID exists on the contact in

Eloqua, create the campaign member and associate it to that Lead ID. If not,
check if a Contact ID exists and do the proper association.
Associate Contact First - If a Salesforce.com Contact ID exists on the contact
in Eloqua, create the campaign member and associate it to that Contact ID. If not,
check if a Lead ID exists and do the proper association.
ii. Specify which Eloqua field maps to Salesforce's ContactID and LeadID fields.
iii. Enable testing mode which lets you toggle the app between a Salesforce sandbox and a
live production environment.
iv. ClickSave.
Note: SFDC ContactID, LeadID, and AccountID are case sensitive.

7. Sign in with Salesforce so that the app can interact with Salesforce.
8. Click Complete the Setup.
3.3.2 Adding the Salesforce.com cloud action to your campaign

In order to use the Salesforce (SFDC)cloud action service, the Salesforce Campaign Association app
must be installed by a Customer Administrator.
To add the SFDCcloud action to your campaign:

installed apps.
3. Drag the SFDCCampaign Action element onto the campaign canvas. Then, double-click on it
to open the configure screen.The window that opens enables you to do the following:
171 of 1162

Choose to route contacts that resulted in an error to another step (see the cloud action
section in Configuring campaign canvas elements-Actions for more information).
4. Click the Edit icon to configure the action. TheSalesforce Campaign Association setup screen
will open in a new window.
i. Input the SalesforceCampaignID .

ii. Select the appropriate Salesforce Campaign Status.
Note: If you have campaign sync enabled with your Salesforce.com CRMintegration,
the SalesforceCampaign ID will be automatically populated. You can then choose the
appropriate status from the drop-down menu. If you do not have campaign sync enabled,
you can input a Salesforce Campaign IDmanually. You can also configure the
Salesforce Campaign ID in the campaign's settings by clicking the Gear menu, then
Settings, and inputting the value in the CRMCampaign IDfield.
5. Click Save.
The SFDCcloud action should now be properly configured. When contacts flow into the step, Eloqua
calls out to create a campaign member inSalesforce for that contact.
3.4 Social Sharing app

Oracle Eloqua's social sharing app helps you provide your audience with the means to share your
content with their social networks. This can help you reach a wider audience, increasing your traffic
and exposure. Prospective contacts who see that your content has been shared by their trusted
colleagues may also be more likely to click through.
The social sharing app allows you to select which social networks you're interested in (Facebook,
Twitter, LinkedIn, Google+, and Reddit), and embed a series of icons that people can use to easily
share your content on those networks.
172 of 1162
3.4.1 Installing the Social Sharing app

To install the Social Sharing app:

https://cloud.oracle.com/marketplace/app/AppSocialSharing
2. Click Get App.
i. Select the social networks that you want to provide the option to share
on:LinkedIn,Twitter, Facebook, Google+, and Reddit.
Note: This is a global setting: marketers can choose a subset of the list when
they add the social sharing service to a landing page or email.
ii. ClickSave.
173 of 1162
3.4.2 Adding the Social Sharing service to your assets

In order to use the social sharing service, the YouTube Embed App must be installed by a customer
administrator.
To add the Social Sharing service to an asset:

The social sharing service experience is identical in emails and landing pages.
1. Open or create a landing page or email on which you will add the social sharing buttons.
2. Click Cloud Content to open the Cloud Content menu, which lists all available content
services.
3. Locate theSocial Sharing service, either by scrolling through the list or searching with the
search box.
4. Drag theSocial Sharing service onto the landing page, and place it where you want it to appear.
5. Double-click the element to open the configuration screen.Here, you will choose the video that
you want to display and configure any preferences:
i. Choose the social networks you want to include. Stipulate if you want them to be
displayed horizontally or vertically, and what size the icons should be.
ii. Specify the Article URL that you want to be shared. If you are including social sharing on
a landingpage, you can choose to use thelanding page URLas the Article URL.
iii. Provide the article's metadata (Title, Source, and Summary), which will be included
174 of 1162
when someone clicks the share icons. Each social network handles the metadata in its
own way, but in general the fields are combined together to provide a default message
when someone shares the content.
Example: For the above configuration, the default Tweet when someone clicks
the Twitter share icon would read "Checking out Purrfect Gift Guide 2014 at
ExampleCorp Blog! https://example.com/purrfectgifts2014"
6. Click Save. When it is finished saving, you see a green Success!bar.

7. Click the X icon to exit the screen. A placeholder image appears to show the size and number of
icons.
8. Click Save to save the asset.
When you view the rendered landing page URL or email, you will see the share icons and can click on
them to share the content.
3.5 Static Content app

Oracle Eloqua's static content app allows you to input a block of HTML into an Eloqua landing page.
For example, you are able to embed code from maps and other web services.
The Static HTML app allows you to leverage all of the power of Eloqua's landing page editor, as well as
allowing you to easily embed content from other sources.
3.5.1 Installing the Static Content app

To install the static content app:

https://cloud.oracle.com/marketplace/app/AppStaticContent
175 of 1162
2. Click Get App.

3.5.2 Adding the Static Content service to your landing pages

In order to use the static content service, the static content app must be installed by a customer
administrator.
To add the static content service to a landing page:

1. Open or create a landing page on which you will input the HTMLcontent.
services.
3. Locate theStatic Content service, either by scrolling through the list or searching with the
search box.
4. Drag theStatic Content service onto the landing page, and place it where you want it to appear.
5. Double-click the element to open the configuration screen.
176 of 1162
i. Input your HTML content.

ii. Click Preview to view your content (optional).
iii. Click Save. When it is finished saving, you see a green Success!bar.
iv. Click the X icon to exit the screen.
6. Click Save to save the landing page.
You should now be able to view the content on the live page.
Note: The content will not render within the landing page editor.
3.6 Form Submit Action app

Eloqua forms are a powerful tool, that allow end users to have a lot of control over what they want to do
with the contact data. The Form Submit Action app allows users to benefit from that power, directly
from the canvas. It allows you to select an Eloqua form, map the fields and automate the submission.
It can be used to trigger update rules, create custom objects, generate activites or just about anything
that can be done from a form. The Form Submit Action services is available on the campaign canvas
once the app is installed.
3.6.1 Installing the Form Submit Action app

To install the Form Submit Action app:

https://cloud.oracle.com/marketplace/app/AppFormSubmitAction
2. Click Get App.
177 of 1162

5. Click Save. (This app does not require any configuration.)
3.6.2 Adding the Form Submit Action to your campaign

In order to use the Form Submit Action service, the Form Submit Action app must be installed by a
customer administrator.
To add the Form Submit Action to your campaign:

2. Click on the Action section to expand it, and view all available action elements, including
installed apps.
3. Drag the Form Submit element onto the campaign canvas. Then, double-click on it to open the
configuration screen. The window that opens enables you to do the following:
Choose to route contacts that resulted in an error to another step (see the cloud action
section in Configuring campaign canvas elements-Actions for more information).
4. Click the Edit icon to configure the action.
178 of 1162
i. Select an Eloqua Form.

ii. Select the Contact Field to be mapped to each Form Field.
iii. Click Save. When it is finished saving, you see a green Success!bar.
Note: Clicking Clear Fields will remove all current field mappings, and allow you to
remap them.
5. Click Save to save the campaign.

The Form Submit Action should now be properly configured. When contacts flow into the step, Eloqua
will push their details to a form submission.
3.7 Oracle Service Cloud app

Oracle Eloqua's Service Clouds products add leading customer experience capabilities help empower
companies to interact with and provide a consistent experience to customers across channels.
The Service Cloud app allows you to make decisions on Eloqua contacts based on information stored
in Service Cloud. This includes things like Does this contact have an open case? or Has this contact
called into support 5 or more times in the last 30 days?
3.7.1 Installing the Oracle Service Cloud app

To install the Oracle Service Cloud app:

https://cloud.oracle.com/marketplace/app/AppOracleServiceCloud
2. Click Get App.
179 of 1162

i. Complete Oracle Service Cloud Authentication
Enter your Oracle Service Cloud credentials and service URL.
Note: The format of the service URL is:
http://<host_name>/cgibin/<interface>.cfg/services/soap
Where <host_name> and <interface> need to be replaced with appropriate
values.
Click Test Credentials to validate.

ii. Complete Queries Setup:
Click New.
Specify a Name.
Specify ROQL query parameters.
Click Test Query to validate.
Specify Fields to match between Eloqua and Right now. Email address is
recommended.
Repeat the Queries Setup to create multiple queries, if desired.
ClickSave.
3.7.2 Adding the Oracle Service Cloud decision to your campaign

In order to use the Oracle Service Cloud decision in your campaign, Oracle Service Cloud must be
installed by a Customer Administrator.
180 of 1162
To add the Oracle Service Cloud decision to your campaign:

2. Click on the Decisions section to expand it, and view all available decision elements, including
installed apps.
3. Drag the Oracle Service Cloud Query element onto the campaign canvas, then double-click
on it to open the configure screen.The window that opens enables you to do the following:
Choose to route contacts that resulted in an error to another step (see:Campaign canvas
elements for more information).
i. Select a configured Oracle Service Cloud Query by name from the drop-down
ii. Click Save
iii. Close the browser tab to return to your campaign
The Oracle Service Cloud decision should now be properly configured. When contacts flow into the
step, Eloqua calls out to Oracle Service Cloud to verify information against the previously specified
query.
3.8 Oracle SRM SmartCap app

Oracle SRM SmartCap (Smart Create a Post) is an integration with Oracle's Social Relationship
Management (SRM) Tool. SmartCap takes the information from an Eloqua landing page and pushes it
to SRM. This allows you to schedule a post on a variety of social networks, such as Twitter and
Facebook. Those posts will drive people back to the Eloqua hosted landing page.
To participate in discussions with other users of both SRM and Eloqua, join the Topliners SRM/Eloqua
users group.
3.8.1 Installing the Oracle SRM SmartCap app

181 of 1162
To install the Oracle SRM SmartCap app:

https://cloud.oracle.com/marketplace/app/AppOracleSRM
2. Click Get App.
i. Enter your SRM login URL.
Note: Enter the entire URL, including the hypertext transfer protocol. The default
URL is https://www.eloqua.com.
ii. ClickSave.
3.8.2 Pushing a landing page to the Oracle SRM SmartCap service

In order to use the Oracle SRM SmartCap service, it must be installed by a customer administrator.
To push a landing page to Oracle SRM SmartCap service:

1. Open or create a landing page that you would like to push to the Oracle SRM SmartCap service.
Important: Select a microsite with a valid URL for your landing page.
182 of 1162
2. Click the cloud menu icon on the right hand side to open the cloud menu, which lists all available
content services. The cloud menu icon looks like this:
3. Click theSRM SmartCap Menu Service. A login screen for SRM opens in a separate tab.
i. Enter your login credentials and click Login.

ii. Create your content. The post name and URL will be prepopulated with information from
your landing page.
183 of 1162
iii. Click Save Draft or Publish Post.

3.9 WebEx app

OracleEloqua's WebEx integration makes it easy for you to register contacts for WebEx events and
meetings as part of your campaigns. The new WebEx integration also lets you make decisions based
on attendance or registration without needing to bring your WebEx data into Eloqua.
The WebEx app includes the following services, which you will find in the campaign canvas when you
install the app:
184 of 1162
Cloud Actions:
WebExMeeting Registration
WebEx Event Registration
Cloud Decisions:
WebEx Meeting Registered?
WebEx Meeting Attended?
WebEx Event Registered?
WebEx Event Attended?
Cloud Audience:
WebExMeeting Registration Feeder
WebEx Meeting Attendance Feeder
WebEx Event Registration Feeder
WebEx Event Attendance Feeder
3.9.1 Installing the WebEx app

To install the WebEx app:

https://cloud.oracle.com/marketplace/app/AppWebEx
2. Click Get App.
i. Input your WebEx credentials in the left-hand pane of the configuration screen. Every
instance of the app will use these credentials to interact with WebEx. The company
name is first part of your WebEx URL.
185 of 1162
ii. Map WebEx's fields to Eloqua's using the drop-down menus in the right-hand pane. This
mapping is used when registering a contact for an event or meeting.
iii. ClickSave.
3.9.2 Registering contacts for a WebEx meeting or event

Using Oracle Eloqua's WebEx integration, you can register contacts for WebEx events or meetings
directly in your multi-step campaign using the WebExMeeting Registration and WebExEvent
Registration cloud action services.
In order to use the WebEx cloud action services, the WebEx App must be installed by a Customer
Administrator.
To register a contact for a WebEx event or meeting:

installed apps.
3. Drag the appropriateWebEx element onto the campaign canvas. Then, double-click on it to
open the configure screen. The window that opens enables you to do the following:
4. Click the Edit icon to configure the action. The configuration screen provides two options:
Select an existing event or meeting that you have created in WebEx: input the WebEx
session ID, and click Find Event to confirm that it is a valid ID.
Create a new event or meeting: click Create.The new event/meeting will be created,
186 of 1162
listing its ID. Fill out the scheduling and description information.
Note: You may wish to copy the ID for future reference so that you can easily
refer to it.
5. Specify whether you want contacts to be notified via WebEx when they are registered in the
event. Otherwise, they'll receive an email from Eloqua.
6. Click Save.
When a contact flows into the action step, Eloqua calls out to WebEx to register the contact in the
event.
3.9.3 Routing contacts based on WebEx attendance or registration

Using Oracle Eloqua's WebEx integration, you can route contacts in your multi-step campaign based
on whether or not they have registered for, or attended a WebEx event or meeting.
In order to use the WebEx cloud decision services, the WebEx App must be installed by a customer
administrator.
To route contacts based on their WebEx event/meeting attendance or

registration:
2. Click on the Decision section to expand it, and view all available decision elements, including
installed apps.
3. Drag the appropriateWebEx element onto the campaign canvas. Then double-click on it to open
the configure screen. The window that opens enables you to do the following:
4. Click the Edit icon to configure the decision. The configure screen varies slightly depending on
whether you are configuring a registration or attendance service.
Registration:
i. Input the event or meeting key. You can find this by looking up your scheduled meetings
and events in WebEx.
187 of 1162
ii. Click Find Event to confirm that you have input a valid ID.
Attendance:
i. Input the event or meeting key. You can find this by looking up your scheduled meetings
and events in WebEx.
ii. Click Find Event to confirm that you have input a valid ID. You will be routed to the next
configuration screen.
iii. Set the Attendance Duration. This specifies the length of time, in minutes, that a
contact has to attend a meeting or event in order for it to count as having attended.
Select Only accept contacts if they have attended for the specified duration or
longer, to exclude contacts that are below the threshold.
Example: If someone attended only 2 minutes of a 60 minute event, you might

not want to consider them as an attendee in your next campaign steps.
5. Click Save.
When a contact flows into the decision step, Eloqua calls out to WebEx to determine whether the
contact meets the criteria, and routes them down the appropriate path of the campaign.
3.9.4 Adding contacts to a campaign based on WebEx attendance

Using Oracle Eloqua's WebEx integration, attendees for both meetings and events are able to flow into
Eloqua as contacts at regularly scheduled intervals. This feeder service allows you to add contacts
who attended the WebEx meeting or event but did not register through Eloqua. New contacts are
created in Eloqua and existing contacts are updated using information provided during WebEx
registration.
In order to use the WebEx feeder services, the WebEx App must be installed by a Customer
Administrator.
To add a contact to a campaign based on WebEx attendance:

2. Click on the Audience section to expand it, and view all available audience elements, including
installed apps.
3. Drag the WebEx Meeting or Event Attendance Feeder element onto the campaign canvas.
Then, double-click on it to open the configure screen. The window that opens enables you to do
188 of 1162
the following:
4. Click the Edit icon to configure the action. The configuration screen provides the following
options:
i. Meeting ID or Event ID:

Enter the WebEx ID for an existing meeting or event.
refer to it.
ii. Duration Acceptance Threshold:

Enter how long someone needs to attend a meeting or event before appearing in
the feeder.
Important: The total minutes attended for a record with an email address are
added together. If user@example.com attends on Monday for 5 minutes, and
again on Tuesday for 10 minutes, the total time (15 minutes) is considered for the
acceptance threshold.
iii. Timing:
Run Every: Select the frequency for the feeder (from 15 minutes up to 1 day).
Until: Select the end date.
189 of 1162
Note: It is recommended to set the feeder end date to 3 days after the meeting or
event, unless a recording will be provided.
5. Click Save.
When WebEx attendees flow through the audience element, they are added to Eloqua as contacts at
the scheduled intervals.
3.9.5 Adding contacts to a campaign based on WebEx registration

Using Oracle Eloqua's WebEx integration, registrants for both meetings and events are able to flow
into Eloqua as contacts at regularly scheduled intervals. This feeder service allows you to add
contacts who registered for a meeting or event directly with WebEx, rather than through Eloqua. New
contacts are created in Eloqua and existing contacts are updated using information provided during
WebEx registration.
In order to use the WebEx feeder services, the WebEx App must be installed by a Customer
Administrator.
To add a contact to a campaign based on WebEx registration:

2. Click on the Audience section to expand it, and view all available audience elements, including
installed apps.
3. Drag the WebEx Meeting or Event Register Feeder element onto the campaign canvas. Then,
double-click on it to open the configure screen. The window that opens enables you to do the
following:
4. Click the Edit icon to configure the action. The configuration screen provides the following
options:
i. Meeting ID:
Enter the WebEx ID for an existing meeting or event.
refer to it.
190 of 1162
ii. Timing:
Run Every: Select the frequency for the feeder (from 15 minutes up to 1 day).
Until: Select the end date.
Note: It is recommended to set the feeder end date to 3 days after the meeting or
event, unless a recording will be provided.
5. Click Save.
When WebEx registrants flow through the audience element, they are added to Eloqua as contacts at
the regularly scheduled intervals.
3.10 GoToWebinar app

OracleEloqua's GoToWebinar integration makes it easy for you to register contacts for GoToWebinar
events as part of your campaigns. The new GoToWebinar integration also lets you make decisions
based on attendance or registration without needing to bring your GoToWebinar data into Eloqua.
The GoToWebinar app includes the following services, which you will find in the campaign canvas
when you install the app:
Cloud Actions:
GoToWebinar Register
Cloud Decisions:
GoToWebinar Registered?
GoToWebinar Attended?
3.10.1 Installing the GoToWebinar app

To install the GoToWebinar app:
191 of 1162

https://cloud.oracle.com/marketplace/app/AppGoToWebinar
2. Click Get App.
5. Complete the Citrix GotoWebinar Registration Application Setup:
i. Click Sign in with Citrix.
ii. Enter your credentials.
iii. Click Save.
3.10.2 Registering contacts for a GoToWebinar event

Using Oracle Eloqua's GoToWebinar integration, you can register contacts for GoToWebinar events
directly in your multi-step campaign using the GoToWebinar Registration cloud action services.
In order to use the GoToWebinar cloud action services, the GoToWebinar App must be installed by a
Customer Administrator.
To register a contact for a GoToWebinar event or meeting:

installed apps.
3. Drag the GoToWebinar Register element onto the campaign canvas. Then, double-click on it
to open the configuration screen. The window that opens enables you to do the following:
192 of 1162
i. Enter the GoToWebinar ID for the webinar you want the contact to be registered for.
The first name, last name, and email address of the contact will be collected.
ii. Click Save.
Note: You may wish to copy the ID for future reference so that you can easily refer to it.
When a contact flows into the action step, Eloqua calls out to GoToWebinar to register the contact in
the event.
3.10.3 Routing contacts based on GoToWebinar attendance

Using Oracle Eloqua's GoToWebinar integration, you can route contacts in your multi-step campaign
based on whether or not they have attended a GoToWebinar event.
In order to use the GoToWebinar cloud decision services, the GoToWebinar App must be installed by a
To route contacts based on their GoToWebinar event attendance:

installed apps.
3. Drag the GoToWebinar Attended? element onto the campaign canvas. Then double-click on
it to open the configure screen. The window that opens enables you to do the following:
4. Click the Edit icon to configure the decision.
i. Enter the GoToWebinar ID
ii. Click Save
193 of 1162
When a contact flows into the decision step, Eloqua calls out to GoToWebinar to determine whether
the contact meets the criteria, and routes them down the appropriate path of the campaign.
3.10.4 Routing contacts based on GoToWebinar registration

Using Oracle Eloqua's GoToWebinar integration, you can route contacts in your multi-step campaign
based on whether or not they have registered for a GoToWebinar event.
In order to use the GoToWebinar cloud decision services, the GoToWebinar App must be installed by a
To route contacts based on their GoToWebinar event registration:

installed apps.
3. Drag the GoToWebinar Registered? element onto the campaign canvas. Then double-click
on it to open the configure screen. The window that opens enables you to do the following:
4. Click the Edit icon to configure the decision.
i. Enter the GoToWebinar ID
ii. Click Save
When a contact flows into the decision step, Eloqua calls out to GoToWebinar to determine whether
the contact meets the criteria, and routes them down the appropriate path of the campaign.
3.11 YouTube Embed app

TheYouTube Embed app allows you to easily include YouTube videos in your emails and landing
pages. The YouTube Embed app lets you embed a YouTube video in your landing page, and configure
its playback options to autoplay, loop, and show related videos. YouTube videos included in emails
direct the recipient to view the video on the YouTube website.
194 of 1162
Video content is a great way to increase engagement with your audience and provides a nice
alternative to long form text.
3.11.1 Installing the YouTube Embed app

To install the YouTube Embed app:

https://cloud.oracle.com/marketplace/app/AppYouTubeEmbed
2. Click Get App.
3.11.2 Adding the YouTube Embed service to an email

In order to use the YouTube Embed cloud content service, the YouTube Embed app must be installed
by a customer administrator.
To add the YouTube Embed service to an email:
195 of 1162
1. Open or create an email that you wish to add YouTube content to.
2. Click Cloud Content to open the cloud content menu, which lists all available content services.
3. Locate theYouTube Embed app, by either scrolling through the list or searching with the search
box.
4. Drag theYouTube Embed app onto the email and place it where you want the YouTube content
to appear on the email.
5. Double-click the element to open the app configuration screen. Select the video that you want to
display and configure any preferences:
i. Enter the title or the video IDif you know it and click Search, the list of matching videos
will be displayed below the search bar.
ii. Click on the video that you want to use.The title of the video will be populated into the
VideoTitle field.
iii. Set the size by picking from the drop-down menu. Small, Medium, Large, and XL are the
standard YouTube sizes. Choose Customif you want to customize the size.
iv. Click Save. When it is finished saving, you will see a green Success!bar.
v. Click the X icon to exit the screen.
6. Resize the content container (preview image) to be approximately the same size as you picked
in the configuration. If you have the responsive vertical resizing option enabled the container
may re-size automatically
Note:You cannot currently test emails that include content services (such as the YouTube
Embed app) by choosing the Email a Contactoption from the Email Editor menu. To test the
196 of 1162
email, you need to create a campaign with a segment that includes your email address, and
execute that campaign.
When a recipient receives a message with YouTube content included, they can click on the video
image to be routed to the YouTube website to watch it.
3.11.3 Adding the YouTube Embed service to a landing page

In order to use the YouTube Embed cloud content service, the YouTube Embed App must be installed
by a Customer Administrator.
To add the YouTube Embed service to a landing page:

1. Open or create a landing page that you wish to add YouTube content to.
2. Click Cloud Content to open the cloud content menu, which lists all available content services.
3. Locate theYouTube Embed app, either by scrolling through the list or searching with the search
box.
4. Drag theYouTube Embed app onto the landing page, and place it where you want the YouTube
content to appear on the landing page.
5. Double-click the element to open the app configuration screen. Select the video that you want to
display and configure any preferences:
i. Enter the title or the video IDif you know it and click Search, the list of matching videos
will be displayed below the search bar.
197 of 1162
ii. Click on the video that you want to use.The title of the video will be populated into the
VideoTitle field.
iii. Set the size by picking from the drop-down menu. Small, Medium, Large, and XL are the
standard YouTube sizes. Choose Customif you want to customize the size.
iv. Set any optional parameters:
Auto play: the video automatically plays when the landing page loads
Loop video: the video will play repeatedly rather than stopping when the video is
done
Show related videos: when the video is done playing, links to related videos are
displayed in the content area.
v. Click Save. When it is finished saving, you will see a green Success!bar.
vi. Click the X icon to exit the screen.
6. Re-size the content container (preview image) to be approximately the same size as you picked
in the configuration. If you have the responsive vertical resizing option enabled the container
may re-size automatically.
When you visit the landingpage URL, the YouTube video should load and play according to your
configured options.
3.12 Twitter Social Sign On app

Oracle Eloqua's Twitter Social Sign On app makes it easy for marketers to add a Sign in with Twitter
button to their landing pages, which provides your audience with the means to share your content with
their social networks. This makes it easier for visitors to complete forms, letting them use existing
credentials rather than having to retype things, reducing barriers to participation. It also allows
marketers to gather additional information from their audience, augmenting their social profile.
When a visitor clicks on the Sign in withTwitter button, they are directed to Twitter's authorization
page, where they can grant permission to your company to use their Twitter information. Then, the
information from Twitter is submitted to Eloqua. Users have the ability to supplement the Twitter
information with additional form fields if they want.
The following fields can be captured from Twitter and mapped to an Eloqua form:
Name
Twitter Handle
198 of 1162
Location
Profile Image URL
URL
Twitter ID
Followers Count
Following Count
Language
Verified
Description
Timezone
Tweet Count
Account Creation Date
3.12.1 Installing the Twitter Social Sign On app

To install the Twitter Social Sign On app:

https://cloud.oracle.com/marketplace/app/AppTwitterSocialSignOn
2. Click Get App.
i. If you would like to use the standard Eloqua branded Twitter app, make no selection.
When someone hits the Twitter Authorization Page it will be branded as Eloqua.
ii. If you would like to have a branded Twitter page, check the Define a Custom Twitter
App checkbox and input your Consumer Key and Secret Key. [Recommended]
199 of 1162
Note: If you would like to have a branded Twitter page, follow these instructions
to create the app within Twitter:
https://community.oracle.com/community/topliners/do-it/blog/2012/02/17/socialsign-on--custom-apps-for-twitter-linkeing-facebook
iii. ClickSave.
3.12.2 Adding the Twitter Social Sign On service to your landing pages
A Sign in with Twitter button can be added to your landing pages. When visitors click this button, they
are directed to Twitter's authorization page, where they can grant permission to your company to use
your Twitter information. Then, the information from Twitter is submitted to Eloqua. Users have the
ability to supplement the Twitter information with additional form fields if they want.
In order to use the Twitter Social Sign On service, it must be installed by a customer administrator.
To add the Twitter Social Sign On service to a landing page:

1. Open or create a landing page to which you want to add the Sign in with Twitter button.
services.
3. Locate theTwitter Social Sign On service, either by scrolling through the list or searching with
the search box.
4. Drag the Twitter Social Sign On service onto the asset, and place it where you want it to appear.
200 of 1162
i. Select an Eloqua Form that you want to complete using Twitter data from the drop-down
menu.
ii. Map the Eloqua Fields to corresponding Twitter Fields.
Both static fields and custom fields can be mapped. If Custom fields are
selected, the following styling information for the form is required:
HTMLprior to the form
HTML after the form
CSS Content
Submit Button Name
Mapping Query String values allows you to capture data such as the CampaignID
to determine which campaign drove the customer to your landing page.
Example: Entering a Query String of CampaignID will capture the value of 102 in
the example below.
iii. Click Save Settings. When it is finished saving, you see a green Success!bar.
201 of 1162
Note: You are able to capture a user's email address by performing a lookup on the
visitor ID. You must first create an email address form field where the HTML Name is
emailAddress.
If there are multiple fields requested on the secondary form, the user will be prompted to
manually enter their email address.
If email address is the only form field, and Eloqua is able to determine the visitor ID, the
email will be submitted automatically. The user will not be prompted to manually enter
their email address.

A Sign in with Twitter button is now available on your landing page.
3.13 Twitter Widgets app

Oracle Eloqua's Twitter Widgets app allows you to use the latest Twitter functionality to engage your
customers.
The following services are available with the Twitter Widgets app:
Embedded Tweet: This service allows you to define a tweet to embed in your landing page.
Twitter Card:This service allows you to create a summary thumbnail of your landing page,
which can be tweeted.
Twitter Follow Button: This service adds a Follow button to your landing page.
Twitter Timeline: This service allows you to embed a Twitter timeline in your landing page to
display relevant tweets.
3.13.1 Installing the Twitter Widgets app

To install the Twitter Widgets app:
202 of 1162

https://cloud.oracle.com/marketplace/app/AppTwitterWidgets
2. Click Get App.
5. Configure the app. The following settings are defaults and can be overwritten at the instance
level.
i. Default Twitter Handle: Enter a default Twitter handle that will be used by the various
services/widgets.
ii. Language: Select the default language for the various services/widgets (such as the
Follow button, time/date, and so on).

iii. Follower Count: Check the checkbox if you would like the follower count to be displayed
next to the Follow button by default.
iv. Follow Button Size: Select the default size of the Follow button; medium or large.
v. Conversations: Select whether you want to Show or Hide conversations for a tweet by
default. When conversations are shown, it will highlight if the embedded tweet was in
reply to another tweet, and it will include the initial tweet.
vi. ClickSave.
203 of 1162
3.13.2 Adding the Embedded Tweet service to your landing pages

The Embedded Tweet service allows you to embed a tweet in a landing page.
In order to use the Embedded Tweet service, the Twitter Widgets app must be installed by a customer
administrator.
To add the Embedded Tweet service to a landing page:

1. Open or create a landing page in which you want to embed a tweet.
services.
3. Locate theEmbedded Tweet service, either by scrolling through the list or searching with the
search box.
4. Drag the Embedded Tweet service onto the asset, and place it where you want it to appear.
5. Double-click the element to open the configuration screen:
i. Embedded Tweet URL: Enter the entire URL, including the hypertext transfer protocol,
of the tweet to embed.
204 of 1162
Important: To view a Tweet URL, click the date/time display for the particular
tweet.
ii. Language: Select the language the Follow button and time/date should appear in.
iii. Conversations: Select whether you want to Show or Hide conversations for this tweet.
When conversations are shown, it will highlight if the embedded tweet was in reply to
another tweet, and it will include the initial tweet.
6. Click Save Settings. When it is finished saving, you see a green Success!bar.
7. Click the X icon to exit the screen.
The tweet is now available on your landing page.
3.13.3 Adding the Twitter Card service to your landing page

The Twitter Card service allows you to have more granular control of how your content looks within
Twitter when someone tweets a link back to your page. This feature provides viewers a preview of your
content before they are taken to your landing page.
Important: You should only configure one Twitter Card for each landing page.
205 of 1162
In order to use the Twitter Card service, the Twitter Widgets app must be installed by a customer
administrator.
To add the Twitter Card service to a landing page:

services.
3. Locate theTwitter Card service, either by scrolling through the list or searching with the search
box.
4. Drag the Twitter Card service onto the asset, and place it where you want it to appear.
i. Username: Enter the Twitter handle of the account this Twitter Card should be attributed
to.
ii. Title: Enter a title for the Twitter Card. (Maximum 70 characters.)
iii. Description: Enter a description of the landing page. (Maximum 200 characters.)
iv. Image (optional): Enter the URL of an image, which symbolizes your landing page. The
image must be a minimum size of 120px by 120px and must be less than 1MB in file
size.
Note: For additional information about the above configuration fields, please see
Twitter's developer documentation on Cards
(https://dev.twitter.com/cards/types/summary).
Your landing page content can now be previewed when tweeted.
206 of 1162
3.13.4 Adding a Twitter Follow button to your landing page

A Follow button can be added to your landing page to define someone to follow (typically your brand).
This feature makes it easier for visitors to follow your brand on Twitter. The follower count can also be
displayed next to the Follow button.
In order to add a Follow button, the Twitter Widgets app must be installed by a customer administrator.
To add a Follow button to a landing page:

services.
3. Locate theTwitter Follow service, either by scrolling through the list or searching with the
search box.
4. Drag the Twitter Follow service onto the asset, and place it where you want it to appear.
i. Twitter Handle: Enter the Twitter handle of the Twitter account to be followed.
ii. Follower Count: Check the checkbox if you would like the follower count to be displayed
next to the Follow button.
iii. Button Language: Select a language for the Follow button to be displayed in.
iv. Follow Button Size: Select the size of the Follow button; medium or large.
The Follow button is now available on your landing page.
3.13.5 Adding the Twitter Timeline service to your landing pages

The Twitter Timeline service allows you to embed a Twitter timeline in your landing page to display
relevant tweets.
207 of 1162
In order to use the Twitter Timeline service, the Twitter Widgets app must be installed by a customer
administrator.
To add the Twitter Timeline service to a landing page:

1. Open or create a landing page in which you want to embed a Twitter timeline.
services.
3. Locate theTwitter Timeline service, either by scrolling through the list or searching with the
search box.
4. Drag the Twitter Timeline service onto the asset, and place it where you want it to appear.
i. Twitter Widget ID: Enter the ID for your Twitter Widget.
Important: To obtain a Twitter Widget ID, go to Twitter's creating a user widget

page (https://twitter.com/settings/widgets/new/user). Configure your widget and
click Create widget. The Widget ID can be found in the HTML code displayed
below the preview: <...data-widget-
id="xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx">.
ii. Advanced Options:
Enable Dark Theme: Check this box to use display your timeline using a darker
look and feel.
Link Color: Enter a hexadecimal color code to be used for the link colour.
Example:#bf3eff.
Border Color: Enter a hexadecimal color code to be used for the timeline border.
Example:#98d72c.
Size: Select a custom width and height.

Show Header, Footer, Borders, Scrollbar: Check the checkbox if you wish to
show these fields.
Transparent: Check this box to remove the timeline background and view the
background of your landing page.
208 of 1162
Number of Tweets to Display: Enter the number of tweets you want to display in
the timeline. (Maximum 20 tweets can be displayed.)
Note: If this option is selected, the height and Show Scrollbar options will
be disabled.
Aria Politeness: Select either Polite or Assertive from the drop-down. For
additional information about Aria Politeness, please see Twitter's documentation
on increasing accessibility priority of a timeline region
(https://dev.twitter.com/web/embedded-timelines).
The Twitter Timeline is now available on your landing page.
3.14 Facebook Social Sign On app

Oracle Eloqua's Facebook Social Sign On app makes it easy for marketers to add a Log in with
Facebook button to their landing pages, which provides your audience with the means to share your
content with their social networks. This makes it easier for visitors to complete forms, letting them use
existing credentials rather than having to retype things, reducing barriers to participation. It also allows
marketers to gather additional information from their audience, augmenting their social profile.
When a visitor clicks on the Log in withFacebook button, they are directed to Facebook's
authorization page, where they can grant permission to your company to use their Facebook
information. Then, the information from Facebook is submitted to Eloqua. Users have the ability to
supplement the Facebook information with additional form fields if they want.
The following fields can be captured from Facebook and mapped to an Eloqua form:
Facebook ID
Email
First Name
Last Name
Full Name
Gender
209 of 1162
Profile URL
Locale
Time Zone
Profile Last Update
Verified
3.14.1 Installing the Facebook Social Sign On app

To install the Facebook Social Sign On app:

https://cloud.oracle.com/marketplace/app/AppFacebookSocialSignOn
2. Click Get App.
i. If you would like to use the standard Eloqua branded Facebook app, make no selection.
When someone hits the Facebook Authorization Page it will be branded as Eloqua.
ii. If you would like to have a branded Facebook page, check the Define a Custom
Facebook App checkbox and input your Consumer Key and Secret Key.
[Recommended]
Note: If you would like to have a branded Facebook page, follow these
instructions to create the app within Facebook:
https://community.oracle.com/community/topliners/do-it/blog/2012/02/17/socialsign-on--custom-apps-for-twitter-linkeing-facebook
iii. ClickSave.
210 of 1162
The app is now installed. If you look in your catalog, the app will be listed as installed, providing the
options to delete the app, check its status, or reconfigure it.
3.14.2 Adding the Facebook Social Sign On service to your landing pages
A Log in with Facebook button can be added to your landing pages. When visitors click this button,
they are directed to Facebook's authorization page, where they can grant permission to your company
to use your Facebook information. Then, the information from Facebook is submitted to Eloqua. Users
have the ability to supplement the Facebook information with additional form fields if they want.
In order to use the Facebook Social Sign On service, it must be installed by a customer administrator.
To add the Facebook Social Sign On service to a landing page:

1. Open or create a landing page to which you want to add the Log in with Facebook button.
services.
3. Locate theFacebook Social Sign On service, either by scrolling through the list or searching
with the search box.
4. Drag the Facebook Social Sign On service onto the asset, and place it where you want it to
appear.
211 of 1162
i. Select an Eloqua Form that you want to complete using Facebook data from the dropdown menu.
ii. Map the Eloqua Fields to corresponding Facebook Fields.
Both static fields and custom fields can be mapped. If Custom fields are
selected, the following styling information for the form is required:
HTMLprior to the form
HTML after the form
CSS Content
Submit Button Name
Mapping Query String values allows you to capture data such as the CampaignID
to determine which campaign drove the customer to your landing page.
Example: Entering a Query String of CampaignID will capture the value of 102 in
the example below.
iii. Click Save Settings. When it is finished saving, you see a green Success!bar.
212 of 1162
A Log in with Facebook button is now available on your landing page.
3.15 RSS app

The RSS app allows you to define an RSS feed which can be used to feed the content of the RSS into
an email or landing page. The RSS content will be captured at time of email send. You can define the
RSS feed, the number of RSS articles to include and the orientation (vertical or horizontal). Default
CSS is provided, but you can define your own custom CSS.
3.15.1 Installing the RSS app

To install the RSS app:

https://cloud.oracle.com/marketplace/app/AppRSS
2. Click Get App.
i. Enter the default vertical and horizontal CSS for emails and landing pages. This content
can be overwritten by users at the instance level.
ii. ClickSave.
213 of 1162
3.15.2 Adding the RSS service to your assets

In order to use the RSS service, it must be installed by a customer administrator.
To add the RSS service to an asset:

The RSS service experience is identical in emails and landing pages.
1. Open or create a landing page or email to which you want to add the RSS feed.
services.
3. Locate theRSS Content Service, either by scrolling through the list or searching with the search
box.
4. Drag the RSS Content Service onto the asset, and place it where you want it to appear.
i. RSS Feed: Enter the URL for your RSS Feed.

ii. Number of Stories: Enter the maximum number of stories to be displayed.
214 of 1162
Note: It is possible that less stories will be displayed than the maximum amount
specified if less are in the feed.
iii. Length of Stories: Enter the maximum number of characters to display for each story.
iv. Layout: Select a vertical or horizontal layout.
v. Default CSS: Modify the default CSS, if desired.
Note: You can revert to the default CSS at any time by clicking Restore CSS to
default.
vi. Click Preview to see how the RSS feed will render. You are able to preview your content
before saving.
vii. Click the X icon to exit the screen.
3.16 Contact Washing Machine app

Note:This app is currently released under our Controlled Availability program. Please request
access to this app via the Oracle Cloud Marketplace
(https://cloud.oracle.com/marketplace/app/AppContactWashingMachine), by clicking Get
App.
The contact washing machine enables cleansing of contact fields. You are able to define one or more
contact fields as inputs, then run actions such as trim, concatenate, and adjust case (propercase or
lowercase). The data can then be mapped back to that same field, or a separate field. Keeping data
clean improves the accuracy of scoring, segmentation, and personalization.
3.16.1 Installing the Contact Washing Machine app

215 of 1162
Note:This app is currently released under our Controlled Availability program. Please request
access to this app via the Oracle Cloud Marketplace
(https://cloud.oracle.com/marketplace/app/AppContactWashingMachine), by clicking Get
App.
To install the Contact Washing Machine app:

1. Copy the installation URL into your browser.
Note: The installation URL is provided via email once access to this Controlled
Availability app is approved.
3.16.2 Adding the Contact Washing Machine action to your campaign

In order to use the Contact Washing Machine action in your campaign, Contact Washing Machine
must be installed by a Customer Administrator.
To add the Contact Washing Machine action to your campaign:
216 of 1162

installed apps.
3. Drag the Contact Washing Machine element onto the campaign canvas, then double-click on
it to open the configure screen.The window that opens enables you to do the following:
Choose to route contacts that resulted in an error to another step (see:Configuring cloud
action and decision elements for more information).
4. Click the Edit icon to configure your data cleansing steps. Steps execute in the order in which
they appear. Steps can be created (Add Step) or deleted (Delete Step). If you have multiple
steps, you can also re-order them.
i. Complete the required fields:

Source: Select the Eloqua contact field to cleanse (modify).
Condition: Select up to 3 conditions to be used to determine if the step will be
executed for specific contacts. If these conditions are met, the field will be
cleansed for that contact. You can select from the following operators: equals,
contains, starts with, ends with, or RegEx.
Action: Select 1 to 5 actions to perform
Trim to remove all white space

Trim Left to remove white space to the left of the text
217 of 1162
Trim Right to remove white space to the right of the text

Lowercase to turn all letters to lowercase
Propercase to capitalize the first letter of each word
Destination: Select the Eloqua contact field to write the results to.
ii. Add, delete, and reorder steps as required.
iii. Click Save.
5. Return to your campaign and continue to modify it as desired.
The Contact Washing Machine action should now be properly configured. When contacts flow into the
step, the data will be cleaned and returned to the selected field.
3.17 External Activity app

The External Activity app is the easiest way to create Eloqua external activities directly from within
your campaign flow. You select the asset type and activity, and define a custom activity name. Any
contact who encounters the action will have an external activity created and associated to that
campaign. For example, when you have a webinar canvas, you can created external activities for
contacts who have registered or attended the webinar.
3.17.1 Installing the External Activity app

To install the External Activity app:

https://cloud.oracle.com/marketplace/app/AppExternalActivity
2. Click Get App.
218 of 1162

3.17.2 Adding the External Activity action to your campaign

In order to use the External Activity action in your campaign, the External Activity app must be
installed by a Customer Administrator.
To add the External Activity action to your campaign:

2. Click on the Actions section to expand it, and view all available decision elements, including
installed apps.
3. Drag the External Activity element onto the campaign canvas, then double-click on it to open
the configure screen.The window that opens enables you to do the following:
Choose to route contacts that resulted in an error to another step (see:Configuring cloud
action and decision elements for more information).
219 of 1162
i. Select an Asset Type.

ii. Select an Activity.
Important: You must select an asset type with associated activities. The activity
drop-down will populate once the asset type is selected. If no activities exist, see
creating external assets and activities to learn how to create activities.
iii. Enter an Asset Name. Asset name is optional. If no asset name is present, the app will
default to using the activity name. Typically, the asset and activity type are re-used and
the asset name is specific to this one instance.
Example: Select an asset type of Twitter and an activity type of Clicked Twitter
Link. Include information about the twitter link (Ticket Offer 10/15) in the asset
name.
Example: For a webinar, select an asset type of WebEx and an activity type of
Attended. For the asset name, include the name of the webinar.
iv. Click Save.
v. Close the browser tab to return to your campaign.
The External Activity action should now be properly configured. When contacts flow into the step,
Eloqua gathers the activity information and pushes it to segments and Profiler.
220 of 1162
4 Asset choosers
All Eloqua assets are stored in folders in their corresponding areas of the application. Accessing your
files and folders is accomplished using the asset choosers.
4.1 Using asset favorites

You can create a list of assets (files and folders) that you access on a frequent basis using the
Favorites heading on the left-hand side.
To add a file or folder to the favorites list:

1. Locate the file or folder that you want to add to the Favorites list, through the asset chooser.
2. Left-click on the name of the file or folder and drag the item to the left-hand pane under the
Favorites heading, release your mouse button and the asset is added to your list.
Note: As you drag an asset to Favorites a blue horizontal line indicates where the item
will be placed on the list, release your mouse button when the blue line is where you
want the asset to be added. Items in Favorites can be repositioned at any time by singleleft clicking on the item and dragging it to a new position.
You can add a maximum of ten (10) items to the Favorites list, trying to add more than
this will result in an error message alerting you that one or more items must be deleted
before attempting to add more.
To delete a file or folder from the favorites list:

1. Hover your mouse cursor over the item that you want to delete in the Favorites list.
2. Click the X to the right of its name.The item is removed from the list, but not from Eloqua.
Note: You can only add a file or folder to your list once. If you attempt to add a folder or
file that already exists in your Favorites list, an error is displayed.
Only the folder that you add to the Favorites list is a favorite. This means that files and
221 of 1162
sub-folders contained within that folder are not marked as favorites; you must manually
add them one by one.
4.2 Navigating asset choosers

The choosers keep all assets organized and help you locate the file or folder that you need quickly and
easily.
To access and navigate the asset choosers:

1. Navigate to:
Assets > Emails for emails
Assets > Landing Pages for landing pages
Campaigns for campaigns
Contacts > Lead Scoring for lead scoring models.
2. Click :
Open an Existing Email for an email
Open an Existing Landing Page for a landing page
Open an Existing Campaign for a campaign
Open an Existing Model for lead scoring models.
By default, the All Files folder is Navigate toed on the left-hand (navigation) pane.
3. Choose the search location for your assets, Navigate to one of the following:
Created by Me: to view only those items created by you
Recently Accessed by Me: to view only those that you recently accessed
Recently Modified: to view ones that were recently modified (by anyone).
4. Double-click on an asset (file) to open it, or click on the asset to highlight it then click Choose in
the bottom-right corner of the chooser window.The asset opens and the chooser closes.
Note: As you navigate through the folder structure, the breadcrumb trail at the top of the
chooser window shows your position within the file hierarchy. Hover your mouse cursor
over the breadcrumb to highlight your navigation path as you look through the folder
222 of 1162
structure. Click on the folder name to return to any folder which you have visited.
For the current session only, when you re-open the chooser for the same asset, your
previously viewed location is remembered and the chooser automatically opens to that
folder. However, after logging out of the application, the initial view in that chooser will
return to All Files.
4.3 Moving asset files and folders

There are two methods for moving files or folders within your folder hierarchy in an asset chooser.
To move files or folders:

Method A:
1. Search for or navigate to the file or folder you want to move.
2. Select the item and drag-and-drop to the desired location. The item is moved to the new
location.
Method B:
1. Search for or navigate to the file or folder you want to move.
2. Right-click on the file (or folder) name and select Move to Folder.
3. Left-click on the name of the desired folder in the folder list that opens, then click the Move
button in the lower-right corner.
Note: If you want to move more than one item at a time, you can press Ctrl- or Shift+.
Select multiple items and drag-and-drop them simultaneously.
4. Once selected, right-click on any one of the selected items and click Move to Folder on the
drop-down menu. Your complete folder structure is displayed.
5. Highlight the folder to which you want to move your item and click Move in the lower-right
corner of the window. Your files or folders are moved to the new location.
223 of 1162
5 Assets
Assets are the building blocks of your marketing campaigns. In the diagram below, email and landing
page have been added to the campaign canvas as elements of the campaign.
The assets also include the components you use to build those elements (images, file storage,
hyperlinks, field merges, email headers and footers, shared and dynamic content sections, and
signature layouts and rules.
5.1 Using the live preview HTML editor for emails and landing
pages
Eloqua users have the option to upload externally created HTML emails and landing pages, or to create
them directly in Eloqua. Either way, they can be modified using the live preview HTML editor. This
editor allows Eloqua users (with or without HTML knowledge) to modify and customize an HTML email
or landing page.
Important: This feature is now generally available to all customers; however, existing
customers must log in to My Oracle Support (http://support.oracle.com) and create a service
request (SR) to enable this feature in your Eloqua instance. New customers will automatically
have this feature enabled without having to log a SR.
To use the live preview editor for emails and landing pages:
1. Open or create an HTML email or landing page. The live preview HTML editor opens.
2. Select one of the buttons in the upper right-hand corner of the editor to adjust the layout for the
preview and HTML panes. The buttons, as shown below, allow you to choose between a
224 of 1162
vertical or horizontal view.
225 of 1162
If needed, the size of the panes can be adjusted. Depending on the chosen layout view, drag the
pane divider up and down (for vertical view) or left and right (for horizontal view).
3. Modify and customize the content in the email or landing page using one of the following
methods:
Enter code directly into the HTML pane: If you are comfortable doing so, type
HTMLcode directly into the HTMLpane. Press Ctrl + F to quickly search for specific
content within the HTML code.
Drop elements into the code in the HTML pane: Click one of the icons on the left-side
menu, locate the element that you want to add in the browser, then drag-and-drop the
element into the code at the desired location.
After the element is released, it is converted to code, the preview pane reflects the
change in the code.
226 of 1162
To delete code you have added using the method above, highlight the code and click
Delete on your keyboard. Standard Windows functionality can also be used (copying,
pasting, and cutting to and from the Windows clipboard via the standard keyboard
shortcuts or your browser's Edit menu).
You can also organize the code with formatting. Learn more.
Note: Text boxes cannot be added using the drag-and-drop method above. Any
text you want to add to your email or landing page can only be added manually by
entering the HTML for the text.
Edit elements in the preview pane: Some elements can be edited directly in the
preview pane, as you move your mouse over the elements (sections) of your asset, if the
section is editable, it is highlighted with a blue background and dashed border, as shown
in the following screenshot:
Double-click a highlighted section to edit it using the Eloqua editor tools. When you are
done editing, click outside of the area and the source code is immediately updated.
Note: The only sections that can be edited in this fashion are ones that have a
<table> or <div> tag in the HTML source code. No other sections can be modified
in the preview pane. However, modifications, according to the stylesheet that
has been applied to your asset, can always be made in the source code.
227 of 1162
Limitations and known issues

You cannot group or lock objects in the design editor, since the right-click functionality is
disabled. However, in edit mode, you can make other changes using the Tools panel.
Modifying content in the design editor does not automatically move to the relevant section in the
HTML editor. Press Ctrl + F to locate the code in the HTML editor.
5.2 Adding CSS, HTML, JavaScript, or meta tags to emails and

landing pages
You can add code to your emails and landing pages to provide additional functionality or styling.
HTML, JavaScript, and meta tags provide more functionality to your assets. CSS adds custom styling
to define the look and feel. Including CSS within the <head> tag of your asset ensures that styling will
not be overwritten. You can also reuse stylesheets to keep the style of your forms consistent.
5.2.1 Emails and landing pages
To insert CSS, HTML, or JavaScript:

1. Click Tools > Page Snippet Tools.
2. Click Open CSS Editor, Open HTML Editor, or Open JS Editor.
3. Enter code to be added to your asset.
4. Click Save.
Additional code was added to the <head> tag of your asset.
To insert meta tags:

1. Click Tools > Page Snippet Tools.
2. Click the plus symbol. A meta tag has been added in the Meta Tags pane.
3. Double-click the meta tag to edit.
A meta tag was added to the <head> tag of your asset.
228 of 1162
5.2.2 HTML emails and landing pages
To add code into your asset

1. Preview the live HTML editor. Learn more.
2. Enter code directly into the <head> tag.
Additional code was added to the <head> tag of your asset.
5.3 Formatting HTML in asset editors

Automatically format crowded and hard-to-read HTML code using the Auto-Format Selection feature.
Select the area of HTML you'd like to reformat, apply Auto-Format Selection, and we will automatically
format your code with standard indentations and other mechanisms to make it easier to read and
modify. You must be viewing an asset in the HTML editor to format the HTML code.
1. Highlight the code to be formatted.
2. Click the action menu (gear icon).
3. Click Auto-Format Selection.
The selected code will be formatted. Press Ctrl + Z to undo.
5.4 Adding borders to images in emails and landing pages

You can add, and then customize borders for the images you use in emails and landing pages.
229 of 1162
Note: In order to add a border to an image, you must first insert the image into a text box.
To add a border to an image:

1. Click Text on the toolbar to open a text box in the Email Editor canvas.
2. Double-click where instructed to enter editing mode.
3. Click Image on the toolbar to open the Image Browser on the right-hand side of the Editor
window.
4. Open the image you wish to add to the email by uploading a new image or by searching for an
existing image (by typing the first few letters of the name or scrolling through the thumbnails).
5. With the text box highlighted (selected), double-click on the image to add it to the text box.
6. Single left-click on the text box to select it.
7. Right-click on the text box and select Format Text.
8. On the Text Tools panel that opens on the left, select the paintbrush icon (second tab from left),
the Text Style Tools panel opens.
9. Select the type of border you would like to apply to the box (and, therefore, your image), in the
Border drop-down menu, you can choose from:

Hidden: Borders not shown
Solid: Single solid line
Groove: Solid interior bar
Dotted: Dotted lines
Dashed: Dashed lines
Double: Double solid lines
Inset: Concave picture-frame type border
Outset: Convex picture-frame type border
10. Click in the black box if you wish to change the color of the border. The color wheel opens. Click
the color you wish to use and drag the slider to change the opacity of the color.
Note: If you know the ASCII code for the specific color, you can enter it here as well.
11. Change the thickness of the border by changing the value in the box next to px from 2 (the
default) to the value of your choosing.
12. Select which edges of the border should have these settings applied to them: Left, Right, Top or
Bottom. You can select as many or as few as you wish.
230 of 1162
13. Modify thePadding section at the bottom of the Style Tools tab to move the image within the
text box so that it does not touch a particular side of the border. You can enter different pixel
values for each side, and the image will move in the text box accordingly.
14. Click Save in the upper-right hand corner of the Eloqua application window to save your work.
5.5 Updating images in emails and landing pages using the

design editor
Images can be replaced in emails and landing pages from the design editor.
To update an existing image with a new one:

1. Navigate to Assets > Emails or Assets > Landing Pages.
2. Click Open an Existing Email or Open an Existing Landing Page, if you are working with an
existing email or landing page.
Click Create an Email or Create a Landing Page, if you are creating a new email or landing
page using the design editor.
3. Click on the image you want to replace or update, the image is enclosed in a dotted line box with
four handles.
Note: This feature does not currently support replacing or updating images enclosed in a
text box, however, you can still delete the original and add the updated image in the
standard Eloqua editing experience.
4. Click Imageon the toolbar on the left-hand pane.
5. Locate the new image in theImage Browser, scroll through the thumbnails until you locate the
desired image, type the name in the search field, or click Upload to upload a new image.
231 of 1162
6. Drag the new image over the one that you want to replace until the original image is highlighted
with a light blue border, then release image into place.
7. Select Replace in the confirmation window that appears, the original image is replaced with the
new one.
8. Click Addif you want to add the new image on top of the original instead of replacing it.
Note: If the new image is the same dimensions and aspect ratio as the original, it will simply
replace the original Image. If the new image is the same dimensions but different aspect ratio,
232 of 1162
the new Image will be scaled to match the original aspect ratio. If the new Image is different
dimensions and different aspect ratio, the new Image will replace the original one and it is up to
you to re-size as desired.
5.6 Updating images in emails and landing pages using the

HTML editor
Youcanreplaceimagesinemailsandlandingpageswithupdatedversions. You can also add new
images before or after existing images.
To update an existing image with a new one:

1. Navigate to Assets > Emails or Assets > Landing Pages.
2. Click Open an Existing Email or Open an Existing Landing Page, if you are working with an
existing email or landing page.
Click Upload an Email or Upload a Landing Pageif you are creating a new email or landing
page using the HTML editor, then upload your HTML email or landing page using the wizard.
3. Click on the image you wish to replace or update.The Image is enclosed in a dotted line box
with four handles.
Note: This feature does not currently support replacing or updating images enclosed in a
text box, however, you can still delete the original and add the updated image in the
standard Eloqua editing experience.
4. Click Image in the toolbar on the left-hand pane.
5. Locate the new image in theImage Browser, scroll through the thumbnails until you locate the
desired image, type the name in the search field, or click Upload to upload a new image.
233 of 1162
6. Left-click and drag the new image over the one that you want to replace until the original image
is highlighted with a dashed border, then release the mouse button.
7. Select Replacein the Place Image dialog box that opens.
Note: If you select Insert Before, the new image is added to the left of (or above) the
original. If you select Insert After, the new image is added to the right of (or below) the
original.
234 of 1162
8. Click Place, the new image replaces the original one.
Note: If the new image is the same dimensions and aspect ratio as the original, it will simply
replace the original Image. If the new image is the same dimensions but different aspect ratio,
the new image will be scaled to match the original aspect ratio. If the new Image is different
dimensions and different aspect ratio, the new image will replace the original one and it is up to
you to re-size as desired.
235 of 1162
6 Campaigns
Marketing campaigns are at the center of the Eloqua application, campaigns are comprised of different
elements (such as segments, emails, landing pages, etc.) that are used to perform a variety of
functions. You can combine the different elements in a number of ways to customize your campaign
flow.
There are two types of campaigns you can create: a simple email campaign, and multi-step campaign.
Simple email campaigns let you choose a contact segment to which the email will be sent, an email to
be sent, and the delivery options for that email. You also have the option for A/B testing, see Simple
email campaigns for more details.
Multi-step campaigns have more customization options to let you set up your campaign flow however
you like. You can add a number of different campaign canvas elements. Depending on your needs, you
can add elements to wait a certain amount of time before moving to the next step, send a second email
if the first is not opened, add contacts to your database, and much more. You can drag-and-drop
elements onto the canvas then connect them as required to create your campaign flow.
6.1 Campaign examples

Using the campaign canvas, you can rapidly assemble marketing campaigns, either simple or
complex, using elements such as segments, emails, landing pages, decision rules, and actions.
The following are some examples of the types of marketing campaigns you can build using campaign
canvas elements.
Example 1: Creating a simple email campaign
The most basic campaign is one where you simply pair a segment with an email to distribute the email
to specific contacts. For this, you only need a segment element with an email element.
Example 2: Setting up a simple campaign with a landing page

You can also distribute an email that provides a click-through link to a landing page. Make sure that the
link in the email goes to the landing page you specify.
236 of 1162
Note: If the email and landing page are linked outside of the campaign canvas (for example,
creating a hyperlink in an email to a landing page) , the campaign canvas will automatically
create a contact link between them (indicated by the arrow in the screenshot below).
Example 3: Testing for a click-through on a link

You might want to use a decision rule to test whether the recipient clicks-through on a specific link in
the email, then execute other rules or actions based on whether they did. In the example shown,
recipients are sent another email if they click through on the link, but if not, they are sent to a lead
nurturing program (the name of the specific step in the program is shown in the Send to Program
element).
237 of 1162
Note: The number of clicks, the time span for click-throughs, and the duration of the evaluation
window going forward are included in the Clicked Through? element.
After you have configured an element, the infinity symbol will be added to the element (as indicated by
the red highlighting in the illustration above).
Example 4: Including a wait time
Another example is to send an email, then to wait a set amount of time and then send another email.
This can be useful if you are starting with a distribution list of committed recipients and don't need an
"opt in" to send the second email.
238 of 1162
6.2 Creating multi-step campaigns

A multi-step campaign is a highly customizable marketing tool. You can add elements such as emails,
landing pages, decisions and actions. You can then configure these elements and connect them in a
flow that works for your campaign. All elements can be added and configured directly on the campaign
canvas. This greatly decreases the time required to assemble and configure a campaign.
You can also use Eloqua to create a simple email campaign. This is an ideal way to send emails to
groups of contacts. This option also allows you to conduct A/B testing.
To create a multi-step campaign:

1. Navigate to Campaigns > Create a Multi-Step Campaign.
2. Select a template and click Choose.
239 of 1162
3. Click the action menu (gear icon) and select Settings.

4. Enter campaign details on the following tabs:
General: Enter the campaign name, description, product, region, campaign type and
CRM campaign ID.
Financials: Enter the budgeted and the actual cost for the campaign.
240 of 1162
Custom Fields: The available custom fields are listed with blank text boxes below.
Enter values in each of the blank fields. After the values are set, you can query (report)
on campaign activities for those fields using Eloqua Insight, our reporting solution.
Note: To edit custom campaign fields you must go back to the setup area of the
program, see Configuring custom campaign fields.
Activation: Enter the campaign time zone (the default is the time zone selected in your
user profile, not that of your local machine). Set a reporting start date and a campaign
end date. Then specify if the campaign should start: on demand, when reporting starts,
or scheduled for (specify the activation date and time for the campaign).
Click Done to close the details window when you are finished.
5. Add elements to the campaign by dragging the element from the left-hand pane and dropping it
onto the canvas. Double-click the element to configure it as needed. Learn more about adding
and configuring campaign elements.
6. Link the elements to create the campaign flow. Click the node on the bottom of one segment
then drag the connecting arrow to the top of another element.
Example: Here, the segment member element and the email element are connected.
The result being that the segment members are sent this email.
7. Click Save in the upper right-hand corner to save your changes.
241 of 1162
If there are any issues with your campaign, the errors indicator
is displayed in the
upper left-hand corner of the page. To resolve the errors:

i. Click on the indicator to open the Validation Errors window, this window lists all the
issues in the campaign that you need to resolve before it can be activated. Close the
window and make any necessary changes on the campaign canvas, or double click on
each error to be taken directly to the issue.
ii. Click Save when you are done. There should no longer be any errors indicated in the
upper left-hand corner.
Now that your campaign is created, you may want to activate your campaign.
6.3 Adding elements to the campaign canvas

The campaign canvas includes a wide variety of elements that you can use to create rich, multi-step
campaigns to best reach your marketing goals. This document describes each built-in element, and its
configuration requirements.
To add an element onto the campaign canvas:

1. Double-click the element in the left-hand pane, or drag-and-drop it onto the canvas.
2. Double-click the element on the canvas, or right-click it and select Configure to open the
configuration window.
3. Change the default name for the step to something more meaningful (optional).
4. Configure the element. Select one of the following categories to see configuration details for
each element. These categories correspond with the section that each element is listed under in
242 of 1162
the left-hand pane.

Audience
Assets
Decisions
Actions
5. After configuring the element, click outside the configuration window to close it .
6.4 Activating and deactivating campaigns

When a campaign is ready to be activated you can do so from the campaign canvas using the Activate
button. If there is an Approvals button instead of Activate, you may not have the correct permissions
to activate the campaign, and you must go through the approvals process first. See Campaign
activation security for more information about activation permissions. If needed, you can change the
status of a campaign back to Draft by deactivating it. This allows you to reschedule the activation date
or make any necessary changes to the campaign.
Note: Before a campaign can be activated, you must resolve any issues that exist, the errors
indicator
is displayed in the upper left-hand corner of the page. Click on the indicator
to open the Validation Errors window, this window lists all the issues in the campaign that you
need to resolve before it can be activated. Close the window and make any necessary changes
on the campaign canvas, or double click on each error to be taken directly to the issue.
To activate a campaign:
243 of 1162
1. Open the campaign that you want to activate (navigate to Campaigns > Open an Existing
Campaign), then click
in the upper right-hand corner of the campaign canvas, the
Activate Campaign dialog box opens.
2. In the Campaign Activation Start Time section, select one of the following options:
Start Now: The campaign is activated immediately.
Start Later: The campaign is activated on a specific date. Choose a date for the
campaign to begin, then enter the time (using 12-hour format), along with AM or PM, and
set the appropriate time zone. The default time zone comes directly from the time zone
setting in your Eloqua profile, not from the local machine or browser.
Note: If you want to change the default time zone for a user, navigate to Settings
> Setup > Users (in the Administration section) and search for the user's name.
On the Edit User page, change the time zone to the appropriate setting. You must
log out of Eloqua and log back in, in order for the change to take effect.
3. In the Campaign Activation End Time section, enter the date on which you want the campaign
to cease further processing.
244 of 1162
Note: The time will always be midnight (12:00 am) in the specified time zone, on the
date that you selected.
The note at the bottom of the end time section indicates that although your campaign will stop
running as of the date and time specified, reporting functionality will continue for one year
following that date.
Example: Your campaign is set to run from January 1, 2014 to June 1, 2014,even
though it will no longer be running as of June 2, 2014, data will still be collected until one
year following the closing date. This means that if a contact opens an email, submits a
form, or performs other campaign-related activities, those actions will still be captured
and can be used for reporting purposes up until June 1, 2015.
4. Click Activate, a confirmation window opens, click Activate and the campaign is activated
according to the scheduling you have set.
If you chose to activate the campaign Later, the DRAFT button in the upper left-corner of
the campaign window changes to
to indicate a future activation date. If you
hover your mouse over this button, the date and time of the scheduled activation
appears.
If you chose to activate the campaign Now, the button changes to
to indicate
that the campaign is now active.

Note: If you chose to start the campaign Now, but the campaign reporting is
scheduled for a future date, the Activate button is disabled (grayed out). You
must change the campaign reporting dates at the top of the window to activate
the campaign immediately.

After a campaign is activated, the Activate button changes to a Deactivate button. If you want to
deactivate the campaign, click Deactivate on the canvas, then click Deactivate in the confirmation
245 of 1162
window. The campaign is deactivated and if the activation was scheduled, that scheduled activation is
canceled.
6.5 Editing Campaigns

You can edit an existing campaign on the campaign canvas.
Note: An Active or Scheduled campaign cannot be edited. In order to edit an Active or
Scheduled campaign, you must first deactivate it so it is once again in Draft status. See
Activating and deactivating campaigns.
To edit a campaign:
1. Navigate to Campaigns > Open an Existing Campaign, the Campaign Chooser window
opens.
2. Select a campaign on the list and click Choose, the campaign canvas opens.
3. Make changes to the flow, or and add or configure elements as needed. See Adding elements to
the campaign canvas.
4. Click Save, to save your changes.
6.6 Deleting campaigns

When a campaign is no longer needed, it can be deleted from the application.
Note: An Active or Scheduled campaign cannot be deleted. In order to delete an Active or
Scheduled campaign, you must first deactivate it. See Activating and deactivating campaigns.
To delete a campaign:
opens.
2. Find the campaign that you want to delete, then right-click on its name on the list and select
Delete, or double-click on the name to open the campaign editor window and select Delete
from the action menu
246 of 1162
Note: Prior to deleting a campaign, Eloqua checks for any dependencies in other
assets. If a dependency is detected, the Dependency Viewer opens. You must resolve
all dependencies prior to attempting to delete the campaign, you can resolve individual
dependencies by double-clicking on the name of the dependency in the Object Name
column. The associated area of the Eloqua application will open, allowing you to edit or
delete the object.
3. Click Delete in the confirmation window, the campaign is permanently deleted from the
application.
6.7 Accessing operational reports for campaigns

Operational reports can provide you with information about the campaign creation and activation, and
how contacts enter and leave the campaign. This is useful if you need to troubleshoot any potential
problems that may occur.
To access operational reports for a campaign:

opens.
2. Select the campaign for which you want to view a report, then click Choose, the campaign
canvas opens.
3. Click the action menu (gear icon), then select Operational Reports.
247 of 1162
4. Click the name of the report that you wish to view, there are three types of operational reports as
described below:
Campaign Audit: This report lists each time the campaign was edited, activated, and
deactivated. It also shows you which user completed the action, and the date and time
that the event occurred.
Campaign Entry Report: This report provides information about how and when
contacts entered the campaign.
Campaign Exit Report: This report provides information about how and when contacts
exited the campaign.
The report window opens displaying the information from the selected report.
6.8 Search for existing opportunities

From the Campaigns area in the application, you can upload opportunities, manage general settings for
opportunities, and search for specific opportunities.
To search for existing opportunities:

1. Click Campaigns on the navigation toolbar at the top of the screen.
2. Select
> Opportunity Search.
3. You can either search for an existing opportunity by one of several different field values or click
View All to see all the available campaign opportunities in the system. For this example, we'll
search on all or part of a particular value. You can choose to search on the value in one of
several opportunity fields:
248 of 1162
Opportunity NameSearch on all or part of the name of the opportunity.

StageSearch on all or part of the name of the opportunity stage (this depends on the
values you used to set up opportunities, but may be values such as Lost, Closed, SQL,
MQL, etc.).
Probability of ClosingIn percent. These values correspond to the values assigned to

each opportunity stage.
Date CreatedUse the date in the standard system format. In most cases, this will be
MM/DD/YYYY unless an override is set.
Close DateUse the date in the standard system format. In most cases, this will be
MM/DD/YYYY unless an override is set.
4. Fill in the full or partial search value, then click Search. Matching opportunities in the system
are listed. You can click on any opportunity in the list to see the details for that opportunity.
6.9 Configuring opportunity settings

From the Campaigns area in the application, you can upload opportunities, manage general settings for
opportunities, and search for specific opportunities.
To configure opportunity settings:

1. Click Campaigns on the navigation toolbar at the top of the screen.
2. Select
> Opportunity Settings.
3. In the first section, Contact to Opportunity Association, click Edit. Eloqua will associate
opportunities to campaigns based on the contacts that have responded to a campaign, but you
can select which contacts are to be included in this association from the following options
(choose one):
The primary Contact associated to the Opportunity in CRMThe opportunity is
associated in Eloqua with a single contact designated as the primary contact for that
opportunity in the CRM.
All Contacts associated to the Opportunity in CRMThe opportunity is associated in
Eloqua with all contacts associated with the opportunity in the CRM.
All Contacts in Eloqua associated to the Account that is associated to the Opportunity in
CRMThe opportunity is associated to all contacts that are, in turn, associated to an
account that is associated to the opportunity in the CRM. Note that for this option to
249 of 1162
work, the Accounts must be imported into Eloqua as Companies with the CRM Account
ID and the contacts must be properly linked to the Companies within Eloqua. (Note:
SFDC AccountID field is case sensitive.)
4. Once you have made your selection, click Save and Close.
5. Add Opportunity Stages from the Opportunity Stage Details section. Click Add New
Opportunity Stage, then fill in the Stage Name, put in the % probability of closing, and select
the checkbox if the opportunity has been lost or closed (these are not counted in ROI
calculations). If this is the only or final opportunity stage, then click Save and Close.
Otherwise, click Save and New and create an additional stage, then repeat as required and
click Save and Close after the last stage.
6. In the Default Revenue Attribution Method section, options are provided to let you set up which
campaign responses to include in revenue attribution calculations and how to distribute
attributed revenue. Click Edit and select the configuration settings:
Which Campaign responses do you want to include in the revenue attribution?You can
choose to include all campaign responses from lead creation in Eloqua to opportunity
close in the CRM, or from lead creation in Eloqua to opportunity creation in the CRM.
How do you want to distribute the revenue across the Campaigns?You can attribute the
revenue evenly across all campaigns, to the first or last campaign responded to, or by
specific percentages to first, last, and other campaigns).
7. Once you have set these options, click Save and Close.
8. Once you have finished configuring these options, they are shown in the Opportunity Settings
window. You can close the window.
250 of 1162
6.10 Campaign canvas elements

The campaign canvas includes a wide variety of elements that you can use to create rich, multi-step
campaigns to best reach your marketing goals. The elements fall into four categories:
Audience
Assets
251 of 1162
Decisions
Actions
Each category includes built-in elements, such as Wait (Action), Clicked Email? (Decision), or
SegmentMembers (Audience). You can also add extra elements by installing apps from the Oracle
Eloqua AppCloud. These apps extend Eloqua's functionality and enable you to integrate with other
systems. All built-in elements are listed under their category headings in the left-hand column of
thecampaign canvas.
Each element has its own configuration needs: some elements, like Wait, are very straightforward,
while others require a more complex configuration. Learn more about adding and configuring campaign
canvas elements. When an element is fully configured, it changes from gray to the color of its
category:green for Audiences, blue for Assets, yellow for Decisions, or violet for Actions.
252 of 1162
6.10.1 Example of Using Elements in Campaigns

Using the campaign canvas, you can rapidly assemble marketing campaigns, either simple or
complex, using elements such as segments, emails, landing pages, decision rules, and actions (wait
or send to program). To create a campaign, you must follow these simple steps:
1. Specify a start and end date for the campaign, this is the time period in which the campaign will
be active.
2. Drag all of the elements onto the campaign canvas.
3. Double-click each element and select the specific instance of the element.
4. Connect the elements together and save.
Note:the campaign is not active until you go to the action menu and select Activate, or
click the Activate button at the top of the Eloqua window.
The following are some examples of the types of marketing campaigns you can build using the
campaign canvas.
Example 1: Creating a simple email campaign
The simplest campaign is one where you pair an email with the specific contacts it should be
distributed to. For this, you only need a segment element with an email element.
Example 2: Setting up a simple campaign with a landing page

You can also distribute an email that provides a click-through link to a landing page. Make sure that the
link in the email goes to the landing page you specify.
Note: If the email and landing page are linked outside of the campaign canvas (like a hyperlink
in an email leading to a landing page), the campaign canvas will automatically create a contact
link between them (as indicated by the arrow in the screenshot below).
253 of 1162
Example 3: Testing for a click-through on a link

You might want to use a decision rule to test whether the recipient clicks-through on a specific link in
the email, then execute other rules or actions based on whether they did. In the example shown,
recipients are sent another email if they click through on the link, but if not, they're sent to a lead
nurturing program (the name of the specific step in the program is shown in the send to program
element).
254 of 1162
The number of clicks, the time span for click-throughs, and the duration of the evaluation window going
forward are included in the Clicked Through?element.
After you have configured an element, the infinity symbol is added to the element (as indicated by the
red highlighting in the illustration below).
Example 4: Including a wait time

Another example is to send an email, then to wait a set time and then send another email. This can be
useful if you are starting with a distribution list of committed recipients and don't need an "opt in" to
send the second email.
6.10.2 Configuring campaign canvas elements: Actions

When you add an Action element to a campaign you are specifying campaign details such as where
and when contacts will be redirected, or if they will be added to a certain list or to another campaign.
255 of 1162
The following is a list of each Action element available on the campaign canvas:
Send to cloud connector
Add to campaign
Add to program
Move to campaign
Add toshared list
Move to program
Move to shared list
Wait
Send to cloud connector

Description
Adding a Send to Cloud Connector element to your campaign canvas allows you to route
contacts through your campaign based on their activity.
Example: You can initiate an activity based on a cloud connector in your Eloqua
environment that performs a calculation based on the contact's activity and routes them
appropriately.
Configuration
In the Choose a Cloud Connector and configure if necessary field, select a cloud connector
from the drop-down list, or narrow the search by starting to type the name in the field. Click the
edit pencil next to the name of the connector to view or edit the connector settings, if desired.
Or, create a new connector by selecting the checkbox next to Manual. Eloqua assigns a
numeric value to your connector which cannot be changed.
Add to campaign
Description
This element lets you add segment members from the current campaign to specific elements
(including cloud step elements) in a different campaign for further routing and processing.
Configuration
1. Click Choose at the bottom of the configuration window, the Choose a Campaignstep window
opens.
256 of 1162
2. Select a campaign from the Choose a campaign drop-down list, the campaign opens in the
chooser window.
3. Select the specific element in that campaign to which you want to send the members from your
current campaign, then click Choose. The window closes and the element from the other
campaign appears in the Add to Campaign configuration window.
Add to program
Description
This element lets you add segment members to a selected step in an automated marketing
program for further routing and processing.
Configuration
1. In the Choose a program field, select a program from the drop-down list, or narrow the search by
starting to type the name in the field.
2. Select a program step from the Choose a program step drop-down list, this is the specific step
in the automated marketing program to which you want to send the campaign members.
Move to campaign
Description
This element lets you move segment members from the current campaign to specific elements
(including cloud step elements) in a different campaign for further routing and processing.
Configuration
1. Click Choose at the bottom of the configuration window, the Choose a Campaignstep window
opens.
257 of 1162
2. Select a campaign from the Choose a campaign drop-down list, the campaign opens in the
chooser window.
3. Select the specific element in that campaign to which you want to move the campaign members
from your current campaign, then click Choose. The window closes and the element from the
other campaign appears in the Move to Campaign configuration window.
Add toshared list

Description
This element lets you add segment members in the current campaign to a shared contact list.
Adding members to a shared list is a dynamic process, meaning as the contacts progress
through the campaign steps, they will be added to the shared list you have specified.
Configuration
In the Choose a contact list to evaluate field, select a contact list from the drop-down list, or by
clicking the folder icon and selecting from the chooser. Or, click New to add a contact list.
Move to program
Description
This element lets you move selected campaign members to another marketing program.
Configuration
1. In the Choose a program field, select a program from the drop-down list, or narrow the search by
starting to type the name in the field.
2. Select a program step from the Choose a program step drop-down list, this is the specific step
in the automated marketing program to which you want to move the campaign members.
Move to shared list

Description
This element lets you move segment members to a shared list that can be used by other
marketers (users) in your organization in campaigns and segments.
Configuration
In the Choose a contact list to evaluate field, select a contact list from the drop-down list, or by
clicking the folder icon and selecting from the chooser. Or, click New to add a contact list.
258 of 1162
Wait
Description
This element allows you to specify how much time will elapse between steps of your campaign.
Example: If you want to send an email alerting contacts and prospects to register for an
upcoming seminar, after the initial email step, you can add a wait step. You can specify
an amount of time to wait (days, hours or weeks) before continuing on to the next step,
perhaps sending a reminder to those who have not yet responded.
Configuration
Select one of the following options to determine how long the wait interval should be:
Waitfor a set amount of time: Specify the number of hour(s), day(s), week(s) or month
(s) for the wait period.
Wait until a specific date and time: Set a specific date and time as the target wait
period. Confirm the correct time zone is selected.
Note: If your time zone setting is affected by Daylight Savings Time, a note is
shown that the GMT will be adjusted according to whether you are in Daylight
259 of 1162
Savings or Standard time.
6.10.3 Configuring campaign canvas elements: Assets

When you add assets to your campaign you are adding the elements with which your contacts will
interact.
The following is a list of the assets available on the campaign canvas:
Email
Form
Landing page
Email
Description
Lets you select the email(s) used in the campaign and specify when and how they are sent to
the recipients.
Configuration
1. In the Choose an email or create a new one field, select an existing email from the drop-down
list, or by clicking the folder icon and selecting from the chooser. You can also create a new
260 of 1162
email by clicking New.

2. Select additional configuration options by clicking on the corresponding tabs:
Signature: Enable the Use a Signature checkbox (optional), then select either Send
using a dynamic signature rule or Send on behalf of a single user, then select an option
from the corresponding drop-down list.
Sending Options: Select the check box next to the sending options that you want to
utilize for this email.
Break send into smaller batches: This option allows you to break the overall
email send into smaller batches. Specify the number of hours or days, then
choose the correct time unit.
Allow emails to be re-sent to past recipients: This option allows emails to be
re-sent to past recipients of the same email.
Note: In most cases, you will not want to select this option as it increases
the likelihood that the recipient will report your email as spam. This should
only be selected if it is an email that contains crucial or emergency
information, or if a critical correction has been made to the content of the
original email.
Include List-Unsubscribe header: This option includes a list-unsubscribe
header to your email.
Send email to master exclude members: This option sends the email to users
on the master exclude list, this ensures that members on this list do not miss out
on critical non-marketing emails, such as product information.
Send email to unsubscribed members: This option sends the email to
unsubscribed users, this ensures that unsubscribed members do not miss out on
critical non-marketing emails, such as product information.
Scheduling: This tab allows you to select the days and the specific time range during
which the email is sent out.
Note: The default time zone is your local timezone.

Routing: Enable the checkbox if you want to automatically route contacts excluded from
the email send. Click Choose and specify a target.
261 of 1162
Form
Description
Forms are added to the campaign canvas for reporting purposes only. Choose and configure the
form that is associated with a click-through link in an email or a landing page used in your
campaign. You do not use connectors to tie a form element into the flow, it is placed on the
canvas because it is associated with the click-through link in an email or landing page. Placing a
form on the canvas makes it visible to the marketer and allows you to edit it more easily while
editing the rest of the campaign, and having it here also includes it in the campaign's reporting.
Note: If a landing page on the canvas contains a form that is also on the canvas, a
system line is drawn between them to show the relationship
Configuration
In the Choose a form or create a new one field, select an existing form from the drop-down list,
or by clicking the folder icon and selecting from the chooser. You can also create a new form by
clicking New.
Landing page
Description
Landing pages are added to the campaign canvas for reporting purposes only. Choose and
configure the landing page that is associated with a click-through link in an email used in your
campaign.You do not use connectors to tie a landing page element into the flow, it is placed on
the canvas because it is associated with the click-through link in an email. Placing a landing
page on the canvas makes it visible to the marketer and allows you to edit it more easily while
editing the rest of the campaign, and having it here also includes it in the campaign's reporting.
Note: If a landing page on the canvas contains a form that is also on the canvas, a
system line is drawn between them to show the relationship
Configuration
In the Choose a landing page or create a new one field, select an existing landing page from the
drop-down list, or by clicking the folder icon and selecting from the chooser. You can also create
a new landing page by clicking New.
262 of 1162
6.10.4 Configuring campaign canvas elements: Audience

When you add a segment member element to your campaign canvas you are identifying the audience
for the campaign.
Segment Members
Description
Adds a contact segment to the campaign. Contains the contacts who will receive your email
and/or be tested against your criteria.
Configuration
1. In the Choose a segment or create a new one field, select an existing segment from the dropdown list, or by clicking the folder icon and selecting from the chooser. You can also create a
new segment by clicking New.
2. Specify how segment members should be added to the campaign, choose one of the following
options in the configuration window:
Add members once when the campaign is first activated: All members are added to
the campaign at once upon activation.
Add members regularly until campaign is deactivated: Specify how frequently
members should be added to the campaign. Enter a value for the Re-evaluation
Frequency, then specify if it is in hour(s), day(s), week(s), or month(s).

Note: You can set the Re-evaluation Frequency to be every 1 hour but this
frequency can overload the Asynchronous Commands queue. It is recommended
263 of 1162
that the frequency be limited to a 12 or 24 hour basis.
6.10.5 Configuring campaign canvas elements: Decisions

When you add a decision element to your campaign you are customizing the campaign experience for
your contacts based on how they interact with your material.
The following is a list of each Decision element available on the campaign canvas:
Clicked email?
Compare contact fields
Compare customobject fields
Shared list member?
Shared filter member?
Opened email?
Sent email?
Submitted form?
Visited website?
Configuring campaign canvas elements: Decisions
264 of 1162
Clicked email?
Description:
This element lets you process segment members differently depending on if they have or have
not clickedthrough on any link in a specific email at least a selected number of times during a
specified period.
Configuration
1. In the Choose an email to evaluate field, select an existing email from the drop-down list, or by
clicking the folder icon and selecting from the chooser.
2. Set the evaluation details by selecting:
The minimum number of times that a link in the email was clicked, choose from the
number drop-down list.
The time period during which it was clicked (within the last...), type a number in the box
then choose if it is hours, days, weeks, or months.
The Evaluation period, the time period in which you want to evaluate for this criterion.
Type a number in the box then choose if it is hours, days, weeks, or months.
Compare contact fields

Description
This element lets you route segment members based on the value in a specified field in the
member's contact record.
Configuration
1. In the Evaluate Contacts whose section, select values in each of the fields:
In the first drop-down list, select the field that you want to evaluate, or narrow the
selection by starting to type the name in the field.
265 of 1162
In the next field, select the operator for the comparison, this value tells Eloqua how you
want to route the contacts based on the specified field. The operators vary depending on
the field type that you selected.
Example: If you select Date Created as the field type, you might choose Before
as the operator, to look for contact profiles created before a certain date.
Whereas if the selected field is Job Role, the operator might be Contains,
allowing you to search for a keyword in a contact's job title. For example, you
could search for someone whose job role contains the word "sales".
Enter a value in the last field, this information is the point of comparison within the
specified contact field.
2. Set the Evaluation period, the time period in which you want to evaluate for this criterion. Type a
number in the box then specify if it is hours, days, weeks, or months.
Example: In the image below, the State or Province field is being evaluated to find those
contacts whose information is an exact match for the specified value, in this case, Ontario. And
the evaluation period for this comparison is 14 days.
Compare customobject fields

Description
This element lets you filter contacts based on values populated in custom object fields.
Example: You may have a custom field called salary set as a picklist, and based on the
value selected for a contact, add (or exclude) that contact from your segment.
266 of 1162
Configuration
1. In the Evaluate Contacts whose section, select values in each of the fields:
Select a Custom Object Set: Choose a custom object set from the drop-down list.
Select a field: Choose the field containing the data that you wish to use for comparison
(filtering) purposes.
Select an operator: This value tells Eloqua how to route the contacts. The operators
vary depending on the field type that you selected.
Enter a value: In the last field, this information is the point of comparison within the
specified contact field.
2. Set the Evaluation Period, the time period in which you want to evaluate for this criterion. Type a
Shared list member?

Description
This element lets you route segment members based on whether or not they are in a selected
contact list during a specified period.
Configuration
1. In the Choose a contact list to evaluate field, select an existing contact list from the drop-down
list, or by clicking the folder icon and selecting from the chooser.
Shared filter member?

Description
A shared filter is a contact filter that can be used across multiple segments. This element lets
you route contacts based on whether or not they are in a shared filter during a specified period.
Configuration
1. In the Choose a shared contact filter to evaluate field, select an existing shared field from the
drop-down list, or by clicking the folder icon and selecting from the chooser.
267 of 1162
Opened email?
Description
This element lets you route segment members differently depending on if they have or have not
opened a specific email at least a selected number of times during a specified period.
Configuration
The minimum number of times that the email was opened, choose from the number dropdown list.
The time period during which it was opened (within the last...), type a number in the box
then choose if it is hours, days, weeks, or months. .
Sent email?
Description
This element lets you route segment members that have been sent a specific email separately
from those that have not, so that they can be processed differently.
Configuration
number in the box then choose if it is hours, days, weeks, or months.
Submitted form?
Description
This element lets you route segment members that have submitted a specific form any number
of times during an evaluation period, separately from those that have not submitted the form at
least once so that they can be processed differently.
268 of 1162
Configuration
1. In the Choose a form to evaluate field, select an existing form from the drop-down list, or by
2. Set the evaluation parameters by selecting the time period during which the form must have
been submitted to be routed differently (Sent within the last...). Type a number in the box then
choose if it is hours, days, weeks, or months.
Example: If you set the value as 1 week, Eloqua would route segment members that
submitted a form during the past week separately from those that did not.
3. Set the Evaluation period, the time period in which you want to evaluate for this criterion. Type a
Visited website?
Description
This element lets you route segment members that have viewed any page on your website at
least a selected number of times during a specified period separately from those that have not
so that they can be processed differently.
Configuration

The minimum number of times that the website was visited, choose from the number
drop-down list.
The time period during which it was visited (within the last...), type a number in the box
then choose if it is hours, days, weeks, or months.
2. The Evaluation period, the time period in which you want to evaluate for this criterion. Type a
1. In the Choose a Cloud Decision and configure if necessary field, select a cloud decision from
the drop-down list or start typing the name to narrow down the search.
2. Enable the checkbox next to Automatically route contacts with errors from cloud app, this
prevents contacts from becoming "stuck"in an action or decision step.
3. Specify the path that the contacts should take if the external service is unavailable by clicking
Choose..., then configure as needed.
269 of 1162
6.11 Campaign approvals

Note: To enable this feature, please log in to My Oracle Support (http://support.oracle.com) and
Campaign approvals facilitate the verification of content (emails, landing pages, and so on) prior to
activating a campaign. Campaigns provide the modern marketer with powerful tools to reach and
nurture prospective and current customers. Campaign activation can be performed by the owner
(creator) of the campaign or anyone with the necessary permissions. However, often it is important to
validate the content of the emails, landing pages and other content that is included in a campaign.
Campaign approvals can help you with this type of content verification before a campaign is activated.
With campaign approvals, Eloqua administrators have the ability to customize the stages in the
approval workflow, they can also select which users are authorized to approve the content that is being
reviewed. After all campaign stages (steps) have been approved, the campaign can be activated.
At a high level, the campaign approval process occurs as follows:
1. You must create a standard workflow for approvals that can be used for all future campaigns,
here you must also specify which users are authorized as approvers at each stage. Learn more
about configuring the campaign approval workflow.
2. To manage the approvals feature you must be a member of a security group that has access to
approvals. Learn more about enabling campaign approvals for groups.
3. You can configure the approvals feature to allow certain groups/ users to activate campaigns
without going through the approvals process. Learn more about granting campaign activation
permission.
4. When a campaign is ready to be approved, you can send a campaign approval request and
check the status of the approval.
5. Reviewers have the option to either approve or reject the campaign.
6. After the campaign is approved, it can be activated. Learn more about activating a campaign.
Note: The approvals workflow is not available for Simple Email and A/B Test campaigns.
6.11.1 Campaign approvals frequently asked questions

Q: I am not listed as an approver for a stage of the approval process, yet I see both the Approve and
Reject buttons next to the name of the current stage (step). Why?
270 of 1162
A: In order to prevent all users from being able to approve or reject a stage in the approvals workflow, if
you have customer administrator rights, you can approve or reject any stage (step) in the process.
Q: Is there a limit to the number of stages in an approvals workflow?
A: While there is no enforced limit, it is recommended to keep the number of stages to a reasonable
level.
Q: Can a non-Eloqua user be an approver?
A: No. All approvers (reviewers) must be users in your Eloqua instance.
Q: Can a security group be used as a reviewer (approver)?
A: No, you can only select individual Eloqua users as reviewers.
Q: Are approvals available for all campaign types?
A: No, the approvals workflow is not available for Simple Email and A/B Test campaigns.
Q: Is there a way to easily view the status of the approvals process for a specific campaign(s) without
having to open it?
A: Yes. From the campaigns launchpad, select Open an Existing Campaign. In the campaign
chooser, the Status column will indicate what step in the approvals process the campaign is currently
located.
6.11.2 Configuring the campaign approvals workflow

The campaign approvals workflow is a set of stages that a campaign must pass through prior to
activation. It is a global workflow for campaigns in your Eloqua instance. You cannot create separate
workflows for individual campaigns.
To configure the campaign approvals workflow:
271 of 1162
1. Navigate to Settings > Setup

2. Click the Approvals icon in the Assets section.The Campaign Approvals Workflow dialog box
opens.
3. Create the necessary review stages for your approval process. To create a review stage,
perform the following steps:
i. Click the + icon to add the first review (approval) stage. The Add Review screen opens.
ii. Specify the stage information:

Name: The name of the stage.
Description: (Optional) A description of the stage.
Example: The first step in your approvals process might be a review of

the content in your email and landing page. The description only appears
when editing the stage. It is not shown in the list of steps when viewing
the approval process.
Reviewer(s): The names of the persons you want to set as approvers for this
stage.
272 of 1162
To add a reviewer: Start typing the first name of the person. When the
correct name appears, click the name and press the Enter key to add
them as an approver.
Important: The person(s) you have selected are NOT added to the
list of approvers until you press the Enter key. When they are
entered correctly, their name is displayed with a X next to it.
To remove a reviewer: Click the X next to the name, and that person is
removed from the list of approvers.
iii. Click Save to save the approval stage. The window closes and the Campaign
Approvals Workflow dialog box appears.

4. Make any appropriate adjustments to your approval stages:
To reorder stages in your workflow: Click the stage that you want to move, then dragand-drop it in the desired position.
To edit a stage : Click the pen and paper icon to the right of the stage that you want to
edit, the Edit Review dialog box opens. Here you can rename, change the description, or
modify the names of the reviewers for this stage.
To delete a stage: Click the X icon to the right of the stage that you want to delete, a
confirmation dialog box opens. Click OK and the stage is deleted.
273 of 1162
Note: You cannot add, remove, or edit any of the approvers (reviewers) in the workflow while a
campaign is active. You must deactivate all active campaigns in your Eloqua instance before
you can make changes to the workflow.
6.11.3 Enabling campaign approvals for groups

Before a user can approve a campaign they must be a member of a group that has the appropriate
approval permissions.
To enable campaign approvals for a group:

1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Users and select the Groups tab on the left-hand side.
2. Click the down-arrow next to the name of the security group that requires approvals access.
3. Click Security Group Details. The Security Group Overview page opens.
4. Click Interface Access.
5. Click Edit to edit the settings for your group.
6. Scroll to Settings and expand Setup > Assets.
7. Enable the Approvals checkbox.
274 of 1162
6.11.4 Granting campaign activation permission

Campaigns can only be activated with the appropriate permissions. If the campaign approvals feature
is enabled, you must request approval before you can activate the campaign.
To configure the ability for a user or security group to activate campaigns:

1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Users, select the Groups tab on the left-hand side.
2. Click on the down-arrow next to the name of the group that you want to view, then click
Security Group Details, the Security Group Overview page opens.
3. Click Default Asset Permissions.
4. Click the Edit button.
5. On the Campaigns tab, enable the Activate checkbox, for your user and anyone else at your
organization who should be able to activate campaigns.
If Activate is not selected: the user does not have activate permission. If the campaign
approvals feature is in use, the user can still activate a campaign, but must first go
through the approvals process.
If Activate is selected: the user can activate the campaign regardless of whether or not
the campaign approvals feature is in use.
6.11.5 Requesting campaign approval

After the campaign approvals workflow has been configured for your Eloqua campaigns, you can begin
requesting approval for your campaigns.
To request campaign approval:
275 of 1162
1. Navigate to Campaigns> Open an Existing Campaign.

2. Click on the name of the campaign in the Campaign Chooser window and then click Choose.
3. Click the action menu (gear icon) in the top-right corner of the campaign canvas and then click
Approvals.... The Approvals screen appears with the Status tab selected:
4. Click the field below each stage to open a drop-down list of names.
Note: Only reviewers who were added when you configured the stage will appear on this
list.
5. Specify the appropriate reviewer for each stage by typing and clicking the appropriate user
name. After the reviewer is added successfully, their name appears in the field with an X next to
it.
Note: If you need to remove the name from the field, click the X next to the name.
6. Click Save after adding a reviewer to each stage. If you neglect to add a reviewer to one or
more of the stages, an error message is displayed, add a name to this field, then click Save.
7. Click Request Approval in the bottom-right corner when you are ready to send out the
approvals request.
276 of 1162
An email is sent to the approver(s) requesting that they review the content assigned to them. The
sender of the email is shown as Eloqua Notifier.
The following information is included in the approval request email:
The name of the person requesting approval.
The stage in the approval process for which approval is being requested.
The name of the campaign.
The name of the segment for the first step in the approval process.
If it is a segment that is being reviewed for approval, the total number of contacts included in
that segment.
When the approval is in progress, the status button of your campaign changes to the name of the
current step in the workflow.
Example: In the following screenshot, the campaign is at the Content Review stage:
While the campaign approval is in progress, the reviewers will either approve or reject the campaign
stages:
277 of 1162
If all stages are approved: The Approvals... button in the top-right corner of the canvas
changes to Activate and the campaign can now be activated.
If a stage is rejected: The approvals process stops and the campaign reverts back to
Draftstatus. The reason for rejection is captured on the history tab along with the reviewer's
comments:
While a campaign approval is in progress, the campaign can still be edited. However, after the
campaign is edited, the Approve and Reject buttons next to a stage are no longer visible and the
approvals process must be re-initiated from the beginning by clicking the Request Approval button in
the lower-right corner of the approvals screen. An email notification is sent to the approver(s)..
While a campaign approval is in progress, you can check the approval status at any time.
6.11.6 Checking the approval status of campaigns

After you request campaign approval, you can check the status and view the stages and reviewer
comments. At any time, you (or any Eloqua user who is listed as an approver in your instance) can see
an overview of all approval steps awaiting action.
Note: You cannot make any changes to the approval process (steps, approvers, etc.) while the
campaign (or any other campaign) is active; you must first deactivate the campaign in order to
make changes.
To check the approval status of a campaign:
278 of 1162
1. Click My Approvals from the Campaigns Launchpad:
2. Click Approvals... and then select the History tab. The approval history and any responses
from the reviewers are displayed:
6.11.7 Approving or rejecting campaign stages

When your approval is needed for a campaign, you receive an email requesting your participation. You
can review the campaign and preview the assets on the campaign canvas, you can then decide to
either approve or reject the stage. If you reject a stage, the campaign returns to the draft status. If you
approve the stage, it continues forward in the approvals workflow.
To approve or reject a campaign stage:

1. Click View Campaign in the approval request email to open the content for approval.
Note: If you are not currently logged in to Eloqua when you click View Campaign, you
will be directed to the Eloqua login screen. Once logged in you will need to manually
open the campaign: navigate to Campaigns> Open an Existing Campaign then
search for the campaign and click Choose.
279 of 1162
2. Right-click an asset on the campaign canvas, then click Preview..., a preview window opens
where you can search for contacts.
3. Find a contact then click the Preview button at the bottom of the window. A preview is
generated allowing you to view the asset as it will appear to the contact. Click the tabs on the
top of the screen to preview what the user will see if they are using a desktop computer, a
tablet, or a mobile device.
4. Click Add Contact to preview the asset for another contact, or click Cancel to return to the
campaign canvas.
5. When you are done reviewing the campaign, click Approvals... in the top-right corner of the
canvas to open the approvals screen:
6. Click either Reject or Approve to provide your decision.

A dialog box opens asking you to confirm your decision. Enter a comment, then click Confirm.
The results of your decision are as follows, if you:

Approve: an email is sent to the person(s) who requested your approval, the person is informed
of your decision and provided with any comments that you made.
280 of 1162
The Status tab is updated to show that approval has been granted via a green checkmark. The
approvals workflow continues and the reviewer(s) responsible for the next step is notified that
their approval is required.
Reject: an email is sent to the person(s) who requested your approval, the person is informed of
your decision and provided with any comments that you made.
The approvals process stops and the campaign reverts to Draft status. The reviewer's reason
for rejecting the campaign at this stage is displayed on the history tab:
281 of 1162
Note: In steps that have more than one reviewer, the step is considered either approved or
rejected after the first person submits his or her approval or rejection. In other words, all
approvers in a step are not required to give their responses in order for the process to proceed
to the next step.
6.12 Campaign activation security

Campaigns can be assigned a security permission called Activation. This permission allows customer
administrators to determine if a user has the ability to activate, view and/or edit a campaign. A good
example of its value is if you have a partner or basic level user to whom you want to give permissions
to create and setup a campaign, but not the authority to activate it.
6.12.1 Changing activation permissions for existing campaigns

Eloqua allows you to change the campaign activation permissions of existing campaigns. Only
designated users or security groups have the ability to activate a campaign. If a user does not have
activation permission for a campaign, the Activate button is disabled.
To change the activation permissions for an existing campaign:

1. Navigate to Campaigns > Open an Existing Campaign, then select an existing campaign
from the chooser window.
2. Click to the action menu (gear icon) then click Permissions, a window opens listing different
user groups and their permission settings.
3. In the Activate column, use the checkbox to modify the user or group's activation permissions
as needed, a checked box means activation permission is enabled.
282 of 1162
Note: If you do not see the user or group that you want to modify permissions for on the
list, click the + button in the bottom left-hand corner of the window. Choose either Add
User or Add Group then find the user or group in the drop-down list and click Add.
4. Click Save.
6.12.2 Granting default activation permissions for campaigns

You can modify the security permissions to grant activation permissions to users and user groups
though the setup area of the application. Granting permissions to these users or groups gives them the
ability to activate a campaign when they are done creating it, this is a default permissions setting.
To grant default activation permissions for campaigns:

2. Select the Groups tab on the left-hand pane and click on the security group for the user(s) that
you want to modify.
3. Click Default Asset Permissions, then click Edit.
4. Choose Campaigns in the left-hand pane of the group details window.
283 of 1162
Important: If Campaigns is not listed, you must grant this group creation permission.
From the group overview page, click Asset Creation, then click Edit. Enable the
checkbox next to Campaigns, then click Save.
5. For Asset Creator, set the desired View, Edit, Delete, Security, and Activate permissions for
this security group.
To add a user or security group to this permissions list, search for the users or groups that you
want to assign activate permissions to using the search box, then click Add. Enable the
checkboxes to give this user permissions.These users and/or security groups will also have
permission by default when new campaigns are created by users in the security group you are
editing.
6. Scroll down to the bottom of the page and click Save. After these settings are saved, these
users will have the level of access you define here when they create a campaign.
Example: If you enable every checkbox except Activate, when a campaign is created
the user can edit and delete it, but they cannot activate it. This can be useful when you
want to go through an approval process within your organization before activating a
campaign, see Campaign approvals.
6.13 Mobile campaign manager

Eloqua's MobileCampaign Manager is a mobile site designed for iOS and Android devices that allows
marketers to activate, deactivate, and monitor their campaigns directly from their mobile devices. The
Mobile Campaign Manager provides quick insight into the status of your campaigns, and on-the-go
flexibility.Marketers can also schedule and unschedulesimple email campaigns using the Mobile
Campaign Manager.
284 of 1162
Install Mobile Campaign Manager by navigating to the following URL:

https://login.eloqua.com/?ReturnUrl=Apps/Cloud/Admin/Catalog/Add/581deee0-a39a-437a8ec6-ae238256fbd5/80-6C-73-32-27-C9-68-48-2B-B7-C5-2B-27-DF-09-06
Once installed, Mobile Campaign Manager can be accessed by navigating to the following URL:
https://login.eloqua.com/Apps/Cloud/Admin/Galactus?returnPath=/salesTools/cm
285 of 1162
Walkthrough
The central screen of theMobile Campaign Manager lists your recently-viewed campaigns, and
visually indicates their status, either draft, scheduled, or active. The navigation bar at the top of the
screen includes the Oracle
logo, which you can use to return to the RecentlyViewed screen at
286 of 1162
any time, a magnifying glass icon
that opens the search bar, and a menu icon
from which you
can log out of the application.

Tapping on a campaign either in the Recent Campaigns screen or from the search results shows the
campaign info screen.
Campaigns in a draft state have the option to activate the campaign, and in the case of simple email
campaigns, to schedule it.
287 of 1162
Scheduled campaigns include a button to deactivate the campaign and prevent it from proceeding.
Active campaigns show the campaign information and also include a deactivation button so you can
deactivate the campaign. For simple email campaigns, there are also campaign statistics, like the
288 of 1162
number of emails sent, opened, clickthroughs and conversions.
289 of 1162
6.13.1 Activating a Campaign with the Mobile Campaign Manager

With the mobile campaign manager, you can activate a campaign and from your mobile device.
You must have already created and scheduled the campaign withinEloqua before you can activate it
with the Mobile Campaign Manager.
To activate a campaign with the mobile campaign manager:

1. Open the mobile campaign manager on your mobile device.
2. Open the campaign that you wish to edit:
Select a recently-viewed campaign from the list, or
Search for a specific campaign by tapping the magnifying glass icon and searching by
290 of 1162
the campaign name:
The campaign status screen will open, showing the campaign status, the start and end dates,
and any related assets.
291 of 1162
3. If your campaign is not scheduled, or if you wish to change the scheduling, tap Edit. You will be
prompted to confirm that you wish to activate the campaign on its configured Start Date.
4. Then, you can activate your campaign by tappingActivate.
292 of 1162
The campaign status screen will refresh to show that the campaign is now scheduled. When the
campaign begins, its status will show as Active and provide some simple campaign reporting metrics.
Note: Reporting metrics are only available for simple email campaigns.
293 of 1162
294 of 1162
6.13.2 Deactivating a Campaign with the Mobile Campaign Manager

With the mobile campaign manager, you can deactivate a campaign and from your mobile device.
To deactivate a campaign with the mobile campaign manager:

295 of 1162
the campaign name:
296 of 1162
3. Select Deactivate. You will be prompted to confirm that you wish to deactivate the campaign.
Select Confirm.
297 of 1162
The campaign status screen refreshes to show that the campaign has been deactivated as is now in
the Draft status.
6.13.3 Scheduling and Unscheduling a Campaign with the Mobile

Campaign Manager
With the mobile campaign manager, you can schedule a right from your mobile device.
You must have already created the campaign withinEloqua before you can edit and activate it with the
Mobile Campaign Manager.
To schedule a campaign in the mobile campaign manager:

298 of 1162
the campaign name:
299 of 1162
3. Select Edit. You will be prompted to select when you would like the email campaign to launch.
4. Choose to either Send right now, or Schedule for a later time. This will overwrite the
scheduling information you provided when you created the campaign in Eloqua. If you choose to
schedule at a later time, you will need to provide the date and time that the campaign should go
live.
300 of 1162
5. Select Activate.
The campaign status screen refreshes to show that the campaign is now scheduled. When the
campaign is activated, the campaign status screen indicates that the campaign is active, and shows
some simple campaign reporting metrics.
Note: Reporting metrics are only available for simple email campaigns.
To unschedule a campaign in the mobile campaign manager:

301 of 1162
the campaign name:
302 of 1162
3. Select Edit. You will be prompted to confirm that you wish to unschedule the campaign.
4. Select Confirm.
The campaign status screen refreshes to show that the campaign is in a draft state. You can click
Activate to reschedule it.
303 of 1162
6.14 External (non-Eloqua) assets

External assets are non-Eloqua (that is, offline) activities perrformed by your contacts or prospects.
These assets can be imported for use in Eloqua campaign reporting. In addition, data associated with
these activities can be passed to Salesforce.com.
Concepts and Definitions

Before beginning the process of importing non-Eloqua assets and activities into Eloqua, it is important
that you have an understanding of the terms related to this functionality, as follows:
External Asset Type: The 'umbrella' (top-level) classification for something that your contacts
or prospects are performing, for example, a Tradeshow.
External Asset Name: The first sub-category for the asset type. For example, if it is a
Tradeshow asset type, then the asset name could be Eloqua Experience, or Open World, etc.
External Activity Type: The specific activity that the contact or prospect performed for this
specific external asset for example, "Registered", "Canceled", "Completed", etc.
Campaign ID: The number of the campaign in Eloqua. This is reflected in the URL for each
campaign. For example, https://secure.eloqua.com/Main.aspx#campaigns&id=XXX, where
XXX is replaced by the actual campaign ID.
Date: The date of the activity that is being captured. The format is MM/DD/YYYY.
Email Address: The email address of the contact or prospect performing this activity.
For a pre-existing Campaign, when importing (uploading) external activities into your Eloqua instance,
all fields above are required in your CSV (or XLS) file. If you are creating the activity as a step in a
Campaign directly on the Campaign Canvas, then the Campaign ID is not yet available, so it is not
required. This requirement will be discussed later in this document.
External activities can be displayed in Eloqua Profiler, this feature provides a 360-degree view of a
contact's activities across all Eloqua functions, including Email Sends, Web Visits, and External
Activities.
6.14.1 Creating the external activites CSV file

Most likely, you will have exported data from another source (perhaps the tradeshow activities). That
data needs to be formatted in a way that Eloqua can understand it.
The following fields (that is, columns) are required in your spreadsheet:
304 of 1162
Asset Type
Asset Name
Activity Type: The list of Activity Types must match the choices you have enabled in steps 5
and 6 in the previous section.
Email Address
Campaign ID (known only for a pre-existing Campaign).
Date (MM/DD/YYYY format)
Note: To ensure the external activity generates a campaign response, the External
Asset Date must be between the reporting start date of the campaign and the current
day's date. Uploading with a date before the reporting start date or after the current date
will result in the activity successfully being added to the contact record, however will not
create a campaign response for that activity.
All other fields are optional, including First and Last Name, Company, Phone Number, etc.
Here is the sample source file to be used in this document:
6.14.2 Creating Non-Eloqua (External) Assets

To create external assets:
1. Once logged in to your Eloqua instance, navigate to Settings > Setup > External Activities.
2. The External Assets and Activities dialog box opens.
3. Click the
icon in the lower-left corner of the window to begin adding a new External Asset
Type (indicated by the number 1 in the following screenshot). The Asset Type is the umbrella
name for all activities that you are going to capture for importing into Eloqua, for example, a
Tradeshow.
4. Give your asset a name by typing over the default Untitled External Asset Type name in the
External Asset Type field. You can use whatever name you wish but it should be as
representative as possible for the data you will be importing (indicated by the number 2 in the
305 of 1162
screenshot below):
5. Next, you must add the activities that contacts will perform for this Asset Type. In the case of a
Tradeshow, for example, you might choose Registered, Cancelled, Attended or Exhibited.
Click the
icon in the bottom of the External Activity box to begin adding the activities
(shown below with the number 3). You can type directly over the default name or delete the text
first and then add the appropriate name (shown by 4 in the following screenshot):
6. The Activities are added to the list. It is important that the names of the activities match the
names of the activities in your CSV (import) file, or the import will fail. The order in which you
add them is not important. Continue adding as many Activities as required by following step 5
above.
306 of 1162
7. To delete an Activity, highlight the Activity name and click the
icon at the bottom (as
shown by the number 5 in the following screenshot). The Activity is deleted from the list.
8. Once you have added all Activities associated with this type of Asset, click Save to save the
Asset and Activities. If you attempt to navigate outside of the External Activities screen without
saving your changes, the following warning message is displayed:
6.14.3 Uploading the External Activites CSV file

After you have created your External Activities CSV spreadsheet, you can upload the data.
To upload your External Activies CSV file:
307 of 1162
1. Log in to your Eloqua instance.

2. If you already have created a Campaign and know its Campaign ID (indicated at the end of the
URL when the Campaign is open in Eloqua), click Campaigns from the navigation toolbar.
3. Click Upload External Activities from the bottom of the Campaigns Launchpad.
4. If, however, you are already working on a Campaign in the Campaign Canvas (it is open in
Eloqua), without having to know the Campaign ID you can select Upload External Activities
from the Action Menu (gear icon) in the top-right corner of the application window.
5. The External Asset Upload Wizard dialog box opens.
6. The first tab (Pick Data Source) is where you a) give your import a name, b) specify the format
of the data (source) file and then begin the upload process by selecting your source file.
7. Give your upload a name. The default name is Data Import - xxxxxxxxxxxxx
where xxxxxxxxxxxxx and is a randomly assigned string of 13 numbers. However, you can
name the import to something of your choosing. Using the name of the tradeshow is an example
of how you might change the name to be more meaningful for future reference.
8. Select the format of the data contained in your source file, i.e. General (CSV), Excel (XLS OR
XLSX), Delimited file (tab, pipe, semicolon), etc.
9. Click the cloud graphic to select the source file. In the window that opens, browse to your file
and click Open to begin the upload process.
308 of 1162
10. Tab 2 opens with a preview of what your uploaded data will look like. Verify that the data looks
correct (matches your source file's configuration). If something is inaccurate, click Previous
Step. Modify your source file (or select another one) and begin the process again. If everything
looks correct, click Next Step.
11. Tab 3, Map Asset Fields, is where you map fields that contain data for your assets, campaign
and activities. Eloqua automatically attempts to match your spreadsheet (source file) headings
with the corresponding field in Eloqua. At this point no contact fields (for example, First Name,
Last Name, etc.) are mapped. Verify that Email Address, Campaign ID, External Asset
Name, External Asset Type and External Activity Type are mapped correctly. For any of
these fields that are not mapped (or mapped incorrectly), double-click on the Field. Click the
arrow to the right of the Target Field to display a drop-down menu of potentially matching fields.
Choose the correct one from the list.
12. Note that you cannot proceed from step 10 to the next tab until you have successfully mapped
the fields specified in that step. Once they are mapped correctly, click Next Step.
13. On Tab 4, Map Contact Fields, any remaining fields that are included in your source file (but
are not required) must be mapped. Note that all fields that were mapped in step 1o above are
now greyed out. In the source file used in this example, there are fields (columns) for Date, First
Name and Last Name that must be mapped to the corresponding fields in Eloqua. Double-click
on each of the Fields in this list and select the correct field from the drop-down menu. Eloqua
309 of 1162
attempts to match to a logical target field. Edit any incorrect mappings by double-clicking on
that field and selecting the correct one from the drop-down list of Target Fields.
14. Once all fields from steps 10 and 12 have been mapped, click Next Step. Tab 5 (Finish) opens.
15. Enter the Email address to which you wish to have the confirmation report sent after importing.
Although it is not required to have this Email generated and sent, it is recommended (a best
practice) to enable this feature in order to confirm success or troubleshoot failures.
16. Click Finish to complete the import.
Viewing and interpreting the Upload Results Notification Email

Once the import has been completed, if you specified an Email address in step 14 above, an Email will
be generated showing the detailed results of your import and links to any failed operations for
troubleshooting purposes.
In the following screenshot, all operations completed successfully:
310 of 1162
Included in the Email are the following:

Start and end times for the import (date and time), as well as a calculation of that interval.
The Company Name (your instance).
The Name of the import (source) file, and the type of file that was used.
The purpose for the import. In the screenshot above, the purpose (as defined in the upload
wizard) is Import Contact Asset Activity (worded slightly differently in the Email).
The Execution details section displays more specific information on each of the actions performed
during the import:
The name of the Import file, with the total number rows that were in the file.
Validation of the Email Address field.
Validation of the Asset Type that you defined in the External Activities configuration process as
well as compared to the source file.
Validation of the Campaign Data and Activities that were uploaded. If there were any failures
(invalid data entries) in your import, the numbers are indicated here.
How many new assets were created.
Finally, how many activities were created, by Entity Type and Field. More detailed information
is shown in the right-hand column for the number of new contacts, number of existing contacts
that were edited and how many new activities were created.
You may, however, experience failures or issues during the upload (import), and Eloqua defines those
issues in the same Notification Email, as follows:
311 of 1162
Note that there were five invalid entries for Campaign Data (most likely due to an incorrect Campaign
ID) that must be resolved in order to successfully complete the Upload. As a result of this failure, no
data was imported.
To determine exactly why the Campaign Data was deemed invalid and how many rows were rejected,
click on the underlined number link ("5" in the example above). The following table (report) opens:
You can see that the rejected reason is that one or more campaigns were invalid and that a total of five
rows were rejected (not imported).
To fix this issue and import your data successfully, go back to your source file, make the necessary
corrections and proceed through the Upload Wizard from the beginning.
6.14.4 Viewing External Activity on Contact Records

To view external activity on a contact record:
Once your Contacts have performed one of the External Activities that you have uploaded (imported),
you can see that data on the Activity Log tab of their Contact Record, as in the following example:
312 of 1162
6.15 Simple email campaigns

Simple email campaigns allow you to create an email marketing campaign without using the campaign
canvas. The SimpleEmail Campaign Wizard lets you quickly and easily create a campaign and
activate it within a few simple steps.
A/BTesting allows you to test out two different emails on a subset of your segment's contacts, to
determine which email better achieves your performance goals.
While your campaign is running, and after the campaign is complete, you can use the summary and
reporting pages to track the campaign's progress and performance, and gain insight into email opens,
click-throughs, and conversions.
6.15.1 Creating simple email campaigns

If you are creating a campaign in which you simply need to send an email to a contact group, you can
create a simple email campaign. This is a very straightforward campaign in which you select a contact
group, select an email to be sent out, and then select the delivery options for that email.
To create a simple email campaign:

1. Navigate to Campaigns, then click Create a Simple Email Campaign, the simple email
wizard opens.
2. In Step 1 of the wizard, enter a name for your campaign, this name only appears on this screen
and in the Campaign Chooser.You should choose a descriptive name, this will help you locate
313 of 1162
the campaign in the future,after entering a name a green check mark is displayed.
Note: if you have the A/B Testing feature turned on, you will need to click the Simple
button
3. In Step 2 of the wizard, select the contacts that will be included in your campaign by adding a
segment.
You can add a segment in the following ways:
Select a Segment:Click this option to select an existing segment, the Segment
Chooser opens.Select a segment then click Choose.

Create a Segment: Click this option to create a new segment, the segment editor
opens. Configure the segment as needed, learn more about See "Creating new
segments"
Upload a Contact List: Click this option to add contacts from an external file, the
Contact Upload Wizard opens. Click the cloud icon to upload the file. Follow the onscreen prompts to map your fields to Eloqua's fields. Click Finish when you are done.
After your segment is successfully added, a green check mark appears on the left side of the
step. The name of the segment, the date and time that it was last modified, and the number of
included contacts is listed under this step. To refresh the contacts, click the icon to the right of
the number of contacts.
If the segment you have selected is not valid, for example if it contains no criteria and therefore
no members, you will see a yellow warning sign instead of a green check mark. This indicates
that you must fix the errors before proceeding:
4. In Step 3 of the wizard, select the email that will be sent out to the specified segment members.
314 of 1162
You can add an email in the following ways:

Select an Email:Click this option to select an existing email, the Email Chooser
opens.Select an email then click Choose.
Create an Email: Click this option to create a new email, the email editor opens.
Configure the email as needed. Learn more about creating new emails.
Upload an Email: Click this option to upload an email, the HTML Document Upload
Wizard opens. Learn more about uploading HTML emails.

When your email has been successfully added, a green check mark is displayed on the left side
of the step. The email name, subject line, and any associated assets, such as linked-to landing
pages, forms, and images are shown.
If there is a problem with the email, for example, if you have not indicated an email group, the
yellow warning sign is displayed instead of the check mark. You can double-click on the email's
name to edit the email and resolve the error.
5. In Step 4 of the wizard, specify when the campaign will be launched.
Choose one of the following options:

Send right now: The campaign will be launched immediately when you click Activate
Campaign in the bottom-right corner of the wizard.
Schedule for a later time: The campaign will be scheduled to launch at a later time. A
date and time field appears in which you can schedule the launch.
Note: The timezone is displayed to the right of the date and time, this timezone is
based on the timezone selected in your user profile.
315 of 1162
Click the Advanced Sending Options drop-down list and choose from the additional options as
needed:
Use a Signature: You can add a signature to your email, you can choose to Send using
a dynamic signature rule, or Send on behalf of a single user.

Include List-Unsubscribe header: This option includes a list-unsubscribe header to
your email.
Break send into smaller batches: This option allows you to break the overall email
send into smaller batches. Specify the number of hours or days, then choose the correct
time unit.
Only send during certain days and hours:You can specify the days and times during
which the email will be sent, you may wish to use these options to schedule email
processing at off-peak hours or at times when you think customers may be most likely to
read the email.
Allow emails to be re-sent to past recipients: This option allows emails to be re-sent
to past recipients of the same email.
316 of 1162
6. Click Save, in the upper right hand corner.

7. Click Activate Campaign to launch the campaign. If you receive a Required Field Missing
validation error, it means that you need to update your campaign's settings before you can
activate the campaign.
Click the action menu (gear icon), and select Settings. In the campaign details window, enter a
value for all required fields.Required fields are indicated by an asterisk. When everything is
configured properly, click Done, then click Save to save your changes. You should now be able
to activate the campaign.
When you activate the campaign, you will be directed to the report screen, which shows performance
metrics for the campaign. Learn more about Simple email campaign reports.
6.15.2 Modifying simple email campaigns

Simple email campaigns can be modified as long as they have not yet been activated. To modify an
active campaign, it must first be deactivated.
317 of 1162
To modify an existing campaign:

1. Navigate to Campaigns, then click Open an Existing Campaign, the Campaign Chooser
opens.
2. Select the simple email campaign that you want to modify, then click Choose, the simple email
campaign wizard opens.
3. Make any necessary changes to the campaign.
Note: If the campaign is in active mode, it must be deactivated before you can make
changes. Click the Deactivate button in the upper right-hand corner, a confirmation
window opens, click Deactivate, the campaign returns to Draft mode and can now be
modified.
6.15.3 Copying simple email campaigns

You may wish to make a copy of a previously used simple email campaign, you can then modify the
content for your new purpose.
To make a copy of a simple email campaign:

opens.
2. Right-click on the simple email campaign that you wish to copy, and select Copy.
318 of 1162
The copy is added to the list as the original campaign name, appended with ": Copy".
3. Select the copy then click Choose, the copy opens in the simple email campaign editor.
4. Click the action menu (gear icon), then select Settings, the campaign details window opens.
5. Enter a new name for the campaign and fill out the remaining fields as needed then click Done.
6. Edit the contents of the campaign as needed, then click Save to save your changes.
6.15.4 Deleting simple email campaigns

When a simple email campaign is no longer needed, it can be deleted from the application. To delete a
simple email campaign, the campaign must be in draft mode. An active campaign cannot be deleted
until it is deactivated.
To delete an existing campaign:

opens.
2. Right-click on the name of the campaign that you want to delete, then select Delete, a
confirmation window opens. Click Delete and the simple email campaign is deleted from the
application.
Note: If the Delete option is not present, the campaign may be in Active mode and must
be deactivated before it can be deleted. Open the campaign and click the Deactivate
button in the upper right-hand corner, a confirmation window opens, select Deactivate
again. The campaign can now be deleted from the chooser.
6.15.5 Simple email campaign reports

When you activate a simple campaign, you are directed to a summary screen. The top of the page
describes the campaign:its name, launch date, status, the targeted segment, number of emails sent,
and so on. Below that, various metrics are listed, giving you insight into the performance of your
319 of 1162
campaign. You can open the summary screen at any time by opening the campaign from the Campaign
Chooser.
Campaign summary screen

The summary screen includes a link to ViewParticipants, this provides visibility into which contacts
received the emails, and which failed to receive them, either due to unsubscribes, bouncebacks, and
so on.
320 of 1162
The progress of the campaign is displayed in the upper right-hand corner of the summary page, here the
number of contacts that were sent emails is indicated by blue, and the number of contacts that were
excluded from the email send is indicated by red.
As Eloqua sends out the email, it populates the Performance Overview section with the relevant
statistics:
Sent: The number of messages sent.
Total Opens: The number of times the message was opened.
Total Clicks: The number of times someone clicked a link in the message.
Conversions: The number of form submissions that resulted from the message.
Eloqua also provides a graphical representation of the campaign's performance using a funnel-like
diagram.
This diagram provides the following information:

Delivery Rate: This is the percentage of emails that are successfully delivered.The contacts
who receive the message are then assessed in the next step of the funnel. This level also
shows the number of bounces, the bounces indicate the proportion of the segment that did not
receive the message. Reducing bounces is likely to improve your campaign performance.
321 of 1162
Open Rate: This is the percentage of successfully-delivered emails that were opened.This
level also includes Unique Opens, which counts the number of contacts who opened the email.
By contrast, Total Opens simply measures the number of times the email was opened.
Because some recipients may open the email multiple times, Unique Opens is a more useful
metric than Total Opens. The No Action count indicates the number of contacts who did not
open the email.
Click-through Rate: This is the percentage of contacts who clicked a link in the email. Unique
Clicks indicates the number of contacts who clicked through to a landing page or form, and does
not double-count contacts who click through multiple times. The Unsubscribed count shows the
number of contacts who opened the email, and then chose to unsubscribe from future mailings.
Maintaining an awareness of unsubscribes can give you the insight necessary to better tailor
your campaigns to your segments.
At the bottom of the diagram, the conversion metrics are listed. The conversion rate is based on visits
to a landing page, total form submissions, and the overall campaign conversion rate. This area is not
shown if your campaign does not include a landing page or form.
The report is accurate as of the time you opened it. To refresh the report, click the Refresh button in
the top-right corner of the window.The last time the report was refreshed is always shown in small text
at the top of the summary page.
Operational Reports
To access the operational reports, click the action menu (gear icon), then select Operational
Reports. Click the name of the report that you want to view, the report window opens.
There are three types of operational reports as described below:
deactivated. It also shows you which user completed the action, and the date and time that the
event occurred.
Campaign Entry Report: This report provides information about how and when contacts
entered the campaign.
322 of 1162
Campaign Exit Report: This report provides information about how and when contacts exited
the campaign.
6.15.6 Creating A/Btesting email campaigns

Marketers can now use A/Btesting on simple email campaigns to test out two emails and see which
one performs better. By comparing a test email to a baseline, you can ensure that you send your
contacts an email that produces the best results.
To setup A/Btesting on a simple email campaign:

1. Navigate to Assets > Campaigns, then click Create a Simple Email Campaign, the simple
email campaign wizard opens.
323 of 1162
Note: The interface is provided as a guided (wizard-type) process to help you add the
campaign components.
2. In Step 1 of the wizard, enter a name for your campaign, this name only appears on this screen
and in the Campaign Chooser.You should choose a descriptive name, this will help you locate
the campaign in the future,after entering a name a green check mark is displayed. Click
A/BTest, the options in step three change to allow you to add an A email and a B email, rather
than just one.
3. In Step 2 of the wizard, select the contacts that will be included in your campaign by adding a
segment.
You can add a segment in the following ways:
Select a Segment:Click this option to select an existing segment, the Segment
Chooser opens.Select a segment then click Choose.

Create a Segment: Click this option to create a new segment, the segment editor
opens. Configure the segment as needed, learn more about See "Creating new
segments"
Upload a Contact List: Click this option to add contacts from an external file, the
Contact Upload Wizard opens. Click the cloud icon to upload the file. Follow the onscreen prompts to map your fields to Eloqua's fields. Click Finish when you are done.
324 of 1162
After your segment is successfully added, a green check mark appears on the left side of the
step. The name of the segment, the date and time that it was last modified, and the number of
included contacts is listed under this step. To refresh the contacts, click the icon to the right of
the number of contacts.
If the segment you have selected is not valid, for example if it contains no criteria and therefore
no members, you will see a yellow warning sign instead of a green check mark. This indicates
that you must fix the errors before proceeding:
4. In Step 3 of the wizard, select the A and the B email that will be sent out to the specified
segment members.
You can select an email in the following ways:
Select an Email:Click this option to select an existing email, the Email Chooser
opens.Select an email then click Choose.
Create an Email: Click this option to create a new email, the email editor opens.
Configure the email as needed. Learn more about creating new emails.
Upload an Email: Click this option to upload an email, the HTML Document Upload
Wizard opens. Learn more about uploading HTML emails.

When your emails have been successfully added, a green check mark is displayed on the left
side of the step. The email's name, subject line, and any associated assets, such as linked-to
landing pages, forms, and images are shown.
325 of 1162
If there is a problem with the email, for example, if you have not indicated an email group, the
yellow warning sign is displayed instead of the check mark. You can double-click on the email's
name to edit the email and resolve the error.
5. In Step 4 of the wizard, configure the settings of the A/Btest:
i. Using the contact slider, configure the percentage of contacts that you want to use in the
A/Btest. The number of contacts included in the A/B test group is displayed beneath the
slider.
Send the email to enough contacts that you're confident the results of the test are
trustworthy. The contacts that do not participate in the test will receive the winning
email. The size of your segment, the content of the email, and any time constraints,
should help you determine an appropriate test group size.
ii. Specify the winning metric. The winning metric determines which email was the 'best'.
The possible metrics are:
Total opens: The number of times the email was opened.
Unique opens: The number of recipients who opened the email (contacts are
counted once, no matter how many times they opened the message).
Total clicks: The number of times someone clicked a link in the email.
Unique clicks: The number of recipients who clicked a link (contacts are counted
once, no matter how many times they clicked through).
Total conversion: The number of form submissions that resulted from the
campaign.
Click-through Rate: The total number of clicked links divided by the number of
delivered emails. Undelivered emails are excluded from this calculation.
326 of 1162
Choose the metric that aligns with your goals for the campaign. If you're looking for high
engagement, you might want to focus on opens or clicks. If you're focused on goal
completion, the total conversion metric, which looks at the number of contacts that
submit a form linked to in the email, might be more appropriate.
iii. Configure the test period. You can set the duration for the test or set a specific end date.
iv. Specify what Eloqua should do when the test period has finished.
If you select Automatically send the winning version, Eloqua will automatically
send the winning email to the remaining contacts in the segment when the test
period ends.
If you do not select Automatically send the winning version, Eloqua will send
an email notification to you when the test ends.The message will detail which
email won, and prompt you to return to the campaign page to send the email to the
remaining contacts in the segment.
In the event of a tie, Eloqua will send an email notification prompting you to choose a
winner to send to the remaining contacts.
6. In Step 5 of the wizard, specify when the campaign will be launched.
Choose one of the following options:
327 of 1162
Send right now: The campaign will be launched immediately when you click Activate
Campaign in the bottom-right corner of the wizard.
Schedule for a later time: The campaign will be scheduled to launch at a later time. A
date and time field appears in which you can schedule the launch.
Note: The timezone is displayed to the right of the date and time, this timezone is
based on the timezone selected in your user profile.
Click the Advanced Sending Options drop-down list and choose from the additional options as
needed:
Use a Signature: You can add a signature to your email, you can choose to Send using
a dynamic signature rule, or Send on behalf of a single user.

Include List-Unsubscribe header: This option includes a list-unsubscribe header to
your email.
Break send into smaller batches: This option allows you to break the overall email
send into smaller batches. Specify the number of hours or days, then choose the correct
time unit.
Only send during certain days and hours:You can specify the days and times during
which the email will be sent, you may wish to use these options to schedule email
processing at off-peak hours or at times when you think customers may be most likely to
read the email.
Allow emails to be re-sent to past recipients: This option allows emails to be re-sent
to past recipients of the same email.
328 of 1162
7. Click Save in the upper right-hand corner.

8. Click Activate Campaign to launch the campaign. If you receive a Required Field Missing
validation error, it means that you need to update your campaign's settings before you can
activate the campaign.
Click the action menu (gear icon), and select Settings. In the campaign details window, enter a
value for all required fields.Required fields are indicated by an asterisk. When everything is
configured properly, click Done, then click Save to save your changes. You should now be able
to activate the campaign.
When you activate the campaign, you will be directed to the summary screen, which includes a
countdown to when the test ends, a live view of the performance of each email, and the option to
cancel the test and manually choose the winner. Learnmore about A/Btesting campaign reports.
6.15.7 Closing A/B testing campaigns

When an A/B test is over, or if you need to cancel it for any reason, you can close the test, changing its
status from Active to Completed. In order to avoid errors in the test results, once an A/B test is closed
(deactivated), it cannot be activated again. If you would like to run the same test a second time, you
must create a new test from the campaign launchpad.
329 of 1162
To close an A/B testing campaign:

1. Navigate to Campaigns > Open an Existing Campaign, the Campaign Chooser opens.
2. Select the active A/B test that you want to close, then click Choose, the test opens showing
the current results.
3. If the campaign is complete (a winner was selected), click Deactivate in the upper right-hand
corner. If the test is still in progress, select Cancel Campaign. The Cancel Campaign
confirmation window opens.
4. Click Submit, the campaign is closed and the status icon in the upper left-hand corner changes
from Active to Completed.
6.15.8 A/Btesting campaign reports

When you activate an A/B testing campaign, you are directed to a summary screen. The top of the
page describes the campaign: its name, launch date, status, the targeted segment, number of emails
sent, and so on. Below that, various metrics are listed, allowing you to monitor your A/B Test and
giving you insight into the performance of your campaign. You can open the summary screen at any
time by opening the campaign from the Campaign Chooser.
Campaign summary screen

During your A/Btest, a summary screen is displayed with a countdown showing the time remaining
until the test is complete, as well as the current stats on the performance of email A and email B.
330 of 1162
The progress of the campaign is displayed in the upper right-hand corner of the summary page, here the
number of contacts that were sent emails is indicated by blue, and the number of contacts that were
excluded from the email send is indicated by red.
Each email includes a link to ViewParticipants. This provides visibility into which contacts received
the emails, and which failed to receive them, either due to unsubscribes, bouncebacks, and so on.
After the test is completed Eloqua populates the Winning Email Metrics section of the summary
screen with the relevant statistics:
331 of 1162
Sent: The number of messages sent.

Total Opens: The number of times the message was opened.
Total Clicks: The number of times someone clicked a link in the message.
Conversions: The number of form submissions that resulted from the message.
Important:These values combine the stats for the winning email during the A/Btest, and the
stats from the rest of the segment. It does not include stats for contacts who received the
losing email.
diagram.

332 of 1162
open the email.
By default, the A/BTesting results are hidden. Click Details to expand that area.
333 of 1162
Each email includes a link to ViewParticipants. This provides visibility into which contacts received
the emails, and which failed to receive them, either due to unsubscribes, bouncebacks, and so on.
diagram.

334 of 1162
open the email.
Operational reports
To access the operational reports, click the action menu (gear icon), then select Operational
Reports. Click the name of the report that you want to view, the report window opens.
There are three types of operational reports as described below:
deactivated. It also shows you which user completed the action, and the date and time that the
event occurred.
Campaign Entry Report: This report provides information about how and when contacts
entered the campaign.
335 of 1162
Campaign Exit Report: This report provides information about how and when contacts exited
the campaign.
336 of 1162
7 Component library
Components are the building blocks of your emails. They are stored in the component library for easy
access and reference. Eloqua offers the following components:
Images: Images are used to add visual appeal to emails and landing pages, to provide diagrams
and pictures explaining various concepts, and to support your design and branding goals. You
can enable an image as a hyperlink to another website, allowing you to track clickthroughs from
your emails and landing pages.
File storage: Uploaded files are stored here, for example PDFs or Word documents, etc.
Note: You cannot add an image to File Storage. Images must be uploaded to the
Images component.
Hyperlinks: Hyperlinks are used to link from images, pages, and emails to landing pages,
content assets (whitepapers, use cases, videos), events (seminars, conferences, webinars),
and forms.
Field merges: Field merges are useful for drawing information from contact records to
personalize your emails.
Email headers: Email headers are designed as reusable content that can include branding
graphics, links to viewing the email in a browser, and other components.
Email footers: Email footers are displayed at the bottom of an email to provide additional
information and links for your recipients. Footers are designed as reusable content, so they are
not edited through the email editor, but instead have their own section in the application. You
can add a footer to an email in the settings window for the email.An email footer can include
links to your privacy policy, your company's street address and phone number, etc.
Shared content : Shared content is reusable content snippets that can be reused by other
Eloqua users at your organization. You can include and format text, images (including
hyperlinked buttons), and other elements in these sections.
Dynamic content: Dynamic content allows email or landing page content to be personalized
(customized) using pre-defined criteria and rules.
Example: You can send different contact information to recipients based on the
salesperson in charge of their city, state, country, or region, or customize the email or
landing page to only display information relevant to that contact or group of contacts.
Signature layouts: Signatures allow you to attach sender identity information to an email. Each
salesperson can include his or her picture, signature, personal message and contact
337 of 1162
information in the email. This personal touch builds the relationship between the salesperson
and their prospects and clients, and increases response rates.
Signature rules: Used to customize the rendered signature in an email when the message is
sent, based on a variety of criteria.
Example: A rule can customize which location appears in the signature for the sender
depending on which area of the world the contacts live.
7.1 Shared content

Shared content is reusable content snippets that you can create once, then reuse in different emails
and landing pages. It allows you to "build once, re-use everywhere" for your most valuable common
pieces of content.
There are several benefits to using shared content:
You can increase your efficiency because you're using the same content more than once.
It can be used to increase the consistency of your marketing collateral. It can reinforce your
branding or image and be used to enforce standards in the production of your marketing assets.
You can promote training, events, products, or other marketing elements through a number of
different campaigns and channels at the same time by creating only one content piece, driving
traffic to your offers and initiatives.
Shared content is created and managed in its own area in the application, and is easy to insert in
emails and landing pages. You can include and format text, images (including hyperlinked buttons),
and hyperlinks in these sections, as shown in the image below.
338 of 1162
7.1.1 Shared content examples

Shared content is often used in emails and newsletters and on landing pages to promote upcoming
events (such as conferences and webinars), to provide access to additional content, and to drive traffic
for training courses. Because you can include images and hyperlinks, you can provide an easy way to
click through to other content or to forms from a shared content.
You can also add multiple shared content sections to an email or landing page to quickly build in
content.
The following are a few examples of how shared content has been used.
Example 1: Pure text shared content
You can create shared content containing only text, to provide "more information" content that you
want to reuse in multiple marketing collaterals. The shared content can contain customer testimonials
339 of 1162
about a particular event. This shared content can be used in event-related emails and landing pages to
help drive registration.
Example 2: Text with link
One way to enhance shared content is to provide some interactivity, to have something the visitor or
recipient can do in the section. The simplest example is to provide a hyperlink in an email that connects
to a landing page, to your website, or to an email address (in this example, to provide feedback).
Example 3: Images and buttons
You can enhance shared content by inserting one or more images, by using different text colors, and by
using hyperlinks that let the visitor or recipient carry out actions or click through to landing pages and/or
forms.
Example 4: Using multiple shared content
You can "mix and match" multiple shared content in the same email or landing page. For the best
result, make sure that the design elements in the shared content are consistent with those in the rest of
your marketing collateral (for example, use the same color schemes and buttons).
7.1.2 Copying shared content

You can make a copy of shared content, this will allow you to make changes without deleting the
original content.
To copy shared content:

1. Navigate to Assets > Component Library, then click Shared Content on the left-hand pane.
2. Right-click the shared content that you want to copy and click Copy on the menu. The copied
shared content appears in the list as "Original name": Copy
3. Right-click the copied shared content and click Rename. Change the name and press the
Enter key.
7.1.3 Creating shared content

New shared content can be customized to your specifications, you can edit text, insert and edit
images, create hyperlinks and merge fields.
To create shared content:
340 of 1162
2. Click New, the Shared Content editor window opens.
3. Click the action menu (gear icon), then click Settings, a name and description window opens.
Here you can rename the content and provide a description if desired. Click Done when you are
finished.
4. Choose an editor in which to build your shared content, the button on the top left allows you to
toggle between the design editor and the HTML editor (to work with directly with the code).
Note: The name of the button switches between Src and Rich depending on which
editor you are currently using.
5. Enter and edit the shared content as required. The following is a list of tools that are available to
you in the design editor:
Text: Enter the text then use the formatting tools to format some or all of it. These are
standard tools that you would find in most document editors.
Images: In the right-hand pane, click the Images tab. Place the cursor in the working
area then double-click an image in the right-hand pane to place it at the cursor location.
With the image selected, you can also use the horizontal positioning button in the
formatting tools to control the placement.
Field Merges: Insert field merges to draw information from the contact or account record
into the shared content. Select the Field Merges tab in the right-hand pane. Place the
cursor in the working area where you want to insert the field merge, then double-click a
selected field merge in the right-hand pane. Make sure that you apply the same styling
that you're using for the rest of the text once you drag the field merge into the shared
content.
Hyperlinks: You can select text or an image and turn it into a hyperlink. This hyperlink
can lead to a landing page or web site, a particular content asset (such as a PDF), a new
email message, or a system action (such as subscribing or unsubscribing).
Click on text or an image to use as the link, select the Hyperlinks tab in the righthand pane then click the Enable as Hyperlink checkbox.
Note: If you want the selected component to appear as a standard

hyperlink (blue and underlined), clicking the Enable as Hyperlink
checkbox is all you must do.
341 of 1162
In the Link Type picklist, select what type of link you are creating.
Note: If you select System Action you can choose one of a number of
actions (shown in the table below) from the Select an Action picklist.
System Action
Add to email group
Remove from email
group
Description
Click the link to add to an email group
Click the link to remove from an email group
Send to subscription Click the link to view and select from a list of all possible
list
subscriptions
Send to subscription
page
Subscribe to all
Click the link to manage subscriptions on a single page

Click the link to subscribe to all email groups
Unsubscribe from all Click the link to unsubscribe from all email groups
View online version
Click the link to view the email in a browser window
Configure the link (depending on what you are linking to, fill in a URL or select a
hyperlink or file) and (optionally) enter a description of the link to display as hover
text (text that shows when the viewer's cursor hovers over the link).
Click the Redirect checkbox at the bottom of the Hyperlinks pane, if you want to
redirect click-throughs through Eloqua servers to track them in Eloqua reports
Note: When you click the Redirect checkbox, some code is added to the
link code.
342 of 1162
6. Click Save when you are finished editing the shared content. It will appear in the shared content
list in the Components Library.
If you want to see what the shared content will look like in an email or on a landing page, navigate to the
that area (Assets > Emails or Assets > Landing Pages), then open an existing email or page. In the
tools pane, select Insert > Shared Content:
7.1.4 Deleting shared content

When shared content is no longer needed it can be deleted from the shared content list.
To delete shared content:

2. In the list, right-click the shared content that you want to delete and select Delete in the menu,
a confirmation window opens.
3. Click Delete, the shared content is permanently deleted from the application.
7.1.5 Renaming shared content

You can rename content in the component library.
To rename shared content:

2. Locate the shared content that you want to rename, then right-click on its name in the list.
343 of 1162
3. Click Rename on the menu and enter the new name.

4. Press Enter to save the name change. The new name is shown in the list in alphabetical order.
7.1.6 Creating new folders for shared content

You can create a new file in which to keep shared content.
To create a new folder in the list:

2. In the list, right-click an existing hyperlink or folder and select New Folder. Or click the
NewFolder button in the upper right-hand corner (next to the search box).
Note : The folder will be created at the same level as the shared content you have
selected, or as a sub-folder if you chose a folder.
3. Right-click the new folder, click Rename. Change the name and press the Enter key.
4. Either drag-and-drop existing shared content into the folder, or select the folder and click New to
create new shared content.
7.1.7 Editing shared content

When needed, you can make changes to existing shared content in the component library.
To edit shared content:

2. Find the content that you want to edit on the shared content list, then double-click on the content
name to open the Shared Content editor window. Here you can make changes to the content.
To learn more about the changes you can make, see Creating shared content.
3. Click Save when you are done.
Note: If you have changed the name of the shared content, it will be in the list in
alphabetical order under the new name.
344 of 1162
7.2 Dynamic content

Dynamic Content allows different email or landing page content to be substituted depending on rules
and associated criteria.
Example: You can send different contact information to recipients based on the salesperson in
charge of their city, state, country, or region. Or you can switch images or text determined by
the products on your website that the recipient seems most interested in (as tracked by Eloqua
web analytics). Or you can show different training options to customers in different cities.
345 of 1162
7.2.1 Examples of using dynamic content sections

The tools in Eloqua allow you to set up Dynamic Content sections (specific content shown to different
users based on values in their data records). The following are some examples of how these sections
could be used.
Example 1: Providing Events Information
The following is an example of a Dynamic Content section that provides information about a specific
user group event, including a link to an ICS file that allows recipients to place the event directly into
their calendars. You could add this section to a regular email or newsletter based on the recipient's Job
Title or interests. Or you could use geographical location as the criterion since the timing of this event
is optimized for EMEA (you might create a different section for similar events in other parts of the
world).
346 of 1162
You could also include additional elements like testimonials, images, or buttons to increase clickthroughs and registration.
Example 2: Specific Content by Geographical Location

You can use geographical and related criteria to determine who should receive place-specific
information. For instance, in this case, routing information to an event is provided to recipients in the
London area.
347 of 1162
Other EMEA recipients may receive information about how to participate in the event by web
conference.
Example 3: Reusing Approved Marketing Content
A great way to use Dynamic Sections is to get snippets of approved marketing content that can be
reused in your emails and landing pages. This is an efficient way to comply with branding standards,
while also providing different information to different types of recipients (based, for example, on
department or the level of technical sophistication). For instance, the content shown below is targeted
to marketing and sales recipients.
Example 4: Product/Service/Offer Targeting

Dynamic Content sections can be used to target specific products, services, and offers to specific
segments of recipients. This kind of targeting tends to increase response and conversion because it
meets the needs of recipients and visitors more directly. You can use images in the Dynamic Content
section as well to reinforce the visual appeal of the email or landing page.
348 of 1162
7.2.2 Creating dynamic content

Dynamic content is used to change the content in an email or landing page depending on a field value in
the contact record of the person viewing it. This allows you to show different content to different
landing page visitors or email recipients based on attributes such as title, geographic location, income,
industry, etc.
To create dynamic content:

1. Navigate to Assets > Component Library, then click Dynamic Content on the left-hand pane.
2. Click New.
You will see untitled dynamic content added to the list of available Dynamic Content
assets. You can change the name for the new Dynamic Content section by typing over
untitled dynamic content and pressing Enter (or you can accept the default name and
edit it later).
3. Select the Default Rule in order to configure that first (recommended).
This is the rule used if the visitor or contact data does not meet the criteria in any of the
other rules used to set dynamic content. For instance, if the content is set by city, and
there are rules to insert specific content for visitors or contacts from Detroit, Chicago, or
Los Angeles, a visitor or contact from Miami, Atlanta, or New York will see content
specified by the Default Rule.
349 of 1162
The Name is already shown in the dialog box, but you can modify it in the field (if
required). Enter the content for the Default Rule. You can also enter text, then select
some or all of it and use the formatting tools to format the text. These are standard tools
that you would find in most rich-text editors.
4. Click Add Rule.

i. Set up the criteria in the right-hand pane: Select the field (for instance, City), then an
operator (for example, Equal to). Enter the field value that you want to use as the criterion
(in this case, Chicago). Enter the content.
ii. Click Save to save your rule. Note that the name of the rule has now been changed to
350 of 1162
reflect the criteria you entered.
5. Repeat as required to add more rules.

6. Insert the dynamic content section in an email and then send it to the email addresses for test
contacts that meet each of the different criteria by navigating to the Action menu and selecting
Test Send. Check the emails to make sure that the proper dynamic content is being used for
each.
7.2.3 Copying dynamic content

You can make a copy of dynamic content, this will allow you to make changes without deleting the
original content.
To copy a dynamic content section:

2. In the list, click the dynamic content section you want to copy. Then right-click on the name of
the section and select Copy. The copied dynamic content section appears in the list under the
original name preceded by "Copy of."
3. Right-click the copied dynamic content section and select Rename. Change the Name and
press Enter.
351 of 1162
Note: After changing the name, the dynamic content section will appear in the list in
You now have a renamed copy of dynamic content which you can edit without deleting the original
content.
7.2.4 Editing dynamic content

When needed, you can make changes to existing dynamic content in the component library.
To edit a dynamic content section:

2. In the list, double-click the Dynamic Content section you want to edit. The Dynamic Content
Section editor opens.
3. Make any changes required. For details about the changes you can make, see Creating
Dynamic Content Sections.
4. Click Save.
Note: If you have changed the Name of the dynamic content section, it will be in the list in
The dynamic content is now modified.
7.2.5 Renaming dynamic content

You can rename dynamic content in the component library.
To rename a dynamic content section:

2. In the list, right-click the content section you want to rename and select Rename.
3. Fill in the new name for the section and press Enter.
352 of 1162
The dynamic content section is now renamed in the component library.
7.2.6 Deleting dynamic content

When dynamic content is no longer needed it can be deleted from the dynamic content list.
To delete a dynamic content section:

2. In the list, right-click the dynamic content section you want to delete and select Delete.
3. Click Delete in the confirmation window that opens.

The dynamic content section is permanently deleted from the application.
Note:If the dynamic content you are attempting to delete is part of another Eloqua asset or
object that is dependent on the content, a Dependency Checker window will open and you will
not be able to delete the dynamic content until you resolve those dependencies.
7.2.7 Creating a new folder for dynamic content

You can create a new folder in which to keep dynamic content.
To create a new folder in the list:

2. In the list, right-click an existing dynamic content section or folder and select New Folder.
353 of 1162
Note: The folder will be created at the same level as the dynamic content section you
have selected, or as a sub-folder if you chose a folder.
3. Fill in the name for the new folder and press Enter.
4. If you want to add any dynamic content sections to the folder, either drag-and-drop existing
sections onto the folder or select the folder and click New to create a new dynamic content
section in the folder.
You now have a new folder in which to keep dynamic content.
7.2.8 Embedding dynamic content in an external landing page

You can embed dynamic content in an external landing page.
To embed dynamic content in an external landing page:

2. Select an existing dynamic content section or create a new one.
3. Click Embed Dynamic Content on the top right, to open the dialog box.
354 of 1162
i. Check Enable Public Dynamic Content. The scripts become editable.
ii. Copy and paste the first dynamic content script before the closing </BODY> tag on your
website.
iii. Copy and paste the second snippet on your website. Replace "DOM Element ID" with
the IDof the html element you want to target.
355 of 1162
iv. Click Done.

Your dynamic content is now embedded in an external landing page.
7.3 Images
Images in Eloqua's component library lets you view and organize the images that you have uploaded to
Eloqua. You can double-click on an image to access its metadata, set permissions, or download it.
356 of 1162
7.3.1 Downloading an image from the component library

If you do not have a local copy of an image, you can download it to your local computer.
To download an image from the component library:

1. Double-click on the image that you want to download, the image opens in a window.
2. Click the Download button in the upper-right corner, the image opens in a new browser tab.
3. Right-click on the image in your browser and select Save image as....
4. Select the destination folder for your image download, then click Save.
Note: The transfer time may vary depending on your internet connection and the size of the
image.
After the download is complete, you can close the browser and you can now access the image on your
local computer in the folder that you specified.
7.3.2 Renaming images

You can change the name of an existing image in the component library.
To rename an image:
357 of 1162
1. Navigate to Assets > Component Library, then click Images on the left-hand pane.
2. Locate the image that you want to rename, then right-click on its name in the list.
3. Click Rename on the menu and enter the new name.
Note:Renaming an image in this way will rename the image in all assets in which it was
previously referenced.
7.3.3 Updating images

It is possible to globally replace an image that is used throughout your assets (emails, landing pages,
etc.) and have them automatically updated in all assets that reference this image.
Important: If you update an image according to the procedure outlined below, the only way you
can revert back to the original image is to go through the same steps for the original image
(there is no "undo" option).
There are two requirements for performing the update:

The new image must be the same file type as the original.
Example: If you are replacing a .jpg, the new file must also be a .jpg.
The new image must have the same dimensions as the original. This restriction ensures that the
other elements in the assets will not be affected by the image update.The dimensions of the
original image are indicated under the thumbnail URL field in the image viewer.
To update an image:
2. Double-click on the name of the image that you want to update, the image details dialog box
opens.
If the number next to Asset dependencies is greater than zero you should review the
dependencies before updating the image:
358 of 1162
Click on the number to open the Dependencies dialog box.
Example: In the image below there is one dependent asset, an email called
"Night on Earth".
Double-click on the asset name, or click the name and select Open, the editor used to
modify the dependent asset opens in a new browser.
Click Close on the Dependencies dialog box when you are done.
3. Click Update Image in the lower-left corner of the window, an image browser opens.
359 of 1162
4. Locate the new image, select it, then click Open. A warning appears advising you that all
assets containing the original image will be updated with the new image:
5. Click Yes to proceed or No to cancel.
Important: If you select Yes, the image is replaced in all assets that reference this
image in your Eloqua instance.This process may take several minutes depending on the
number of affected assets.
If you select an image that is a different size, file type, and/or extension than the original, an
error message will be displayed. Click Close on the error message box, then make any
necessary changes to the new image. When you are done, repeat the above steps.
7.3.4 Uploading images to the component library

Images are uploaded to the images section in the component library and can then be inserted in landing
pages or emails, with the following restrictions:
The maximum size for an uploaded image file is 50 MB.
The name of the image file (including the dot and extension) cannot exceed 100 characters.
You can upload images one at a time, or in groups.
360 of 1162
Uploading Single Images
To upload a single image to the component library:

2. Click Upload... in the top right-hand corner, the Upload Image window opens.
3. Click the cloud icon to browse for your image. Find the file on your computer or local network
and either double-click it, or highlight it and click Open.
4. Click the Save As field and rename the image prior to uploading, if desired.
5. Click the arrow next to the Save As field, a drop-down appears showing the folder structure of
your file storage library.Choose a folder in which to put the image, if you want to put it in:
An existing folder: Double-click any pre-existing folder in the list.
A new folder: Create a new folder by clicking New Folder in the bottom left-hand
corner. Change the name from the default, right-click on the folder name and select
Rename, then press the Enter key. Double-click on the folder to make sure you are
361 of 1162
uploading the image to that folder.
6. Click the Where field to choose in which folder you want to upload the image (or browse for it in
the drop-down list).
7. Click Upload. When the upload is done, the upload window closes.
Note: Images size cannot exceed 50 MB and the image file name must not exceed 100
characters.If your file does not meet the criteria, you will see an error message informing
you of the problem.
Uploading Multiple Images
To upload multiple images to the component library:

2. Click Upload... in the top right-hand corner, the Upload Image window opens.
3. Click on the cloud icon. A file upload window opens where you can browse for the images you
wish to upload.
4. Hold down the Shift button or the Ctrl button and select the images that you want to upload,
then click OK.
Note: These must be valid image files (.gif, .jpg, .jpeg, .png, etc.).
5. Rename the selected images as needed, click in the Save As field for each image and replace
the current name.
362 of 1162
6. Click the arrow below the Save As fields, a drop-down appears showing the folder structure of
your file storage library.Choose a folder in which to put the images, if you want to put them in:
An existing folder: Double-click any pre-existing folder in the list.
uploading the images to that folder.
7. Click the Where field to choose in which folder you want to upload the images (or browse for it in
the drop-down list).
Note: With this method of uploading it is not possible to select different folders for
different images.
Note: Images size cannot exceed 50 MB and the image file name must not exceed 100
characters.If your file does not meet the criteria, you will see an error message informing
you of the problem.
7.3.5 Adding borders to images in emails and landing pages

You can add, and then customize borders for the images you use in emails and landing pages.
Note: In order to add a border to an image, you must first insert the image into a text box.

1. Click Text on the toolbar to open a text box in the Email Editor canvas.
2. Double-click where instructed to enter editing mode.
3. Click Image on the toolbar to open the Image Browser on the right-hand side of the Editor
window.
4. Open the image you wish to add to the email by uploading a new image or by searching for an
existing image (by typing the first few letters of the name or scrolling through the thumbnails).
5. With the text box highlighted (selected), double-click on the image to add it to the text box.
363 of 1162
6. Single left-click on the text box to select it.

7. Right-click on the text box and select Format Text.
8. On the Text Tools panel that opens on the left, select the paintbrush icon (second tab from left),
the Text Style Tools panel opens.
9. Select the type of border you would like to apply to the box (and, therefore, your image), in the
Border drop-down menu, you can choose from:

Hidden: Borders not shown
Solid: Single solid line
Groove: Solid interior bar
Dotted: Dotted lines
Dashed: Dashed lines
Double: Double solid lines
Inset: Concave picture-frame type border
Outset: Convex picture-frame type border
10. Click in the black box if you wish to change the color of the border. The color wheel opens. Click
the color you wish to use and drag the slider to change the opacity of the color.
Note: If you know the ASCII code for the specific color, you can enter it here as well.
11. Change the thickness of the border by changing the value in the box next to px from 2 (the
default) to the value of your choosing.
12. Select which edges of the border should have these settings applied to them: Left, Right, Top or
Bottom. You can select as many or as few as you wish.
13. Modify thePadding section at the bottom of the Style Tools tab to move the image within the
text box so that it does not touch a particular side of the border. You can enter different pixel
values for each side, and the image will move in the text box accordingly.
14. Click Save in the upper-right hand corner of the Eloqua application window to save your work.
7.3.6 Viewing and modifying image details

Opening the image details window can give you important information about the image and it also gives
you the opportunity to modify certain details.
To view the details of a image in the component library:
364 of 1162
2. Find the image in the chooser by scrolling to the folder in which it is located, or search for the
image name using the search field in the top-right corner of the image window.
3. Double-click on the image name to open it. The image details window opens displaying the
following information:
The name of the image.
Note: To change the name of an image, click in the Name field and enter the new
name then click Save. However, renaming an image by changing its extension
(for example from .jpg to .gif) will not convert the image; you must re-upload the
image as the other image type.
The URLs to both the full image and the thumbnail (used in the image browser when
creating an email or landing page) are indicated below the image preview.
The image dimensions (in pixels).
The number of assets that have this image as a dependency (as in an email or landing
page).
The name of the person who created (uploaded) the image and when it was last updated.
7.4 File storage

File Storage is designed to hold files that you want to allow email recipients and landing page visitors to
link to, or for JavaScript files that are used in more than one email. Putting these files in file storage
makes it easier to access a common file.
The file upload function consists of a simple web content upload tool that allows you to upload web
pages, documents, and images to a dedicated web server, and to automatically generate both direct
and trackable URLs to provide your customers and prospects with easy access to those files. You can
insert the links generated directly into email and other marketing assets as hyperlinks to the file.
7.4.1 Deleting files from file storage

You can delete a file from the file storage area of the component library. After deletion, the file is no
longer available for use with marketing assets.
365 of 1162
To delete a file from file storage:

1. Navigate to Assets > Component Library and click File Storage in the left-hand pane.
2. In the list, right-click on the file you want to delete, then select Delete on the menu, or click the
file name then click the Delete button in the upper-right corner of the page, a confirmation
window opens.
3. Click Delete, the file is permanently deleted from the application.
7.4.2 Uploading files to the component library

Files are uploaded to the file storage section in the component library and can then be inserted in
landing pages or emails, with the following restrictions:
The maximum size for an uploaded file is 10 MB.
The name of the file (including the dot and extension) cannot exceed 100 characters.
Supported file formats are:
Image files: .jpg or .jpeg or .jpe, .gif, .bmp, .png, .tif or .tiff
Note: It is recommended to upload images to the Images area of the component

library. The maximum image file size in the Images application is 50MB per
image.
Code files: HTML (.htm or .html or .css), JavaScript (.js), XML (.xml)
Media files: Flash (.swf), .wmv, .aiff, .au, .mp3, .wma, .mp4, .avi, .asf, .rm, .mpeg,
.mpeg-4, and .mov
Documents: Word (97-2010 [and Mac 2011] .doc and .docx), Excel (97-2010 [and
Mac 2011] .xls, .xlsx and .csv), PowerPoint (97-2010 [and Mac 2011], either .ppt or
.pptx) files, PDF (.pdf), and text (.txt).
366 of 1162
Note: Text documents providing complete source code for a web page are
rendered as the page in the preview.
Calendar files: ICS (.ics).
To upload a file to the component library:

1. Navigate to Assets > Component Library, then click File Storage on the left-hand pane.
2. Click Upload... on the top right-hand corner, the Upload File window opens.
3. Click the cloud icon to browse for your file. Find the file on your computer or local network and
either double-click it, or highlight it and click Open.
4. Click the Save As field and rename the file prior to uploading, if desired.
5. Click the arrow next to the Save As field, a drop-down appears showing the folder structure of
your file storage library.Choose a folder in which to put the file, if you want to put it in:
An existing folder: Double-click any pre-existing folder in the list
367 of 1162
uploading the file to that folder.
6. Click the Where field to choose in which folder you want to upload the file (or browse for it in the
drop-down list).
Note: If your file does not meet the correct criteria, you will see an error message
informing you of the problem.
You can view the file details after it is uploaded. In the component library, double-click on the file name.
A window opens displaying the file name, URLs to both the tracked and actual files.
368 of 1162
Should you wish to rename the file, you can do so here by highlighting the name in the window and
typing a new name. Click Save to save any changes you may have made, otherwise click Cancel to
return to the file storage list in the component library.
Note: Renaming a file to another extension will not convert the file, you must re-upload another
file
7.4.3 Updating files in the component library

You can replace a file that is used across many assets in your Eloqua instance in one operation using
the Update File feature.
Warning: Be careful when performing the update as all assets referencing this file will be
updated.
To update a file in the component library:

1. Navigate to Assets > Component Library>File Storage on the left-hand pane.
2. Double-click on the name of the file that you want to update.
3. Click Update File in the upper-right hand corner of the dialog box that is displayed.
4. Browse and select the new file (the one that will be replacing the old one), then click OK.
Note:The new file must be the same file type as the original (if you are updating a PDF,
you must use a PDF as the replacement). If you attempt to update a file that is different
369 of 1162
in type and extension, the following error is displayed:
5. Click Save, the file is updated along with all assets referencing this file. The replacement
operation can take several minutes depending on the number of affected assets.
If the file you are attempting to update is referenced in other Eloqua assets (such as an email or
landing page), a warning will be displayed indicating the number of assets that will be affected:
You can also get this information from the file information window before attempting the update.
Double-click on the number next to the asset dependencies field (2 in this example).
Important: Before attempting the update, it is strongly recommended that you review
your changes since once you replace the files in affected assets, the change is
irreversible. If you have already made the change, the only way to change back to the
original is to go back and complete the process above, or by changing the file in an
individual asset, if required:
370 of 1162
To edit any of the dependents, double-click its name to open it, make your changes and click
Save.
7.4.4 Renaming files in the component library

You can rename files in the component library.
To rename a file in the component library:

1. Navigate to Assets > Component Library, then click File Storage on the left-hand pane.
2. Locate the file that you want to rename, then right-click on its name in the list.
3. Select Rename on the menu and enter the new name.
7.5 Field merges

Field merges are used for drawing information from contact records in order to personalize emails and
landing pages. For instance, a recipient or visitor could be referred to by their first name, first and last
names, company, country, or other specific information that is in their contact record.
Note: Field merges are highlighted in yellow in order to quickly distinguish them from normal
text:
7.6
7.6.1 Creating field merges

You can create new field merges in the component library.
371 of 1162
Note: You must create the field before you can create a field merge. Learn more about creating
a contact field or an account field.
To create a field merge:

1. Navigate to Assets > Component Library, then click Field Merge on the left-hand pane.
2. Click New in the upper right-hand corner of the screen, the Field Merge editor window opens.
3. Enter a name for the field merge in the Name field.

4. Enter a default value to be displayed if a contact's profile has no value defined in the field that
you are merging.
Example: If you are merging from the First and Last Name contact field, an email would
default to "valued customer" (or whatever you specified as the default value) if the
contact does not have the First and Last Name field complete in their profile.
5. Select the field type from which you want the merge to occur: contact fields, account fields,
custom object fields, event session fields or event fields (the last two fields are available by
default for Eloqua Standard and Enterprise customers; for Eloqua Express customers, you
must purchase the events module to access these fields).
6. Click Save, to save the field merge, it is now available in the Field Merge area of the component
library and can be used anywhere that personalization is desirable.
372 of 1162
7.7 Signature layouts

Signatures layouts are templates for automatically inserting Eloqua sender information into emails.
You can create a standard signaturelayout that defines how signatures should look and what
information they should contain.This allows you to maintain consistency in corporate branding, and it
makes it easier to generate signatures for a large number of employees. A single signature layout can
be created which then dynamically pulls inthe details of the sender.
Example: If the sender is Carl, then the system will pullCarl's information into the signature
layout (name, phone number, etc.).
Signatures allow you to attach sender identity information to an email in a specific format. Each
salesperson can include his or her picture, signature, personal message and their contact information
in the email. This personal touch builds the relationship that they have with their prospects and clients,
and increases response rates.
Signatures are a powerful way to allow your sales personnel to cultivate andgrow relationships with
their prospects. Each outgoing email can be signed by a particular salesperson, with that
salesperson's contact information. It is also possible to automate signature personalizationso that
when sending to a distribution list of thousands of people, eithermanually or through an automated
program, you can display the signature that is most appropriate for each contact.
Signatures can include employee pictures, digital signatures, personalmessages, and contact
information. This personal touch builds the relationship that your company andsales representatives
have with their prospects, contacts, and clients, and helps to increase response rates to marketing and
sales campaigns.
Personalizations can be created for each agent's signature using the Eloqua application. This allows
their identity information andpersonalizations (such as a customized message for a specific client) to
be added to each email that is sent out. Agent signatures and personalizations can be created one at a
time or in bulk using signature rules that automatically apply the correct signature to each email based
on specified criteria.
7.7.1 Signature layout examples

The following are examples of how signature layouts can be used.
373 of 1162
Example 1: Email personalized for recipients
Marketing is launching a new campaign to a contact segment that includes 60,000 contacts. To begin
the campaign, they want to send a personalized email to each contact, so that the email appears to be
from that contact's regional sales representative. That way, when a contact replies to the email, their
reply goes directly to their local sales rep.
Example 2: Enforcing standard practices and branding
As a final step towards unified corporate branding within marketing collateral, the marketing team
creates a single signature that is to go out in all email marketing communications. This signature
contains all the standard formatting, information and content: name, title, department, office number,
cell number, company URL and company logo.
Example 3: Localization
Three different corporate regions require three different signatures due to variations in the company
logo or tagline across the regions. Each region has a unique signature, so when emails go out, they are
personalized for the recipient so that the rep's signature follows their own region's brand standards.
Example 4: More information and sharing social media links
Recipients can click on links or banners to see current information that is relevant to them, or click on
different social media links provided in a signature to share specific content to social media sites. This
helps to drive traffic back to company content such as blogs posts or web pages.
Additional Examples
374 of 1162
7.7.2 Creating signature layouts

You can create new signature layouts or edit an existing layout in the component library. The procedure
below outlines how to build your signature layout in WYSIWYG mode, but you can also build it directly
in the HTML code by clicking the Src toggle button and editing the code. To generate a plain text
version of your signature layout or to generate a new one, see Creating plain text signature layouts.
To create a signature layout:
375 of 1162
1. Navigate to Assets > Component Library, then click Signature Layout on the left-hand pane.
2. Click New on the top right-hand side of the screen, the Email Signature Layout editor window
opens.
3. Click the action menu (gear icon) on the upper right-hand side of the window, then click
Settings, a name and description window opens. Here you can re-name the signature layout,
and provide a description if desired. Click Done when you are finished.
4. Construct your signature layout in the editor window. You can enter and edit the following:
Images: Place the cursor where you want to add the image in the signature layout, then
click the Images tab in the right-hand pane. Double-click an image in the pane to place it
at the cursor location. After the image is in your signature layout, double click on the
image to edit its size, description, and text wrap properties:
376 of 1162
User Fields: Add user fields like company, job title, and email address. Click the User
Fields tab in the right-hand pane. Double-click on the field to insert it at your cursor
position. The user fields appear in violet with a grey shaded background in the editor,
when you send the email Eloqua populates these fields dynamically with the appropriate
information for the email sender. In this way, instead of having to create a unique layout
for each possible email sender, you only have to create one re-usable layout.
The following should be kept in mind when inserting user fields:

Link-based user fields: When inserting either the Website URL or the Personal
URL user field, a window opens with the options to add display text for the link,
and to track the link.
Note: In order to track the link the page must be equiped with Eloqua
tracking scripts. The information is then recorded in email reports.
Fields with optional labels: Not all fields need labels, however, information such
as telephone numbers are commonly preceded with a label. When you choose to
insert a telephone-based field, thesystem automatically inserts a field label, this
field label can be edited as needed. If there is nothing on the user profile to fill this
field, both the field and the field label will not appear on the email when it is sent
out.
Example: Robert is sending an email, the signature layout has a mobile

phone field inserted as well as a label that reads, "Mobile Phone". If
Robert does not have a mobile phone number, the label"Mobile Phone"
377 of 1162
and the field, will both be excluded from his signature when the system
finds that field of his profile empty.
Punctuation: Be careful when inserting additional punctuation such as commas

between the fields in the signature layout. If there is nocontent to populate a field,
both the field and label will disappear, butany punctuation that you have added
will remain. If you do use punctuation between fields you should make sure that
all possible senders using that signature layout haveall fields complete on their
profile.
Select text or an image to use as the link, click the Hyperlinks tab in the righthand pane then click the Enable as Hyperlink checkbox.

378 of 1162
System Action
Add to email group
Remove from email
group
Description
list
subscriptions
page
Subscribe to all

View online version
redirect click-throughs through Eloqua servers to track them in Eloqua reports.
link code.
5. Click Save when you are finished editing the layout. It will appear in the Signature Layout list in
the Components Library.
7.7.3 Creating plain-text signature layouts

A plain text signature layout is a version of a signature layout that does not use rich text: it does not
include formatting or images. Creating a plain text version for each of your signature layouts ensures
that contacts who have opted for plain text rather than HTML-based emails receive the right
information, thoughtfully styled.
For instructions on creating a rich text signature layout, see Creating signature layouts.
To create a plain-text signature layout:
379 of 1162
2. Open an existing signature layout, or create a new one.
3. Click the Plain-Text button in the upper right-hand corner of the Email Signature Layout editor
window, a plain text version of the layout is generated.
4. Edit the plain-text version of the layout as needed, if you do not want the plain-text version to be
automatically updated when you make changes to the HTML version, deselect the
Automatically generate plain-text version checkbox at the top of the screen.
7.7.4 Deleting signature layouts

You can delete signature layouts in the component library.
To delete a signature layout:
380 of 1162
2. Find the signature layout that you want to delete in the list and select it.
3. Click the Delete button at the top of the window, or right-click on the name and select Delete
from the menu, a confirmation window opens.
4. Click Delete, the signature is permanently deleted from the application.
7.7.5 Editing Signature Layouts

You can edit an existing signature layout in the component library.
To edit a signature layout:

2. Double-click on an existing signature layout in the list, the Email Signature Layouteditor window
opens. Make changes to the layout as needed.
3. Click Save when you are done, the changes to the signature layout are saved and it is updated
in the signature layout list.
7.7.6 Renaming signature layouts

You can rename an existing signature layout in the component library.
To rename a signature layout:

2. Right-click the layout that you want to rename, then click Rename on the menu.
3. Enter the new name for the layout then press the Enter key.
7.8 Signature rules

With signature rules, emails can be sent on behalf of many different people at once in a batch email
deployment. The senders are dynamically defined based on the recipients of the message. Rules link a
specific sender to a contact based on the field values in that contact's record or custom object.
381 of 1162
Example: You could use the contacts city or state fields to map to the sales reps for those
territories. You can also assign a default sender if there is no territory assigned to a city or state
value.
When creating a signature rule, you are essentially making the following statement:
"When I send an email batch to a distribution list, I want my emails to look like they are coming from
different people so they are personalized for each recipient. When a contact receives the email, it will
look like their local sales rep is the one that sent it."
Note: For companies with many sales representatives and complex territory definitions, you
can perform a bulk upload of signature mappings from an Excel or CSVfile to specify which
contacts are associated with which representative.
7.8.1 Signature rule examples

The following examples show how signature rules can be used in bulk email distributions.
Example 1: Sales territory by city:
If your sales territories are defined very simply, for example, by city or county, then you can set up a
signature rule to assign different signatures based on the geographic location that is used.
Example 2: Based on title
The signature rule can be set to show different signatures for contacts depending on their title. For
example, the CIO might see the signature for a technical salesperson who can discuss different
aspects of implementing a software package, whereas the CFO may see the signature for a
salesperson who specializes in discussing business cases and ROI.
Example 3: Based on revenue
In some instances, the signature may depend on the size of the recipient's company. You may want to
make sure that recipients for smaller companies can contact your small and medium-size business
specialist, whereas those from larger companies who receive the email can talk to your enterprise
expert.
382 of 1162
7.8.2 Creating signature rules

You can create new signature rules to control how signatures will be applied in your emails based on
the fields in contact profiles. You can also perform a bulk mapping upload, this allows companies with
large sales teams to easily manage their signature rules without any manual mapping. See Uploading
and exporting mappings for signature rules for more information.
To create a new signature rule:

1. Navigate to Assets > Component Library, then click Signature Rules on the left-hand pane.
2. Click New in the upper right-hand corner of the screen, the Email Signature Rule editor window
opens.
3. Configure the rule:

Name: Provide a name for the signature rule.
Default Sender:This is the sender that Eloqua uses when a contact does not map to a
specific sender based on the chosen key field.
Example: If the key field was City, and a contact did not have a value entered in
their City field, the email they received would be from the default sender. You can
choose a username from the drop-down list or begin typing the name until the one
you need comes up.
383 of 1162
Key Field: The keyfield defines the field that will be mapped to email senders. Select
either Contact Field or Custom Object field, then specify the field from the drop-down list
or begin typing the name until you see the one that you need.
PersonalizeEmail Headers: Optional. You can deselect any email header checkboxes
that you do not want to customized. Most users will want to personalize all four headers.
4. Click Save to save your signature rule, this gives you access the Auto-fill values menu option
under the "gear"icon
5. Add the field values and email sender information for the signature rule. There are two ways to
do this.
Manually add values: Click the
button in the upper-right hand corner of the
window to add field values. Double click each field to fill in the appropriate values.
Example: In the image below, Sara.Flannery is mapped as the sender for any
contacts whose City value is "Toronto".
Auto-fill values: Click the action menu (gear icon) in the upper right-hand corner of the
window and select Auto-fill Values. A confirmation window opens confirming that you
want to proceed. Click Yes, your field values are automatically populated based on
Eloqua contact data.
Note: The Auto-fill values option is only available when you choose a contact
field as the key value. It is not available for a custom object fields.
384 of 1162
The auto-fill option looks at your contact database, and based on the Key Field that you
defined in the rule, maps those contact field values to existing Eloqua users.
Example: Using auto-fill values is ideal for companies that have an exact match
between the salesperson and the user field. For example, using the Salesperson
contact field, auto-fill values only maps direct matches. This can result in the
need to manually edit numerous mappings when the match is not perfect.
Remove a mapping value by highlighting the value on the list, then clicking the
button. If you wish to remove multiple mappings, press the Shift or Control key and select the
values that you want to remove, then click the
button.
6. Click Save when you have finished configuring your rule, then click Close, the editor window
closes and the rule appears in the component library.
.
7.8.3 Deleting signature rules

If a signature rule is no longer needed, it can be deleted from the component library.
Note: If another Eloqua asset has a dependency on a signature rule that you are trying to
delete, a new dialog box opens alerting you to this fact. You will have to remove any
dependencies before you can delete the signature rule.
To delete a signature rule:

2. Click on the name of the signature rule that you want to delete, then click the Delete button at
the top of the page, or right-click the name and select Delete on the menu.
3. Click Deleteon the confirmation window that appears, the signature rule is permanently deleted
from the application.
7.8.4 Editing signature rules

You can edit an existing signature rule in the component library.
385 of 1162
To edit a signature rule:

2. Double-click on an existing signature rule in the list of rules. The Email Signature Rule editor
window opens.
3. Make any necessary changes then click Save when you are done, the window closes and the
signature rule is updated in the list.
7.8.5 Renaming signature rules

You can rename an existing signature rule in the component library.
To rename a signature rule:

2. On the list, right-click on the name of the signature rule that you want to change, then click
Rename on the menu.
3. Type the new name for the rule then press Enter, the name is updated.
7.8.6 Uploading and exporting mappings for signature rules

The upload mappings functionality allows companies with large sales teams to easily manage
signature rules by directly importing signature mappings from an Excel or CSVfile. This eliminates the
need for manual mappings, and greatly streamlines the signature mapping process for large sales
teams.
Example: If a company has a sales team with 20,000 sales representatives, manually
managing the mappings would be extremely difficult. Uploading the mappings directly is more
efficient and prevents the need to manually edit.
You can also export the mappings, edit them in Excel, and then upload again, enabling the processing
to be done outside of the Eloqua interface.
Note: This tutorial assumes that you have already configured a signature rule. See Creating
signature rules.
386 of 1162
To bulk upload signature mappings:

2. Double-click on the signature rule that you want to populate with external data, the Email
Signature Rule editor window opens.

3. Click the
button, in the upper right hand corner, then select Upload Mappings from
the menu, the upload interface opens.

4. Add a name for the import and specify the file type and import purpose:
Import Source:Choose from the drop-down menu. The data source must be an Excel,
or a Deliminated file
Import Purpose:Choose from the drop-down menu.This specifies how your rule's
signature mappings will be handled. Update and Append deletes existing rules and
replaces them with the new values, but retains any mappings not addressed in the
upload. Remove andReplace deletes all existing rules and replaces them entirely with
the newly uploaded mappings.
5. Click the cloud icon, a file browser opens. Select the file that you wish to upload then click
Open. After a few seconds you are shown a preview of your uploaded data. If the data seems
correct, click Next Step.
6. Double click on the Target Field column to map your source file's fields to the appropriate target
fields.
7. Click Next Step when you have finished mapping.

8. Input your email address to receive a notification when your upload is complete, then click
Finish.
387 of 1162
The system will process the signature mappings. You can watch and wait until the processing is
complete, or close your window and the upload will continue to process in the background. If you
provided an email address, you will receive an email notification when the upload is complete.
To export signature mappings for easy editing:

2. Double-click on the signature rule that you want to export, the Email Signature Rule editor
window opens.
3. Click the
button, in the upper right hand corner, then select Export Mappings from
the menu, the export interface opens

4. Enter an email address to receive a download link when your export is complete, and specify
your desired data format, either CSV or Excel.
5. Click Export, the export interface closes.
You will receive an email with a link to download the Excel or CSV file, you can edit any mappings and
then re-upload.
7.9 Email footers

Email footers are most frequently used to provide links to company information, such as the address of
your company's headquarters, phone numbers, contact email address, main URL, and perhaps your
privacy policy. Footers are created as reusable content in the component library. Email footers are
automatically added to your email after selecting and saving the email group to which it belongs, you
can select a different footer on a per-email basis from the email footer chooser window.
Note: Email footers should be designed to comply with CAN-SPAM standards.
Typical content in the email footer may include one or more of the following:
A link that allows the recipient to access management functions for their subscriptions to your
company's emails.
A link to your company's privacy information, which may be contained in a page on your
website.
Additional information such as copyrights, trademarks, disclaimers, or the company name and
address.
388 of 1162
A contact link so the recipients can ask questions or provide feedback.
Note: You can also insert these links in a localized language, or insert an image then hyperlink
it to an external page.
See examples of email footer.
7.9.1 Email footer examples

Email footers can contain text, images, and hyperlinks in almost any combination. Here are a few
examples of how email footers can be used.
Example 1: Mandatory link to subscription management
You can include a link that allows email recipients to opt out of a particular campaign, to opt out of
receiving any emails from you, or to manage their subscriptions. This feature is required for CANSPAM compliance (there must be an opt-out option in any commercial email) and it is a vital
component to avoid having your emails tagged as spam.
For example, if you include a link to provide access to subscription management, clicking the link
opens a page where the recipient can change their subscription options or cancel all their
subscriptions. The page provides dynamic feedback to the subscriber on any changes they make.
389 of 1162
Example 2: Best practice: link to privacy policy
It is best practice to formulate a privacy policy that states the measures you will take to protect contact
and visitor information, to post this policy on a page on your website, and to link to this page from your
email footer. This practice helps to assure email recipients that you will protect the information that
they submit, or that is generated by their visit to your website. It also reduces the possibility that they'll
report your email as spam.
390 of 1162
For an example of a privacy policy page, you can view Eloqua's page, which is posted on our
website:http://www.eloqua.com/about/privacy/
Example 3: Company information and logo
In accordance with CAN-SPAM legislation, your email must include a valid physical postal address.
You can also include contact details such as the main telephone number or contact email address in
the footer. This reduces the incidence of spam complaints and supports the recipients confidence that
the email is not spam, and that it is from a legitimate and accountable source.
Example 4: Disclaimers and copyright/trademark notices
In some industries and for some types of offerings (for example, financial or investment services, or for
contest- or product-related emails), the footer can be used to include standard disclaimers and other
information that is required by regulations for that industry or contest.
391 of 1162
In addition, copyright information can be included to cover the content of the email, and trademark
information may be included if, for example, trademarked names are used in the body of the email.
Example 5: Combination of elements
In most cases, you may be using a few different footers, each applicable to specific purposes or even
to particular emails. Each will contain a combination of elements, including the mandatory and optional
elements listed above and possibly some other elements as well.
Here are two examples:
7.9.2 Creating email footers

You can create new email footers in the components library.
392 of 1162
To create an email footer:

1. Navigate to Assets > Component Library, then click Email Footer on the left-hand pane.
2. Click New on the upper right-hand side of the screen, the Email Footereditor window opens.
Settings, a name and description window opens. Here you can re-name the footer and provide a
description if desired. Click Done when you are finished.
4. Choose an editor in which to build your email footer, the button on the top left allows you to
toggle between the design editor and the HTML editor (to work directly with the HTML code).
5. Enter the information that you want to include in the footer, this might consist of sender
information and links to view your company's privacy policy, and perhaps the recipient's
subscription options.
Note: There are certain elements of the footer that must be provided to comply with
CAN-SPAM legislation.
You can enter and edit the following:

Images: Place the cursor where you want to add the image in the footer, then click the
Images tab in the right-hand pane. Double-click an image in the pane to place it at the
cursor location. With the image selected, you can also use the horizontal positioning
button in the formatting tools to control the placement.
393 of 1162
into the footer. Click the Field Merges tab in the right-hand pane. Place the cursor in the
working area where you want to insert the field merge, then double-click a selected field
merge in the right-hand pane. Make sure that you apply the same styling that you're
using for the rest of the text once you drag the field merge into the footer.
Select text or an image to use as the link, click the Hyperlinks tab in the righthand pane then click the Enable as Hyperlink checkbox.
394 of 1162

System Action
Add to email group
Remove from email
group
Description
list
subscriptions
page
Subscribe to all

View online version
redirect click-throughs through Eloqua servers to track them in Eloqua reports.
link code.
6. Click Save when you are finished editing the footer. It will appear in the Email Footer list in the
Components Library.
If you want to see what the email footer will look like in an email, navigate to Assets > Emails then
open a new or existing email. Double-click in the footer area, then select the footer you created from
the chooser window. Click Save then click the action menu (gear icon) and select Test Content. A
preview of the email opens. Click Close when you are done.
395 of 1162
7.9.3 Creating new folders in the email footer list

You can create new folders for email footers in the component library.
To insert a new folder in the email footer list:

2. Click New Folder on the upper right-hand corner of the screen, or right-click any item on the list
and select New Folder on the menu, a new folder appears on the list called Untitled Folder.
Note: The new folder will be created at the same level as any header you have rightclicked on when you choose New Folder, or as a sub-folder of any existing folder on
which you've right-clicked.
3. Right-click on the new folder and select Rename on the menu, change the name of the folder
then press Enter, the name is updated.
7.9.4 Deleting email footers

When an email footer is no longer needed, it can be deleted from the component library.
To delete an email footer:

1. Navigate to Assets > Component Library, then click Email Footer on the left-hand pane
2. Right-click the email footer that you want to delete from the list, then click Delete on the menu,
Note: If another Eloqua object or asset is referencing this footer, you will have to resolve
those dependencies before deleting the footer.
3. Click Delete to confirm the deletion, the window closes and the email footer is permanently
deleted from the application.
7.9.5 Renaming emailfooters

An email footer can be renamed in the component library.
396 of 1162
To rename an email footer:

2. On the list, right-click on the footer name that you want to change, then click Rename on the
menu.
3. Type the new name for the footer then press Enter, the name is updated.
7.9.6 Editing emailfooters

An existing email footer can be edited in the component library.
To edit an email footer:

2. Double-click the email footer that you want to edit, the Email Footer editor window opens.
3. Make any changes as required. For details about the changes you can make, see Creating
email footers .
4. Click Save when you are done, the editor window closes.
7.9.7 Copying email footers

You can make a copy of an existing email footer, this allows you to make changes to a footer without
losing the original.
To copy an email footer:

2. In the list, right-click the email footer that you want to copy, then click Copy. The copied email
footer appears in the list as "Original Name : Copy".
3. Right-click the copied email footer and click Rename. Change the name and press the Enter
key.
397 of 1162
7.10 Email headers

Email headers are used to customize the look and feel of the top of your email. Headers can be used in
your emails for branding purposes (your company's logo), to provide links to other (external) resources,
or to display the link for a contact to view the email in a browser. Email headers are automatically
added to your email after selecting and saving the email group to which it belongs, but you can also
select a different header on a per-email basis from the email header chooser.
Note: Email headers should be designed to comply with CAN-SPAM standards.
Typical content in the email header may include one or more of the following:
A link for viewing the email in a web browser window.
A link to a form that the recipient can use to forward the email to a friend or other person.
Your company's brand graphics (logo), and any other standard formatting that must be included.
Example: You may need to include information to comply with regulatory or other legal
requirements.
You can use Field Merges to customize the header based on pre-defined criteria. When the
email is rendered, the contact will only see the information that is relevant to them according to
their contact record. Inserting these links in the contact's localized language based on dynamic
content can greatly increase your open and clickthrough rates.
Email header examples

You can put almost anything in a header that you can put into the body of the email, including text,
images, links, and hyperlink buttons. The following are examples of how email headers can be used.
398 of 1162
Example 1: Standard use

The most common use of email headers is to add links allowing the recipient to view the email using a
web browser window. This allows them to view the entire message even if they don't want to turn on
the images in their email client. You can use the terminology that most suits your purpose, but make
sure that you maintain some consistency between your emails.
The message added to the email may be worded as follows:
Example 2: Adding more information

You can add more information to the email header, although you should generally keep the header as
simple and uncluttered as possible.
The following shows that the recipient's records with the company includes a field merge to draw
information from their contact record.
7.10.1 Creating email headers

You can create an email header in the component library that you can reuse with multiple emails.
To create an email header:

1. Navigate to Assets > Component Library, then click Email Header on the left-hand pane.
2. Click New on the upper right-hand side of the screen, the Email Header editor window opens.
Settings, a name and description window opens. Here you can re-name the header and provide
a description if desired. Click Done when you are finished.
4. Choose an editor in which to build your email header, the button on the top left allows you to
toggle between the design editor and the HTML editor (to work directly with the HTML code).
5. Enter the information that you want to include in the header, this might consist of links to view
399 of 1162
the email on a mobile device or in a web browser, to your web site, or to additional information.
You can enter and edit the following:
Images: Place the cursor where you want to add the image in the header, then click the
Images tab in the right-hand pane. Double-click an image in the pane to place it at the
cursor location. With the image selected, you can also use the horizontal positioning
button in the formatting tools to control the placement.
into the email header. Click the Field Merges tab in the right-hand pane. Place the cursor
in the working area where you want to insert the field merge, then double-click a selected
field merge in the right-hand pane. Make sure that you apply the same styling that you're
using for the rest of the text once you drag the field merge into the email header.
Note: Yellow highlighting indicates that this is a field merge and not plain text.
400 of 1162
Select text or an image to use as the link, click the Hyperlinks tab then click the
Enable as Hyperlink checkbox.

System Action
Add to email group
Remove from email
group
Description
list
page
Subscribe to all
subscriptions
View online version
401 of 1162
Select the Redirect checkbox at the bottom of the Hyperlinks pane, if you want
to redirect click-throughs through Eloqua servers to track them in Eloqua reports.
link code.
6. Click Save when you are finished editing the header. It will appear in the Email Header list in the
Components Library.
If you want to see what the email header will look like in an email, navigate to Assets > Emails then
open a new or existing email. Double-click in the header area, then select the header you created from
the chooser window. Click Save then click the action menu (gear icon) and select Test Content. A
preview of the email opens. Click Close when you are done.
7.10.2 Deleting email headers

When an email header is no longer needed, it can be deleted from the component library.
To delete an email header:

1. Navigate to Assets > Component Library, then click Email Header on the left-hand pane
2. Right-click the email header that you want to delete from the list, then click Delete on the menu,
Note: If another Eloqua object or asset is referencing this header, you will have to
resolve those dependencies before deleting the header.
3. Click Delete to confirm the deletion, the window closes and the email header is permanently
deleted from the application.
7.10.3 Renaming email headers

An email header can be renamed in the component library.
To rename an email header:
402 of 1162
2. On the list, right-click on the header name that you want to change, then click Rename on the
menu.
3. Type the new name for the header then press Enter, the name is updated.
7.10.4 Editing email headers

An existing email header can be edited in the component library.
To edit an email header:

2. Double-click the email header that you want to edit, the Email Header editor window opens.
3. Make any changes as required. For details about the changes you can make, see Creating
email headers .
4. Click Save when you are done, the editor window closes.
7.10.5 Copying email headers

You can make a copy of an existing email header in the component library, this allows you to make
changes to a header without losing the original.
To copy an email header:

2. In the list, right-click the email header that you want to copy, then click Copy. The copied email
header appears in the list as "Original Name : Copy".
3. Right-click the copied email header and click Rename. Change the name and press the Enter
key.
7.10.6 Creating new folders in the email header list

You can create new folders for email headers in the component library.
To insert a new folder in the email header list:
403 of 1162
2. Click New Folder on the upper right-hand corner of the screen, or right-click any item on the list
and select New Folder on the menu, a new folder appears on the list called Untitled Folder.
Note: The new folder will be created at the same level as any header you have rightclicked on when you choose New Folder, or as a sub-folder of any existing folder on
which you've right-clicked.
3. Right-click on the new folder and select Rename on the menu, change the name of the folder
then press Enter, the name is updated.
404 of 1162
8 Contacts
A contact is a data entity that contains the explicit data around an individual person in the database.
Contacts (and associated accounts) are used as the primary building blocks for segments. Contact
information can be derived from email responses or form submissions, from website visits, event
registrations or via external (non-Eloqua)activities. Contact activities are categorized and searchable
in Eloqua using a Unique Identifier field. The most common unique identifier is the contact's email
address, however it is also possible to have contacts in your Eloqua database that do not have an
associated email address. Learn more about adding contacts without an email address.
Eloqua has two different types of standard data entities:
Contacts: Individuals whose data is stored in the Eloqua database, the image below shows a
sample record for a contact in Eloqua:
Accounts: Records about accounts (sometimes referred to as Companies), each of which has
affiliated contacts.
405 of 1162
8.1 Creating contacts

You can create a record for a single contact in your marketing database by entering the contact's data
in the New Contact window (as outlined below), or you can upload data for multiple contacts at once
using the contact upload wizard.
To add a single contact:

1. Navigate to Contacts > Contacts, the Contacts Overview window opens.
2. Click New in the upper-right corner, the New Contact window opens with the Field Details tab
selected.
3. Select a view option from the drop-down list in the upper left-hand corner of the window, each
view shows specific fields that you will use to enter the details for the contact.
Note: Views can be created and edited by an Administrator in the Views tab by
navigating to Settings > Setup > Fields & Views). Learn more about creating contact
views.
4. Enter the values for each field in the view, then click Create. The new contact record is added
to the list of contacts.
Notes:
You may not be able to enter data in some fields (for example, Date Created and Date Modified)
because the values are drawn from system functions.
If values are entered in a Date/Time or Numeric field (according to data type), then the format of
the values entered must correspond to the allowable formats set in your application.
Furthermore, the value will be changed in the field to the default format used in the database (for
example, for a Date/Time: yyyy-MM-dd HH:mm:ss, with HH:mm:ss set to "00:00:00" if no
values are entered). Contact your Customer Administrator if you need more information.
In some fields (such as Company or Account), you may not be able to enter values directly, but
you can click the button next to the field to search for and select a value that already exists in
406 of 1162
the application. For example, you can search for a company, then select that company from the
menu next to the name that is returned (or click New Company to create a new company
record).
You can also click the other tabs in the window to check or add information for this contact. When you
are finished entering information in the fields, click Update to save the contact record with the new
information.
8.2 Uploading multiple contacts

Eloqua allows you to upload a list of contacts from an external file using the Contact Upload Wizard.
To upload multiple contacts using the contact upload wizard:

2. Click Upload in the upper right-hand corner of the page, the Contact Upload Wizard opens.
3. Fill in the upload details fields as needed:

Name: Give your upload a name that will be useful for purposes of identifying
specifically what is the purpose of this particular upload. The default name is Data
Import - xxxxxxxxxxxxx, where xxxxxxxxxxxxx represents a number assigned to this
import in Eloqua (however you can rename it to anything you wish).
Import Source: In order to upload your contacts in bulk using this wizard, you must have
407 of 1162
them in a file of one of the following formats:

Delimited file (Tab, Pipe, Semicolon)
Microsoft Excel 97-2010 (.xls or .xlsx)
Note: You should map each of the fields in the file to match a corresponding field
in Eloqua (for example, have a column labeled Email Address in order to map to
the Email Address field in Eloqua). This will make your mapping task easier, and
will ensure that your contacts are uploaded successfully.
Import Purpose: Select Add Contacts to Database from the Import Purpose dropdown list.
Note: You can also use this Contact Upload Wizard to update contacts already
contained in your database, to update their email addresses, mark as
bouncebacks, unsubscribe or delete them.
Presets: Select the preset that you have created or continue with No Preset (default).
Using a Preset is optional, however you must select either No Preset (default) or a predefined Preset).
4. Click the cloud icon to begin uploading your file, browse to the location where your data file is
located, select it then click Open.
5. In step 2 of the wizard, review the file details then click Next Step.
6. In step 3 of the wizard, the source fields in your data file must be mapped to fields in Eloqua.
Eloqua attempts to match your field names to field names in the Eloqua database based on their
titles, for example "First Name" maps to "First Name", "Last Name" to "Last Name" and "Email
Address" will map to "Email Address":
To modify one of the mappings, double-click on its name. A pop-up dialog box opens where you
can configure (customize) your data field mappings:
408 of 1162
Select one of the fields from the Uniquely Match Contacts On drop-down list, then click Next
Step. This field will be the main identifier for the contact, the default field is Email Address. If
the contact does not have an email address, see creating contacts without an email address
using contact list uploads.
7. In step 4 of the wizard, enter the email address to which you wish the confirmation email report
sent. By default, the email address associated with your current login is populated in this field,
however you can change it to any email of your choosing.
If you are using the wizard to upload new contacts and wish to create a shared contact list at the
same time, select the check box next to Place Contacts into a Shared Contact List, this
adds the list of contacts to your database for future use.
Example: If you are uploading a list of names of attendees at a recent trade show, you
can reuse this list for later campaigns without having to manually create a shared list.
You can place the contacts into a new list or add them to an existing one by selecting the
respective option.
8. Click Finish, the wizard closes and the contacts from the file are added to Eloqua. A
confirmation email is sent to the address specified in step 4 of the wizard.
409 of 1162
8.3 Copying contacts

When you are creating a new contact record, you may find that is easier to make a copy of an existing
contact, then modify or add information for the new contact as needed.
410 of 1162
Example: If a new contact works for the same company as an existing contact and has the
same address and a similar email address and phone number, it would be easier to copy and
modify an existing contact record.
To make a copy of a contact:

1. Navigate to Contacts > Contacts, the Contacts Overview page opens.
2. In the search field at the top of the page, begin typing a string of letters and/or numbers for the
contact you are looking for. All contact records containing the string of characters in the email
address, first name, last name, or company name fields are shown. This search is not casesensitive.
3. Select the contact on the list from which you want to create a copy. Click Copy in the upper
right-hand corner, or right-click on the name and select Copy. The New Contact window opens
with the Field Details tab selected.
Note: The fields are populated with the information from the contact record that you
copied, but the email address field is left blank. You must have a unique email for each
contact.
4. Edit the field values as required then click Create. The new contact is added to Eloqua.
8.4 Searching and viewing contact records

Each contact in Eloqua has a record providing their personal details and information on their
preferences and activities. Eloqua allows you to search for contacts and view their information in the
Contacts section of the application.
To search for and view a contact record:

411 of 1162
3. Double-click the contact record that you want to view, the Edit Contact window opens. This
window has a number of different tabs that can provide you with information about the contact.
The following is a description of the information provided in each of these tabs:
Summary: This tab includes static information, namely the contact's recent activity,
whether they have subscribed globally to emails from your company, the validity of their
email address, their physical address and sales information (if applicable).
Field Details: This tab provides the contact's personal information. You can change the
view option if needed by choosing from the drop-down list in the upper left-hand corner of
the tab, each view shows specific information fields.
navigating to Settings > Setup > Fields & Views). Learn more about creating
contact views.
Preferences: This tab shows the contact's email preferences, the contact's email
subscription settings, the status on the email address entered for the contact, and the
format in which the contact receives emails (Rich HTMLor Text Only).
Campaigns: This tab shows the campaigns in which this contact has been included and
displays detailed information on the contact's campaign activity. It can be narrowed
down to a particular time frame using the calendar drop-downs.
Activity Log: This tab shows the activity history for this contact, it displays detailed
information on the contact's email activity, and can be narrowed down to a particular time
frame using the calendar drop-downs.
Scoring: This tab shows lead scoring information for this contact. Learn more about lead
scoring.
Note: Contact activity can also be viewed in a graphical format using Eloqua Profiler. To
view the contact record in Profiler, right-click the contact on the Contact Overview page
and select Launch in Profiler, or with the contact record open to the summary tab, click
Launch in Profiler, the contact record opens in Profiler.Learn more about Eloqua
Profiler.
412 of 1162
4. When you are finished viewing the record, click Cancel to close the window.
8.5 Editing contacts

Eloqua allows you to edit the records for existing contacts, this allows you to add, remove, or change
information to keep your contact records accurate and up-to-date.
To edit a contact:
3. Double-click the contact record that you want to edit, the Edit Contact window opens with the
Summary tab selected. This tab includes static information, namely the contact's recent
activity, whether they have subscribed globally to emails from your company, the validity of
their email address, their physical address and sales information (if applicable).
413 of 1162
4. Click on the Field Details tab to edit the contact's information. Change the view option if needed
by choosing from the drop-down list in the upper left-hand corner of the tab, each view shows
specific fields that you will use to enter the details for the contact.
navigating to Settings > Setup > Fields & Views). Learn more about creating contact
views.
5. Click on the Preferences tab to modify the contact's email preferences. From this tab, you can
change the contact's email subscription settings, reset the status on the email address entered
for the contact, and change the format in which the contact receives emails (Rich HTMLor Text
Only).
6. When you have finished making your changes, click Save. The contact record is updated with
your changes.
414 of 1162
8.6 Flagging contacts to receive plain-text emails

With Eloqua, you can flag contacts to ensure that they always receive the plain-text version of emails.
To flag a contact to receive plain-text emails:

3. Double-click the contact record that you want to flag for plain-text emails, the Edit Contact
window opens with the Summary tab selected.
4. Click the Preferences tab, then click Send Text Only, the button changes to Send Full HTML
indicating that the contact record is now flagged to receive plain-text emails.
5. Click Save to save the change.
8.7 Deleting contacts

When a contact is no longer needed, their record can be deleted from the application.
415 of 1162
To delete a contact:
3. Select the contact that you want to delete, then click Delete in the upper right-hand corner, or
right-click on the contact name and select Delete, a confirmation window opens asking you to
confirm the deletion.
4. Click Delete, the contact is deleted from the application.
Note: For reporting purposes, any previous activity associated with this contact will still be
available in reports generated by Eloqua Insight, however the contact record in the core
application will no longer be searchable. If the contact is re-uploaded (or recreated)at a later
date with the same email address, the activity previously associated with that contact will be
displayed on his or her contact record.

Profile confusion is actually not an issue that is specific to Eloqua itself. It is based on the general
limitations that come with tracking implicit visitor information on the internet. The contact's form
activity history (captured in the contact record activity log) and the actual data that is entered in the
form (which is captured via the form submission itself) are referencing two completely different tables
as shown below.
416 of 1162
417 of 1162
Contact form activity

A contact's form activity (and other web based activity) is pulled from the visitor/profile table, which is
referred to as "implicit" data. It implies or assumes that the current cookie profile that is tied to a user's
most recent web session should be linked to the matching contact record if a record already exists.
So, if the current cookie profile (on my local computer) is 'timo.reimann@eloqua.com', and I submit a
form, Eloqua will assume that my activity should be tied to the matching contact record
(timo.reimann@eloqua.com), regardless of what email address I entered in the form submission.
When the form gets submitted, Eloqua will do a look-up for that email address on the contact table, and
if the record is found, a profile-to-contact linkage will generally be made.
Now, if I should submit the same form again, but this time with a different email address (i.e.
timo.reimann@gmail.com) and without clearing my browser cookies first, the activity will still be
associated to my original contact record (timo.reimannn@eloqua.com) instead of the newly created
contact record (timo.reimann@gmail.com). This is because the former contact record is what matches
my current browser profile, which to this point, has not been changed or cleared from the browser. It is
important to note that a profile-to-contact linkage works on a 'one-to-many' relationship: A contact can
have multiple profile associations, but a single profile can be linked to only one contact.
1. First Form submission with email address 'timo.reimann@eloqua.com' is linked to the
'@eloqua' contact record:
2. Second Form submission with email 'timo.reimann@gmail.com' is linked to the same

418 of 1162
3. The newly created '@gmail' contact record has no Profile linkage, and therefore, no
form submission activity:
Form submission data

The data in the Form Submission Data report, on the other hand, is captured from the form itself, which
is referred to as 'explicit' data - the data that is provided to Eloqua explicitly by the contact or visitor,
captured through the form fields. Taking the same example noted above: We confirmed that after
submitting the same form a second time with the 'timo.reimann@gmail.com' address, the activity
would still get linked to the 'timo.reimannn@eloqua.com' contact record. If you look at the Form
Submission Data report, however, you would see the 'timo.reimann@gmail.com' address in the
report table, not 'timo.reimann@eloqua.com'. This is because the form data is explicit information
that was provided to us in the form by the contact directly. The Form Submission Data will include ALL
form submissions in the report, regardless of the profile association.
419 of 1162
1. First Form submission with email address 'timo.reimann@eloqua.com':
2. Second Form submission with email address 'timo.reimann@eloqua.com':
In summary, the Visitor Table (in this case the Form Activities log) should not be confused with the
'Contact' or 'Form Data' tables.
How does profiling work?

Profile data is pulled from the visitor's cookie information, in the case of a form submission, the Eloqua
cookie will pull the aggregated visitor/profile information from the current session, and will then attempt
to associate that profile to a contact record. If the current cookie session is associated to a different
profile or if the browser cookies are disabled, it will mean one of two things:
1. In the case of former, the form activity is linked to a different contact record.
2. In the case of the latter, no profile association is made whatsoever.
Given the former scenario, it is possible that the form activity could be associated to a different contact
record, if the look-up finds an existing email address that matches the current profile. This often
happens when the form submitter has more than one Eloqua contact record or is testing with multiple
email addresses. To get around this, the user would need to clear their browser cookies completely and
start a new session. Alternatively, they could run multiple browsers with different cookie profiles (one
browser for each profile).
Why is my contact missing profile activity?

There are a number of reasons why you may not see form activity (or other types of Profile related
activity) in the Contact Activities log:
1. The visitor (who submits the form) may be associated to a profile that does not match the email
address. In other words, the aggregated email address from the cookie profile may be different
from the email address that was actually submitted in the form.
For example:
420 of 1162
The contact or visitor may submit the form with their personal email address, but the
cookie session is associated to their work address. This can happen when two or more
users share the same computer
The contact or visitor may be submitting the form on behalf of another person or is
submitting back to back forms with different email addresses.
The contact or visitor has more than one Eloqua contact record and/or is testing with
multiple email addresses.
2. The visitor could have their browser cookies or javascript disabled, in which case NO profile
information can be tracked whatsoever. It is also possible that the user's company laptop could
have other custom security restrictions that prevent cookie tracking.
8.9 Contacts without an email address

With Eloqua you can create and update contacts without an email address by using an alternative
unique match identifier. It is important to note that while you can have contacts without an email
address, you must ensure that the identifier that you use is unique to that contact.
8.9.1 Contacts without an email address frequently asked questions

Will this be available to all trims?
Yes, this is available to customers on all trims (Basic, Standard, Enterprise).
Will this feature be enabled by default for my Eloqua instance?
No. Please speak with your account director for more information, as enabling this capability may have
implications to your current CRM integration and Eloqua subscription. Once completed, you can log a
Service Request ("SR") with Eloqua Product Support via My Oracle Support (support.oracle.com).
Will contacts with no email address count against my contact band limit?
Yes. Since the primary use case for storing contacts with no email address in Eloqua is execution
through a variety of non-email channels enabled through the AppCloud (SMS, Direct Mail, and so on),
they are still actionable and marketable.
What happens if I use CRM ID as my unique identifier and my input file has duplicate CRM IDs?
421 of 1162
As long as there are no duplicate CRM IDs assigned to your contacts, during upload the system will try
to deduplicate the duplicate rows and update the corresponding contact record.
What happens if I choose to uniquely match on first name, but there are multiple contacts that
have the same first name?
The data being updated will be rejected and not processed since you've violated your uniqueness
constraint.
Is there a way to globally set a unique identifier versus picking it each time?
No, currently you are required to specify your unique ID each time you update data in the database
whether it is through a list upload, CRM synch, or data import. This capability is being considered for a
feature enhancement in a future release.
For contacts that do have an email address, does it still have to be unique or can I have
multiple contacts with the same email address?
Email addresses must still be unique.
Can I use different unique IDs each time I update contact data in the application?
Yes, users can select email as the unique ID and easily change to a different unique ID, for example
CRM ID. However, you are responsible for ensuring that they adhere to the uniqueness constraint. If
you decide to use First Name as the unique ID and there are 100 contacts with the same first name (for
example "John"), Eloqua will not know which one of the records to update and therefore the update will
fail.
Scenario: Jim is a contact with no email address. Jim subsequently submits a form that includes
his email address. Does the form submission update the no email address contact record or
does it create a new contact, one for Jim with no email and one for Jim with email?
This depends on how the contact is arriving at the landing page from the form.
If the contact organically visits the landing page and submits a form, there is no unique identifier on
which to match. In this case, a new contact will be created.
However, it is likely that another unique identifier will be present, for example a phone number, to
facilitate marketing communication if an email address does not exist. This identifier can be selected in
a form processing step to lookup contacts in the database and update with form data. In this scenario,
using the phone number you could find Jim's existing contact record and update it with the new email
address from the form.
How do contacts with no email address affect subscription management?
Initially, contacts with no email address are globally unsubscribed. Beyond that if there is an activity
that drives them online (for example, a direct mail with PURL) and there is a form submission then their
subscription preferences are processed as usual. Note that in the absence of an email address,
access to manage subscriptions preferences on an individual contact record is hidden from view.
422 of 1162
If I am uploading new contacts using list upload, can I select Eloqua Contact ID as the unique
match field?
No, Eloqua Contact ID cannot be selected as the unique match field for new contacts. However, if you
are uploading information to update existing contact records, the Eloqua Contact ID can be selected.
8.9.2 Creating contact records without an email address

With Eloqua you can create a record for a contact even if you do not have an email address for them.
To create a contact record without an email address:

1. Navigate to Contacts > Contacts, then click New in the upper right-hand corner, the New
Contact window opens.

2. In the Field Details tab, enter the information that you have for the contact in the corresponding
fields, then click Save, a new contact record is created with the information provided.
8.9.3 Creating contact records without an email address using data import
With Eloqua you are able import contact information using the Data Export & Import feature of the
application, this allows you to create contacts even without a valid email address.
To create contact records without an email address using data import:

1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Data Export & Import, the Data Export & Import Setup page
opens with the Data Import tab selected.
2. Click the
icon in the bottom left-hand corner, then select New Contact Import.
3. Configure the import by specifying the required fields in the Import Settings tab.
4. In the Field Mapping tab, select CRM ID from the drop-down list in the Unique Match On field:
423 of 1162
Once the contact import runs, it will use the unique match field specified to determine whether a
new contact should be created or whether an existing one should be updated.
8.9.4 Creating contact records without an email address using CRM auto
synch
With Eloqua you can create contacts using CRM auto-synch, even if you do not have an email for the
contact.
To create contact records without an email address using CRM auto synch:
1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Integration, then click the Inbound tab.
2. On the left-side pane, locate your data sources for contacts using either the search field or the
tree view, then click on the name to view the details in the right-side window.
3. In the Data Upload Source page on the right-hand side, in the Default Values for Transfer
section, you can choose to create a new external call or edit an existing one.
4. The External Call window opens. Click on the Options icon in the top-right corner and select
View Filter Details from the drop-down list, the Filter Details window opens
424 of 1162
5. Select which leads on the CRM are passed through to Eloqua.
Note: In order to support the integration of contacts with no email address, you must
remove any filters that search for a valid email address.
With the filter removed and contacts with no email address flowing into your Eloqua system,
you must decide which unique identifier will be used to match contacts.
6. In the Inbound tab, click on the Management icon and select Auto Synchs from the drop-down
list. Locate the auto synch for your contact integration and click on it to launch the details in a
separate window.
7. Expand the Field Mapping section, then click Edit, the Field Mappings window opens.
425 of 1162
8. From the drop-down list, select the unique identifier that will be used to match contacts.
426 of 1162
8.9.5 Creating contact records without an email address using contact list
uploads
Eloqua allows you to upload a list of contacts from an external file using the Contact Upload Wizard.
You can create a list of contacts without email addresses but with other field identifiers that you can
then map to fields in Eloqua.
To create contact records without an email address using contact list uploads:
1. Navigate to Contacts > Contacts, then click Upload in the upper right-hand corner, the
Contact Upload Wizard opens.

2. Click the cloud icon, select the file that you want to upload, then click Open, to transfer the
information.
Note: In your source file there should be a column that can be used as the unique
matching identifier for your contacts. For example, "City". The column name should
reflect that identifier, as shown in the image below:
3. In step 2 of the wizard, review the data from your file, then click Next Step.
4. In step 3 of the wizard, Map Fields, select a field from the Uniquely Match Contacts On dropdown list to use as a unique identifier. The table in the window shows the fields from the source
file and the target fields to which they correspond, these are the fields that can be selected from
the drop-down list. Click Next Step when you are done.
427 of 1162
Example: In the following image, the City field is used to uniquely match contacts.
Note: Eloqua Contact ID cannot be selected as the unique match field when creating
new contacts, however, it can be used to update the records of current contacts.
5. In step 4 of the wizard, click Finish, all contacts without an email address will be successfully
uploaded and matched based on the unique identifier that you specified.
428 of 1162
9 Custom objects
Note: Three custom objects (Opportunity, Oracles Sales Clouds Leads, and Purchase History)
are available for all clients regardless of subscription level. With a Basic subscription, these 3
custom objects can be used but new ones cannot be created. Full, unrestricted custom object
capabilities including all the related included as part of Standard and Enterprise subscriptions.
Contact your account manager for additional information.
Custom objects are a complement to the standard Data Entities (i.e. Contacts, Companies).
Essentially, custom objects are used for two main functions:
Linking directly to a Contact.
Performing actions based on information collected without duplication.
9.0.1 Custom object terminology

Custom ObjectContains details of the grouping of all the custom object records that are associated.
Custom Object RecordData record holding information linked to a Contact.
Custom Object Record FieldCompletely customizable fields to collect information. Usually tied
directly to Form fields, but can contain additional fields for manual update.
Custom Object Record StatusThe "state" of a custom object record which can be used to trigger
Actions.
Read-OnlyA custom object record can be set to Read-Only, whereby it cannot be deleted or moved,
it can only be copied. Read-Only can be removed by any user, but serves to protect a custom object
record against an accidental deletion or move.
9.0.2 Custom object characteristics

Custom object records are flexible and also very powerful. They have added features to store data that
have been submitted through Forms or also manually added.
The following characteristics exist for custom object records:
Custom object records have fields.
Fields are mapped to a Form (or many Forms).
May have an Email field which can be used for linking directly to a Contact.
429 of 1162
Can have a unique identifier other then the Email Address.

The maximum character limit for a custom object record field is 4000 characters.
For default values in custom fields, the maximum length for the default is 100 characters.
Custom object records hold data:
The user can delete custom object records, search for custom object record by field,
add/change data manually and run new Reports.
The user can move a custom object record to a new set.
A custom object record can set up actions to take place based on new records being created or
existing ones being modified.
9.1 Creating custom objects

You can create new custom objects.
To create a new custom object:

1. Navigate to Contacts > Custom Objects.
2. Click the Custom Object drop-down and select New Custom Object.
Enter the custom object details.
Select the entity mapping used in upload.
3. Click Next.
4. Click the Custom Object Record Fields drop-down to add new fields.
5. Click Next.
6. Click the Header Fields drop-down to add new standard or custom header fields.
7. Click Next.
8. Click Save.
You can edit your custom object at a later time.
9.2 Editing custom objects

Once a custom object is created, you are able to modify custom object record fields, modify field
mapping, copy the custom object, add/upload/view/search records, and check dependencies.
430 of 1162
To manage a custom object:

2. Select a custom object in the Tree View to open it in the editing mode.
3. Click the Custom Object drop-down on the right and select the desired option:
Custom Object Record Fields:
Use this option to modify existing custom object record fields or add new ones.
Field Mapping:
Use this option to edit custom object record field mappings to contacts,
prospects, or companies.
You can automatically link fields based on the field names by clicking
Automatically Link Fields.

Copy Custom Object:
Use this option to copy the current custom object and give it a new name. You
can specify the destination folder.
Custom Object Record Services:
Use this option to view custom object record service history, as well as edit,
enable, and disable existing services. See Managing custom object record
services for additional information.
431 of 1162
New Custom Object Record:

Use this option to create a new custom object record by manually adding a
participant's information and map it.
Upload Custom Object Records:
Use this option to upload custom object records using the Custom Object Record
Upload Wizard. See Uploading registrants for additional information.

View Custom Object Records:
Use this option to view existing custom object records.
You can add new records (manually or via upload) and delete all records.
Search for Custom Object Records:
Use this option to search for custom object records with specific field values.
You can edit the record and map it to a contact.
Check Dependency:
Use this option to edit or delete the identified dependency references.
4. Click the Header Fields drop-down to edit or create the header fields.
5. Click Save on the bottom right.
9.3 Managing custom object record services

Custom object record services monitor the changes within a custom object. They run every 15 minutes
and are used to automatically trigger one or more actions. Some custom object record services are
customizable and can be set up with one or more processing steps.
To manage custom object record services:

2. Select a Custom Object from the left-hand panel to open it in the editing mode.
432 of 1162
3. Select Custom Object > Custom Object Record Services from the Task bar.
4. In the Select Custom Object dialog box, select a set in the Custom Object drop-down list and
click Select.
5. On the Manage Services page, select a Service.
You have the following options.

Edit Service ActionsYou can add Processing Steps or edit or delete existing
Processing Steps in the Edit Service Actions dialog box.
433 of 1162
Enable (or Disable) Custom Object Record ServiceThis is to put the Service into
action so that it carries out the Processing Steps. There is a 15-minute wait until the first
iteration of the Service's function occurs, so Run Service may be more suitable for
testing. Note: The default Time Span for this Report is one day, so you may have to
change this to view data in Reports that have not run recently.
6. From the Custom Object Record Services menu:
Custom Object Record Service HistoryThis Report gives you a summary of all the
changes that have been made to the Custom Object Record Service in the past.
Custom Object Record Service Run HistoryThis Report gives you a view of when
the Service has been run in the past.
9.4 Viewing custom object record reports

There are five standard Custom Object Record Reports. Each of them have Eloqua standard
reporting options which include:
Sorting each column by ascending or descending using the arrows at the top of the column.
Exporting as CSV, Excel, Word or Email. If the Custom Object Records has Comment fields,
the exported data includes the text in these fields.
Printing or Saving the Report.
Viewing the Report in bar, graph or pie charts, where applicable.
The reports also allows you to copy, delete, and move Custom Object Records.
To view a Custom Object Record Report:

1. Navigate to Contacts > Custom Objects OR
Settings > Setup > Events
2. Click Custom Object Record Reporting and select the desired report:
Custom Object Data:
Use this report to view all the Custom Object Records within the individual
Custom Object.
You are able to print and export the report to Excel, as well as copy, delete or
move the Custom Object Records.
434 of 1162
Custom Object and Contact Data:

Use this report to view all the Custom Object Records data within the individual
Custom Object with the Contact information that they are mapped to. The Report
can be viewed in a specified Time Frame. The default is the past month, but you
can select a different Time Range by changing the Time Range (the Start Date
and End Date) or Time Span (for example, Last week or Last month) and
clicking the button (
).
You are able to print and export the report to Excel.

Custom Object Waiting List:
Use this report to view Custom Object Records that are mapped to different
Contacts and those that are not mapped.
You are able to print and export the report to Excel, as well as delete and move
Custom Object Record Field Values:
Use this report to view a count for each different value associated with the field.
For example, if the field has Y (Yes) and N (No) values associated with it, this
report will show the count for each. Or if a satisfaction level with a training course
has values assigned to it, they may be 1 to 5.
You are able to print and export the report to Excel, as well as view the data in
chart format (bar, column, line, and pie charts are available).
Custom Object Record Field Value Percentages:
Use this report to view the percentage of the overall total for each field value.
You are able to print and export the report to Excel, as well as view the data in
chart format (bar, column, line, and pie charts are available).
3. Select the Custom Object to report on.
4. Click Select.
9.5 Custom Objects Enhancements

Data tools
Update Rules for Custom Objects
Update rules allow you to intelligently update data by selecting specific actions and criteria (for
example, date stamps and counters). Update rules support updates to Custom Objects in addition to
435 of 1162
updates on Contacts, Companies and Prospects.
Move Contact data to Custom Object fields

All of the standard Update Rule options that are available for Contacts, Prospects and Accounts are
available for updating Custom Object records, including one extra. Using an Update Rule on Custom
Objects, you can write values from the linked Contact into the Custom Object record. A common
example is CRM Lead ID. Typically this exists on the Eloqua Contact record, but sometimes it would
be useful on Custom Object records linked to the Contact to understand its relationship to CRM. Now
with Update Rules on Custom Objects, you can write Contact field LeadID (or any other field) into a
field on the linked Custom Object record.
Program builder
Program Builder Decision Rule: Linked Contacts in Contact Filter
A decision rule for Program Builder programs is available that flow Custom Object records through
them. When a Custom Object record hits this decision rule, it will determine if the linked Contact is a
member of the specified filter in the decision rule. If it is, the Custom Object record will flow down the
436 of 1162
"Yes" path; if it is not, or the Custom Object record does not have a linked Contact, it will flow down the
"No" path.
Custom Object Update rules in Programs

As mentioned in the Data Tools section above, you can now run Update Rules on Custom Object
records. The ability to execute these Update Rules has also been added to Program Builder programs
that process Custom Object records. This allows automation to take care of the updating of your
Custom Objects. When creating a new step action in a Program Builder program, you can now select
Run Update Rule Set and select the Update Rule you wish to use.
437 of 1162
CRM Integration
Below are a list of enhancements made to the CRM integration area of Eloqua. These enhancements
are designed to allow for a tighter and more flexible integration between Eloqua's Custom Objects and
any of the CRMs we connect to with our out-of-the-box integrations.
Custom objects External calls support mapping Lead Scoring Models

The lead scores produced by Eloqua Scoring Models are a critical data point your sales team expects
to see in the CRM. In advanced integration scenarios, you may use Custom Object records to pass
data from Eloqua into the CRM instead of always using the traditional Eloqua Contact to CRM Lead
integration. When this happens, passing the lead score from the Contact into the CRM is still
important. When mapping records from a Custom Object to an object in CRM, you can now map the
lead score from Eloqua Lead Scoring models. This means when you send a Custom Object record over
to your CRM, Eloqua can look at the score on the Contact linked to the Custom Object and include that
in the mapping over to your CRM. The below screen shot shows the mapping configuration between a
Custom Object set in Eloqua and the Lead object in CRM. You can see that included in this mapping is
the linked Contacts score for the Simple LS Model.
Integration Rules support Custom Objects

Integration Rules can be used to quickly process logic in order to determine if and how data should be
sent to your CRM. To date you could process and trigger Integration Rule sets from Eloqua Contacts
or Accounts. You can now run Integration Rule sets with Custom Object records.
When creating Integration Rule sets, you can select DataCards, otherwise known as Custom
Objects.
438 of 1162
Once you have set up your Integration Rule set, you need to define each Integration Rule.
Specify the contact filter used to determine if the integration event should be triggered.
Specify the integration event to trigger if the contact meets the filter criteria.
Specify temporary fields to store the ID returned from the CRM.
NOTE: You must specify a Contact filter. When the Integration Rule is triggered, it will check to see if
the Custom Object record has a linked Contact that meets the filter criteria. If yes, it will then send the
integration event specified data from the Custom Object record over to the CRM to either update or
create the respective record in CRM. It's also important to note that the integration event must be
mapping a Custom Object set in Eloqua to an object in CRM.
439 of 1162
To allow the automated use of these new Integration Rules with Custom Objects, you can also now
trigger them from a Program Builder program that is processing Custom Object records.
Inbound CRM sync support matching multiple records

When you import Custom Object records into Eloqua, whether it is via upload or CRM autosync, if
multiple matches in Eloqua are found, the record is dropped from the import.
Custom Object Permissions

Eloqua has many asset types including Emails, Forms, Landing Pages, and Scoring Models, to name
a few. For many organizations, having various levels of access to assets is an important part of
maintaining a clean, secure marketing automation system like Eloqua. To facilitate this need, Eloqua
has asset permissions, which are a standardized way to control different levels of permissions for
different users or groups of users.
The Eloqua asset permissions framework includes Custom Data Objects (CDOs). This gives admins
the ability to control the level of access granted to users. For example, you might have a CDO which
contains sensitive data. You can change the asset permissions on that CDO so that nobody except an
admin has view permission. When configured, no other user would even know that CDO existed.
CDOs are a unique asset type because they are an asset that contains data. If a user only has view
rights to a CDO, they will be able to view the CDO and the Custom Object Records within it. They will
not be able to modify the CDO configuration or the Custom Object Records.
To access and configure asset permissions, simply click the menu next to the name of the CDO and
select Edit Security. From there, the familiar asset permissions interface will appear, allowing you to
define a user's access to the particular CDO.
440 of 1162
441 of 1162
10 Data Tools
Eloqua's Deduplication and Validation Rules are powerful tools for helping ensure the quality and
accuracy of your Eloqua data. Deduplication rules and handlers make it easy to remove duplicate
records in an automated way; validation rules ensure that data uploaded into Eloqua or submitted in a
form meets your format requirements.
You can access Eloqua's Data Tools from the Contacts menu in the Eloqua toolbar. Only users with
sufficient permissions to configure Data Tools will be able to view the Data Tools icon.
10.1 Deduplication Rules

Deduplication rules are rules that let you check data entities (contacts and/or accounts) to ensure that
there are not duplicate records in the database. You can create a deduplication rule that uses multiple
fields, partial matches, and phonetic matches to identify contacts or accounts that are duplicated.
Note: You can use a single-table deduplication rule to deduplicate the same entity types
(contacts against contacts or companies against accounts). Multi-table deduplication rules are
used to deduplicate one entity type against another (for example, contacts against accounts).
Learn more about deduplication precisions.
442 of 1162
Creating a SingleTable Deduplication Rule

When entering the name, it is best to identify it as clearly as possible and set the following options:
Exclude exact matches
Include only unique results
Select Accounts or Contacts as the Rule Table
Best Practice: When entering the name, it is best to identify it as clearly as possible.
Examples:
C: Email Domain and Last Name.
M: Account Name (Fuzzy, Unique only).
C/M: Match Name.
C/M: Match SFDC Account ID (requires case sensitive match)
Creating a Multi-Table Deduplication Rule

Need to define source and destination data.
Creating Deduplication Handler Set

Handlers vary depending on whether it's a contact or an account.
Deduplication Handlers
The deduplication handlers are the processing steps if a duplicate (match) or non-match is found. There
are options to update, delete, merge or purge. Handlers also provide conditional and intelligent
updating. The deduplication handlers are available for contacts and companies.
A deduplication handler set is a group of deduplication handlers associated with the deduplication
rule.
You access the handlers through the handler set (with the deduplication rule open for editing,
select Dedupe Rule options > Deduplication Handler Sets or New Deduplication Handler Set).
Contacts
Handler
Add to a contact
group
Add to Step in
Program Builder
Backup field data to
another field
Details
Adds the contact to a specific contact list.
Adds the contact to a specified Step in an automated marketing program in
Program Builder. Some restrictions apply.*
Specify data from one contact field to be copied and backed up into another
contact field.
443 of 1162
Handler
Create Companies
Delete Permanently
Remove from the
current Group or
Program Step
Remove From The
Specific Group
Update a field with a
constant value
Update a field with
field values from
matched records
Details
Create and link a company to that contact. You need to specify a company
group for the newly-created Company. If the handler runs on non-matches,
the company will not be linked.
The contact is permanently deleted from the marketing database.
When run manually, this contact will be removed from the current group with
which it is associated, or in Program Builder, from the program step with
which it is affiliated.
This contact will be removed from the specified group.
Specify a contact field to be updated with a constant value and provide the
value.
Specify a contact field that will be updated with the field value from another
matched Data Entity field. This option is not available for Non-Matches.
* For the Add to Step in Program Builder Deduplication Handler to work, the following conditions must
be true:
The program step is set to support the selected data entity type (contact or company).
If the specific data entity is already in the program, it will not be added again.
If the program disallows multiple data entity entries, the entity will not be added if it was in the
program before.
Company
Handler
Add to Company Group
Add to Step in Program
Builder
Backup field data to
another field
Delete Permanently
Remove from the current
Group or Program
Remove From The
Specific Group
Update a field with a
constant value
Update a field with field
values from matched
records
Details
Adds the account to a specific company group.
The account is added to the program step. Some restrictions apply.*
Specify data from one company field to be copied and backed up into
another account field.
The account is permanently deleted from the marketing database.
When run manually, this account will be removed from the specified
group. In Program Builder, removes the account from the program step.
This account will be removed from the specified group.
Specify an account field to be updated with a constant value.
Specify an account field that will be updated with the field value from
another matched data entity field. This option is not available for NonMatches.
* For the Add to Step in Program Builder Deduplication Handler to work, the following conditions must
be true:
The program step is set to support the selected data entity type (contact or account).
If the specific data entity is already in the program, it will not be added again.
444 of 1162
If the program disallows multiple data entity entries, the entity will not be added if it was in the
program before.
10.1.1 Examples of Deduplication Precisions

The following are examples of using the different deduplication rule match types and precisions
available in the Eloqua application. These precision types can be accessed when you are creating or
editing deduplication rules so that you can control the types of data value comparisons used for data
record deduplication.
The deduplication precisions, along with examples, are shown in the remainder of this article.
Some of these examples are single-table deduplication rules (using a single type of data entity:
Contact or Companies). To create this, select Data Tools > New Deduplication Rule and choose the
type of data entity in the Deduplicate Rule Table picklist.
Some examples show multi-table deduplication rules, using two different data entity types for the
source and destination. To create this type of rule, select Data Tools > New Multi-Table
Deduplication Rule and select the Source and Destination tables separately from the picklists. For
example, you can select Contacts as the Source and Companies as the Destination.
Exact Match
Definition
With an Exact Match selected, the Eloqua application looks for fields having exactly the same value.
Example 1: Exact Match on Email Address

Task
Find all companies in company Group P having the same zip code as at least one contact in contact
Group C.
Solution
To carry out this comparison, you will have to create a multi-table deduplication rule with a Source and
a Destination data entity. You would use this functionality any time you want to use more than one data
entity (contacts, accounts) at a time within a single rule.
To compare contact and accounts zip codes:

1. Navigate to Contacts > Data Tools.
2. Select Data Tools > New Multi-Table Deduplication Rule.
445 of 1162
3. Fill in the Deduplication Rule Name (under which the rule is saved and displayed in the Tree
View) and the Description (to provide additional information to rule users).
4. Select the Source Table (in this case, Contacts) and the Destination Table (Companies).
5. Optionally, you can click Show Advanced Options to select additional settings. Select
whether to Exclude exact matches from the deduplication rule and whether to Include only
unique results.
6. Click Save to save the Rule. More options appear on the page.
7. You can choose to carry out further filtering on a single field value to narrow the field of data
records to be deduplicated. If you want to do this (you have to set it up separately for the Source
and Destination data entities), select Apply Filter to... and set up the filter in the Filter Details
selection to filter for those data entity records that meet the single-field value criterion. Note:
Doing this may help to significantly reduce the processing load on the application while running
the deduplication rule, i.e. the results will be available faster.
8. Select the Contact Field and Companies Field to compare (for example, Zip or Postal Code) and
the Precision type (Exact Match).
9. To Choose the Display Fields that will be returned in the results, select (double-click) the
Company, First Name, and Last Name fields in the Available Contact Fields and Account
Name for the Available Account Fields windows to move them to the respective Selected Fields
windows.
Note:These field names may be slightly different in your instance of the application.
10. Click Saveto save your Deduplication Rule.
Data Used and Results
Group P consists of the following Contacts:

N First Name Company Zip or Postal Code
1 John
UbiOmniCorp 22182
2 Mike
UbiOmniCorp 90210
Group C consists of the following Contacts:

N Company Name Zip or Postal Code
1 UbiOmniCorp
22182
2 RazzMaTazz
60606
When this deduplication rule is run on the data shown, there are four groups of results:
Source matches (contact records in Group P that match account records found in Group C) John in Group P with zip code 22182 matches UbiOmniCorp in Group C, which has the same
zip code.
Source non-matches (contacts with no matched account records) - Mike, with the zip code
90210, has no matches in the Group C account group.
446 of 1162
Destination matches (accounts with matches in the contact group) - UbiOmniCorp, with the zip
code 22182, has a match in the contact group (John).
Destination non-matches (accounts with no matched contact records) - RazzMaTazz, with the
zip code 60606, has no matching record in the contacts based on matching the zip code.
Example 2: Contacts in Two Contact Groups

Find all contact records that are in both of two contact Groups, C1 and C2.
Results
This task cannot be done using deduplication rules. At first glance, it seems reasonable to run contacts
against contacts using a deduplication rule looking for an exact match on the Email Addresses.
However, the deduplication rule looks for different contact records with the same values, not the same
contact records in multiple contact groups. In this example, contacts may be within all the groups, but
there is still only one contact record. Since the Email Address for this single contact record is properly
identified as unique, there will be no matches in this case.
Match All Characters After/Match All Characters Before

Definition
With Match All Characters After selected, the Eloqua application looks for fields having the same
characters after the defined value. With Match All Characters Before, the rule finds fields having the
same characters before the defined value.
Example: Match All Characters After on Email Address Domains

Task
Find all contacts in contact Group P having the same email address domains as at least one account in
account Group C.
Solution
a Target data entity. You would use this functionality any time you want to use more than one data
To compare contact and accounts email address domains:

View) and the Description (to provide additional information to rule users).
447 of 1162
4. Select the Source Table (Contacts) and the Destination Table (Companies).
5. Click Saveto save the rule.
6. On the Deduplication Rule page, select the Contact Field and Account Field to compare (for
instance, Email Address for the contact compared to Contact Email Address (used for
the Contact link on the website) for the company; this may be different in your
implementation) and the Precision type (Match All Characters After).
7. Fill in the value @ in the Precision Valuefield as you are comparing the domains after the "at"
(@) symbol.
8. To Choose the Display Fields that will be returned in the results, select (double-click) the
Company Name, First Name and Last Name fields in the Available Contact Fields and
Company or Company Name for Available Account Fields windows to move them to the
respective Selected Fields windows. Note: These field names may be slightly different in your
instance of the application.
9. Click Save to save your deduplication rule.
Group P consists of the following contacts:

N First name Last Name Email Address
1 John
Smith
aaa@ aaa.com
2 Mike
Brown
bbb@ bbb.com
Group C consists of the following companies:

N Account Name Contact Email Address
1 UbiOmniCorp
aaa@aaa .com
2 Ubi Holdings
ccc@ccc .com
Source matches (contact records in Group P that match company records found in Group C) John Smith with email aaa@aaa. com matches both UbiOmniCorp and Ubi Holdings in Group
C as they have the same domain in their Email Address (aaa.com) after the @ symbol.
Source non-matches (contacts with no matched account records) - Mike Brown, with the Email
Address bbbaaa.com, has no matches in the Contact Group. There is no @ symbol in Mike's
Email Address, so this deduplication rule was not applied.
Destination matches (accounts with matches in the contact Group) - Both UbiOmniCorp and
Ubi Holdings in company Group C have the same Email Address domain aaa.com, and thus are
matched.
Destination non-matches (accounts with no matched domains among contact records) - All
company records were matched on the domain, so this is an empty group.
448 of 1162
Match First X Characters/Match Last X Characters

Definition
With Match First X Characters selected, the Eloqua application looks for fields having the same
beginning characters with the number of characters used defined by the X (the Precision Value). With
Match Last X Characters selected, the Eloqua application looks for fields having the same ending
characters with the number of characters used defined by the X (the Precision Value).
Example: Match First X Characters to Match Area Codes

Task
Group contacts in contact Group C by location of their business. The only available data is the contact
phone number containing the area code.
Solution
To carry out this comparison, you will create a new deduplication rule using a single type of data entity
(contacts).
To compare contacts for location using the area code:

2. Select Data Tools > New Deduplication Rule.
View) and the ...Description(to provide additional information to rule users).
4. Select the Deduplication Rule Table, Contacts (the data entity that this deduplication rule
operates on).
5. Click Save to save the Rule.
6. On the Deduplication Rule page, select the Contact Field to compare (for instance,
Business Phone; this may be named differently in your implementation) and the Precision
type (Match First X Characters).
7. Fill in the value 3
8. in the Precision Value field as you are comparing the phone area code, the first three digits of
the telephone number.
9. To Choose the Display Fields that will be returned in the results..., select (double-click) the
First Name and Last Name fields in the Available Contact Fields window to move them to the
Selected Fields window.
Note: The field names may be slightly different in your implementation.
10. Click Saveto save your deduplication rule.
449 of 1162
Group C consists of the following contacts:

First Name Last Name Business Phone
First Name Last Name Business Phone
1 Mike
Black
416 XXX XXXX
2 Mike
Brown
416 XXX XXXX
3 John
Smith
905 XXX XXXX
When this deduplication rule is run on the data shown, there are two groups of results (out of four
possibilities):
Source matches (contacts with the same first 3 digits or area code in the Business Phone
number) - Mike Black and Mike Brown match on the basis of matching area codes.
Source non-matches (contacts with unique area codes) - John Smith has an area code that
does not match.
Destination matches - Since a Single Table Deduplication Rule is being used, the Source and
Destination Groups are the same Group.
Destination non-matches - Since a Single Table Deduplication Rule is being used, the Source
and Destination Groups are the same Group.
Special Eloqua Account/First Name/Title Match

Definition
With Special Eloqua Account Match selected, the Eloqua application looks for account fields having
the same value. With Special First Name Match selected, the Eloqua application looks First Name
fields with the same value. By selecting Special Eloqua Title Match, you set the rule to look for
matching values in the Title field.
Example 1: Comparing Account Names

Task
In contact Group P, find all contacts from the same account. The account name may be written slightly
differently in different contact records.
Solution
To carry out this comparison, you will create a new duplication rule using a single type of data entity
(contacts). The comparison uses Special Eloqua Company Match for the Account to account for
different abbreviations.
To compare contact Account:
450 of 1162

3. Fill in the Deduplication Rule Name (under which the rule is saved and displayed in the Tree View)
and the ...Description (to provide additional information to Rule users).
4. Select the Deduplication Rule Table, Prospects (the data entity that this deduplication rule
operates on).
6. On the Deduplication Rule page, select the Contact Field to compare (Account) and the
Precision type (Special Eloqua Account Match).
7. To Choose the Display Fields that will be returned in the results..., select (double-click) the
First Name and Last Name fields in the Available Contact Fields window to move them to the
Selected Fields window. Note: Field names may vary slightly in your implementation.
8. Click Save to save your Deduplication Rule.
When this Deduplication Rule is run, there are several additional considerations that affect the results:
If the Company field is empty for a data entity record, that record is skipped during processing
and not matched.
Linking words ("the", "of", "or", "and" or "de") are ignored during processing, meaning that they
cannot be the sole cause of a failure to match two records.
The Company field will be still matched if there is any difference in punctuation, whitespaces,
linking words ("the", "of", "or", "and" or "de"), or additional abbreviations that describe the type
of company (like "Inc", "Corp", "Mgt").
To accommodate abbreviations, the following pair of abbreviations (Abbr.) and full names of
account-related terms are included in the run. Note: If additional terms are required, they can be
added by request. Talk to your Eloqua Customer Success Manager for more information.
Abbr.
Full Name
Abbr.
Admin Administration Gov
Full Name
Government
Abbr.
Full Name
PLC
Public Limited Company
Assoc Association
Govt Government
Sask
Saskatchewan
Bros
Inc
Svc
Service
Brothers
Incorporated
Centre Center
Indust Industrial
Svr
Service
Ctr
Center
Inst
Institute
Syst
System
Co
Company
Intl
International
Tech
Technology
Corp
Corporation
LLC
Limited Liability Corporation Telecomm Telecommunications
Dep
Department
Ltd
Limited
US
USA
451 of 1162
Abbr.
Full Name
Abbr.
Dept
Department
Mgt
Div
Division
Fed
Fedl
Full Name
Management
Abbr.
Full Name
Univ
University
Mgmt Management
Util
Utility
Federal
Natl
National
Utils
Utilities
Federal
Org
Organization
For this example, Group C consists of the following Contacts:

N First Name Last Name Account
1 Mike
Black
ABC
2 Mike
Bbrown
XYZZ Mgt
3 John
Smith
XYZZ Mgmnt
4 John
White
AbC Corp
When this Deduplication Rule is run on the data shown, there are two groups of results:
Prospects 1 and 4 are grouped as matching on ABC Corp.
Prospects 2 and 3 are grouped as matching on XYZZ Management.
Example 2: Comparing First and Last Names

Task
In contact Group P, find all contacts that have the same First Name and Last Name. The First Name
may be entered or spelled differently (for example, "Ken" and "Kenneth").
Solution
(contacts). The comparison is exact for the Last Name, but uses Special First Name Match for the
First Name to account for different spellings.
To compare contact First and Last Names:

and the ...Description (to provide additional information to rule users).
operates on).
6. On the Deduplication Rule page, select the Contact Field to compare (First Name) and the
Precision type (Special First Name Match).
452 of 1162
Also select the Contact Field called Last Name and the Precision type (Exact Match).
When this deduplication rule is run, there are several additional considerations that affect the results:
If the First Name and/or Last Name fields are empty for a data entity record, that record is
skipped during processing and not matched.
The First Name and Last Name fields will be still matched if there is any difference in
punctuation, whitespaces, or in the form of the Name (for example, "Edward" vs. "Ed").
To accommodate different name spellings, the following full name forms are included in the run.
Note: If additional full name forms are required, they can be added by request. Talk to your
Eloqua Client Services Manager for more information.
Full Name Full Name Full Name Full Name Full Name
Abigail
Christopher Harold
Louise
Samuel
Abraham Clifford
Henry
Matthew Sophia
Albert
Cynthia
Howard Megan
Steven
Alexander Daniel
Irving
Michael Stuart
Amanda David
Jacob
Mortimer Susan
Andrew
Deborah
James
Natalie
Theresa
Anthony Donald
Janet
Nathaniel Thomas
Arthur
Douglas
Jeffrey
Nicholas Timothy
Barbara Edward
Jessica Pamela
Valerie
Beatrice Elizabeth John
Patrick
Victor
Benjamin Eugene
Joseph
Peter
Victoria
Bernard Francine Julia
Raymond Vincent
Brian
Franklin
Kenneth Rebecca Walter
Cameron Florence Lawrence Richard William
Catherine Frederick Leonard Robert
Charles
Gregory
Lillian
Ronald
Christine Douglas
Louis
Russell
Group C consists of the following Contacts:

N First Name Last Name
1 Bill
Black
2 Bill
Brown
3 Willy
Black
4 John
Black
When this Deduplication Rule is run on the data shown, there are two groups of results (out of four
possibilities):
453 of 1162
Source matches (Prospects with the same First and Last Names) - Bill Black and Willy Black.
Source non-matches (Prospects that do not have the same First and Last Names) - John Black
and Bill Brown.
Example 3: Comparing First and Last Names and Titles

Task
In contact Group C, find all contacts that have the same First Name and Last Name. There may be
people who have the same First and Last Names, so carry out an additional check on the job Title.
Note: The First Name may be entered or spelled differently (for example, "Ken" and "Kenneth"); in
addition, the Title may be spelled differently (for example, "Mgr" and "Mang").
Solution
(contacts). The comparison is exact for the Last Name, but uses Special First Name Match for the
First Name to account for different spellings, and Special Title Match for the Title to account for
different spellings in the Title abbreviation.
To compare contact First and Last Names and Titles:

operates on).
5. Click Save to save the rule.
6. On the Deduplication Rule page, select the Contact Field to compare (First Name) and the
Precision type (Special First Name Match).
Also select the Contact Field called Last Name and the Precision type (Exact Match).
Finally, select the Contact Field called Title and the Precision type for that (Special Title Match).
454 of 1162
When this deduplication rule is run, there are several additional considerations that affect the results:
If the First Name and/or Last Name fields are empty for a data entity record, that record is
skipped during processing and not matched. In addition, if the Title field is empty, that record is
skipped and not matched.
The First Name and Last Name fields will be still matched if there is any difference in
punctuation, whitespaces, or in the form of the job Title (for example, "Mgr" vs. "Mang" vs.
"Mngr" for Manager).
To accommodate abbreviations, the following pair of abbreviations (Abbr.) and full job Titles are
included in the run.
Abbr.
Full Title
Abbr.
Full Title
Abbr.
Full Title
Acct Account
Cust Customer
Pres President
Accts Accounts
Dev Development
Prgm Program
Acctng Accouting
Dir Director
Prod Product
Adm Administration
Eng Engineer
Purch Purchasing
Admin Administration
EVP Executive Vice President QA Quality Assurance
AP
Accounts Payable
Exec Executive
Rep Representative
Asst Assistant
Gen General
Serv Service
Bus
Business
GM General Manager
SLS Sales
CEO Chief Executive Officer IT
Information Technology SN Senior
CFO Chief Financial Officer Mang Manager
Spt Support
CMO Chief Marketing Officer Mktg Marketing
SVP Senior Vice President
CIO Chief Information Officer Mgr Manager
SW Software
COO Chief Operations Officer Mngr Manager
Sys System
Corp Corporate
Ofc Office
Tech Technology
CSO Chief Security Officer
Ops Operations
VP Vice President
CTO Chief Technology Officer
Note: If additional Titles are required, they can be added by request. Talk to your Eloqua Client
Services Manager for more information.
Group C consists of the following contacts:

N First Name Last Name Title
1 Mike
Black
Mgr
2 Mike
Black
Mang
3 Mike
Black
VP
4 John
White
Mgr
When this deduplication rule is run on the data shown, there are two groups of results (out of four
possibilities):
455 of 1162
Source matches (contacts that match on First Name, Last Name, and Title) - 1 and 2. First and
Last Names match, and the Titles ("Mgr" and "Mang") both match Manager.
Source non-matches (contacts that do not have the same First and Last Names or the same
title) - 3 and 4 do not match on First Name, Last Name, or Title.
Starts With
Definition
With Starts With selected, the Eloqua application matches fields where the full value in one field
begins with the value in another field (for example, the Source field value "ABC Netherlands" begins
with the Destination field value "ABC").
Example: Match Account Name

Task
Find all contacts in Prospect Group P having the same company name. The value in the Account field
consists of the Account and Division, so we want to group the contacts for which the account value
begins with the same Account name.
Solution
To return Prospects beginning with the same Account name (regardless of the
Division):
3. Select the Source Table (in this case, Contacts) and the Destination Table (Accounts).
4. Fill in the Deduplication Rule Name (under which the Rule is saved and displayed in the Tree
View) and the ...Description (to provide additional information to Rule users).
456 of 1162
6. On the Deduplication Rule page, select the Contact Field (Accounts) and Company Field
(Account Name) and the Precision type (Starts With).
7. To Choose the Display Fields ..., select (double-click) the First Name and Last Name fields in the
Available Prospect Fields window to move them to the Selected Fields window.

1 Mike
Black
The ABC UK
2 Mike
Brown
ABC Canada
3 John
Smith
ABC USA
Group M consists of the following companies:

Name Account
1
ABC
2
XYZ
Source matches (contact records in Group P that match company records found in Group M) Contact records 2 and 3 match on the basis of each Account name beginning with "ABC".
Source non-matches (contact with no matched company records) - Mike Brown does not match
because the Account name begins with "The", not "ABC".
Destination matches (accounts with matches in the contact group) - Number 1 (ABC).
Destination non-matches (accounts with no matched Account Names among contact records) Number 2 (XYZ).
Contains
Definition
With Contains selected, the Eloqua application matches fields where the full value in one field
contains the value in another field (for example, the Account Source field value "The ABC Worldwide
Corp." contains the Destination field value "ABC"). Note: This precision is the slowest of all because it
checks every possible entry of all one group field against all possibilities in the fields of records in
another group. Because of speed issues, this precision should not be used on large groups. If required,
split the group into small groups and run them separately.
457 of 1162
Example: Match Account Name

Task
Find all contacts in Group P having the same Account name. The value in the Account field consists of
the Account and Division, so we want to group the contacts for which the Account value contains the
same Account name.
Solution
To return contacts containing the same Account name (regardless of the

Division):
3. Select the Source Table (in this case, Contacts) and the Destination Table (Accounts).
6. On the Deduplication Rule page, select the Contact Field (for instance, Account; this may vary
in your implementation) and Account Field (for example, Account Name) and the Precision type
(Contains). Note: The field names may vary in your implementation.
7. To Choose the Display Fields ..., select (double-click) the First Name and Last Name fields in the
Available Contact Field window to move them to the Selected Fields window.

1 Mike
Black
The ABC UK
2 Mike
Brown
ABC Canada
3 John
Smith
ABC USA
458 of 1162
Group M consists of the following Account Names:

N Account
1 ABC
2 XYZ
When this Deduplication Rule is run on the data shown, there are four groups of results:
Source matches (contact records in Group P that match account records found in Group M) - All
three contacts will match because each company contains the Account Name "ABC".
Source non-matches (contacts with no matched account records) - Empty group.
Destination matches (accounts with matches in the contact group) - Number 1 (ABC).
Destination non-matches (accounts with no matched Account Names among contact records) Number 2 (XYZ).
10.1.2 Applying a Filter Before Deduplication

When you Save the new deduplication rule, the page expands to show you additional configuration
options. The first options are the Filter Details, which allow you to filter your records before applying the
deduplication rule. For example, you may only want to deduplicate contacts only for a specific
company, so you may filter contacts on the Email Address domain to ensure that the deduplication rule
is applied only to records from that company.
Note that the bolded text (Contacts) shows the data entity that the filter is running on and that this is
the filtering for a single-table deduplication rule. The filter is applied on the data entity level before
deduplication takes place.
Tip: The filtering for a single-table deduplication rule is run on both the Source and Destination records.
If you want to filter only the Source or Destination records, you should filter them outside of the
deduplication rule function first.
For multi-table deduplication rules, you can select the Source and Destination data entities separately
to filter the Source records, the Destination records, or both (see the diagram below).
459 of 1162
To set up a filter for a single-table deduplication rule:

2. Click the Deduplication Rules tab at the top of the Tree View.
3. Create a deduplication rule. See Creating Deduplication Rules.
4. Select the checkbox next to Apply Filter to X where X is the data entity type (contacts or
companies) bolded. The filter will be applied to both Source and Destination records.
5. Select the field you want to filter on (Filter Field) from the picklist, then select whether the filter
value Is/Is Not either Equal to or Between the Filter Value(s) entered. Enter the Filter Value(s).
You can use wildcards (* for multiple characters, ? for a single character). If you need move
options for defining the Filter Value, click Search Builder, set up your search, and click OK. The
Final Search String is returned to the Filter Value field.
To set up a filter for a multi-table Deduplication Rule:

2. Click the Deduplication Rules tab at the top of the Tree View.
3. Create a deduplication rule. See Creating Deduplication Rules.
4. If required, in the Source area for the filter, select the checkbox next to Apply Filter to X where
X is the data entity type (contacts or companies) bolded. Select the field you want to filter on
(Filter Field) from the picklist, then select whether the filter value Is/Is Not either Equal to or
Between the Filter Value(s) entered. Enter the Filter Value(s). You can use wildcards (* for
multiple characters, ? for a single character). If you need move options for defining the Filter
Value, click Search Builder, set up your search, and click OK. The Final Search String is
460 of 1162
returned to the Filter Value field.

5. Use the same setup process for the Destination filter (if required).
10.1.3 Copying Deduplication Rules

Instead of creating new deduplication rules, you can copy existing rules to save time.
To copy a deduplication rule:

2. Click the Dedupe Rules tab at the top of the Tree View.
3. On the menu in the Tree View next to a selected Rule, click Copy Deduplication Rule.
4. On the Copy Deduplication Rule page:
Fill in a New Name. The default is the existing name with "Copy of" preceding it, but you
may want to give the copy a different name by entering it in this field.
Fill in a New Description (if required).
Select whether to Copy Associated Deduplication Handler Sets. You must select
this if you want to copy the deduplication handler sets associated with the original.
5. Click Copy Rule. The Rule is copied and placed in the Tree View under the name you have
provided.
10.1.4 Creating Deduplication Handler Sets

With a deduplication rule open, you can create a new set of Deduplication Handlers or access the
existing Handler Sets associated with that rule from the Dedupe Rule options menu.
To create a new Deduplication Handler Set:

1. Navigate to Contacts > Data Tools and click the Deduplication Rules tab at the top of the
Tree View.
2. On the drop-down menu next to a selected Rule in the Tree View, click Edit Deduplication
Rule. The rule opens in the Task area.
3. On the Deduplication Rule options menu on the Task bar, click New Deduplication Handler
Set. The New Deduplication Handler Set dialog box opens.
Note: The Source comparison and Destination comparison data entity types are the same as in
the Deduplication Rule.
461 of 1162
4. Fill in the Deduplication Handler Set Name and click Save. The dialog box changes to show
and describe additional configuration options for the handler set.
5. You can select the type of Matches or Non-Matches (on Source or Destination) that you want to
use from the New Handler will run on picklist, then click Add New Handler to access the
configuration options for the selected handler.
6. In the New Deduplication Handler dialog box, select the Handler Option from the picklist and
click Continue. Click Continue.
7. Set what you want done with Matches or Non-Matches in the Edit Deduplication Handler
Details dialog box, as well as the parameters for the selected action. For example, if you select
Add to a Contact Group, then you must specify the Contact Group to be used. When you
have set the parameters, click Save. Here is a list of the options and the corresponding
parameters that must be set for each:
Options
Parameters
Add to a
Contact
Select a Contact Group to which to add the contact.
Group
Add to Step
in Program
Builder
Backup field
data to
another field
Select the program step to which the contact will be added, and (if required) an
ownership rule to use when adding it.
Select a field in the contact record and another field to which you want to back
up the data value in the first field.
Choose a Companies Group to which to add the matched or unmatched
Create
Companies
contacts. You can also select an existing Group and Edit it or create a New
group. You can also choose to populate account fields with values from the
contact fields (and edit the field mappings) or choose not to map the field
values.
Delete
Permanently
Permanently deletes each Matched or Unmatched contact from the application.
Remove from
the current
When run manually, this contact will be removed from the current group with
Group or
which it is associated, or in Program Builder, from the program step with which
Program
it is affiliated.
Step
Remove
From The
Removes the contact from the current Contact or Account Group or Program
Specific
Step.
Group
Update a
Select a field to update with a constant (static) value and enter the value to use
462 of 1162
Options
Parameters
field with a
constant
for this.
value
Update a
field with field
values from
matched
Update a selected contact field with the value from another field that you
specify.
records
The details of the deduplication handler and what it Runs On (matches or non-matches, source
or destination) are shown in a table at the bottom of the Deduplication Handler Set dialog box.
Repeat steps 4 to 6 above to add additional Deduplication Handlers to the Set as required.
When you have added all of your Handlers, click Save to save the Deduplication Handler Set,
then close the dialog box.
10.1.5 Creating Deduplication Rules

You can create a new deduplication rule from the Get Started page under Data Tools or from the Data
Tools menu on the Function bar. Remember that a single-table deduplication rule allows you to
deduplicate records from the same data entity type (for example, contacts against contacts), whereas
a multi-table deduplication rule lets you deduplicate records from different data entity types (for
instance, contacts against companies).
To create a new single-table Deduplication Rule:

2. In the work area, click New Dedupe Rule.
or
From the Data Tools menu on the Function bar, select New Deduplication Rule.
3. On the New Deduplication Rule page:
Enter the Deduplication Rule Name (under which it will be stored and shown in the
Tree View).
Enter the Description (if required).
Select the type of data entity (Companies or Contacts) that provide the data source for
the Rule (Deduplicate Rule Table).
463 of 1162
Note: Use of the Advanced Options is not recommended. These options are included for
use by Eloqua client services personnel.
4. Click Save. The new Deduplication Rule is saved under the name you provided. The page
expands to show additional configuration parameters you can set, including Filters and
Precisions.
To create a new multi-table Deduplication Rule:

2. From the Data Tools menu on the Function bar, select New Multi-Table Deduplication Rule.
3. On the New Multi-Table Deduplication Rule page:
Enter the Deduplication Rule Name (under which it will be stored and shown in the
Tree View).
Enter the Description (if required).
Select the type of data entity (Companies or Contacts) that provide the data Source
Table for the Rule.
Select the type of data entity (Companies or Contacts) that provide the data
Destination Table for the Rule.

Note: Use of the Advanced Options is not recommended.
4. Click Save. The new Deduplication Rule is saved under the name you provided. The page
expands to show additional configuration parameters you can set, including Filters and
Precisions. See examples of deduplication precision.
10.1.6 Deleting Deduplication Handler Sets

You can delete deduplication handler sets that you no longer require.
To check for dependencies on the Deduplication Rule:

2. Make sure that the Deduplication Rules tab at the top of the Tree View is selected.
3. On the drop-down menu next to an existing match rule in the Tree View, click Delete
Deduplication Rule.
464 of 1162
If there are dependencies on this rule, then the Dependency Check dialog box opens showing
any other marketing objects in Eloqua that are dependent on this deduplication rule. You
must resolve all dependencies before you can delete the match rule.
If you want to reassign dependencies, click Edit next to an object and select a new match rule
for the object to use. If you want to remove the dependent marketing object from the application,
click Delete next to the object.
Note: If one or both of the options next to the object are greyed out, you must manage
the dependency from the object. For example, if a step in a program is dependent on the
match rule, you would have to change or delete the dependency by editing the program
step that uses the match rule.
4. When you are finished viewing and/or editing the dependencies, or if there were none, in the
confirmation dialog box that opens, click OK to permanently delete the selected deduplication
rule.
10.1.7 Deleting Deduplication Rules

Once you have finished with a deduplication rule and do not plan to use it again, you can delete the rule
from the Eloqua system.
To delete a Deduplication Rule:

2. Click the Dedupe Rules tab at the top of the Tree View to view the existing deduplication rules.
3. On the menu in the Tree View next to a selected rule, click Delete Deduplication Rule.
4. The dependency checker rules to determine if there are any marketing objects or processes
dependent on this deduplication rule. If there are, the Dependency Checker window opens
showing the dependencies. You can Edit or Delete each dependency (note that if you Delete,
the marketing object listed is deleted from the system). Once you remove all dependencies, you
can delete the dedupe rule. Note: If Edit and/or Delete are greyed out, you will have to remove
the dependency from the original marketing object or process.
5. Once you have removed dependencies, or if there were none, the confirmation window opens.
Click OK in the confirmation dialog box to permanently delete the deduplication rule from the
application.
465 of 1162
10.1.8 Editing Deduplication Handler Sets

With a deduplication rule open, you can create a new set of Deduplication Handlers or access the
existing Handler Sets associated with that rule from the Dedupe Rule options menu.
To edit an existing Deduplication Handler Set:

1. Navigate to Contacts > Data Tools and click the Deduplication Rules tab at the top of the
Tree View.
2. On the menu next to a selected rule in the Tree View, click Edit Deduplication Rule. The rule
opens in the Task area.
3. From the Deduplication Rule options menu on the Task bar, select Deduplication Handler
Sets. A page showing every deduplication handler set associated with that rule opens in the
Task area.
4. On the drop-down menu next to a Handler Set, click Edit Deduplication Handler Set.
5. You can change the Deduplication Handler Set Name by entering a new name in the field. You
can also change any specific Handler by clicking on the menu next to it and selecting Edit
Deduplication Handler, or delete it by clicking Delete on the same menu. Change
configurations as required. You can also add handlers to the set by clicking Add Handler and
setting the configuration. Once you are done, click Save in the Deduplication Handler Set dialog
box, then close the box.
10.1.9 Editing Deduplication Rules

In some cases, you may want to edit an existing deduplication rule.
To edit an existing deduplication rule:

2. Click the Dedupe Rules tab at the top of the Tree View to view the existing deduplication rules.
3. On the menu in the Tree View next to a selected Rule, click Edit Deduplication Rule.
4. Make changes as required to the rule. For more information about the options, see the following
topics:
Creating Deduplication Rules
Applying a Filter Before Deduplication
466 of 1162
Examples of Deduplication Precisions

5. Click Save once you have finished editing the rule.
10.2 Validation Rules

Using validation rules, you can ensure that data uploaded into Eloqua or submitted in a form complies
to a specific criterion (validation type). You can validate whether there is a submitted or uploaded field
value, the data type and length, and whether the value is in a specified data set. In addition, you can
replace particular values with values that you specify (for instance, to normalize data before its stored
in your marketing database).
10.2.1 Creating Validation Rules

You can create validation rules to ensure that uploaded and submitted data adheres to standards you
set before it is stored in your marketing database.
To create a validation rule:

2. On the Data Tools menu, click New Validation Rule.
3. Fill in the Validation Rule Name and select the type of data entity field it will be used to check
(Contacts or Companies).
4. Using the picklist, select the Validation Type from the following options:
Data type and length: You can select a data entity type and validate the maximum
character length of the value in the selected field to validate (this applies only to string
values). The parameter to set is the character length of the string.
Field value in Data Set: Check to ensure that the value in the chosen data field to
validate is in a set of data values. If it is not, set it to a specified default value.
Field value required: Ensure that there is a value (other than a blank or null) in the data
field you are validating.
Find / Replace: Replace specified data values with other specified values.
5. Click Continue. The page expands so that you can:
Select a field to validate: Click Field to Validate. Search for the field by all or a
fragment of the display name (enter it, then click Search), or click View All to see all
467 of 1162
existing fields, or click Create New to create a new field. Select the field, then click OK.
Set the parameter(s) for the selected Validation Type. This depends on the Validation
Type you selected for the rule.
Data type and length: In the Character Length field, enter the maximum length
of the field. This applies only to strings (not to numeric or date data).
Field value in data set: You must select a Data Value Set against which to test
the uploaded or submitted value, and can optionally provide a Default value in
case the value is not in that particular data value set.
You can choose an existing data value set, select a set and Edit it, or create a
New set. Let's work through the process for creating a new data value set. Click
the New button, then provide a Data Value Set Name (use one suitable for easy
identification of the set) and click Continue. You can add up to 10 values in the
data value set on the page; if you need to add more, click Save and Add More
Values to show a new blank page to enter more values. When you have entered
all the values in the data value set, click Save and Close.
Click Save and close the window to return to the validation rule. If you need to,
you can edit this set later by selecting it in the same picklist, then clicking Edit.
Field value required: You can enter a default value that will be inserted into the
field if it is empty when uploaded or submitted.
Find/Replace: Find particular values in the specified field and replace them with
other specified values by using a Find/Replace Set (a set of values found and
the values they'll be replaced with).
You can choose an existing Find/ReplaceSe t, Select a Setand Edit it, or
Create a New set. Let's work through the process for creating a new
Find/Replace Set. Click New, then provide a Find/Replace Set Name (use one
suitable for easy identification of the set) and click Continue. You can add up to
ten values in the Find/Replace set on the page; if you need to add more, click
Save and Add More Values to show a new blank page to enter more values.
When you have entered all the values in the find/replace set, click Save and
Close.
Click Save and close the window to return to the Validation Rule. If you need to,
you can edit this set later by selecting it in the same picklist, then clicking Edit.
6. Click Save to save the Validation Rule.
468 of 1162
10.2.2 Deleting Validation Rules

To delete a validation rule:
2. Click the Validation Rules tab at the top of the Tree View.
3. Navigate to the validation rule you want to delete.
4. On the menu next to your chosen Rule, click Delete Validation Rule.
5. If there is a dependency on the validation rule (a marketing object in the application, such as a
Program Step, that is using the Set), then the Dependency Check dialog box opens. You must
Edit or Delete every dependency before you can delete the validation rule. If one or both of the
options are greyed out for a marketing object, you must remove the dependency from that
object.
Note: If you Delete the dependency, you are also deleting the dependent marketing object from
the application.
6. Once all dependencies are resolved, or if there were no dependencies on the validation rule, the
confirmation dialog box opens. Click OK to permanently delete the validation rule.
10.2.3 Editing Validation Rules

To edit a validation rule:
2. Make sure that the Validation Rules tab at the top of the Tree View is selected.
3. On the menu next to the validation rule, select Edit Validation Rule.
4. Make changes as required in the validation rule.
Note: Validation Type and Entity Type are read-only fields (greyed out), so you can not make
changes to these values. If you need to change these, you will have to delete this rule, then
recreate it with the same name and different settings.
5. When you are finished, click Save. The validation rule is saved with your changes.
469 of 1162
11 Emails
Despite vast innovations and improvements to other channels of communication with prospects,
emails are still central to many marketing campaigns. You can reach a large number of existing and
potential customers efficiently and cheaply through email messages. Eloqua includes robust email
marketing capabilities that you can weave into your marketing campaigns.
Consider the elements in this email, designed to drive registration for a conference:
470 of 1162
The downside of email marketing is that it is so inexpensive and easy that nearly everyone (including
your competitors) is using it, and it is hard to get noticed. Therefore, it is in your best interest to use
email intelligently, to consider design and campaign elements carefully, and to use email as part of a
multi-device, multi-channel approach. It is also important to include personalization to increase
471 of 1162
identification with your message and to stand out from every other email that a contact gets. In
addition, you need to ensure that you comply with all applicable regulations and best practices.
With Eloqua you can create email groups that allow you to control default settings for similar types of
emails, you can set a specific header and footer depending on the type of emails in the group. For
example, you might always use the same format for a newsletter. Having an email group also allows
the client to unsubscribe from emails at a group level, so for instance they would not receive any
emails from the newsletter group.
Eloqua has many options to help you create consistent, interesting, personalized emails for your
clients, which increases the likelihood that your emails will lead to successful campaigns. Learn more
about email authoring.
11.1 Examples of Emails

Emails continue to be at the center of many marketing campaigns. It's important to pay some attention
to design so that your emails grab the recipients' attention, and to include features that allow your
recipients to control which emails they receive to prevent your emails from being reported as spam.
Some of the features required to maintain the deliverability of your emails, and to comply with antispam laws, are outlined in Overview of Email Marketing. In particular, please look at the features
included in the email footer in the illustration used.
In this article, we'll have a look at a few different uses and designs for emails and point out some of the
purposes and features of the elements included.
Example 1: Information-Only Email
The simplest email provides information to recipients without any call to action, or links to forms,
whitepapers, etc. Header and footer elements are provided to allow recipients to view the email in
different formats (number 1 in the diagram) and to contact the company or view the privacy policy (2).
472 of 1162
473 of 1162
Example 2: Call to Action: Download a Chapter

In this case, there is a call to action in the email to download a chapter from an eBook.This email could
be used as a promotion for the sale of the book or as part of a marketing campaign for the company.
Note that there are two links to the free chapter, as well as two other links to additional information.
This makes it easy for recipients to know what to do and to carry out an action easily.
If you click through on a download link, you go to a landing page where you can view additional
information, send links to the page using social media channels, and view videos as well as
downloading the material without filling in a form.
474 of 1162
Example 3: Call to Action: Access Videos, Whitepapers, and Case Studies

This email drive traffic to a landing page where the recipient can access the video thumbnailed in the
email, as well as numerous other videos, case studies, and whitepapers.
475 of 1162
476 of 1162
This campaign features an intelligent use of forms. When a known contact clicks the Learn More
button, the link below it, or the thumbnail of the video, a window is displayed showing their contact
information. The recipient need only click Submit to view the page without filling in form information.
If the contact information is not known, or the recipient clicks here in the first window shown, then they
have to fill in a short form to access the page.
The "gated form" makes things easier for known contacts, making it more likely that they'll proceed on
to the landing page. Here's what the associated landing page looks like.
477 of 1162
Example 4: Link to a Demo

You can use an email to provide a link to a demo (for example, a new product, or an existing product
that you're trying to introduce to a new prospective users). In the sample shown, there's a very strong
call to action to view a demo of a new product that's of very strong interest to marketing and sales
people.
478 of 1162
When the recipient clicks the button, they are routed to a landing page based on whether they are a
known contact (in which case they don't have to fill in form information) or a new prospect (in this
instance, they are routed to a page that includes a form for them to fill out and submit). For a known
contact, they don't have to submit information, so they are routed to a page without a form.
479 of 1162
A new prospect is routed to a page that includes a form for them to fill out and submit before viewing
the demo.
480 of 1162
In either case, they are routed to the demo and also receive a free whitepaper by email for viewing the
demo.
481 of 1162
The final email is sent after the recipient views the demo page. Note that in some cases, it's unusual
for someone to watch the entire demo, so: (1) make sure that the demo is relatively short so that more
people view the whole demo; (2) put the most information near the beginning; and (3) make sure that
the viewer gets the promised whitepaper anyway, whether or not they watch the entire demo. The
follow-up email, including the link to the whitepaper and other links, looks like this:
482 of 1162
11.2 Email groups

Email Groups are used to control default settings for similar types of emails. For instance, you can set
the default header, footer, subscription landing page, and unsubscribe landing page for a set of email
newsletters. Then your contacts can subscribe or unsubscribe at the group level to simplify
subscription management. As an administrator, you can add or delete groups as required to control
email subscriptions.
Examples of using email groups

Email groups allow you to configure settings on the group level for defaults such as the email headers
and footers and subscription landing page options. This makes it easier to manage different types of
emails and the subscribers to each.
Here are a few of the different types of categorizations you could use for setting up different email
groups for emails:
By department: You can group the emails by the department from which they are sent. This is
particularly useful if you have several different departments sending different types of emails to
483 of 1162
users. For larger companies, the top-level categories might be by department, with functional
groupings within each department area.
By campaign: You could separate your emails into different campaign email groups. This will
make it easier for you to isolate the responses to each campaign. Again, this structure could be
within a department structure if more than one department (for instance: Marketing, Sales,
Support) is distributing email to recipients.
By event: In some cases, particularly for larger events (such as trade shows), you may want to
have an email group for each event. In other instances, it may make more sense to organize by
the type of event, such as seminars, trade shows, and webinars.
By user or agent: In a really large operation, you may want to allow individual marketers or
sales personnel to run their own email groups.
By industry: If you are addressing multiple industry verticals, it may make sense to organize
email groups by different industries.
By product or service: If you have a large catalog of products and/or services, you may want
to organize email groups by the different types of products.
By marketing asset type: One of the more common setups is to organize email groups by the
type and even instance of the marketing asset. For example, you may have different email
groups for different newsletters, notifications, PRs, emergency bulletins, etc.

You can create an email group and set its default parameters so you can manage the emails at the
group level for a particular content asset, such as an email or newsletter.
To create an email group:

opens listing all the existing email groups.
2. Click the
button in the bottom left-hand corner to add a new group, the new group
appears in the left-hand pane as Untitled Email Group.

3. Click on the name and the group settings appear in the right hand pane, configure the group
settings as needed:
Name: Enter a new name for the email group.
Default Email Header: Select a header from the drop-down list, or click the file icon to
the right of the field to open the Email Header Chooser. This header will be the default for
484 of 1162
emails sent from this group. If necessary, you can change which header is used in a
specific email by clicking on it in the email editing page. Learn more about email headers.
Default Email Footer: Select a footer from the drop-down list, or click the file icon to the
right of the field to open the Email Footer Chooser. This footer will be the default for
emails sent from this group. If necessary, you can change which footer is used in a
specific email by clicking on it in the email editing page. Learn more about email footers.
Subscribe confirmation page: Select an option from the drop-down list, or click the
folder icon to the right of the field to open the Landing Page Chooser. The subscribe
email to subscribe (opt-in) for an email group.
Unsubscribe confirmation page: Select an option from the drop-down list, or click the
folder icon to the right of the field to open the Landing Page Chooser. The unsubscribe
email to unsubscribe (opt-out) for an email group.
Make this Email Group available in Eloqua for Sales: (Optional) Select this check
box if you want to be able to use this email group when sending Eloqua emails.
Include this Email Group on the Subscription Management Page:(Optional) Select
this check box if you want the recipient of an email to be able to see the name of this
group on the Subscription Management Page (after the contact has clicked on the "Send
to Subscription List" hyperlink in an email). When you click this check box the following
fields appear:
Name of the Email Group As It Appears to Contacts:Enter the name of the
group as you want it to be displayed on the landing page.
Description of Email Group As It Appears to Contacts:(Optional) Enter a
description to make it clear what types of information this group provides. We
recommend you provide a clear description, this ensures that a user who is
subscribed to several different groups will not mistakenly unsubscribe to the
wrong group.
485 of 1162
4. Click Save to save the settings for the email group.

To verify that your email group has been successfully added to the list of groups, navigate to Assets >
Emails > Create an Email. In the email group drop-down list in the top-right corner, scroll through the
list until you have located your email group.If you are unable to locate your group, verify that you have
clicked Save on the settings page when creating your group.
Important: Once you assign and save an email to an email group, it cannot be reassigned or
changed. In order to change the email group, you must delete the email and recreate it, then
assign it to the correct group.
486 of 1162

You can edit the settings of a pre-existing email group from the settings area of the application.
To edit an email group:

2. Click on the name of the group that you wish to modify, the group settings are displayed in the
right-hand pane.
3. Change the settings as needed, then click Save to save your changes.
Note: When you change the name of the email group, the name on the associated
subscription page is also updated.
To view the emails that are associated with this group, click the Emails tab for that group.The emails
are presented in a read-only list.

You can delete any email group that you are no longer using, provided there are no emails associated
with that group.
To delete an email group:

2. Click on the name of the group that you want to delete, the group settings are displayed in the
right-hand pane.
3. Click the
button in the bottom left-hand corner to delete the email group, a
confirmation box opens.

4. Click Delete to delete the email group, the group is removed from the email groups list.
487 of 1162
Note: If there are any emails associated with this group, you will receive an error
message when you try to delete it. You must delete the emails in the group before being
able to delete the group itself. To see which emails belong to your email group, select the
group you wish to delete, then click the Emails tab in the right-hand pane, all emails in
the group are listed.
11.2.4 Managing global subscription for email groups

You can set global opt-out and opt-in confirmation pages for your email groups, you can also edit and
preview the global subscription page that your contacts will see.
To modify global subscription details:

opens.
2. Under the Global Subscription Management section, select a Global Opt-Out Confirmation
Page from the drop-down list or click the folder icon to the right of the field to open the Landing
Page Chooser.If needed, edit the selected landing page by clicking on the pencil and paper icon
next to the field. This is the page to which contacts are directed after they click the
Unsubscribe from All hyperlink.
3. Select a Global Opt-In Confirmation Page using the same method described in step 2. This is
the page to which contacts are directed after they click the Subscribe to All hyperlink.
4. (Optional) Click the
button, the Edit Subscription Page window
opens. Here you can customize the wording (instructions) on the global subscription
management page.
488 of 1162
Enter the information that you want to appear on the page in the corresponding fields, then click
Preview to see how it will look when rendered.
Example: If you enter "Remove me from your distribution list" in the Unsubscribe
Checkbox Text field, it will appear on the landing page as shown below:
11.3 Email template manager

Note: You must have template manager permissions in order to access this feature. See
granting template manager permissions.
Email templates allow you to create standard emails that can be re-used multiple times, you can create
a new email then save it as a template, you can upload an HTML template that was created outside of
Eloqua, or you can create a new template from the Template Manager. The Template Manager
489 of 1162
(accessed from the email launchpad), allows you to create, modify, and customize email templates for
Eloqua users at your organization. You can assign very granular settings to areas of your emails, you
can lock all elements in place, then define which specific elements, if any, can be modified when
creating new emails. This allows you to maintain control and consistency when sending out similar
types of emails, it also ensures that important elements are not accidentally deleted.

A user must have the appropriate permissions, granted in the settings area of the application, to be able
to save an email as a template and gain access to the Template Manager on the emails launchpad.
From the template manager you can edit templates and lock specific elements to control what can and
cannot be changed when they are used to create new emails.
To grant template manager permission:

1. Navigate to Settings > Setup, then click Users, the user settings page opens.
2. Select the Groups tab on the left-hand pane, then click on the name of the group for which you
want to grant template manager permission, the Security Group Overview opens in the righthand pane.
3. Click Action Permissions, then click Edit at the top of the permissions page.
4. Scroll down to the Template Manager section, and select the check box next to Manage
Templates to grant template manager permission.

5. Click Save at the bottom of the page to save the settings for that group.
11.3.2 Accessing responsive email templates

With the staggering increase in the numbers of people reading and responding to emails on mobile
phones, tablets, and other devices in addition to their computers, it is important to make sure your
emails are visually appealing and useful regardless of the type of device on which they are being read.
These types of emails are based on templates called Responsive Email Templates. Eloqua provides
responsive templates that are pre-built specifically for this purpose. Each section of the responsive
templates contains valuable information for you when customizing the template for your email
campaigns.
Note: Responsive emails rely on appropriate CSS media queries, deleting these from the
template will remove the responsive nature of the email.
490 of 1162
To access the responsive templates:

1. Navigate to Assets > Emails, then click Create an Email, the Template Chooser opens.
2. Click Mobile Templates on the left-hand pane under the Template Gallery heading, the
responsive template options are listed:
3. Select one of the responsive template icons, then click Choose. The template opens in the
email editor where it can be customized as needed.
The four types of responsive templates are:
Responsive 2-Column Split Header: This template contains a two-column header (the
company logo placeholder on the left and a placeholder for other content on the right,
180x50 px). The body of the email is also divided into two columns. The content within
the column sections can be modified when creating your email.
491 of 1162
Responsive Multi-Column Top Story: This template is similar to the 2-Column Split
Header template, except for the heading which is shown in a single column of 320 x 60
px size.
492 of 1162
Responsive 1-Column with Callout: This template is geared towards smaller

resolution email clients (600 px or lower). Within the email template body there are
specific guidelines for what codes and tags to use when adding your content.
Example: In order to ensure that emails viewed in Microsoft Outlook are rendered
properly, do not use paragraph tags, only "<br>". It is important to follow the rules
provided in order to ensure that your emails render properly in various email
clients.
This template also includes a placeholder for a callout. In the example below, there is a
section that provides information (and perhaps a calendar callout) for an event. You can
customize this section by adding the dates, names and other pertinent information for
your email campaign.
493 of 1162
Responsive 2-Column: Finally, the Responsive 2-Column template is used for creating
an email containing text and images divided into a two-column arrangement.
494 of 1162
11.3.3 Creating new email templates from the template manager

When you create a new template from the template manager, you are able to customize the layout and
content, then save the changes for future use. After you have created a new template, you can also set
the template to Protected mode to prevent it from being altered.
To create a new template from the template manager:

1. Navigate to Assets > Emails, then click Template Manager at the bottom of the emails
launchpad, the Template Manager chooser opens.
Note: If the template manager icon is not present, you may not have the correct
permissions. Learn more about template manager permissions.
2. Select an existing template from which you want to create a new template, or if you want to
start from a blank canvas, select Blank Template or Blank HTML Template, then click
Choose. The template opens in either the design editor or the HTML editor depending on the
template type.
495 of 1162
3. Add, change, or delete the elements in your template as needed. Learn more about customizing
emails.
Note: If the status button in the upper left-hand corner says Standard, this means that all
of the elements in the template can be modified. If the status says Protected, the
elements are locked, learn more about Protected mode in the design editor and the
HTML editor.
4. When you are satisfied with your template, select one of the following options to save your
changes:
If you are creating a new template from a blank template: Click Save in the upperright hand corner, or click the action menu (gear icon) then select Save As, the Save as
Template window opens.

If you are creating a new template from an existing template: Click the action menu
(gear icon) then select Save As, the Save as Template window opens.
Note: In this option, the original template that you selected from the chooser is
not modified. You are saving your changes as a separate template. If you want to
make changes to an existing template, see modifying email templates.
5. Enter the details for the template in the Save as Template window:
Name: Provide a name for your template, this name will appear in the template chooser
below the template's icon or thumbnail.
Description: Enter a description for your template, this information appears when you
click the template in the template chooser.
Text to Display for Link: This links to a file or location on another website that could
provide information for users when creating emails using this template. This information
appears when you click the template in the template chooser.
URL for Link: This field contains the URL to which the user will be redirected upon
clicking on the link text. This can be useful for keeping users up-to-date on related data
and content that can be crucial to their marketing campaign's accuracy and relevancy.
Location: Select the location (folder) in which your template will be saved. By default,
the Email Template Root folder is selected. To change the location, click the folder icon
to the right of the drop-down field and select a folder from the chooser.
496 of 1162
Note: All information except the Template Name is optional. However, best practice is
to take advantage of all information that can help a user know which template is the best
one for the task at hand.
Select the Use Thumbnail check box if you want a thumbnail image of your template to be
shown in the template chooser. If you do not select this check box, you are presented with the
option to select either a generic (blue) icon, or by clicking Change Icon, you can choose one of
the available icon designs shown below.
497 of 1162
6. Click Save, the new template is added to the Template Chooser.
11.3.4 Modifying email templates from the template manager

You can modify the layout and content of an existing email template by accessing the Template
Manager on the emails launchpad.
To modify an existing template from the template manager:

launchpad, the Template Manager chooser opens.
2. Select the template that you want to modify, then click Choose, the template opens in either
the design editor or the HTML editor depending on the template type.
3. Add, change, or delete the elements in your template as needed. If the status button in the upper
left-hand corner says Standard, this means that all of the elements in the template can be
modified. If the status says Protected, the elements are locked, learn more about Protected
mode in the design editor and the HTML editor.
4. When you are done editing the template, click Save in the upper right-hand corner. The template
is updated with your changes.
11.3.5 Defining editable elements in email templates using the HTML

editor
HTML templates are edited in the HTML editor. The template is in Standard mode (as indicated in the
upper left-hand corner) when none of the elements are locked. When you define elements in specific
sections as editable or deletable, the status changes to Protected and any undefined elements are
locked. Elements are defined as editable or deletable by inserting supported HTML attributes within
tags, tags follow a similar hyphenated syntax to HTML5 data attributes.
To define a template element as editable in the HTML editor:

1. Navigate to Assets > Emails, then click Template Manager at the bottom of the email
launchpad.
498 of 1162
2. Select the HTML template that you wish to edit, then click Choose, the template opens in the
HTML editor window.
3. Click one of the page view buttons in the upper right-hand corner to open the pane displaying the
HTML code for the template (you can choose to set the pane to the right, or along the bottom of
the screen). Learn more about the live preview HTML editor.
4. Add one or both of the following attributes to the tags for the elements that you want to define as
editable or deletable:
Attribute
Description
Defines a tag/section as editable in a template. A section name is specified for
content replacement matching support in future development (i.e. transactional email
API).
elqedit="
true"
HTML Editor
Supported Elements:
Block level elements and select HTML5 elements (div, section, article,
blockquote, aside, details, summary, figure, fig. caption, footer, header, nav)
Headers (h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6)
Img
elqdelete=" Defines a tag/section as deletable.

true"
When you add an attribute, a blue dashed border appears around the element indicating that it is
editable. All other elements (without the blue dashed border), are locked.
5. Click Save in the upper right-hand corner to save the changes, if the template was in
Standardmode, it changes to Protected.
Note: When you create an email from a Standard template, all elements are, by default,
editable and deletable. When you create an email from a Protected template, the source code
and the design tools are hidden, and only the elements defined as editable or deletable can be
altered. To modify an element that is editable (indicated by a blue dashed border), right-click on
the element to view the editing options, or double-click to open the corresponding chooser or
editor.
499 of 1162
11.3.6 Defining editable elements in email templates using the design

editor
As the creator of an email template, you can maintain tight control over the permissions granted to
other users to modify, delete, or add elements to an email created from that template. Using the lock
icons in the upper right-hand corner you can lock, or unlock the template. While unlocked, the template
is in Standard mode, all sections are editable and there are no modification or deleting restrictions on
the elements in your template. When it is locked, the template is in Protected mode, all elements are
locked until they are marked as editable, as described below.
To lock a template and define an element as editable:

launchpad.
2. Select the template that you wish to edit, then click Choose, the template opens in the design
editor.
3. If the template is not already in Protected mode (as indicated in the upper left-hand corner), click
the
icon in the upper-right hand corner to lock the template elements. A confirmation
window opens asking you to confirm that you want to enable Protected mode for this template,
click Yes.
When you lock the template the status button in the top-left corner changes to Protected, as
shown below.
500 of 1162
Note: By default, elements that are added while the template is in Protected mode are
uneditable, you must enable editing for that element if needed.
4. Right-click the element that you want to make editable, then select Mark as Editable, a
Settings window opens.
5. Select the check box next to the options that you want to enable for that element:
Mark as Editable: This enables editing for the element. You can also enter a name for
the element, this is optional, but recommended.
501 of 1162
Allow Delete: This gives the user of the template the ability to delete the element.
6. Click Save, the window closes and the element now has a blue dashed border on the email
canvas.
7. Click Save to save the changes to your template.
Note: When you create a new email using this template, the email editor toolbar is not
displayed. If there are no editable elements, you are still able to add the email to a campaign or
email a contact, but you cannot modify the structure or content prior to sending. To modify an
area that is editable (indicated by a blue dashed border), double-click on the element to open the
editor in which it can be modified.
502 of 1162
11.4 Creating new emails using the HTML editor

With Eloqua, you can use the HTMLeditor live preview to create dynamic and effective HTML emails
using a combination of code, and the standardEloqua elements such as images, signatures,
dynamically populated fields, and so on.
To create a new HTML email:

1. Navigate to Assets > Emails, then click Create an Email, the Template Chooser opens.
2. Select an HTML template from the chooser, if you want to begin from a blank canvas select the
Blank HTML Email template, then click Choose,the template opens in the HTML editor.
3. Click the action menu (gear icon), then select Settings, the email details window opens.
503 of 1162
4. Configure the email settings:

Name: Provide a new name for the email. This is the name that will appear at the top of
the editing window and in the chooser to identify the email.
Email Group: Choose an email group from the drop-down list. Email groups are used to
manage emails that have a common property, such as a geographic location, type of
customer, etc., and include template-like headers and footers that are automatically
applied to any email that is added to the group. The email group settings can always be
overridden at the individual email level without affecting other emails in that group. Learn
more about email groups.
Email Header: Choose an email header to use from the drop-down list. You can also
add a header by double-clicking on the email canvas while editing it later. Learn more
about email headers.
Email Footer: Choose an email footer to use from the drop-down list. You can also add a
footer by double-clicking on the email canvas while editing it later. Learn more about
email footers.
Subject: Fill in the information that will appear in the subject line of the email. This can
include field merge code to draw field values into the subject line.
From: Fill in the From Name for the sender, this is the name that is shown to the
504 of 1162
recipient. In the From Address field, enter the email address that will be shown as the
"from" address for the email.
Note: This should be an address that the recipient knows and trusts, or at least
one that appears to be legitimate, preferably using a domain name that the
recipient will recognize and trust.
Send Plain-Text only: Enable this checkbox to send a plain-text version email.
Reply-to: Fill in the Reply-to Name, this is the display name for the person who will
receive reply emails from the recipient. This may be the same as the From Name, or
replies may go to a different department or person (for example, "Support"). In the Reply-
to Address, field, enter the email address to which replies will be sent.
Bounceback: By default, bouncebacks are sent to Eloqua so they can be tracked.
Select the address from the drop-down list.
Encoding: Set the character encoding used in the email. If you are using a double-byte
language in the email (such as Chinese), or may translate the content in future, set this
to Unicode (UTF-8).
Enable Email Tracking: As a best practice, you should select this checkbox to ensure
that your email is tracked in Eloqua. This checkbox should only be deselected if you are
sure you will never require reports about this email, and if you do not want metrics from
this email to be included in summary reports for all your emails.
Enable Responsive Vertical Resizing: The Responsive Vertical Resizing option
dynamically resizes emails built in the Email Editor based on the content populated in the
email (e.g. cloud content, dynamic content, shared content). This prevents content from
being cut off when a recipient's content is larger than the container originally configured
in the email editor and renders a more mobile-friendly version.
Note: For net new assets, Responsive Vertical Resizing is enabled by default.
For existing assets, the original settings are respected.
Click Done when you have finished, the email settings window closes.
505 of 1162
Note: The From information, the subject line, and the email group can also be modified
in the top bar of the email canvas as shown in the image below.
5. Edit the content of the email as needed. Learn more about email editor components and editing
HTML emails.
6. Click Save in the upper right-hand corner when you are done.
11.5 Creating new emails or templates using the HTML upload

wizard
You can upload an HTMLfile or a ZIPfile that contains your HTMLas well as any associated content
(images). If you have created an email outside of Eloqua using HTML, you can upload the file to Eloqua
then edit the content in the HTML editor. Before beginning to create your HTMLemail, make sure your
code adheres to the code requirements for HTML email uploads.
To create a new email or template by uploading HTML and related assets (such
as images):
1. Navigate to Assets > Emails, then click Upload an Email from the emails launchpad.
2. Select Upload Email from the HTMLDocument Upload Wizard dialog box to create an email,
or click UploadTemplate to create a new email template.
Note: The following steps are the same for uploading an email and uploading a template.
3. Click on the cloud graphic to begin the wizard. Browse to the location of your HTMLor ZIPfile
for the email you want to upload and click Open.
506 of 1162
4. In the Process Files step of the upload wizard, review the list of images and other files and
choose to either use existing files or upload new ones.
Choose one of the options listed beside each image:

Use Suggested Image: Choose this option if the image is already in the image library. If
an image is available that matches the title of the image file in the HTML code, the
application will automatically suggest that file as the correct mapping.
Upload New Image: Choose this option if the image is not in the library. Click the
Upload New button, then navigate to the designated file (often in a subfolder of the
HTML file), double-click on the file name, then click Upload to upload the image to
Eloqua. Once uploaded, a thumbnail of the image is shown.
Do Nothing: Choose this option if you do not wish to change the image shown in the
thumbnail, select for that image.
When you are finished, click Next Step.
507 of 1162
5. In the Process Links step, all hyperlinks in the uploaded email are listed. If you want to track
these hyperlinks and ensure that click-throughs are reported in Eloqua, enable the Track Link
checkbox next to each hyperlink. If you wish to track visits to all links in the email, enable the
Track All button in the upper-left hand corner. Repeat as required, then click Next Step.
6. In the Finish step of the upload wizard, name your HTMLdocument and select the destination
folder where you want it to be stored. This is an optional step, the location can be changed at a
later time if required.
If you chose to upload an email, there is a field on this screen in which you can specify the email
group. If you do not specify a group here, you will be required to do it later before the email can
be sent.
If you are uploading a template, there will not be an email groups option. Instead, you will see a
description field, in which you can provide details about the email. You can also choose an
image to represent this template in the Template Chooser.
508 of 1162
shown in the Template Chooser. If you clear this check box, you are presented with the option
to select either a generic (blue) icon, or by clicking Change Icon, you can choose one of the
available icon designs shown below.
7. Click Finish to complete the upload process, the upload wizard closes and the HTML editor
opens. Here you can perform any additional editing and styling if required. Learn more about the
editing HTML emails using the HTML editor .
8. Click Save to save your changes to the uploaded email.
509 of 1162
11.6 Email authoring

After you have created an email you can edit the content to suit your specific needs by adding and
manipulating a number of different elements on the editor canvas. Using the components in the email
editor, you can create an email that is visually interesting and personalized for each contact that views
it.
Eloqua also allows you to add a header to emails, adding a header helps identify your company for the
client, you can include a logo, personalize the email for specific clients, provide a redirect link in case
there are errors displaying the email, and much more. You can also add a footer to your email, here you
can include elements such as contact information for your company, a link to your company website,
and information about trademarks or copyrights. You can also include a link to allow clients to manage
their subscription to emails, and a link to your company's privacy policy.
Using Eloqua you can create and add a signature layout to your emails that can be used as a template
for all emails in a deployment. You can create a standard layout with fields that can be auto-populated
with specific information, in this way you can send one email with multiple senders. By creating
signature rules you are able to specify which clients will receive the email from which senders based
on specified criteria. For example, the same email can be sent out across the country, but for each
client the sender will appear to be their local sales representative. Creating signature rules tells Eloqua
which sender information should be used for each client based on the information found in their contact
profile.
11.6.1 Adding borders to images in emails

Adding a border to an image in an email can help the image stand out, it can draw a viewers attention to
the image and set it apart from the other elements in the email. In order to add a border to an image, you
must first place the image inside a text box. The steps below outline how to add an image to a text box,
then how to add and format a border around the image.

1. Navigate to Assets > Emails, then open an existing email or create a new one.
2. Click the Text icon on the left-side menu, a text box opens in the email editor canvas.
3. Double-click in the text box where instructed to enter editing mode.
4. Click Image on the left-side menu to open the Image Browser.
510 of 1162
5. Locate (or upload) the image you wish to add to the email by typing the first few letters of the
name, or scrolling through the thumbnails. With the text box selected, double-click on the image
to add it to the text box.
6. Click on the text box to select the image that you added, then right-click and select Format
Text..., the Text Tools window opens.
7. Click the paintbrush icon to open the Style Tools tab.
8. Select the type of border that you want to add from the Borders drop-down list. You can then
customize the border as needed, you can modify:
Color: Click in the black box below the Borders list to change the color of the border. The
color chooser opens. Use the slider to choose the color, then click on the tile to choose
the shade. If you know the ASCII code for the specific color, you can enter it here as
well.
Border Thickness: Change the value in the box next to px from 2 (the default) to a
number of your choosing depending on the desired thickness. You can also select which
edges of the border will have these settings applied to them by clicking the checkbox
next to each edge (left, right, top, or bottom) in the Style Tools window.
Padding: The padding value controls how much space there is between the image and
the edges of the border. In the Padding section, enter a value in the px box for each side
of the border. You can enter a different number for each side of the border, and the
padding for that side is adjusted accordingly.
9. Click the X in the upper left-hand corner to close the window.
10. Click Save in the upper right-hand corner of the canvas to save the changes.
11.6.2 Adding email footers to emails

You can add a footer to the bottom of an email, this section can provide additional information and links
for your recipients. Learn more about email footers.
Note: Footers are designed as reusable content, so they are not edited through the email
editor, instead, they have their own section in the application. .
To add afooter to an email:

2. Double-click at the bottom of the email where it says Double-click to select an email footer; if
there is already a footer, double-click on it to choose a different footer. The Email Footer
511 of 1162
Chooser window opens.

Important: Make sure that you do not click on a hyperlink in the current footer, if there is
one, as this will open the linked page instead.
3. Select a footer in the chooser window, then click Choose, the selected footer is inserted in the
email.
4. Click Save in the upper right-hand corner of the canvas to save the email with the footer.
11.6.3 Adding email headers to emails

You can add a header to an email to provide information about the company, display a logo, link to a
website etc. Learn more about email headers.
To add an email header to an email:

2. Double-click at the top of the email where it says Double-click to select an email header; if
there is already a header, double-click on it to choose a different header. The Email Header
Chooser opens.
3. Select a header in the chooser window, then click Choose, the selected header is inserted in
the email.
4. Click Save in the upper right-hand corner of the canvas to save the email with the header.
11.6.4 Adding field merges to emails

When a field merge is added to an email, that email becomes customized to each contact that it is
being sent to.
To add a field merge to an email:

2. Click Text on the left-hand panel, a text box opens on the email canvas. Double-click in the text
box to enter edit mode.
3. Click Field Merge on the left-hand panel, the Field Merge Browser opens.
512 of 1162
4. In the browser, locate the field merge that you want to add, then click on the name and drag-anddrop it into the text box. When your cursor is positioned over the text box the border of the text
box changes to a light blue color, when you release the mouse, the area outside the text box
turns dark.
5. Click the exact location where you want the field merge to appear.
After it is added, the merge is highlighted yellow in the email.
513 of 1162
Note: If the name of the field merge highlighted in yellow does not match the name of the one
you dragged from the field merge browser, it is most likely because the field merge has been
renamed at some point.The original name of the field merge is always retained and will always
be displayed when adding it to an email.
Any spaces or hyphens in the name of the field merge are converted to underscores when
added to the email. Only alphanumeric characters will appear in the field merge (A-Z, 0-9). For
example, if your field merge is named First Name, when added to the email it will appear as
First_Name.
11.6.5 Adding hyperlinks to emails

Eloqua allows you to enable text or images as hyperlinks, you can then configure the link in a number
of different ways. A hyperlink can route your clients to a landing page, a file, a webpage, a system
action, or a pre-addressed email that they can fill out and send.
To add a hyperlink to an email:

1. Select the text or image that you want to use as a hyperlink, then click the Hyperlink icon on the
left-side pane, the Hyperlinks Tools window opens.
2. Select the Enable as Hyperlink check box, the text or image is converted to a hyperlink and the
other configuration options are now available in the Tools window.
3. Choose one of the following options from the Link Type drop-down list:
514 of 1162
Landing Page: Link to an existing landing page in the application. Click the file icon next
to the landing page address line, the Landing Page Hyperlink Chooser opens. Select a
landing page then click Choose.
Note: There is no tracking option for this type of hyperlink.

File in File Storage: Link to a file in the file storage area in the application, such as a
PDF file. Click the file icon next to the File field, the File Storage Chooser opens. Select
a file to use then click Choose.
Webpage: Link to a company or external webpage. Enter the URL of the webpage in the
URL field. Click the Redirect (for untracked pages) checkbox to enable tracking on an
otherwise untracked website.
Note: The URLentered above will change to reflect the tracking function.
System Action: Allow the recipient to configure a viewing or subscription option. Choose
one of the following options from the Action drop-down list.
Add to Email Group: Allows the user to subscribe to the email group for the
current email.
Remove from Email Group: Allows the user to unsubscribe from the email group
for the current email.
Send to Subscription List: Adds the user to the general subscription list for your
mailings.
Send to Subscription Page: Sends the user to a page where they can manage
all of their subscription options.
Subscribe to All: Lets the user subscribe to all emails.
Unsubscribe from All: Lets the user unsubscribe from all emails.
View online version: Opens the current email in a web browser window.
New Email Message: Link to a new email. Enter the To: email address.
515 of 1162
4. In the Link Hover Text field, enter the text that you want the recipient to see when they hover
over the hyperlink with their mouse.
5. Click the X in the upper left-hand corner of the Hyperlinks Tools window to close it.
11.6.6 Adding images to emails

When creating an email in Eloqua you have the option to add images, doing so can make your emails
more visually interesting, and adding logos and consistent visuals can help with brand recognition. You
can also include Alt text for an image, Alt text is useful if users have images disabled in their email
client, or if their device or email client is unable to display the image (for example, if they are viewing
the email on a computer with a slow connection).
To add an image to an email:

2. Click the Image icon on the left-side menu, the Image Browser opens.
516 of 1162
3. Locate (or upload) the image you wish to add to the email by typing the first few letters of the
name, or scrolling through the thumbnails. Double-click on the image to add it to the email, or
drag-and-drop the image from the browser onto the email canvas. If you want to add a border,
see adding borders to images in emails.
Note: The position of the image can be adjusted at any time, click the image then dragand-drop it in the new location.
4. Double-click the image on the email canvas to open the Alttag window, enter the text that you
want the client to see if the image cannot be displayed.
When the email is rendered, the client can see the Alt text when they hover their mouse over the
image.
517 of 1162
Click outside the Alt window when you done.

5. Click Save in the upper right-hand corner of the canvas to save the changes.
11.6.7 Adding text boxes to emails

If you want to add text to an email in Eloqua, you can do so by adding a text box to the email canvas.
These text boxes can then be formatted and positioned as needed.
To add a text box to an email:

2. Click the Text icon on the left-side menu, a text box is added to the email canvas.
3. Double-click in the box, then enter your own text in place of the existing content.
4. Right-click in the text box and select Format Text, or highlight the text and select the Tools icon
on the left-side menu, the Toolswindow opens. This window has six different tabs that give you
a number of different customization options. Learn more about customizing email text boxes.
Close the Tools window when you are done by clicking the X in the upper left-hand corner.
5. Click Save in the upper right-hand corner of the canvas to save your changes.
Note: You can also edit the content of a text box directly in the source (HTML)code. Make sure
that only the text box is selected, then right-click on it and select Edit Source, the Editing
HTML dialog box opens in which you can enter text and formatting code.
518 of 1162
Content created in this editor is checked against a whitelist of permissible HTMLtags and
attributes. If you enter prohibited (blacklisted)tags or attributes, Eloqua displays a validation
error and you will not be able to save your email until you resolve the issues.
11.6.8 Copying objects in the email editor

You can copy and paste objects in the email editor, this can save you time if you want to reuse
elements in your email.
To create a copy of an object in the email editor:

2. Click the object that you want to copy and press Ctrl+C to copy the item to your clipboard.
3. Press Ctrl+V to paste a copy of the object in the email. The copy is initially pasted on top of the
original, but you can drag-and-drop it to the desired location on the email canvas, as with any
other object in the email editor.
Note: You cannot copy and paste a grouped object. In order to create a copy of a
grouped object, you must first ungroup the elements and then copy and paste the
objects individually. After pasting the objects, you can then regroup the originals, as well
as the copies. Learn more about grouping objects in emails.
519 of 1162
11.6.9 Customizing images and text boxes in emails

After you add a text box or an image to an email you can customize the element in a variety of ways
using the Tools window.
Click on the image or highlight the text that you want to edit, then click the Tools icon on the left-side
menu, the Toolswindow opens. This window has six different tabs (outlined below), that give you a
number of different customization options.
Text Tools
Click the
icon at the top of the window, the Text Tools tab opens. In this tab you can edit a text
box in the following ways:

Change the font family: Click the Family drop-down list to display the list of available font
families. Click on the desired font family to select it.
Change the text size: Highlight the text then click the Sizedrop-down list and select the size
(in pixels) that you want to make the text. Only the text that you have highlighted is affected by
this setting.
Change the decoration(style) of the text: Highlight the text then click one or more of the
buttons to change it to bold, italic, or underlined.
Change the color of the text: Highlight the text that you want to edit, then click in the Color
box. The color chooser opens. Select a color using the slider bar, then click on the color tile to
select the shade that you want to use. Click outside the window to close the chooser.
You can add highlightingto the text by once more selecting the appropriate text, clicking in the
Highlight box and using the same steps as above to select a color.
520 of 1162
Note: If you know the hexadecimal code for the color you wish to use, you can enter it in
the # box in the color wheel window.
Align the text in your text box (or a portion thereof): Highlight the text then click one of the
buttons in the Alignment section. They are, from left to right: left, center, right, and full
alignment.
Change the position of one or more characters in your text box: Highlight the character(s)
and select either the superscript or subscript buttons.
Format your text as a list: Highlight the list of items then click one of the buttons in the List
section. The first button converts the text into a numbered list and the second button creates a
bulleted list.
If you do not have text already entered in the text box, selecting one of these buttons
automatically formats any new text you enter as a list. When you are done with the list, click the
button again to remove the list formatting.
Outdent or indent your text: Click on a line of text then select either the outdent or indent
button under the Indent section.
Spacing between characters: Click in the Between Characters box and enter a number
measured in either pixels (px) or em to specify your desired value. Make sure to enter "px" or
"em" with the desired value.
Spacing between lines of text : Click in the Between Lines box and enter a number measured
in either pixels (px)or em. Make sure to enter "px" or "em" with the desired value.
Style Tools
Click the
icon at the top of the window, the Style Tools tab opens. In this tab you can edit a text
box in the following ways:

Change the background color of your text box: Click in the color box in the Background
section of the Styles Tools window, the color chooser opens. Select a color using the slider bar,
then click on the color tile to select the shade that you want to use. Click outside the window to
close the chooser.
the # box in the color wheel window.
Change the formatting of the text box border: By default there is no border selected for your
text box, click on the Borders drop-down list to select a border type to add.
521 of 1162
The following table shows an example of each border type using a value of 10 pixels:
Border Type
Example
None
Hidden
Solid
Groove
Dotted
Dashed
Double
Ridge
Inset
522 of 1162
Border Type
Example
Outset
Change the padding value: Padding is the space that exists between the text and the border.
In the Padding section of the Style Tools window, enter a value in the px box for each side of the
border. You can enter a different number for each side, and the padding for that side is adjusted
accordingly.
Hyperlinks Tools
Click the
icon at the top of the window, the Hyperlink Tools tab opens. You can enable text or an
image as a hyperlink then configure the link as needed. Learn more about adding hyperlinks to emails.
Layout Tools
Click the
icon at the top of the window, the Layout Tools tab opens. In this tab you can edit the
text box or image in the following ways:

Size: This setting controls the size of the element in the email. Enter values in the Width and
Height fields to change the size of the text box or image.

Position: This setting controls the position of the element relative to the "0" point (the upper-left
hand corner of the email). Enter a value in the From left (X) and From Right (Y) fields to change
the position of the text box.
After setting the size and position of the text-box, click the Lock Size and Position checkbox to
maintain those settings. The size and position can be changed later, if required, by returning to the
email editor, selecting the text box, and deselecting the Lock size and Position checkbox.
523 of 1162
Page Styles
Click the
icon at the top of the window, the Page Stylestab opens. In this tab you can edit the
text box in the following ways:

Alignment: You can set the alignment for the entire page. Make sure that none of the elements
are selected on the email canvas, then click one of the buttons under the Alignment section of
the window. From left to right, the options are, align left, align center, and align right.
Padding: You can set the amount of space that appears between the top of the email and the
header, as well as the bottom of the email and the footer.
Width and Height: Enter a value (in pixels) in the Width and Height fields, this controls the
width and height of the email content area.
Content Background: Select the type and color of the content background.
Browser Background: Select the type and color of the background around the email.
524 of 1162
Page Snippet
Click the
icon at the top of the window, the Page Snippet tab opens. In this tab you can control
code snippets, you can view and edit the following elements in your email code:
Meta Tags: The meta tags provide metadata about the content of your email, and provides
format and character set information and keywords related to the content. You can add meta
tags by clicking the + button, and remove them by selecting the one to be removed, then
clicking the - button.
Example: A meta tag used to describe content as related to free web tutorials could
be:<meta name="description"content="Free Web tutorials"/>.
Header: The header information is placed between the <head> tags and contains details about
the sender, route, and recipient of the email.
Example: <title>Document_Title</title>, where Document_Title is the actual title of the
document.
The header can be customized using a CSS and a HTML editor. Click to open one of the editors
and add custom code as needed.
525 of 1162
11.6.10 Editing the plain-text version of emails

The plain-text version of an email is sent along with the HTMLversion, and allows the email to be
viewed on mobile devices that cannot render the HTML version properly. You can choose to
automatically generate the plain-text version to match the text in the HTML version (this is the default),
or you can modify the plain-text version independently of the HTML version.
To edit the plain-text version of an email:

2. Click the Plain-Text button in the upper right-hand corner to convert the email to the plain-text
version, the plain-text email editor opens.
Note: To switch back to the HTML version, click the Design button in the upper lefthand corner of the plain-text email editor.
526 of 1162
3. Clear the Automatically generate plain-text version check box at the top of the editor. This
ensures that your plain-text version of the email will not be overwritten if you make changes to
the HTML version.
4. Edit the plain-text version of the email as needed, then click Save in the upper right-hand corner
to save your changes.
11.6.11 Editing HTML emails using theHTMLeditor

After you create a new HTMLemail or upload an email using the HTML upload wizard, the contents
can be edited in the live preview HTML editor. This editor allows you to add elements to the email by
dragging-and-dropping the item from the corresponding browser into the code, you can also edit the
email by entering additional code directly into the existing content.
Note: Emails created using the HTMLupload wizard cannot be edited using the design editor.
To edit an email in the HTML editor:

1. With the email opened in the HTML editor, click one of the page view buttons in the upper righthand corner of the canvas, the HTML pane opens. You can choose to set the pane to the right,
or along the bottom of the screen, this pane gives you access to the code for the email that you
are editing. Learn more about the live preview HTML editor.
527 of 1162
2. Add or edit the email using one of the following methods:

Type HTMLcode directly into the HTMLpane. Press Ctrl + F to quickly find the specific
content to be edited.
Click one of the icons on the left-side menu, locate the element that you want to add,
then drag-and-drop the element into the code at the desired location.
After the element is released, it is converted to code and the preview pane reflects the
change in the HTML code.
11.6.12 Grouping objects in emails

Eloqua gives you the option to group objects together on the email canvas, this allows you to move the
items at once, maintaining their relationship and relative position to one another.
528 of 1162
Note:If you wish to add an object to a pre-existing group, you must first ungroup the grouped
objects, then re-group them with the new object.
To group objects in emails:

1. In the email editor, hold down the Ctrl key and click each object that you want to include in the
group. As you click each object, a border with small boxes in each corner appears around the
element indicating that it is selected.
2. Right-click on one of the objects and select Group.
The items are grouped together and the individual borders around each object disappear and are
replaced with a single border around all objects, you can now reposition the objects as a group.
In addition, since the grouped object is now considered a single element, you can easily lock its
position on the email canvas. Learn more about locking and unlocking email canvas objects.
Note: After the objects are grouped, the right-click menu options change to reflect this
property. Group is no longer available and Ungroup is added to the list. Select
529 of 1162
Ungroup if you want to separate the group into individual elements.
11.6.13 Locking and unlocking email canvas objects

Eloqua gives you the option to lock the position of objects on the email canvas, this is a useful feature
when, for instance, you are happy with the placement of an object and want to prevent any accidental
shifting while editing other objects on the canvas.
To lock and unlock email canvas objects:

1. In the email editor, click on the object that you want to lock into position. A border with small
boxes in each corner appears around the object indicating that it is selected.
2. Right-click the object and select Lock, the object is locked into position and cannot be moved
until you unlock it. When an object is locked, a lock icon
appears in the upper right-hand
corner of the border.
530 of 1162
To unlock an object, right-click the object and select Unlock, the object can now be
repositioned on the email canvas.
Notes for formatting locked objects

While an object is locked, some of its properties can still be formatted:
Format the dimensions of an image or text box: Right-click the object and select Format
Dimensions, the Layout Tools window opens. The Lock size and position check box is
selected, clear this box to unlock the object then change the dimensions or position as needed.
If you want to maintain the ratio of width versus height for an image,select the Constrain
Proportions check box. Then, if you change the width setting, the height automatically adjusts
in order to retain the same proportions as the original.
531 of 1162
Example: In the following screenshot, if the Constrain Proportions check boxis

selected, and you modify the width to be 220, when you click height it changes from 60
(px) to 154 to maintain the correct width to height ratio:
If the Constrain Proportions check box is cleared, when you change either the width or
height setting, the other does not automatically change and the image can become
distorted as shown below:
If you are unsatisfied with the changes you have made, click the Original Size button to return
back to the original image.
Edit the contents of a text box: Right-click on the text box and select Edit Source. The HTML
editor window opens, make any necessary changes then click Save. The text box is still locked
but your changes to the text are saved.
532 of 1162
Edit a signature, shared content, or dynamic content: Right-click on the locked object and
select Edit Content. The corresponding editor opens, here you can make any changes to the
object. Only its position and dimensions cannot be changed.
Edit text hyperlinks: Right-click on the locked hyperlink and select Edit Source. The HTML
editor window opens. Make any necessary changes then click Save.
Deleting locked objects: Locking an object does not prevent you from deleting it from the email
canvas, right-click the object and select Delete.
11.6.14 Using email editor components

After you create an email, you can use the email editor components on the left-side menu to customize
the email to suit your needs. The following table provides a description of each of these components,
and information on how to use them to add elements to the email canvas.
Component
Description
Image: Add images to your email. Click the icon to open the Image Browser, then
drag-and-drop an image from the browser onto the email canvas.
Learn more about adding images to emails.
Text: Add text boxes to your email. Click the icon to add a text box to your email,
then double-click in the box to edit the content.
Learn more about adding text boxes to emails.
Field Merge: Add a field merge to your email, field merges personalize emails by
drawing information from specified fields in contact profiles. Click the icon to open
the Field Merge Browser, select the text that you want to convert to a field merge,
then double-click on the field name in the browser.
Learn more about adding field merges to emails
Hyperlink: Add a hyperlink to your email, this can be text or an image in the email,
and can lead to your company website or related content. Select text or an image
and click the Hyperlink icon, select the check box next to Enable as Hyperlink then
configure the link as needed.
Learn more about adding hyperlinks to emails.
Signature: Add a signature to your email, this can be a standard signature layout
that populates with specific sender information. Click the icon to open the Signature
Browser, then drag-and-drop a signature from the browser onto the email canvas.
Learn more about signature layouts and signature rules.
533 of 1162
Component
Description
Shared Content: This component allows you to add shared content to your email,
this is content that can be reused in multiple Eloqua assets. Click the icon to open
the Shared Content Browser, then drag-and-drop shared content from the browser
onto the email canvas.
Learn more about shared content.
Dynamic Content: This component allows you to configure your email to substitute
different content depending on specific rules and conditions.
Example: You could create a rule to decide which salesperson will appear as
the sender of an email based on the city, state, country, or region specified in
the contact's profile.
Click the icon to open the Dynamic Content Browser, then drag-and-drop the content
from the browser onto the email canvas.
The Responsive Vertical Resizing option dynamically resizes emails built in the
Email Editor based on the content populated in the email (e.g. cloud content,
dynamic content, shared content). This prevents content from being cut off when a
recipient's content is larger than the container originally configured in the email editor
and renders a more mobile-friendly version.
Learn more about dynamic content.
Cloud Content: Cloud content is content that is provided by an external service.
(Cloud content can be added to the browser from the AppCloud Catalog in the Setup
area of Eloqua.) Click the icon to open the Cloud Content browser, then drag-anddrop the service that you want to add from the browser onto the email canvas.
If the service needs to be configured, double-click the icon on the canvas, the Cloud
Content Configuration window opens. Enter the required details then click Save.
The Responsive Vertical Resizing option dynamically resizes emails built in the
Email Editor based on the content populated in the email (e.g. cloud content,
dynamic content, shared content). This prevents content from being cut off when a
recipient's content is larger than the container originally configured in the email editor
and renders a more mobile-friendly version.
Tools: Click this icon to open the Tools window, this component allows you to
format the elements in your email as needed. You can format the entire email or the
individual elements using the different tabs in this window.
See Customizing email images and text boxes for more information about using
these tools.
534 of 1162
11.6.15 Using emailrecovery checkpoints

As you make changes to your email, Eloqua saves local copies on your computer that are called
Recovery Checkpoints. Any changes to the email, including title, sender name, elements, formatting,
email group, and so on, qualify for a new checkpoint to be created. This data is not saved inside your
typical browser cache, so clearing the cache has no effect. If you see no checkpoints being created,
you may need to clear the folder on your computer where the data is being saved.
The Indexed DB databases of Firefox can be found on the following location:
<location of the windows user profiles>\<account
name>\AppData\Roaming\Mozilla\Firefox\Profiles\<some randomcharacters>.default\IndexedDB
The Indexed DB databases of Chrome can be found on the following location:

<location of the windows user profiles>\<account name>\AppData\Local\Google\Chrome\User
Data\Default\IndexedDB
Note:If you wish to completely disable the creation of recovery checkpoints, use Private
Browsing (in Mozilla Firefox, navigate to Tools >Start Private Browsing).
To use email recovery checkpoints:

2. Click the action menu (gear icon) then select Recovery Checkpoints, the Recovery
Checkpoints window opens, immediately, the first checkpoint is created with the current date
and time.
535 of 1162
3. Click Save each time you make a change to the email to add a new checkpoint to the list (to a
maximum of twelve (12)checkpoints). Checkpoints are also created automatically by Eloqua
every ten minutes.
Example: If you make a change to an email (without clicking Save)and then leave your
computer for more than ten minutes, when you return there will be a new checkpoint that
was created automatically.
Subsequent checkpoints are only created if new content or changes are detected by the
application, otherwise you will not have two identical checkpoints in your list.
Each checkpoint is indicated by the date and time when the checkpoint was created. You can
open and work from any of the checkpoints on the list, simply click on the one that you want. All
future changes are based on that checkpoint.
536 of 1162
After you arrive at the 13th checkpoint, it will override the oldest one in the list. You can have a
maximum of two hours of checkpoints, so if you have been working on your email for over two
hours and creating checkpoints along the way (by clicking Save), you will still only have the last
two hours worth of checkpoints to which you can return.
Important: Since these checkpoints are created on your local machine, if you log in to
Eloqua from another machine, the same checkpoints will not be available.
11.7 Saving emails as templates

Note: You must have the correct permissions to save an email as a template. Learn more about
granting template manager permissions.
When you create an email in Eloqua, you are given the option to save the email as a template for future
emails, this is valuable if you need to send the same type of email multiple times. Saving your email as
a template can simplify your email creation process later, instead of creating a whole new email you
can edit the content of an existing template. You can also create new templates by selecting a
template from the template manager, you can edit it as needed then save the new template. Learn
more about creating templates from the template manager.
To save an email as a new template:

1. Click Assets > Emails, then choose one of the options to open the email to be saved as a
template. You can create a new email, open an existing email, or upload an email.
2. Add, change, or delete elements in your email as desired. Learn more about editing email
content.
3. When you are ready to save the email, click the action menu (gear icon), then select Save As
Template, the Save as Template window opens.
4. Enter the following information in the window:
provide information for users when creating emails using this template. This information
537 of 1162
appears when you click the template in the template chooser.

the Email Template Root folder is selected. To change the location, click the folder icon
to the right of the drop-down field and select a folder from the chooser.
5. Select the Use Thumbnail check box if you want a thumbnail image of your template to be
shown in the Template Chooser. If you clear this check box, the template will appear in the
chooser as an icon. You can select either a generic blue icon (the default), or you can click
Change Icon to choose from one of the designs shown below.
538 of 1162
6. Click Save to save your email as a template, it is now available in the Template Chooser.
After you have created a template you can use the Template Manager to lock the elements in place (to
preserve the layout and content), then define which, if any, elements can be edited. Lean more about
defining editable email template elements using the email editor.
11.8 Creating folders for emails

You can create a folder in which to place emails with common properties or uses. For example, you
can place all emails needed for a particular campaign in a single folder, this makes the emails easier to
locate.
To create a new email folder:

1. Navigate to Assets > Emails, then click Open an Existing Email, the Email Chooser opens.
2. Click New Folder, in the lower left-hand corner of the window.
3. A folder called Untitled Folder is created at the top of the list. Right-click the new folder and
select Rename.
4. Enter the new name for the folder, then press Enter.
539 of 1162
11.9 Sending emails to a single contact

You can send an email to a test email address, then view it to ensure that the email is being properly
delivered and rendered before wide-scale distribution.
To send an email to a single contact:

1. Navigate to Assets > Emails, then click Open an Existing Email, the Email Chooser window
opens.
2. Find the email that you want to test then click Choose, the email editor window opens.
3. Click the action menu
, then select Email a Contact, the Email a Contact chooser
window opens.
4. Search for the contact that you want to send the email to, then click Send, the email is sent to
the contact.
Note: When you send an email, the From:address appears as the one associated with
the user account that you are logged in under, not the email address specified in the
email settings as is usually the case.
11.10 Previewing emails

Eloqua provides a rich suite of tools that you can use to build, preview, and test your emails before you
send them out. The preview feature lets you view your message as your contacts will see it, including
any field merges and dynamic or cloud content. This way, you can be sure that the personalization
features you've used in your emails will display properly when recipients open the message up.
The preview window also lets you view the asset as it will display in a desktop/laptop browser, on a
tablet, or on a smart phone, letting you test responsiveness across device types.
To preview an email:
2. From the action menu
, select Preview.... The Preview Email window opens.
540 of 1162
.
3. Search for and select the name of the contact(s) for whom you wish to see the email preview,
then click Preview. The email preview opens, showing any personalized content for the
selected contact.
Example: This message includes a field merge on the first name, and dynamic content
toward the end, which is populated with "Thanks for reading! ExampleCo loves you" by
default,and an invitation to receive the message in French for people whose country is
either France, Belgium, or Canada.
Danilo is located in Brazil. His email displays the default content:
541 of 1162
Lauren is located in Canada. The dynamic content in the footer displays differently for
her than it did forDanilo, according to the configured rules:
Note: You can select up to ten contacts by holding the Ctrl or Shift button and clicking
on the names of the contacts on the list, then click Preview. You can see how the email
will appear for each contact by clicking their names in the left-hand pane.
4. Click on Desktop, Tablet, or Mobile, at the top of the preview window to view the email as it will
display on the different devices and to ensure that any responsive features are behaving as
expected. You can click the rotate icon to view the email in both portrait and landscape form in
the Tablet and Mobile views.
5. Click Cancel to close the preview window when you are done.
542 of 1162
11.11 Sending test emails

This function allows you to send a test email, and validate the email to ensure that there are no
problems with it before it is deployed.
To send a test email:

opens.
, then select Test Content, the Email Test Center window opens.
4. Fill out the fields in the email checker as follows:

Step 1. Select an email to test: The email that you have open will automatically be
populated in this field.
Step 2. Select a User from whom to send: You can choose not to send the email from
a particular user (the default) and no signature rules will be processed. Or, you can select
a user from the drop-down list, the email will appear to have been sent from this user.
This is useful if your email contains a signature and you would like to see how the email
will be generated with a specific user's signature.
Step 3. Select a testing Email Address: This is the email address to which the test
email will be sent. Choose from recent contacts or enter a new email in the To: section.
You can also use the Find Contactand Preview Contact icons to search for and
preview contacts respectively.
Step 4. Select Test: Select the type of test you wish to perform:
Email Checker: Checks for content compliance.
HTMLEmail: Sends the test email in HTMLformat.
Text Email Sends the test email in plain text.
When the email is sent, *TEST*will be added before and after the actual subject of the
email message.
5. Click Perform Test. The email is sent and the bottom pane of the Email Test Center window
shows the results of the test depending on the test type you selected,
543 of 1162
HTML email or Text email: If there are no errors, you will receive the message,
SUCCESS- The emails were sent to the following recipients, with a box displaying the
number of successful sends (and failed sends, if there are any). On the bottom of the
window will be a list of all recipients. Successful recipients are indicated with a green
checkmark and any unsuccessful ones are indicated in red. If there are any errors, they
will be displayed in this pane with a description of the problem.
Email Checker: The content is validated for certain criteria and a checklist is provided
showing which elements are included and what may be missing. The status and a
description is provided for different elements. The checker also evaluates the links and
fields in your emails and identifies any potential problems.
6. Click Close to close the Test Content &Deliverability window.
11.12 Testing email deliverability

You can run tests to check the deliverability of your emails to different domains, check for possible
spam concerns in the content, and preview the email in different email clients.
Note: This functionality is no longer available for new customers. If you purchased Oracle
Eloqua prior to December 1st, 2014 you will continue to have this functionality until December
2015.
To test email deliverability:

opens.
, then select Test Content & Deliverability, the Email Test Center
window opens.
4. Click on the Deliverability tab, select the name of the email you wish to test. You must choose
a test type:
General Deliverability: Shows you the deliverability performance of your email when
sent to a variety of test email accounts using several service providers in North America,
Europe, APACand Latin America.
Inbox Preview and Spam Content Check: Shows you how your email will look in
544 of 1162
popular email clients, and verifies that your email has successfully passed through spam
filters. Two reports are generated as PDFs, one for Inbox Previews and the other for the
Spam Check. You will be notified by email when the reports are available for download.
Note:The time for the report compilation can vary widely based on each
individual email's contents.
5. Enable the checkbox next to "Send Email when the results are ready"to be notified when the
results of the test are available.
6. Click Run Deliverability Test to run the test.
11.13 Batch sending emails from the email editor

The batch send option allows you to create a campaign and send an email directly from the email
editor. This can streamline campaign creation and help you quickly distribute emails when they are
ready.
To batch send an email from within the email editor:

2. Edit the email as needed, then click Save in the upper right hand corner of the canvas.
3. Click the action menu (gear icon), and select Batch Send, then select either Multi-Step
Campaign (the email opens on the campaign canvas) or Simple Email Campaign (the email
opens in the simple email campaign wizard). Configure the campaign as needed on the
corresponding interface. Learn more about multi-step campaigns and simple email campaigns.
545 of 1162
Note: If there are errors in the email, the Batch Send option will not be available. You
must resolve the issues before the email can be sent, the errors indicator
is
displayed in the upper left-hand corner of the page. Click on the indicator to open the
Validation Errors window. Double click on each error to be taken directly to the issue on
the email canvas, from here you can make any necessary changes. The Batch Send
option is enabled after all issues are resolved.
11.14 Searching for emails using the email chooser

You can locate existing emails using the email chooser. After you find the email that you need, you can
open it to make changes, create a copy of the email, delete it, or rename it from the chooser window.
To search for an email using the email chooser:

1. Navigate to Assets >Emails, then click Open an Existing Email the Email Chooser opens. By
default, the All Files location is highlighted in the left-hand pane the All breadcrumb folderis
shown directly above the results column:
2. Type the name of the email that you want to find in the search field in the upper right-hand corner
of the chooser window. As you type, matching items appear in your results list. As you continue
to enter more characters, the possible matches are narrowed down. The Search function
searches all levels in the folder hierarchy. To sort the items in a column, click on the column
name, then click the name again to reverse the sort order. Folders will always show "--" in the
status column, whereas emails will show either Draft or Active.
Note: Folders are indicated by the folder icon (

by their corresponding icon (
) whereas files (Emails) are indicated
). Folders indicated by a red icon (
)are system
546 of 1162
folders, and cannot be deleted but they can be renamed or copied. You can add a
subfolder by right-clicking on the red icon and selecting New Folder.
If you know the name of the folder in which your item is located, or if you simply wish to browse
the contents of a subfolder, double-click on the name of the folder in the right-hand pane. As you
navigate deeper into the folder structure (hierarchy), breadcrumbs are indicated above the
"Name"heading indicating your current location.
Example: In the image below, you are currently looking at the contents of the "Breaking
News" folder (a subfolder of "Buzz"):
If you wish to quickly go back to the Buzz or All folder, click the
upper-left corner to move back one level. Likewise, use the
(back)button in the
(forward) button to
follow your original navigation path, i.e. clicking on the forward button once you will
return to the Buzz folder. Regardless of which folder is shown in the breadcrumbs, your
search will still produce any matching results found throughout the entire folder
hierarchy. If there are no subfolders, the
and
buttons are greyed out.
3. After you have located your file, you can open it in the email editor, either double-click on its
name or select it and click Choose. You can also perform standard Eloqua file functions by
right-clicking on the name and selecting Copy, Rename, or Delete.
11.15 Copying emails

You can create a copy of an existing email and then customize it if necessary for the current campaign.
547 of 1162
To create a copy of an email:

opens.
2. Search for the email that you want to copy, right-click on its name, then select Copy. The copy
of the email appears on the list as Original Name: Copy.
3. Double-click on the copy, the email opens in the editor window.
4. Click the action menu (gear icon) in the upper right-hand corner, then select Settings, the email
settings window opens.
5. Configure the email settings for the copy:

Name: Provide a new name for the email. This is the name that will appear at the top of
the editing window and in the chooser to identify the email.
Email Group: Choose an email group from the drop-down list. Email groups are used to
manage emails that have a common property, such as a geographic location, type of
customer, etc., and include template-like headers and footers that are automatically
applied to any email that is added to the group. The email group settings can always be
548 of 1162
overridden at the individual email level without affecting other emails in that group. Learn
more about email groups.
Email Header: Choose an email header to use from the drop-down list. You can also
add a header by double-clicking on the email canvas while editing it later. Learn more
about email headers.
Email Footer: Choose an email footer to use from the drop-down list. You can also add a
footer by double-clicking on the email canvas while editing it later. Learn more about
email footers.
Subject: Fill in the information that will appear in the subject line of the email. This can
include field merge code to draw field values into the subject line.
From: Fill in the From Name for the sender, this is the name that is shown to the
recipient. In the From Address field, enter the email address that will be shown as the
"from" address for the email.
Note: This should be an address that the recipient knows and trusts, or at least
one that appears to be legitimate, preferably using a domain name that the
recipient will recognize and trust.
Send Plain-Text only: Enable this checkbox to send a plain-text version email.
Reply-to: Fill in the Reply-to Name, this is the display name for the person who will
receive reply emails from the recipient. This may be the same as the From Name, or
replies may go to a different department or person (for example, "Support"). In the Reply-
to Address, field, enter the email address to which replies will be sent.
Bounceback: By default, bouncebacks are sent to Eloqua so they can be tracked.
Select the address from the drop-down list.
Encoding: Set the character encoding used in the email. If you are using a double-byte
language in the email (such as Chinese), or may translate the content in future, set this
to Unicode (UTF-8).
Enable Email Tracking: As a best practice, you should select this checkbox to ensure
that your email is tracked in Eloqua. This checkbox should only be deselected if you are
sure you will never require reports about this email, and if you do not want metrics from
this email to be included in summary reports for all your emails.
Enable Responsive Vertical Resizing: The Responsive Vertical Resizing option
dynamically resizes emails built in the Email Editor based on the content populated in the
email (e.g. cloud content, dynamic content, shared content). This prevents content from
being cut off when a recipient's content is larger than the container originally configured
in the email editor and renders a more mobile-friendly version.
549 of 1162
Note: For net new assets, Responsive Vertical Resizing is enabled by default.
For existing assets, the original settings are respected.
Click Done when you have finished, the email settings window closes.
Note: The From information, the subject line, and the email group can also be modified
in the top bar of the email canvas as shown in the image below.
6. Edit the content of the email as needed. Learn more about the email editor components.
7. Click Save to save the email when you are done.
11.16 Deleting emails

When an email is no longer needed, it can be deleted from Eloqua. This reduces unnecessary clutter in
your file folders and makes it easier to find the emails that you still need.
Note:If another Eloqua object or asset is dependent on the email you wish to delete, the
Dependency Checker window will display a list of the location(s) where the email is referenced.
You must resolve those dependencies before being able to delete the email.
To delete an email:
1. Navigate to Assets > Emails, then click Open an Existing Email, the Email Chooser opens.
2. Right-click the email name in the chooser and select Delete, a confirmation window opens.
550 of 1162
3. Click Delete to confirm that you want to permanently delete the selected email from the
application. The email is deleted.
11.17 Setting global email defaults

The email configuration page shows customer administrators the default settings for the emails module
in the application.
Note: Many of the settings on this page are read-only, and can only be set by Eloqua personnel
or partners during implementation. If an option is grayed out or cannot be selected, it is readonly. Contact your Customer Success Manager for more information.
To set global email defaults:

1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Email Defaults (in the Assets section), the email configuration
page opens.
2. Edit the settings as required, the settings available on this page are:
551 of 1162
Send to Specified Domains Only: Read-only. This is selected if there are no domains
being used that are not managed by Eloqua.
Live Send: Read-only.
Enable Tracing: Read-only.
Brand Email Domains: Read-only. Depending on the B&D package you purchased, you
may have one or more branded email subdomains. Contact your Customer Success
Manager for more information.
External Tracking: Depending on implementation settings, you may enable this option if
you have an external web analytics system and want to send email tracking information
to that system, you can select and configure how the information is passed to your
external systems. Contact your Customer Success Manager for more information.
Use Approvals Workflow: Read -only.
Add List-Unsubscribe header to outbound campaign emails (default): If this
checkbox is enabled, a list-unsubscribe header will be added to all outbound campaign
emails.
Default Email Encoding Language: Shows the default encoding used for emails.
Example: If this is set to Unicode (UTF-8), then your users can use double-byte
languages (such as Standard Chinese) in emails.
Default Sender Display Name: Shows the default sender display name used in emails
in which the settings is not customized.You can change this default by entering a new
name in the field.
Default From Address: Shows the default From email address used in emails in which
the settings is not customized. You can change this default by entering a new address in
the field.
Default Reply-To Address: Shows the default Reply-To email address used in emails
in which the settings is not customized. You can change this default by entering a new
address in the field.
Bounceback Configuration: Read-only. Shows theemail address to which emails that
cannot be delivered are sent, as well as the Forward address. If there are multiple
Bounceback and Forwarding addresses, the default addresses are indicated with a green
checkmark in the Default column.
Max. Number of Recipients per Email Send: Read-only. If you are using Eloqua for
Microsoft Outlook, this value shows you the maximum number of emails per email
send. Depending on how your system was configured, this number can be any number
up to 250.
552 of 1162
Monthly Tests Available to Client (Auto-Resets Monthly): Read-only. Shows you the
number of Return Path tests currently available in the application. This number is
reset monthly to the number associated with your account. Contact your Customer
Success Manager if you require more information or additional tests.
3. Click Update Email Settings in the bottom right-hand corner, any changes you made are
saved.
11.18 Code requirements for HTML email uploads

Important: If you have asked a third-party to create the code for your email, it is important that
you provide them with this information in order to avoid integration problems in Eloqua.
In order for your HTMLto render properly in Eloqua and across all browsers, it is recommended to use
the following guidelines:
Recommended- Specify a DocType to ensure the best possible rendering of emails across
browsers.
Example:
<!DOCTYPEhtml PUBLIC "//W3C//DTDXHTML1.0Transitional//EN"

"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1transitional.dtd">
Code must validate properly according to W3CMarkup Validation Service at

http://validator.w3.org/.
Do not target the <BODY> tag with CSS.
Ensure compatibility with the following basic Eloqua CSS resetincluded in the application for
proper renderingacross different browsers:
html{color:#000;background:#FFF;}
body,div,dl,dt,dd,ul,ol,li,h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6,pre,code,
form,fieldset,legend,input,button,textarea,p,blockquote,th
td{margin:0;padding:0;}table{bordercollapse:collapse;borderspacing:0;}fieldset,img{border:0;}
553 of 1162
address,
caption,cite,code,dfn,em,strong,th,varoptgroup{fontstyle:inherit;font-weight:inherit;}del,ins{textdecoration:none;}caption,th{text-align:left;}
input,button,textarea,select,optgroup,option{fontfamily:inherit;font-size:inherit;font-style:inherit;fontweight:inherit;}input,button,textarea,select{*fontsize:100%;}
Do not use these System class names:
.sc-view
.sc-view-overflow
.sc-container-view
.overlays-active
.inline-styled-view
.inline-styled-view{}
.hidden-border
.body
.sc-view.static-layout
.main
.elq-form
.elq-form-ce
Use static or absolute positioning, and avoid relative or fixed-positioned elements.
Use of tables is permitted.
Do notuse relative paths to reference images, stylesheets, etc.
Do not use<HTML>, <HEAD>, <BODY>opening or closing tags within a text or shared
content section.
Ensure all elements have correct opening and closing tags.
Recommended- For display purposes, avoid the use of the '&' (ampersand)in URLs that are
included in your HTMLcode.
For security purposes, there is an approved list ("whitelist")of HTMLtags that can be included
when uploading an email message to Eloqua. If your tag is not on this whitelist, an error
554 of 1162
message will be presented, preventing you from saving your email (or any changes you have
made). It will be necessary to remove the tag(s)that has/have been flagged as prohibited. The
message will inform you of the exact tag that is causing the problem.
Note:If you re-save any transitioned content in the email editor, you must reset the
following: Page dimensions, body background color/images, document background
color/images.
After you have verified that all requirements have been met, you can proceed to upload your
HTMLcode for your Eloqua emails. See Creating emails by uploading HTML and related assets.
11.19 Using the email visual click-through report

The Visual Click-through Report allows you to quickly see the click-through activity on tracked links in
your emails, without having to run a report in Eloqua Insight.
Using this feature, each tracked link in your email shows data indicating how many click-throughs have
been performed by prospects or contacts who opened the email. Using this feature, you can tailor your
future emails based on the interest your contacts have shown through their click-through activity.
Link tracking must be enabled for click-through data to appear in the Visual Click-through Report. For
more information on link tracking, read about adding hyperlinks to emails.
Important: The Visual Click-through Report tracks links created or modified after March 1,
2015. Customers who request this functionality while it is in controlled availability can manually
update their old assets by opening and re-saving those components.
To use the email visual click-through report:

1. Navigate to Assets > Emails, then click Open an Existing Email. The Email Chooser opens.
2. Select the email for which you wish to view the report, then click Choose to open the email.
3. Click the action menu (gear icon) in the top-right corner of the Eloqua window and select Click-
555 of 1162
through Report at the bottom of the list. The email opens in a new browser tab called Eloqua
Preview, displaying the Click-through Visualizer. The Click-through Visualizer provides the
following information:
The left-hand column, Link Click-throughs, shows the URLs to all tracked links in your
email. The names of file storage, system actions, and landing pages are displayed
allowing you to quickly view and identify the links contacts have clicked.
Links are also shown in the email representation on the right-hand side with small bubble
icons above each link. The percentage of clicks on a specific link is available in both
views.
Note: A green icon is displayed above a link which has been clicked at least
once. A red icon is displayed above a link which has not been clicked.
To see click-through activity for a specific link in your email, select the link from either
the Link Click-throughs left-hand column, or click the bubble icon above the link on the
right. Once you have selected a specific link, the percentage of clicks, number of clicks,
556 of 1162
image (if applicable), and URL are displayed.
Any links that have more than one instance in your email are treated as distinct entities.
Data concerning the number and percentage of clicks is shown separately for each
instance of the link.
Example: If www.eloqua.com appears both in the header and footer of the email,
557 of 1162
separate click-through statistics will be displayed for each instance.
4. Close the browser tab when you are finished viewing the report.
558 of 1162
12 Event Management
Note: You need to have the Event Module to carry out Event processes. Talk to your Customer
Success Manager for more information.
12.0.1 Using Events

Eloqua Event Management was designed to simplify the process to execute a marketing Event which
requires registration.
The goals of implementing an Event are to:
Reduce setup time by using a repeatable program to send multiple invitations, reminders, and
follow-up Emails.
Drive more attendees with a series of pre-determined steps based on Eloqua best practices and
lessons learned.
Generate leads using personalized follow-up from the appropriate sales representative.
Use behavior of recipients and attendees to qualify registrants and prioritize follow-up.
Some of the best practices for setting up Events are as follows:
The original invitation should be sent three weeks in advance of the Event.
Reminders should be sent to registrants approximately one week before the Event and again
one day prior to the Event.
Second chance Emails (1-2 weeks before the Event) and last chance Emails (one day before
the Event or on the day of) should have slightly different content and should be sent only to
those who have not registered.
Follow-up Emails (five days after the Event) should be segmented based on which invitees
attended and which did not.
12.0.2 Examples of Events

The Event Management functionality brings together the different functionality of the Eloqua
application together so that the user can create an Event, but still have access to the advanced
features from other Eloqua modules. Here are some examples of Events that you can set up with the
Eloqua application.
559 of 1162
Simple Event
ScenarioTraining Classes with 3 sessions in 3 locations and a waiting list of 20 per session.
Eloqua Modules requiredEloqua Standard or Enterprise for Email and Email Tools, Forms and
Complex Event
ScenarioAutomated Invitations (and reminders to sign up) to Multiple Events with Multiple
Sessions and registration updates on a Web site.
Eloqua Modules requiredEloqua Standard or Enterprise for Email and Email Tools, Forms and
Custom Object Records, Program Builder and Data Lookups.
12.0.3 Examples of Associated Emails

Email Invitation Example
For an Event, the registration Form is embedded on a Landing Page.
The benefit of using this Form in an Email is increased Form submissions.
Email Confirmation Example

Use this type of Email to provide confirmation of registration along with additional information
and instructions, or to send a real-time notification of the Contact registration to the appropriate
salesperson so that they can decide whether to follow up by phone or email.
The benefits of using this Email is that it lets registrants know when they are confirmed and sets
them up to receive timely reminders.
Follow-Up Email Example

There are two types of follow-up Emails:
1. For those who attend the Event.
2. For those who missed the Event.
The benefits of using a Follow-Up Email are that it allows you to gather feedback and uncover
additional opportunities, and that the follow-up can be transitioned back to the appropriate salesperson.
560 of 1162
12.0.4 The Role of Forms

Eloqua's Form Tracking and Processing provides a rich link between Web traffic and sales interest. By
making it easy for either sales or marketing professionals to quickly create, deploy, and process Forms
on the company Web site-or sent in Emails, sales and marketing organizations are now able to improve
the response to campaigns, promotions, and offers.
Powerful Forms can be created quickly and easily using Eloqua's Form creation toolkit without any
knowledge of HTML. Eloqua provides a simple graphical interface to create and implement fullyfeatured Forms Layout, whether for a newsletter registration, an information request, or a sign-up for a
webinar. The finished Form can either be hosted on your Web site or Eloqua Microsite or sent directly
to prospects in an HTML Email or Email Template.
Once a Form has been created, the Eloqua application provides the ability to quickly and easily add
"processing" functionality, the ability to do things with the incoming data. Using the simple graphical
interface, a broad range of options can be configured, including:
Campaign/Newsletter subscriptions
Data Tracking and Analysis
Graphical Email Auto Responders
Email Notifications to Sales/Marketing
CRM Logging
Trigger a Timed Follow-up
Custom Actions and more...
12.1 Examples of Event Marketing

Examples of Events
In this section, some simple scenarios for Events, along with the resources required in the Eloqua
application, are required.
Simple Event
ScenarioTraining Classes with 3 sessions in 3 locations and a waiting list of 20 per session.
Eloqua ModulesEloqua Standard or Enterprise for Email and Email Tools, Forms and Event
Management (EM) Module.
561 of 1162
Complex Event
ScenarioAutomated Invitations (and reminders to sign up) to Multiple Events with Multiple
Sessions and registration updates on a Web site.
Eloqua Modules Eloqua Standard or Enterprise for Email and Email Tools, Forms and Event
Management Module, Program Builder and Data Lookups.
Examples of Emails
In this section, some examples of the types of Emails associated with Events are provided.
562 of 1162
Example of an Email Invitation with a Form
563 of 1162
564 of 1162
For a webinar or Event, the registration Form is embedded on a Landing Page.The benefit of using this
Form in an Email is increased Form submissions.
Example of Registration Management Using a Form

In the Eloqua application, you can also manage multi-course registration in a single Form. This
functionality allows for automated notification to the course administrator when the course is full,
prevents registration once the course maximum registration is reached, and supports automated
confirmation emails. An example of an all-in-one registration Form for multiple courses is shown
below.
565 of 1162
12.2 Event Management FAQs
Waitlist Numbers for Multiple Sessions

Q. In a single Event with three sessions, can each one have different waitlist number?
A. No, the current functionality only allows for the same waitlist number for each session.
Reusing Custom Fields

Q. For Custom Fields, can I reuse these fields for different Events?
A. Yes, you can reuse these fields in different Events as long as they have the same field names. They
are populated based on the fields for the Event.
Manually Sending Email with Custom Object Record Email Fields

Q. Can I manually send an Email with Custom Object Record Email fields?
A. Yes, but the Custom Object Record Email fields will only populate with the default values. For the
Custom Object Record fields to populate from Event fields, the Email must be sent via Event Actions
or Program Builder so that it knows with which Event it is associated.
Limitations to Using Custom Object Records

Q. Are there limitations to Custom Object Records?
A. At this time, Custom Object Record data cannot be used:
with Hypersite Field Merges;
with data look-up on the field data, only on a count of the set;
to key off Dynamic Content in Emails; or;
CRM information can be auto-synched into Custom Object Records (for example, to update the
Purchase History). Custom Object Record information can also be written into the CRM, but the
integration required for this is complex. Talk to your Customer Success Manager for more information.
Limit on the Number of Characters in Custom Object Record and Form Fields
Q. What happens if a user submits more than 4,000 characters?
A. An extended data Form Field can capture 2,000 characters, but a Custom Object Record field
captures 4,000 characters. If the user submits 5,000 characters, then the Form data report will capture
566 of 1162
the first 2,000 characters. The Custom Object Record will capture the first 4,000 characters. The last
1,000 characters will not be captured or retrievable.
Receiving Confirmation Email

Q. During testing I added a Custom Object Record, enabled the service and received the confirmation
email. What happens if I disable and then re-enable the service? Do I receive the notice again?
A. No, each service will only run on the Custom Object Record members once. It will not repeat itself.
If the Custom Object Record was deleted and entered again, then it will receive another confirmation
email.
Confirmation for Latest Session

Q. If someone submits the Form for session A, then resubmits the Form the next day for session B, do
they receive a confirmation email for session B.
A. Yes, they will receive a confirmation for session B. However, this will not happen if this occurs
within the same 15 minute interval that the Custom Object Record service runs on.
Other
Question: Can I re-use Event Fields for different Events?
Answer: Yes, you can re-use these Email Fields in different Events as long as they are the same field
names. Data is populated based on the fields for the Event.
Question: Can I manually send an Email with Custom Object Record Email Fields?
Answer: Yes, however, the Custom Object Record Email Fields only populate with the default values.
For the Custom Object Record Field to be populated, it must be sent via Event Actions or Program
Builder so that it knows which Event it is associated with.
12.3 Creating an Add to Calendar Feature for Events

You can add a calendar feature for an Event so that registrants can click directly on an image in the
email to put the Event in their Microsoft Outlook calendar. Note: This method may work for other
email applications. Contact your Solutions Manager for more information.
Create and Post the Calendar Event

Before registrant can add the Event, you have to create the calendar file and upload it to a Web server.
To create a calendar event in Outlook:
567 of 1162
In Outlook in the Calendar section, create or open the appointment you want to save. Add in the Event
details (date, time, call-in number, link, etc.)
On the File menu (in Outlook 2003 and earlier) or from the function button in the upper left-hand corner
(in Outlook 2007), click Save As.
In the Save As dialog box, from the Save as type picklist, select iCalendar Format (*.ics).
To make the Calendar event available:

Upload the .ics file to your Web server. As an example, the URL might be similar to the following:
http://www.eloqua.com/meeting.ics
Distribute the Calendar Event

You can add the link using the URLto your server added to a Reminder Email and/or a Confirmation
Page. When the user clicks on the link, the calendar item is opened, and they can save it to their
calendar in Outlook.
Optionally, you can create a "calendar image" for potential registrants to click on to make it clear how
they can add the Event to their Outlook calendar.
568 of 1162
12.4 Creating a New Event

You can create a new Event either from a Form or from within the Events section of the application.
This topic outlines the latter method of creating a new Event.
To create a new Event from the Events section of the application:

From Setup, select Events.
From the Events menu, select New Event Registration (or click New Event Registration from the
right-hand pane).
On the Create a New Event page, fill in the Name and (if required) a Description of the Event.
Although the Description is optional, it is best practice to include one for future reference.
Select a folder in which to place the new Event and click Save.
The Event is created and the Event page opens.

Configure the Event as required. For more information, see Editing an Event.
569 of 1162
12.5 Creating a New Event from a Form

Creating an Event from a Form involves two major steps:
Creating the Form or selecting an existing Form.
Creating the Event (while linking it to the Form) and configuring the Event.
Creating or Selecting a Form

To build an Event from a Form, you must first have a relevant registration Form that you can use.
Forms Processing Steps required are configured in the Event Management area and are triggered
based on the details of your Event. The Confirmation Page Processing Step is added automatically
when you create a Form. Common Forms Processing steps include:
Save to Contact TableThis is required for Events. Saves all Form submission data to the
Contact table and automatically deduplicates by email address.
Create/Update Event RegistrationCreates a new or updates an exiting Event Custom Object
Record, based on a unique field. A new registration changes the status of the Custom Object
Record to "Registered."
Cancel RegistrationUpdates an existing Event Custom Object Record based on a unique field
with a change in status to "Cancelled."
Learn about creating new forms.
Creating an Event from a Form with Custom Object Records

You can create an Event with a Form directly from the Create/Update Event Registration Processing
Step.
To create an Event directly from the Form:

From Eloqua Today (the home page), select Automate > Events & Surveys.
Click the Forms tab.
Click on a Form in the Tree View
From the Processing Steps menu on the Task bar, select List Processing Steps.
Click New Processing Step on the bottom toolbar.
In the Add Processing Step dialog box, under Add Single Processing Step, select A single
processing step. From the picklist, choose Create/Update Event Registration. Click Add.
570 of 1162
In the Edit Processing Step... dialog box, under Required Parameters, next to the Value picklist,
click New to open the Create a New Event dialog box where you can create your Event to store
related information in Custom Object Records.
Enter the Name and (if required) Description information. Select the folder in the Tree View in which
you want to place the Event. When you click Save, the Event dialog box opens. Configuration is done
when you edit the Event in the following steps shown below in this article.
571 of 1162
Configuring an Event
You can now enter the Custom Object Record Events Module and can revise the Event Name or
descriptions.
Note: If the field background on a page or in a dialog box is blue after you have entered a value, then
that field value has not yet been saved. Click Save to save these field values.
Defining Registrant Data to Collect

You can now fill in details about your event, starting with Registrant Info.
To configure Registrant Info:

Navigate to Setup > Events and click the Events tab.
Make sure that the Events tab is selected at the top of the Tree View.
Select Event Details from the menu next to the selected Event. The Event summary page opens in
the Task area.
Click Edit next to Registrant Info. The Registrant Info dialog box opens.
572 of 1162
Note: The Unique Code shown is usually the Email Address so there is no duplication of data in case
the invitee submits the Form twiceif they do, the Custom Object Record is updated with the
new/added submitted information.
Make sure that there is a Form linked to the Event to allow registration. For information about linking
Forms, see Linking Forms.
573 of 1162
Adding a New Registrant Info Field

You can create additional custom fields that you can manually update with data via data entry or
upload. As an example, you could add an Attended? field that will indicate whether the Registrant
attended the Event. This will be updated after the Event, then used as a field that will be used for Event
Actions and send either a "Thank for Attending" Email or a "Sorry You Could Not Attend" Email.
To create a custom field:

the Task area.
Select Options > Create Custom Field.
In the Custom Object Record Field dialog box, enter a Field Name, select a Data Type and Field
Type... (Text) for editing, and select the existing field you want the new field to Display After. You can
also enter a default value; for example, if most invitees are not likely to attend, you can set the default
value to No so that only those who submit a registration Form are toggled to Yes.
Note: For the Field Type..., besides Textbox, you can also select TextArea (for the user to enter a
text block; for example, for a Comment), Single Select (for the user to choose a single value from a
picklist), or Checkbox (for the user to provide a yes/no select for a specific item). For Single Select,
574 of 1162
you will have to set up a list of Value Choices to populate the picklist. For more information about
creating Value Choices, see Setting Up Value Choices.
Linking Forms
An Event can be linked to multiple Forms, if required. They are linked by the Form Processing Steps
Create/Update Registrations or Cancel Registrations.
To link to a new Form:

the Task area.
Select Options > Link New Form to link the Event to one or more Forms in the Link New Form dialog
box.
Select the Form that the participant will be submitting. By default, the option to Automatically Link
Form Fields... is enabled. AutoLink will automatically link and create the same fields in your Event as
they exist in the selected Form. You may not want all the Forms fields, but you can edit this information
later.
You can elect to use this Form to Create/Update Registrations and/or Cancel Registrations. At
least one should be selected so that the action on Form submission is specified.
575 of 1162
Click Save and Close to save the link. If the Form you have linked to had additional fields (besides
what was shown in Fields before), they are now added in the Registrant Info dialog box.
Click Edit Link beside the Form to review the fields and where the information is coming from. If there
is a missing required field in either the Form or the Event, you can click Create Field to add that linked
field.
Best practices: Although the option is provided here to create or edit the front-end Form field, best
practices are to make changes/updates from the Forms area. You will be able to view all the Forms
fields and details.
Editing Special Fields

There are two special fields, a Unique Code and an Email Address field.
The Email Address field identifies which field contains the email address field. You can change
this field if it was mapped over incorrectly.
The Unique Code (Identifier) prevents duplication of Registrants based on a field. By default the
Email Address field is selected, and most of the time, this does not change. However, it could
be changed; for example, if there was a contest where there can be multiple entries per email
address.
576 of 1162
To specify the Unique Code and Email Address Fields:

the Task area.
Select Options > Edit Special Fields.
In the Edit Special Fields dialog box, from the Email Address picklist, select the field you want to use
as the Email Address. Note: Email Address is selected by default, and will not be changed except in
rare cases (for example, to allow multiple entries from the same email address during a contest).
Select one of the options for the Unique Code. You could set this to the Email Address Field (to
prevent duplicate data), select another field (from the Use drop-down list), or select Use an Eloqua
Identifier to generate a unique 16-digit ID code (for example, DELQA00000000407).
Note: Once Registrants have been added to the Event, you cannot select a different Unique Code
field. You would have to re-create your Event.
577 of 1162
Defining Event Details

The Event Details section is used to define Header fields which hold Event-specific information such
as date, location, trainer/presenter, whether meals are provided, and so forth. These fields apply to the
entire Event (for example, Date). You can add standard Header Fields such as Address or
Speaker/Trainer or create your own. These fields can also be used to create Email Custom fields that
can be inserted into Emails.
If the Event has multiple sessions, details can be set per session and automatically linked to the
Registrants' information.
Uses for Event Headers:
To populate EmailsFor example, if it's Training Session 1, then select Speaker X and
Boardroom Y.
For automated Event actionsFor example, the Registrant is in Session 2 on Day Y, so send a
Reminder Email five days before Day Y.
To set up the Event Details for a single Event Session:

the Task area.
From the Event summary page, next to the Event Details heading, click Edit. The Event Details
dialog box opens.
Select One Session.
Select a value for the default Date field.
578 of 1162
Add additional standard Event Headers by selecting Header Fields > Add Standard Event Header
(s).
579 of 1162
In the Add Standard Event Header dialog box, select the Headers you want to add in the Available
Fields list, then click the right-hand arrow (>) to move them to the Selected Fields list. Click Add
Standard Event Headers to add them to the Event Details.
You can add a Custom Header, for example, to track whether a Registrant actually Attended? the
Event (this value can be set to No as the default, then changed to Yes for Registrants who attended).
Add additional Custom Headers as required by selecting Header Fields > Create Custom Header.
In the New Event Header dialog box, give the Header a Display Name, a Data Type (Text,
Number, Large Text (up to 4000 characters) or Date), and Display After to select where you want it
to appear in the Event Details. Then click Save and Close. Repeat for additional Headers.
580 of 1162
All of the added Header fields are shown in the Event Details. Enter or select values for the fields as
required, move them into the correct order using the Up and Down arrows, then click Save and Close.
To set up the Event Details for multiple Event Sessions:
581 of 1162

Make sure that the Events tab is selected at the top of the Tree View
the Task area.
dialog box opens.
Select Multiple Sessions. Also select the ...organized by value from the picklist. For example, you
may be organizing your Event sessions based on the City in which each occurs.
Under Fields, you can select the method for adding one or more sessions:
3. Click Add Sessions from a listThe Add Session from List dialog box opens. Select List from
the drop-down list to select a list of Value Choices for different sessions. Click Save and
Close.
or
582 of 1162
Click Create a SessionThe Create Session dialog box opens. Enter the Session Name,
then click Save and Close.
The session(s) appear in the Event Details dialog box.

To add Standard Headers to the Event (such as the Event Date, Time, Speaker/Trainer, etc.), select
Header Fields > Add Standard Event Header(s). In the dialog box, select items you want to add in
the Available Fields list, then click the right arrow (>) to move them to the Selected Fields list. Click
Add Standard Event Headers, then Close, to add the selected Headers.
583 of 1162
To add additional, custom Headers, on the Header Fields menu, click Create Custom Header. In
the New Event Header dialog box, type in the Display Name, select a Data Type, choose the
Display After value to control where you want the custom Header displayed, and click Saveand
Close.
Repeat for any additional fields you require (for example, Login information or other information required
by users to access a webinar Event). The Header fields are added in the Event Details dialog box one
field at a time.
When you have made your other settings, go back and set the Date for each session. In addition, fill in
or select the values required for all the other fields.
584 of 1162
When you are done, click Save and Close in the Event Details dialog box.
Configuring Automated Action Events

Once you have set up the Event details, you can take care of automated Event Actions such as
sending reminders at specified intervals before the Event. When someone submits a Form, the
Processing Steps associated with these Event Actions are triggered.
Actions are similar to Forms Processing Steps, but triggered by Custom Object Records and other
criteria that you specify. You can enable Standard or Advanced Actions that will automatically take
place for your event like:
585 of 1162
Email to be sent upon registration

Define a waiting list and Email to be sent
Reminder Email to registrant
Email Notification to trainer when someone registers or when Event is full
Post-Event Thank You Email
Event Actions run on a Service which runs every 15 minutes and monitors the update/creation of the
Custom Object Records within the Event. You can define a number of scenarios that will automatically
trigger one or more Actions. You can also add specific Custom Object Record Processing Steps to
Actions to carry out additional processing of incoming data.
Standard Event Actions

There are five Standard Event Actions which you can customize actions for (listed below). These are
found under the Standard tab in the Event Actions dialog box (on the Event summary page, click Edit
next to the Event Actions heading).
586 of 1162
New Registration
1. When enabled, this is the Action executed when the Custom Object Record acquires
"Registered" status.
2. You should use the "Send Email" feature with the "condition" set to Send Confirmation Email,
instead of sending the Email via the Forms function (as the Forms function can only send
confirmation that Form was submitted, not an Email based on a the Custom Object Record
condition).
3. Note:If you previously added Registrants to the Event, then enable this service, you will see a
message to indicate that the service will be run against existing Registrants as well as new
Registrants. The number of Registrants affected is also shown.
Waiting List
2. When enabled, it will check for new Custom Object Records on Waiting List or process the
waiting list if a spot opens up.
587 of 1162
3. For example, there is a 10-person maximum in a training seminar. The 11th person is added to a
waiting list until a free space opens up.
4. To give another example, there is a 10-person maximum in a training seminar with 5 people on
the waiting list. Someone calls to cancel and their Custom Object Record is deleted. The next
person on waiting list is added. If someone is manually changed to "Waitlist" status, they will
move to the end of the waiting list.
5. The system can tell you that a Registrant is on a waiting list, but not which number they are on
the waiting list. You cannot change the waiting list order, but you can override the waiting list by
changing the Custom Object Record status.
1-Week Reminder
3. When enabled, it will run 1 week before the Event (or Session) takes place. However, you can
also customize this reminder to be sent a specified number of days before the Event or on a
specified date.
4. For example, you can specify a Email to be sent to Registrants for Session X when it is 1 week
before the Event date. You can specify a different Email to waiting lists for Session X to try to
select another Session.
1-Day Reminder
4. When enabled, it will run 1 day before the Event (or Session) takes place. However, you can
specified date.
5. For example: If a participant is registered and it is one day before the Event with no additional
conditions, then execute the two Processing Steps:
6. Send an Email to the Trainer that the Event is 1 day away.
7. Send an Email Batch to Registrants with 1 day reminder.
Day Post Event
5. When enabled, it will run 5 days after the Event (or Session) takes place. However, you can
also customize this reminder to be sent a specified number of days after the Event or on a
specified date.
6. For example: If participant is registered, it is exactly 5 days after the Event, and there are no
other conditions, then execute the two conditional Processing Steps:
7. Send an Email to Registrants who attended ("Thank You for Attending").
8. Send a different Email to non-attendees ("Sorry You Could Not Attend").
The 1 week reminder, 1 day reminder and 5 day Post-Event can be modified. They are just template
versions of Best Practices.
Note: If the date of event is November 5, then "1 day before" the Event is November 4 and "5 days"
after the event is November 11, not November 10.
588 of 1162
Advanced Event Actions

There are three default Advanced Event Actions, but you can add and customize more using the Add
New Reminder or Post Event button. The Advanced Actions are found under the Advanced tab in
the Event Actions dialog box (on the Event summary page, click Edit next to the Event Actions
heading). The Advanced Actions are listed below.
Modified Registration
1. When enabled, it will check on 15 minute intervals for any modifications to Custom Object
Record field values.
Incomplete Registration
2. Note: Most of the time, this will be caught by web Form validation.
3. When enabled, it will check for any new registrations that are incomplete. A registration set as
"Incomplete" is not part of registration or waiting lists as it does not meet the criteria. The status
is "On Hold."
4. Mandatory fields may not have caught this (prior to Form validation) or if someone was manually
added via a Custom Object Record (for example, the information is filled in manually by the Call
Center, not forwarded through a Form submission).
Event Cancellation
3. When enabled, it will check for any registration cancellations (new Custom Object Records that
are cancelled).
4. This is defined by the status of "Cancelled".
5. This status can be manually changed or it can be from the Forms Processing Step "Cancel
Registration."
Reminder / Post Event
4. You can add and customize additional scenarios. You can set the number of days before or after
the Event that this Scenario takes place.
589 of 1162
5. Tip: Use this for any test services you might create.
6. Click the button Add New Reminder or Post Event to add this scenario, then click Edit Action
Details on the menu next to it to configure the scenario.
Additional Actions Used with Event Actions

For each Standard or Advanced Action, you can add more Processing Steps. As with Forms
Processing Steps, the "order" is hard-coded and cannot be revised.
Processing Steps execution is based on Always, Never, Condition or Data Lookup criteria.
It is better to use Processing Steps in the Custom Object Record instead of in Form submission
so that the Custom Object Record condition can be used to trigger actions.
You can add a Processing Step to an Action by selecting Add Processing Step on the menu
next to the Action.
The Processing Step available are as follows:
Add to Contact GroupAdds the Form submitter to a specified Contact Group (an email
address is required).
Add to Step in Program BuilderAdds individual to a selected Step in an Eloqua automated
marketing Program.
Apply Lead Stage RuleApplies a Lead Stage Rule, used with Eloqua Campaigns, to the
Contact based on submitted Form data to derive a Lead Stage score.
Associate to Marketing CampaignAssociates the submitted data with a particular marketing
Campaign.
Change Contact's Email AddressUpdates the Eloqua Contact records with a new email
address and maintains past history from old email address.
Create Hypersite - No RedirectCreates a Hypersite based on First and Last name, but does
not redirect the Form submitter to the Hypersite.
Email NotificationSends HTML/Plain Text Email with Form data to an email address.
Generate Non-Eloqua Asset ActivityGenerate activity for the Form submitter for a NonEloqua Marketing Asset in Campaigns (for example, for a Tradeshow or Webinar).
Remove from Contact GroupRemoves individual from a Contact Group in Eloqua.
Run Integration RulesSets Rules by which submitted Form data will be handled by an
integrated CRM system.
Save Prospect / Add to GroupSaves Form submitter as an Eloqua Prospect (does not
require an email address) and adds them to a Prospect Group.
Save to Contact TableSaves all Form submission data to a new or existing Contact record
and automatically deduplicates by email address.
590 of 1162
Send Batch EmailSends a specific email to a defined list of Custom Object Records. Note:
This cannot have conditional parameters.
Send EmailSends a pre-loaded HTML or plain text email to the Form submission lead.
Send Event Phone ReminderSend a specific Call Script to a list of Event Registrants.
Subscribe at Site LevelSubscribes the Form submitter to a specified site.
Subscribe to / Unsubscribe from an Email GroupSubscribes the Form submitter to or
unsubscribes them from a specific Email Group based on a selected field. For example, you
could carry out a Data Lookup to ensure that the submitter is from a Company in a specified list
of Companies.
Subscribe to CampaignSubscribes the Form submitter to a specified Email Group.
Unsubscribe at Site LevelUnsubscribes the Form submitterfrom the entire client database.
Unsubscribe from CampaignUnsubscribes the Form submitter from a specific Email Group.
Update Contact/Prospect/Company DataUpdates information into Eloqua Contacts,
Prospects or Companies based on the submitted Form data.
Note: Email Notification, Send Batch Email, and Send Email are the most-used Processing Steps.
Adding Automated Event Actions

The following section shows how to add Event Actions to carry out particular functions related to an
Event. The steps shown are based on setting up Actions for a webinar Event.
To add automated Event Actions (webinar example):
the Task area.
On the Event summary page, click Edit next to the Event Actions heading. The Event Actions dialog
box opens.
591 of 1162
If required, fill in the Waiting List information. You may want to limit the number of participants due to
technical or management considerations.
Does this event have limited seating?Select Yes if you want to restrict Event attendance.
...maximum number of participants per sessionFill in the limit on participants per Session.
Note that this number is applied to all Sessions for this Event, but can be modified in individual
Sessions.
Event is full Email AddressEnter the address for a notification to be sent when the Event is
full. This would usually be the email address of the Event administrator, speaker, or trainer.
Event is full Subject LineEnter the Subject Line for the notification email.
You can select to ...disable services by selecting a date and time. This disables all the Event Actions
associated with this Event at the selected date and time. By default, this option is not selected.
Use the tabs to access additional Standard and Advanced Event Actions. You can Enable an Action
(to make it run automatically), Add Processing Steps (to add more processing) or Edit Action Details
592 of 1162
(in some cases) using the menu. Note: The Standard Actions are those normally associated with an
Event, including continuous registration, setup for the waiting list, reminders, and a Post-Event FollowUp Email. Advanced Actions include things like dealing with modified or incomplete registrations or
cancellation of the Event. You can also add new reminders from the Advanced tab.
The following are specific examples of setting up Standard Event Actions:
3. If you are using New Registration (to process registrations for the Event), make sure you add
the Processing Step named Email Notification to send an email notifying the applicant of
successful registration. Select Add Processing Steps on the menu next to New Registration,
then select A single processing step and Email Notification from the Step picklist. Finally,
click Add to add the Processing Step.
You can select parameters in the Edit Processing Step dialog box that opens. At a minimum, ensure
that for Recipient Email Address, the Custom Object Record Field is selected as a Source Type
and is mapped to the Email Address or a similar field under Value. The Content Type and Language
are set by default, but you can change them. The Recipient Email Address Data Lookup can be
used to ensure that the Email Address is included in a list (for example, of acceptable domains).
593 of 1162
Click Save Processing Step. The Edit Processing Step dialog box closes and the Step is added in
the Actions table of the Event Actions dialog box.
From New Registration, Add Processing Step named Send Email to make sure that the
applicant's information is captured in a Custom Object Record. When the Edit Processing
Step "Send Email" dialog box opens, give it a Description of Registration Email and make
sure that the Source Type for Send Email To is a Constant mapped to the Value of Contact
Mapped to Custom Object Record. Select an Email (Brochure) and whether to Allow
Resending (set to Yes by default). Click Save Processing Step to save it to New
Registration.
594 of 1162
From 1 Day Reminder Email, you can Add Processing Step such as Send Batch Email to
send a Reminder Email one day before the Event. Call it Send 1 Day Reminder, set the Send
Email To field to Custom Object Record Field and map to the Email Address. Select the
Email (Brochure) to send and whether to Allow Resending to the same Contacts (Yes by
default). Choose the Time period during which you want to send the Batch. Click Save and
Close.
Once you have added this, click 1 Day Reminder and make sure that the date mapped in the 1 Day
Reminder Action Event is the Date on which the Event occurs. Also ensure that you are sending the
Reminder Email to Registered Registrants only. When you are finished reviewing the settings, click
Save and Close.
595 of 1162
To send a Thank-You Email after the Event, click 5 Day Post Event. In the Event Action
dialog box, click Add Processing Steps, select Send Batch Email and click Add to add to this
Event Action. Click Save to save the Processing Step, then click 5 Day Post Event to open
the Event Action dialog box again. Set Action Conditions so that only registrants who meet
particular criteria receive a specific Email. For example, you may send Thank-You Emails only
to those who registered for and attended the Event.
For example, the Attended? field, used to track people who attended the Event, is set manually by the
Event administrator for each attendee as the basis for the Send Batch Email Processing Step (see the
diagram below for settings). Finally, click Save and Close.
596 of 1162
When you are done with Event Actions modifications, Enable services from the menus as required (if
they are not already enabled, or in color as opposed to greyed out) and they will run automatically.
When you Enable a Service, it will be applied to all existing Custom Object Records in the Event, as
well as all new Cards as long as the Service is Enabled. The final list of Event Actions should look like
this.
597 of 1162
Note: When you Enable an Event Action, a "lightning bolt" is added to the icon for the Event in the Tree
View.
Testing Event Registration

When everything else is done, you can test registration for your Event.
To test registration:
the Task area
598 of 1162
On the Event summary page, click Event Actions to expand that section of the page.
Make sure that the New Registration Event Action is in Enable mode. If not, click Enable.
On the Event Options menu, select New Registrant.
Submit one Registration via the New Registrant dialog box. Fill in the Participant Info using your own
email address and other information, then click Saveand Close. Note: Make sure you use a Unique
Code (usually the email address) that has not been used before in the system to ensure successful
completion of this step. For example, you may want to create a new email address that you have
access to.
599 of 1162
Wait a maximum of 15 minutes (for the next processing cycle to be executed on the Custom Object
Record) and you will receive an Eloqua Notification System email showing the New Registration.
600 of 1162
Event Summary Page

The Event summary page summarizes all the details of your Event.
When you are ready to run your event, go to the Event Actions section and Enable all the services
that you have configured. To test or run services without having to enable or wait for 15 minutes, use
the Run Service.
Using Forms for Multiple Events

You can set up a single Form to manage multiple Events. In the following example, a Form is used to
manage several webinars so that when one webinar is full, you can change some hidden fields in the
Form so that subsequent Form submissions begin registration for the next webinar.
To modify a Form to manage several Events:
Click Edit Fields about half-way down the page.
601 of 1162
Create additional hidden fields in your Form to identify each session of the Event. Click New Field,
then fill in the Display Name. Choose Text as the Data Type and Hidden as the Field Type. For the
earliest Event, set the Default Value to Y or Yes to begin registration with this Event.
602 of 1162
Click Save and New. Repeat the process for all additional Events, but do not set a Default Value for
these. When you are done, click Save and Close and the new fields are shown in the list of Form
Fields.
603 of 1162
Once you have set up the session fields, you have to set the Processing Step to capture the Default
Value on submission of the Form. If you already have this Processing Step associated with the Form,
open the Create/Update Event Registration Processing Step (Processing Steps > List
Processing Steps, then click Edit Processing Step on the menu next to Create/Update Event
Registration).
If you do not have this Step, click New Processing Step, and configure the Step. Select the Event
and add any Conditional Parameters required. Click Save.
At the bottom of the Edit Processing Step "Create/Update Event Registration" dialog box, under
This Processing Step Gets Executed, select Only if the following Condition is met. From the dropdown lists, select the Event (June Webinar in this example), Is, and =, then enter Y in the final field. If
the value for June Webinar is Y or Yes), then the Processing Step is executed.
604 of 1162
When the Event is full, go back into the fields. Remove the Default Value (Y) for the first Event and
add it to the second Event (July Webinar). Then change the Processing Step so that it tests for the set
Default Value (Y) on the second Event to execute the Processing Step. Repeat with subsequent
Events.
12.6 Creating a New Registrant

In some instances, you may want to add a new Registrant manually, perhaps because you received
the information by a channel other than a Form submission (for example, through a call center, by direct
email or over the phone).
To add a Registrant manually:
Navigate to Setup > Events.
Click the Events tab at the top of the Tree View.
Click Event Details on the menu next to an Event. The Event opens in the editing mode.
In the upper-right corner of the application, select Event Options > New Registrant. The Custom
Object Record dialog box opens showing the fields to be filled in for the registrant.
605 of 1162
Fill in the Participant Info fields just as the Registrant might fill them in.
Click Save (to save the Custom Object Record details) or Save and Map (to save the details and map
them to fields in a data entity record).
If you selected Save and Map and there is a matching data entity record, the dialog box expands to
show additional information and controls for Custom Object Record Status, Event Header Fields,
and the entity (Contacts, Companies, or Prospects) that the Custom Object Record is mapped to.
or
If you did not map to an entity when saving, or if you did and no matching data entity (Contacts,
Prospects, or Companies) was found, you can search for a data entity from the Entity Type picklist in
the Map Registrant to an Entity section and click Search to find an entity to map to (if required).
606 of 1162
When you are finished, click Save and Close.
607 of 1162
On the Event page, click Options > View Registrants and check in the Custom Object Records
dialog box to make sure your Registrant has been added. Repeat this process as required to add
additional Registrants manually.
12.7 Creating a Webinar

Note: You need to have the Event Module to carry out this process. Talk to your Customer
Success Manager for more information.
ScenarioA Simple Webinar

Several Eloqua Modules are required to carry out this procedure: Email, Forms and Custom Object
Records.
For this sample webinar, we're going to review the following components and parameters:
The following Emails should be created before continuing with this article as they will be
referenced.
Registration Confirmation Email.
1 day Reminder Email.
Follow-up Thank You Email.
An Eloqua Form that is posted on a Web site where recipients register for the Event.
Create an Event using Custom Object Records where
Individual cannot submit more than one registrationas the unique identifier is the email
address.
A confirmation email with webinar Event details to be sent upon registration.
A reminder email is to be sent 24 hours before with Webinar Details.
There is a waiting list in case the Event is oversubscribed.
A follow-up email sent to all registrants who attended.
Test the Email by registering a test Contact.
Step 1: Create Form

The first step to creating a webinar Event in Eloqua is to create a Registration Form to send to invitees.
To create a Form and fields:
608 of 1162
Navigate to Assets > Forms.

Select Create a Form from the Forms Launchpad and select the template on which you want to base
your Form, or select Blank Template to begin with an empty canvas.
Fill in the Form Display Name, choose a Folder to place it in, and click Create Form.
Click Edit Fields half-way down the page. Click New Field and create a Text field called First Name.
Then repeat for additional fields used for webinar registration. In this instance, we'll use a minimal set:
Last Name, Email Address, Phone Number. Also create a field named Event Session, but set the
Field Type to Single Select List (for information about setting up the Value Choices for this field, see
Appendix 2 below).
To start, the Form should also include the following Forms Processing Steps: Save to Contact Table,
Update Contact/Prospect/Company Data, and Confirmation Page, so add these using
Processing Step > List Processing Steps > New Processing Step.
For more information about creating the Form, see Creating a New Form. You can post this Form to
your Web site or distribute it using an Email. You can also re-use the same Form for multiple webinars
(see Appendix 1 at the bottom of this topic). Note: In this example, the Form is named: TW - RAS Webinar Event Summer 2010.
609 of 1162
Step 2: Create the Event and Event Name

Once you have created the basic Form, you can create an Event.
To create an Event:
Open the Form for editing (click Form Details on the menu next to the Form you created).
Select Processing Steps > List Processing Steps, then click New Processing Step. The Add
Processing Step dialog box opens.
In the Step picklist, choose Create/Update Event Registration and click Add.
From the Add Processing Step page, to the right of the Event fields, click New to create a new Event
name. Note: If you wanted to use an existing Event, you would select it from the Value picklist.
The Create a New Event dialog box opens.

Fill in the Name and Description (if required). Select a folder and click Save and Close to create the
new Event. Note: If you leave the default set for the folder, then the Event will be saved in the Unfiled
system folder.
610 of 1162
Click Save to save your changes.
Step 3: Define Registrant Data to Collect

Once you've established the Event, you can define the Registrant data you want to collect for your
Event.
Note the four Event Categories on the Event page:
Event OverviewName of the Event, a Description (if available), agent, date and time for
when the Event was Created and Last Modified, Total Number of Sessions (if applicable),
and the total number of Registrants (...Custom Object Records) for the Event.
Registrant InformationA list of Registrant fields; also shows a field that is used as the
Unique Code & Email Address for the Registrant's record.
Event DetailsDetails of the Event such as the Date and how Registrants are signed up for
sessions.
Event ActionsActions that occur while the Event is being processed. You can Enable an
action using the button on the right or click Run Now to run a one-off test.
To define Registrant data (in the Custom Object Record):

Click the Events tab at the top of the page and make sure that the Events tab is selected at the top of
the Tree View. Enter all or part of the name of your new Event in the Quick Search field (just above the
Events tab) and click Search. Then click on the new Event in the list of results to open it in the editing
mode.
On the Event summary page, click Edit next to Registrant Info.
611 of 1162
The Registrant Info dialog box opens.

You will see the Form created earlier on this page in the Forms linked to this Event section.
To map the Form fields to the Event, click Edit Link. In the dialog box that opens, click Create Field
next to every field that you want to map from the Form to the Event. Then click Close. The mapped
fields appear in the Registrant Info dialog box.
612 of 1162
To set the Email Address as the default Unique Code field (to prevent Registrants from registering for
more than one session), select Options > Edit Special Fields. Select the Email Address field in the
first picklist, then Use the Email Address Field as the Unique Code.
Note that you can do any of the following for this setting:
Choose the Email Address field, which is the default, allowing Registrants to only register once
with the same email address.
Select the Eloqua Identifier to allow Registrants to register multiple times using the same
email address.
Select any of the other Custom Object Record fields as a unique identifier.
613 of 1162
Click Save and Close. (See Step 6 below if necessary to allow Registrants to register more than once
in a multiple-session Event).
614 of 1162
Add additional fields useful for Event tracking. Create an Attended? field to track a value indicating if
an invitee attended the webinar.
Use Options (top right corner) > Create Custom Field.
For the Attended? field, select Text as the Data Type and Checkbox as the Field type
used.... Fill in Yes for Value for checked, No for Value for unchecked, and a Default Value of
No (most invitees will not attend).
Finally, choose a field to Display After and click Save and Close. Note that the Attended?
field is now shown in the Registrant Info dialog box in the Fields.
Click Save and Close
Step 4: Define Your Event Details (Header Fields)

Once the Registrant Info has been set, you can set up the Event Details for the two event sessions.
The Event Details page is used to define Header fields for multiple-session Events. Header fields hold
Event-specific information such as date, location, trainer/presenter, whether meals are provided, and
so forth. These fields can also be used to create Email Custom fields that can be inserted into Emails.
Note: If you want to set up Event Details for a multiple event, see Appendix 3 below.
To set up the Event Details for multiple events:
From the Event summary page, next to Event Details, click Edit. The Event Details page opens.
615 of 1162
For a multiple Event session, make sure that Multiple Sessions is selected. Also select the
organized by value from the picklist, in this case, Event Sessions. Click Add Sessions from a list.
The Add Sessions from List dialog box opens.
If you are using a Select List on your Form that identifies the Session, choose the Select List from the
picklist. This is a values list for this exercise, called Event Sessions. Click Save and Close.
Expand each session and select the Date Values for each session. This is required if you want to
send reminders for the sessions.
616 of 1162
To select additional features for the Event: Click Header Fields > Add Standard Event Headers to
add the headers (Time and Trainer in this example) to the Event Details, then Add Standard Event
Headers to save the headers and close the dialog box. The fields are added in the Event Details
dialog box.
617 of 1162
To create Custom Headers, on the Header Fields menu, select Header Fields > Create Custom
Header. The New Event Header dialog box opens to allow you to define a custom field. Type in the
Display Name (Session Name in this case), select Text as the Data Type, choose to Display After
the Date, and click Save and Close.
Repeat for any additional fields you require such as URL, Login or other information required by users
to access the webinar Event. The information is added in the Event Details dialog box one field at a
time.
618 of 1162
After adding in your additional Event Headers, fill in all Event Details values pertaining to each session.
When you are done, click Save and Close.
Step 5: Define the Automated Event Actions

sending reminders at specified intervals before the webinar Event. When someone registers, the
To add Automated Event Actions:
On the Event summary page, click Edit next to Event Actions. The Event Actions dialog box opens.
619 of 1162
Even for a webinar, you may want to limit the number of participants due to technical or management
considerations. By selecting Yes, the wait list options will apear. Fill in the Maximum number of
Participants..., the Email Address as the To address (you can enter more than one address using
semi-colons as separators) as the notification address when the Event is full, and the email Subject
Line for the notification email.
You can select to ...disable services by selecting a date and time. This disables all the Event Actions
associated with this Event at the selected data and time. By default, this option is not selected.
(to make it run automatically), Add Processing Steps, or Edit Action Details (in some cases) using
the menu. Note: The Standard Actions are those normally associated with an Event, including
continuous registration, setup for the waiting list, reminders, and a post-event follow-up email.
Advanced Actions include things like dealing with modified or incomplete registrations or cancellation
of the Event. You can also add new reminders from the Advanced tab.
The following is specific information to help you use specific Standard Event Actions:
620 of 1162
Make sure you add the Processing Step named Send Email to send an email notifying the
applicant of successful registration.
From New Registration, Add Processing Step named Send Email. Click Add.
Select the Email that notifies the applicant that they have successfully registered.
Make sure that the Source Type for Send Email To is a Constant mapped to the value of
Contact Mapped to Custom Object Record.
Click Save Processing Step to save it to New Registration.
Note: Selecting Contact Mapped to Custom Object Record will adhere to a Contact's unsubscribe
status.
For a 1 Day Reminder Email
Add a Processing Step such as Send Batch Email to send a reminder email one day before the
event.
Call it Send 1 Day Before Reminder, set the Send Email To field to Contact Mapped to
Custom Object Record , then click Save and Close.
621 of 1162
Next, click on 1 Day Reminder and make sure that the date mapped in the 1 Day Reminder Action
Event is the date on which the Event occurs. Also ensure that you are sending the reminder email to
Registered contacts only. When you are finished reviewing the settings, click Close.
To send a Thank-you email after the Event
622 of 1162
Click the 5 Day Post Event. In the Event Action dialog box, click Add Processing Steps and
select Send Batch Email to add to this Event Action (give it the description Thank-You). Click
Save Processing Step, then click 5 Day Post Event to open the Event Action dialog box
again.
Set Action Conditions so that only Registrants who meet particular criteria receive a specific
email. For example, you may send thank-you emails only to those who registered for and
attended the Event. The Attended? field, which you added earlier, is set manually to Yes by the
Event administrator for each attendee as the basis for the Send Batch Email Processing Step
(see the diagram below for settings).
Finally, click Save and Close.
When you are done with Event Actions modifications, Enable services from the menus and they will
run automatically. Your list of Event Actions will look similar to the diagram below depending on the
Actions you have chosen to enable.
623 of 1162
You can also see a summary of your event. Click Save and Close to close the Event Actions dialog
box, then click on the title in each section on the Event summary page to see a summary of the
settings.
Event OverviewHigh-level Event information, including the Event Name, Description,
Created and Modified agent and dates/times, and the number of associated Custom Object
Records.
Registrant InfoFields related to registrants for the Event. Note that the Unique Code &
Email Address is identified.
624 of 1162
Event DetailsInformation related to the Event such as the Trainer, Date, etc.
Event ActionsNote that you can Run... and Enable Event Actions from this summary.
625 of 1162
Once actions have been enabled you can review to see which registrants have executed through the
event actions and when. Note: the Event Actions fire off approximately every 20 minutes
Select Edit Event Actions. The Event Actions window will open up. Select History Reporting >
Custom Object Record Service History.
626 of 1162
Note that when you Enable an Event Action, a "lightning bolt" is added to the icon for the Event in the
Tree View.
Step 6: Test Event Registration

On the Event summary page, click Event Actions to expand that section of the page.
627 of 1162
Add an Email Notification Processing Step to the New Registrations if not already done.
Fill out the registration form that you have set up.
OR
Submit one Registration via the Custom Object Record dialog box. Fill in the Participant Info using
your own email address and other information, then click Save and Close.
Wait approximately 15 to 20 minutes and you will receive an Eloqua Notification System email
showing the New Registration.
Troubleshooting issues if you did not get Email Notification:

Registrant status is ON HOLD:
Has the session value or picklist options on your Form changed? Ensure that the session value
from your form match the Session name under Event Details.
Emails not being recieved
628 of 1162
Allow for resending of Email. As testers, it's easy to forget that this Email may have been sent
before.
The Email is selected (if testing Send Email)
The Action is enabled and the time frame (if applicable) matches the status (if testing Reminder
or post-Event Emails).
Registration is full but the Waiting List event was not enabled.
Review the Custom Object Record Service History to see if it has been fired off for that
Contact. If so, view the junk email box or spam filter. If not, review after some additional time
(you may need to wait 20 mins) and see if it has fired off any other Custom Object Records.
Appendix 1: How do I use my Form for Multiple Webinars?

Step 1: Create additional hidden fields in your Form to identify this webinar.
When you post the Form information, you have to set a default field value so that this
information can be updated to the appropriate Event. Note: These fields dont have to be linked
to the Event.
This example shows that the hidden field June Webinar gets a value of Y when submitted.
629 of 1162
Step 2: Set the Processing Step for the Specified Webinar

For future webinars, you have a different Attempt to Register Processing Step that points to
different Events based on a different conditions. For example, update the Attempt to Register
Processing Step with a condition specifying that the June Webinar has a value of Y, then click
Save.
Step 3: Change Sessions

When the first session of the webinar is full, you remove the default value for the June Webinar
and set the default value for the July Webinar to Y. Change the parameters for the Processing
Step so that it's testing for the July Webinar. Subsequent Form submissions will add
Registrants to the July Webinar.
Appendix 2: Setting Up Value Choices for Event Sessions

As part of the Form setup procedure above (Step 1), you need to select Value Choices corresponding
to different sessions of the webinar. You'll do this when you set up the Event Session field.
To set up the value choices:
When you are setting up the Event Sessions field, make sure that Single Select is selected as the
Field Type.
630 of 1162
Next to the Select List Value Choices picklist, click New. The Select List Value Choices dialog box
opens.
Fill in a List Name (use Event Sessions) to identify the Single Select list you are building and click
Save.
The dialog box expands to allow you to enter Value Choices.
631 of 1162
Enter the first value (the date of the first session: July 10, 2010) in the Option Value field and the
name (July 10, 2010) that should be displayed for it in the picklist in the Display Name field. Click
Add. The Value Choice is shown under Full Editor below (you can move values up or down in the list
using the Move arrows or Edit/Delete them from the menu). A preview of the picklist is shown under
List Preview.
Add a second value (July 17, 2010 and July 17, 2010).
Add a third value (July 24, 2010 and July 24, 2010)
Click Save and Close to close the dialog box. This puts you back on the Create or Edit Field page
with Event Sessions selected in the Value Choices for Select List field.
Click Save.
632 of 1162
Appendix 3: Setting Up Details for a Single Event

Step 1: Set Up the Event Details
To set up Event Details for a single Event:
From the Event summary page, next to Event Details, click Edit. The Event Details page opens.
For a single Event session, make sure that One Session is selected.
Select the Date for the Event. This is required if you want to send reminders.
To select additional features of the Event, on the Header Fields menu, click Add Standard Event
Headers. The Add Standard Event Header dialog box opens.
Select the Event Headers you want to add in Available Fields and click the rightward-pointing arrow
button to add them to Selected Fields. In the example used here, you're adding Date, Time, and
Trainer.
or
Ctrl + click to select multiple fields at the same time and click the rightward-pointing double-arrow to
add them all at once.
633 of 1162
Click Add Standard Event Headers to add the headers to the Event Details, then Close to close the
dialog box. The fields are added in the Event Details dialog box.
When you are done, click Save in the Event Details dialog box.
Step 2: Make Sure the Email Field is Added

You do not have to set up all the Form fields right away (unless this is more convenient), but you do
have to set up at least one Form field, the Email Address field, as it contains the unique identifying
value for the Registrant and is required for the first Processing Step.
To create the Email Address field:
Select Fields > New Field from the Task bar.
Fill in the field Display Name (Email Address). The HTML Name is filled in automatically. Make sure
that the Data Type is set to Text and the Field Type to Textbox, then click Save and Close to create
the field.
Step 3: Create an Event from the Processing Step

Next, you need to set up a Forms Processing Step to create and update registration for the webinar
Event.
634 of 1162
Note: You do not need to define all of your Processing Steps here. They will be created from
the Event summary page and triggered based on the details of your Event.
To set up the Forms processing step required:

Select Processing Steps > List Processing Steps, then click New Processing Step. The Add
Processing Step dialog box opens.
Under Add Single Processing Step, select Create/Update Event Registration in the Step dropdown list and click Add. The Edit Processing Step dialog box opens.
Select the Event (Source Type is Constant, select the webinar Event you want to use with the Form
as the Value). Make sure that this Event uses the Email Address as the unique identifier.
For the Email Address (Unique Code), select Form Field as the Source Type and Email Address
as the Value.
Click Save and Close. The Processing Step is saved to the Form.
635 of 1162
12.8 Deleting an Event

You can delete an Event from the drop-down arrow menu, assuming that there are no dependencies or
that they have all been edited or deleted.
To delete an Event:
Click the Events tab at the top of the Tree View.
On the menu next to the selected Event, choose Delete Event.
If there are any dependencies for the Event you are trying to delete, the Dependency Check Custom Object dialog box opens. To proceed with the deletion, you must Edit (re-assign) or Delete
(remove from the application) every dependency shown. If one or both of the controls are greyed out,
then you may have to edit the dependencies from the original dependent object.
Once the dependencies have been removed, or if there were none, a confirmation dialog box opens to
confirm deletion.
Click OK if you want to permanently delete the Event. If so, it is permanently removed from the Tree
View.
636 of 1162
12.9 Editing an Event

You can edit an Event by opening the Event, then clicking the Edit button next to any of the main four
sections in an Event:
Event OverviewYou can edit the Name or Description of the Event. Note: Additional
Created By and Last Modified By information for the Event is also provided, as is information
about the Total Number of Sessions (if more than one) and the Total Number of Custom
Object Records associated with the Event, but you cannot edit this information. However, if
you make and save changes, the Last Modified By information changes.
Registrant InfoEdit Registrant information fields created from linked Forms and manage the
linked Forms (select or edit them, or control the field mappings).
Event DetailsSelect the number of sessions for the Event and manage standard and Header
fields used to provide details (such as Date, Time, Location, etc.), along with custom Header
fields, for the entire Event.
Event ActionsManage waiting list options, automatic service disable options (for a specified
date), and standard and advanced automated processing Actions (such as sending registration,
waiting list, reminder and thank-you Emails) related to the Event.
You can also manage the Registrants and other marketing objects and attributes associated with the
Event from the Event Options menu on the Event page. This allows you to manually enter new
Registrants, upload lists of Registrants, view all Registrants, or search for specified Registrants. You
can also associate the Event with a specified Marketing Campaign, create an ICS calendar file which
Registrants can use to put the event in their email client calendar, or view Custom Object links for the
Event.
Note: If the field background on a page or in a dialog box is blue after you have entered a value, then
that field value has not yet been saved. Click Save to save these field values.
Editing the Name or Description (Event Overview)

You can change the Name and/or Description of an existing Event.
To edit the Name and Description of an Event:

Click the Events tab.
On the menu next to a selected Event in the Tree View (in the Event Registrations directory), select
Event Details.
637 of 1162
On the Event page, next to the Event Overview heading, click Edit.
Enter a new Name and (if required) a new Description and click Save and Close. The revised
information is stored and the Event appears in the Tree View in the Event Registrations directory
under the new name. The revised information is also shown on the Event page in the Event Overview
section.
Configuring an Event (Registrant Info)

Change Registrant fields and other information in the Registrant Info dialog box.
Accessing the Registrant Info Dialog Box
To access the Registrant Info dialog box:

Select Event Details on the menu next to the Event to open it on the Event page.
Click Edit next to the Registrant Info heading. The Registrant Info dialog box opens.
Managing Registrant Fields

You can manage Registrant information fields (create, edit, move, or delete Custom or Special fields)
from the Registrant Info dialog box.
Managing Custom Fields
When you link to a Form, if Auto Mapping is selected, fields are mapped into the Registrant fields from
the Form fields. But you can add your own fields from the Registrant Info dialog box. For example,
you may want to add an Attended? field to track whether a Registrant actually attended the Event so
that you can send them the correct follow-up Email: Thank-You for Attending or We Missed You.
638 of 1162
To create a Custom field:

Select Event Details on the menu next to the Event to open it on the Event page.
Click Edit next to the Registrant Info heading.
In the Registrant Info dialog box, select Options > Create Custom Field.
In the Custom Object Record Field dialog box, fill in the Field Name.
Select the Data Type (Number, Text, Large Text (up to 4,000 characters), or Date).
Choose a Default Value (if required). For example, if you are creating an Event for which most of the
Registrants are in the same City, you may want to enter a default City name.
Select an existing field to Display After in the Form.
Select the Field type... (Textbox, Text Area, Single Select List, or Checkbox).
If you select Single Select List as the Field type, a Value Choices for Select List picklist appears.
You have to select, select and Edit, or create New Value Choices to populate the picklist created by
the Single Select List option (for example, different sessions for a training Event). For more
information about Value Choices, see Setting Up Value Choices.
639 of 1162
If you select Checkbox, you will have to fill in two values in the fields that appear: Value for checked
and Value for unchecked. For example, the checkbox may return a value of Yes when checked and
No when it is not checked.
Once you have made your selections, click Save and Close. The new Custom field appears in the
correct spot in the Fields list in the Registrant Info dialog box.
To edit a field:
Select Event Details on the menu next to the selected Event.
Click Edit next to the Registrant Info heading. In the Registrant Info dialog box, on the menu next to
a selected field in the Fields list, select Edit DataCardField.
In the Custom Object Record Field dialog box, change the Field Name and other parameters for the
field as required. Note: Once a field have been created, you cannot change the Data Type. If you need
to change the Data Type, you will have to delete the field, then choose a different Data Type while
creating a new field to replace it.
When you are finished, click Save and Close. The edited field appears with the new parameters in the
Fields list in the Registrant Info dialog box.
To delete a field:
Select Event Details on the menu next to the selected Event.
Click Edit next to the Registrant Info heading. In the Registrant Info dialog box, on the menu next to
a selected field in the Fields list, select Delete DataCardField.
A confirmation dialog box opens to ask whether you are sure you want to delete this field.
640 of 1162
Click OK to permanently delete the field.

Note: You will not be able to delete the field if it has values associated with it. You have to delete the
values first.
To move fields:
Find the Event you want to edit. Select Event Details on the menu next to the selected Event.
In the Registrant Info dialog box, in the Fields list, click the up and down arrows to move a selected
field to a different spot in the list.
Managing Special Fields
For Events, there are two Special fields: The Email Address field (identifying which field contains the
Email Address information) and the Unique Identifier (Code) field (which is the field that uniquely
identifies the record, and is usually, but not always, the Email Address field). Note: The Event fields
identified as the Email Address and Unique Code fields are identified in the Special column of the
Fields list in the Registrant Info dialog box (see the diagram above).
641 of 1162
To set up or editing Special fields for the Email Address and Unique Code:
Navigate to Setup >Events.
In the menu next to a selected Event, click Event Details.
In the Registrant Info dialog box, select Options > Edit Special Fields.
Select an Email Address field from the picklist to identify which field contains the Email Address
information. Usually, the picklist is already set to Email Address as the default; you only need to
change it if the system incorrectly identified the Email Address field or if it has a different name.
The Unique Code field prevents duplication of Registrants based on this field. Select one of the
following Unique Code options:
Use the Email Address FieldPrevents duplication of Registrant records based on the unique
Email Address. If there is a duplicate Email Address, the later submissions will not be added to
the list of Registrants.
Use an Eloqua IdentifierAutomatically generates a unique 16-digit alphanumerical code for
each Registrant record (for example, DELQA00000000407).
Use...Select a field from the picklist to act as the Unique Code. You might want to do this, for
example, if you want to allow multiple Registrant records that include the same Email Address.
Note: Once Registrants have been added to the Event, you cannot select a different Unique Code
field. You would have to re-create your Event.
642 of 1162
When you are finished settings parameters, click Save and Close.
Managing Linked Forms

You can manage Registrant information fields (create, edit, move, or delete Custom or Special fields)
from the Registrant Info dialog box. An Event can be linked to multiple Forms, if required. They are
linked by the Form Processing Steps Create/Update Registrations or Cancel Registrations.
To link to a new Form:
With the Registrant Info dialog box open, select Options > Link New Form to link the Event to a
Form in the Link New Form dialog box.
Select the Form that the participant will be submitting from the Form picklist. By default, the option to
Automatically Link Form Fields... is enabled. AutoLink will automatically link and create the same
fields in your Event as they exist in the selected Form. You may not want all the Forms fields, but you
can edit this information later.
You can elect to use this Form to Create/Update Registrations (using a Registration or Update
Information Form) or Cancel Registrations (using a Registration Cancellation Form). At least one
should be selected so that the action on Form submission is specified.
Click Save and Close to save the link. If the Form you have linked to had additional fields (besides
what was shown in Fields before), they are now added in the Registrant Info dialog box to the fields
displayed.
643 of 1162
Click Edit Link beside the Form to review the fields and where the information is coming from. If there
is a missing required field in either the Form or the Event, you can click Create Field to add that linked
field.
Note: Although the option is provided to create or edit the front-end Form field, best practices are to
make changes/updates from the Forms area. You will be able to view all the Forms fields and details.
To edit a link to a Form:
With the Registrant Info dialog box open, in the Forms linked to this Event section, click Edit Link in
the Field Linking column of the Forms linked to this Event section.
644 of 1162
In the Edit Form Field Linking dialog box, the Form Field is shown on the left and the corresponding
Event Field on the right. Click Select Linking if you want to change the mapping between the Form
Field and the Event Field.
You may see a confirmation dialog box that asks if you want to override the existing mapping (if you do,
click OK).
645 of 1162
Then select an existing Data Card Field or Form Field (depending on the direction of the link) to map
to and click Select and Close.
In the Edit Form Field Linking dialog box, if Create Field is shown in the Form Field or Event Field
column, then there is no field to link to. In this case, you can either click Select Linking and select an
existing field to map to or click Create Field to create a new field of the same name to map to.
When you are finished configuring your fields, click Automatically Link Fields and Close. The fields
are added as configured to the Fields list in the Registrant Info dialog box.
Defining Event Details

The Event Details section is used to define Header fields which hold Event-specific information such
as date, location, trainer/presenter, whether meals are provided, and so forth. These fields apply to the
entire Event (for example, Date). You can add standard Header Fields such as Address or
Speaker/Trainer or create your own. These fields can also be used to create Email Custom fields that
can be inserted into Emails.
In addition, if the Event has multiple sessions, details can be set per session and automatically linked
to the Registrants information.
Managing Header Fields

Uses for Event Headers:
646 of 1162
To populate EmailsFor example, if it's Training Session 1, then select Speaker X and
Boardroom Y.
For automated Event actionsFor example, the Registrant is in Session 2 on Day Y, so send a
reminder email five days before Day Y.
To set up the Event Details for a single Event:
dialog box opens.
Select One Session.

Select a value for the default Date field and click Save to save it.
647 of 1162
Add additional standard Event Headers by selecting Header Fields > Add Standard Event Header
(s).
In the Add Standard Event Header dialog box, select the Headers you want to add in the Available
Fields list, then click the right-hand arrow (>) to move them to the Selected Fields list. Click Add
Standard Event Headers to add them to the Event Details, then click Close to close the dialog box.
You can add a Custom Header, for example, to track whether a Registrant actually Attended? the
Event. Add additional Custom Headers as required by selecting Header Fields > Create Custom
Header. In the New Event Header dialog box, give the Header a Display Name, a Data Type (Text,
Number, Large Text (up to 2,000 characters) or Date), and Display After to select where you want it
to appear in the Event Details. Then click Save and Close.
648 of 1162
All of the added Header fields are shown in the Event Details. Move the fields into the correct order
using the up and down arrows, then enter or select values for the fields as required. Finally, click Save
and Close.
649 of 1162
To set up the Event Details for multiple Events:

dialog box opens.
Select Multiple Sessions. Also select the ...organized by value from the picklist. For example, you
may be organizing your Event sessions based on the City in which each occurs. When you have set
this up, click Save.
650 of 1162
Note: The value you select as the distinguishing field for different Event Sessions must contain a
unique value for each different Session. For example, if you are differentiating Sessions by City, then
there cannot be two Sessions for the same Event in the same City. The same applies if you use a Date
(there cannot be two Sessions on the same date) or Venue (there cannot be two Sessions at the same
facility). If you do not have any fields with a unique value for each Session, you may want to create a
separate Session Code field. The field used to identify each Session is shown in the list of fields as the
Session Field.
From the Sessions menu, select the method for adding one or more Sessions:
5. Click Add Sessions from a listThe Add Session from List dialog box opens. Choose a
Select List from the picklist to select a list of Value Choices for different sessions. Click Save
651 of 1162
and Close. For more information about Value Choices, see Setting Up Value Choices.
or
Click Create a SessionThe Create Session dialog box opens. Enter the Session Name.
Use the default for the maximum capacity for the Session (with No selected, there are a
maximum of 25 Registrants for the Session) or set your own limit (select Yes, then enter the
maximum number of participants). Then click Save and Close.
If you are organizing the Sessions using a Select List that allows Registrants to select the Session
they want to attend, then you will see a dialog box asking if you want to add the new Session to
existing Sessions in the picklist that Registrants will see. Click OK to add the new Session to the
picklist.
652 of 1162
To add Standard Headers to the Event, select Header Fields > Add Standard Event Header(s). In
the dialog box, select items you want to add in the Available Fields list, then click the right arrow (>) to
move them to the Selected Fields list. Click Add Standard Event Headers, then Close, to add the
selected Headers.
To add additional, custom Headers, on the Header Fields menu, click Create Custom Header. In
the New Event Header dialog box, type in the Display Name, select a Data Type, choose the
Display After value to control where you want the custom Header displayed, and click Saveand
Close.
653 of 1162
Repeat for any additional fields you require (for example, Login information or other information required
by users to access a webinar Event). The Header fields are added in the Event Details dialog box one
field at a time.
Fill in or select the values required for all fields.
654 of 1162
When you are done, click Save in the Event Details dialog box and Close. Event Details are shown
on the Event page.
To edit an existing session:

dialog box opens.
From the Sessions menu, select Edit Session. In the Edit Existing Session dialog box, in the
Existing Sessions picklist, select an existing session for editing, then click Edit.
or
655 of 1162
From the menu next to a Session in the Fields section, select Edit Session.
In the Edit Session dialog box, enter a new Session Name. You can also select different options for
the maximum capacity for this Session. Click Save and Close.
Note: The new Session Name should be consistent with the name your Form uses to collect
Registrant information.
To remove a session from the Event:
dialog box opens.
From the Sessions menu, select Remove Session from list.
656 of 1162
In the Delete Existing Session dialog box, in the Existing Sessions list, select an existing session.
Once selected, click Delete and Close. The session is removed from the Event and from the Fields
area of the Event Details dialog box.
Configuring Automated Action Events

sending reminders at specified intervals before the Event. When someone submits a Form, the
Actions are similar to Forms Processing Steps, but triggered by Data Cards and other criteria that you
specify. You can enable Standard or Advanced Actions that will automatically take place for your event
like:
Email to be sent upon registration
Define a waiting list and email to be sent
Reminder email to registrant
Email notification to trainer when someone registers or event is full
Post-Event Thank you email
Event Actions run on a Service which runs every 15 minutes and monitors the update/creation of the
Data Cards within the Event. You can define a number of scenarios that will automatically trigger one
or more actions.
Processing Steps Used with Event Actions

Similar to Forms, the Processing Step "order" is hard-coded and cannot be revised.
Processing Steps execution is based on Always, Never, Condition or Data Lookup criteria.
It is better to use Processing Steps in the Data Card instead of in Form submission so that the
Data Card condition can be used to trigger actions.
The Processing Steps are as follows:
Add to Contact GroupAdds individual to a defined group (email address required).
Add to Step in Program BuilderAdds individual to an Eloqua Program.
Change Contact's Email AddressUpdates the Eloqua contact records with a new email
address and maintains past history from old email address.
Email NotificationSends HTML/Plain Text email with Form data to an email address.
Remove from Contact GroupRemoves individual from a contact group in Eloqua.
Run Integration Rules--Run external calls to sync your Eloqua instance with your
CRMintegration, if applicable.
657 of 1162
Save to Contact TableSaves all Form submission data to the contact table and automatically
deduplicates by email address.
Send Batch EmailSends a specific email to a defined list of Data Cards. Note: This
cannot have conditional parameters.
Send EmailSends a pre-loaded HTML or plain text email to the Form submission lead.
Subscribe at Site LevelSubscribes the individual to the entire client database.
(Subscribe to / Unsubscribe from an Email GroupSubscribes or Unsubscribes the individual
lead to a specific Email Group folder) (Not functional, the actions have been separated as per
the list below; to be removed in a future release).
Subscribe to Email Group--Subscribes the individual contact to Emails in a specific Email
Group folder.
Unsubscribe at Site LevelUnsubscribes the individual from the entire client database.
Unsubscribe from Email GroupUnsubscribes the individual from a specific Email Group folder.
Update Existing Record or Data ObjectUpdates information into Eloqua Contacts, Prospects
or Companies.
Note: The Processing Steps that are entirely bolded are the most popular.
Standard Event Scenarios

There are usually five Standard Event Scenarios which you can customize Actions for:
New RegistrationThis Scenario cannot be edited.
1. Processing Steps executed when Data Card acquires "Registered" status.
2. Should use the "Send Email" feature with "condition" set to Send Confirmation Email, instead of
via the Forms function (as the Forms function can only send confirmation that Form was
submitted, not an Email based on a Data Card condition).
Waiting ListThis Scenario cannot be edited.
2. When enabled, it will check for new Data Cards on Waiting List or process the waiting list if a
spot opens up.
3. For example, there is a 10-person maximum in a training seminar. The 11th person is added to a
waiting list until a free space opens up.
4. For example, there is a 10-person maximum in a training seminar with 5 people on the waiting
list. Someone calls to cancel, the Data Card is deleted. The next person on waiting list is added.
If someone is manually changed to "Waitlist" status, they will move to the end of the waiting
list.
5. The system can tell you that a Registrant is on a waiting list, but not which number they are on
the waiting list. You cannot change the waiting list order, but you can override the waitlist by
changing the Data Card status.
658 of 1162
1 Week ReminderNote: This Scenario can be edited, or so may appear under a different name in
existing Event Actions.
3. When enabled, it will run 1 week before the event (or session) takes place. However, you can
specified date.
4. For example, you can specify a Email to be sent to registrants for Session X when it is 1 week
before event date. You can specify a different Email to waiting lists for Session X to try to select
another Session.
1 Day ReminderNote: This Scenario can be edited, or so may appear under a different name in
existing Event Actions.
4. When enabled, it will run 1 day before the Event (or session) takes place. However, you can
specified date.
5. For example: If a participant is registered and it is one day before the event with no additional
conditions, then execute the two Processing Steps:
6. Send an Email to the Trainer that the Event is 1 day away.
7. Send an Email Batch to Registrants with 1 day reminder.
5 Day Post EventNote: This Scenario can be edited, or so may appear under a different name in
existing Event Actions. This Scenario may appear under the Advanced tab instead.
5. When enabled, it will run 5 days after the Event (or session) takes place. However, you can also
customize this reminder to be sent a specified number of days after the Event or on a specified
date.
6. For example: If participant is registered, it is exactly 5 days after the Event, and there are no
other conditions, then execute the two conditional Processing Steps:
7. Send an Email to Registrants who attended ("Thank You for Attending").
8. Send a different Email to non-attendees ("Sorry You Could Not Attend").
The 1 week reminder, 1 day reminder and 5 day Post-Event can be modified. They are just template
versions of Best Practices.
Note: If the date of event is November 5, then "1 day before" the Event is November 4 and "5 days"
after the event is November 11, not November 10.
Advanced Event Scenarios

There are usually four Advanced Event Scenarios:
Modified Registration
1. When enabled, it will check on 15 minute intervals for any modifications to registrations.
659 of 1162
Incomplete Registration
2. Note: Most of the time, this will be caught by web Form validation.
3. When enabled, it will check for any new registrations that are incomplete. A registration set as
"Incomplete" is not part of registration or waiting lists as it does not meet the criteria.
4. Mandatory fields may not have caught this (prior to Form validation) or if someone was manually
added via a Data Card (for example, the information is filled in manually by the Call Center, not
forwarded through a Form submission).
Event Cancellation
3. When enabled, it will check for any registration cancellations.
4. This is defined by the status of "Cancelled".
5. This status can be manually changed or it can be from the Forms Processing Step "Cancel
Registration."
Add New Reminder or Post Event
4. You can customize and add additional scenarios.
5. Tip: Use this for any test services you might create.
Adding Automated Event Actions

The following section shows how to add Event Actions to carry out particular functions related to an
Event. The steps shown are based on setting up Actions for a webinar Event.
To add automated Event Actions (webinar example):
660 of 1162
If required, fill in the Waiting List information. You may want to limit the number of participants due to
technical or management considerations.
Select ...limited seating, then fill in the maximum number of Participants..., the Email Address as
the To address (you can enter more than one address using semi-colons as separators) for
notifications when the Event is full (usually to the Trainer, Speaker, or Event administrator). Note: You
can enter multiple addresses by separating them with semi-colons. Also enter the email Subject Line
for the notification email.
You can select to Automatically disable services at a specific date and time. This disables all the
Event Actions associated with this Event (for example, when all Sessions of the Event have taken
place). By default, this option is not selected.
(to make it run automatically), Add Processing Steps, or Edit Action Details (in some cases) using
the menu. Note: The Standard Actions are those normally associated with an Event, including
661 of 1162
continuous registration, setup for the waiting list, reminders, and a post-event follow-up email.
Advanced Actions include things like dealing with modified or incomplete registrations or cancellation
of the Event. You can also add new reminders from the Advanced tab.
The following are specific examples of setting up Standard Event Actions:
3. If you are using New Registration (to process registrations for the Event), make sure you add
the Processing Step named Email Notification to send an email notifying the Event owner or
administrator of a submitted Form. Select Add Processing Steps on the menu next to New
Registration, then select A single processing step and Email Notification from the Step
picklist. Finally, click Add to add the Processing Step.
You can select parameters in the Edit Processing Step dialog box that opens. At a minimum, ensure
that for Recipient Email Address, Constant is selected as a Source Type and is mapped to the
hard-coded email address of the owner or administrator entered under Value. You can enter more than
one email address if you separate them with semi-colons.
662 of 1162
Click Save and Close. The Edit Processing Step dialog box closes and the Step is added in the
Actions table of the Event Actions dialog box.
From New Registration, Add Processing Step named Send Email to make sure that the
applicant's information is captured in a Data Card and that they receive a confirmation Email for
registration. When the Edit Processing Step "Send Email" dialog box opens, give it a
Description and make sure that the Source Type for Send Email To is a Constant mapped to
the Value of Contact Mapped to Data Card. Click Save to save it to New Registration.
663 of 1162
From 1 Day Reminder Email, you can Add Processing Step such as Send Batch Email to
send a reminder Email to all Registrants one day before the Event. Give it a Description, select
a Email (Brochure), and set the Send Email To field to a Constant Value or either a Data Card
or a Contact Mapped to a Data Card. Click Save and Close. Note: You can also use this
Reminder to send other details about the Event, such as Login details for a webinar.
Once you have added this, click 1 Day Reminder and make sure that the Date is mapped in the 1
Day Reminder Action Event, and that it is the Date 1 day Before the Event. Also ensure that you are
sending the Reminder Email to Registered Contacts or Registrants only. When you are finished
reviewing the settings, click Save and Close.
664 of 1162
To send a thank-you email after the Event, click the Advanced tab, then click 5 Day Post
Event. In the Event Action dialog box, click Add Processing Steps, select Send Batch
Email and click Add to add to this Event Action. Click Save to save the Processing Step, then
click 5 Day Post Event to open the Event Action dialog box again. Set Action Conditions so
that only registrants who meet particular criteria receive a specific email. For example, you may
send thank-you emails only to those who registered for and attended the Event. For example,
the Attended? field, used to track people who attended the Event, is set manually by the Event
administrator for each attendee as the basis for the Send Batch Email Processing Step (see
the diagram below for settings). Finally, click Save to save these settings and Close.
665 of 1162
When you are done with Event Actions modifications, Enable services from the menus and they will
run automatically. The final list of Event Actions is shown in the Event Actions dialog box and in the
Event Actions section of the Event page.
666 of 1162
Note: When you Enable an Event Action, a "lightning bolt" is added to the icon for the Event in the Tree
View.
Testing Event Registration

Submit one Registration via the Data Card dialog box. Fill in the Participant Info using your own
email address and other information, then click Save and Close.
667 of 1162
Wait 15 minutes and you will receive an Eloqua Notification System email showing the New
Registration.
668 of 1162
Event Summary Page and Enabling the Event

The Event summary page summarizes all the details of your Event.
When you are ready to run your Event, click Edit next to the Event Actions heading and Enable all the
services that you have configured. To test services without having to enable or wait for up to 15
minutes for the next Events processing cycle, click Run Now.
12.10 Managing Unmapped Registrants

Ideally, Custom Object Records (Registrants) are linked to data entity records in your application (for
example, Contact records) so that you can maintain a unified view of their activities. There are some
tools provided for Events that help you to manage unmapped Registrants (those that have not been
matched to data entity records).
To view and manage unmapped Custom Object Records (Registrants) for an Event:
Click on an Event to open it in editing mode.
669 of 1162
If there are unmapped Registrants associated with the Event, then you will see a row in the Event
Overview section of the page that provides you with the number of unmapped Registrants and some
tools for managing them.
From the Event page, do one of the following:

Click Map Registrants to Contacts by Email AddressThe application attempts to match all
unmapped Registrants to existing Contact records using the Email Address. The results of the
attempt are shown; click Close once you have reviewed them.
Click View Unmapped RegistrantsThis opens the Registrant Search page showing a list of
all unmapped Registrants. You have a number of options from this page, which are described in
the rest of this procedure (steps 6 to 8).
670 of 1162
You can select an option from the menu next to an individual Registrant in the list to do one of the
following:
Edit RegistrantShows you the Registrant (Custom Object Record) Status (for example,
Registered or Waitlist), The Header Fields from the Event, the available Participant Info,
and, at the bottom of the page, tools to Map Registrant to an Entity. If you want to manually
map this Registrant to a data entity record, then select the Entity Type and click Search.
Provide a Search Value in the Find Contact (or other data entity) dialog box and click Search.
If you find a matching Contact record, on the menu next to it, click Select this record.
671 of 1162
The record is shown in the Edit Registrant dialog box, and you can choose different views of the
Contact Record using the picklist. When you are sure this is the correct record, click Map Custom
Object Record on the bottom toolbar, then click Save and Close.
Change Registrant StatusChange the Registrants status for the Event. The options are
Registered, In Progress, On Hold, Cancelled, or Waitlist. If you change the status, click
672 of 1162
Save and Close in the Custom Object Record Status dialog box.
View Registrant Services HistoryShow a history of the Custom Object Record Services
used by this Registrant. If it is a new Registrant that has not used any services, there will be no
content in this Report.
Add/Remove Read OnlySelect Add Read Only to lock the Registrant to prevent deletion by
another user, or Remove Read Only to remove the deletion lock.
Copy RegistrantCopy the Registrant to another Custom Object. Choose the Set, click
Select, and map each relevant Source Field in the Registrant's record to a Target Field in the
target Custom Object. Click Copy Custom Object Record when you are done, then Close in
the Result dialog box once you have viewed the results.
Move RegistrantMove the Registrant to another Custom Object. Choose the Set, click
Select, and map each relevant Source Field in the Registrant's record to a Target Field in the
target Custom Object. Click Move Custom Object Record when you are done, then Close in
the Result dialog box once you have viewed the results. The Registrant (Custom Object
Record) is removed from the current Set and added to the target Set.
Delete RegistrantDelete the Registrant from the Event. Click Delete in the confirmation
dialog box.
To export all unmapped Registrants, select Registrants > Export all Unmapped Registrants. Set
the parameters for the Export Report, including the Name, the Custom Object (set by default to the
current set), and the Report Format (you can choose CSV, Excel, or Text formats, choose to
preserve international characters, and download the resulting ZIP file with a different extension if your
company's ITpolicy blocks ZIP downloads). Once you have set the parameters, click Export.
673 of 1162
Click Save, navigate to a folder location on your computer or local network, and click Save again.
Then close any open dialog boxes.
To delete all unmapped Registrants in a single operation, select Registrants > Delete all Unmapped
Registrants. In the Delete Custom Object Record dialog box, you can click Delete to delete all
unmapped Registrants that do not have a deletion lock (Read Only) applied, or click Override and
Delete to delete all unmapped Registrants in the Event, regardless of whether Read Only is applied or
not. The results of the deletion are displayed; click Close once you have finished reviewing them. In
the following diagram, 3 of the Custom Object Records were protected by Read Only status when the
Delete button was clicked.
674 of 1162
12.11 Searching for Registrants
You can conduct a search to find a particular Custom Object Record by specifying a search value or
range to match (or not to match).
To search for a Custom Object Record:
On the menu next to the selected Event, choose Event Details.
On the Event page, from the Task bar, select Event Options > Search for Registrants. The Search
for Custom Object Records in dialog box opens.
675 of 1162
Select a Custom Object Record Field to search on from the picklist, then choose whether it Is or Is
Not to be Equal to a value or Between two selected values.
Enter a Search Value (or an bottom and top value in a range if Between is selected) and click Search
for Custom Object Records. All Custom Object Records meeting your criteria are listed below. Note:
You can use wildcards (? for a single character or * for multiple characters) as part of your Search
Value; for more information, click the Help button next to Search for Custom Object Records.
You can edit the Custom Object Record, map it to a Contact, or move or delete the Custom Object
Record using the menu next to one of the Custom Object Records returned.
12.12 Setting Up Value Choices
If you select the Single Select option for a Field Type for the recipient to choose a single value from a
picklist in a Form, then you have to create a list of Value Choices to populate the picklist. This applies
both to Events (for example, to choose a City or Session for an Event from a list) (for example, to
select how long the recipient has been a customer from a list of time ranges).
To set up a list of Value Choices for a new Custom Field in an Event (as an example):
Click on an Event to open it in editing mode.
Click Edit to the right of the Registrant Info section. In the Event Field column, click Edit
DataCardField from the drop-down menu next to the Field to which you wish to add a Field Value.
From the Custom Object Record Field dialog box, as you are defining the parameters for a Custom
Object Record field in an Event, chose Single Select from the Field Type... picklist. The dialog box
expands to show the Select List Value Choices picklist and associated buttons (Edit and New).
676 of 1162
If the Values Choices already exist, you can just select them from the picklist. Or you can select a list
from the picklist and click Edit to modify an existing list.
or
To create a new Value Choices list, click New. So that you can see the process, we'll follow this
option for the rest of this procedure.
If you click New, in the Select ListValue Choices dialog box, fill in Select List Name and click Save
to create the list. The dialog box expands to let you add individual Value Choices one-by-one.
For the first value in the list, under Add Value Choice, enter an Option Value (the value resulting from
selecting this item in the list) and the Display Name (the name for this item displayed in the picklist)
and click Add. Note: Nothing is shown in the Full Editor or List Preview areas until you add the first
Value Choice, but once you click Add, the added item is shown under both.
677 of 1162
Add additional Value Choices as required. With each additional item, you can select where to place it in
the picklist by selecting Add After and choosing the item you want to place it after in the list. The
cumulative results as they will appear in the final picklist are shown in the List Preview area.
When you have finished adding all of your Value Choices, click Save and Close.
678 of 1162
12.13 Updating Event Registrations Using Form Processing

Steps
Once you have created your Event in Eloqua, you can use values that a registrant enters in a Form to
update his or her information, which also includes the ability to cancel his or her registration . Using
Form processing steps in this way will further automate your Event registration process.
This document assumes that you have already created a Form in Eloqua. If you require information on
how to create a Form, refer to Eloqua Forms located under the Forms category on the Know It tab on
Topliners.
1. From the Forms Editor, click Processing Steps in the top-right corner.
2. Add a Processing Step by clicking the +sign in the navigation pane. The list of available
Processing Steps is displayed as a pop-up.
3. At the bottom of the list, there are two event-related steps:Update Event Registration and
Cancel Event Registration.
4. Select Update Event Registration to update the registrant's information already configured for
the event. Updating a registration includes registering a new contact, as well as updating his or
her information if already registered.
5. Select the name of the Event that you have already configured in the Name of Event drop-down.
6. The list of Event Fields that were created for the Event appears in the matrix once you have
selected the Event in step 5. Eloqua attempts to match any fields based on their name. If any of
the fields are not automatically mapped to the corresponding fields in the database, double-click
on the name of the field and select the matching field.
7. Click anywhere outside the field mapping dialog box to close it.
12.14 Uploading Registrants
Within a Custom Object, you have the option to upload Custom Object Record information. A Custom
Object Record upload wizard will walk you through the steps.
Note: On the first pass through the wizard, you can save your settings in the final step, then use them
again to upload more information later to ensure consistent uploads. However, you can only use saved
settings for the same Custom Object because the fields used vary from one Custom Object to the
next. Saved settings cannot be shared between different Custom Objects, and will not appear as an
option until you have saved at least one set of settings for that specific Custom Object.
679 of 1162
To use the Custom Object Record Upload Wizard:

Open an Event for editing by clicking Event Details on the menu next to the selected item in the Tree
View.
From the Event Options menu on the Task bar, select Upload Registrants. The Custom Object
Record Upload Wizard opens in the first step.
Enter a Name and a Description (if required). Select a Source of Custom Object Record data and
click Next.
Note: Depending on your implementation, there may be several choices such as uploading from an
Excel file, a delimited text file, from existing Custom Object Records, or from FTP. Settings may
change in subsequent steps depending on what you select, so the assumption for this procedure is that
you are uploading data from an Excel file.
In step 2, Browse to and select a data file in the format you selected in the first step. You must preview
the data to be uploaded (click Upload and Preview Data) before the Next button is enabled. Once
you have reviewed the data, click Next.
In step 3, you must choose to Uniquely Match the new data on a selected Event Field value (select a
field from the picklist; you can also make the match case-sensitive) or to generate a Unique Identifier
provided by Eloqua to be applied to a specified field.
680 of 1162
Note: If you select the Unique Identifier, then later, you could export the Custom Object Records,
change the data, and re-upload them based on the Unique ID. If you want to use this, then you must:
(a) include the header for a Unique ID column in your upload file; the values can be blank because
they'll be generated in Eloqua (see the diagram below); and (b) do not map this field to a Target Field in
Eloqua (see the diagram above).
681 of 1162
Set the field mapping between the Source Fields in the data file and the Target Fields. You can click
Auto-Map Fields to allow the application to match as many fields as it can.
Click Advanced Options to view additional options.
Select the DD/MM/YYYY checkbox to set uploaded Date/Time data type formats to the metric
or European format. Note: If this option has been set as the default by your Customer
Administrator, it will be visible and selected without clicking Advanced Options as an
indicator.
For each field, you can select whether the field value in Eloqua should be updated with a blank
when the new value is blank, and whether the new field value should Overwrite a target field
value in Eloqua only when the value in Eloqua is blank.
Click Next.
In step 4, you can set specific upload parameters.
Set parameters to Import Custom Object Records:
682 of 1162
8. Custom ObjectThis name is read-only and is the same as the Event.

9. You can set the Status of uploaded Custom Object Records (Registered, In Progress, On
Hold, Cancelled, or Waitlist) for all the Custom Object Records you are currently uploading for
your Event.
10. Overwrite...To use uploading data to change the status of Custom Object Records already in
the system.
11. Set the new Custom Object Records to ReadOnly to prevent another user from deleting these
12. Select Map Custom Object Records to automatically map fields between existing data
entities (Contacts, Prospects, Companies) and the Custom Object Record. When you look up
the Contact, you can see all the Custom Object Records it is mapped to, including the current
Custom Object Record.
13. Select the Entity Type (Contacts, Prospects, or Companies), then make sure that the Entity
Field is set to the correct field for unique matches.
14. Set the Source Field to a unique field value such as Email Address if you are mapping
Contacts. If you are mapping Companies or Prospects, you can set the Source Field to
something else such as Lead ID or Company ID to map by a unique identification code.
15. Select Case sensitive match to ensure that the same capitalization is used as part of the
match.
If you want to add the uploaded Custom Object Records to a Program Step, click the button (
) to
select a Program Step in the Program Step Search dialog box. You can search by Program or Step
name, select and Edit a Program or create a New Program, or View All available Program Steps. Once
you have a list of Steps, click one to select it, then click OK to associate it with the uploaded Custom
Object Records.
Click Next.
View the Summary information for your upload in step 5. You can also set a Notification Email
address where you will be notified when the upload is completed. Finally, you can choose to use the
settings for your upload only once by choosing Run once using these settings, or save a reusable
template of your selected settings by choosing Save these settings for re-use and providing a name in
the field that appears.
683 of 1162
Click Finish. The message in step 6 indicates that your upload is underway. You will receive an email
notification when the upload is completed.
684 of 1162
12.15 Viewing and Managing Event Reports
A number of Reports and two standard Dashboards are available for Events. You can view a
Dashboard for all Events and Reports for individual Events can be easily accessed either from the
Event or from the Report Console.
To access the Event Overview Dashboard:
From the Function bar, select Dashboards > Event Overview Dashboard. The Dashboard for all
Events opens, showing the Top Events by Registration Report. This Reports shows up to the top 10
Events by the number of Registrants, as well as the total number of Registrants over the selected
Time Range and the Other category (for all other Events).
You have several options from this page:
685 of 1162
You can access actions for the entire Dashboard from the Actions menu on the Task bar.
You can access actions for a specific Report from the Actions menu next to it (see steps 4 and
5 in the next procedure for fuller explanations of these last two options).
If you want to change the Time Range of the Report, select a new Start Date and End Date
and click Refresh.
To access Reports from the Event:
On the menu next to the Event for which you would like to view Reports, click Event Dashboard. The
Dashboard for this Event opens, showing three Reports:
Event SubmissionsShows submissions for the Event day-by-day over the selected Time
Range.
Session Overview for EventShows the breakdown of different Sessions for the Event,
including the numbers Registered, on the Waitlist, cancelling, and in total for each Session.
Event Registrations by GeographyShows the Registrants on the selected map.
686 of 1162
From this page, you can select one or more of a number of options for the Dashboard or for an
individual Report. For the Dashboard, select the Actions menu on the Task bar or from the bottom
toolbar. The options for the Dashboard include:
RefreshIf you want to make sure that the information is current for the Dashboard, click this
button on the bottom toolbar. You can also click this after changing the Start and End Date to
set a new Time Frame.
Add to an Email UpdateAdd the Dashboard to a regularly-scheduled Email Update sent to a
user in the system.
Email Link to DashboardEmail a link to the Dashboard to another registered user of your
Eloqua implementation (a one-time send).
Copy to My DashboardsYou can copy this Dashboard to your My Dashboards list on the
Eloqua Today (home) page of the application.
Options for an individual Report, from the bottom toolbar and the menus in the Report (Actions and
Export) include:
RefreshIf you want to make sure that the information is current for the Report, click this
option.
Pop-Out ReportOpen the Report in window you can resize. This makes it easier to work with
Report details.
EditEdit the features of the Report. Only enabled if you are the owner of the Report.
PrintSend the Report to a print engine.
View Tabular ReportIf the Report is in chart or map format, this lets you view the data points
as a table.
Add to an Email UpdateAdd the Report to a regularly-scheduled Email Update sent to a user
in the system.
Copy to My DashboardsYou can copy this Dashboard to your My Dashboards list on the
Eloqua Today (home) page of the application.
RemoveRemove the Report from the Dashboard. Available only to the owner of the Report.
Export...Export the Report to CSV, to Excel, as a Word file or Image (in PNGformat).
Export as Email MessageEmail a link to the Dashboard to another registered user of your
Eloqua implementation.
You can access more Reports from the Additional Reports menu. These Reports include:
Event Registrants and Contact DataShows Custom Object Records that have been created during
a specified Time Range.
687 of 1162
You can change the Start Date and End Date or a different Time Span (such as Last week or Last
month) and click the button (
) to view information for a different Time Range.
Event Overview by SessionTo view this Report, you must first choose the specific Session in a
multiple-Session Event about which you want to view information. Then click Select.
The Report shows session information about the Contact information mapped to that session.
688 of 1162
Event Waiting ListThe Waiting List shows details of Custom Object Records in waiting for a
particular Event.
Custom Object Record Field ValuesTo view this Report, you must first choose the specific Field
about which you want to view information. Then click Select.
689 of 1162
The Report shows all different instances of the values in this field, along with the count for each. You
can click on the Custom Object Record Field Value to view all instances of that Value. Note: If there
are more than 1,000 different values, they will not be displayed here, but you can Export a report to
CSV to view them all.
Custom Object Record Field Value PercentagesShows the percentage for each different type of
value for a selected Custom Object Record field. Note: If there are more than 1,000 different values,
they will not be displayed here, but you can Export a report to CSV to view them all.
Event Session OverviewProvides specific information about different Event Sessions such as the
Session Name, Date, Start and End Time, Location or URL, etc., as well as the Custom Object
Record information.
690 of 1162
Event DataShows the associated Registrants and their field information, including Event fields, for
the Event.
To access Reports in the Report Console:

Select Custom Object Record Reporting.
Expand one of the relevant directories (Custom Data or Events) in the Tree View and click on a
Report.You must set additional Report Parameters before you can generate the Report. For example,
for the Custom Object Record and Contact Data Report, you must select a specific Custom
Object (the Custom Object Records used for the Event), a Time Frame, and a Contact View for the
Report.
691 of 1162
Once you have set the parameters, click View Report on the bottom toolbar to generate the Report.
Once generated, it is displayed in the Task area.
Depending on the type of Report you generate, you have a number of options for managing the Report.
Note: A number of these options may or may not appear depending on the type of information
generated (for example, for Custom Object Records or Contacts).
Export (or print) the Report using the options on the Export menu (see number 1 for the location
of this and other menus on the top bar in the Report).
Save the Report to existing lists of Reports.
Add the Report to an existing automated Email Update or a Dashboard.
Apply an additional Filter to the Report to further define the Contacts shown in the Report. This
applies only to Reports returning Contacts information.
Carry out additional Actions on the selected Custom Object Records in the Report. This applies
only to Reports returning Custom Object Records information.
Change the View of the Report from the top menu bar. For example, if it is in a table, you may
be able to view it as one of several different types of charts.
To change the Time Frame for some of the Reports, either select the radio button next to Start
Date, then enter the Start and/or End Date, or select the radio button next to the picklist and
choose a new Time Span (such as Last month or Last year), then click the clock icon (number
2). This is available only for some types of Reports.
Manage any of the records in the results using the menu next to the item in the Report (number
3). This is available in some Reports (for example, those returning Contact records).
692 of 1162
To print a Report:
From Eloqua Today (the home page), select Evaluate > Reporting. Click the Report Console tab.
Select Marketing > Events & Surveys from the Function bar. Select View Popular Reports if you
just want to see the Reports used most often, or View All Reports to see all the Reports related to
Hypersites.
Report.You must set additional Report Parameters before you can generate the Report, then click
View Report on the bottom toolbar.
Once the Report is open, select Export > Print Report.
Select the printer and configuration settings in the Print dialog box and click Print.
693 of 1162
To export a Report:
From Eloqua Today (the home page), select Evaluate > Reporting. Click the Report Console tab.
Select Marketing > Events & Surveys from the Function bar. Select View Popular Reports if you
just want to see the Reports used most often, or View All Reports to see all the Reports related to
Hypersites.
Report.You must set additional Report Parameters before you can generate the Report, then click
View Report on the bottom toolbar.
Once the Report is open, select an Export... option on the Export menu. Select one of the following:
2. Export to CSVExport to a Comma-Separated Value format that you can open using
Microsoft Excel. If you select this option, provide an Exported Report Name, select a final
format (CSV or a Text file to retain leading zeroes in columns) and whether it should include
...international characters. If you have trouble downloading compressed .zip files to your
computer, use another extension, then change it back once the file is saved on your computer.
Finally, provide the Notification Email Address to send notification once the conversion is
complete and click OK. When the CSV is ready, you will receive an email with instructions for
opening it from the Eloqua Today (home) page.
3. Export to ExcelExport to a regular Excel spreadsheet format that you can open using
Microsoft Excel. With this option, the file is generated immediately, then you can Open or
Save it.
4. Export to WordExport to a format that you can open with Microsoft Word. With this
option, the file is generated immediately, then you can Open or Save it.
5. Export as Email MessageExport as an email attachment. In the Email This Report dialog
box, select a Contact Email address to send the Report to from the picklist, fill in a Custom
Subject line and (if required) a Custom Message. Then click Send. The Report is sent to the
email address selected in the body of the email.
In the Event Data Report, you can manage Custom Object Records directly from the Report. You can
edit, copy, delete, or move Custom Object Records, one at a time or in selected groups. You can also
map a single Custom Object Record to a Contact record. You can access these management options
from the Actions menu on the Function bar (except for editing a Custom Object Record or mapping to a
Contact) or from the menu next to the Custom Object Record record.
Note: When you make a selection from the Actions menu, it applies only to the selected (checked)
records below. Check the individual records you want to act on, or select Check all Records from the
menu to select all records on the current page only.
694 of 1162
To manage Custom Object Records from the Event Data Report:

Once the Report is open, select a Custom Object Record option on the Actions menu or the menu next
to the Custom Object Record.
Select one of the following:
2. Edit Custom Object Record (from the Custom Object Record menu only)Make changes as
required in the Custom Object Record dialog box. You can change the Status of the Custom
Object Record (click the current Status and choose from Registered, In Progress, On Hold,
Cancelled, and Waitlist), modify Participant Info, or map an existing Contact, Company, or
Prospect entity to the Custom Object Record. Once you have made your changes, click Save
and Close.
3. Map Custom Object Record to a contact (from the menu next to a Registrant record only)
Map an existing Contact or other data entity to the Custom Object Record. You can search for
and select the data entity information, then click Map Custom Object Record to map the
fields. If no matching Contact is found, you can click New Contact and create a Contact
record. Click Map Custom Object Record and Close when you are done.
4. Move Custom Object RecordYou can move the Custom Object Record to a different Set by
selecting it in the Custom Objects picklist in the Select Custom Object dialog box, then
clicking Select and Close.
695 of 1162
5. Delete Custom Object RecordTo delete the Custom Object Record permanently, click
Delete and Close in the Delete Custom Object Record dialog box.
6. Copy Custom Object RecordSelect a Custom Object to copy to from the picklist of existing
Sets in the Select Custom Object dialog box. Click Select and Close.
7. Check All Records (from the Actions menu only)Use this to select all records first if you want
to apply an action to all Custom Object Records on this page. Note: You will have to repeat this
process for subsequent pages of results in the Report.
A confirmation box appears to indicate that the Report has been saved. Click OK.
12.16 Viewing Registrants

You can view the uploaded Custom Object Records (Registrants) associated with your Event.
To view Custom Object Records (Registrants):
. Click on an Event to open it in editing mode.
In the Event page, select Event Options > View Registrants from the Task Bar. The Custom Object
Records dialog box opens.
View the Registrants (Custom Object Records) in this dialog box. Use the scrolling buttons to view
additional pages of Registrants. To find a specific Registrant, fill in the Search field (using the Email
Address, UniqueCode, or Created Date, depending on what you choose in the picklist) and click
Find.
696 of 1162
Note: There are also a number of Custom Object Record management options available in this
dialog box from the Custom Object Records and menus.
12.17 Accessing Events

The Events area of the Eloqua application contains the key tools for Event Management.
To access Events:
1. Navigate to Setup > Events.
2. Click Events at the top of the window.
12.18 Copying an Event

In the Custom Object Records section of the Eloqua application, you can select an Event to copy.
To copy an Event:
697 of 1162

On the menu next to the selected Event in the Tree View, select Copy Event.
On the Copy page, the default name is the old name preceded by "Copy of." Enter a new name in the
New Custom Objectname field if you want to change the default name.
Choose the folder into which you want to place the copy of the Event, once saved.
Select the Copy Options (which are all selected by default):
3. Copy all Event DetailsIf selected, all items under Event Details for the old Custom Object
will be copied to the new one.
4. Copy all Event ActionsIf selected, all items under Event Actions for the old Custom Object
will be copied to the new one. The Event Actions will be disabled in the new Event until you
enable them.
5. Copy all Processing StepsIf selected, all Processing Steps used by the old Custom Object
will also be associated with the new Custom Object. The Processing Steps will be disabled in
the new Event until you enable them.
When you have finished with these settings, click Copy Event Registration.
698 of 1162
Once copied, you can update the new Event by creating a new Form, updating the session details and
modifying the Processing Steps.
699 of 1162
13 Fields and Views

The functions in the Contact Administration area in Eloqua allow users with access to create or edit
fields or views for contacts or accounts. Using this feature, you can define the fields of data tracked for
each contact in your system and manage the views that you use to see contacts and view reports on
contact activity. You can also create contact fields, including custom (non-standard) fields that
optimize your Eloqua implementation.
Field: A field is the field of data associated with your data entities (contacts or accounts).
View: A view is the pre-configured way in which users (agents) in your Eloqua implementation can see
the data associated with data entities.
13.0.1 Examples
View selected on the Field Details page to show specific contact fields. In this example, the Default
Contact View is selected:
13.1 Account fields

An account field is a property associated with an account which can be populated. For example,
account type, billing address, business phone, and so on. You may define any additional custom fields
that you require to track accounts.
View the full list of account fields and their definitions.
700 of 1162
13.1.1 Creating account fields

There are a number of standard account fields in Eloqua, such as account type, billing address, and
business phone, but you may define any custom fields that you require to track accounts.
To create a new account field:

1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Fields & Views.
2. Click the Fields tab.
3. Click the
button and select Add Account Field.
4. Enter the name of the new account field in the Display name field.
5. Fill in the remaining fields as required.
Data Type: Select the data type you want to use as the basis of comparison between
this account's fields and other account fields.
For a Textbox the options are: Text, Large Text, Numeric (with decimal), and Date.
If you select Picklist or Multi-Select Picklist, you can only choose Text as the Data
Type. Finally, for a Checkbox Field type, you can select Text, Numeric, or Date as the
Data type.
Field Type: Select the type of field that should be displayed for editing account data.
The options include:
Checkbox: Allows recipient to select (click box to enable check mark) or
deselect (click box to make check mark disappear) a checkbox;
Multi-Select Picklist: Allows recipient to select several options from a list.
Picklist: Allows recipient to select a single value from a drop-down list to populate
the account field.
Example: Which mobile business phone service the account uses.
Textbox: Allows recipient to enter a text value in the account field.
Example: A person's first or last name.
Output Format Type: If you selected Date or Numeric for the Data Type, then you must
701 of 1162
select an available format type to control how the value is displayed in the system. The
available formats consist of some default types provided by Eloqua along with additional
formats set up by your Customer Administrator.
Example: Some date formats include: dd/MM/yyyy, yyyy-MM-dd HH:MM:ss.fff,

and MM/dd/yy. While some numeric formats include: #.0, #,#, and 0.0.
Picklist values (appears only with Picklist and Multi-Select List): Select a list of value
from the drop-down list to appear as the options for your drop-down list, which allows
either single or multiple selections. You can also select and edit a list of values or create
a new list.
Value for checked and Value for unchecked (appears only with Checkbox): Allows
you to enter the values that correspond to this field being checked or not checked on
submission.
Default State: If you have selected the Checkbox for a Field type, specify whether the
field is checked or unchecked by default.
Account Field is required: Select to make this account field a mandatory field.
6. Click Save to save this account field.
13.1.2 Editing account fields

You can edit an existing account field to change how data is entered and tracked.
To edit an account field:

3. Select the account field you want to modify.
4. Right-click on the field name and click Show Field Dependencies to check existing
dependencies for the account field. You can edit or delete dependencies in the Dependencies
dialog box.
5. Edit account field information as required.
You can edit the following fields:
702 of 1162
Display name: Change the displayed name of the account field to a different name.
Note: Display names of built-in account fields cannot be changed.

Field type: Edit by selecting a new field type from the drop-down list and editing the
associated values as required.
Checkbox: Allows recipient to select (click box to enable check mark) or
deselect (click box to make check mark disappear) a checkbox;
the account field.
Example: Which mobile business phone service the account uses.

Textbox: Allows recipient to enter a text value in the account field.
Example: A person's first or last name.
Default Value: This appears for Textbox, Picklist, and Multi-Select List only to allow
you to enter or select the value shown by default. Edit by changing the default value in
the field.
Account Field is required: Select to make this account field a mandatory field.
6. Click Save when you are finished, to save the revised account field information.
13.1.3 Deleting account fields

If you no longer want to use an account field, you can delete it from the list of account fields. (The
terms account and company are used interchangeably.)
To delete an account field:

3. Expand Account Fields.
4. Click the account field you want to delete, and click the
button.
5. The Dependency Checker runs to determine if any other objects are dependent on this account
703 of 1162
field.
If there are dependencies, the Dependency Check dialog box opens to allow you to edit (reassign) or delete (remove from the application) these dependencies.
All dependencies must be resolved before you can delete the field.
Click Cancel to end the Delete Company Field procedure if you do not want to edit or
delete these dependencies.
Click Edit to assign a dependency to a different company field, the relevant Edit dialog
box opens to allow you to make changes.
Click Delete to delete a dependency, a message box opens to verify deletion.
Repeat this process for each dependency listed.
Note: When you delete a dependency, you are permanently removing that marketing
object from the application. You can check whether there are any dependencies
associated with this view prior to attempting to delete it by right-clicking on the name of
the view and selecting Show Field Dependencies.
6. Once all dependencies are resolved, or if there were none, a dialog box opens to verify that you
want to delete the account field. If you are sure you want to delete the account field, click
Delete. A confirmation dialog appears.
Warning: If you click OK, the account field is permanently deleted.
13.1.4 Viewing account field population details

You can select an account field and search your database for all values entered for that specific
account field. For example, you can select the account field "City" and search for all cities used for all
of your accounts.
To view account field population details:

1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Fields & Views (in the Database section).
3. Select an account field and click View. A window opens displaying the population details for
that field.
704 of 1162
Note: If there are a very large number of details for the field (over 1000), you may see the
following message instead:
4. In the Company Field drop-down list, select an account field you want to view.
5. Click Preview.
All values for that account field will be shown.
13.1.5 Modifying account fields in bulk

You can view and carry out bulk changes on the values in the application associated with a selected
account field.
To view account field details:

3. Expand Account Fields.
4. Click the account field you want to view.
5. Click View. The Company Field Information window opens and previews the matching number
of companies for each of the account (company) field values you have selected.
705 of 1162
6. Click Edit on the menu next to a specific value to open the Bulk Edit Field dialog box. View
details or edit specific values used in the field (as required).
7. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box to change all instances of the original value to the new
Value for this company field. If you are changing the field value in more than 50,000 company
records, you will have to do this more than once.
Warning: If you click OK in the confirmation dialog box that opens, all instances of the
original value will be changed to the new value for up to 50,000 instances of that
company field. Be careful when using this option to make sure first that this is what you
want to do.
Note: If you want to view a different company field, you can do so by selecting it in the
Company Field picklist and clicking Preview.
13.2 Account views

An account view is an arrangement of account fields that can be customized. The default account view
is displayed when a new account is created.
Based on your preferences, you can create or edit account views to customize the account fields
shown when viewing an account. Administrators can manage permissions on account views to control
which users have access to viewing a grouping of account fields and their values.
13.2.1 Creating account views

You can create a new account view, including the name, section headings, and account fields.
To create a new account view:

2. Click the Views tab.
3. Click the
button and select Add Account View.
4. Under View name, enter an account view name.

5. Click the
button in the View Designer section and select Add Account Field:
706 of 1162
6. Click the drop-down list and select the field you want to add.
7. Click Add to add the field to your view. Once added, it will appear in the list of fields for your
view:
8. Click Save.
Your account view has been created. For more information on configuring account views, see Editing
account views.
13.2.2 Editing account views

Once you have created an account view you can modify the view according to your preferences.
To edit an account view:

3. Expand Account Views and click the account view you want to edit.
4. Edit the view as required. You can configure the view in the following ways:
Setting the view as default

Right-click the view and select Set View as Default to set this view as your default.
Note: The terms account and company are used interchangeably in some areas of the
application.
Viewing dependencies
Right-click the view and select Show View Dependencies... to see a list of any user(s) that
707 of 1162
have set this view as their default.
Modifying account permissions

Right-click the view and select Permissions... to specify what level of access users or security
groups will have to this view. The dialog box shows the default security settings for each user or
security group.
Important: You must have the Set Security permission to manage view, edit, delete,
and set security permissions for users and security groups.
Rearranging the order of fields

Click-and-drag a field to a new position. As you drag the field you will see a blue bar above the
field name to indicate that you are performing a move operation.
5. Click Save.
13.2.3 Setting default account views

(The terms User and Agent are used interchangeably.)
You can modify user settings to ensure that your users see a specific account view by default. You can
set default account views for the following scenarios:
Setting a default view globally for all users
708 of 1162
2. Click User Defaults and Settings > Global User Settings.

3. Click the Company View drop-down list and select a view.
4. In the Company View row, click Global. A confirmation dialog box opens.
Warning: Make sure that you want to set all Eloqua users to the default view before
completing this step.
5. Click OK. A dialog box opens confirming the action was successful.
6. Click OK.
Setting a default view globally for new agents

2. Select User Defaults and Settings > Default User Settings.
3. Click the Company View drop-down list and select an account view.
4. Click Save.
Setting an account view for specific users

2. Select User Defaults and Settings > Global User Settings.
3. Click the Company View drop-down list and select a view.
4. In the Company View row, click Agent. The Agent Settings dialog box opens listing all the
agents in the application and the company view that each user is using.
5. In the Setting column, click the drop-down list to select a different account view for any agent
whose default view you want to change.
6. Click Save and Close.
Note: In the Standard view, the following fields are included: Company Name, Address, City,
State, or Province. The Customer Administrator security group is granted Edit and View
permissions for this view, allowing them to change the displayed fields as needed. However,
Delete and Set Security permissions are not granted, meaning they cannot delete or remove
user rights. All security groups are granted View permissions, making Standard view visible
even if a group's permissions have been removed for all other views.
13.2.4 Deleting account views

You can delete an existing account view and remove it from the list of available views.
709 of 1162
To delete an account view:

3. Expand Account Views.
4. Click the account view you want to delete, and click Delete View (
).
5. The Dependency Checker runs to determine if any other objects are dependent on this view.
All dependencies must be resolved before you can delete the view.
the view and selecting Show View Dependencies.
want to delete the account view. If you are sure you want to delete the account view, click
Delete.
13.3 Contact fields

There are a number of standard contact fields in Eloqua, such as first name, last name, and address,
but you may define any custom fields that you require to track on your contacts.
Note: You can create a maximum of 250 custom contact fields.
View the full list of contact fields and their definitions.
710 of 1162
13.3.1 Creating contact fields

There are a number of standard Contact Fields in Eloqua, such as First Name, Last Name, and
Address, but you may define any custom fields that you require to track on your Contacts.
Note: You can create a maximum of 250 custom contact fields.
To create a Contact field:

1. From the navigation toolbar at the top of the page, select Settings > Setup > Fields and Views
(in the Database section).
2. Make sure the Fields tab is selected on the right-hand pane.
3. Click
in the lower-left corner and select New Contact Field. The New Contact Field
page opens in the work area.

4. In the Display Name field, enter the name of the new Contact field. Fill in the remaining fields
as required.
Data Type: Select the data type you want to use as the basis of comparison between
this Contact's fields and other Contact fields.
For a Textbox the options are: Text, Large Text, Numeric (with decimal) and Date.
If you select Picklist or Multi-Select Picklist, you can only choose Text as the Data
Type.
Finally, for a Checkbox you can select Text, Numeric or Date as the Field Type.
Field Type: Select the type of field that should be displayed for editing Contact data.
The options include:
Textbox: Allows recipient to enter a text value in the Contact field; for example, a
person's first or last name.
the Contact field; for example, which mobile business phone service the Contact
uses.
Checkbox: Allows recipient to select (click box to enable checkmark) or deselect
(click box to make checkmark disappear) a checkbox; for example, to signify
whether the Contact uses a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA).
Multi-Select Picklist: Allows recipient to select several options from a list; for
example, whether the Contact is a member of multiple professional
organizations.
Additional fields may open depending on the selection you make for Field type
711 of 1162
(for example, if you selectCheckbox, the Value for checked, Value for
unchecked and Default Valuefields open).
Output Format Type: If you selected Date or Numeric for the Data
Type, then you must select an available Format Type to control how the
value is displayed in the system. The available formats consist of some
default types provided by Eloqua along with additional formats set up by
your Customer Administrator.
Select list values (appears only with Single Select List and Multi Select
List: Select a list of value from the drop-down list to act as the options for
your drop-down list, which allows either single or multiple selections. You
can also select and Edit a list of values or create a New List.
Value for checked and Value for unchecked (appears only with
Checkbox): Allows you to enter the values that correspond to this field
being checked or not checked on submission.
By default: If you have selected the Checkbox for a Field Type, specify
whether the field is checked or unchecked by default.
Forms Update Logic: In this option,you indicate when the contact
database should be updated when a contact submits this form. The
choices are: Always, Update if target value is blank, Update if new value
is not blank or Update if new value is a valid email address.
Contact Field is Required: Select this checkbox to require this field to
appear on all Contact Views.
Restrict access to this field from Web Data Look-ups: Select this
option if you do not want data to be pulled through Web Data Lookups.
This is recommended for any fields that may contain PHI.
Do not pre-populate this field in Eloqua for Sales: Select this option if
you do not want fields sent via Eloqua for Sales, but do not want Contact
information to be pulled into Form fields in the Email.
For example, you may want to make sure that the recipient enters the
information to make sure that anything out of date is updated.
<CRM> Default Field Mappings: If you have an integrated CRM system,
then this option appears so that you can automatically map this contact
field to Contacts and Leads in the CRM system. Note: This applies only
when new external calls are created, and can still be overridden on the
mapping level by the user. <CRM> is replaced with the name of your
5. Click Save to save this Contact field.
712 of 1162
13.3.2 Deleting Contact Fields

If you no longer want to use a Contact Field, you can delete it from the list of Contact Fields in the
Tree View of the Data Fields tab.
To delete a Contact field:

1. From the navigation toolbar at the top of the page, select Settings > Setup > Fields and Views
2. Make sure the Fields tab is selected in the right-hand pane.
3. In the left-hand pane, scroll to the Contact Field you wish to delete.
4. Click Delete Field.
5. The Dependency Checker runs to determine if any other objects are dependent on this
Contact field. If there are dependencies, the Dependency Check window opens to allow you
to Edit (re-assign) or Delete (remove from the application) these dependencies. All
dependencies must be resolved before you can delete the Field.
If you do not want to edit or delete these dependencies, click Cancel to end the Delete
Contact Field procedure.
or
If you Edit a dependency (that is, assign it to a different Contact Field), the relevant Edit dialog
or
If you Delete a dependency, a message box opens to verify deletion. Click OK to delete the
dependency.
Repeat this process for each dependency listed. Once you have edited or deleted all
dependencies, the Deletion dialog box closes.
6. When all dependencies have been resolved, or if there are none, a message box opens asking
Are you sure you want to delete field_name? (where field_name is the name of the field you
are attempting to delete).
If you are sure you want to delete the field, click Delete to delete the Contact Field.
Warning: If you click OK, the Contact Field is permanently deleted.
13.3.3 Editing Contact Fields

You can edit an existing Contact Field.
713 of 1162
To edit a Contact field:

1. From the navigation toolbar at the top of the page, select Setings > Setup > Fields and Views
2. Ensure that the Fields tab is select in the right-hand pane.
3. In the left-hand (navigation) pane, scroll to the Contact Field you wish to modify. The Contact
Field information is displayed in the right-hand pane.
4. To check existing dependencies for the Contact field, right-click on the Field name and click
Show Field Dependencies.
You can edit or delete dependencies in the Dependencies dialog box.
5. Edit Contact field information as required.
Note: You cannot change the Data Type value for the Contact Field.
You can edit the following fields:
If Checkbox is selected as the Field Type, then two fields appear, Value for checked and
Value for unchecked, and you can edit these values in the fields. For example, you may enter
Yes and No, or Y and N.
Display Name: Allows you to change the displayed name of the Contact field to a
different name.
Note: If you change the name of the Contact Field and click Save, it will be saved in the
left-hand (navigation) pane under the new name, not under the old name.
Field Type: Edit by selecting a new field type from the drop-down list and editing the
associated values as required.
You can select Textbox (to enter text only), Single Select List (to create a drop-down
list for this field; additional fields appear to allow you to create or select the values in the
picklist), or Checkbox (to check or uncheck; additional fields allow you to enter values
for each state).
If Multi Select List was selected when the Field was created, this is also an option
shown in the drop-down list.
Default value: This appears for Textbox, Single Select List, and Multi Select List only
to allow you to enter or select the value shown by default. Edit by changing the default
value in the Field.
Contact field is required: Select this checkbox to make this a mandatory field.
Restrict access to this field from Web Data Look-ups: Select this option if you do not
want data to be pulled through Web Data Lookups. This is recommended for any fields
that may contain PHI.
Do not pre-populate in Eloqua for Sales: Select this option if you do not want fields
sent via Eloqua for Sales, but do not want Contact information to be pulled into Form
714 of 1162
fields in the Email. For example, you may want to make sure that the recipient enters the
information to make sure that anything out of date is updated.
<CRM> Default Field Mappings: If you have an integrated CRM system, then this
option appears so that you can automatically map this contact field to Contacts and
Leads in the CRM system.
Note: This applies only when new external calls are created, and can still be overridden
on the mapping level by the user. <CRM> is replaced with the name of your integrated
CRM system.
6. When you are finished, click Save to save the revised Contact Field information.
13.3.4 Viewing contact field population details

You can view the population details of a specific Contact Field for a group of Contacts.
To view Contact Field Population Details:

3. Select a contact field and click View. A window opens displaying the population details for that
field.
Note: If there are a very large number of details for the field (over 1000), you may see the
following message instead:
4. In the Contact Field drop-down list, select a field you want to view.
5. Click Preview.
715 of 1162
6. All values for that contact field will be shown.
13.4 Contact views

A Contact view is an arrangement of contact fields that can be customized. Contact views enable you
to view specific contact fields according to your preferences.
13.4.1 Changing a contact view

Views can be changed dynamically when looking at either a contact list (overview) or an individual
contact record.
To change the contact view:

1. Navigate to Contacts > Contacts, the Contact Overview page opens.
2. Click the down arrow on the View button
and select another view.
Note: While on the Contacts Overview page, selecting a different view will only
change the view for the current session (it does not change the default view). In addition,
716 of 1162
it does not change the view for an individual record. You must change the view for the
individual contact record using the views drop-down as shown above Remember that
changing the views here affect only your login and only during the current session. If you
log out of Eloqua, when you log back in and open the Contacts Overview, once again
the view you have selected as the default (in Setup > Fields & Views) will be displayed.
13.4.2 Creating contact views

You can create a new contact view, including the name, section headings, and contact fields.
To create a new contact view:

3. Click the
button and select Add Contact View.
4. Under View name, enter a contact view name.

5. Click the
button in the View Designer section and select Add Contact Field:
6. Click the drop-down list and select the field you want to add.
7. Click Add to add the field to your view. Once added, it will appear in the list of fields for your
view:
8. Click Save.
Your contact view has been created. For more information on configuring contact views, see Editing
contact views.
13.4.3 Deleting contact views

You can delete an existing contact view and remove it from the list of available views.
To delete a contact view:

3. Expand Contact Views.
717 of 1162
4. Click the contact view you want to delete, and click Delete View (
).
5. The Dependency Checker runs to determine if any other objects are dependent on this view.
All dependencies must be resolved before you can delete the view.
the view and selecting Show View Dependencies.
want to delete the contact view. If you are sure you want to delete the view, click Delete.
13.4.4 Editing contact views

Once you have created a contact view you can modify the view according to your preferences.
To edit a contact view:

3. Expand Contact Views and click the contact view you want to edit.
4. Edit the view as required. You can configure the view in the following ways:
Setting the view as default

Right-click the view and select Set View as Default to set this view as your default.
718 of 1162
Note: The terms account and company are used interchangeably in some areas of the
application.
Viewing dependencies
Right-click the view and select Show View Dependencies... to see a list of any user(s) that
have set this view as their default.
Modifying account permissions

Right-click the view and select Permissions... to specify what level of access users or security
groups will have to this view. The dialog box shows the default security settings for each user or
security group.
Important: You must have the Set Security permission to manage view, edit, delete,
and set security permissions for users and security groups.
Rearranging the order of fields

Click-and-drag a field to a new position. As you drag the field you will see a blue bar above the
field name to indicate that you are performing a move operation.
719 of 1162
5. Click Save.
13.4.5 Setting default contact views

(The terms User and Agent are used interchangeably.)
The Customer Administrator can select User settings for Contact Views to ensure that agents using
the application see the same view of the data by default. Set default contact views for the following
scenarios:
Setting a default view globally for all users
2. Select User Defaults and Settings > Global User Settings. The Global Settings page opens.
3. Click the Contact View drop-down list and select a view.
4. In the Contact View row, click Global. A confirmation dialog box opens to confirm that you want
to do this.
Warning: Make sure that you want to set all Eloqua users to the default View before
completing this procedure.
5. If you are sure you want to set all users to the default view, click OK. The view you selected is
now the default Contact View for all system users.
Setting a default view globally for new agents

4. In the Contact View row, click Global. A confirmation dialog box opens to confirm that you want
to do this.
720 of 1162
Warning: Make sure that you want to set all Eloqua users to the default View before
completing this procedure.
5. If you are sure you want to set all users to the default view, click OK. The view you selected is
now the default Contact View for all system users.
Setting a contact view for specific users

4. In the Contact View row, click Agent. The Agent Settings dialog box opens listing all the
Agents in the application and the Contact View that each user is using.
5. In the Setting column, click the drop-down list to select a different account view for any agent
whose default view you want to change.
6. Click Save and Close.
Note: You can also change your own default Contact View if logged in as yourself by
navigating to Setup > Profile and making the change as described in the above steps.
Note: For the Standard view, the following fields are included: Email Address, First Name, Last
Name, Title, Company, Business Phone, Address 1, City, Salesperson. The Customer
Administrator security group is granted Edit and View permissions for this view, allowing them
to change the displayed fields as needed. However, Delete and Set Security permissions are
not granted, meaning they cannot delete or remove user rights. All security groups are granted
View permissions, making Standard view visible even if a group's permissions have been
removed for all other views.
13.5 Data Types

Data types define the format of data entered into data fields in Eloqua. Data types in Eloqua can be one
of the following:
Text - This includes Text and Large Text fields. An alphanumeric string used for entering data
that may contain letters and/or numbers such as street addresses: "505 Bathurst St.". Small
Text fields have a maximum of 100 characters, whereas Large Text fields support up to 32,000
characters. For multi-select list text fields, the limit is 1,000 characters. For Custom Object
721 of 1162
Records: 250 for Small Text fields and 32,000 for Large Text.
Small Text
100
Large Text
32,000
1000 for Multi-Select List Fields 32,000

250 for Custom Object Records 32,000
Date/Time - A properly-formatted Date and/or Time in one of the formats allowed in your
implementation of Eloqua. For example, you can use the "MM/DD/YYYY" format for Dates (the
North American format) or you may be set up to also allow "DD/MM/YYYY", "MMM-DD-YY" or
"MM-DD-YY HH:MM:SS".
Date/Time information can be entered in any format compliant with the data standards in
your implementation of Eloqua. This includes: (1) the standard format for dates and times
(YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS:mmm, with the time in 24-hour format); (2) MM/DD/YYYY,
the format used in the database; (3) the default formats set up by Eloqua (as long as they
are not modified or deleted by the Customer Administrator); see the full list in Appendix
A; or (4) any of the additional formats set up by the Customer Administrator, which may
include the (DD/MM/YYYY).
You will notice that Date/Time information is displayed in Reports and other areas in the
YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS:mmm format (the default used in the database, although you
can set this to the European time format) with the following features: (1) calendar dates
are expressed in the format: calendar year (4 digits)-calendar month (2 digits)-calendar
day of the month (2 digits) ("2010-05-14") and; (2) time is expressed in the 24-hour form in
the format: hours (2 digits): minutes (2 digits): seconds (2 digits) and (in some cases,
where required): milliseconds (3 digits, but usually only used in data imports and exports,
not Reports) ("17:55:30:203").
Numeric - Includes decimal numbers (up to four decimal points) and integer numbers (including
negative values). The maximum length of a Numeric values is 19 integer digits (before the
decimal point) and 4 digits after the decimal point. Text values such as "$" are no longer allowed
in the field, but are now part of the format. Note: The default format for the Numeric fields is
"#.##".
The following sections provide a full list of all the default formats provided in Eloqua for the Date/Time
and Numeric data types. The Legends show the use of each formatting element:
722 of 1162
723 of 1162
13.5.1 Creating Data Type Formats

A number of default data type formats are provided in the application, but you can create additional
formats for specific purposes. This process is based on combining the building blocks and additional
symbols and punctuation as required. The purpose for each building block for a specific data type
format is identified in the Legend.
To create a Date/Time data type format:

1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Date Formats (in the Database section).
2. On the bottom toolbar, click Create Date Format.
724 of 1162
3. In the Display Format field, insert the building blocks identified in the Legend below, along with
other formatting elements you want to use such as commas, separators (-, /, .) or spaces.
4. To view the current Display Format using sample data, click Preview. The data with the Format
applied is shown in the Preview Panel. To delete a date format, highlight it in the left-hand pane
and click Delete on the right.
5. When you are satisfied with the Format, click Save. The new Format is saved to the list of Date
Formats in the left-hand pane, and is available for use in a number of different places in the
application where the Date/Time data type is used.
725 of 1162
13.5.2 Deleting Data Type Formats

You can select a Data Type format and delete it from the application.
To delete a Data Type format:

1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Date Formats (in Database section).
2. In the Tree View, expand the Data Formats or Numeric Formats folder and click on the format
that you want to delete in the list. The format is shown in the Display Format field.
3. Click Delete. If there are objects in Eloqua currently using the format, then you will see a
Dependency Check. If the controls are enabled you must edit or delete each dependency before
you can finish deleting the format. If they are not enabled (greyed out), then you must edit or
delete the dependency from the original object.
4. Once you have re-assigned (edited) or deleted all dependencies, or if there were none, then a
confirmation dialog box opens to confirm that you want to delete the format. Click OK to
complete the deletion process. The format is removed from the list.
13.5.3 Editing Data Type Formats

You can select a Data Type format and edit it directly in the Display Format field.
To edit a Data Type format:

1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Date Formats (in the Database section).
2. In the Tree View, expand the Data Formats or Numeric Formats folder and click on the format that
you want to edit in the list. The format is shown in the Display Format field.
3. Edit the format directly in the field as required. If you want to see how the changes will appear with
data, click the Preview button and view the revised format in the Preview Panel.
4. When you are finished with your changes, click Save. The revised format is saved back to the list
with your changes.
726 of 1162
13.6 Select Lists (Picklists)

Note: The terms Select List and Picklist are used interchangeably in Eloqua 10.
13.6.1 Copying select lists

To copy a Select List:
1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Manage Picklists (in the Database section).
2. In the navigation (left-hand) pane, click the down arrow next to the Select List you wish to copy.
3. Select Copy Select List. Enter a name for the copied (new) Select List and click Save. Note
that the name must be discrete.
Note: The Option Values and Option Names are preserved from the Select List that
you copied. You can choose to use them in the new List, but you can also modify, delete
or save them as needed.
4. When finished, click Save and Close.
13.6.2 Creating select lists

Select lists in Eloqua are created in the Settings > Setup area of the application and can then be used
on any Form on a Landing Page.
To create a select list:

2. Click Select List in the upper right-hand corner of the page, then click New Select List, a
window opens.
3. Enter a display name, then click Save, the Select List Value Choices box opens.
4. In the Add Value Choice section, add the Option Values and Option Names for each choice
you wish to display when the list is expanded in a form. The Option Value is a descriptive
name (will not be displayed on the Form) and the Option Name is the text that will displayed to
727 of 1162
the person filling out the form.
Example: For a select list with the following option value and and option name:
the following will be displayed:
5. If you wish to move a field up or down in the list, click the corresponding up or down arrow in the
Move column.
6. To see how the list will be displayed in the rendered Form, click the down arrow in the Preview
field at the bottom of the Select List editor window and the options will be listed in the order you
have indicated.
7. Make any required changes and click Save and Close to save your select list. This Select List
is now available on the Form by adding a Multiple Select List element to the Form and
configuring this Select List as the one used to populate the field. For a Single Picklist (for
example, a Yes/No type of selection), use the Single Picklist option in your Form.
13.6.3 Deleting select lists

To delete a Select List:
2. In the navigation (left-hand) tree, click the down arrow next to the picklist you wish to delete.
3. Click Delete Select List. Your Select List is deleted from the application.
Note: If a Select List is used on a Form to populate a field, and you delete the Select List, the
field will remain on the form but it will no longer be associated with that Select List. If you
attempt to open the Form containing the deleted Select List, an error message will be thrown
alerting you that an object could not be found. You must reconfigure the Select List field on your
Form by clicking the Single Picklist (or Multiple Picklist, depending on what type of list it is)
button on the Form Editor, or remove the field from your Form.
728 of 1162
13.6.4 Editing select lists

Editing Select Lists (Picklists) is a simple task in Eloqua
To edit a Select List:

2. In the navigation (left-hand) pane, click the down arrow next to the picklist you wish to edit.
3. Click Edit Select List.
4. Make changes as needed.
Note: Any changes you make to the Select List will be reflected in any Forms already
created that use this picklist to populate a field on that Form.
5. Click Save and Close when finished.
If you would like to use a Select List created earlier in another Form without deleting the original, you
can create a copy of the Select List. This would also be appropriate if you have a Select List that
contains a large number of values (you can have up to 2500 entries), where you only wish to change a
subset of those choices.
729 of 1162
14 Forms
Learning about your prospects and contacts can be accomplished in a few different ways, the primary
method, however, is by placing a form on a landing page that is reached by a click-through link in a
marketing email. In this fashion, your contacts can provide varying degrees of personal information that
you can then use in customizing future communications. For example, a simple form could ask for just
First Name, Last Name, Email Address and Industry. Once those fields are completed and submitted
through Eloqua, it is possible to use this information to target these prospects in campaigns that
correspond with their digital body-language.
Forms are one of the most powerful and effective means of collecting information about existing or
potential customers. By filling in their information and submitting the form, email recipients or visitors
are "opting in" to your marketing campaign (this should be clearly stated in the text associated with the
form). In addition, forms can be used to ensure that you are able to collect information about visitors
when they want to access demos, whitepapers, and other value-added marketing collaterals. This
creates a "win-win" situation, where the visitor is able to access information that is valuable to them in
return for providing some of their contact information for your marketing database. Forms can be very
simple, or quite complex depending on your needs, as shown in the examples below.
730 of 1162
You can include a wide range of fields in your form to gather different types of information about your
existing or potential customers, but be careful not to include more fields than absolutely necessary.
Limiting the number of fields will reduce "form fatigue" or abandonment, and increase the participation
rates in your marketing campaigns. Learn more about form fields.
Make sure that the amount of information you are asking for corresponds with the value of the
information that you are providing. For example, if you are providing a whitepaper about a topic of broad
interest, you might only ask for the first and last names and the email address of the visitor. But if they
have progressed to viewing a demo, you may want to know about their company, revenues, industry,
and so forth. In addition, it is good practice to use "gated forms," or forms that collect information, often
in stages, before a visitor can access your marketing assets.
14.1 Form examples

If used correctly, forms can be a powerful source of information about visitors, potential customers,
and existing customers, and as such, it is important to give some thought to the design and use of the
forms in your campaigns. By investing some time in designing and using forms correctly, you can
maximize the amount of data received to populate your marketing database.
The following examples outline a few potential uses for forms.
Example 1: Event registration

A form can be placed in a landing page (accessed from a click-through link in an email), that allows the
contact to register for an event, such as a training course.
731 of 1162
You can then use another form to gain additional information, such as feedback, after the training
course.
732 of 1162
Example 2: Collect contact data in exchange for information

A common use of forms is to collect visitor or contact data in return for information. The form acts as a
"gate" to the content, the contact must enter their details in certain required fields in order to gain
access to the information they require. The amount of data that the form submitter must provide should
correspond to the value of the information you are providing. For instance, if you are allowing access to
a high-level whitepaper that contains a great deal of useful information about a trend or industry, you
733 of 1162
can request more contact data in return. If you are linking to a product demo, visitors may not be willing
to give up as much information unless they are already highly motivated and deep into the sales cycle.
Note: The following form also provides a quick way to bypass the form for returning visitors,
they can simply enter their email address, then click Submit.
Example 3: Contact us
Depending on the amount of information that you want to collect, a Contact Us form, hosted on a
landing page or on your website, can be simple or quite complex. Here is an example of a very simple
form:
734 of 1162
Note that some fields are auto-populated, pulling in known visitor or contact information. This allows
customers and other known contacts to submit a form without having to fill in all of their information
again. Also, note that Email Address is the only required field in this form, as this is the unique field that
identifies the form submitter, .
Below is an example of the form Eloqua uses on its website, note that the fields have been separated
into two sections, Required and Optional. This makes it easier for the visitor to fill in and submit their
information when they are in a hurry, or if they do not want to release any unnecessary information.
735 of 1162
736 of 1162
14.2 Form field types

There are four different types of form fields available in the forms editor, they are:
Contact Fields
Custom Fields
Field Groups
Progressive Profile
After these fields are added to a form, they can be configured to suit your needs. Learn more about
configuring form fields.
Contact Fields
Contact fields are the most commonly used fields in forms, these fields provide information about the
contact such as their name and address. Many of these fields are mapped to the fields in contact
records so that information can be re-used. Using field merges in contact fields allows Eloqua to prepopulate forms with the information from a contact's record, or to show their current information so that
they can update selected fields if needed.
737 of 1162
The contact fields from which you can choose are created in the Setup > Fields and Views area.
Learn more about creating contact fields.
Custom Fields
Custom fields are used when you want to add additional fields (not available in the existing set) for
special functions. For example, if you want the form submitter to include a block of text such as a
description, you can add a Paragraph Text field; or you can have the form submitter select one of
several options using check boxes. You can also use a Hidden Field to add administrative information
(such as a form ID number) that is not shown to the submitter.
The following is a list of the types of custom fields available:
Single Line Text: Inserts a field which allows users to enter short text data without being
connected to existing contact data.
Paragraph Text: Inserts a field which allows users to enter longer sections of text data (a
paragraph) without being connected to existing contact data.
Single Picklist: Inserts a drop-down list (picklist) from which the user can select one option.
Multiple Picklist: Inserts a list of options from which users can choose one or more selections.
Radio Buttons: Inserts a series of radio buttons from which users can select only one option.
Single Checkbox: Inserts a single check box that a user can click.
Checkboxes: Inserts a series of check boxes from which users can select more than one
choice.
Hidden Campaign IDField: Inserts a hidden campaign ID field which will not appear for the
user when submitting the form but can provide you with the opportunity to collect additional data
738 of 1162
that is relevant to your campaigns. The campaign ID can be obtained by viewing the URL for a
specific campaign.
Example:The campaign ID in the following URL is 2781.

https://qasecure.eloquacorp.com/Main.aspx#campaigns&id=2781
This information could be used to track the path that the contact took to arrive on your
landing page.
Hidden Field: Inserts a hidden field which will not appear for the user when submitting the form
but can provide you with valuable data. For example, a form number can be placed in the form
so that it's submitted along with other form data.
Section Title: Inserts a title for your field sections.
Field Groups
If your form calls for a standard set of fields such as First Name, Last Name, Email Address and
Postal/Zip Code, there are several pre-configured groups available that allow you to add the fields at
once so you do not have to recreate the groupings each time you create a form.
The following is a list of the available field groups:

Basic Contact Info: First Name, Last Name, and Email Address
Extended Contact Info: Title, First Name, Last Name, and Email Address
Address Field Group: Address 1, Address 2, City, State or Province, Zip or Postal Code, and
Country
Custom Two Column: Two blank fields, one in each column
Custom Three Column: Three blank fields, one in each column
739 of 1162
Note: The Custom Two Column and Custom Three Column groups are available to make it
easier for you to add a group of two (or three) fields side-by-side. For example, you can use the
Custom Two Column group to position the City and County fields in your form side-by-side.
Note that the custom Field Groups settings are valid only for that form, the settings are not
saved for future use (you would have to recreate them). Individual fields in the group cannot be
deleted, however they can be edited to suit your needs without making changes to the default
settings.
Progressive Profile
Progressive profiling allows you to create forms that dynamically show different fields based on the
information which is already known about your contacts.
Selecting Progressive Profile creates a field group where you can drag and drop contact fields or
custom fields. You can modify several field group settings including the number of fields to be
displayed, whether the fields should be randomized, and field width. When viewed on a landing page,
the set number of fields is displayed to allow for easier layout design and preview. Randomizing
progressive profiling fields allows your contacts to always be presented with new form fields. Fields
which are not in the Progressive Profile field group will always be displayed to your contacts. Individual
form fields can be configured to suit your needs. Learn more about configuring form fields.
14.3 Creating forms

In Eloqua, you can create simple or complex forms, then drag them into your landing pages to capture
visitor information for your marketing database.
740 of 1162
To create a new form:

1. Navigate to Assets > Forms, then click Create a Form, the form Template Chooser opens.
2. Select a template, then click Choose, the form editor window opens.
3. Click the action menu (gear icon), then select Settings, the form settings window opens.
4. Complete the following fields:
Name: The name of the form. This name should be descriptive so that the purpose of the
form is clear.
Validation Failure Page: The landing page to which the submitter is re-directed if the
form fields are not completed properly or if the form is unavailable. Select a landing page
from the drop-down list next to the field.
HTML Name: The HTML name for the form. This is the name that is referred to when
uploading a landing page that uses this form. The name cannot contain any spaces.
When you stop typing, Eloqua will automatically check for the validity and availability of
the name you have selected. If the name is valid and available, you will see a green
check mark next to the field.
Note: Eloqua automatically generates an HTML name for your form, you can use
this generated name instead of creating a new one if you wish.
5. Click Done when you are finished, the settings window closes and the name of the form on the
top title bar (under the Eloqua logo) is updated.
6. Click one of icons on the left-side pane (Contact Fields, Custom Fields, Field Groups,
Progressive Profile). A corresponding browser opens.
741 of 1162
7. Drag-and-drop a field, or field group from the browser onto the form in the desired position. Learn
more about these form fields.
8. Click the elements on the form to configure each field, the field options open in the right-side
pane. Learn more about configuring form fields.
9. Click Save in the upper right-hand corner to save the form.
14.4 Configuring form fields

After you add a field, or a group of fields to a form, you can configure the settings to suit your specific
needs.
742 of 1162
Display settings tab

Select the
icon to open the display settings tab, this tab controls how the field appears in the
form, and designates the field's Data Type.

Field Label: The name that will be shown next to or above the field.
Field Instructions: Optional instructions that help the user fill in the field. This is shown as
small text below the field.
Field Width: The size of the field on the page: small, medium, or large.
Label Position: The position of the text label relative to the form field it is labeling. You can
position the label to the left, or above the field.
Data Type: This helps to control what can be entered in the field and how it will be formatted.
Choose from: Text, Large Text, Date, or Numeric. A Text field can contain up to 100 characters,
whereas a Large Text field can contain up to 1000.
HTML Name: The name by which the application recognizes the form elements. The HTML
name field can contain up to 50 characters.
Field Choices: This option is only available when the field selected presents the user with
multiple choices. Click Select a List, the Picklist window opens. You can create a new picklist,
or select from a number of pre-configured picklists. In this window, you can:
Add a list: Click the + button below the left-hand pane. Click the new item on the list and
enter a name for it.
Add an item: Make sure the list to which you want to add the new item is selected in the
left-hand pane then click the + button below the right-hand pane. Select the new item
then enter a name for it. Repeat for additional list items.
Rename a list or a list value: Click on the item you wish to change and type over what
is currently shown, then click out of the editable area.
743 of 1162
When you have selected a list, click Select, make sure that you change the Field Label to
accurately reflect the contents of the list. Depending on the list type, you may also have the
option to format the list into one, two, or three columns.
Validation tab
Select the
icon to open the validation tab, based on the Data Type that you have selected for that
field, the options presented to you may vary.

This field is required: Select this check box if you want to make this a required field, if
selected, the text label appears with an red asterisk (*) next to it in the form to indicate that this
is a required field. You can customize the error message that is shown to users who submit the
form without filling in this field. This message can be generic ("Please fill in all required fields")
or specific to the field ("Please fill in the Business Phone field").
Must contain a valid email address: Used only if this field is expected to contain an email
address value. This validation checks for the conventional email address format (*@*). You can
customize the error message which is displayed if the submitted value is not in standard email
address format.
Must contain a valid number of characters: Enter the minimum and maximum number of
characters that you will allow for this field. This setting is particularly useful for values that tend
to adhere to a specific range of lengths such as a phone number, account number, or user code.
You can customize the error message that is displayed if the length of the data in this field is not
in the correct length range.
Must have a value within the numeric range: Used to check numeric data values to ensure
that they are in a particular range of values. Specify the minimum and maximum values after
checking Must have a value within the specified numeric range, then enter an error message to
display if the value entered in this field is not within the limits specified. Note that you will only
see the numeric validation option if you have inserted a form field where the Data Type is set to
Numeric.
Must contain a valid date format: This option will only appear if the Data Type is set to Date.
You can customize an error message to display if the value entered in this field is not in valid
date format.
Pre-population tab
Select the
icon to open the pre-population tab, this tab allows you to pre-populate a field on your
form with information. Choose one of the following options:
744 of 1162
None: If you choose this option the field will not be pre-populated.
Use a static value: This option allows you to enter a default value that will be used for each
submitter.
Use a Field Merge: This option lets you use a field mergeto populate the field, you can search
for the field by name, or with the drop-down list.
Field group settings tab

Select the
icon to open the contact group display settings tab, this tab is only available when you
select a field group or progressive profile.

For field groups, you can specify:
Field Label: This is the title for the field group.
Field Instructions: Optional instructions that help the user fill in the fields in the group. This is
shown as small text below the group of fields.
Field Width: This controls the width of the field group. You can choose between small, medium,
and large.
For progressive profile, you can specify:
Fields to Display: Select the number of progressive profile fields to be shown to each contact.
Randomize Fields: This option allows you to randomize progressive profiling fields so that your
contacts are always presented with new form fields.
Field Width: This controls the width of the field group. You can choose between small, medium,
and large.
14.5 Rearranging and deleting form fields

Eloqua offers a great deal of flexibility when it comes to rearranging and editing the layout of your
forms.
To move or delete a field:

1. In the forms editor window, click the field or field group that you want to modify, the object is
highlighted blue when it is selected.
2. Use the
icons in the upper right-hand corner to:
745 of 1162
Move the field: Click the up or down arrows to adjust the position of the field on the
form.
Note: You can also reposition the field by dragging-and-dropping the field in the
required position on the form. As you drag the field or field group, it is bordered by
a dashed line to indicate that it is being moved:
Delete the field: Click the X to delete the field from the form, a confirmation window
opens. Click Delete to confirm the deletion.
Note: The Submit button is the only required field on a form, it is automatically included after
you begin adding fields. This button cannot be deleted or repositioned, however, you can
change the label on the button. For example, you may change it to Click to Submit, or Send
Now.
14.6 Adding form processing steps

When creating a form, you can add one or more processing steps to carry out immediate additional
actions or processing on the form data. For example, the data acquired from a form can be used to
create or update a contact record; the contact may be sent an email or redirected to a web page; or the
contact may be sent to an automated marketing program or marketing campaign.
746 of 1162
To add a form processing step:

1. Navigate to Assets > Forms, then open an existing form or create a new one.
2. In the editor window, click the action menu (gear icon), then click Processing in the upper righthand corner.
3. Click
at the bottom of the left-side pane, then select a form field and a contact field
from the corresponding drop-down lists. This mapping is used to ensure that the data records in
Eloqua can be matched to corresponding data records in the integrated CRM system.
Note: You can override this default key field on a step-by-step basis by clicking the
action menu at the bottom of the left-side pane.
4. Click
at the top of the left-side pane, the list of processing steps opens.
5. Double-click on the step that you want to add to your form, the step is added in the left-side
pane.
6. Click on the step, then configure it as needed. Learn more about configuring form processing
steps.
7. Optionally, double-click below each step name in the left-side pane to add a description of the
step.
8. Click Save in the upper right-hand corner of the editor, then click Design in the upper left-hand
corner to return to the form canvas.
14.7 Configuring form processing steps

After you add a form processing step, you must configure it so that it functions as needed. The
following is a list of the available form processing steps. Each step has different configuration options
as described below:
747 of 1162
Update Contacts - With Form Data

Update Contacts - With Custom Values
Change Contact's Email Address
Update Account - With Form Data
Update Account - With Custom Values
Update Custom Data Object - With Form Data
Update Custom Data Object - With Custom Values
Send Submitter an Email
Send Notification Email
Redirect to Web Page
Subscribe Contacts Globally
Unsubscribe Contacts Globally
Add to Program
Add to Campaign
Add to Shared Contact List
Remove from Shared Contact List
Post Data to Server
Email Group - Subscribe/Unsubscribe
Cancel Event Registration (Only available with Events Module @ Standard and Enterprise)
Update Event Registration (Only available with Events Module @ Standard and Enterprise)
For each step you can specify when it should execute, under This Processing Step Executes select
one of the following options:
Always: (The default) The form processing step is always executed when the form is
submitted.
Conditionally: The step is only executed when certain conditions are met. When you click
Conditionally, the Conditions Editor opens. To add conditions, double click a field in the leftside pane, then configure the details in the right-side pane, then click Close.
Never: The processing step will not execute.
748 of 1162
Update Contacts - With Form Data

Use this step to update existing data entities with the data submitted in a form. The field submitted in
the form (source field) is updated in the contact record (target field). This step allows contacts to
submit their information to your marketing database and update their contact information using a form.
Note: This step allows you to map a single field at any time, but you can select and set the
parameters for additional fields in the list before saving the step.
This processing step includes the following options:

General Settings: Set the key field override, this is used to uniquely identify the form submitter
so that the form data can be matched precisely to a contact record. This ensures that it will be
properly updated in the application and in the integrated CRM system.
Note: For this processing step, this setting overrides the default key field (Email
Address). If you don't choose a different key field here, then the default is applied.
Field Mapping: If the fields from your form are not automatically mapped to the correct field
name, double-click the field, then select a target from the drop-down list.
All Fields Update Type: Select a rule for when to update this field: Custom; Set to default;
Always update; Update if blank; Update if new value is not blank; or Update if valid email
address.
Update Contacts - With Custom Values

Use this step to update a contact field using one of the update rule types listed, or by applying a Shared
Update Rule. You can make this update conditional, based on a value in a selected form field. For
749 of 1162
instance, if the form is submitted by an employee of a specific company, you can set other field values
to reflect known company information such as the Ticker Symbol for the company's stock, or the
location information for their headquarters.

Add: Click
, then select an Eloqua contact field and an update rule from the
corresponding drop-down list. The update rule types include: Append value; Apply date stamp;
Overwrite from contact field; and Set to value.Click
to remove a rule from the list.
Apply Shared Update Rule: Shared Update Rules can contain multiple update rules and will
execute in the order that they are listed.
Note:Shared update rules are accessed, created, and modified by navigating to

Contacts > Shared Library > Shared Update Rules.
Advanced Settings: Click this section to expand the options, then set the key field override,
used to uniquely identify the form submitter so that the form data can be matched precisely to a
contact record. This ensures that it will be properly updated in the application and in the
Change Contact's Email Address

Use this step to change a contact's email address.Under General Settings, select the original email
address field, and the new email address field. When this step executes, the original email address is
750 of 1162
replaced with the value provided as the new email address.
Update Account - With Form Data

This processing step functions similarly to the Update Contact - With Form Data step, however it
updates accounts rather that individual contact records.The field submitted in the form (source field) is
updated in the account record (target field). This step allows contacts to submit their account
information to your marketing database, or update their account information using a form.
Note: This step allows you to map a single field at any time, but you can select and set the
parameters for additional fields in the list before saving the step.

General Settings: Set the key field that uniquely identifies the account so that the form data
can be matched precisely to an account record.
751 of 1162
All Fields Update Type: Select a rule for when to update this field: Custom; Set to default;
Always update; Update if blank; Update if new value is not blank; or Update if valid email
address.
Update Account - With Custom Values

This processing step functions similarly to the Update Contact - With Custom Values step, however it
updates accounts rather that individual contact records with custom values.
This processing steps includes the following options:

General Settings:Match a form field to a key account field, this is used to uniquely identify the
account so that the form data can be matched precisely to an account record.
Add: Click
, then select an Eloqua account field and an update rule from the
corresponding drop-down list. The update rule types include: Append value; Apply date stamp;
Increment by one; Increment by value; Overwrite from contact field; and Set to value.Click
to remove a rule from the list.
Update Custom Data Object - With Form Data

Use this step to update a custom (data) object. Identify a key field, which is used to identify the
custom object. The Field Mapping section allows this step to update custom object fields using data
submitted through the form.
752 of 1162

General Settings: Select the custom object and the key field from the corresponding dropdown lists.
All Fields Update Type: Select a rule for when to update this field: Custom; Always update;
Update if blank; Update if new value is not blank; or Update if valid email address.
Update Custom Data Object - With Custom Values

Use this step to update a custom (data) object using custom values. Similar to the contact and
account-based Update - With Custom Values steps, you must identify the unique identifier and the
field that it maps to.
753 of 1162

General Settings: Select a custom object, the key field, and the form field that maps to it, from
the corresponding drop-down lists.
Add: Click
, then select the custom object fields that you want to update. Click
to remove an object from the list.
Send Submitter an Email

Use this step to send an auto-responder email to the form submitter when they submit the form. For
example, if the form is being used to register for an event, the auto-responder email could be used to
inform the submitter that their information has been received and that they will receive another email
when they are successfully registered for the event.
754 of 1162

General Settings: From the drop-down list, choose how the email to be sent is selected, then
configure the option as needed.
Allow Resending: Select Default, Yes, or No to specify if resending the email should be
allowed.
Advanced Settings: Click this section to expand the options, then set the key field override,
used to uniquely identify the contact's record.
Send Notification Email

Use this step to automatically send a notification email to a sales rep or agent when a form is
submitted. You can configure the step so that the notification is sent to a specified email address only
if a specific field value matches a set value. For example, if the form is submitted with the value in the
Zip Code field equal to the value used for a sales rep's territory, then she or he will receive an email
notifying them that the form was submitted.
755 of 1162

General SettingsFrom the drop-down lists, choose how the recipient email address is selected
and how the subject of the email is selected, then configure the options as needed. Select the
notification configuration option for the body of the notification, this controls the fields of data
that are shown in the notification.
Advanced Settings: Click this section to expand the options, then set the email encoding for
the notification email. This can be a specific language (to make sure that the character set is
available) or Unicode (UTF-8).
Redirect to Web Page

Use this processing step to redirect the form submitter to a specific web page or landing page right
after they submit the form. This is useful when you want to provide additional information, allow access
to content in return for the form submission, or to encourage the form submitter to take additional
actions.
756 of 1162
This processing step includes the following options under General Settings:
Send to an Eloqua Landing Page: Select this option (instead of Send to an External URL) if
you want to redirect the form submitter to a landing page in the Eloqua application. Choose how
the landing page is selected, and specify any additional details using the drop-down lists.
Send to an External URL: Use this option (instead of Send to an Eloqua Landing Page) to
send the form submitter to a specific web page outside of Eloqua. Choose how the web page
URL is selected, and specify any additional details using the drop-down lists.
Subscribe Contacts Globally

This step is used to subscribe all form submitters to all campaigns. From the drop-down list, select the
field on the form that contains the email address, this is used to identify the visitor or contact for which
you want to execute the step.
Unsubscribe Contacts Globally

This step is used to unsubscribe form submitters from all campaigns. From the drop-down list, select
the field on the form that contains the email address, this is used to identify the visitor or contact for
which you want to execute the step.
Add to Program
Use this processing step to add the new contact to an automated marketing program. For example,
you may want to add them to a lead scoring program so that you can begin applying a scoring system
for the contact's attributes and activities that point to specific types of follow-up actions for marketing
or sales.
757 of 1162

General Settings: From the drop-down list, choose how the destination program is selected,
then configure the option as needed.
Advanced Settings: Set the key field override, map a form field to a contact field. This is used
to uniquely identify the data entity record so that it can be properly updated in the application and
in the integrated CRM system.
Add to Campaign
Use this processing step to add the new contact to a marketing campaign. For example, you might
want to add the contact to a campaign that manages event registration and communications.
758 of 1162

General Settings:From the drop-down list, choose how the destination campaign is selected,
Add to Shared Contact List

Use this processing step to add contacts to an existing contact list.
759 of 1162
General Settings: From the drop-down list, choose how the destination contact list is selected
Remove from Shared Contact List

Use this processing step to remove contacts from an existing contact list. From the drop-down lists,
select a field on the form to use for contact matching, and a corresponding mapping field, then select a
contact list from which to remove the contact.
Post Data to Server

Use this processing step to re-post submitted form data to another server.
760 of 1162
General Settings: From the drop-down list, select either Constant Value or Form Field to
identify the URL that will receive this form's data. Enter the URL for the server to which you will
re-post the submitted form data.
Field Mappings: The field mappings between the form source fields and the target fields on the
server to which you are re-posting are set up automatically based on the HTML names of the
source fields. If required, you can change these names so that the proper fields are the server
are mapped.

Use this processing step to create or update leads/contacts or accounts in your CRM system. It
allows you to ensure that data submitted to the form is updated in your CRM.

General Settings: From the drop-down list, choose how the destination integration rule set is
selected, then configure the remaining fields as needed. The selection options are:
Always the same: Select this option if the integration rule set will always be the same
set.
Use a picklist to select the integration rule set: Select this option if you are using a
lookup table to reference different integration rule sets.
Use the value of a form field to select the integration rule set: Select this option if a
specific form field contains the integration rule set ID.
761 of 1162
Note: The integration rule set ID can be obtained by opening the Integration Rule
Collection (Click the Edit Integration Rule Sets then select the integration rule
collection), the ID is located in the URL string &IntegrationRuleCollectionID=.
Email Group - Subscribe/Unsubscribe

Use this processing step to subscribe the form submitter to a specific email group (for example, to
receive newsletters).
The processing steps includes the following options:

Choose the field containing the Email Address: Set the key field to uniquely identify the data
entity record that contains the email address (the unique identifier) for the contact.
762 of 1162
Choose an Email Group: Choose the group to which the form submitter is subscribed. If
Constant Value is selected, the adjacent field will display all email groups available. If Form
Field is selected, that field should contain the email group ID.
Subscribe/Unsubscribe: If Constant Value is selected, the step either subscribes or
unsubscribes the contact to the email group. If Form Field is selected, that field should contain
either the value of Subscribe or Unsubscribe for this step to action correctly.
Cancel Event Registration (Only available with Events Module @ Standard and
Enterprise)
Use this processing step to cancel contact's event registration. This step does not remove the
contact's custom object record from the event, but simply marks their status as Canceled.

General Settings: From the drop-down list, select how the event is selected:
Always use the same event: Select an event that will always be used.
Use the value of a form field to select the event: Specify a form field that contains the
event ID number.
Note: To find the event URL/ID number, navigate to Setup > Events and open
the event.Click Edit in the Event Overview section and find the string
763 of 1162
'&DataCardSetID=.' The number specified in this string is the Event ID.
Use a picklist to select the event: Specify a form field containing a value that will be
referenced in the identified lookup table. The lookup table's returning value must be the
event ID number.
Advanced Settings: Select a field from the drop-down list to use as the key field override.
Update Event Registration (Only available with Events Module @ Standard and
Enterprise)
Use this processing step to add contacts to an event, their status will be listed as Registered.

General Settings: From the drop-down list, choose an event for which the registration
information should be updated.
764 of 1162
name, double-click the field then select a target from the drop-down list. Set the All Fields
Update Type rule for when to update this field: Custom or Always update.
14.8 Editing forms

With Eloqua you are able to edit existing forms to suit your current needs.
To edit a form:
1. Navigate to Assets > Forms, then click Open an Existing Form, the Form Chooser opens.
2. Select the form that you want to edit, then click Choose, the form opens in the editor window.
3. Add, remove, or modify fields in the form as needed. Learn more about form fields.
4. Click Save in the upper right-hand corner to save the form with your changes.
14.9 Copying forms

You can make a copy of an existing form so that you do not have to build a new one from scratch, this
may save you time if you are creating a similar form as you will not have to add each field again.
To copy a form:
2. Right-click the form that you want to copy, then select Copy. The copy of the original form
appears in the Form Chooser as "[Original Name]: Copy".
3. Select the copy in the chooser, then click Choose, the form opens in the editor window.
4. Click the action menu (gear icon), then select Settings.
5. In the settings window, enter the form details as required in the following fields:
Name: The name of the form. This name should be descriptive so that the purpose of the
form is clear.
Validation Failure Page: The landing page to which the submitter is re-directed if the
form fields are not completed properly or if the form is unavailable. Select a landing page
from the drop-down list next to the field.
765 of 1162
HTML Name: The HTML name for the form. This is the name that is referred to when
uploading a landing page that uses this form. The name cannot contain any spaces.
When you stop typing, Eloqua automatically checks for the validity and availability of the
name you have selected. If the name is valid and available, a green check mark appears
next to the field.
6. Click Done when you are finished, the settings window closes and the name of the form on the
top title bar (under the Eloqua logo) is updated.
7. Add, remove, or modify fields in the form as needed. Learn more about form fields.
8. Click Save in the upper right-hand corner to save the copy with the new name and changes.
14.10 Deleting forms

If you no longer need a form, you can delete it as part of your regular maintenance to keep the
application from becoming cluttered with too many old forms.
Note: If the form is being used in another asset or campaign, you will receive an error message
when you try to delete it. The Dependency Viewer opens showing you the objects which are
dependent on the form, you must resolve these dependencies before you can delete the form.
To delete a form:
2. Right-click on the form name then select Delete, a confirmation window opens.
3. Click Delete, the file is permanently deleted from the application.
14.11 Creating folders for forms

You can create a folder to hold a number of similar forms, this makes it easier to locate a form when
needed.
To create a new folder for forms:

2. Right-click a form and select New Folder, a new folder is created at the same level as the form
766 of 1162
selected and is named "untitled folder" by default.
Note: You can also click New Folder in the bottom left-hand corner of the window.
3. Right-click the new folder and select Rename, enter a new name for the folder, then press
Enter.
14.12 Viewing the HTML code for forms

You can view the HTML code for your form then copy and paste it into a web page, you can also use
this as a troubleshooting feature as it lets you see how the code is used for different functions.
To view the HTML code for your form:

1. Navigate to Assets > Forms, then click Open an Existing Form.
2. Select a form from the Form Chooser then click Choose, the form editor opens.
3. Click the action menu (gear icon) then click View Form HTML, the Form Integration Details
window opens.
4. Click the Integration Details tab to troubleshoot the code or to copy the tracking scripts to a web
page. Select whether data submitted using the form will be re-posted, in which case you can
copy the required tracking script and hidden tracking fields code to a web page where you want
to host the form. You can also fix any form code directly in the windows that show how different
767 of 1162
parts of the code are used.
5. Click Close, when you are done with the integration details.

Profile confusion is actually not an issue that is specific to Eloqua itself. It is based on the general
limitations that come with tracking implicit visitor information on the internet. The contact's form
activity history (captured in the contact record activity log) and the actual data that is entered in the
form (which is captured via the form submission itself) are referencing two completely different tables
as shown below.
768 of 1162
769 of 1162
Contact form activity

A contact's form activity (and other web based activity) is pulled from the visitor/profile table, which is
referred to as "implicit" data. It implies or assumes that the current cookie profile that is tied to a user's
most recent web session should be linked to the matching contact record if a record already exists.
So, if the current cookie profile (on my local computer) is 'timo.reimann@eloqua.com', and I submit a
form, Eloqua will assume that my activity should be tied to the matching contact record
(timo.reimann@eloqua.com), regardless of what email address I entered in the form submission.
When the form gets submitted, Eloqua will do a look-up for that email address on the contact table, and
if the record is found, a profile-to-contact linkage will generally be made.
Now, if I should submit the same form again, but this time with a different email address (i.e.
timo.reimann@gmail.com) and without clearing my browser cookies first, the activity will still be
associated to my original contact record (timo.reimannn@eloqua.com) instead of the newly created
contact record (timo.reimann@gmail.com). This is because the former contact record is what matches
my current browser profile, which to this point, has not been changed or cleared from the browser. It is
important to note that a profile-to-contact linkage works on a 'one-to-many' relationship: A contact can
have multiple profile associations, but a single profile can be linked to only one contact.
1. First Form submission with email address 'timo.reimann@eloqua.com' is linked to the
2. Second Form submission with email 'timo.reimann@gmail.com' is linked to the same

770 of 1162
3. The newly created '@gmail' contact record has no Profile linkage, and therefore, no
form submission activity:
Form submission data

The data in the Form Submission Data report, on the other hand, is captured from the form itself, which
is referred to as 'explicit' data - the data that is provided to Eloqua explicitly by the contact or visitor,
captured through the form fields. Taking the same example noted above: We confirmed that after
submitting the same form a second time with the 'timo.reimann@gmail.com' address, the activity
would still get linked to the 'timo.reimannn@eloqua.com' contact record. If you look at the Form
Submission Data report, however, you would see the 'timo.reimann@gmail.com' address in the
report table, not 'timo.reimann@eloqua.com'. This is because the form data is explicit information
that was provided to us in the form by the contact directly. The Form Submission Data will include ALL
form submissions in the report, regardless of the profile association.
771 of 1162
1. First Form submission with email address 'timo.reimann@eloqua.com':
2. Second Form submission with email address 'timo.reimann@eloqua.com':
In summary, the Visitor Table (in this case the Form Activities log) should not be confused with the
'Contact' or 'Form Data' tables.
How does profiling work?

Profile data is pulled from the visitor's cookie information, in the case of a form submission, the Eloqua
cookie will pull the aggregated visitor/profile information from the current session, and will then attempt
to associate that profile to a contact record. If the current cookie session is associated to a different
profile or if the browser cookies are disabled, it will mean one of two things:
1. In the case of former, the form activity is linked to a different contact record.
2. In the case of the latter, no profile association is made whatsoever.
Given the former scenario, it is possible that the form activity could be associated to a different contact
record, if the look-up finds an existing email address that matches the current profile. This often
happens when the form submitter has more than one Eloqua contact record or is testing with multiple
email addresses. To get around this, the user would need to clear their browser cookies completely and
start a new session. Alternatively, they could run multiple browsers with different cookie profiles (one
browser for each profile).
Why is my contact missing profile activity?

There are a number of reasons why you may not see form activity (or other types of Profile related
activity) in the Contact Activities log:
1. The visitor (who submits the form) may be associated to a profile that does not match the email
address. In other words, the aggregated email address from the cookie profile may be different
from the email address that was actually submitted in the form.
For example:
772 of 1162
The contact or visitor may submit the form with their personal email address, but the
cookie session is associated to their work address. This can happen when two or more
users share the same computer
The contact or visitor may be submitting the form on behalf of another person or is
submitting back to back forms with different email addresses.
The contact or visitor has more than one Eloqua contact record and/or is testing with
multiple email addresses.
2. The visitor could have their browser cookies or javascript disabled, in which case NO profile
information can be tracked whatsoever. It is also possible that the user's company laptop could
have other custom security restrictions that prevent cookie tracking.
14.14 Viewing and exporting form submission data

Eloqua allows you to view the data that has been collected from a specific form using the Form
Submission Data window in the forms editor. From here you can also export the information in a
convenient .csv or .xls file that can be sent to the email address of your choice.
To view and export form submission data:

3. Click the action menu (gear icon), then select View Submission Data, the Form Submission
Data window opens.
773 of 1162
4. Click Export to have the form submission data emailed to you. In the window that opens, enter
your email address and select the export format (.csv or .xls), then click Export.
5. Click Close to exit the window when you are done.
14.15 Excluding form submission data from reports

Eloqua allows you to view the data that has been collected from a specific form using the Form
Submission Data window in the forms editor. This data is also reflected in form Operational Reports,
however, there may be certain submissions (such as tests submissions) that you would like to exclude
from reporting to ensure accurate results. Eloqua's Exclude from Reporting feature allows you to select
which information should be excluded.
To exclude form submission data from reports:

3. Click the action menu (gear icon), then select View Submission Data, the Form Submission
Data window opens.
774 of 1162
4. Right-click the submission that you want to exclude, then select Exclude from Reporting, a
confirmation window opens. Multiple contacts can be selected by holding the Ctrl or Shift key.
5. Confirm that you want to exclude the data, then click Close to exit the Form Submission Data
window when you are done.
775 of 1162
15 Hyperlinks
Hyperlinks are links from images, landing pages, and emails to landing pages, websites, and content
assets (whitepapers, use cases, videos, etc.).
Hyperlinks allow you to use a single email as an access point to other assets, you can then track the
activities of visitors and email recipients (by recording clickingthroughs to specific web pages or
landing pages) for reporting purposes. You can also use links in the email header and footer to allow
recipients to view the email in a web browser, to manage their subscriptions, review your privacy
policy, contact you, or refer the email to their contacts.
776 of 1162
15.1 Hyperlink examples

Hyperlinks can be used to access a number of different web-based destinations or assets, either
directly or via a landing page or web page. The Hyperlink can be tracked, and can be used with text and
images. The following are examples of how hyperlinks can be used in your Eloqua assets.
Example 1: Using hyperlinks in a simple, text-based email

In this example, a simple email was sent out which included five different hyperlinks. The links connect
to a PDF written by an industry expert, two different videos, the company blog, and the email address
of the sender.
777 of 1162
778 of 1162
Example 2: Using images as buttons for hyperlinks

A common practice is to insert images as buttons in an email or on a landing page, then mapping them
to hyperlinks to capture click-throughs. In the following example, note that the same hyperlink is
included three times, twice as an image and once as a text link. This makes it very easy for the
recipient to click on the link that's closest to where their mouse cursor happens to be, and also
accommodates two different styles for the presentation of the call to action.
Example 3: Hyperlinked video

You can insert an image for a video in a landing page, then add a hyperlink to the image. Instead of
opening a new browser window, the video is played in the frame provided directly in the landing page.
This lets you keep the customer focused on your page and your message.
Note: This functionality can only be accomplished by uploading a HTML landing page
containing the code to open the video. The WYSIWYG Eloqua landing page editor will not allow
you to create this type of link.
779 of 1162
15.2 Creating hyperlinks

You can create hyperlink that are stored in the component library and are available for use in different
assets.
To create a hyperlink:
1. Navigate to Assets > Component Library, then click Hyperlinks on the left-hand pane.
2. Click New on the top right-hand corner of the screen, the Hyperlink editor window opens.
3. Enter a name for the hyperlink in the Name field.
780 of 1162
Note: You can choose any name you want for the hyperlink.
4. Type the URL for the hyperlink in the URL field.
Note: It is not necessary to add "http(s)://" to the URL, but you can include it if desired.
5. Click Save. The window closes and the hyperlink is added to the list in the component library.
15.3 Deleting hyperlinks

Hyperlinks can be deleted from the component library when they are no longer needed.
To delete a hyperlink:
2. Right-click an existing hyperlink in the list, then select Delete on the menu, a confirmation
window opens.
3. Click Delete, the dialog box closes and the hyperlink is deleted from the component library.
Note: TheDependency Viewer opens if there are Eloqua assets with dependencies on
this hyperlink, these assets with dependencies must be resolved before the hyperlink
can be deleted from the component library.
781 of 1162
15.4 Editing hyperlinks

You can edit an existing hyperlink in the component library.
To edit a hyperlink in the component library:

2. Double-click an existing hyperlink in the list, the Hyperlink editor window opens.
3. Make any necessary changes then click Save, the hyperlink is updated in the component
library.
15.5 Renaming hyperlinks

An existing hyperlink can be renamed in the component library.
To rename a hyperlink:
2. Locate the hyperlink that you want to rename. Right-click on the name in the list, then select
Rename on the menu.
3. Type the new name then press the Enter key, the name is updated on the list.
15.6 Tracking hyperlinks using the hyperlink manager

Tracking hyperlinks in Eloqua emails and landing pages can be managed on an individual basis (on the
email or landing page canvas) or by using the hyperlink manager.You access the hyperlink manager
from the action menu (gear icon), and all hyperlinks (tracked and untracked) are displayed in a table
format. From one central screen, you can enable or disable tracking for all hyperlinks in that email or
landing page.
To manage hyperlinks in an email or landing page:

1. Open an existing email or landing page then click on the action menu (gear icon) in the top-right
corner.
782 of 1162
2. Select Manage Links from the menu.
The Hyperlink Manager window opens showing both tracked and untracked hyperlinks in your
asset.
The hyperlinks are shown in a table format with four columns:

Track: Checkboxes indicate if tracking is enabled or disabled. If the box is checked, the
link is being tracked in Eloqua.
Count: The number of times that the link appears in the email or landing page.
783 of 1162
Link Name: The text that is displayed for the link in the email or landing page.
Link URL: The web address for the hyperlink.
From here you can change the tracking status for the hyperlink in the email or landing page by
enabling or disabling the checkboxes in the Track column.
3. Click Done when you are finished.
Should you choose not to use the hyperlinks manager, you can still configure hyperlinks in your emails
and landing pages in the corresponding editors using the right-click functionality or by selecting the
image or text and clicking Hyperlink from the toolbar in the left-hand pane.
784 of 1162
16 Insight (Reporting)
Eloqua Insight is a powerful revenue reporting and analytics application. It integrates data from your
online marketing channels and the sales pipeline from your CRM system, to provide you with a single
place to analyze the impact that your campaigns are having on revenue.
When you want to view data in Eloqua Insight, you execute either a report or dashboard. A report is a
request for specific data that has a defined layout and format.
For more information about Insight, please take a look at our Insight guides:
Insight Reporter User Guide
Insight Report Details Guide
Insight Analyzer Introduction User Guide
Insight Analyzer Advanced User Guide
Insight Data Model (Attributes and Metrics) Guide
16.1 Insight Data Model (Attributes and Metrics)

The structure of the document mirrors the folder structure in Eloqua Insight. You can also search this
document for the attribute or metric you wish to use.
What are Attributes and Metrics?

In Eloqua Insight, the items that you want to report on are referred to as Attributes. An attribute is
usually a noun. For example, an Email, Form, Landing Page, and Campaign are all attributes. But
other items' data that describe or are directly related to those items are also attributes, such as
campaign start date, campaign type, email send date, etc. Attributes are the items that normally
appear on the left hand side of reports. They are the criteria by which you wish to run the report.
Metrics are the results of activities that occurred for a particular attribute. For example, # of Emails
sent, # of Emails opened, # of visits to a web page, # of Form submissions are all metrics.
The majority of reports that you will view or create have both attributes and metrics.
Attributes
Account Folder
Description
Account
Name of Account
Address 1
First line of Address
Address 2
Second line of Address
785 of 1162
Address 3
Third line of Address
Business Phone
Business Phone
City
City
Country
Country
Date Created
Date Created
State/Province
State or Province
Zip/Postal Code
Zip Code or Postal Code

MS CRM Account ID
NetSuite Customer Address ID
NetSuite Customer ID
Integration Fields:
SalesLogix Account Address ID
SFDC Account ID
Siebel OnDemand Account ID
Campaign Folder
Description
Emails Sent
Emails Opened
Email Click-throughs
Email Bouncebacks
Email Unsubscribe
Email Visitors
Emails Received
Possible Email Forwards
Activity Type
Form Submitted
Landing Page Visits
Note: Clients may see some of the

following attributes as well:
Print Mail Sends
Call Center Calls
Search Campaign Visits
Online Referral Visits
786 of 1162
Batches Sent to Distribution List

Emails Sent to Distribution List
Contact Group Add
Company Group Add
Prospect Group Add
Hypersite Visits
Event Registration
Put on Waiting List
Surveys Sent
Surveys Completed
Fax Send
Hypersite Page Visits
Campaign
Name of Campaign
End Date of Campaign - The time saved for
the campaign end date is 11:59:59 pm ET.
Once the campaign reaches the end
date/time, the campaign is deactivated. In
addition, the standard prompt in Insight that
Campaign End Date
asks the user to specify the time span or

range for the active campaigns for inclusion in
the report, relies on both the start date and end
date to determine if the campaign was active
at any point in the time span or range
selected.
Most recent response date and time that the
lead (i.e. responder) was first associated to
Campaign Lead Association Date
the campaign.
This is a standard campaign field where you

select the product (if any) that the campaign
Campaign Product
was for. If you want to use a pick list for this

field, you set that up in the campaign fields
area under Setup.
Campaign Region
This is a standard campaign field where you

select the region (if any) that the campaign
787 of 1162
was for. If you want to use a pick list for this

field, you set that up in the campaign fields
area under Setup.
Start date of Campaign. This field is for
reporting purposes only. The campaign is not
actually set to active status on the start date.
The time saved for the start date is 12:00:00
am ET. Like Campaign End Date, it is used in
Campaign Start Date
the standard Campaign Active prompt to

determine if the campaign was active during
that time. Not necessarily running on Eloquas
campaign canvas but considered active by
the marketer, as there may have been activity
on the campaign outside of the Eloqua
system.
This is a standard campaign field where the
Campaign Type
user selects the type (if any) that the

campaign was for. To make this field a pick
list, navigate to the Setup function in the
campaign fields area.
Created by User
Name of user who created the campaign.
Contact Folder
Description
Address 1
First line of Contact's address
Address 2
Second line of Contact's address
Address 3
Third line of Contact's address
Business Phone
Business phone number
City
Contact's City
Company
Contact's Company name
Contact Name
Contacts first and last name combined in one

field.
Country
Contact's Country
Date/Time Created
Date and Time Contact was created in Eloqua
Email Address
Contact's Email Address

Domain of Contact's Email Address (e.g.
Eloqua.com). If you are creating a filter to
Email Address Domain
include everyone at a particular company

(domain), your report will run faster if you do
an exact match on the domain, rather than a
contains or ends with filter on the email
788 of 1162
address field.
Status of Contact's Email (subscribed,
Email Address Status
unsubscribed, validated, Bounceback, etc.)
Fax
Contact's Fax Number
First Name
Contact's First Name
Last Name
Contact's Last Name
Mobile Phone
Contact's Mobile Phone Number
Salesperson
Salesperson for Contact
State/Province
State or Province of Contact's location
Title
Contact's Title (e.g. Mr., Mrs., Ms., Dr., etc.)
Zip/Postal Code
Zip Code or Postal Code in Contact's address

Last Siebel OnDemand
Campaign Name
Last Siebel OnDemand
Campaign Status
MS CRM Account ID
MS CRM Contact ID
MS CRM Email Opt Out
MS CRM Lead ID
MS CRM Lead Rating
NetSuite Contact Address
ID
Integration Fields:
NetSuite Contact ID
NetSuite Customer ID
NetSuite Email Opt Out
NetSuite Lead Rating
SalesLogix Account
Address ID
SalesLogix Account ID
SalesLogix Contact
Address ID
SlaesLogix Contact ID
SalesLogix LeadAddress ID
789 of 1162
SalesLogix Lead ID
SFDC Account ID
SFDC Contact ID
SFDC Email OptOut
SFDC Lead ID
SFDC Lead Rating
Siebel OnDemand Account
ID
Siebel OnDemand Contact
ID
Siebel OnDemand Email
Opt Out
Siebel OnDemand Lead ID
Siebel OnDemand Lead
Rating
Siebel OnDemand Province
Siebel OnPremise Account
ID
Siebel OnPremise Contact
ID
Siebel OnPremise Lead ID
Aspect 1
Lead Scoring:
Aspect 2
Contact Model Definitions
Email Folder
Description
Bounceback Folder
Bounceback Date/Time
Bounceback From Address
Bounceback Message
Bounceback Type
The date/time that the email bounced back

Either the branded or standard bounceback
address configured for the install.
Additional detail provided by the SMTP server
on the bounceback.
Contact Upload, Filter
790 of 1162
Indicates whether the bounce back was

processed via our main bounceback filter or
via a contact upload. I dont see cases where
it would be set to Unknown
SMTP Error Code
Error code from the SMTP server
SMTP Reply Code
Reply code from the SMTP server
Click-Through Folder
Click-Through Link
Click Through Query String Value
Click-Through Date/Time
The URL set up to have click-through

tracking.
The query string information that was on the
tracked URL.
The date and time the click-through occurred
(rounded to the hour).
Indicates if the click through was done by an
Existing Customer
existing contact or by a new visitor not yet in

Eloqua: 1 = existing customer, 0 = new
customer.
Email Send Folder

Email Sent DateTime
Full date/time that the email was sent
Recipient Email Address
The email address of the recipient of the email

The email domain of the recipient of the email
(e.g. Eloqua.com). If you are doing a filter to
include everyone at a particular company
Recipient Email Address Domain
(domain), your report will run faster if you do

an exact match on the domain, rather than a
contains or ends with filter on the email
address field.
Unsubscribe Folder
Spam Unsubscribe
Spam Unsubscribe Date/Time
Spam Unsubscription Email Address
Spam Unsubscription Email Subject Line
Unsubscribe Date/Time
Date/time that the spam unsubscribe was

processed, rounded to the hour.
Email address of the spam unsubscription
Subject line of the email where the spam
unsubscribe request originated.
Date/time that the unsubscribe was
processed, rounded to the hour.
A batch is a specific set of emails that are
Email Batch
sent out of the Eloqua system in a group. This

field is the name given to the email batch, and
791 of 1162
displays the email name and the date/time by

which all the emails in that batch were sent. If
you break up an email send so that it only
sends x number of emails at a time, or only
during certain hours, there will likely be
multiple batches in your overall email send. In
addition, if you have a campaign that
continually brings in new contacts to be
emailed, there will be multiple batches sent.
Test Send
Email Batch
Quicksend
Personal Email to 1 Person (this is an Engage
email to one person)
Personal Email to 2 or more people (this is an
Engage email to more than one person)
Email Delivery Type
Form Processing
Note: Clients may also see these additional
types:
Ongoing Email
Refer a Friend
Email Stress Test
Simple Email
Email Group
Name of the Email Group
Email Name
Name of the Email
Email Open Date/Time
Date/Time Email was opened; time is rounded

to the hour.
Email Subject Line
Subject line of the Email
Form
Description
Field Name
Name of the field on the Form

-Specify a new form to be placed on a website
or to be used in an e-mail campaign
Form Host Type:
-Integrate with an existing form on a website

-Integrate with an existing form in an Email or
792 of 1162
otherwise not publicly accessible

-Use internally in Eloqua as an agent proxy
form
Form Name
Name of the Form
Form Submission Type
The type of Form Submission
Form Submit Date/Time
Date/Time Form was submitted; time is

rounded to the hour.
Geography
Description
City (from IP)
City detected from contact's IP address
Country (from IP)
Country detected from contact's IP address
State/Province (from IP)

Zip/Postal Code (from IP)
State or Province detected from contact's IP

address
Zip Code or Postal Code detected from
contact's IP address
Landing Page
Description
Landing Page
Name of Landing Page
Lead
Description
When a contact in Eloqua responds to a
campaign (ie. performs an activity that you
have identified as a response rule), a lead is
Lead
then created for that contact. There can only

be one lead for a contact. That lead is then
associated to other campaigns if they respond
to the campaign.
Lead Age [days]

Lead Created Date/Time
Age of lead in days, from creation time to

today.
Date/Time Lead was created in Eloqua, by the
contact responding to its first campaign.
Date/time the response was made (time is
rounded to the hour). If used in conjunction
Lead Response Date/Time
with the lead and campaign attributes, the

lead's date/time of the response will be
displayed.
Opportunity
Description
Opportunity
Name of Opportunity
793 of 1162
Opportunity Closed Date/Time

Opportunity Created Date/Time
Opportunity ForecastToCloseDate
Opportunity Stage Status
Probability of Closing
Revenue Suite Folder (Available only if you have

purchased and enabled Revenue Suite)
Funnel
Funnel Stage
Date/Time Opportunity was closed pulled

from the CRM
Date/Time Opportunity was created pulled
from the CRM
Date Opportunity is forecast to close pulled
from the CRM
Status of Opportunity Stage
The % probability that the Opportunity will
close, pulled from the CRM.
Description
The name of the activated funnel.
The custom funnel stage names based on the
client configuration.
Marketing
Funnel Stage Category

Sales
Prospect
Qualified Lead
Sales Accepted Lead
Sales Qualified Lead
Funnel Stage Type
Revenue
Expired
Disqualified
Closed/Lost
Disqualified
Demand Model
Metric Category
Metric Name
Segment
Contact List
Name of Shared Contact List
Last Evaluated Date/Time
Date/Time Segment was last evaluated
Segment
Segment Name
794 of 1162
Time Folder
Description
Day
Date of week
Fiscal Month
Fiscal Quarter
Fiscal Week
Fiscal Year
Fiscal Month (based on the Fiscal Start Month

you set up)
Fiscal Quarter (based on the Fiscal Start
Month you set up)
Fiscal Week (based on the Fiscal Start Month
you set up)
Fiscal Year (based on the Fiscal Start Month
you set up)
Hour
Hour
Month
Calendar Month
Quarter
Calendar Quarter
Week
Calendar Week number
Year
Calendar Year
User
Description
User
Name of the User in Eloqua
Visitor
Description
Browser Type
Company DNS Name
Company From IP
Current Total Pages
Visitor's Browser Type (e.g. Firefox, Internet

Explorer, etc.)
Name of the Company the visitor is from, if it
can be determined from the DNS
Name of the Company that Eloqua derives
from the IP address.
Number of Total Pages that were visited in the
current (most recent) visit
This would key off the setup in Setup |
Customer Flag
Tracking | IP Filters | Visitors to be filtered

from Analytics.
First Marketing Campaign

First Marketing Channel
First Marketing Campaign that the visitor

entered through
First Marketing Channel that the visitor
entered through
First Page in Visit
First Page that the visitor visited
First Visit Date/Time
Date/Time that the visitor first visited
Host Name
Host name URL for the visitor
795 of 1162
IP Address
IP Address of visitor
Full start date/time of the last visit
Last Visit Date/Time

Most Recent Form Submitted
Name of the most recent Form submitted
Most Recent Search Query
Most recent search query
Visitor Name
ID of Visitor
Web Tracking
Description
Browser
Browser Version
Entry Search Query
Entry Web Page
Exit Web Page
Keyword
Last Page In Visit
Microsite
Name of the browser the visitor used (e.g. IE,

Netscape, Firefox, etc.)
The version of the browser used by the visitor
(e.g. Firefox 10.1)
The search query used to get to the Entry
Web Page
The first page the visitor viewed in the session
tracked by Eloqua.
The last page the visitor viewed before leaving
the session tracked by Eloqua.
The individual words used in the search
queries.
Last page visited in the session tracked by
Eloqua.
Microsite URL as set up in Eloqua.
Page Tags are used to tag web pages so that
they can be easily and quickly shown in
Page Tag
reporting. The page tag attribute is the name

you gave the page tag when you created it in
Eloqua.
Page Tag group is a way to group together
Page Tag Group
several page tags created for reporting

purposes.
Page View Date/Time

Previous Web Page
Query String Cluster
Date/time the page was viewed (rounded to

the last hour)
Page viewed prior to current page
This allows you to group together query string
groups into a cluster for reporting purposes.
This allows you to group together query string
Query String Cluster Group
parameters into a group for reporting

purposes.
796 of 1162
Query String Parameter
The parameter name you set up in the Query

String area under the Setup menu in Eloqua.
Query String Parameter Set

Query String Parameter Value
The values captured for the query string

parameter.
This allows you to see a set of URLs that
contain specific parameters . You determine
Query String Set
if the URLs must contain all or some of the

parameters selected in order to be in the set.
URL of web page that referred the visitor to
Referring URL
the Eloqua tracked session.
Search Query
Search query string

Name of the referring source (e.g. Google,
Source
Bing, Linked In, Facebook, Referrer Website,

or a particular Eloqua email).
More detailed information on the source. For
example, for search engines, it can be
country-specific information (e.g. Google (CA)
Source Domain
or Google (UK)). For referrer website, its the

actual URL. For Eloqua emails, the source
domain is Eloqua Email.
Email
No Referrer
Source Type
Search Engine
Social Media
Website
Sub Site
Name of the subsite set up in Eloqua
Visit Date/Time
Date/Time that the website was visited

Levels of menu clicks (1-2, 3-5, or more than
Visitor Click Depth
5)
Web Page
Web Page URL
Metrics
Campaigns Folder
Description
Activities and Responses Folder

Average Responses
Total Responses/Number of Campaigns
Inbound Activity Rate
[Total number of Inbound Activities/Total number
797 of 1162
of Campaign Members]*100
Response Rate
Total Inbound Activities
Total Outbound Activities
Total Responses
Unique Inbound Activities
[Total number of Responses/Total number of

Campaign Members]*100
Sum of all inbound activities for an individual
campaign or folder.
Sum of all outbound activities for an individual
campaign or folder.
Sum of all responses for an individual campaign
or folder.
Total inbound activities deduplicated by Contact
ID across each campaign.
Unique Inbound Activity
[Total number of unique inbound activities/Total
Rate
number of campaign members]*100
Unique Outbound Activities

Unique Response Rate
Unique Responses
Total outbound activities deduplicated by

Contact ID across each campaign.
[Total number of unique responses/Total number
of campaign members]*100
Total responses deduplicated by Contact ID
across each campaign.
Budget and Cost Folder

Actual Cost
Actual Cost entered for the campaign
Budgeted Cost
Budgeted Cost entered for the campaign

Total Actual Cost of the Campaign / Total
Cost/Attributed Opportunity
number of Opportunities (open, won or lost)

associated with the Campaign using the
attributed revenue model.
Cost/Attributed Opportunity
Won

number of won Opportunities associated with the
Campaign using the attributed revenue model.
Total Actual Cost of the Campaign / Total Won
Cost/Attributed Revenue
Revenue associated to the Campaign using the

attributed revenue model
Cost / Inbound Activity
Total actual cost of the campaign(s)/Total

number of inbound activities
Cost/Influenced Opportunity
number of Opportunities (open, won or lost)

associated with the Campaign using the
influenced revenue model.
Cost/Influenced Opportunity Total Actual Cost of the Campaign / Total

Won
number of won Opportunities associated with the
798 of 1162
Campaign using the influenced revenue model.

Total Actual Cost of the Campaign / Total Won
Cost/Influenced Revenue
Revenue associated to the Campaign using the

Influenced revenue model
Cost / Lead
Cost / Response

number of leads
number of responses
Cost / Response by New
Leads
number of responses by new leads
Cost / Unique Inbound
Activity
number of unique inbound activities
Cost / Unique Lead

number of unique leads
Leads Folder
Lead Age (Avg)
Lead Age (Max)
New Leads
The average age across the leads for the

attribute chosen.
The longest age across the leads for the attribute
chosen.
First response that a contact makes for the
attributes chosen.
Total Leads
The total leads for the attributes chosen.
Unique Leads
Total leads deduplicated by Contact ID
Revenue, ROI and Opportunities Folder

The amount of revenue associated to the won
Attributed Revenue
Opportunities based on the attributed revenue

model.
The amount of revenue associated to lost
Attributed Revenue Lost

model.
The amount of revenue associated to open
Attributed Revenue Open

model.
Attributed ROI
[Attributed Revenue - Actual Cost]/Actual Cost
Average # of Opportunities
Total Opportunity Count/Number of Campaigns

Total revenue of the Opportunity is given to all
Influenced Revenue
campaigns where the Contact linked to that

Opportunity responded to that campaign.
Influenced Revenue Lost
The amount of revenue associated to lost

Opportunities based on the influenced revenue
799 of 1162
model.
The amount of revenue associated to the open
Influenced Revenue Open
Opportunities based on the influenced revenue

model.
Influenced ROI
[Influenced Revenue - Actual Cost]/Actual Cost
Total Attributed
Count of all attributed Opportunities for an
Opportunities
individual campaign.
Total Attributed
The attributed dollar value of the lost
Opportunities Lost
Opportunities
Total Attributed
The attributed dollar value of the won
Opportunities Won
Opportunities
Total Unique Opportunities
Total Opportunities deduplicated by Opportunity

ID
(Total attributed revenue of the Opportunity)*
Weighted Attributed
(Probability of closing %) is given to all
Revenue
campaigns where the contact linked to that

Opportunity responded to the campaign.
(Total influenced revenue of the Opportunity)*
Weighted Influenced
(Probability of closing %) is given to all
Revenue
campaigns where the contact linked to that

Opportunity responded to the campaign.
(Total revenue of the Opportunity)*(Probability of
Weighted Revenue
closing %) is given to all campaigns where the

contact linked to that Opportunity responded to
the campaign.
Campaign Count
Number of campaigns
Campaign Members
Total number of members in Campaign
Contacts Folder
Description
New Contacts
Number of new contacts
Total Contacts
Number of total contacts
Emails Folder
Description
Activities Folder
Clicked Sents
Click Through Link Count
Click Through Rate
Number of Emails sent that were clicked at least

once
Number of times a specific link was clicked
through
Number of Unique Click Throughs/Total Emails
800 of 1162
Delivered
Click to To Open Rate
Number of Unique Opens/Total Emails Delivered

Click throughs by contacts who were already
Existing Visitor Click Through
visitors in Eloqua (i.e. had previously visited a

tracked page or clicked through on a link).
Form Conversion Rate by Email
Total Number of form conversions/Total emails

delivered
Most Recent Click Through Date
Date the most recent click through occurred
Most Recent Open Date
Date the most recent open occurred

Click throughs by contacts who are new visitors
New Visitor Click Throughs
in Eloqua (i.e. had never visited a tracked page or

clicked through on a link).
Open Sents
Open Rate
Possible Email Forwards
Possible Forwarders
Possible Forward Rate
Total Click Throughs
Total Form Submissions from Emails
Total Opens
Unique Click Through Rate
Unique Click Throughs
Number of emails sents that were opened at

least once
Total opens/Total Emails delivered
Number of Emails that were possibly forwarded
by the recipients
Number of recipients that possibly forwarded the
Email
Possible Forwarders/Total Emails delivered
Number of times tracked links in the Email were
clicked
Total number of form submissions/Total emails
delivered
Number of times the Email was opened
Unique number of Unique Click Throughs/Total
Emails Delivered
Number of contacts that clicked on tracked links
in the Email
Unique Form Conversion Rate from
Unique number of form conversion/Total emails
Emails
delivered
Unique Form Submissions from Emails
Unique number of form submissions/Total emails

delivered
Unique Open Rate
Unique opens/Total Emails delivered
Unique Opens
Number of contacts that opened the Email
Deliverability Folder
Bounceback Rate
Number of Unique bouncebacks/Total sends
Delivered Rate
Number of unique Emails delivered/Total sends
Global Unsubscribe Rate
Total number of unsubscribes from all Emails /
801 of 1162
Total sends
Hard Bounceback Rate
Unique Hard Bouncebacks/Total sends
Soft Bounceback Rate
Unique Soft Bouncebacks/Total sends
Total Bouncebacks
Total Delivered
Total Global Unsubscribes
Total Hard Bouncebacks
Total Personal Sends
Total Sends
Total Soft Bouncebacks
Total Spam Unsubscribes
Number of Emails that were recorded as a

Bounceback (hard or soft)
Emails Sent - Hard Bouncebacks - Soft
Bouncebacks
Total number of unsubscribes
Number of Emails that were recorded as Hard
Bouncebacks.
Number of Emails sent from Eloqua for Microsoft
Outlook or Engage.
Number of Emails that were sent.
Number of Emails that were recorded as Soft
Bouncebacks
Total unsubscriptions done via the spam
unsubscribe process.
The number of Emails that were sent from
Total Templated Sends
Engage or Eloqua for Microsoft Outlook

templates.
Total Unsubscribes
Contacts who unsubscribed from Emails in this

batch
Total Agents Who Sent Batches
Total number of unique users who sent batches
Total Batches Sent
Total number of batches sent
Forms Folder
Description
% of Fields Complete
Percent of completed fields in a submission
% of Fields Incomplete
Percent of incomplete fields in a submission
% of Fields Incomplete by Field
Incomplete Fields/Total Fields
Form Completed Fields
Number of fields completed on Form
Form Conversion Rate from Email
Number of Form submissions/Total Emails

delivered
Form Count
Number of Forms
Form Field Number
Number of fields in the Form
Form Field Value
Value of a field during form submission
Form Submitted Sents

Form Submit to Click Through Rate
Number of Emails sent with at least one form

submission
Number of Form submissions/Click Throughs
802 of 1162
Form Submit to Delivered Rate
Number of Form submissions/Delivered Emails
Form Submit to Open Rate
Number of Form submissions/Opens
Form Submit to Send Rate
Number of Form submissions/Sends
Form Submit to Visitor Rate
Number of Form submissions/Visitors
Form Total Fields
Total number of fields on Form
Total Form Submissions
Total number of Form submissions
Total Form Views
Number of times the Form was viewed.
Unique Form Submissions
Revenue Suite Folder (Visible only if you have

purchased and enabled Revenue Suite)
Total Form submissions deduplicated by Contact

ID
Description
Avg Lead Cnt
Average Lead Count
Avg Opp First Lead Age
Average Opportunity First Lead age
Avg Opportunity Cnt
Average Opportunity count
Avg Opp Primary Lead Age
Average Opportunity Primary Lead Age
Avg Primary Contact Cnt
Average Primary Contact Count
Funnel Value
Funnel Value
Lead Age (Median)
Median Lead Age
Lead Age in Stage (Avg)
Average Lead Age in Stage
Max Lead Cnt
Maximum Lead Count
Max Opportunity Cnt
Maximum Opportunity Count
Max Primary Contact Cnt
Maximum Primary Contact Count
Max Primary Contact Cnt - MQL Stage
Maximum Primary Contact Count in MQL Stage
Max Primary Contact Cnt - Prospect Stage
Maximum Primary Contact Count in Prospect

Stage
Max Primary Contact Cnt - SAL Stage
Maximum Primary Contact Count in SAL Stage
Max Primary Contact Cnt - SQL Stage
Maximum Primary Contact Count in SQL Stage
Median Opp First Lead Age

Prospect Close Rate
Median Age of the Lead first linked to the

opportunity
Conversion Rate from first prospect stage to
closed won revenue
Total Closed Deals
Total Closed Deals
Total New Primary Contacts
Total New Primary Contacts
Total New Primary Contacts - Prospect Stage
Total New Primary Contacts in Prospect Stage
Time Folder
First DateHour
First Date Hour in the calendar. Value = 01 Jan
803 of 1162
1900 12:00 am
Last DateHour
Last Date Hour in the calendar. Value = 06 Jun

2079 12:00 am
Web Tracking Folder

# of Navigations For a Page
% of Keyword
% of Query String Clusters
% of Query String Parameter
Number of navigations to a page from another

page
Keyword value count/Total Keyword values
recorded
Query String Cluster Value Count/Total Query
String Cluster values recorded
Query String Parameter Value Count/Total Query
String Parameter values recorded
Average Page Time
Total Page Time/Total Page Views
Average Page Views per Visit
Total Page Views/Total Visits
Average Page Views per Visitor
Total Page Views/Total Visitors

Common web analysis metric representing the %
Bounce Rate
of visitors who left your site after viewing only the

Landing Page
Contact Visitors
Total visitors linked to Contacts
Count of Search Query
Number of times the Search Query was recorded
Entry Page Views

Exit Page Views
Form Abandonment Rate
Form Conversion Rate
Form Conversion Rate - Unique Forms; Form
Submits / Unique Page Views
Keyword Value Count
Number of views of the entry web page within a

session
Number of views of the exit web page within a
session
Percent of people who viewed Forms but do not
submit them.
Form submits/Total page views
Form submits/Unique page views
Number of times a keyword value has been
recorded (from a search engine)
Last Page In Visit
Last Page in the session (visit)
Last Visit Date
Date/time of the last visit
Navigation Rate
Number of navigations for a page/Total

navigations for the site
Number of Total Visitors who are net new to the
New Visitors
database (Visitor ID created in the time range of

the report)
804 of 1162
Non-Contact Visitors
PageViewsWithNoFormSubmits
Query String Cluster Value Count
Query String Parameter Value Count
Returning Visitors
Return Visitor Rate
Total Keyword Value Count
Total Navigations for Site
Total New Visitors
Total Visitors who are not linked to contacts

Number of web page Pages Viewed with no
Form submits
Number of times a query string cluster value has
been recorded
Number of times a query string parameter value
has been recorded
Total number of visitors with an existing visitor
ID who visited in the time range specified
Total Returning Visitors/Total Visitors
Number of times the keyword value was
recorded.
Number of navigations for the site
Total number of visitors who visited in the time
range and did not have an existing Visitor ID
Total Page Time
Sum of the time spent on each web page
Total Page Views
Number of times a web page was viewed
Total Page Views by Contact Visitors

Total Page Views by Non-Contact Visitors
Total Page Views in Session
Total Query String Cluster Value Count
Total Query String Parameter Value Count
Number of times a web page was viewed by

visitors who are linked to contacts
Number of times a web page was viewed by
visitors who are not linked to contacts
Number of page views in the visit session
Number of values recorded for the parameters in
the query string cluster
Number of values recorded for the parameters in
the query string
Total Visitors
Total number of visits deduplicated by Visitor ID
Total Visits
Total number of visit sessions by all visitors
Total Visits (Bounced)

Total Visits by Contact Visitors
Total Visits by Non-Contact Visitors
Unique Form Submissions
Total number of bounced visit sessions by all

visitors
Total number of visit sessions by visitors who
are linked to contacts
Total number of visit sessions by visitors who
are not linked to contacts
Total form submissions deduplicated by Visitor
ID
Unique Page Views
Total Page Views, deduplicated by Visitor ID
Unique Visitors
Total visitors deduplicated by Visitor ID
805 of 1162
16.2 Insight Subject Areas

A subject area is a collection of attributes and metrics that are compatible with each other when
creating custom reports in Eloqua Insight.
The purpose of subject areas is to facilitate custom report creation by providing combinations of
attributes and metrics that are supported. Reports are easier and faster to create by displaying only
compatible options.
806 of 1162
The following subject areas are currently available:

Campaign Responses by Start Date
Email Activities by Sent Date
Email Bouncebacks
Email Clickthroughs
Email Opens
807 of 1162
Email Unsubscribes
Form Submits
Each subject areas folder contains sub-folders listing the possible attributes and metrics that can be
combined during custom report creation.
Example: A report can be created with attributes of email name and email subject line, and
metrics of total sends and total opens.
16.3 Exporting Insight Reports

When exporting a Report, first you must run the report in Insight by specifying the Report, selecting the
Time Span or Range, choosing the asset, and selecting OK to populate the reporting data.
When exporting a report in Insight, ensure that the option to export is enabled. As a Customer Admin
you can double check if this option is enabled by checking the particular user's access settings.
To verify that the export data option is enabled:

1. Setup > Users.
2. Specify the User and scroll down until you see the Reporting Access option in the Edit User
Window.
3. Enable the option to export data.
To export a report in Insight:

1. Run the report
2. Choose the Home tab and select the drop down option Export.
3. Choose to either export the Insight Data as a PDF, Excel, or Email.
16.4 Reporting on Custom Fields withInsight

You can now report on Custom Fields that are created in Eloqua.
To report on a custom field with Insight:
808 of 1162
1. Create a Custom Field

2. Add the Custom Field to a report
Creating a custom field

To create a Custom Field:
1. Click Settings > Setup in the navigation bar at the top of the application window.
2. Select Fields & Views.

Custom Fields can be created on Contacts, Accounts and Campaigns. Fields can have text, numeric
or date/time formats.
809 of 1162
Adding a custom field to a report:

To add a custom field to a report:
1. In Eloqua Insight, open an existing report, or create a new report.
2. Select the the Custom Field you wish to add to the report. The Custom Field is listed as an
atribute under the Account, Contact or Campaign folder according to where the Custom Field
was created. Each Custom Field type is located in its own folder.
Notes:
You can quickly find a Custom Field by searching for the name in the search bar in the left-hand
(navigation) pane.
There is a limit of 250 Custom Fields per data type (text, number, date/time) that are replicated
to Insight.
After adding a custom field in Eloqua you may need to wait up to ten minutes for the field to
show up in Insight.
16.5 Saving Insight reports

When saving a report, first you must run the report in Insight by specifying the Report, selecting the
Time Span or Range, choosing the asset, and selecting OK to populate the reporting data.
You have the option of saving the Insight data as a Report, Filter, or template.
810 of 1162
To save a report in Insight:

1. Selecting the Home tab on the menu.
2. Choose the option Save As. (Please note: that there is also a save icon below the Home drop
down menu).
16.6 Creating a Heat Map in Insight

A Heat Map (also called treemaps) display a combination of colored rectangles, each representing an
element of data. Heat maps enable you to grasp the state and impact of a large number of variables at
once. The size of each rectangle represents its relative weight. The color represents the relative
change in the value of a rectangle.
Here are instructions on how to create a Heat Map as an Analyzer user in Insight:
Note: This posting assumes that you have some experience creating custom Insight reports and
dashboards as an Analyzer user.
Also, Eloqua University offers a three-hour, instructor-led course on using Eloqua Insight as an
Analyzer user, Eloqua10: Insight for Analyzer. For more information on Eloqua University and its
course offerings, please click here.
Scenario: Create a Heat Map where the Rectangles represent the Campaign Region, the size of the
rectangle represent the Total Delivered emails in that campaign region and the color of the rectangle
represents the Clickthrough Rate (Number of Total Clickthroughs / Total Emails Delivered).
The end result will look as follows:
811 of 1162
To create a heatmap in Insight:

1. Open Eloqua Insight (as an Analyzer user) and select Create a Blank Report.
2. Add the three attributes/metrics you'll need for the Heat Map: Campaign Region,Total Delivered
and Clickthrough Rate:
3. Save this report and call it whatever you wish. You will use this report as your dataset for your heat
map. Heat Maps are created in dashboards, which can import attributes/metrics in the form of
datasets.
4. Select Create Dashboard and choose the Dashboard Template 'Two Panels with Title'.
5. Navigate to Insert > Header > Widgets > Flash > Heat Map to insert a flash Heat Map.
6. Click anywhere on the Dashboard Panel. The Heat Map will be inserted wherever you click and will
look like a report grid:
812 of 1162
7. Add a dataset to the dashboard by clicking on the report icon under 'Dataset Objects'.
8. In a new window, you will be prompted to select a dataset. Choose the report that you saved in step
3. The attributes/metrics from that report will appear under 'Dataset Objects' and will be available to
use in this dashboard.
9. Drag and drop the attributes/metrics onto the grid in the Panel. Note: Make sure to place the
attributes/metrics in the same order you added them in step 2. The order of the metric will change
which metric is used to represent the rectangle size and color.
813 of 1162
10. Run the dashboard in Flash by clicking on the Flash Mode button.
11. The Heat Map is complete. The size of the rectangle represents the Total Delivered emails and the
color represents the Clickthrough Rate. As you can see, the most emails were delivered to North
America, but the clickthrough rate in Asia Pacific had the best results of all the campaign regions.
814 of 1162
12. You can make additional changes to the Heat Map by right clicking on the map and choosing
Interactive.
16.7 Insight Dashboards

The following Insight dashboards are available:
Benchmark Dashboards
Benchmark Dashboard: This dashboard shows your performance trend compared to
other Eloqua clients.
Campaign Dashboards
Campaign Activity Performance Dashboard: The Campaign Activity Performance
dashboard provides a view into the overall success of an entire campaign or set of
campaigns.
Campaign Opportunity Analysis: Shows Attributed Revenue by month and by
campaign, clicking on a specific campaign will show you details about its associated
opportunities.
Campaign and Email Engagement Analysis: This dashboard provides a visual overview
of how all of your various campaigns are performing so you can find the emails that are
driving those results.
Marketing Campaign ROI: Shows cost vs. pipeline dollars revenue to determine the
profitability of all campaigns.
Closed-Loop ReportingDashboards
Opportunity Influence: This dashboard shows the influence (i.e. responses) that a
particular contact or set of contacts has on an opportunity.
Return: Revenue Performance Dashboard: This dashboard features overall revenue
results, overall campaign revenue performance, and top and bottom performing
campaigns.
Revenue Analysis by Campaign Region: This dashboard details results by Campaign
Region including attributed and influenced revenue, ROI, and Top 10.
Revenue Analysis by Campaign Product: This dashboard details results by
Campaign Product including attributed and influenced revenue, ROI, and Top 10.
Revenue Analysis by Campaign Type: This dashboard details results by Campaign
Type including attributed and influenced revenue, ROI, and Top 10.
815 of 1162
Contact Dashboards
Database Health Dashboard: This dashboard shows trends and details on the health of
the contact database including active/inactive contacts, field completeness, and
communication frequency.
Lead Scoring Dashboard: This dashboard displays contacts by lead score, profile score,
and engagement score.
Email Dashboards
Email Performance Dashboard: This dashbard shows the overall email performance and
trends as well as performance against benchmark.
Form Dashboards
Form Performance Dashboard: This dashboard shows the form conversion rate trend,
top form performance by campaign and by country, as well as form field abandonment.
Landing Page Dashboards
Landing Page Analysis: This dashboard provides a weekly overview of Landing Page
views, split by Campaign Type. You can use this dashboard to discover trends and
make comparisons by interacting with the various data points.
Landing Page Performance Trend: Trend report that shows the average page views
by visit and visitor for visits in the date range specified. The user chooses the fiscal or
calendar timeframe they want to see the trend for, when they run the report.
Landing Page Performance Dashboard: This dashboard shows landing page
performance and trends in a summary and broken out by referring sources.
Website Dashboards
Website Traffic Analysis: This dashboard shows the website traffic performance and
trends including top pages by traffic volume and traffic by referring sources.
Website Trends Analysis: Shows the trend of Webpage views for the date range
selected, and allows users to see the distribution of visits by Page Tag Groups and Page
Tags. Clicking on a Page Tag in the Treemap will show a series of trend lines for URLs
with that Tag.
Visitor Click Depth: Shows the number of page views per visit to the website.
Website Performance Trend: Shows the average page views by visits and visitors by
week for the date range selected. THe user specifies which time range (i.e. fiscal or
calendar hour, day, week, quarter or year) when they run the report.
816 of 1162
16.7.1 Benchmark Dashboard

This dashboard shows your performance trend compared to other Eloqua clients.
What does the term "benchmarking" mean to you and your organization? A report card? A set of
metrics? A high water mark? A continuous improvement process? It's all this and more, but I think it is
best summarized by the title of the landmark book by Dr. Robert Camp, entitled "Benchmarking: The
Search for Industry Best Practices That Lead to Superior Performance".
After reading this article, you should be able to:
Understand why the Eloqua Benchmark Dashboard able is able to give you results that are
based on facts.
Understand how each metric is calculated
Be able to read the dashboard elements to draw meaningful decisions to pursue superior
performance
For many years, the only tools available to marketers to determine where and how to improve their
performance has been survey based analyst reports and a gut hunch. If I wanted to know what a good
campaign response rate was, I would need to wait for someone to conduct a survey, collect and
analyze the results and then distribute it to me. And after all that, how could I be sure that the survey
participants were reporting accurately? That things had not changed in the interim? That when I
measure my own results to compare, I am using the same definitions that they did?
The Benchmark Dashboard addresses this problem with our own unique solution: the most
comprehensive set of enterprise marketing funnel data on the market. We have literally been building
our products for over a decade by looking at the cold hard results our customer have been achieving to
figure out what works and what does not.
The benchmark dashboard is an Insight Dashboard which allows you to:
see your results right in-line with that of your peers, so you can be sure that you are comparing
apples to apples
look at your own improvement over time and benchmark against your own previous period
results
Your results and that of the benchmark are updated every single day so that you have the very
latest information to make decisions with
Benchmark Metrics
The following metrics are provided in the benchmark dashboard:
817 of 1162
Metric
Definition
Contact Management
Total Contacts
Contact Growth %
Total number of contacts in your database, including bouncebacks and

unsubscribes.
[Total Contacts as of today / Total Contacts as of the beginning of the period] 1, expressed as a percent
% Reachable
Out of the total contacts in your database, the percentage of contacts who have
Contacts
not been flagged as bounced back and/or have not unsubscribed.
% Active of
Out of your Reachable Contacts, the percentage of contacts that have had
Reachable Contacts
inbound activity over the last 6 months.
(last 6 months)
Opt out % of
The portion of unreachable contacts that are unreachable due to having been
unreachable
globally unsubscribed.
Bounceback % of
The portion of unreachable contacts that are unreachable due to their contact
unreachable
record having been flagged as bounced back (i.e. hard bounceback).
Campaign Management
Total Emails Sent
Total number of emails sent in reporting period. Includes emails sent from
campaign canvas, program builder, and sales tools.
Number of unique total opens from emails received in the period / number of
Unique Open Rate
unique total emails received for period being measured, expressed as a

percent.
Unique Click-Through
Rate
Unique Click-to-Open
Rate
% of DB Contacted
by Email
Number of unique total click-throughs from emails received in the period /

number of unique total emails received for period being measured, expressed
as a percent.
Number of unique total click-throughs from emails received in the period /
number of unique total opens for emails received for period being measured,
expressed as a percent.
Unique email recipients / Total Contact in database, expressed as a percent.
Lead Management
Total Unique Visitors
Total Form Submits
Total unique visitors to your Eloqua tracked pages in the reporting period.
Uniqueness determined by Visitor ID (set by CustomerGUID or cookie)
Total number of Eloqua Form submissions recorded in reporting period
Dashboard Elements
Dashboard Modifier
Choose between "This Month", "Last Month", "This Quarter" and "Last Quarter", the dashboard will
update to reflect your choice. In the case of "This Month", or "This Quarter", the dashboard metrics will
reflect results for the calendar month or quarter - up to date as of that morning. For example, on
818 of 1162
December 10th, I run the report with "This Month" selected. Then, the results (both the actuals and the
benchmark) will reflect data from Dec 1st to Dec 9th, inclusive.
Index Modifier
Choose from one of Eloqua's many Benchmark Indices including:

Eloqua Global
Education & Non Profit
Financial Services
High Tech
Insurance
Life Sciences
Manufacturing
Media and Publishing
Services
Telecommunications
Travel, Transport & Leisure
Tab Selector
Navigate between "Contact Management", "Contact Management" and "Lead Management" tabs to
access metrics from each category.
Actual
Your actual results for that metric for the selected period - units vary. Rates expressed as a percentage
have "%" in the name of the metric.
Improvement
Shows the change in your actual results for the selected time period, as expressed from the time period
immediately preceding.
16.7.2 Campaign Activity Performance Dashboard

The Campaign Activity Performance dashboard provides a view into the overall success of an entire
campaign or set of campaigns. The data shown is for all activity on the campaigns selected. That
activity is shown in summary metrics, trend reports, results compared to benchmarks, as well as
where the activity came from (geographically and the originating source).
Learn more about insight attributes and metrics.
819 of 1162
Prompt Page Details

This dashboard runs with the following default settings. However you can re-prompt the dashboard to
change any of these settings in order to see the data that you want on the dashboard.
Campaign Active Date:
Default is set to last 3 months
A campaign is considered active if the campaign start date or end date lies within the
date range, or the start date is before and the end date is after the date range.
Note: this DOES NOT mean the actual status of the campaign is active. The start and
end dates are what you enter in the "Campaign Reporting Runs From:" fields on the campaign
canvas screen before you save the campaign.
If the campaign start and end dates meet the criteria above, then the campaign will be included
in the dashboard. IMPORTANT: All activity for the campaign will be shown, regardless of the
date range chosen on the prompt page. This dashboard is meant to show you how your
campaign did overall and not activity in a particular timeframe.
e.g. You have a campaign that started Jan 1, 2013 and you run the dashboard on April 1,
2013 to show the last month. The campaign ends June 1, 2013 so it's considered active
on April 1 and is included in the data set. But all activity from Jan 1 "April 1 is shown on
the dashboard, and not just the activity that occurred in the last month.
Campaign Active Start and End Date prompts:
Default is blank. If you want to run the dashboard for a particular date range, FIRST
ensure that you set the previous Campaign Active Date time span prompt to none.
Then enter in the start and end date/time you want to use. If you do not enter the start
and end date/time, and keep a time span as well, the dashboard pulls campaigns that
meet both the time span and time range prompts because it is an OR operator between
the time span and time range prompts.
Select Campaign to Display:
Default is none in the selected box, however that means that it will run for all campaigns
that meet the date range criteria you set above. If you want to select particular
campaigns, then search for them and move them to the selected box.
Note: it is an AND operator between the date prompts and this prompt. Therefore the
campaigns that meet BOTH prompt criteria will be shown. If you select a campaign that is not
also active in the time span/range you selected, it will not be included in the dashboard.
820 of 1162
Created by User:
Default is none in the selected box, however that means that it will run for all users. If
you want to select specific users that created the campaign, select those users and
move them to the selected box.
Note: it is an AND operator between the date prompts, the campaign name prompt and this
prompt. Therefore only campaigns that meet the time span/range AND campaign name AND
Created by User prompts will be included in the dashboard.
Dashboard Book
When you run the dashboard you will see that there are two tabs at the top: Overall Activity and
Source & Geography. There are two dashboards shown in the same dashboard 'book' so that it is
convenient to switch between them.
Overall Activity
The purpose of the Overall Activity dashboard is to provide you with a high level overview of the
activity that occurred on the campaigns selected for the dashboard. The date range shown in the top
right corner of the dashboard shows the date range that was selected on the prompt page and it
determines the set of campaigns that were used in the dashboard. All activity for those campaigns is
shown, regardless of when the activity occurred. Therefore the activity numbers shown on this
dashboard are not just the activities that occurred in the date range shown in the top right.
821 of 1162
Campaign Region, Product and Type
1. At the top of the dashboard you will find selectors for campaign region, product and type. They
are three standard campaign fields in the Campaigns & Settings menu in the Campaign area of
Eloqua. If you filled in the values for your campaigns, you can then use those values to filter the
dashboard to provide a deeper analysis of your campaigns. You can customize the values that
are display for each of these fields. For example, you could choose to see the results of
campaigns for Region = North America, Product = Enterprise and Type = Webinar. You can
choose one or multiple values in each of these fields providing the ability to see many different
views of your campaign results.
By default, All is chosen for all three of these fields. However, you can change that by deselecting All
and selecting the values you want. The dashboard will refresh the data after each selection is made.
Activity Summaries
This area provides you with the main activity metrics for Emails, Forms and Landing Pages that were
part of the campaigns selected for the dashboard.
Note: The Emails, Forms and Landing Pages must be on the canvas prior to the activity
occurring for the activity to be attributed to the campaign. As well, if you are sharing Landing
Pages and Forms across multiple campaigns, you MUST pass the Eloqua Campaign ID
properly or else no activity will be recorded at the Campaign level (it is still recorded at the asset
level).
The Full Campaign Analysis Report at the bottom of the summary tables opens in a new window and
provides you with the Campaign Analysis overview report for the campaigns that were selected for this
dashboard.
Trend Reports
The trend report graphs allow you to view different activity rates by different timeframes.
Rates:
Open Rate: Total Opens / Total Delivered, based on the Emails sent for the Campaigns
included.
822 of 1162
Clickthrough Rate: Total Clickthroughs / Total Delivered, based on the Emails sent for
the Campaigns included.
Click to Open Rate: Total Clickthroughs / Total Opens, based on the Emails sent for
the Campaigns included.
Form Conversion Rate from Email: Total Form Submissions / Total Delivered, based
on the Emails sent for the Campaigns included.
For example, if you select Month for the Open Rate trend report, and you see an open rate of 20% in
January 2013, that means that for the Emails sent in the month of January 2013, the Total Opens /
Total Delivered for those sends is 20%. It does not matter if the opens or delivery of the email occurred
in January, 2013. The timeframe for where the rates are shown is dependent on when the Email send
occurred. The Email could be sent on Jan 31, 2013 at 11:59:59 pm and considered delivered on Feb 1,
2013 at 12:00:00 am. Then the open could have occurred at 12:00:01 am on Feb 1, 2013. That open
and delivery would be included in the January 2013 rate as the email send occurred in the month of
January 2013.
Timeframes:
Week
Month
Quarter
Fiscal Quarter
Note: How far back the data goes on these trend reports is dependent on the Campaigns that
are included on the dashboard. For example, if you select a time span of the last three months
for the Campaign Active Date prompt on the prompt page, it pulls in all Campaigns that were
active in the last three months. However, those Campaigns may have been active for a long
time before the last three months as well. The trend reports show all activity for all the
Campaigns included in the dashboard.
Benchmark Gauges
At the bottom of the dashboard are gauges that show you how you are doing with regards to the Eloqua
benchmark. The Eloqua benchmark is calculated by looking at the aggregate data across ALL of our
clients.
Red indicates below the average range
Yellow indicates the average range
Green indicates above the average range
823 of 1162
Source & Geography

The purpose of this dashboard is to provide you with a high level overview and shows where the
activity is coming from geographically, as well as the sources of the traffic. The data shown is for all
activities on the Campaigns that were selected to be used in the dashboard. The date range in the top
right shows the date range used to determine the active Campaigns to select for the dashboard, not the
activity that occurred in that date range.
Note: All web activity reported on in this dashboard only includes Eloqua hosted Landing Pages as
they are the only web pages that you can add to a Campaign on the Campaign Canvas.
These three fields work the same as they did on the Overall Activity dashboard. However, since this
is a separate dashboard, your selections from Overall Activity are not passed here. You need to make
those selections again if you want to see the same values used here.
Campaign Activity
The table shows the web activity and Form submissions based on the IP address of the visitor. By
default the selected geography is Country. You can change that to Province/State or City. This data
is all based on the IP of the visitor and NOT the address information on the contact record. Beside the
table is a graphical view.
Note: A Contact can have more than one visitor. For example, if you visit from your work computer
and your home computer, your Contact will have 2 visitor profiles. The last one that you visited from is
usually your current visitor profile.
Campaign Traffic
Page Views by Source Type: This pie chart shows a quick view into the breakout of traffic by
source. The source can we a website, email, search engine, social media or no referrer (i.e.
direct traffic to the page).
Top 10 Referring sources: This graph shows the top 10 sources for the web traffic related to
the campaigns selected for the dashboard.
Campaign Traffic Trend: This graph shows you the trend of total visits and total visitors
based on the period you choose. You can toggle total visits or visitors on or off and can choose
day, week, month, quarter, fiscal week, fiscal month or fiscal quarter as your period. The
default is to show both total visits and visitors by week.
As with the trend reports on the Overall Activity dashboard, the activity displayed here is all the activity
for the Campaigns selected for the dashboard. Therefore the length of date shown on the x-axis is
determined by when the activity on those Campaigns occurred.
824 of 1162
Breakout by Source
Each graph shows the top items that sent traffic to your Campaign. It shows the top Emails, top
search engines, top social media sites and top websites.
16.7.3 Database Health Dashboard

This dashboard's purpose is to provide a view into your Contact database, not to just show how many
Contacts you have, but to show the % of Contacts that are reachable and inactive, as well as trend
reports showing where the peaks and valleys are regarding reachable, unreachable, inactive and new
Contacts over time. You can also see how complete a contact field is to learn if you have enough data
to properly segment on the field or use it to personalize communications. Lastly, you can also see how
frequently you communicate to your Contacts via Email to see if it meets your privacy/communication
policy.
Learn more about Insight attributes and metrics.
Prompt Page Details

This dashboard runs with default settings as shown below. However you can re-prompt the dashboard
to change any of these settings in order to see the data that you want on the dashboard.
The data on this dashboard is a snapshot of your contact database. The snapshot is run at 4:00
am Eastern Time. Therefore, if you run a filter on your contact database in Eloqua, the numbers
will likely not exactly match what you see in Insight, as the filter is run in real-time on the
database, and the data shown in Insight will be as of 4:00 am Eastern Time that day.
Date Time (Time Span):
Default is set to the last year.
This prompt only affects the trend reports and determines how far back the trend reports
show data. This dashboard's default is the last year which means that it will show data
from the day the dashboard is run including one year prior.
Date Time Start and End Date prompts:
You can run this dashboard for a specific start and end date. The default is blank. If you
wish to use it, first change the time span prompt above to none and then enter a start
and end date. If you don't do this, the dashboard will pull in data for both the time span
and start/end date range as the operator between these two prompts is an OR.
The date range selected will show in the top right of the dashboard:
825 of 1162
Select Contact Fields prompt:

This selection determines what shows on the contact field completeness report on the
dashboard.The fields you select are the fields that show on that report.
Inactive Contacts
At the top of the dashboard is a dropdown that allows you to determine your inactive contacts. The
default is six months but you can change that to be anything from one to 12 months. Inactive contacts
are contacts with no inbound activity in the number of months set in that dropdown. Inbound activity is
defined as any of the following:
Email Open
Email Clickthrough
Possibly Forward
Form Submission
Landing Page Visit
Tracked Website Visit
Contact Details
Contact Overview
This section provides the total numbers for contacts in your database as well as Reachable and
Unreachable contacts.
Total Contacts: number of contacts (those that have not been deleted) in your database as of
the snapshot time.
Total Reachable Contacts: number of the Total Contacts that have valid email addresses (i.e.
not flagged as bounced back or unsubscribed).
% of Total Reachable Contacts: (Total Reachable Contacts / Total Contacts) * 100
Total Unreachable Contacts: number of the Total Contacts that are not emailable (i.e. are
826 of 1162
flagged as bounced back or unsubscribed).

% of Total Unreachable Contacts: (Total Unreachable Contacts / Total Contacts) * 100
Reachable Pie Chart
Shows the breakout of Active and Inactive Contacts for the Total Reachable Contacts. If you
change the Inactive dropdown at the top of the dashboard, this graph will refresh to show you
the new breakout based on the new number of months you selected.
Unreachable Pie Chart
Shows the breakout of Unreachable Contacts into the number that are unsubscribed and the
number that are flagged as bouncedback.
Trend Reports
You can see the trend reports by Month or by Quarter. A snapshot of the data is taken at 4 am ET at
the end of each month and quarter. For the current month and quarter, the current daily 4 am ET
snapshot is used. Remember that the time prompts on the prompt page determine how far back the
trend reports go. By default it goes back 1 year. If you don't want it to go back that far or want it to go
back farther, re-prompt the dashboard and change the time prompt accordingly.
Note: You can go back further than the 2 years allowed in the time span prompt. Simply set the time
span to '-none-' and use the time range start and end date prompts to go back as far as you need to.
Reach: Shows the Total Contacts and % Reachable by month or quarter.
New Contacts: Shows the New Contacts added to your database for each month or quarter.
Engagement: Shows the Total Reachable, % Active (Active Contacts / Total Reachable
Contacts) and % Inactive (Inactive Contacts / Total Reachable Contacts) for each month or
quarter. Remember that the Inactive dropdown at the top of the dashboard will affect this graph.
Unreachable: Shows the Total Unsubscribes and Total Bouncebacks for each month or
quarter.
Frequency Report
This tab allows you to see the Email Frequency and Contact Completeness Reports. The Inactive
dropdown does not affect either of these two reports.
Email Frequency Report: Use the month dropdown to select the number of previous months to
look at with regards to email sends. For example, the default is 6 months, which means that the
report is showing how many emails each contact was sent in the last 6 months. The results are
then shown on the report and are grouped as the email sends number gets higher (such as 11 25 emails or 101 - 500 emails).
827 of 1162
Contact Field Completeness report: Shows how complete each field is (by % complete). The
Contact Field Value link below the graph opens the Contact Field Value report in a new window
and shows the Total Field Count and % of Total for the values for the fields selected on the
prompt page.
Note: You can change the fields you see to less by re-prompting the dashboard.
General Dashboard Tips
Hover over the graph to display the
table view of the graph. Click on the
grid icon. Clicking on the grid will take the user to the
graph icon to return to the graph view.
Click Data > Re-prompt to change the date range for the dashboard and/or contact fields on the
Contact Field Completeness report.
Date Range for the Dashboard

Default Date Range: The dashboard runs for the past year by default. The date range only
affects the number of months or quarters you see in the trend reports. For all other reports, the
data are shown as of the date and time you run the dashboard (i.e. a snapshot of now).
Re-prompt: To change the date range, simply re-prompt the dashboard and select the date by
time span or time range. Note that if time range is used, you must change the time span
dropdown to none or else the dashboard will run for the criteria entered for both the time span
and time range.
Frequently Asked Questions

Contact Overview Report
Q: How many contacts are currently in my database? How many can I email and how many are
unreachable (bouncedback or unsubscribed)?
Designed to show the number of total contacts as of the end date of the dashboard date range.
Total Contacts are then broken out into Reachable and Unreachable and the % of the total
contacts for both is shown.
Q: How long does it take for the Total Contact field to be updated?
It can take up to 24 hours for the Total Contact field to be updated.
828 of 1162
Contact Breakout
Q: Of my reachable contacts, how many are engaged (i.e. actively responding to my marketing
efforts)? Of those contacts that are unreachable, why are they unreachable?
Reachable: shows the total reachable contacts broken out into Active and Inactive contacts.
Unreachable: shows the total unreachable contacts broken out into Unsubscribes and
Bouncebacks.
Email Frequency
Q: Is the number of emails being sent to contacts meet our email frequency policy? Am I overcommunicating to our customers/prospects? And in conjunction with unsubscribe reports, does it look
like there is a correlation between frequency of email and a spike in unsubscriptions?
This report shows the total number of emails that a user has received in the number of months
selected on the dropdown menu. The number of emails are grouped as follows (for ease of
reading):
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6-10, 11-25, 26-50, 51-100, 101-500, 501+
Contact Trend Reports
Q: Is my database growing over time and what percentage are reachable via email?
Reach: shows the total contacts in the database and the % of those contacts that are reachable
by month or quarter.
Q: Am I adding new contacts to the database? How frequently?
New Contacts: shows the number of new contacts added to the database in the selected month
or quarter.
Q: Is my database growing over time and of that growth, and what percentage is reachable via email?
Engagement: shows the total reachable contacts by month and the % of those that are active
and inactive.
Q: Has there been a spike in the number of unsubscribes or bouncebacks?
Unreachable: shows the contacts that have unsubscribed or bouncedback by month or quarter.
For bouncebacks, it is those whose contact record is flagged as being bounced back (i.e. hard
bounceback).
829 of 1162
Contact Field Completeness
Q: How complete are the records in my database? Do I have enough information on my contacts to
properly filter by location (state/province), company name, country, title, etc.? Do I have enough
information to properly personalize emails and do dynamic content to show the recipients' information
thats most relevant to them?
Shows the standard contact fields and how complete that field is for all contacts in your
database. For example, if Company is 99%, that means that there is a value for Company for
99% of the contacts.
To change the standard fields shown, simply re-prompt the dashboard and select different fields
to show. To re-prompt, select the
icon on the toolbar.
Contact Field Value Report: To see the actual data stored in those fields and how many
contacts have those values, simply click on the Contact Field Value link at the bottom of the
Completeness report. A new window will open with the Field Value report. Select the field you
want to see from the prompt and click Run Report at the bottom of the screen.
Glossary
Inactive Contacts: those contacts that have had no inbound activity for the past number of
months selected in the dropdown on the dashboard.
Active Contacts: All of the reachable contacts that have done an inbound activity in the past
number of months selected from the dropdown on the dashboard.
Inbound activity: an email open, email click-through, possible email forward, form submission,
landing page visit, or tracked website visit.
Reachable Contacts: Contacts who have not been flagged as bounced back and/or have not
unsubscribed. Thus they are really reachable contacts via email.
Unreachable Contacts: Contacts who have been flagged as bounced back or have
unsubscribed. Thus they are really unreachable contacts via email.
New Contacts: Contacts that have been added in the date range used for the dashboard (i.e.
contact creation date lies in the date range of the dashboard).
16.7.4 Email Performance Dashboard

This dashboard's purpose is to provide a view into the overall success of an Email or set of Emails.
The data shown is for all activity that occurred as a result of the Emails sent for the Emails included in
the dashboard. That activity is shown in summary metrics, trend reports, results compared to
benchmarks, as well as the top performing Emails by Email name, subject line and segment used.
830 of 1162
Prompt Page Details

This dashboard runs with the following settings by default. However you can re-prompt the dashboard
Email Sent Date:
Default is set to last three months
All activity for the Email sends will be shown, regardless of the date range chosen on the
prompt page. This dashboard is meant to show you how your Email performed overall
and not activity in a particular timeframe. For example, if your Email is sent on Jan 1,
2013 and you run the dashboard on April 1, 2013 and choose to show Email sends from
Jan 1 "Jan 31, 2013, your email was sent in that date range so it's included in the
dashboard. But the activity shown is all activity for that Email that was sent in January
and not just the activity that occurred in January. Thus the activities for that Email
(opens, clickthroughs, etc shown are from Jan. 1 when the email was sent, up to April 1
when the dashboard was run).
Email Sent Start and End Date prompts:
ensure that you set the previous Email Sent Date time span prompt to none. Then
enter in the start and end date/time you want to use. If you do not do this and keep a time
span as well, the dashboard will pull Emails that meet both the time span and time range
prompts, because it uses an OR operator between the time span and time range
prompts.
Select Emails to Display:
Default is none in the selected box, however that means that it will run for all Emails that
meet the date range criteria you set above. If you want to select particular mails, then
search for them and move them to the selected box.
Note: it is an AND operator between the date prompts and this prompt. Therefore the Emails
that meet BOTH prompt criteria will be shown. If you select an Email that is not also sent in the
time span/range you selected, it will not be included in the dashboard.
Dashboard Book
When you run the dashboard you will see that there are two tabs at the top: Overall Performance and
Top 10 Overview. There are two dashboards shown in the same dashboard 'book' so that it is
convenient to switch between them.
831 of 1162
Overall Performance
The purpose of the Overall Performance dashboard is to provide you with a high level overview of the
activity that occurred on the selected Emails. The date range shown in the top right corner of the
dashboard shows the date range that was selected on the prompt page, and it determines the set of
Emails that were used in the dashboard. All activity for those Emails is shown, regardless of when the
activity occurred. Therefore, besides the Email Sent metric, the activity numbers for all other metrics
shown on this dashboard are not just the activities that took place in the date range shown in the top
right.

At the top of the dashboard you will find selectors for Campaign Region, Product and Type. They are
three standard campaign fields in the Campaigns > Settings menu in the Campaign area of Eloqua. If
you filled in the values for the Eampaigns where these Emails were sent from, you can then use those
values in order to filter the dashboard to do a deeper analysis of your Emails. The values that display
for each of these fields are customizable by you. For example, you could choose to see the results of
Emails that were in Campaigns with Region = North America, Product = Enterprise and Type =
Webinar. You can choose one or multiple values in each of these fields providing the ability to see
many different views of your Email results.
Overall Performance
This area provides you with the main activity metrics such as delivered, opens, clickthroughs and form
conversions. The Full Analysis Report link at the bottom of the performance table opens in a new
832 of 1162
window and provides you with the Email Analysis overview report for the Emails that were selected for
this dashboard.
Performance Trend Reports
The trend report graphs allow you to view activity rates or deliverability and unsubscription rates by
different timeframes.
Activity Rates:
Unique Open Rate: Unique Opens / Unique Delivered, based on the Emails sent in the
date range.
Unique Clickthrough Rate: Unique Clickthroughs / Unique Delivered, based on the
Emails sent in the date range.
Click to Open Rate: Unique Clickthroughs / Unique Opens, based on the Emails sent in
the date range.
Form Conversion Rate from Email: Total Form Submissions linked back to the Email
sends / Total Delivered.
For example, if you select Month for the Activity Rate trend report, and you see an open rate of 20%
in January 2013, that means that for the Emails sent in the month of January 2013, the Unique Opens /
Unique Delivered for those sends is 20%. It does not matter if the opens or delivery of the Email
occurred in January, 2013. The timeframe for where the rates are shown is dependent on when the
Email send took place. The email could be sent on Jan. 31, 2013 at 11:59:59 pm and considered
delivered on Feb. 1, 2013 at 12:00:00 am. Then the open could have occurred at 12:00:01 am on Feb.
1, 2013. That open and delivery would be included in the January 2013 rate, as the Email send
occurred in the month of January 2013.
Deliverability and Unsubscription Rates:
Bounceback Rate: Unique Opens / Unique Delivered, based on the Emails sent for the
Campaigns included.
Hard Bounceback Rate: Unique Clickthroughs / Unique Delivered, based on the
Emails sent for the Campaigns included.
Timeframes:
Day
Week
Month
Quarter
Fiscal Week
833 of 1162
Fiscal Month
Fiscal Quarter
Note: How far back the data goes on these trend reports is dependent on the Emails that are included
on the dashboard. The activity will be shown in the timeframe where the Email send occurred. If the
Email was sent at the end of the day on Jan. 31 but the delivery and open happened on Feb. 1, the
activity will show in the month of January as that is when the Email send occurred.
Benchmark Gauges
At the bottom of the dashboard are gauges that show you how your Emails are performing as they
relate to the Eloqua benchmark. The Eloqua benchmark is calculated by looking at the aggregate data
across ALL of our clients.
Red indicates below the average range
Yellow indicates the average range
Green indicates above the average range
Open Rate Gauge: shows the Unique Open Rate for the Emails sent and the gauge color shows if
your rate is above, within or below the benchmark.
Clickthrough Rate Gauge: shows the Unique Clickthrough Rate for the Emails sent and the gauge
color shows if your rate is above, within or below the benchmark.
Click to Open Gauge: shows the Unique Opens / Unique Clickthroughs for the Emails sent and the
gauge color shows if your rate is above, within or below the benchmark.
Form Conversion Rate Gauge: shows the Total Form Submissions for the Emails Sent / Total
Delivered for the Emails sent and the gauge color shows if your rate is above, within or below the
benchmark.
Top 10 Overview
The purpose of this dashboard is to provide you with the top performing Emails, the top performing
Segments and the top performing subject lines by opens, clickthroughs, click to open rate and form
submissions. As mentioned above, the data shown is for all activities on the Emails sent in the date
range for the dashboard.
These three fields work the same as they did on the Overall Performance dashboard. However, since
this is a separate dashboard, your selections from Overall Activity are not passed here. You will need
to make those selections again if you want to see the same values used here.
834 of 1162
Opens
Top 10 by Subject Line: Shows the top performing subject lines by Unique Open Rate. Total Opens
are also shown for interest.
Top 10 by Email: Shows the top performing Emails by Unique Open Rate. Total Opens are also
shown for interest.
Top 10 by Segment: Shows the top performing Segments by Unique Open Rate. Total Opens are
also shown for interest.
Additional Tabs
The other tabs in this dashboard show the top subject lines, emails and segments by:
Clickthrough: Shows the top performers by Unique Clickthrough Rate. Total Clickthroughs are
also shown for interest.
Click to Open: Shows the Unique Opens / Unique Clickthroughs for the Emails sent.
Form Submissions: Shows the top performers by Form Conversion Rate. Total Form
Submissions are also shown for interest.
16.7.5 Form Performance Dashboard

This dashboard's purpose is to provide a view into the overall success of a Form or set of Forms. The
data shown is for the Forms with submissions in the date range selected for the dashboard.
Prompt Page Details

This dashboard runs with default settings as shown below. However you can re-prompt the dashboard
Form Submission Date:
Default is set to the last three months
The Forms included in the dashboard will be those with Form Submissions in the time
span specified.
Email Sent Start and End Date prompts:
ensure that you set the previous Form Submission Date time span prompt to 'none'.
Then enter in the start and end date/time you want to use. If you do not do this and keep
a time span as well, the dashboard will pull Forms with submissions that meet both the
835 of 1162
time span and time range prompts because it uses an OR operator between the time
span and time range prompts.
The time span or range that you select is then displayed in the top right of the dashboard so that you
can see the date range used for the dashboard.
Select Forms to Display:

Default is set to none in the selected box, however that means that it will run for all
Forms with submissions in the date range you set above. If you want to select particular
Forms, then search for them and move them to the selected box.
Note: It is an AND operator between the date prompts and this prompt. Therefore the Forms
with submissions that meet BOTH prompt criteria will be shown. If you select a Form that has
not had submissions in the time span/range you selected, it will not be included in the
dashboard.

At the top of the dashboard you will find selectors for Campaign Region, Product and Type. They are
three standard campaign fields in the Campaigns > Settings menu in the Campaign area of Eloqua. If
you filled in the values for the campaigns where these Forms were included, you can then use those
values in order to filter the dashboard to perform a deeper analysis of your Forms. The values that
display for each of these fields are customizable by you. For example, you could choose to see the
results of emails that were in campaigns with Region = North America, Product = Enterprise and Type
= Webinar. You can choose one or multiple values in each of these fields providing the ability to see
many different views of your Form results.
836 of 1162
Form Performance
The Form Performance dashboard shows you the Top 10 Forms by Conversion Rate and Top 10 by
Abandonment Rate. This therefore, lets you see your top performing Forms and your bottom
performing Forms.
Conversion Trend
This graph shows the Total Form Submissions by the time chosen:
Day
Week "this is the default
Month
Quarter
Fiscal Week
Fiscal Month
Fiscal Quarter
Top Countries by Conversion

The default view shows the Top 10 Conversions by Country but the user can change that view to
State/Province or City. This allows you to see from where, geographically, the majority of your Form
Submissions are coming.
Field Abandonment
The purpose of this dashboard is to show you which fields on your Forms are being submitted with
values and which are not. This is important as you want users to submit values for all the fields on your
Forms. By looking at this report you can quickly see if a Form has fields that are not being filled out and
you can then decide to change the Form to make that field required, or decide to remove the field
altogether. To see the field abandonment, you simply select the Form from the dropdown. The
dropdown contains all the Forms (in alphabetical order) that had submissions in the date range chosen
for the dashboard.
16.7.6 Lead Scoring Dashboard

General Details
This dashboard shows the Lead Score based on the entire contact database. You cannot
change this dashboard to do additional filtering based on contact fields or activity data.
No date prompt exists for this dashboard, as the data is of the last time the Lead Score
837 of 1162
snapshot was taken.

The Lead Score snapshot is generated hourly.
Note: The Lead Score dashboard will likely NEVER equal the Lead Score numbers if you do a
filter on Lead Score in the segment area of Eloqua. This is because Eloqua's Lead Scoring
engine is kicked off when an activity happens. That activity can be profile (a contact record
being updated or created) or engagement (new activity happened on an asset or campaign).
However, in Insight, the Lead Scoring dashboard shows the results as of the last snapshot of
the data and the snapshot is taken hourly.
Lead Score Overview
This report shows the number of contacts in each profile/engagement combination. There are
four profile and four engagement values, so 16 possible profile/engagement combinations.
This report also shows the % of total for each profile/engagement combination.
Profile and Engagement Pie Charts
These graphs show how % breakout for each of the four profile and four engagement values,
allowing you to see which profile and engagement values have the most and fewest contacts.
Filter
In Eloqua's Lead Scoring Engine, you can create different Lead Scoring models, allowing you to
see Lead Scores for your contact database given in different profile and engagement criteria.
This filter affects the Lead Score Overview and Profile/Engagement Pie Charts on this
dashboard.
16.7.7 Website Traffic Analysis Dashboard

This dashboard's purpose is to provide a view into the overall traffic for web pages that contain
Eloqua's tracking scripts or redirect links from Eloqua emails. You can see top pages by traffic and by
source, as well as a trend graph showing when peak traffic occurs.
Prompt Page Details

This dashboard runs with default settings as shown below. However, you can re-prompt the dashboard
838 of 1162
Page View Date:

Default is set to the last year.
Web pages are included if they had page views in the time span selected.
Page View Start and End Date prompts:
Default is blank. If you want to run the dashboard for a particular date range, first ensure
that you set the previous Page View Date Time Span prompt to none. Next, enter the
desired start and end date/time. If you do not do this and keep a time span as well, the
dashboard will pull web pages that meet both the time span and time range prompts
because it is an OR operator between the time span and time range prompts.
The date selected is displayed in the top right of the dashboard:
Top Pages Traffic

Top 10 Pages: Shows the web pages that had the most page views in the date range selected
on the prompt page.
Top 10 Entry Pages: Shows the Entry Webpages that had the most page views in the date
range selected on the prompt page. The Entry Webpage is the page that was viewed first in the
visit (session).
Top 10 Exit Pages: Shows the Exit Webpages that had the most page views in the date range
selected on the prompt page. The Exit Webpage is the page that was viewed last in the visit
(session).
Detailed Data: This link, located at the bottom of each of these graphs, gives all the results--not
just the top ten--in a new window, for the page views occurring in the date range selected for the
dashboard.
Page Views by Source Type

This report shows you the referring source (where the traffic came from) for the page views. The types
of sources are:
Email (Email sent from Eloqua)
Search Engine
839 of 1162
Social Media
Website (came from another website)
No Referrer (for example, the user typed the URL directly into the browser)
Pie Chart: Shows the total page views by source so that you can see where traffic is coming
from for the pages you track in Eloqua.
Line Graph: Shows the top 10 domains (by total page views) across all of the source types. It
can therefore show a domain like Google, an email sent from Eloqua, and a social media site
like Facebook on the graph. This graph will soon be changed to a bar graph so that it will be
easier to read.
Detailed Data: This linked report opens a new window with the full list of Source Domains and
Total Page Views, not just the top 10 that are seen in the line graph.
Overall Traffic
At the top of the dashboard, you will find a selector for Time Period. The default is Day but you can
view the overall traffic by page views for Week, Month, Quarter, Year, Fiscal Week, Fiscal Month,
Fiscal Quarter or Fiscal Year. The trend report shows the total page views as a line graph for the time
frame selected. The Detailed Data link at the bottom of the graph opens the report in a new window in
grid mode.
Note: Fiscal Week/Month or Quarter becomes important if you changed your fiscal month from
January to another month when you enabled Closed-Loop Reporting (CLR). If you did not change it, or
did not enable CLR, then your fiscal time frames will equal the other time frames.
Top 10 Source Domains

This section shows the top 10 by page views for Email, Search Engine, Social Media and Website. No
Referrer is not shown because a domain is not identified when the user types in the URL.
The Detailed Data link at the bottom of each bar graph opens a new window showing all results for the
domain and the time frame chosen for the dashboard.
16.7.8 Landing Page AnalysisDashboard

This dashboard provides a weekly overview of Landing Page views, split by Campaign Type. You can
use this dashboard to discover trends and make comparisons by interacting with the various data
points.
840 of 1162
16.7.9 Campaign and Email Engagement Analysis Dashboard

This dashboard provides a visual overview of how all of your various campaigns are performing so you
can find the emails that are driving those results.
Shows campaign engagement by Unique Response Rate and New Leads generated, and allows you
to select a specific campaign and see the performance of its respective Emails.
When you click on a campaign, the dashboard displays all the emails associated with that campaign,
and various high-level email engagement metrics.
841 of 1162
17 Integrations
Eloqua can integrate with numerous CRM and SRMsystems, helping you keep your data consistent
across systems, and letting you harness your data for better decision-making. These documents
describe how these integrations work, and how to set them up.
In addition, Eloqua's nascent integration withOracleBluekai provides another source of information to
help marketers deliver truly customer-centric campaigns. Finally, data import and export tools give
even more flexibility for interacting with data sets from other systems.
17.1 Data Importing and Exporting

Importing large numbers of contacts or accounts into an Eloqua database can be accomplished using
the Upload feature in the Contacts area, but offers the following disadvantages:
Used for a one-time import
Must be run manually each time you want to update contact or account information
However, as contacts are added to your internal spreadsheets or lists, you may wish to create a
recurring import based on a regular schedule determined by you. It is now possible to create this type of
export automation using the Data Export &Import functionality. This functionality is accomplished over
a secure connection (Secure File Transport Protocol, or SFTP).
In addition, you may wish to have an automated export of information that already exists in your Eloqua
database, such as Contacts, Accounts or Activity, thereby obviating the need to set tasks for yourself
on a regular basis. Eloqua can perform this function for you using the Data Export function located in
the Setup area of Eloqua. The resulting .csv file can be compressed to a .zip file, and you can specify
the location to where you would like the information published (stored). Other configuration options are
also available such as incremental exports based only on new data since the last time the export was
run.
Note: The SSH File Transfer Protocol (sometimes called Secure File Transfer Protocol or
incorrectly Secure FTP), or SFTP, is a network protocol that provides file access, file transfer,
and file management functionality over any reliable data stream.
17.1.1 Creating and configuring Data Imports

You can set up a recurring contact or account import process based on a schedule you determine,
thereby obviating the need to manually run the Contact or Account Upload Wizard each and every time
842 of 1162
you need to update the contact or account databases.
To create a Data Import:

1. Navigate to Settings >Setup >Data Export &Import (in the Database section).
2. Click the
button and select New Contact Import or New Account Import.
3. Configure the import by completing the fields:
General
Import Name
Enter a name for your import.
Priority Source
Click the drop-down list and select a source.
Import Purpose
Enter or click the drop-down list to select a reason for the import.
SFTP Source
Server
Enter or click the drop-down list to select a server.
Click the New or Delete buttons to add a new server or delete an existing server. Click
the Edit button to modify the server. Click Test Connection to ensure the information
you entered is correct.
843 of 1162
Name: Entera name for your SFTPserver.

Server URL:Enter the fully-qualified URLfor your SFTPserver.
Username:Enter the username for the user configured on your SFTPserver that
has administrative access to perform a data export.
Authentication Method: Select a method of authentication. The Enter
Password or Select SSH key fields will display based on your selected
authentication method.
Enter Password:Enter the password for the above-referenced Username.
Select SSH Key: Select an SSH key.
Path
Enter the path to the source file.
Note: Field mapping information will not be populated until you have indicated the
path to the source file.
Schedule
Select the frequency this import should run. Selecting On demand enables you to run
this import on an ad-hoc basis (manually) and On these days enables you to specify a
schedule for the import to be run automatically.
Notification
Select Notify me about this import to receive email notifications about this import. In
the Email address field, enter the email address to receive notifications.
Select Email Errors to receive notifications when an error occurs while sending the
email and/or select Email Successes to receive a notification when an email is sent
successfully.
4. Click Save.
5. Configure field mapping.
i. Click the Field Mapping tab.
ii. Click Refresh to view previously configured mappings.
iii. Configure any fields in your .csvfile that cannot be auto-mapped during the import wizard
by clicking in the Maps To column and selecting the field that contains the data to be
populated.
iv. Double-click on the Maps To entry to select the correct mapping field.
v. Click on the down arrow in the Target Field chooser to scroll through the fields in the
Eloqua database.
844 of 1162
vi. Select the appropriate field, then click anywhere outside the field chooser to save the
mapping.
vii. Perform these steps for all other fields that Eloqua could not automap.
viii. Click Save.
Your Data Import has been created. Click the Overview tab to see the details of your import, run the
import, or see the details of your SFTP source. Click the History tab to verify when your import was
successful or unsuccessful.
17.1.2 Creating Data Exports

You can set up a recurring contact or account export process based on a schedule that you determine,
thereby obviating the need to manually run the Contact or Account Upload Wizard each and every time
you need to update the contact or account databases.
To create a Data Export:

1. Navigate to Settings >Setup >Data Export &Import (in the Database section). The Data
Export & Import Setup window opens.
2. Click the Data Export tab.
3. Click the
button.
4. Configure the export by completing the fields:
General
Export Name: Enter a name for your import.
File Name: Enter a name for the export file.
Compress File (.zip format): Select to compress the file into a .zip file.
Append Date Stamp: Select to append a date stamp to the file. Click the drop-down list
to select a date format.
Destination
Also upload the file to my SFTP server: Select to upload the export file to your SFTP
server when it is uploaded to the Eloqua server.
Server: Enter or click the drop-down list to select a server.
Click the New or Delete buttons to add a new server or delete an existing server. Click
the Edit button to modify the server. Click Test Connection to ensure the information
you entered is correct.
845 of 1162
Name: Entera name for your SFTPserver.

Server URL:Enter the fully-qualified URLfor your SFTPserver.
Username:Enter the username for the user configured on your SFTPserver that
has administrative access to perform a data export.
Authentication Method: Select a method of authentication. The Enter
Password or Select SSH key fields will display based on your selected
authentication method.
Enter Password:Enter the password for the above-referenced Username.
Select SSH Key: Select an SSH key.
Path: Enter the path to the source file.
Schedule
Select the frequency this export should run. Selecting On demand enables you to run
this export on an ad-hoc basis (manually) when you click Run now on the Overview tab
and On these days enables you to specify a schedule for the export to be run
automatically.
Notification
Select Notify me about this export to receive email notifications about this export. In
the Email address field, enter the email address to receive notifications.
Select Email Errors to receive notifications when an error occurs while sending the
email and/or select Email Successes to receive a notification when an email is sent
successfully.
5. Click Save.
6. (Optional) Configure the data.
i. Click the Data tab.
846 of 1162
ii. Configure the export by completing the fields:

Data set: Select All records every time to export all records upon every export
or Only records changed since last run to only modify records that were
changed or created since the export was last ran.
Data type: Click the drop-down list to select a type of data to export.
iii. (Contact data only)
Contact columns: Specify whether or not you want to export All contact fields in
your export, or Specific contact view fields included in the selected contact
view.
Contact set: Specify the amount of contacts you want to export by selecting All
contacts, a Contact list, or contact Segment members.
iv. Click Save.
7. Configure the format.
The supported export type is Comma Separated Value (.csv).
i. Click the Format tab.
ii. Configure the export by completing the fields:
Column Delimiter
Enter a column delimiter.
Example: A comma can determine the columns.
Text Qualifier
Enter a delimiter to keep a group of words together as one entry for that column.
For example, you could use quotation marks to group city and states in pairs.
"New York, NY","London, England","Paris,

France","Toronto, Ontario".
Row Delimiter
Click the drop-down list to change the default CR and LF to either Carriage Return
or Line feed.
Character Encoding
847 of 1162
Select a character encoding option. UTF-8 is the default encoding for your export
file. If appropriate, change the character encoding to 16-bit encoding
iii. Click Save.
After you have created a data export, you may want to schedule or run your data export.
17.1.3 Deleting Data Imports and Exports

To delete a data import or export:
2. In the left-hand pane, scroll to the name of your Export or Import and single left-click on the name.
3. Click Delete at the bottom of the left-hand pane.
4. Click Yes to confirm that you wish to delete the Export or Import, and it will be permanently removed
from Eloqua.
17.1.4 Editing Data Imports and Exports

To make changes to a DataImport or Export you have created, including modifying and deleting it,
perform the following steps:
To edit a data export or import:

2. In the left-hand pane, scroll to the name of your Export or Import and click on the name. The
settings for your Export or Import are displayed on the right-hand pane.
3. Make any necessary changes and click Save when you are done.
Note: You cannot delete an SFTPconnection if it is referenced in another import or

export.
In order to be able to delete an SFTPserver, you must delete the associated import or export.
848 of 1162
17.1.5 Scheduling and Running Data Exports and Imports

To schedule or run a Data Export or Import:
1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Data Export & Import.
2. Click the Export Settings or Import Settings tab to configure when the export or import will
run. By default, it will only run on demand, when you click Run Now from the Overview tab.
3. Specify the day(s)and time on which the export or import should run. In the example below, the
export or import will automatically run every two hours from Monday to Friday between 6:00AM
and 6:00PM as indicated by the blue shading for Mon to Fri. Any dates not selected are shown
in a gray background.
4. To remove a day from the schedule, click the day in the row in the On these days section and it
changes to gray background.
17.1.6 Viewing Data Export/Import history

The success or failure status of all Data Exports and Imports is logged on the History tab.
To view the History:
1. Navigate to Settings >Setup >Data Export &Import.
2. Click Data Import or Data Export.
3. Click the History tab. In the following example, the data export was successful (no errors occurred),
and it began on June 11, 2014 at 2:57 AMand completed successfully at 3:31 AMthe same day. If the
export had not been successful (if errors were present), the Message column will indicate that
information.
849 of 1162
17.2 CRM integration

Customer Relationship Management (CRM) systems and Eloqua are databases hosted on different
servers. Integration enables the passing of information between these databases.
Eloqua uses External Calls to integrate with CRMs. An External Call is a set of API instructions from
Eloqua that accesses the CRM and passes data to it. Every External Call has its own user credentials
to access the CRM system.
Writing information to the CRM from Eloqua is called an Outbound Call. Outbound External Calls
usually contain the word "Update" or "Create" in their names.You will find them in the Send Data folder
of the External Calls section within Eloqua's integration interface. To view the list of external calls,
navigate to Setup > Integration > Outbound > External Calls.
Outbound External Calls can be triggered by Internal Events or Integration Rules. To view the full list
of triggers, navigate toSetup > Integration > Outbound > Internal Events. In general, when a
contact in Eloqua is updated by a form submission or by a user, the contact needs to go to a program in
Program Builder (best practice would be the CRM Update program) and flow through a step that has an
Internal Event to fire off the External Call.
17.2.1 Understanding CRM integration

It is important that you (or someone in your organization) know and understand what data is being
passed back and forth in your integration. This gives you the power to make necessary changes as
business requirements change, or perhaps to enhance your existing integration.
850 of 1162
Note: Proper documentation of the setup can save a lot of time when you want to make
changes. Create a spreadsheet which shows which fields you want to bring in to Eloqua (and
what Eloqua fields they map to) and which fields you want to send to CRM (and what fields
they map to). Revisit the spreadsheet every few months, or when making changes in either
system, to ensure there is accurate documentation of your integration.
CRM integration tips

It is important to consider which fields should be updated between Eloqua and your CRM. Certain
fields should be automatically synched to keep them up to date, while others may only need to be
pulled once.
Example: A Lead Source - Most Recent field should be consistently updated on both ends so
that you always have the most up-to-date data in both CRM and Eloqua. Similarly, most
contact fields (name, email address, phone number, address, and so on) should typically
always be updated on both ends.
Example: If a field such as Original Lead Source was first documented in CRM, you should
pull that data into Eloqua and set a rule to update the CRM only if that field was blank. Similarly,
if Original Lead Source was documented in Eloqua, you should set a rule on your Auto Synch
to update this filed only if blank.
For more detailed information and instructions on creating and editing contact fields, read our product
documentation on contact fields.
How does data get into Eloqua from CRM?

Using Auto Synch, you can schedule regular and automatic synchronizations from your CRM to
Eloqua, on a record type basis. Most CRM integrations include calls to Get Contacts, Get Accounts,
Get Leads, Get Deleted and Converted Leads, Get Deleted Contacts and Deleted Accounts.
The goal is to mirror the data from your CRM into Eloqua so that when you're working with contacts or
leads in Eloqua, you have all of the most up-to-date data (and vice versa).
To view and make changes to your Auto Synchs, navigate to Setup > Integration > Inbound Tab >
Management > Auto Synchs. For more detailed instructions on setting up or making changes, read
CRM Integration: Auto Synchs.
851 of 1162
Note: Salesforce.com users can choose to have their data routed through a CipherCloud
gateway.Contact My Oracle Support(http://support.oracle.com) and create a service request to
have this feature activated.
How does data get from Eloqua to CRM?

When manually uploading contacts into Eloqua or when a contact submits a form, the data may
change within Eloqua. To ensure your CRM reflects those changes, External Calls, which send data to
CRM, control which data you are passing and for what entity type (such as lead or contact).
You can view and change your External Calls by navigating to Setup > Integration > Outbound tab >
External Calls. The calls that are sending data are found in the Send Data folder.
Internal Events, in the Outbound tab, are the triggers that set off the External Calls. These triggers can
be caused by a variety of events, but they are typically placed within Program Builder when a contact's
record is updated in one form or another (form submit, email click-through, list upload, and so on). For
more detailed instructions on manipulating your External Calls and Internal Events, read: CRM
Integration: External Calls.
852 of 1162
Note: Salesforce.com users can choose to have their data routed through a CipherCloud
gateway. Contact My Oracle Support(http://support.oracle.com) and create a service request
to have this feature activated.
CRM capability matrix

The following table highlights the core, supported capabilities of each CRM platform Eloqua natively
integrates with:
Inbound
CRM
Sales
Cloud
CRMOD
MS
Dynamics
SFDC
Outbound
Leads Contacts Accounts Opportunities
Custom
Custom
Leads Contacts
Objects
Objects
Closed
Loop
Reporting
Supported CRM platforms

Integrations with the following CRM platform versions are currently supported by Eloqua:
Sales Cloud: all available versions supported
CRMOD: all available versions supported
MS Dynamics: version 4.0, 2011, 2013 and 2015 (on premise and on demand are supported
where applicable)
SFDC: all available versions supported
17.2.2 Join Your Community!

Within Topliners are numerous groups of users (like you!) who are using various CRM platforms. Find
the appropriate group below and get involved, ask questions, see what other users are doing and how
they're using both platforms together.
Eloqua Users with Salesforce Integration
Eloqua Users with Netsuite Integration
Eloqua Users with Oracle Integration
853 of 1162
Eloqua Users with MS CRM Integration

Review our best practices around Standardized Data Sets & Values
17.2.3 CRM integration: auto-synchs

Auto Synchs are scheduled imports into your Eloqua system. Eloqua synchronizes data with your
CRM system so that Eloqua maintains the most up-to-date information. There are situations where
new Lead or Contact records are created in your CRM system. This data needs to flow back into
Eloqua so that these records can be marketed to in the future.
Accessing auto synchs

To access auto synchs:
1. Navigate to Setup > Integration.
2. Click the Inbound tab.
3. From the Management menu located below the tabs, select Auto Synchs.
The Auto Synchs available to you will be listed with their name, Status, Purpose, Last
Execution Date/Time, Next Execution Date/Time and the frequency of execution (the
Scheduled).
Each Auto-Synch will have the following options available by clicking on the Auto-Synch in the table:
Auto Synch Details - Allows you to see the fields that are being imported into Eloqua from your
CRM system every 2 hours. This is the option you would choose to modify the fields being
synched. Changes made here will be reflected in the one-click wizard.
Transfer Values - Map the source for the default value for the data transfer for the selected field.
Field Mapping - Set the field mappings between the Source Fields in the CRM and the Target
Fields in Eloqua.
854 of 1162
Upload Actions - Select any Groups or Program Step that the data entity is added to, and any
Integration Rule Collection used to control how the data integration occurs between the CRM
and Eloqua.
Upload Schedule - Set the schedule for when the Auto-Synch is executed. You can set it to
execute at 10PM EST every night or several times per week, or as often as you want (within
limits) on a customized schedule you set up.
Editing auto synchs

To edit auto synch details:
2. Click the Inbound tab.
3. Click your selected Auto Synch in the table.
4. The Auto Synch is broken down into sections. To edit a particular section, click on the Edit
button on the right side and make the necessary changes. The two sections you may want to
modify will be Field Mapping and Upload Schedule.
5. Click Save and Close to confirm the changes on a particular sections.
6. Click Close to exit the Auto-Synch Details dialog box.
Managing auto synchs

Auto Synchs are scheduled imports into your Eloqua system. Eloqua synchronizes data with your
CRM system so that Eloqua maintains the most up-to-date information. There are situations where
new Lead or Contact records are created in your CRM system. This data needs to flow back into
Eloqua so that these records can be marketed to in the future.
Eloqua maintains the relationship between CRM records and its own records through an ID. For
example, a given CRM system can have a Lead Entity and a Contact Entity. How does Eloqua know
how to synchronize with the appropriate record? Every Contact record in Eloqua has reference to ID
fields that hold the corresponding CRM ID value of the Entity. For example, Bob's record could look as
follows:
First Name: Bob
Last Name: Smith
Email Address: bob@acme.com
Company: Acme Inc.
CRM Lead ID: Abcd12345 (SFDC LeadID requires case sensitive match)
CRM Contact ID: 54321dcbA (SFDC ContactID requires case sensitive match)
855 of 1162
As a result, when a new record is created, the ID of gets pulled into to Eloqua as well so we maintain
the relationship going forward. Every Auto Synch has a schedule, a defined set of fields, and a series
of actions that Eloqua will perform when importing data from your CRM system. The following is a list
of the most common Auto Synchs and a description of what each Auto Synch is used for:
Descriptions
AutoSynch
Name
Description
When an Account is deleted in the CRM system, the Account ID reference will be cleared
Get
out in the Eloqua Companies Table. Eloqua does not actually delete the record because
Deleted
this would delete all the History for this record. Instead, Eloqua removes the reference
Accounts
to the entity in the CRM system.
Get
This Auto Synch is used to import all new Accounts created in your CRM into Eloqua.
Accounts The Accounts from your CRM are added to Eloqua's Companies table.
Get
Deleted
Leads
When a Lead is deleted in the CRM system, the CRM Lead ID reference will be cleared
from the corresponding Contact record in Eloqua. Since Eloqua uses a Contact record to
aggregate data that corresponds to both Lead and Contact entities in the CRM, the actual
record in Eloqua is not deleted when the corresponding Lead record is deleted in the
CRM.
Get
Deleted
Contacts
When a Contact is deleted in the CRM system, the CRM Contact ID reference will be
cleared from the corresponding Contact record in Eloqua. Since Eloqua uses a Contact
record to aggregate data that corresponds to both Lead and Contact entities in the CRM,
the actual record in Eloqua is not deleted when the corresponding Contact record is
deleted in the CRM.
Get
When a Lead is converted to a Contact in your CRM system, Eloqua will remove the
Converted reference of the Lead from the corresponding Contact record in Eloqua by clearing out the
Leads
CRM Lead ID field.
This Auto Synch is used when a new Lead is created in the CRM system. Eloqua will
verify if the email address of the Lead already exists in Eloqua. If it does, the CRM Lead
Get Leads
ID reference will be applied to the corresponding Contact record in Eloqua. Otherwise, a
new Contact record is created with the same CRM Lead ID reference.
Get
Contacts
This Auto Synch is used when a new Contact is created in the CRM system. Eloqua will
verify if the email address of the Contact already exists in Eloqua. If it does, the CRM
Contact ID reference will be applied to the corresponding Contact record in Eloqua.
Otherwise, a new Contact record is created with the same CRM Contact ID reference.
17.2.4 CRM integration: external calls

The Outbound tab allows you modify outbound data that gets written into your CRM system. More
specifically, you can Enable/Disable the Marketing Activity Events from writing into the CRM system.
Additionally, you have the ability to modify which fields are being written to your CRM via the External
calls.
When you first navigate into the Outbound tab, you will see that it's further broken down into two tabs:
856 of 1162
1. Managing Internal Events

Internal Events determines which series of external calls to trigger and in which order.
These are further broken down by Activity, Campaign, and Custom Events which
include the Lead/Contact actions.
2. Managing External Calls
External Calls are the external CRM systems calls that Eloqua uses to perform an action
such as Create Lead, Update Contact, etc. These are further broken down into calls that
retrieve data from the CRM and calls that send data to the CRM.
Managing external calls

External Calls are actions that interact with your CRM system. Eloqua triggers a call and then an
action is invoked in the CRM system. The setting under the External Call tab are set to determine
which data is being transferred back and forth from Eloqua to the CRM System when a particular
action is executed. For example, if a Lead is being updated in your CRM system, the external call
performs the action on your CRM system and updates only the fields specified in the External Call
itself. It uses a field mapping to determine which Eloqua fields will update the corresponding Lead
record fields in the CRM. The External Call is triggered by an Eloqua Internal Event. When navigating
into the External Call tab, you'll notice the tab is broken down into two folders:
Retrieve Data - Data that Eloqua requests from your CRM system.
Send Data - Data that Eloqua sends to your CRM system.
These folders are further broken down into the various CRM Entities that Eloqua can manipulate.
These include Leads, Contacts, Accounts, Campaign Members, etc. Each CRM entity has a series of
External Calls that perform an action on that entity.
857 of 1162
The External Calls will have a series of menu options that you as the Customer Administrator can
manipulate. Depending on if the External Call is in the Retrieve or Send folder, the call can have
different menu options.
Retrieve Data
The menu next to individual External Calls in the Retrieve Data folder consist of the following options:
Edit External Call - This option allows you to change the details of a call including the name and
CRM user that can execute this call. This action should not require modification once Eloqua
completes the CRM integration for your organization.
View Field Selection - This option will allow you to view the fields that are being retrieved from
the CRM system. You may modify the fields and field mappings that you wish to retrieve from
this menu option. The retrieve External calls are used as a Data Source to facilitate Auto
Synchs. The Data Source uses the retrieve External Calls to get the data from the CRM and
then feeds the Auto Synch so that it can update your Eloqua System.
View Filter Details - This option allows you to filter the results retrieved in the External Call. For
example, if you want to retrieve all leads from your CRM but limit it to ones that were newly
created in the Last 3 days, you would use a filter that looks at the Date Created within Last 3
days. This option should not require modification once Eloqua completed the CRM integration
for your organization.
Copy External Call - This option allows you to copy an existing External Call with all its
settings. This option should not be needed as Eloqua will create all the necessary calls for your
CRM Integration.
Move to Folder - This option allows you to move an External Call to another folder in the
External Calls tab. For most organizations, the External Calls should already be organized into
a folder structure so this option will rarely be required.
Delete External Calls - This option allows you to delete a particular External Call and all its
settings. It is not recommended that this action be used as this can affect your existing CRM
integration. Should you need to delete an External call, please contact Eloqua Support for
assistance.
To modify the field selection on retrieve External Calls:

2. Select the Outbound tab.
3. Select the External Calls tab.
4. Expand the Retrieve Data folder to locate the External Call of choice.
5. From the menu next to the External Call, select View Field Selection.
858 of 1162
6. You will be presented with a new screen in the task pane that allows you to select the fields you
want to retrieve. Simply check all the fields you want to select. You will also see all related lists
in this screen. You can collapse or expand the related lists by clicking on their title.
7. Click Save on the bottom toolbar.
Notes:
Only the fields that are available to the CRM user for read/write access will be displayed on this
screen. If you are looking for a field that's not displayed, verify with your CRM administrator that
the CRM user in Eloqua has the proper access to the fields.
You can set default fields to specific mappings for advanced integration. For example, you can
include a City-to-City mapping as a default setting for new external calls. Also note that if you
are triggering a call from a form submission to a Custom Object Record, you can include
information from a linked Contact record (for instance, a Net Promoter score) to create those
fields in your integrated CRM system as well.
Send Data
The menu next to individual External Calls in the Send Data folder consists of the following options:
Edit External Call - This option allows you to change the details of a call including the name and
CRM user that can execute this call. This action should not require modification once Eloqua
completes the CRM integration for your organization.
View Field Mapping - Allows you to modify the field mapping for the data being sent to your
CRM. This option will display which Eloqua fields are used to perform the action and the
corresponding CRM fields that will be updated.
Copy External Call - This option allows you to copy an existing External Call with all its
settings. This option should not be needed as Eloqua will create all the necessary calls for your
CRM Integration.
Move to Folder - This option allows you to move an External Call to another folder in the
External Calls Tab. For most organizations, the External Calls should already be organized into
a folder structure so this option will rarely be required.
Test External Call - This option allows you to test out an External call to verify is functioning as
expected. This option uses a test record in Eloqua and allows you to observe the before and
after results.
Export Fields - This option will allow you to export a report with the list of Eloqua and CRM field
mappings for the External Call chosen.
Delete External Calls - This option allows you to delete a particular External Call and all its
settings. It is not recommended that this action be used as this can affect your existing CRM
integration. Should you need to delete an External call, please contact Eloqua Support for
assistance.
859 of 1162
You can also manage external calls for an internal event.
To modify the field mapping in Send External Calls:

3. Select the External Calls tab.
4. Expand the Send Data folder until you find the External Call of choice.
5. Select View Field Mapping from the menu next to the External Call you wish to modify. You will
be presented with a new screen in the task pane. Drag the Eloqua field from the right side to the
corresponding CRM field in the left. Repeat for every field you wish to map.
6. Click Save on the bottom toolbar.
Notes:
Only the fields that are available to the CRM user for read/write access will be displayed on this
screen. If you are looking for a field that's not displayed, verify with your CRM administrator that
the CRM user in Eloqua has the proper access to the fields. In addition, if a corresponding
Eloqua field is not available for mapping, you will be required to create that field and return to this
field mapping page to complete the mapping.
860 of 1162
To test an External Call for Sending Data to the CRM system:

2. Select Outbound > External Calls tab (at the top of the Tree View).
3. Expand the relevant folder (Send Data and one of the sub-folders) and select Test External Call
from the menu next to the External Call you wish to test. The External Call Testing page opens,
the features depending on what type of Call you are testing. For this procedure, we'll assume
that it's an Update Contact External Call in the Contacts folder.
4. In the External Call Parameters section, select a Contact by performing a Search and entering a
search query.
5. Once you have located the appropriate record, from the menu next to the record, choose Select
this record.
861 of 1162
6. Once you are back at the original screen, click Prepare for Test. This will show you a snapshot
of the data in your CRM before and after the test.
7. Click Execute Test to complete the test.
Managing internal events

The Internal Events tab allows you to manipulate which External Calls will get triggered when a
particular Internal Event occurs. An Internal Event is an action that can be executed through a Program
Builder action when a marketing activity occurs (i.e. email click-through, email bounceback, etc.), or
through Integration Rules. You can do one or more of three things with an Internal Event:
Enable/Disable the Event
Modify the default External Call mappings for the Event
Modify the External Call mappings for a specific asset in the Event
To enable/Disable an Internal Event:

2. Click the Outbound tab.
862 of 1162
3. Click the Internal Events tab.

4. Expand the relevant folders until you find the Internal Event of choice
5. From the menu choices next to the Event, select Enable/Disable Internal Event
Setting Defaults for an External Call Triggered by an Internal Event
To modify External Call mappings for an Internal Event:

3. Select the Internal Events tab.
4. Expand the relevant folders until you find the Internal Event of choice.
5. From the menu choices next to the Event, select Map Existing External Calls.
6. In this screen you will see which External Calls are mapped to the Internal Event. Depending on
the Event (for example, Hypersite Visit or Form Submit), you will be able to select All (the
default) or create an Event Mapping for a specific instance (select it using the picklist).
7. You may Edit the External Call, Delete Mapping where the External Call will become
unassociated with the Internal Event, change the Execution Order of the External calls, or Add
Existing External Call, which will add another External Call to be triggered.
8. Click Save to confirm any changes.
9. Repeat these steps as required for any other forms that you want to exempt from the default
update settings for form submissions.
Setting Defaults for an External Call Triggered by an Internal Event
If you are updating field values in your CRM from submitted form data for All forms (using the Form
Submit Activity), then these are used as the defaults for any form that does not have specific external
calls configured. You can exclude selected forms from the default settings so that the CRM data is
updated a different way or not updated.
863 of 1162
The following procedure shows you how to set up External Calls from form submissions for a selected
form that you don't want to update using the default settings; in this case, it's set not to update CRM
data when the form is submitted.
To modify External Call mappings for one or more forms from the defaults:
3. Select the Internal Events tab. Expand the Internal Events folder, then the Activity folder.
4. Expand the relevant folders until you find Form Submit. From the menu choices next to Form
Submit, select Map Existing External Calls.
5. In almost every case, unless the form was previously configured independently, there will be no
external calls listed for submissions for this form. The defaults used by this form are provided
under the settings for All forms. However, the local settings will override the default settings.
Click Add Existing External Call.
6. By default, the setting in the picklist is set to (None). If you save this event mapping with the
External Call set to (None), then this overrides the default settings for All. In other words, when
this form is submitted, there will be no external call to update field values in the CRM system.
Click Save to save the setting for this form.
7. Repeat these steps as required for any other forms that you want to exempt from the default
update settings for form submissions.
17.2.5 CRM integration: status and reporting

Program Feeders are used to automatically add members into the first Step of a Program or to a
specific Program Step based on Group membership, a Contact Filter or visitor Saved Report.
The Status tab is intended to allow users to monitor the activity between Eloqua and the CRM. When
first arriving at the Status tab you will be presented with the Integration Status image. This status
864 of 1162
image indicates how many pending updates, completed updates, successfully imported records (from
CRM) and how many failed updates occurred in the specified time frame. You may view the statistics
of your CRM status by changing the Time Period.
By hovering over any of these items you can drill down further to get more details on any of these
items. Each Integration point on the Status image will have different options to allow you to drill into the
data (i.e. View by External Call, View All, View All by Error, etc.) You can access this screen by
navigating to Reporting > Integration Status within the Status tab.
When you hover your cursor over one of the text areas in the status diagram (for example, Failed
Updates), a menu appears showing how many pending updates, completed updates, successfully
imported records (from CRM) or failed updates occurred in the specified time frame. By hovering over
any of these items, you can drill down further to get more details.
Successfully Imported Records > View by Auto Synch - Auto Synchs are used to synchronize
information changed in the CRM with Eloqua. View a Report showing all successful Auto
Synchs for a selected Time Period. From the menu next to each Auto Synch, you can also view
a Time Span (for example, Last month) or Time Range (with a Start and End Date) History for
that Auto Synch.
865 of 1162
Completed Updates - Updates are used to push changes in the Eloqua system into the CRM
system. You can view All Updates in a single list for a selected Time Frame (Time Span or Time
Range), or view a list of categories for the different types of Updates by the External Call used,
along with the Number Completed for Updates in each category. You can drill down to specific
Updates in a category by clicking on the Number for that category.
Pending Updates - Pending Updates are those that have been initiated, but not yet completed.
Like Completed Updates, you can view these All in a single list or by category of External Call.
Failed Updates - Failed Updates are those that were initiated, but that were not successful and
have been terminated. This is an important source of information for troubleshooting any
866 of 1162
inconsistencies between Eloqua and the CRM system. Failed Updates can All be viewed in a
single list, viewed by category of External Call, or displayed by the type of Error that caused the
failure.
You can also view additional status Reports by selecting Reporting > Integration Reporting from the
Function bar. See the topic Viewing Integration Reporting for more information.
Viewing integration reporting

The Integration Reporting page gives you a detailed view of your outbound integration (calls to the
CRM system) for the past month. From the main Integration Status page (navigate to Setup>
Integration and click the Status tab), you can access this page by clicking Reporting > Integration
Reporting. The page gives you access to several main reporting functions:
Integration Reporting
Re-Running External Calls
Pausing Queues
Advanced Options
Integration Reporting
The information shown on the page includes:

Internal Event Queue Stats - Shows internal events in Eloqua that are subject to integration
updates in the CRM system. This includes the internal events Completed, those Pending
(initiated but not yet completed), and those that have been Locked and not completed.
External Call Queue Stats - Shows calls to the CRM system to synchronize the data with
Eloqua. This includes calls Completed, Pending, Locked, and Failed (initiated, but not
successfully completed and terminated). You can also view Failed calls by Error type.
Test External Call Stats - Shows Completed, Pending, Locked, and Failed Test Calls to the
CRM system.
867 of 1162
You can click Refresh at any point to get the most current information. If you want to return to the
Status page (with the diagram), select Reporting > Integration Status.
Re-Running External Calls
When you view any of these Reports, you have the ability to perform any of the typical Report
functions. In addition, for some Reports , you will notice an Actions menu. This menu allows you to reprocess Calls with a limit of 40 at a given time. From the Report, simply check those calls you wish to
re-process and select Re-Run External Calls.
The following Reports have this feature:

Internal Events Locked (Internal Events Queue Stats > Internal Events Locked > View All)
External Calls Completed (External Call Queue Stats > External Calls Completed > View All)
External Calls Failed (External Call Queue Stats > External Calls Failed > View All)
External Calls Locked (External Call Queue Stats > External Calls Locked > View All)
868 of 1162
Test External Calls Failed (Test External Call Stats > Test External Calls Failed > View All)
Test External Calls Failed (Test External Call Stats > Test External Calls Failed > View All)
Pausing Queues
You can Pause the Internal or External Queues. When the queues are paused, all new calls are added
to their corresponding queues but are not processed. Once the Queues are enabled (click Enable
where the Pause button was previously), the items that were paused will continue to be processed.
Advanced Options
The Advanced Options menu gives you access to more functions:

Test Event - Create a Test Event to generate a call to the CRM system to ensure that the
integration is working correctly. The Event Tester dialog box allows you to configure the Test
Event details, which change depending on which Internal Event you choose. For example, for
Custom Contact Events, set the Event Parameters (such as the Contact used (required) and
the Event Custom Sub Type action carried out on the Contact record). When you have finished
configuring the Event, click Add Event. To initiate the Call(s), click Process Queue Record and
click OK in the confirmation dialog box. Repeat as required with more Test Events. Click Close
when you are done.
Bulk Reset Events - Use this function to change the status and carry out actions on a whole
category or group of Events or External Calls in one operation. For example, if you believe that a
869 of 1162
number of Failed External Calls resulted from a condition that no longer exists, you can reset
the Failed Calls so that they're resubmitted to the CRM system. Select the type of Internal
Event or External Call you want to reset and any additional details (such as the particular type of
Failed External Call and Failure Message). Select the Time Span (Failed Within Last in the
diagram below), then click Reset and OK in the confirmation dialog box. The number of Event or
Calls reset appears in a message at the top of the dialog box. Click Close to close the dialog
box.
View Internal Queue Log - View the list of all Internal Events currently in queue and the status of
each. From the Report, you can Export the information (or print it), Save it to an existing Report
List, or Add it to a Dashboard or a regularly-scheduled Email Update you can send to other
Agents in the Eloqua system.
View External Queue Log - View the list of all External Calls currently in queue and the status of
each. From the Report, you can Export the information (or print it), Save it to an existing Report
List, or Add it to a Dashboard or a regularly-scheduled Email Update you can send to other
Agents in Eloqua.
870 of 1162
17.2.6 CRM capability matrix and supported platforms

The following table highlights the core, supported capabilities of each CRM platform Eloqua natively
integrates with:
Inbound
CRM
Sales
Cloud
CRMOD
MS
Dynamics
SFDC
Outbound
Leads Contacts Accounts Opportunities
Custom
Custom
Leads Contacts
Objects
Objects
Closed
Loop
Reporting
Supported CRM platforms

Integrations with the following CRM platform versions are currently supported by Eloqua:
Sales Cloud: all available versions supported
CRMOD: all available versions supported
MS Dynamics: version 4.0, 2011, 2013 and 2015 (on premise and on demand are supported
where applicable)
SFDC: all available versions supported
17.2.7 Sales cloud integration

Oracle Sales Cloud delivers a wide range of functionality that is purpose-built to address the needs of
sales executives, sales managers, sales reps, and system administrators to improve effectiveness,
better understand customers and business, and build a pipeline for success.
871 of 1162
Integrating Oracle Sales Cloud and Oracle Marketing Cloud aligns sales and marketing activities
across the buying cycle by connecting the segmentation, campaign management, and lead generation
processes in Oracle Marketing with lead, contact and account management processes in Oracle sales.
During the integration:
Oracle Sales Cloud account, contact, and lead data is synchronized to Oracle Marketing Cloud
where it can be used to perform segmentation, and to run targeted marketing campaigns to
generate new sales leads.
Leads generated from marketing campaigns in Oracle Marketing are nurtured and synchronized
with Oracle Sales Cloud as sales leads.
Links to an individuals digital profile data and to the Engage tool in Oracle Marketing Cloud are
available from the Oracle Sales Cloud lead user interface and from the contact user interface.
Learn more about integrating oracle sales cloud.
17.2.8 Integration with Oracle CRM On Demand

Overview
This document contains the instructions for configuration in Oracle CRM On Demand as part of the
integration with Oracle Marketing Cloud. These steps are only relevant once an Oracle Marketing
Cloud instance has been set up and the integration with Oracle CRM On Demand has been configured.
To complete the configuration in Oracle CRM OnDemand as part of the

integration with Oracle Marketing Cloud:
1. Create four custom web applets.
Contact object: Marketing Cloud Profiler add-on, if used.
Contact object: Marketing Cloud Links.
Lead object: Marketing Cloud Profiler add-on, if used.
Lead object: Marketing Cloud Links.
2. Update the Never Email field for the Lead and Contact objects.
3. Create custom fields on the Lead and Contact objects.
4. Create a custom web tab for the Marketing Cloud Engage add-on, if used.
5. Update the page layouts with the new applets and fields.
6. Add the Marketing Cloud Engage custom web tab, if used.
For complete instructions on how to set up your integration environment, please refer to the Oracle
Marketing Cloud Integration with Oracle CRM on Demand Configuration Guide.
872 of 1162
17.3 Integration with Oracle Social Relationship Management

This reference document provides the list of resources that will assist you in configuring and managing
an integration between Oracle Eloqua Marketing Cloud Service and Oracle Social Relationship
Management (SRM). Note that this list is accurate and up-to-date as of the publishing date indicated at
the top of this document, but URLs and some links may change over time. If any changes occur, they
will be reflected here.
Getting Started: Oracle Social Relationship Management Knowledge Zone
Getting Started: Oracle Eloqua and Oracle Content Marketing Cloud Service Knowledge Zone
Concepts
As of this writing, the following integrations are available between Oracle Eloqua Marketing Cloud and
Oracle SRM:
Campaigns - The ability to see Eloqua campaigns as tags in SRM
SmartCapp - The ability to push an Eloqua landing page to SRM
Dynamic Link Tracking - The ability to capture social digital body language within Eloqua
Custom Audiences - The ability to see SRM as provider in AdFocus
The following are links to documentation resources for understanding, configuring and managing an
integration between Oracle Eloqua Marketing Cloud and Oracle SRM.
Installation Documentation and Resources

Campaigns - See the "tags" area of this document:
http://docs.oracle.com/cloud/social/doc.1/srm/vitrue-publisher/the-pub-admin-tab.html#tags
SmartCapp - See this document on Topliners for instructions on how to install the Publish to Oracle
SRM app: https://community.oracle.com/docs/DOC-895412
Dynamic Link Tracking - See this document on SRM docs on how to set up dynamic link tracking:
http://docs.oracle.com/cloud/social/doc.1/srm/vitrue-publisher/dynamic-link-tracking.html
Performed by Eloqua Customer:
Custom Audiences- Configuration of Custom Audiences requires additional steps as outlined
in the following documents:
Within SRM - http://docs.oracle.com/cloud/social/doc.1/srm/vitrue-srm-settings/customaudiences.html
873 of 1162
For any information not included in the above resources and documentation, please contact your
Oracle Eloqua Marketing Cloud Account Representative.
17.4 Oracle Data Management Platform Integration

In order to reduce complexity and help marketers deliver truly customer-centric campaigns, Eloqua is
able to integrate with the Oracle Data Management Platform (BlueKai DMP) using anonymous ID
swapping.
The BlueKai DMPintegration is available only to customers of both Oracle Eloqua and OracleBlueKai.
17.4.1 Overview
The BlueKai DMP is a centralized data management platform that allows you to create target
audiences based on a combination of in-depth first-party and third-party audience data; accurately
target campaigns to these audiences across third-party ad networks and exchanges; and measure with
accuracy which campaigns performed the best across segments and channels to refine media buys
and ad creative over time.
Eloqua's integration with the BlueKai DMP provides you with a single unified view of your customers,
driving you to create more effective marketing campaigns. It enables you to anonymize your Eloquabased campaign response and engagement data, import it into your BlueKai DMP, and then activate it
across display, search, social, mobile, and other media execution platforms.
Ultimately, it focuses on better personalizing the interactions you have with your contacts and users.
17.4.2 How It Works

In general, IDswapping occurs when a contact opens an Eloqua email, or a visitor visits a site that
includes an Eloqua tracking script. The tracking script retrieves anonymized data (such as the Eloqua
GUID and hashed email address) and passes it to BlueKai DMP. BlueKai then returns a BlueKai
unique user ID(BKUUID). This associates the Eloqua contact with its BlueKai user profile, while
ensuring that any personally-identifiable information remains solely in Eloqua.
ID swapping is currently possible in the following scenarios:
874 of 1162
Anonymous Web visit: an anonymous user visits a web page or Eloqua microsite that includes
Eloqua tracking scripts.
Email Open: a contact opens an Eloqua customer's email.
Click-throughs: a contact clicks on a link to an Eloqua landing page or microsite that includes
Eloqua tracking scripts.
You can watch ID swapping as its happens using the BlueKai Eloqua ID Swap Demo.
875 of 1162
18 Landing Pages
Landing pages are often the first significant part of a campaign that a contact will see. A contact may
be directed to your landing page from a link in an email or from an ad on the web. The landing page
provides the contact with more information and options related to the email or ad that brought them
there. On the landing page they can be asked to participate in the campaign by reviewing detailed
information, submitting a form, or clicking a button to receive additional information etc. The landing
page moves prospects through your campaign and gives them a clearer idea about your product and
your companies trustworthiness.
Eloqua provides a landing page editor in which to create customized dynamic landing pages. With
Eloqua you can insert visitor or contact information directly into your landing pages to provide them
with a customized experience. The landing page should grab the visitor's attention and give them a
reason to stay and to take action.
To keep visitors engaged with your landing pages, keep the following four questions in mind when
designing the page:
Am I where I expected to be?: Establish familiarity so that your visitor knows exactly where
they are. If they are coming from an email, make sure that the "look and feel" of the landing page
is similar to that of the email. If they are clicking through from a Pay-Per-Click advertisement on
a third-party web site, make sure that the search term is the title of the landing page header.
Is it relevant to me?: Ensure that the value proposition on the landing page aligns with what
most visitors will expect. Use imagery, language, and tone to write engaging, dynamic copy.
Use contact fields to personalize the site for the visitor.
Do I believe you?: Leverage testimonials, awards, certifications, customer logos, and thirdparty validation to establish trust with the visitor.
Can I easily engage?: Do not use forms that ask for every bit of information about the visitor
all at once. You can gradually glean that information as you establish a relationship with the
visitor. The incentive on the landing page should be matched to the effort required by the visitor.
Example: For the visitor to download an eBook, perhaps you only need to ask them to
submit three fields of information in a form rather than 20 fields. If you are providing a
paid-for analyst report, you may be able to ask for more information to match the value
you are providing.
876 of 1162
18.1 Landing page examples

Good landing pages should create an impression on the viewer, provide access to relevant information
in an efficient way, establish trust with the viewer, and compel the viewer to take one or more actions
that moves them along the campaign flow. It is important that your landing pages look crisp and
professional and meet your marketing goals without wasting the viewer's time.
We will look at a few examples to show some of the features included in good landing pages.
Example 1: Simple page with a form
This page provides a bit more information that expands on the information provided in the email or PPC
ad that drove the visitor to the landing page. Note that in this example, there is little text and only a few
fields of information that need to be filled in before the visitor can access the eBook.
Example 2: Added value offer with a complex form

On this landing page, the goal is to drive registration for a panel discussion and luncheon with industry
leaders. Because more value is offered, the form can be more complex, gathering registration
information and additional details from registrants. Note the trust element, the company logos in the
"Sponsored By" section at the bottom of the page.
877 of 1162
Example 3: Landing page with a survey

This landing page has a simple survey embedded in it. Note that the incentive for the customer
(besides wanting to be helpful) is the chance to win a gift card.
878 of 1162
Example 4: Providing access to a demo using different versions of the landing page
This landing page provides visitors with access to a demo for a new product. The demo is the main
driver for this page, so the text on the page is minimal.
879 of 1162
Here's another version of the same page with similar elements. Note the personalization (carried out
using a first name field merge) on the Post-It note in the image. You can create two different pages,
then do some A/B testing to see which one drives more visitor traffic to the demo.
880 of 1162
Example 5: Providing access to an eBook chapter, videos, and social media options
This landing page is a real workhorse. The primary purpose is to provide access to a chapter from
Steve Woods' book, "Digital Body Language", with additional links for purchasing the book. But the
visitor can also access marketing videos or get additional information through social media channels
such as Twitter, Facebook, and LinkedIn.
881 of 1162
Example 6:Page with traffic from emails and banners

Here's an example of a blog page that receives traffic from various sources:from a banner on the
Eloqua login page or opening page, from signature banners in our employee's emails, from emails sent
to customers, and from other links such as those in press releases. You can use this same setup to
link to other types of pages; for example, from banners, emails, and other sources to an event sign-up
page that lets visitors get information about an event, then register.
882 of 1162
883 of 1162
18.2 Code requirements for uploading HTML landing pages

Important: If you have asked a third-party to create the code for your landing page, it is
important that you provide them with this information in order to avoid integration problems in
Eloqua.
In order for your HTMLto render properly in Eloqua and across all browsers, it is recommended to use
the following guidelines:
DocType is XHTML-1.0-Strict (except for migrated pages). This DocType is used to ensure the
best possible rendering of landing pages across browsers, and therefore all uploaded content
must also use this DocType:
<!DOCTYPEhtml PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTDXHTML1.0Strict//EN"

"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
Code must validate properly according to W3CMarkup Validation Service at
http://validator.w3.org/.
JScode must pass the JSLint JavaScript Code Quality Tool (see http://www.jslint.com/):
All JSshould live in the header tag.
Broken JSwill cause your page to not render in Internet Explorer.
Do not target the <BODY> tag with CSS.

Ensure compatibility with the following basic Eloqua CSS reset included in the application for
proper renderingacross different browsers:
html{color:#000;background:#FFF;}
body,div,dl,dt,dd,ul,ol,li,h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6,pre,code,
form,fieldset,legend,input,button,textarea,p,blockquote,th
td{margin:0;padding:0;}table{bordercollapse:collapse;borderspacing:0;}fieldset,img{border:0;}
address,
caption,cite,code,dfn,em,strong,th,varoptgroup{fontstyle:inherit;font-weight:inherit;}del,ins{textdecoration:none;}caption,th{text-align:left;}
input,button,textarea,select,optgroup,option{font-
884 of 1162
family:inherit;font-size:inherit;font-style:inherit;fontweight:inherit;}input,button,textarea,select{*fontsize:100%;}
Do not use these System class names:
.sc-view
.sc-view-overflow
.sc-container-view
.overlays-active
.inline-styled-view
.inline-styled-view{}
.hidden-border
.body
.sc-view.static-layout
.main
.elq-form
.elq-form-ce
Use static or absolute positioning, and avoid relative or fixed-positioned elements.
Use of tables is permitted.
Do notuse relative paths to reference images, stylesheets, etc.
Do not use<HTML>, <HEAD>, <BODY>opening or closing tags within a text or shared
content section.
Ensure all elements have correct opening and closing tags.
Note:If you re-save any transitioned content in the landing page editor, you must reset the
following: page dimensions, body background color/images, document background
color/images.
After you have verified that all requirements have been met, you can proceed to upload the HTMLcode
for your landing pages. See Creating landing pages using the HTML upload wizard.
885 of 1162
18.3 Creating newlanding pages using the HTML editor

Landing pages are an important tool that can provide additional information and be used as a
destination for visitors who clickthrough from emails. With Eloqua, you can use the HTML editor live
preview to create dynamic and effective HTML landing pages using a combination of code, and the
standardEloqua elements such as images, forms, dynamically populated fields, and so on.
To create a new HTML landing page:

1. Navigate to Assets > Landing Pages, then click Create a LandingPage, the Template

2. Select an HTML template from the chooser, if you want to begin from a blank canvas select the
Blank HTMLLanding Page template, then click Choose,the template opens in the HTML
editor.
3. Click the action menu (gear icon), then select Settings, the landing page details window opens.
Modify the settings for the landing page as needed:
Change the name of the landing page to something more meaningful, this is to make it
easier to locate when it is needed.
Select a microsite from the Microsites drop-down list. Learn more about microsites.
The URL for your microsite is displayed below the drop-down list. If your microsite points
to more than one domain, the settings dialog box will display the first URL, followed by
and [x] more where x is the number of additional domains. To see all domains, click on
the and [x] more message to open a pop-up showing all domains in your microsite.
886 of 1162
Create a Vanity URL (optional). Enter the domain name in the Vanity URL field, Eloqua
validates the name and if it is available and unique, a green check mark appears. If the
domain name is invalid, or if it has already been used on the same domain a red x
appears. You must change the vanity URLto one that has not yet been used on this
microsite.
Select one of the following actions for the landing page:
Don't automatically redirect or close: The user's browser remains open in their
browser window until he or she navigates to another URL. They are not
automatically redirected to another site upon arrival on your landing page.
Automatically re-direct after [x] seconds: The user is automatically re-directed
to another site upon arrival on you landing page. You can specify how long (in
seconds) until they are re-directed, and you can specify the URL that they will be
re-directed to.
Example: This is useful if your landing page is one that confirms the
user's choice to unsubscribe from emails. The user can be redirected to
your home page where he or she can obtain more information on your
company.
Automatically close window after [x] seconds: The window closes
automatically after a specified amount of time (in seconds).
887 of 1162
Click Done to save your landing page settings. The landing page details window closes and the
vanity URL (if applicable) and the microsites are shown in the upper left-hand corner of the
editor window, followed by the actual URLto the landing page.
Note: To verify that your landing page has been added to your microsite, click Save,
then navigate to Settings > Setup >Microsites. Click on the landing pages tab and find
your landing page in the list, along with its respective URL.
4. Click Save in the upper right-hand corner when you are done, the HTML landing page is saved.
18.4 Creating new landing pages using the design editor

You can create a landing page with additional information to be used as a destination for visitors who
clickthrough from emails. With Eloqua you can build your landing page from scratch or from a saved
template and then insert text, images, dynamically populated fields, and so on.
There are a number of ways to create new landing pages in Eloqua:
Using the design editor, you can add elements using the graphical user interface (as outlined
below).
Using the HTML editor, you can create HTML landing pages using code. Learn more about
creating new HTML landing pages.
Using the upload wizard, you can upload an HTML file for a landing page that was created
outside of Eloqua. Learn more about uploading HTML landing pages.
To create a new landing page:

1. Navigate to Assets > Landing Pages, then click Create a LandingPage, the Template

2. Select a template from the chooser, if you want to begin from a blank canvas select the Blank
Landing Page template, then click Choose,the template opens in the editor window.
3. Click the action menu (gear icon), then select Settings, the landing page details window opens.
Modify the settings for the landing page as needed:
Change the name of the landing page to something more meaningful, this is to make it
easier to locate when it is needed.
Select a microsite from the Microsites drop-down list. Learn more about microsites.
888 of 1162
The URL for your microsite is displayed below the drop-down list. If your microsite points
to more than one domain, the settings dialog box will display the first URL, followed by
and [x] more where x is the number of additional domains. To see all domains, click on
the and [x] more message to open a pop-up showing all domains in your microsite.
Create a Vanity URL (optional). Enter the domain name in the Vanity URL field, Eloqua
validates the name and if it is available and unique, a green check mark appears. If the
domain name is invalid, or if it has already been used on the same domain a red x
appears. You must change the vanity URLto one that has not yet been used on this
microsite.
Select one of the following actions for the landing page:
Don't automatically redirect or close: The user's browser remains open in their
browser window until he or she navigates to another URL. They are not
automatically redirected to another site upon arrival on your landing page.
Automatically re-direct after [x] seconds: The user is automatically re-directed
to another site upon arrival on you landing page. You can specify how long (in
seconds) until they are re-directed, and you can specify the URL that they will be
re-directed to.
Example: This is useful if your landing page is one that confirms the
user's choice to unsubscribe from emails. The user can be redirected to
your home page where he or she can obtain more information on your
company.
889 of 1162
Automatically close window after [x] seconds: The window closes

automatically after a specified amount of time (in seconds).
Click Done to save your landing page settings. The landing page details window closes
and the vanity URL (if applicable) and the microsites are shown in the upper left-hand
corner of the editor window, followed by the actual URLto the landing page.
Note: To verify that your landing page has been added to your microsite, click
Save, then navigate to Settings > Setup >Microsites. Click on the landing
pages tab and find your landing page in the list, along with its respective URL.
4. Build your page using the components on the left- side pane of the editor window, the table
below provides a description of each of these components.
Component
Description
Image: Insert images in the landing page. Click this icon to open the Image
Browser, search for an image or upload a new one, then place it in your landing
page by dragging it from the image browser and dropping it onto the page. See
Customizing landing pages for information on formatting images.
Text: Insert text boxes in the landing page. Click this icon to add a text box to
your landing page. Double-click in the text box to enter text. The contents of
the text box can be formatted as needed, see Customizing landing pages for
information on formatting text boxes.
Field Merge: Insert field merges to personalize the landing page for each user
that views it.
Example: You can add a First Name field merge that will access the
viewer's profile and display their first name on the page.
Select the text in the editor that you wish to convert to a field merge, then click
the Field Merge icon to open the Field Merge Browser window. Search for an
existing field merge or create a new one, then double-click on the field merge
name, after the text has been converted it is highlighted in yellow.
Hyperlink: Create a hyperlink on your landing page. Select the text or image
that you want to convert to a hyperlink, then click the Hyperlinks icon, the
Hyperlinks Tools window opens. Click the checkbox next to Enable as

Hyperlink. Specify the Link Type, then configure the link as needed.
See Customizing landing pages for more information about configuring
hyperlinks on landing pages.
890 of 1162
Component
Description
Form: Insert forms on your landing page. Click this icon to open the Form
Browser window. Locate a form in the browser then place it in your landing
page by dragging it from the browser and dropping it onto the page.
Shared Content: Click this icon to open the Shared Content Browser. Locate
the shared content that you want to add then place it in your landing page by
dragging it from the browser and dropping it onto the page.
Dynamic Content: This component allows different content to be substituted
depending on specific rules and conditions. Click the icon to open the
Dynamic Content Browser. Locate the dynamic content that you want to add
then place it in your landing page by dragging it from the browser and dropping
it onto the page.
Cloud Components: Click this icon to add a cloud component to your landing
page, the Cloud Content window opens showing the components that are
enabled for your Eloqua instance. Locate the content that you want to add
then place it in your landing page by dragging it from the browser and dropping
it onto the page.
Note: After you add the cloud component to your landing page, you
must configure it. Double-click on the component on the landing page,
the Cloud Content Configuration window opens. You are prompted to
log in to cloudconnectors.eloqua.com, from here you can configure the
component as needed.
Tools: Click this icon to open the Tools window, this enables you to format
the elements in your landing page as needed. You can format the entire
landing page or individual elements using the different tabs in this window.
See Customizing landing pages for more information about using these tools.
18.5 Creating new landing pages and templates using the

HTMLupload wizard
With Eloqua, you are able to upload HTMLlanding pages that were created outside of the application,
after uploading the content you can edit the code using the HTML editor. The content can be uploaded
as a new landing page that can be used directly, or as a template that can be reused within the
application to create new landing pages.
891 of 1162
Important: When creating an HTMLlanding page outside of Eloqua, you should make sure that
your code adheres to the code requirements.
To create a landing page or template using the HTML upload wizard:

1. Navigate to Assets > Landing Pages, then click Upload a Landing Page from the landing
pages launchpad.
2. Select Upload Landing Page from the HTMLDocument Upload Wizard dialog box to upload a
landing page, or click UploadTemplate to create a new landing page template.
Note: The following steps are the same for both uploading a landing page and uploading
a template.
3. Click on the cloud graphic to begin the wizard. Browse to the location of your HTMLor ZIPfile
for the landing page that you want to upload, then click Open.
4. In the Process Files step of the upload wizard, review the list of images and other files and
choose to either use the existing files or upload new ones.
892 of 1162
Choose one of the options listed beside each image:

Use Suggested Image: Choose this option if the image is already in the image library. If
an image is available that matches the title of the image file in the HTML code, the
application will automatically suggest that file as the correct mapping.
Upload New Image: Choose this option if the image is not in the library. Click the
Upload New button, then navigate to the designated file (often in a subfolder of the
HTML file), double-click on the file name, then click Upload to upload the image to
Eloqua. Once uploaded, a thumbnail of the image is shown.
Do Nothing: Choose this option if you do not wish to change the image shown in the
thumbnail, select for that image.
Click Next Step, when you are finished.
5. In the Process Links step, all hyperlinks in the uploaded landing page are listed. If you want to
track these hyperlinks and ensure that clickthroughs are reported in Eloqua, select the Track
Link check box next to each hyperlink. If you wish to track visits to all links in the landing page,
click the Track All button in the upper-left hand corner. Repeat as required, then click Next
Step.
6. In the Finish step of the upload wizard, name your HTMLdocument and, if needed, change the
destination folder where you want it to be stored. This is an optional step, the location can be
changed at a later date if required.
893 of 1162
If you are uploading a template, you also have the option to add a description, and choose the
image that will represent this template in the Template Chooser.
shown in the Template Chooser. If you clear this check box, you are presented with the option
to select either a generic (blue) icon, or by clicking Change Icon, you can choose one of the
available icon designs shown below.
894 of 1162
7. Click Finish to complete the upload process, the upload wizard closes and the HTML editor
opens.
8. If you want to make changes to the uploaded landing page, click one of the page view buttons in
the upper right-hand corner to open the HTML pane (you can choose to set the pane to the right,
or along the bottom of the screen). Learn more about the live preview HTML editor.
Add content to the uploaded landing page as needed. Elements can be added using one of the
following methods:
Type the HTMLcode directly into the HTMLpane.
Click one of the icons on the left-side pane. Locate the element that you want to add in
the browser, then drag-and-drop the element into the code at the desired location. When
an element is added in the HTML code, the preview pane reflects the change.
9. Click Savein the upper right-hand corner when you are done, the landing page or template is
saved.
895 of 1162
18.6 Adding text boxes to landing pages

Text boxes can be added to landing pages and formatted as needed.
To add a text box to a landing page:

1. Navigate to Assets > Landing Pages, then open an existing landing page or create a new one.
2. Click the Text icon on the left-side menu in the landing page editor window, a text box is added
to the canvas.
3. Double-click anywhere in the box to enter edit mode. Highlight and delete the instructions in the
box, or type over them to add your text. You can also paste text into the box from the Windows
clipboard by pressing Ctrl+V.
4. Right-click in the text box and select Format Text, or highlight the text and select the Tools
icon on the left-side menu, the Toolswindow opens. This window has six different tabs that give
you a number of different customization options. Learn more about customizing landing page
text boxes. Close the Tools window when you are done by clicking the X in the upper left-hand
corner.
It is also possible to edit the contents of a text box directly in the source (HTML)code. To edit
the source code of a text box:
i. Right-click on the text box and select Edit Source, the Editing dialog box opens.
ii. Enter text and formatting code as needed.
Content created in this editor is checked against a whitelist of permissible HTMLtags

and attributes. If you attempt to save a landing page containing a text box with prohibited
896 of 1162
(blacklisted)tags or attributes, Eloqua will display a validation error and you will not be
able to save your landing page until you remove them.
Example: Some of the prohibited tags are: custom HTML elements, custom
HTML attributes, script tags and style tags.
5. Click Save to save your changes to the landing page.
18.7 Customizing landing page text boxes and images

After you add a text box or an image to a landing page, you can customize the field in a variety of ways
using the Tools window.
Highlight the text or image then select the Tools icon on the left-side menu, the Toolswindow opens.
This window has six different tabs (outlined below), that give you a number of different customization
options. .
Text Tools
Click the
icon at the top of the window, the Text Tools tab opens. In this tab you can edit text
boxes in the following ways:

Change the font family: Click the Family drop-down list to display the list of available font
families. Click on the desired font family to select it.
897 of 1162
Change the text size: Highlight the text then click the Size drop-down list and select the size
(in pixels) that you want to make the text. Only the text that you have highlighted is affected by
this setting.
Change the style (decoration)of the text: Highlight the text then click one or more of the
style buttons to change it to bold, italic, or underlined.
Change the color of the text: Highlight the text then click in the Color box, the color chooser
opens. Use the slider bar to select the color that you want to use, then select the shade by
clicking on the large color tile to the left.
You can add highlighting (similar to a shadow effect)by once more selecting the appropriate
text, clicking in the Highlight box and using the same steps as above to apply a highlight.
the # box in the color chooser.
Align the text in your text box horizontally: Highlight the text then click one of the buttons
under Horizontal in the Alignment section of the window. From left to right they are: left, center,
right and full alignment.
Align the text in your text box vertically: Click one of the buttons under Vertical in the
Alignment section of the window. From left to right they are: top, center, and bottom alignment.
Format your text as a list: Highlight the list of items then click one of the buttons in the List
section. The first button converts the text into a numbered list and the second button creates a
bulleted list.
If you do not already have text entered in the text box, selecting one of these buttons
automatically formats any new text you enter as a list. When you are done with the list, click the
button again to remove the list formatting.
Outdent or indent your text: Click on a line of text then select either the outdent or indent
button under the Indent section.
Change the position of one or more characters in your text box: Highlight the character(s)
and select either the superscript or subscript buttons under the Script section.
Spacing between characters: Click in the Between Characters box and enter a number
measured in either pixels (px) or em to specify your desired value. Make sure to include the "px"
or "em" with the desired value.
Spacing between lines of text : Click in the Between Lines box and enter a number measured
in em.
898 of 1162
Style Tools
icon at the top of the window, the Style Tools tab opens. In this tab you can edit the text
Click the
box or image in the following ways:

Change the background color: Click in the box under the Background section of the Styles
Tools tab, the color chooser opens. Use the slider bar (pointed out it the image below) to select
the color that you want to use, then select the shade by clicking on the large color tile to the left.
the # box on the color chooser.
Choose a border style: By default, no border is selected, click on the Borders drop-down list to
select a border type to add.
The following table shows an example of each border type using a value of 10 pixels:
Border Type
Example
None
899 of 1162
Border Type
Example
Hidden
Solid
Groove
Dotted
Dashed
Double
Ridge
Inset
Outset
Change the border color: Click in the box under the Borders section of the Styles Tools tab,
the color chooser opens. Use the slider bar to select the color that you want to use, then select
the shade by clicking on the large color tile to the left. When you are done, click outside the box
to close it.
900 of 1162
the # box on the color chooser.
Border Sides: Select which sides will have a border, enable the checkbox for each side
individually to control which will have borders and which will not: left, top, bottom, right
Change the amount of space between the text and the border: In the Padding section of
the Style Tools window, enter a value in the px box next to each side of the border. You can
enter different number of pixels for each side, and the image will move in the text box
accordingly. Enter different numbers until you have found the exact format and location that you
want.
Hyperlinks Tools
Click the
icon at the top of the window, the Hyperlink Tools tab opens. In this tab you can add
hyperlinks to your landing pages in the following way:

i. Select the text or image that you want to use for the hyperlink, then click the Enable as
Hyperlink checkbox in the Hyperlinks Tools tab.
ii. In the window, choose one of the following options from the Link Type drop-down list:
Landing Page: Link to an existing landing page in the application. Click the file icon next
to the landing page address line, the landing page chooser window opens. Select a
landing page and click Choose.

File in File Storage: Link to a file in the file storage area in the application, such as a
PDF file. Click the file icon next to the File field, the file storage chooser window opens.
Select a file to use then click Choose.
901 of 1162
Webpage: Link to a company or external webpage. Enter the URL of the webpage in the
URL field. Click the Redirect (for untracked pages) checkbox to enable tracking on an
otherwise untracked web site.
Note: The URLentered above will change to reflect the tracking function.
System Action: Allow the recipient to configure a viewing or subscription option. Choose
one of the following options from the Action drop-down list.
Send to Subscription List: Adds the user to the general subscription list for your
mailings.
Send to Subscription Page: Sends the user to a page where they can manage
all of their subscription options.
Subscribe to All: Lets the user subscribe to all emails.
Unsubscribe from All: Lets the user to unsubscribe from all emails.
New Email Message: Link to a new email. Enter the To: email address.
iii. In the Link Hover Text field, enter the text that you want the recipient to see when they hover
over the hyperlink with their mouse.
Layout Tools
Click the
icon at the top of the window, the Layout Tools tab opens. In this tab you can edit the
text box or image in the following ways:

Size: This setting controls the size of the section in the landing page. Enter values in the Width
and Height fields to change the size of the text box or image.
Position: This setting controls the position of the section relative to the "0" point (the upper-left
hand corner of the landing page). Enter a value in the From left (X) and From Right (Y) fields to
change the position of the text box or image.
After setting the size and position of the text-box or image, click the Lock Size and Position checkbox
to maintain those settings. The size and position can be changed later, if required, by returning to the
902 of 1162
landing page editor, selecting the text box or image, and unclicking the Lock size and Position
checkbox.
Page Style Tools

Click the
icon at the top of the window, the Page Stylestab opens. In this tab you can style the
entire page:
Alignment: You can set the alignment for the entire page. Make sure that nothing on the landing
page canvas is selected, then click one of the buttons under the Alignment section of the
window. From left to right, the options are, align left, align center, and align right.
Padding: You can control the amount of space that will pad the top and bottom of the page.
Width and Height: Enter a value (in pixels) in the Width and Height fields, this controls the
width and height of landing page content area.
Content Background: Select the type and color of the content background.
Browser Background: Select the type and color of the browser background.
903 of 1162
Page Snippet Tools

icon at the top of the window, the Page Snippet tab opens. In this tab you can control
Click the
code snippets in your landing page. You can view and edit the following elements in your landing page
code:
Meta Tags: The meta tags provide metadata about the content of your landing page, and
provides format and character set information and keywords related to the content. You can add
meta tags by clicking the + button, and remove them by selecting the one to be removed, then
clicking the - button.
Example: A meta tag used to describe content as related to free web tutorials could
be:<meta name="description"content="Free Web tutorials"/>.
Header:The header information is placed between the <head> tags and contains details about
the sender, route, and recipient of the email.
Example: <title>Document_Title</title>, where Document_Title is the actual title of the
document.
The header can be customized using a CSS, HTML, and JS editor. Click to open one of the
editors and add custom code as needed.
Click the X in the upper-left hand side of the Text Tools box to close it when you are done customizing
the text box.
904 of 1162
Layering elements, Grouping, and Locking

If you have more than one element on your landing page that you would like to superimpose over
another, you can use the Move to Front/Send to Back function on the right-click context menu. Rightclick the object you want to move and select either Move to Front, to layer it over another object, or
Send toBack, to have it lay behind another object.
Example: In the landing page below, there is a form with fields that a contact should fill out in
order to enter to win a trip to Hawaii.
It would be more appealing, perhaps, if the form were superimposed on top of the graphic to
form one image. To do this, simply drag-and-drop the form over the graphic. Then right-click on
the form and select Move to Front, the fields are superimposed over the graphic as shown
905 of 1162
below.
After you add two or more objects that interact with one another, you can group those objects together
so they will move as a single object. See Grouping objects in landing pages.
When you are happy with the position of an object on your landing page, you can lock its position. See
Locking and unlocking objects in landing pages.
18.8 Copying objects in the landing page editor

You can copy and paste objects in the landing page editor, this saves you time if you want to reuse
elements.
To create a copy of an object in the landing page editor:
906 of 1162
2. Click the object on the landing page canvas that you want to copy and press Ctrl+C to copy the
item to your clipboard.
3. Press Ctrl+V to paste a copy of the object in the landing page. The pasted copy will initially be
superimposed on the original, but you can drag-and-drop it to the desired location on the canvas.
Note: You cannot copy and paste a grouped object. In order to create a copy of a
grouped object, you must first ungroup it, and then copy and paste the objects
individually. After pasting the objects on the canvas, you can then regroup the originals,
as well as the copies.
4. Click Save to save the landing page with your changes.
Note: If you wish to undo any action in the landing page editor, open the action menu then click
Undo. If you wish to redo an action that you have undone, click Redo on the action menu.
18.9 Grouping objects in landing pages

You can group the objects on your landing page together, this allows you to move all grouped objects at
once, while maintaining their relationship and relative position to one another. After objects are
grouped, they can also be locked, giving you further control over how the elements in your landing
pages will be positioned and formatted on the canvas.
To group objects in a landing page:

2. Hold down the Ctrl key and single left-click on each object that you wish to include in the group.
Notice that as you click on each object, a border with markers in each corner appears around
the element indicating that it has been selected.
3. Right-click on one of the selected objects, then select Group.
907 of 1162
When the objects are successfully grouped they no longer have individual borders, there is now
a single border around all grouped objects.
You can now reposition the objects in the landing page as a group, you can move and lock the
group as a single object.
Note: After the object is grouped, the right-click menu choices change to reflect this
property. Group is greyed out and Ungroup is brought into focus. To ungroup your
grouped element, right-click on it and select Ungroup .
If you wish to add an object to a pre-existing group, you must first ungroup the grouped
objects, then select all the elements for the new group individually.
908 of 1162
18.10 Locking and unlocking objects in landing pages

When you are happy with the position of an object on a landing page, you can lock it in place.
To lock and unlock objects in a landing page:

2. Single left-click on the object that you want to lock into its current position, the object is outlined
and small boxes appear in each of the four corners to indicate that it is selected.
3. Right-click on the object and select Lock. When the object is locked, it cannot be moved around
the editor canvas until you unlock it.
To unlock the object, right-click on it and select Unlock.
909 of 1162
Notes for formatting locked objects

For an image or text box: You can right-click the object and select Format Dimensions, the
Layout Tools window opens. The Lock size and position checkbox is enabled, uncheck this box
to unlock the object then change the dimensions or position as needed.
Note: Unchecking the Lock size and position checkbox is the same as if you had rightclicked the object and selected Unlock.
For a text box: If you wish to edit its contents without unlocking it first, you can right-click on
the text box and select Edit Source from the context menu. The HTML editor window opens.
Make any necessary changes then click Save. The text box is still locked but your changes to
the text are saved.
For a signature, shared content or dynamic content: Right-click on the locked object and
select Edit Content. The corresponding editor opens, here you can make any changes to the
object. Only its position and dimensions cannot be changed.
For text hyperlinks: Right-click on the locked hyperlink and select Edit Source. The HTML
editor window opens. Make any necessary changes then click Save.
Deleting locked objects: Locking an object does not prevent you from deleting it from the
landing page, it only locks its position on the canvas.
910 of 1162
18.11 Previewing landing pages

Eloqua provides a rich suite of tools that you can use to build, preview, and test your landing pages
before you publish them. The preview feature lets you view your page as your contacts will see it,
including any field merges and dynamic or cloud content. This way, you can be sure that the
personalization features you've used in your landing pages will display properly when a contact visits
the landing page.
The preview window also lets you view the asset as it will display in a desktop/laptop browser, on a
tablet, or on a smart phone, letting you test responsiveness across device types.
To preview a landingpage:
2. Open the action menu
, then select Preview..., the Preview Landing Page window opens.
3. Search for the names of the contacts for whom you wish to see the preview. Select a contact
from the list then click Preview, the landing page preview opens displaying any personalized
content for the selected contact.
911 of 1162
Note: You can select up to ten contacts by pressing the Ctrl or Shift key then clicking
the contacts on the list. You can then view the landing page for these different contacts
by clicking their names in the left-hand panel.
Example: This landing page includes a field merge for the contact's country.
Danilo is located in Brazil:
Lauren is located in Canada:
4. Click Desktop, Tablet, or Mobile, at the top of the preview window to view the landing page as
it will display on different devices. Here you can ensure that any responsive features are
912 of 1162
behaving as expected, you can click the rotate icon in the upper left-hand corner of the window
to view the landing page in both portrait and landscape form in the tablet and mobile views.
5. Click Cancel, to close the preview window when you are done.
18.12 Creating folders for landing pages

You can create different folders in which to store similar landing pages, this makes it easier to locate
the landing page that you need, when you need it.
To create a landing page folder:

1. Navigate to Assets > Landing Pages, then click Open an Existing Landing Page, the
Landing Page Chooser window opens.

2. Right-click a landing page on the list and select New Folder. The folder is created at the same
level as the landing page you selected and is named "Untitled Folder" by default.
3. Right-click the new folder and select Rename. Type the new name, then press the Enter key,
the folder name is updated.
18.13 Saving landing pages as templates

Note: You must have the correct permissions to save a landing page as a template. Learn more
about granting template manager permission.
When you create a landing page in Eloqua, you are given the option to save the landing page as a
template, this is valuable if you need to create the same type of landing page again and again. Saving
your landing page as a template can simplify your landing page creation process, instead of creating a
whole new landing page you can edit the content of an existing template. You can also create new
templates directly from the template manager, from here you can edit an existing template and save it
as a new template. Learn more about creating new templates from the template manager.
To save a landing page as a template:

2. Click the action menu (gear icon) then select Save as Template on the list, the Save as
913 of 1162
3. Complete the template information:

Name:The name of the template.
Description: A description of the template that you can use for future reference. This
information is displayed in the template chooser when someone selects the template.
Text to Display forLink: Text that will be linked to the template's URL. This is
displayed in the template chooser when someone selects the template. The link directs
to a preview of the template.
URL forLink: URL where the template can be previewed.
Location: The folder in which the template is stored. You can also click on the file folder
icon to select the folders using the landing page template folder chooser.
4. Select the Use Thumbnail check box if you want a thumbnail image of your template to be
shown in the Template Chooser. If you clear this check box, the template will appear in the
chooser as an icon. You can select either a generic blue icon (the default), or you can click
Change Icon to choose from one of the designs shown below.
914 of 1162
5. Click Save to save your landing page as a template, it is now available in the Template
Chooser. To view your template, select Assets > Landing Pages, then choose Create a
LandingPage, the Template Chooser opens, and your new template is now listed.
After you have created a template you can use the Template Manager to lock the elements in place (to
preserve the layout and content), then define which, if any, elements can be edited. Lean more about
defining editable elements in the design editor and in the HTML editor.
18.14 Editing landing pages

Landing pages can be opened and edited in the landing page editor, this allows you to fix any problems
or add content at a later date. You also have the option to re-use old landing pages for new campaigns.
915 of 1162
You can just update an old landing page for a new purpose, rather than creating a brand new landing
page.
To edit a landing page:


2. Select the landing page that you want to edit, then click Choose, the landing page editor
window opens.
3. Edit the landing page as required.
18.15 Editing HTML landing pages using the HTML editor

After you create a new HTML landing page or upload a landing page using the HTML upload wizard, the
contents can be edited in the live preview HTML editor. This editor allows you to add elements to the
landing page by dragging-and-dropping the item from the corresponding browser into the code, you can
also edit the landing page by entering additional code directly into the existing content.
Note: Landing pages created using the HTMLupload wizard cannot be edited using the design
editor.
To edit a landing page in the HTML editor:

1. With the landing page opened in the HTML editor, click one of the page view buttons in the
upper right-hand corner of the canvas, the HTML editor opens. You can choose to set the pane
to the right, or along the bottom of the screen. This pane gives you access to the code for the
email you are editing. Learn more about the live preview HTML editor.
2. Add or edit the landing page using one of the following methods:
916 of 1162
Type the HTMLcode directly into the HTMLpane. Press Ctrl + F to quickly find the
specific content to be edited.
Click one of the icons on the left-side pane. Locate the element that you want to add in
the browser, then drag-and-drop the element into the code at the desired location.
After the element is released, it is converted to code and the preview pane reflects the
change in the HTML code.
18.16 Deactivating landing pages

A landing page is deactivated by default, it only becomes active after the campaign that it is a part of is
activated.To activate a landing page, the campaign must be activated. The steps below show how to
deactivate a landing page after it is has been activated, if you want to make any changes to the landing
page, you must deactivate it first.
To deactivate a landing page (take it out of service):


2. Select the landing page that you want to deactivate, then click Choose, the landing page opens
in the editor window.
, and select Deactivate from the list. The landing page is removed
from active service and put back into Draft mode.
917 of 1162
Note: The Deactivate menu option will only be available if the landing page is already
active.
18.17 Deleting landing pages

When a landing page is no longer needed, it can be deleted from the landing pages list.
To delete a landing page:


2. Find the landing page that you want to delete then use one of the following options to delete it:
Right-click on the name of the landing page then select Delete, the landing page is
deleted.
Warning:Make sure that you have selected the correct landing page before
deleting it. After you click Delete, the landing page is immediately removed from
Eloqua without asking for confirmation (there is no confirmation dialog box).
Click on the name of the landing page then click Choose, the landing page editor opens.
Click the action menu (gear icon) then select Delete. Click Delete again when
prompted, the landing page is deleted.
Note: If the Delete option is not available when right-clicking on the landing page name,
it signals that the landing page is currently included in an active campaign and therefore
cannot be deleted. See Deactivating landing pages.
Prior to deleting a landing page, Eloqua performs a dependency check to verify that there are no other
assets that are dependent upon (contain)this landing page in its configuration. When you try to delete a
landing page with dependencies, the Dependency Viewer opens listing all of the asset(s)that must be
modified before the landing page can be deleted.
918 of 1162
Example: In the image above there is a form processing step that includes this landing page as
part of its configuration. You must resolve this issue prior to being able to delete the landing
page.
18.18 Making copies of landing pages

You can make a copy of an existing landing page, this allows you to create a new landing page with
slight variations without having to start from the beginning.
To make a copy of a landing page:


2. Find the landing page that you want to copy then right-click the name and select Copy. The
copy of the landing page appears on the list called "Original Name": Copy.
3. Double-click the copy to open it, then click the action menu (gear icon) and select Settings, the
landing page details window opens.
4. Edit the details in this window:
Name: Enter a new name for the landing page copy. The name will help you find this
landing page later when you need it.
URL: Select a microsite and enter a vanity URL.
Redirect/Close: Choose one of the redirect/close options and add additional information
if required for your chosen action.
5. Click Done when you are finished editing the details, then click in the work area and make
919 of 1162
changes to the landing page as needed.

18.19 Using landing page recovery checkpoints

As you make changes to your landing page, Eloqua saves local copies on your computer that are
called Recovery Checkpoints. Any changes to the landing page, including title, microsite, cloud
components, images, text boxes, formatting, etc. qualify for a new checkpoint to be created.
Note:If you wish to completely disable the creation of these checkpoints, use Private
Browsing (in Mozilla Firefox, navigate to Tools >Start Private Browsing).
To use recovery checkpoints:

2. Click the action menu (gear icon) then select Recovery Checkpoints, the Recovery
Checkpoints window opens.
3. Click Save each time you make a change to the landing page to add a new checkpoint to the list
(to a maximum of twelve (12)checkpoints). Checkpoints are also created automatically by
Eloqua every ten minutes.
920 of 1162
Example: If you make a change to a landing page (without clicking Save)and then
leave your computer for more than ten minutes, when you return there will be a new
checkpoint that was created automatically.
Subsequent checkpoints are only created if new content or changes are detected by the
application, otherwise you will not have two identical checkpoints in your list.
Each checkpoint is indicated by the date and time when the checkpoint was created. You can
open and work from any of the checkpoints on the list, simply click on the one that you want. All
future changes are based on that checkpoint.
After you arrive at the 13th checkpoint, it will override the oldest one in the list. You can have a
maximum of two hours of checkpoints, so if you have been working on your landing page for
over two hours and creating checkpoints along the way (by clicking Save), you will still only
have the last two hours worth of checkpoints to which you can return.
Important: Since these checkpoints are created on your local machine, if you log in to
Eloqua from another machine, the same checkpoints will not be available.
18.20 Landing page template manager

Note: You must have template manager permissions in order to access this feature. See
granting template manager permission
Landing page templates allow you to create standard landing pages that can be re-used multiple times,
you can create a new landing page then save it as a template, you can upload an HTML template that
was created outside of Eloqua, or you can create a new template from the Template Manager. The
Template Manager (accessed from the landing pages launchpad), allows you to create, modify, and
customize landing page templates for users at your organization. It allows you to assign very granular
settings to areas of your landing pages, you can lock all elements in place, then define which specific
elements, if any, can be modified when creating new landing pages. This allows you to maintain control
and consistency when creating similar types of landing pages, it also ensures that important elements
are not accidentally deleted.
921 of 1162

A user must have the appropriate permissions, granted in the settings area of the application, to be able
to save a landing page as a template and gain access to the Template Manager on the landing page
launchpad. From the template manager you can edit templates and lock specific elements to control
what can and cannot be changed when they are used to create new landing pages.
To grant template manager permission:

1. Navigate to Settings > Setup, then click Users, the user settings page opens.
2. Select the Groups tab on the left-hand pane, then click on the name of the group for which you
want to grant template manager permission, the Security Group Overview opens in the righthand pane.
3. Click Action Permissions, then click Edit at the top of the permissions page.
4. Scroll down to the Template Manager section, and select the check box next to Manage
Templates to grant template manager permission.

5. Click Save at the bottom of the page to save the settings for that group.
18.20.2 Creating new landing page templates from the template manager
When you create a new template from the template manager, you are able to customize the layout and
content, then save the changes for future use. After you have created a new template, you can also set
the template to Protected mode to prevent it from being altered.

1. Navigate to Assets > Landing Pages, then click Template Manager at the bottom of the
landing pages launchpad, the Template Manager chooser opens.
2. Select an existing template from which you want to create a new template, or if you want to
start from a blank canvas, select Blank Template or Blank HTML Template, then click
Choose. The template opens in either the design editor or the HTML editor depending on the
template type.
922 of 1162
3. Add, change, or delete the elements in your template as needed. Learn more about creating
landing pages.
Note: If the status button in the upper left-hand corner says Standard, this means that all
of the elements in the template can be modified. If the status says Protected, the
elements are locked, learn more about Protected mode in the design editor and the
HTML editor.
4. When you are satisfied with your template, select one of the following options to save your
changes:
If you are creating a new template from a blank template: Click Save in the upperright hand corner, or click the action menu (gear icon) then select Save As, the Save as

If you are creating a new template from an existing template: Click the action menu
(gear icon) then select Save As, the Save as Template window opens.
Note: In this option, the original template that you selected from the chooser is
not modified. You are saving your changes as a separate template. If you want to
make changes to an existing template, see modifying landing page templates.
5. Enter the details for the template in the Save as Template window:
923 of 1162
provide information for users when creating landing pages using this template. This
information appears when you click the template in the template chooser.
the Landing Page Template Root folder is selected. To change the location, click the
folder icon to the right of the drop-down field and select a folder from the chooser.
shown in the template chooser. If you do not select this check box, you are presented with the
option to select either a generic (blue) icon, or by clicking Change Icon, you can choose one of
the available icon designs shown below.
924 of 1162
6. Click Save, the new template is added to the Template Chooser.
18.20.3 Modifying landing page templates from the template manager

You can modify the layout and content of an existing landing page template by accessing the
Template Manager on the landing pages launchpad.

landing pages launchpad, the Template Manager chooser opens.
2. Select the template that you want to modify, then click Choose, the template opens in either
the design editor or the HTML editor depending on the template type.
3. Add, change, or delete the elements in your template as needed. If the status button in the upper
left-hand corner says Standard, this means that all of the elements in the template can be
modified. If the status says Protected, the elements are locked, learn more about Protected
mode in the design editor and the HTML editor.
925 of 1162
4. When you are done editing the template, click Save in the upper right-hand corner. The template
is updated with your changes.
18.20.4 Defining editable elements in landing page templates using the

design editor
As the creator of a landing page template, you can maintain tight control over the permissions granted
to other users to modify, delete, or add elements to a landing page created from that template. Using
the lock icons in the upper right-hand corner you can lock, or unlock the template. While unlocked, the
template is in Standard mode, all sections are editable and there are no modification or deleting
restrictions on the elements in your template. When it is locked, the template is in Protected mode, all
elements are locked until they are marked as editable, as described below.
To lock a template and define an element as editable:

landing pages launchpad.
2. Select the template that you wish to edit, then click Choose, the template opens in the design
editor.
3. If the template is not already in Protected mode (as indicated in the upper left-hand corner), click
the
icon in the upper-right hand corner to lock the template elements. A confirmation
window opens asking you to confirm that you want to enable Protected mode for this template,
click Yes.
926 of 1162
When you lock the template the status button in the top-left corner changes to Protected, as
shown below.
Note: By default, elements that are added while the template is in Protected mode are
uneditable, you must enable editing for that element if needed.
4. Right-click the element that you want to make editable, then select Mark as Editable, a
Settings window opens.
927 of 1162
5. Select the check box next to the options that you want to enable for that element:
Mark as Editable: This enables editing for the element. You can also enter a name for
the element, this is optional, but recommended.
Allow Delete: This gives the user of the template the ability to delete the element.
6. Click Save, the window closes and the element now has a blue dashed border on the landing
page canvas.
7. Click Save to save the changes to your template.
Note: When you create a new landing page using a Protected template, the landing page editor
toolbar is not displayed. If there are no editable elements, you can still use the landing page in
campaigns, but you cannot modify its structure or contents. To modify an area that is editable
(indicated by a blue dashed border), double-click on the element to open the editor in which it
can be modified.
928 of 1162
18.20.5 Defining editable elements in landing page templates using the

HTML editor
HTML templates are edited in the HTML editor. The template is in Standard mode (as indicated in the
upper left-hand corner) when none of the elements are locked. When you define elements in specific
sections as editable or deletable, the status changes to Protected and any undefined elements are
locked. Elements are defined as editable or deletable by inserting supported HTML attributes within
tags, tags follow a similar hyphenated syntax to HTML5 data attributes.
To define a template element as editable in the HTML editor:

landing pages launchpad.
2. Select the HTML template that you wish to edit, then click Choose, the template opens in the
HTML editor.
3. Click one of the page view buttons in the upper right-hand corner to open the pane displaying the
HTML code for the template (you can choose to set the pane to the right, or along the bottom of
the screen). Learn more about the live preview HTML editor.
4. Add one or both of the following attributes to the tags for the elements that you want to define as
editable or deletable:
Attribute
Description
Defines a tag/section as editable in a template.
HTML Editor
elq-edit="
true"
Supported Elements:
Block level elements and select HTML5 elements (div, section, article,
blockquote, aside, details, summary, figure, fig. caption, footer, header, nav)
Headers (h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6)
Img
elqdelete="
Defines a tag/section as deletable.
929 of 1162
Attribute
Description
true"
When you add an attribute, a blue dashed border appears around the element indicating that it is
editable. All other elements (without the blue dashed border), are locked.
5. Click Save in the upper right-hand corner to save the changes, if the template was in
Standardmode, it changes to Protected.
Note: When you create a landing page from a Standard template, all elements are, by default,
editable and deletable. When you create a landing page from a Protected template, the source
code and the design tools are hidden, and only the elements defined as editable or deletable can
be altered. To modify an element that is editable (indicated by a blue dashed border), right-click
on the element to view the editing options, or double-click to open the corresponding chooser or
editor.
930 of 1162
19 Lead Scoring
Marketers work hard to generate leads and demonstrate their impact on revenue. But too often, sales
and marketing disagree on the quality of the leads that are passed.Lead scoring allows you to specify
which leads are most promising when you pass them over to your sales department, providing
guidance about where sales should focus their efforts.
Eloqua's Lead Scoring interface enables you to automatically qualify sales leads based on the
demographic and behavioral characteristics that matter to your business. You can score on any data
stored in Eloqua, including changes to the buyer's record, such as title or annual revenue, and activities
like web visits, form submissions and event attendance.Over time, if a buyer is not active, their score
gradually degrades, lowering their priority in the queue.
Finally, Eloqua enables you to easily set up and activate multiple models that run concurrently,
allowing you to score leads across multiple business units, products, and regions. Multi-modal lead
scoring is included in the Standard and Enterprise Eloqua packages, and as an add-on in the Basic
package.
19.0.1 Introduction To Lead Scoring Models

Lead Scoring Models are criteria that you put together that specify how contacts will be scored. You
can use different models to focus on different business goals. Every contact will have a score for each
model you activate.
931 of 1162
Access Lead Scoring Models by navigating to Contacts then Lead Scoring in the menu at the top of
theEloqua interface.
There are two aspects to a Lead Scoring Model: Profile and Engagement. When you first access your
Lead Scoring Model, you will see them in the center just below the navigation.
In the Profile, you define the score criteria around the information that someone volunteers through
form submissions or that you read about on their business card or LinkedIn profile. A contacts Profile
score can be A, B, C, or D, with an A being the ideal contact for this business case.
Under Engagement, you define the score criteria for behaviors such as web visits and
responsiveness to promotions. This measures how engaged a contact is with the materials you
introduce to them. Engagement is measure on a scale of 1 to 4, with a 1 being a very active contact,
and 4 being a very inactive contact..
932 of 1162
Eloqua combines the score calculations for each aspect to provide you with a contacts Lead Score.
These two aspects of a contacts Lead Score provides your sales team with an at-a-glance
understanding of leads as they enter their queue.
Lead Scoring Models are event driven. Once you have configured and saved the criteria and rules for
your Lead Scoring Model, the system automatically starts scoring your entire Contact database. There
is no need to explicitly define processes in your system to indicate go score this contact: the Lead
Scoring engine monitors the database for any changes to a Contact and updates the Contacts Lead
Score, and automatically revises the score following a change. No one needs to worry about one
campaign missing an add to lead scoring step.
For AdFocus clients:
For performance purposes,Eloqua excludes "unknownvisitor.elq" contacts from lead scoring.
19.1 Lead Scoring Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

How often does a contact in Eloqua get scored?
Depending on how many contacts are queued for scoring, and how heavily loaded other parts of the
platform are, rescoring can take as little as a few seconds or as much as several minutes Eloqua
continually assess which contacts need re-scoring and queue those contacts up after 24 hours. In
most cases, contacts with no activity will be re-scored ~24 hours after they were last scored,
regardless of why they were last scored (because of activity or time).
How do I see a Contact Lead Score?

Now that Lead Scores are stored as Meta data, the system Lead Score field you use today will become
obsolete. This means any filtering, Program Builder logic, segments or your CRM Integration process
933 of 1162
need to be updated to use the new Lead Score filter criteria. So to see a contact lead score, you will
need leverage the new Lead Score filter criteria to see if you contact meets a certain score.
Can I filter out contacts from being scored?

Once a Lead Score model is active, it will generate a score for every contact in the database. There is
no excluding of contacts from receiving a Lead Score from every active model. Routing and removing
of records from your lead management process should be handled using Program Builder in or
associate with your CRM Integration program.
What triggers a contact record to be scored?

All contacts are scored every 24 hours, if theres a change to a contacts profile, or theyve had recent
activity, they are rescored immediately.
Will a list upload trigger a rescore?

Yes, so long as the contact gets updated in the list upload
Can you score based on a shared list criteria

Not at this time.
Are the Profile Score and the Engagement score fields accessible?
Currently not visible in the UI, but on the road map.
Does Lead Score criteria get evaluated in any order?

It will evaluate all values that meet the criteria and will give the value with the highest score. It will not
double count score.
How will you update a contacts lead score to CRM?

You have 2 options that can be leveraged:
Option 1 - Trigger an update to Lead Scoring fields in CRM only when the customer submits a
form or uploads a list. With the new lead scoring, contacts get a score within seconds and could
go straight to CRM.
Option 2 - Trigger an update based on the criteria above, but also engagement criteria. This
would require a separate program to update the lead scoring fields in CRM that leverage
engagement criteria (i.e. submitted form, visited webpage, Click-through email, Opened email
within the last day).
934 of 1162
19.2 Configuring lead scoring

Creating a lead scoring model is a multi-step process, in which you specify criteria, score your
contacts, and evaluate the results. Once you have set up and activated your model, all of your
contacts are automatically scored.
You can edit your model by opening it in the Lead Scoring Model editor and tweaking the profile or
engagement criteria.
19.2.1 Configuration
The high level steps are as follows:
1. Configure the Profile portion of the scoring model
2. Configure the Engagement portion of the scoring model
3. Activate the model to begin scoring contacts
4. Create a segment to view contacts' scores
5. Export your scores to your CRM
6. View the performance of your models using reports
7. Set permissions
Step 1: Configure the Profile portion of the scoring model

To configure the Profile portion of the scoring model:
1. By default, you will be on the Profile aspect when you load your Lead Scoring Model. On the left,
you have access to all of your Contact and Account fields. Double-clicking a field will add it to
your scoring model, or you can drag and drop it onto the model. Repeat this for all of the Contact
and Account fields you want to score on.
935 of 1162
2. Double-click your first criterion and start defining the rules that will increment a Contacts Lead
Score. Be sure to take advantage of the different operators such as Contains or Is in set
which allows you to comma delimit values to save time.
Example: We have defined four different Job Title values that can increase a Contacts
Lead Score. For each value, specify what percent of the available score the Contact will
get if it has that value. In the example below, if a Contact has a Job Title value that
contains Engineer, the Contact will get the entire 25% of the weighting towards the
final Lead Score.
3. Click Save once you have defined all the rules for your first Profile criterion. You will be returned
to the Model. Continue defining the rules and values for each of the remaining Profile criteria.
4. Preview your model:
Click the gear in the top-right corner and select Preview....
Locate and select the desired contact(s). A maximum of 10 contacts can be added.
The lead score will be displayed.
Step 2: Configure the Engagement portion of the scoring model

To configure the Engagement portion of the scoring model:
936 of 1162
1. Switch to the Engagement aspect of your Lead Scoring Model by clicking the tab at the top
center. Notice the left navigation now lists all of the activities you can score on. Similar to what
you did for Profile criteria, double click to add the activities you want to score on, or drag and
drop them onto the model.
2. Define the weighting of each Engagement criterion to indicate how important one activity is
compared to the others.
3. Double-click your first criterion and start defining the rules that will increment a Contacts Lead
Score. Engagement rules differ from Profile rules because they are based on activity. It is
important that your Engagement rules take into consideration both the recency and frequency of
an activity. The example below heavily favors high numbers of email opens in a short period of
time, but gives a low percent if the email opens occurred several months ago. Be sure to take
advantage of the different ways in which you can define rules such as Any of an asset, All
assets in a folder or A specific Asset.
Note: It is possible for a Contact to meet multiple rules. When this occurs, the system
will select the rule that results in the highest Lead Score increment. It will NOT inflate
the score by double counting.
4. Preview your model.
937 of 1162
Step 3: Activate and utilize lead scores

Once you have configured all the rules and criteria for both aspects of your Lead Scoring Model, there
are only a few steps left before your Model is ready to be activated.
To activate and utilize lead scores:

1. Ensure each of your weightings for Profile and Engagement add up to 100%. Use the calculator
in the bottom right in combination with the sliders to easily balance out your crtieria.
2. Click on the gear in the top-right and select Settings. This will bring up the default thresholds,
which define the final output of a Contacts Lead Score:
938 of 1162
3. To create your Lead Score Model, simply drag the tags and slide them to the appropriate
threshold. Using the example below, a Contact with a Profile Score of 70% or above and an
Engagement Score of 35% or below would result in a Lead Score of A4.
4. Click Done to save your model. From the Gear Icon, click Activate to activate your Lead
Scoring Model. You can choose to score all contacts, or only score new contacts and contacts
with activity since the last deactivation.
If you choose to score all contacts, all contacts will be scored (or rescored if you had edited an
existing model).
Choosing "Score new contacts and existing contacts with activity since last deactivation"
scores all new contacts, and scores existing contacts that have had activity in the time since
the model was deactivated/edited. Essentially, it only scores based on "new"activity, either
from new contacts or existing contacts. This can mitigate performance issues that can stem
from rescoring large volumes of contacts when you edit a model.
939 of 1162
The next three sections outline where and how you can leverage the new Lead Scores your Model is
generating.
Step 4: Create a segment to view contacts' scores

Now that you have an active Scoring Model, you can create a segment to see the results. There is now
a Compare Lead Score filter criteria you can drag onto your Segment that will allow you to select the
score and the model you want to segment on.
To create a segment to view contacts' scores:

The below example would return all contacts that have a score of A for my Default Scoring Model.
Step 5: Export scores to your CRM

To export scores to your CRM:
1. Map your Lead Scoring Model in the External Call field mappings in the Setup >Integration
area of Eloqua. The mapping changes need to be made to each External Call that you want the
lead score to be included in.The most common External Calls to include lead scores are:
Create Lead
Update Lead
Update Contact
2. Drag the name of your Scoring Model to the name of the CRM field you want it to map to and
Save.
940 of 1162
Example: In the screen shot below you can see that Lead Scoring Models appear in
conjunction with all of your Contact fields, separated by hashes.
Note:You must be a Customer Administrator to access the Integration area of Eloqua. For
more details about how to incorporate score into your lead management update process, see
the Lead Scoring CRMIntegration Configuration Guide.
Step 6: View the performance of your models using reports

Understanding the distribution of your contacts is an important first step to understanding the impact of
your Lead Scoring Model.
To view the performance of your models using reports:

1. Navigate to Insight >Shared Reports >Contacts >Lead Scoring Dashboard to view the
distribution of contacts by their lead score.
941 of 1162
Example: In this example, the model either has no Engagement criteria configured, or
no contacts have performed an activity that impacts the score.
2. Use the drop-down to view results for a specific model, rather than the aggregate, if desired.
Step 7: Set permissions

You can set permissions to control which user groups have access to a lead scoring model.
To set permissions:
1. Navigate to Contacts > Lead scoring, then open an existing model or create a new one.
2. Click the action menu (gear icon), then click Permissions.
3. Select or clear the check boxes for each user group to configure their permissions settings, then
click Save.
942 of 1162
19.3 Filtering on specific Campaign Response Activity

With Eloqua, you can specify the specific response activities for which you wish to score your leads,
increasing the precision with which you can score contacts' engagement.
To specify a Campaign Response Activity in your Lead Scoring model:

1. Navigate to Contacts > Lead Scoring from the navigation toolbar at the top of the application
window.
2. From the Lead Scoring Launchpad, select Create a Model or Open an Existing Model,
depending on your needs. If creating a new model, select the Template on which to base your
new Model from the Template Chooser.
3. On the Lead Scoring page, click the Engagements tab in the top-center of the window.
4. Make sure Standard Activity is selected as the type of criteria in the drop-down box in the top
left.
5. To add a specific Campaign to your model, double-click Responded to Campaign at the
bottom of the Activity list.
6. On the right-hand side, double-click the Responded to Campaign element to select the
Campaign.
7. Click Add Rule to begin adding Campaigns.
8. In the drop-down for the If Contact Responded to list, select whether you wish to view
activities for Any Campaign, Any Campaign in Folder, Any Campaign In or Under Folder,
or Specific Campaign. For all choices other than Any Campaign, find the Folder in which the
Campaign is located by typing in the name of the Folder, or clicking on the Folder icon to display
the Campaign folder structure of your Eloqua instance.
9. Click in the field to the right of your selection from step 8 above and either begin typing the name
of the Campaign, if known, or scroll through the list to select the desired one.
10. To narrow your scoring based on Response Activity type, click in the Response Activity field
to the right of the Campaign name. The default, Any Response Activity, will score based on
any activity performed by a Contact during this Campaign. However, you can select from the
list of specific response activities, which are defined in the Setup area of Eloqua, by clicking
Any Response Activity and either typing the name of the activity (if known), or scrolling
through the list until you locate the desired one.
11. Specify the timeframe for evaluation: exactly, or at least the desired number of times.
12. For the value specified in step 11 above, now configure the date(s) for evaluation. The choices
are: on,after or before a specific date,betweentwo specific dates, within or not within the
943 of 1162
lastx days, weeks, months or years.

13. Click Save in the lower-right corner to save your rule.
19.4 Viewing the lead score history for a contact

The Contact Record for a contact that has been scored based on a Lead Scoring Model is displayed on
the Scoring tab. Eloqua shows you an aggregated history of the Contact's scoring. Rather than
displaying one entry (row) for every day that the Contact is being scored with the same value, this view
groups the Contact's activities by the start ("Originally Scored") and end date ("Last Scored") of
activities performed by that Contact, up until the time that the score changes for that Model. Data can
be viewed for the previous year.
To view the Lead Score history for a Contact:

1. Navigate to Contacts > Contacts.
2. Search for the Contact' by typing the name in the search field in the top-right corner of the
Contact window.
3. Double-click on the Contact name in the list to open the Contact Record.
4. Click on the Scoring tab to display the Contact's Scoring history. The most recent score for
each Scoring Model is displayed. Note that the Status for each Lead Scoring Model is also
displayed: DRAFT signifies that the scoring model is not currently running, and ACTIVE
represents the fact that the contact's response activities are being continually captured.
5. Double-click on any of the Lead Scores to get a more detailed view of the history of Lead Scores
within a specific model. In the screenshot example below, this contact was assigned a D4 for
the time period from 12/16/2012 through 7/30/2013, whereas from 12/9/2012 through 7/15/2013,
even though the score is the same (D4), the value is listed a second time due to the difference in
Engagement priority (percentage).
6. Then, on 1/29/2013 through 2/4/2013, the response activity of this Contact improved to a D3,
also based on the level of engagement that was determined in the Lead Score Model. In
944 of 1162
essence, the Contact was active at the D3 level from 11/24/2012 through 2/4/2013, but the
score is listed separately for each time period where the Engagement level (importance)
changed. Any identical scores for the same Engagement level are grouped into one entry. As
soon as a score changes for that Engagement level for that Model, a new row (score) is added
to this view.
7. The data that is shown in this view can go back up to one year from the current date (previously
this view was limited to 20 (twenty) rows of scores).
945 of 1162
20 Marketing Operations Center

As an Eloqua administrator, you are able to manage many technical aspects of your Eloqua
environment. The Marketing Operations Center is included for customers on the Standard and
Enterprise packages.
The Marketing Operations Center is where you can:
Monitor key services through the Dashboards
Enable and disable all services simultaneously for testing or maintenance purposes
Create, modify and delete Announcements
If you do not see the Operations icon in the Settings drop-down, it signifies that you do not have
access rights to this area of the application.
20.0.1 Understanding the marketing operation center user interface

The marketing operations center looks like this:
The left-hand navigation pane allows you to select the various areas of the MOC:
Notifications:the Notifications pane summarizes alerts and errors. Unlike a normal log file
where you could see the same error message numerous times, only the first instance of that
error is shown in the notifications pane, making it easier to sift through any errors and debug the
problem. You can delete a notification at any time: if the problem occurs again, a new
notification is logged and will appear in your notifications panel.
946 of 1162
Dashboards:the Dashboards area shows four graphs that help you monitor the performance of
your Eloqua instance. A timescale picker in the top right enables you to select the granularity of
the data presented, from one day to three months. You can scroll each graph left or right to view
a specific time-frame, within the last three months. Each graph scales to highest values
(therefore you may not see a bar for very small values, depending on the scale of the graph).
The numbers below each graph indicate current activity and do not change based on changing
zoom or scrolling through the graph.
Note: To enable this feature, please log in to My Oracle Support

(http://support.oracle.com) and create a service request.
The dashboards focus on the following criteria:

Bulk API: this dashboard helps to demonstrate stability and stability issues. The graph
shows BulkAPIactivity over time, aggregating any activity together. The total syncs,
age in minutes, and number of records processed in the last hour are shown at the
bottom of the graph for quick reference. You can select from the following options on the
drop-down menu to show a specific metric on the graph:
Throughput: this option displays the number of records processed over a given
time. Hovering over a bar in the graph shows the number of records processed for
that point in time.
Oldest in Queue: this option displays the age in minutes of the oldest item sync
in the queue. Hovering over a bar in the graph shows minute values for that point
in time.
Waiting in Queue: this option displays the total number of syncs currently
waiting in the queue. Hovering over the bar graph shows the number of syncs in
the queue for that point in time.
947 of 1162
CRM: this dashboard shows the data being push into and pulled out of your integrated
CRM. The data is broken up into inbound and outbound activity. For inbound, only the
throughput is available. For outbound, you can view throughput, oldest in queue, and
waiting in queue. The total transfers, age in minutes, and contacts in last hour are
included below the graph for outbound data. You can select from the following options on
the drop-down menu to show a specific metric on the graph:
Outbound Throughput: this option displays the number of outbound records
processed over a given time. Hovering over a bar in the graph shows number of
outbound records at that point in time.
Inbound Throughput: this option displays the number of inbound records

processed over a given time. Hovering over a bar in the graph shows the number
of inbound records at that point in time.
Oldest in Queue: this option displays the metric for age in minutes of the oldest
item waiting in the queue. Hovering over a bar in the graph shows the time range
for that data point as well as the age in minutes that the oldest transfer has been
948 of 1162
in the queue.
Waiting in Queue: this option displays the number of transfers waiting in queue.
Hovering over a bar in the graph shows a time range for that data point as well as
how many transfers are waiting in the queue.
Email: this dashboard allows you to monitor email sending performance. When
messages are added to the email send queue, they are grouped into "batches." The total
batches, age in minutes, and number of messages sent per unit time are included below
the graph for quick reference. You can select from the following options on the drop-down
menu to show a specific metric on the graph:
Throughput: this option displays the number of messages processed over a
given time. Hovering over a bar in the graph shows the number of messages
processed for that point in time.
949 of 1162
Oldest in Queue: this option displays the age in minutes of the oldest item
waiting in the queue. Hovering over a bar in the graph shows the number of
messages for that point in time.
Waiting in Queue: this option displays the total number of batches (as opposed
to the number of messages) currently waiting in queue.
Lead scoring: this dashboard helps you monitor lead scoring in your Eloqua instance,
specifically the number of contacts scored per time unit. The total batches, age in
minutes, and number of contacts scored / unit time are shown below the graph for quick
reference. You can select from the following options on the drop-down menu to show a
specific metric on the graph:
Throughput: this option displays the number of contacts processed over a given
time. Hovering over a bar in the graph shows the number of contacts processed
for that point in time.
950 of 1162
Oldest in Queue: this option displays the age in minutes of the oldest item
waiting in the queue. Hovering over a bar in the graph shows minute values for
that point in time.
Waiting in Queue: this option displays the total number of batches currently in
the queue waiting to be processed. Hovering over a bar in the graph shows the
number of batches in the queue for that point in time. This metric can be used in
combination with the age in queue to determine if there is a problem with batches
not moving through the queue.
951 of 1162
Services:the Services tab displays a list of Eloqua-related services and their current status in
your environment. Under normal operating conditions, all Status entries should be On. You can
turn the services on or off using the Stop All Services for 30 Minutes drop-down at the top of
the page. Note that all services must be either On or Off. It is not possible to selectively enable
or disable individual services in the current release. See:Stopping All Services for more
information.
Announcements: the Announcements tab lists any currently-active announcements on your
Eloqua instance. See:Creating Announcements for more information.
20.1 Accessing the Marketing Operations Center

To access the marketing operations center:
1. Navigate to Settings > Operations from the navigation toolbar.
Note: If you do not see the Operations icon in the Settings drop-down, it signifies that you do
not have access rights to this area of the application.
952 of 1162
20.2 Creating Announcements

As an Eloqua administrator, you can create Announcements that will appear as an interstitial page after
a user logs in to Eloqua. These Announcements can provide information on planned outages, new
releases on their way, or anything else of importance to your user base.
1. Log in to your Eloqua instance.
2. In Eloqua, click Settings > Operations from the navigation toolbar..
The Manage Announcements page opens (it is part of the Marketing Operations Center menu
on the left-hand pane), as shown below:
3. To create a new Announcement, click Add Announcement.
953 of 1162
4. The Add Announcement window opens.
5. Give the Announcement a name. This is the title of the message that will be displayed at the top
of the Announcement.
6. Enter a description for the announcement. Although it is optional, it is best practice to include
this information for future reference.
7. Add the body (content) of the announcement. It is recommended to use shorter, concise
messages for your Announcement. You can only use plain text or Markdown1 (plain-text
formatting syntax that can be optionally converted to HTML), as shown in the following
954 of 1162
screenshot:
8. Add an Expiry Date for the announcement. The announcement will not be displayed past that
date.
955 of 1162
9. Click Preview to preview how the announcement will look when displayed.
10. Click Save to save your announcement. As soon as you save the announcement, when a user
logs into Eloqua for the first time since you saved the announcement, the message will be
displayed, and in the example above, it will look as follows:
Click Click to Continue to proceed to Eloqua; subsequent logins by the same user will no
956 of 1162
longer display the message. In addition the message will only be displayed until the Expiry Date
that you have set on the AddAnnouncement page.
20.3 Deleting Announcements

To delete an announcement:
1. Navigate to Settings > Operations and click Announcements on the left-hand pane.
2. Click Delete to the right of the announcement.
20.4 Editing Announcements

1. Navigate to Settings > Operations > Announcements.
2. Click Edit to the right of the Announcement you wish to change. The Edit Announcement
window opens, showing the current announcement's content and settings:
957 of 1162
3. Make the appropriate changes and click Preview to see how the message will look when
displayed to the user.
4. Click Save to save the changes.
20.5 Ending Announcements

To end an announcement:
1. Navigate to Settings > Operations and click Announcements on the left-hand pane.
2. Click Edit and change the Expiry Date to a date in the past. Then click Preview and Save. That
way you can use the same Announcement in the future or edit it as appropriate.
Note: If you are using a link to a website in the Markdown for the announcement body, you
must enclose the name of the link in square brackets, immediately followed by the URL
enclosed in parentheses (no space between the square bracket and open parenthesis), like
this:
[Eloqua](www.eloqua.com). If you are not familiar with how to use Markdown, there are
documentation resources on a variety of third-party websites.
20.6 Stopping all services using the Marketing Operations

Center
It is possible for you as an Eloqua administrator to manually stop all Eloqua services for a specified
period of time. This can be useful when performing regular server maintenance on your environment.
To stop services, click the drop-down arrow to open the menu of available timeframes during which the
Services will be stopped:
958 of 1162
To stop all services:

1. Select the timeframe that is appropriate for the work that needs to be done. The Eloqua
functions and operations included in the Services list will not be available in your Eloqua
instance during this time. Please note that you can not stop individual Services; you can only
turn them all off or or all on.
2. In the Stop All Services For 10 minutes confirmation dialog box, enter the reason for stopping
the services and click the blue Stop All Services For (10) minutes button. Select the option
for the timeframe that is applicable to your task. While it is not required to enter a reason
(comment), it is recommended that you do so in order to keep track of why you performed this
action.
959 of 1162
3. All Services will be turned off and the Status column for all Services will read Off.
4. To restart Services before the timeframe originally selected has elapsed, click Start All
Services in the top-right corner.
5. The Status column changes to On once you have restarted the Services.
960 of 1162
21 Page Tagging
A page tag is a tool which allows you to mark or categorize a page or groups of pages on your website
to gain more valuable tracking, contact or visitor segmentation, and reporting.
Think of a Page Tag as a bucket that has a particular theme to it. Page Tag Values are the items within
that bucket that fit that theme. Much like in a department store, you may have a section for socks, but
within that section you will find racks for different brands and styles (white, low-cut, black, etc.), some
more valuable to you than others, and they are labeled accordingly.
The concept for Page Tagging is similar except it applies to your website and the labeling is totally
customized so that you only mark the "racks" you want to know have been visited. For example, you
may create a "Possible Prospect Type" Tag and that might contain values of "Enterprise," "Small
Business," and "Reseller," each value being associated with a particular page or pages. Or a "High
Value Web Content" Tag might include values of "Contact Us Pages," "Pricing Pages," and "Product
Whitepapers." Or you could just mark the pages that dealt with pricing with a Pricing Pages tag.
This allows you to identify, with greater ease and in more business-relevant terms, what your website
visitors are accessing and then provides a more intuitive way of segmenting and scoring those visitors.
To give a few examples, you could categorize the High-Value pages, as mentioned above:
Contact Us Pages
Pricing Pages
Product Whitepapers
Or you could categorize pages by the type of information that can be accessed/downloaded by your
customers:
Case Studies
Catalog
Datasheets
Installation Guides
QuikStart Guides
Podcasts
User Guides
Webinars
Training Manuals
Or by areas of interest within your Web site structure:
961 of 1162
About
Contact
Downloads
Home
A page tag group allows you to group similar page tags together. This streamlines reporting for users
who have multiple page tags which relate to a common theme, that they want to consistently analyze
together.
21.1 Creating page tags

Each Page Tag may have a few different values associated with it. For example, the Product Line
Page Tag may have Application Servers, Portals, Enterprise Messaging, and Data Tools associated
with it if these are different product lines for your company.
To manually create a Page Tag:

1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Page Tagging (in the Website section). Make sure the Page
Tags tab is selected at the top of the Tree View.
2. Select New Page Tag from the Page Tagging menu or alternately, you can also click New
Page Tag on the right-hand pane.
3. Enter the Page Tag Name.
4. Select the folder in which to place this Page Tag. The default location is in the Unfiled folder, but
it can be added to any other folder you have created.
5. Select the maximum number of pages to display on this page (30, 50 or 100).
6. Click
to add pages to be tagged with this value. The Add Page(s) to Tag
dialog box opens:
962 of 1162
Note: The list of pages that is displayed is derived from the Site Map, which can be
found by navigating to Setup > Tracking > Site Map.
To view the list of folders and subfolders in your Site Map, click Site Map and the folder
structure (tree) will be displayed on the right-side pane. Note how the list of sites in the Add
Pages to Tag dialog box mirrors the Site Map:
963 of 1162
To see which subfolders (if any) and web pages are included in the Site Map, click the + sign
next to the folder to expand it.
Adding pages to your Page Tag requires selecting the page(s) on the Add Pages window. If you
wish to add all pages that are contained a folder, click + next to the folder to expand the list of
pages associated with that folder (web site). Click the checkbox next to the folder name. After
selecting the checkbox, all pages in that website folder will be added to your Page Tag. Any
selected pages are highlighted in . They are also added in the Selected Pages section at the
top of the window.
7.
Note: In the example above, expanding http://example.com/, then clicking the

checkbox next to the folder name automatically selects all three pages associated with
that folder, highlights them in yellow and adds them to the Selected Pages section at the
top.
8. If, however, you do not wish to tag all pages located within that web site folder,expand the +
sign next to the folder and select individual pages (or subfolders) by clicking the checkbox to the
right of each page. The selected page(s) is (are) highlighted in yellow and added to the Selected
964 of 1162
Pages at the top. In the following example, the folder checkbox is not selected because the only
page the user wishes to add to the Page Tag is page.aspx:
9. To remove a page from your list of Selected Pages, single left-click on the name of the page in
the Selected Pages section and click Remove. To remove all selected pages, simply click
Remove All.
10. Once you have finished selecting the pages you wish to add to your Page Tag, click OK to
close the Selected Pages window to save your choices. To exit the window without saving your
changes, click Cancel. If you have selected pages for your Page Tag, they are now listed
under the Web Page URL section.
11. If you wish to remove one or more pages from your Page Tag, you can click the checkbox next
to the page you wish to delete and select Remove Selected URL. Note you cannot save a
Page Tag until you have added at least one page from your Site Map to the Tag:
12. Click OK to save your Page Tag.
965 of 1162
Now that you have created a Page Tag, you can use the Tag as a filter criterion on a Contact List
Segment. In so doing, your campaigns can be more successful, since they will be directly targeting
people who are visiting specific web pages (based on an interest in the subject(s) defined in your Page
Tag).
21.2 Using page tags

Page Tags allow you to mark/categorize a page or groups of pages on your website to get more
valuable tracking, contact/visitor segmentation and reporting.
Think of a Page Tag as a bucket that has a particular theme to it and then Page Tag Values are the
items within that bucket that represent a part of that theme. Much like in a department store, you may
have a section for socks, but within that section you will find racks for different brands and styles
(white, low-cut, black, etc.), some more valuable to you than others, and they are labeled accordingly.
The concept for Page Tagging is similar except it applies to your website and the labeling is totally
customized so that you only mark the "racks" you want to know have been visited. For example, you
may create a "Possible Prospect Type" Tag and that might contain values of "Enterprise," "Small
Business," and "Reseller," each value being associated with a particular page or pages. Or a "High
Value Web Content" Tag might include values of "Contact Us Pages," "Pricing Pages," and "Product
Whitepapers." Or you could just mark the pages that dealt with pricing with a Pricing Pages tag.
This allows you to identify, with greater ease and in more business-relevant terms, what your website
visitors are accessing and then provides a more intuitive way of segmenting and scoring those visitors.
For example, if your Page Tag is applied to pages that deal with Market Automation, and you want to
create an email (marketing) campaign to learn which contacts have (or have not) been visiting these
pages, you can add that criterion to your segment:
966 of 1162
In the illustration above, this segment will include only those contacts who have visited pages tagged
with a value of Marketing Automation on your Site Map one time within the last month. You can then
add this segment to a marketing campaign to send a follow-up email to those visitors and ask them to
fill out and submit a form or survey to obtain demographics and usage information for your web sites.
Once you have selected the segment you wish to add to the filter criteria, you must specify the
delimiter and the timeframe for examination. The delimiters are: Exactly, At Least and Between x
and x times (where x represents a number of times). Then, select a choice for time frames for both
those who have and have not visited Page Tags are as follows:
on (specify single date)
after (specify single date)
within (specify number of hours, days, weeks or months)
Within Last (specify number of hours, days, weeks or months)
Not Within the Last (specify number of hours, days, weeks or months)
Conversely, you can specify that you only want to use contacts who have not visited tagged pages
within a certain time frame:
967 of 1162
21.3
In this example, you are targeting contacts who have not visited any pages that you have tagged with
the VA Page Tag Test within the last month. Once you have that information available to you (perhaps
via an Eloqua Insight report), you can add this segment to your email campaign and send out an email
with a link to the relevant page(s).
21.4 Uploading page tags

There may be times when you want to tag several web sites, each with more than one tag. Doing this
manually for each tag and each web site could be a labor-intensive process. Eloqua provides the option
for creating a file and uploading the tags directly to the application using the wizard paradigm.
To upload Page Tags using a file:

1. Create either an Excel spreadsheet (.xls or .xlsx format) or a .CSV file with two columns.
Column A must be labeled URL and column B Tags in order for the upload to function correctly.
2. Enter one URL per row in the URL column (A).
3. Enter the tags that you want applied to each website, separated by commas. In this example,
www.eloqua.com and www.google.com will be tagged with the values in Column B (Tags):
968 of 1162
4. Once your upload file is created and saved, navigate to Setup > Page Tagging (in the Website
section).
5. Click Page Tagging > Upload Page Tags in the menu at the top of the page. This launches
the Page Tag Upload wizard.
6. On the Upload Details tab (Step 1), enter a name for the upload as well as a description
(optional).
7. In the Upload Options section, specify how Eloqua will apply the page tags being uploaded to
pages that already exist in the Site Map.
Override all existing page tags with uploaded spreadsheet: selecting this option will
override whatever tags are currently associated with the websites that are already
tagged in Eloqua or
Append existing page tags with uploaded spreadsheet: tags that are currently associated
with websites in the Eloqua site map will not be overwritten (the new tags will be added
to the list of tags)
Include pages that are part of an auto tagging rule: If a page that already exists in Eloqua
is part of an Auto Tagging rule, do not exclude them during the upload process (if
checked). The default is to exclude any pages that are part of an auto tagging rule. See
Creating Auto Tagging Rules for information on how to create an Auto Tagging Rule.
8. Click Next to proceed to Step 2.
969 of 1162
9. On the File Selection tab (Step 2), click the Browse button to locate the file you created in
steps 1-7 above.
10. To upload the tags that you have created in the file, click Upload and Preview Data. You will
receive
In the example above, all tags that were specified in the Excel file were uploaded successfully
and applied to the two indicated web sites. If you have not labeled the two columns as with the
required names, when you click Upload and Preview Data, the following error will be displayed:
Before proceeding with the upload, you must edit your spreadsheet (CSV) file to reflect the
proper column (heading) names.
11. Click Next.
12. The Summary tab opens. On this tab, Eloqua presents a summary of what you have configured
in the previous steps, and asks you to enter an email address to which the results will be sent
after the upload is complete. Both successful and unsuccessful results will be included in the
email. Enter the appropriate email address. Click Finish to complete the wizard and initiate the
upload.
970 of 1162
13. Once the upload is complete, check the email address that you indicated in step 12 to confirm
that the upload was successful. If successful, it will look like this:
14. If any of the tags included in the spreadsheet are reported as being unsuccessful during the
upload, go back to your spreadsheet and make sure that the URLs are valid. Make any
necessary corrections and attempt the upload again.
971 of 1162
21.5 Deleting page tags

To delete a Page Tag:
1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Page Tagging.
2. With the Page Tags tab selected, expand the folder in which the tag resides.
3. Click the down arrow next to the tag and select Delete Page Tag. The Eloqua application
performs a Dependency check. If the Page Tag you are attempting to delete is actively
referenced in a Contacts Segment, Page Tag Group or Auto Tagging Rule, you will have to first
remove the Tag from the Segment, Group or Rule in order to be able to delete the Page Tag.
4. Once you clear the dependencies (if any), click Delete Page Tag again next to the name of the
Page Tag.
5. Click OK in the confirmation dialog that appears.
6. The Page Tag is removed from the application.
Note: Deleting a page tag does not delete the associated pages, just the tag itself.
Warning: When you click OK, the page tag is permanently removed from the application.
To add a Page Tag as a Segment criterion:

1. Navigate to Contacts > Segments.
2. On the Launchpad, click Open an Existing Segment to open an existing Segment or Create a
Segment to create a new one.
3. Clickand select Filter Criteria from the callout menu options.
4. On the right-hand pane (Filter Criteria list), scroll down the list until you locate the Visited Page
Tags or Not Visited Page Tags criteria:
972 of 1162
5. Double-click on the criterion to add it to your Segment. Configure the criterion by selecting the
Page Tag that you have already created:
6. Click on the Page Tag and click Add to add it to your criterion. Repeat this step for all Tags you
wish to include in this Segment. Once you click Add, the Tag is added as shown here:
973 of 1162
7. Configure the number of times and the timeframe during which a contact should have visited
this (these) page tag(s):
Note: In the example above, contact names and information will be returned only for
those people who have visited tagged pages one time within the past month. You can
change the number of times and number of hours/days/weeks/months by selecting the
number 1 (default) and typing in your desired number.
8. Similarly, if you wish to segment your contacts based on their not having visited your tagged
web pages, use the same steps above, however select Not Visited Page Tags, and specify the
timeframe during which they did not visit the tagged page(s).
9. Click anywhere outside the criterion panel to finish or continue adding new criteria. Once all
criteria have been entered and configured, click Save (or Action Menu > Save).
21.6 Creating page tag groups

together.
Example: If you were an online retailer who sold laptops, you might have a page tag for each
laptop type. This will let you run analytics on that specific laptop model. However, you might
also want to analyze laptops as a whole versus all desktop and tablet offerings. Page tag
groups allow you to create groups of page tags for higher level analyses.
974 of 1162
To create a page tag group:

1. In the menu at the top of the Eloqua interface, select Settings, then Setup.
2. Select Page Tagging in the Website area.
3. From the Page Tagging drop down menu, choose New Page Tag Group. The Page Tag Group
editor will open in the right-hand frame.
4. Create a name for the Page Tag Group, and provide a description for future reference. You can
also specify where to save thePage Tag Group using the Place In Folder drop-down.
5. Add page tags to your group from the list.
6. ClickSave in the bottom right corner.
Your new page tag group will be listed under the Page Tag Groups panel in the left-hand pane. You can
now add the PageTag Group to a Lead Scoring model.
21.7 Deleting page tags groups

If you find you no longer have the need to group page tags for reporting purposes, you can delete the
Page Tag Group, provided there are no active Page Tags currently associated with the Group.
To delete a page tag group:

2. Click on the Page Tag Groups tab in the left-hand (navigation) pane.
3. Locate the Page Tag Group you wish to delete and click on the down arrow next to its name.
4. Click Delete Page Tag Group. Eloqua performs a Dependency Check. If the Page Tag Group
975 of 1162
contains active Page Tags, the Dependency Check dialog box appears alerting you that you
cannot delete the Page Tag Group until you have removed the associated Page Tags (entities)
contained within it.
In the example above, there are three Page Tags (Entity Filters) that are being used in another
area of Eloqua (most likely as a Segment Filter Criterion). The filters must be removed from the
Segment prior to being able to delete the Group. Note that removing the filters from the Segment
does not delete the Page Tags. Once all three have been deleted (deactivated), you can delete
the Group itself. The Dependency Check is still performed but appears and disappears rapidly
from the Delete Page Tag Group window and then you are prompted to confirm that you wish to
delete the Group.
5. Click OK when prompted to confirm that you wish to delete the Page Tag Group. Should you
decide not to delete the Page Tag Group at this time, click Cancel.
21.8 Creating auto tagging rules

Auto Tagging allows you to automate the process of applying Page Tags to web sites for which you
wish to obtain activity reports. The benefit of enabling Auto Tagging Rule is to avoid having to manually
add specific pages as they are created; they are automatically tagged as soon as they are added to
that level. In addition, once the Auto Tag is enabled, all pages at the number of levels you have
specified are immediately tagged as well.
976 of 1162
To create an Auto Tagging Rule:

1. Navigate to Settings > Setup > Page Tagging (in the Website section). Select the Page
Tagging tab.
2. On the Page Tagging menu, select New Auto Tagging Rule.
3. The Auto Page Tagging Rule window is displayed on the right-hand pane.
4. Enter a name for your rule that reflects the purpose of the rule, for example, if you want to tag
pages that discuss Revenue Performance Management (RPM), name your rule RPM.
5. Click on the folder next to the Base URL field to open the Folder Search window.
6. In the Folder Search window, you can either select a URL from the Folder Search list in the
bottom pane, or search for the URL by entering a part of the URL in the Search field at the top of
the window and click Search. If you want to view all URLs in the Site Map from which you can
add to your Auto Tagging Rule, select View All. Note: the list of URLs from which you can
choose is populated directly from your Site Map.
7. Once the folder appears in the bottom pane of the Folder Search window, select it by single leftclicking on its name to add it to the Selected Folder list at the upper-right section of the window.
8. Click OK to save your selection, or Cancel to return to the Auto Page Tagging Rule page.
9. In the Levels Down from Selected Folder to Tag Pages field, you must indicate how many
levels down from the Base URL that you selected in step 5 above will have this Auto Tagging
Rule applied. The default is 1, meaning the root and just the next level down will have all pages
automatically tagged with this rule. To change the number of levels, select Define Number of
Levels Down and type in the number of levels. To automatically tag all levels down from the
Base URL , select Tag All Levels Down (you will not be able to enter a number of levels if you
select that option).
10. Click Generate Preview of Auto Tagging Rule to verify that the tags and the number of levels
that to which you wish to have this rule applied is correct.
21.9 Managing auto tagging rules

Auto Tagging Rules can be viewed and updated at any time.
To manage auto tagging rules:
977 of 1162
1. Navigate to Setup > Page Tagging (under the Website section).

2. From the Page Tagging menu, select Manage Auto Page Tagging Rules.
3. A list of the Auto Page Tagging Rules you have created is displayed in the right-hand pane.
4. To view the details of your rule, click the + sign next to the name of the web site (Base URL) to
display the rules associated with that site. Click the down arrow next to the rule you wish to
view and select Auto Tagging Rule Details from the drop-down menu:
The details of your rule are displayed as when you first created the AutoTagging Rule. You can
modify its settings from that page.
5. To force the Auto Tagging Rule to run immediately, click Run AutoTagging Rule. Running the
rule prior to the next scheduled time (specified in Setup > Tracking > Update Site Map) can be
useful if you wish to tag a number of pages that have recently been added to your site for which
you wish to have immediate reporting capabilities.
6. To delete the Auto Tagging Rule, click Delete AutoTagging Rule.
21.10 Creating meta tagging rules

Page Tags are used by Eloqua to narrow down a segment of users that you wish to target in a
campaign, based on their having visited (or not visited) pages with the values associated with the tag.
The tags are inserted into the head area of your web pages. Other than the title tag, information in
the head area of your web pages is not seen by those viewing your pages in browsers. Instead,
customer meta data that has been extracted from your page tags are used for tracking visitor activity,
sending visitor notifications to Eloqua users, and creating more precise segments in your campaigns.
For example, if you manufacture widgets for both the European and North American markets, adding
meta tags to the pages for your French customers with a value of France, or conversely for
Canadian or US visitors, give a tag value of North America would allow you to narrow down your
target campaign audience based on the visitors' activity and geographic location. Once configured, you
978 of 1162
can use the people who have or have not visited these specific tagged pages in creating a Segment for
use in a Campaign.
Eloqua can crawl your web pages that have been already tagged with these meta data. Meta tags are
placed between the opening and closing head tags in your web page's HTML code, and before the
body tag.
The following example shows meta tagging a web page:
The example above contains the following meta tags: keywords, two custom tags (custom and
downloads) and a title tag. The keywords meta tag is used by a search engine (for example,
Google) to index pages on the web that relate to these keywords, and are not specific to Eloqua.
Custom tags, however, are Eloqua-specific and are used to extract meta data for pages that relate to
topics on your web site (in the example above, you can segment your web site visitors who have
visited [or not visited] your web pages relating to pricing, or your product's Enterprise Edition, or pages
that have whitepapers for download, etc. Another way to use meta tags in Eloqua could be the
Content-type tag, to distinguish pages that use the UTF-8 character set from pages that use an
ISO-based character encoding.
To create a Meta Tagging Rule:

2. On the Page Tagging menu, select New Meta Tagging Rule.
3. The Meta Tagging Rule window is displayed on the right-hand pane.
4. Enter a name for your rule that reflects the purpose of the rule, for example, if you want to tag
pages that discuss Marketing Automation, name your rule Marketing Automation.
5. Click on the folder next to Base URL field to open the Folder Search window.
6. In the Folder Search window, you can either select a URL from the list in the bottom pane, or
search for the URL by entering a part of the URL in the Search field at the top of the window and
click Search. If you want to view all URLs in the Site Map from which you can add to your Meta
Tagging Rule, select View All. Note: the list of URLs from which you can choose is populated
directly from your Site Map.
979 of 1162
7. Once the folder appears in the bottom pane of the Folder Search window, select it by single leftclicking on its name to add it to the Selected Folder list at the upper-right section of the
window.
8. Click OK to save your selection, or Cancel to return to the Meta Page Tagging Rule page.
9. In the Levels Down from Selected Folder to Tag Pages field, you must indicate how many
levels down from the Base URL that you selected in step 5 above will have this Meta Tagging
Rule applied. The default is 1, meaning the root and just the next level down will have all pages
at those levels automatically tagged with this rule. To change the number of levels, select
Define Number of Levels Down and type in the number of levels. To automatically tag all
levels down from the Base URL, select Tag All Levels Down (you will not be able to enter a
number of levels if you select that option). Use caution in selecting Tag All Levels Down if your
web site has many levels and many pages at each level.
10. Now you must specify the tags you wish to track:
Standard tags are Name and Keywords. If your HTML code includes Name and Keywords
with associated values, select Standard and all Name and Keywords tags will automatically be
tracked.
11. To enter any non-standard tag or tags, select the checkbox next to Custom and enter the tag
names (separated by a comma and space). Custom tags can be any meta tags that apply to
your business environment, and are geared towards use in contact segmentation in Eloqua.
Custom meta tags are exactly that: they relate specifically to your business needs, and can be
named what you wish. In the example above, the programmer used custom and
downloads for the names of the custom meta tags.

12. Once you have entered the information in the top section, select Show Tree View under the
Rule Visual Overview heading to display a list of web pages that are to be tagged. The pages
that are displayed are based on the number of levels you selected in the section directly above.
In this example, since we selected only one level below the root, the only page at one level
below www.eloqua.com is www.eloqua.com/sitemap.
980 of 1162
Also note that both levels are automatically selected for tagging. If, for example, you had
selected more than one level down, or if one level down has more than one page, you can select
or deselect individual pages (levels) using the checkboxes next to the name of each page.
13. Once you have verified that you have selected all the pages and levels of pages you wish to
track, click Extract Meta Tags to extract the values for the tags you have created. For
example, on http://www.eloqua.com/, the values for "keywords" are: marketing
automation, demand generation, email marketing automation, demand generation software,
demand generation marketing, and sales alignment.
14. Click OK when prompted with the following warning message:
Once you have extracted the Meta Tags, any values for the keywords tag on the levels and
pages you selected above are displayed (in alphabetical order).
The Status changes to Extract Completed and you will receive an email confirming the
successful extraction.
981 of 1162
15. Click Save to save your Meta Tagging Rule.

Since you have set keywords in this instance to include demand generation, demand generation
marketing, etc., you can obtain metrics on user visits via an Eloqua Insight report.
21.11 Managing auto meta tagging rules

Once an Auto Meta Tag Rule has been added, Eloqua will automatically crawl the web sites in your
Site Map based on the schedule you have selected in Setup > Tracking > Update Site Map. By default,
this happens every Friday morning at 01:00 (1:00 am) Eastern Standard Time (GMT-5), but can be
changed to any of the following choices:
982 of 1162
After the crawl is finished, any pages that have been tagged using this Auto Meta Tag will be available
for use in reporting or in creating a Contact Segment for use in other areas of Eloqua. However, you
may not wish to wait until the next scheduled crawl (update) to access this information.
To manage auto meta tagging rules:

1. Navigate to Setup > Tracking > Page Tagging > Page Tagging > Manage Auto Meta
Tagging Rules
Clicking Manage Auto Meta Tagging Rules displays a list of the web sites that are being
crawled for these meta tags, for example:
2. Click the + sign next to the web site that is being crawled to expand the list of Auto Meta
Tagging Rules associated with this site. In this case, there is only one such Rule (Marketing
Automation).
3. Click on the down arrow next to the Rule Name to either View, Run, or Delete the Rule:
983 of 1162
4. Click AutoMeta Tagging Rule Details to view the options that were configured when you
initially created the Rule. The only value that you can change is the Base URL. Once changed,
the Rule is updated and the next time the new site is crawled, the meta data will be extracted.
984 of 1162
22 Program Builder
Eloqua Program Builder is an automated workflow module. It allows you to create automated
workflows to replace repetitive manual tasks. Programs are useful for many things, such as lead
scoring, nurturing, data modification, etc. In Eloqua, there is some overlap and similarities between
Programs and Campaign Canvas.
Every Program is composed of a combination of two kinds of elements:
Program Step - Defines an action for every Contact record that exists in the step. The Program
Step is represented by a green rectangular box in Eloqua.
Decision Rule - A qualifying question that must have a yes or no answer. Each Contact will flow
through either the yes path or the no path resulting from the decision. A Decision Rule is
represented by an orange diamond.
In the Best Practice example below, we can see a simple program that sends an email, waits 3 days,
and sends one of two emails based on the decision rule.
985 of 1162
22.0.1 Program run mode throughputs

Question
What is the throughput of each program run mode in Program Builder? I would like to know how many
contacts can run through the program each hour.
Answer
The throughput depends on the program run mode and the current number of contacts in your database.
As your contact database grows, your throughput is automatically adjusted.
For a small database size (classified as <50K contacts):
986 of 1162
Priority Mode: 25/cycle, 300/hr

Standard Mode: 2500/cycle, 10,000/hr
Bulk Mode: 10,000/cycle, 5000/hr
For a medium database size (classified as >50K and <1M contacts):
Priority Mode: 100/cycle, 1200/hr
Standard Mode: 12,500/cycle, 50,000/hr
Bulk Mode: 50,000/cycle, 25,000/hr
For a large database size (classified as >1M contacts):
Priority Mode: 250/cycle, 3,000/hr
Standard Mode: 25,000/cycle, 100,000/hr
Bulk Mode: 100,000/cycle, 50,000/hr
22.1 Program Builder Feeders

Program Feeders are used to automatically add members into the first Step of a Program or to a
specific Program Step based on Group membership, a Contact Filter or visitor Saved Report.
22.2 Program Builder Step Actions

Along with Decision Rules, Program Steps are at the heart of an automated marketing Program. When
the program is represented in flowchart form (Diagram View), Program Steps are represented by the
light green rectangles. Each Program Step represents a processing Action that occurs in the program.
The Data Entity type determines the list of Actions available in a Program Step. The following Data
Entity Types can be used in a program.
Contacts - Individuals; must have an email address.
Prospects - Individuals; usually without email address.
Companies - Companies or accounts.
Data Cards - Typically tied to a contact and can be used to assign more than one individual to a
single email address.
Step Actions: Program Builder Steps & Editing/Viewing Action
Step Breakdown
987 of 1162
There are several ways that you can view or edit parameters in a Program Step. You can click on one
of the buttons in the Step or click on the menu in the Step and select from a long list of options. Note:
Not all elements shown are part of every Program Step.
Step Menu
Besides Edit Step Default Action and View members in this step, a number of other options are shown
on the menu for a Program step. These options include the following:
Edit Step Details
Opens the Step Details dialog box. This is the same dialog box that opens when creating
the first step of a Program.
988 of 1162
You can set details such as the Step Name, a Step Description (if required), the types of
Data Entities (Companies, Contacts, Contacts) or Data Cards included in this step,
whether the Agent will manually execute step actions (this provides more control for the
Agent, and is required for setting Alternative Actions, but also causes the Program to
stop until action is taken), and whether the step is Enabled/Disabled. Click Save when
the parameters are set. Note that if a data entity is used in a Program Feeder, then it's
selected and greyed out in the window (you can't deselect it without removing the
Feeder).
You can also select Options > Check Dependency to see what the dependencies (for
example, on Ownership Rules) the step has. You might carry out the Check when
considering whether to delete the Step.
Note: If you select Agent will execute step actions, the Step is shown in the Program
flowchart with a dotted-line border to show that it is executed by the Agent. If you select
Disabled, the step is shown in grey in the flowchart.
Edit Step Default Action
Opens the Edit Action Details dialog box.
Edit Step Alternative Actions
Note: This option only appears if you have set the Step Details to Agent will execute
step actions.
This option allows you to define alternative Actions to the main Action for the Program
Step. Alternative Actions are used to set other action possibilities for the Agent who will
execute the Action. In execution, the Agent is presented with a list of alternative Actions
for this Step. Note: You cannot set up alternative Actions for Steps that are executed
automatically. you must select Agent will execute step actions in the Edit Step Details
dialog box to set more than one possible Action. Note that a Step using a Condition can
also not be executed by an Agent.
To create or edit an alternative Action:

1. From the Step menu, select Edit Step Alternative Action. The Edit Alternative
Action window opens. Click New Alternative Action.
2. Provide an Action Name and select an Action.
3. Set any additional parameters required for the Action.
4. Click Save and Close to save the alternative Action Step.
5. Open the Edit Alternative Actions window again (select Edit Step Alternative
Actions from the Step menu). You will see the Action Name listed. You can Edit
989 of 1162
or Delete the action from the menu next to it in the table.
6. To add more alternative Actions, click New Alternative Action and go through the
steps above again from step 2. Repeat until you have added all the required
alternative Actions to make available to the Agent executing this Step.
Note:This option only appears if you have set the Step Details to Agent will execute step
actions.
This option allows you to set email alerts to be sent to owner of the member when
members enter this step. The alert can be set to send an alert for each member that
enters the step or a single alert for the entire group that enters the step. The step owner
can also accept or reject each member.
To set the Agent alert:
990 of 1162
1. From the menu for the Program Step, select Set Agent Alert.
2. Specify the type of alert from the picklist to email the step owner.
...once per member and prompt to Accept/Reject - Allows the Agent to
accept or reject each members coming into the Program Step
...once per member in step - Alerts the Agent each time a member is added
when new step activity occurs - Alerts the Agent whenever any step
activity takes place
3. Click Save and Close. The Agent alert is set up to send alerts under the specified
conditions.
Add members to this step
You can add members directly into the step using this function. See the topic Adding
Members to a Program for more information about how to add members.
View members in this step
Allows you to view all the members that are included in this Program Step. For more
information, see the description near the top of this topic.
Run Ownership Rule
You can run an Ownership Rule to set ownership for a Step based on particular criteria.
For example, you may want to set ownership to different salespeople based on the City
in the member's Contact record. Note: The step must have members in it for you to run
an Ownership Rule against it, because it's the ownership of the members that you are
determining.
Edit Step Path
Allows you to set the next destination Step in the flowchart for members that have
completed the current Step.
Note: You will probably not see all of the options shown in the following procedure for
991 of 1162
any Program Step. Which ones appear depend on your Program and whether you have
orphaned (unconnected) Steps in the Program.
Delete This Step
Click this item to delete the Step from the Program.
Notes:
The Dependency Check is run so that all you can Edit or Delete all dependencies
on this step. Once this is done, a separate confirmation dialog box opens to
confirm that you want to delete the step. Click OK to permanently delete the
Program Step.
All steps and Decision Rules (Paths) below the deleted Step in the Program
flowchart will become orphaned, will not be connected to the Program, and will
not process members. If there are Steps that will be orphaned, you will see a
warning to this effect. If any members are in the steps of an orphaned path, they
should be moved to a Step that is still connected to the Program, or the orphaned
path should be reconnected to the Program after you delete this Step by selecting
Edit Step Path, then the first orphaned Step, from the previous Step in the
Program flowchart.
Step Actions & Parameters
The following table shows the Actions that can be configured within a Program Step.
Notes:
A number of these services require you to engage specific Eloqua products or services, so all
options may not be available to you. Contact your Customer Success Manager for more
information
Any Action related to a specific data entity will only appear in a Program in which that data entity
(for example, a Contact, Prospect or Company) is allowed.
Icon
Action
Action - Pass
Through Step
No Action Wait
Specified
Time
Accept or
decline
ownership
Description
No Action is carried out in this Step. It is used as a placeholder or
terminal point in the Program.
Member
Type
All
No Action is carried out, but execution of the following Step is delayed

All
by the amount of time specified in this Step.
This Action is only available if you have selected the option Agent will
execute step actions in the Step Details. Agents can accept or decline All
ownership of members that have been assigned to them.
Add Contacts The Program owner can add Contacts in a Program Step to a selected Contact
992 of 1162
Icon
Action
Description
Member
Type
to a Contact
Contact Group.
Group
The Program owner can add the members in a Program Step to a
Add to
specific Step in another automated marketing Program in Program
Another
Builder for additional processing. Note: If you do not want the
All
Program
members to also remain in the original Program, use the process
Action named Move to Another Program instead.
This Action is only available if you have selected the option Agent will
execute step actions in the Step Details. The Program owner can ask
users to execute a task manually (for example, place a call or request
a meeting). The application will send a task report to the user's Eloqua
Agent Note
All
Today (home) page specifying the members and the action needed.
As users complete the tasks, they can indicate on a member by
member basis that the task is completed. Each member that has been
processed then moves on to the next Step in the Program.
The Program owner can select an action that is provided by a webCloud
based service provider outside the application. Select a service
All
Connector
provider, then select configuration options for engaging that provider in
the current Program step.
Create
Companies The Program owner can create Company records from Contact data
from Contact for interim processing. The owner can select a Company Group to
Contacts
Company
which to add the Company records.
Name
Remove
Contacts
from a
Remove Contacts from a Contact Group.
Contacts
Contact
Group
Remove from The Program owner can remove the members in the Program Step
All
Program
from the Program to prevent any further processing.
The Program owner can run the Eloqua Dedupe tool to identify
Run a Match duplicate members using one or many fields within a list, between two
/
lists, or between a specific list and the entire marketing database. The Contacts,
Deduplication tool can be run for one or multiple Contacts. The results should be
Companies
Rule
reviewed and corrected (if required) by the Program owner, another
user, or the process owner.
Run a
The Program owner can run a configured Validation Rule (filter) on
Contacts,
Validation
Program members in the current Step to identify or cleanse invalid
Companies
Rule
data.
Run D&B
Append
The Program owner can run D&B append to add additional field-level Contacts,
Chargeable information to data records for members in the Step.
Companies
Web Service
Run
The Program owner can fire a custom event for the members in the
Integration
All
Step to update their data in an integrated CRM system.
Event
993 of 1162
Icon
Action
Run
Integration
Rule
Collection
Run Lead
Stage Rule
Send Batch
Email
Description
The Program owner can fire a group of custom events for the
members in the Step to update their data in an integrated CRM
system.
The Program owner can run a configured Lead Stage Rule to rank the
Contacts, Prospects, or Companies in a Program Step based on the
Rule.
The Program owner can create and send an Email Batch to the
members in the Step, and also organize how the Email will be
distributed, where Emails subject to errors, bounces, unsubscribes
and excludes will end up, and which Signature to use.
Send
Campaign
The Program owner can update CRM campaign information for
Information to members in the Step.
CRM System
Send
Process
The Program owner can send defined Reports to users in Eloqua
Member
who have been assigned members in the Program, or to other
Report to
specified users.
Owner
Send
The Program owner can send Email Templates to members in the
Quicksend
Step. The appropriate Signature configurations can also be selected.
Email
Subscribe to The Program owner can subscribe Contacts to a particular Email
Campaign
Group, subscribe them at a site level, or both.
UnSubscribe
The Program owner can unsubscribe members in the Step from a
from
particular Email Group, unsubscribe them at a site level, or both.
Campaign
Update
Contact /
The Program owner can update Contact, Prospect, or Company
Prospect /
records with defined update rules to update field information.
Company
Data
Update
The Program owner can synchronize the ownership of the source
source
Contact, Prospect, or Company records with the ownership assigned
records with
to the Program Step. For example, you can save the current Step
Program
owner's Email Address to the Salesperson Email Address field.
Ownership
Member
Type
All
Contacts,
Companies
Contacts,
Data Cards
Contacts,
Companies
All
Contacts
Contacts
Contacts
Contacts,
Companies
Contacts,
Companies
22.3 Accessing Program Builder

To access Program Builder:
1.
From My Eloqua, select Setup > Program Builder
994 of 1162
22.4 Adding Feeders

1. Navigate to and open a Program.
2. Find the Step to which you want to add a Program Feeder. On the menu for the Step, select Add
members to this step.
3. In the Automatically Recurring section (the bottom section in the dialog box), you can choose a
Program Feeder from the picklist, choose and Edit an existing Feeder, or create a New Program
Feeder. In this procedure, we will create a New Feeder as an example, so click New.
4. Set the parameters for the Program Feeder:
If you select the checkbox, additional options appear:

The name of the Step to which you are adding the Feeder is shown as read-only in the
Add members to program step field.
Program Feeder Name - Fill in the name for the Program Feeder which will be shown at
the top of the Step to which it is added.
Source of Program Members - Specify where you want the Program members for the
Feeder to be drawn from. Note: The items listed below are for Contacts. But depending
on what is selected on the Program Step Details page, other types of data entities such
as Prospects, Companies, and Custom Object Records could also have some or all of
the options shown.
Contacts in Filter - Pull from a Contact Filter. When you select this option, the next field
becomes the Contact Filter field. You can click the button to search for and add an
existing Contact Filter or create a new one. Note: If you select an Activity-Based Filter,
this can be run a maximum of once per day due to the load it imposes on the system. An
Inactivity-Based Filter can only be run once per week. You will see messages in this
regard if you select one of these Filters. In addition, note that feeders using ActivityBased Filters will place a contact into the program if there has been any activity by that
contact since the last time the feeder was evaluated.
995 of 1162
Contacts in Group - Pulls from a specified Contact Group. When you select this option,
the next field becomes the Contact Group field. You can click the button to search for
and add an existing Contact Group or create a new one.
Contacts in Group and Filter Overlap - Pulls members that are both in a selected Contact
Group and a selected Contact Filter. When you select this option, two fields appear to
allow you to select a Contact Group and a Contact Filter. You can click the buttons to
search for and add an existing Contact Group and Contact Filter or create new ones.
Contacts in Saved Reports - Pulls Contacts in the application from a specific saved
Report. When you select this option, click the button in the field that appears to select an
existing Contact saved Report - for example, an Outlook or QuickSend Email Opens
list.
Visitors in Saved Report - Pulls website visitors from a specified saved Report. When
you select this option, click the button in the field that appears to select an existing
saved Report or select and Edit a Report to provide members to the Program Feeder.
Note: If you select this option, an additional field, Add to Program Builder As, allows you
to select the Data Entity to add the members as to the Program. You can also click the
Edit button to choose the Visitor Profile Fields that will be used for mapping.
Evaluate - From the picklist, you can select how often you want the Source Conditions to
be evaluated (ranging from once Every hour to once Every Year). You can also select
Restrict Evaluation Time to further restrict when the evaluation takes place so that
members are only fed into the Program on a schedule that you control.
996 of 1162
Select a Time Zone - You can choose the Time Zone for the schedule to follow. This is
particularly useful for setting up Programs for a specific Time Zone so that you don't
have to do any calculations to find the equivalent in local time. Important: If you have
selected or built a schedule, and you change this setting, always click Update Time
Zone to apply it to the schedule.
Start with a Standard Schedule - Choose a standard business-hours schedule from the
picklist and click Apply Standard Schedule to create the schedule or replace the current
schedule (click OK in the confirmation dialog box that opens). You can also select a
schedule, then edit or delete individual rows using the buttons next to each.
Add Custom Schedule Item - If you choose a Standard Schedule, you can add line items
to the schedule by clicking this button.
Advanced Options - This is used to set the ownership of the members who are entering
from this Feeder to support functions to require an action from the owners or to execute
an action on behalf of an owner. You can also select and Edit an existing Ownership
Rule or Add a new rule.
Ownership Rule to use - Click the button and select a specific Rule that will
assign members to one or more owner(s) based on specified criteria.
Do Not Evaluate Before (EST) - Set the date and time at which to make the
current Feeder active. This is set to Eastern Time.
Further restrict members by - You can select an option in this picklist to allow only
members that meet the criteria selected (for example, that the members fed into
the Program must have been created or modified within the evaluation time
created by setting the start point above (Do Not Evaluate Before).
Add all members... - By selecting this, you ignore the further restrictions set in
Further restrict members by the first time the Feeder is run. This is to ensure all
current members in the Program member source are added on the first pass, but
only those meeting the criteria are added thereafter. Note: This option does not
appear if you have selected Visitors in Saved Report as the source of Program
members.
997 of 1162
Once you have selected all the settings, click Save and Close to save the Program
Feeder. If you want to enable the Feeder immediately, you can click OK in the dialog box
that opens to make the Feeder active.
Otherwise, click Cancel (you can activate the feeder later).
You can also run the Feeder once each time you click run it manually. To do this, in the
Program, click the Feeder in the Step you added it to, then click one of the Program
Feeders in the View Step Inputs dialog box. At the bottom of the Program Feeder dialog
box, click Save, then OK in the confirmation box to enable the feeder. Then click Run
Manually to run the Feeder once. The owner of the Program will receive a notification
email when the processing is completed.
22.5 Archiving Programs

You can archive a Program to take it out of active service and prevent it from being used by mistake
while still retaining it in case you need to re-activate or copy it later.
Note: In order to archive a Program, the Program and all of its Program Feeders must be disabled first.
To archive a Program:
1. From the Eloqua Today (home) page, navigate to Automate > Program Builder. Click the
Program Builder tab.
2. On the menu next to a selected Program in the Tree View, select Archive Program. A
confirmation dialog box opens to confirm that you want to archive the Program. Click OK to
archive the Program.
Note: The Eloqua application will not allow you to archive the Program unless the Program and
all its Feeders are disabled. If you try to archive an enabled Program, you will see this message.
Click OK, go back to the Program and make sure that both the Program and the Feeders are
disabled, and repeat this procedure from step 1.
If the Program and Feeders were disabled, the Program is archived. It is removed from the main
section of the Tree View and moved to the archived programs list. The number shown for
Archived Programs in the root folder menu is incremented by 1 when your Program is added (for
example, 39 archived programs whereas before it was 38).
998 of 1162
3. Click on View Archived Program in this menu or select Program Builder > Managed Archived
Programs. The Managed Archived Programs page shows the Programs that are Not Archived
and that are Archived (including the one you just added) in your implementation of the Eloqua
application.
To archive multiple Programs at the same time:

2. Make sure that the Programs you want to archive are not active. Note that the icons for other
modes differ slightly, but will still use the orange diamond to indicate an enabled program. To
disable any Program that is enabled, click on the Program in the Tree View to open it in the
editing mode, then select Program > Disable Program from the Task bar. Remember that you
must also disable all feeders for a program you want to archive (click Disable Program Feeder
on the menu next to it in the Tree View).
3. Select Program Builder > Manage Archived Programs. The Manage Archived Programs page
shows the Programs that are Not Archived and that are Archived in your implementation of the
Eloqua application (see the diagram of the Manage Archived Program page above).
4. Select the Programs you want to archive in the Not Archived list using the corresponding
checkbox and click Archive Selected. The Programs are moved to the Archived list and no
longer appear as separate Programs in the Programs Tree View list.
To un-archive one or more Programs:

2. Select Program Builder > Manage Archived Programs. The Manage Archived Programs page
shows the Programs that are Not Archived and that are Archived in your implementation of the
Eloqua application (see the diagram of the Manage Archived Program page above).
3. Select an item in the Archived list using the corresponding checkbox and click UnArchive
Selected. The Program is moved to the Not Archived list and once again appears as a separate
Program in the Programs Tree View list in the folder from which it was originally archived. Note:
999 of 1162
You can unarchive multiple Programs at the same time by selecting all of them and clicking
UnArchive Selected.
22.6 Copying Programs

To copy a program to a new Program:
2. On the menu next to the Program name in the Tree View (the left-hand pane), click Copy
Program. The Copy Program page opens.
3. By default, the name of the copy is original name preceded by "Copy of." In most cases, you
will change the name. In the field, enter a New name for the new copied program.
4. Select a Folder into which to place the copied program. If you leave the default set, then the
program will be copied to the Unfiled system folder.
5. Select the Copy Options to control the copying of program elements. Select the corresponding
checkboxes to copy the options shown. Depending on how the program is configured, these
may include program feeders and/or actions.
6. Click Copy Program. The program is copied under the new name to the Tree View.
22.7 Creating Programs

You can create a new program in Program Builder to carry out a wide range of automated marketing
functions in Eloqua.
The exact procedure for building a program from scratch varies a lot in the details, but in general,
following these steps:
1000 of 1162
Set up the program details

Add steps and decision rules to the program flow and configure each one
Add members or an automatic Program Feeder
Test the program
Enabling the program with "live" data entities (Contacts, Prospects, Companies, or Custom
Object Records)
Note: If your program is large, with a lot of redirects, you may run into limitations in Program Builder
that prevent any member from being redirected more than 10 times within a single batch run. You
should split large programs into an series of smaller, modular programs, each sending members on to
the next, then place them in correct order in the batch runs. This will mitigate the possibility that you'll
violate the limits built into Program Builder. If you need more information, contact your Customer
Success Manager.
Example
In the example below, we'll examine building a program with at least one Decision Rule that routes
members in the program down two different paths.
1001 of 1162
First, we need to create the program from the Program Builder section of Eloqua.
1. Select Program Builder > Create New program. The New Program page opens, and you can set
the program details in this window.
2. Once all program settings have been set, click Save. The new program is added to the list of
programs in the Tree View.
3. To begin adding steps to a program, select Edit Program Flow on the bottom toolbar.
4. To add the first Step, click on Click here to add the first step in the program. To follow the
example, fill in the Step Name (100. Add Members) and make sure that Allow contacts in step is
selected, then click Save and Continue.
Now that we have a program shell, we can begin adding steps.
1002 of 1162
5. To add the first Step, click on Click here to add the first step in the program.
To follow the example, fill in the Step Name (100. Add Members) and make sure that
Allow contacts in step is selected, then click Save and Continue.
In the Edit Action window, fill in an Action Name (use "Pass Through"). We could set up
a schedule for feeding in the Contacts, but to keep it simple, select Yes for Run action at
all times.
At this point, we do not actually want this Step to execute an Action, but we'll add a
Program Feeder next to add members to this step automatically. Select No Action Pass Through Step; note that there are no conditions or action parameters (at the bottom
of the window) associated with this action. Click Save and Close.
The first Step is added to the program flowchart.
6. Now that the Step has been added, we can add the Program Feeder for Contacts. On the Step
menu, select Add members to this step. If there was an appropriate Feeder for your purposes,
you could select it from the Program Feeders picklist. Instead, we'll create a new Feeder for the
first step. Click New next to the picklist.
1003 of 1162
In the Contact Group Search window, you can search for, find, and click to select the test
group. Then click OK.
In the Program Feeder window, you can set a different Evaluation Time (the default is set to
Every day). We'll leave the default set, then click Save and Close. In the confirmation dialog
box, we can click OK to add the members in the contact group to the program, then click Close
in the Add members to this step window. Note that since the program is not completed or
enabled yet, they won't be processed at this time. The Feeder is added to the first Step in the
program flow and the number of members in this step is shown.
In the Program Feeder window, note that the name of the Program Step to which you're
adding this feeder is shown as read-only. Enter a Program Feeder Name (this will be
shown in the Tree View under the program).
For the Source of program members, select Contacts in Group.
1004 of 1162
Warning! This is a temporary group containing test contacts only for testing, no live
contacts; we'll replace this with a live contact group later.
In the Contact Group field, click the button to search for and select a Group.
7. Now that we have set up the first Step and the Feeder, we can add the remaining Steps to the
program. We'll start with a Decision Rule used to split the members into two equal groups so
that we can send one of the A/B test emails to each:
In the first Step, on the menu, select Edit Step Path, choose Send to a new decision rule and
click Continue. Provide a Decision Rule Name (200. Split 50/50). We'll leave it set to Evaluate
Immediately. The Entity Type in this case is limited to Contacts because that's what we
selected when we set the Program Details. For the action, select Percentage-based routing.
You'll see at the bottom of the window that you can enter a percentage that will be routed to the
Yes path from the Decision Rule, with the remaining percentage routed to the No path. Fill in 50
in the field (to indicate 50% on the Yes path), then click Save and Close.
The Decision Rule is in the program flow now, but is not really complete until the Yes and No
paths are defined.
To configure the Yes path, from the menu in the Decision Rule, select Edit Decision Yes Path.
Choose Send to a new step and click Continue. Let's call this 300. Email A and send one of the
two test emails using this step. Click Save and Continue, then fill in an Action Name (Send
Email A). Leave the default set for Run action and choose the Action (Send Batch Email). Note
that this step is right after a Decision Rule, so it cannot be conditional (Always execute this
action is greyed out). Click the button in the Email field to search for and select the email (click
on it), then click OK in the Email Search window. The Email Group is shown automatically after
this selection.
1005 of 1162
Leave the rest of the defaults set (Send all emails at once and Send without a signature) and
click Save and Close.
To configure the No path, the process is very similar to the yes path. From the menu in the
Decision Rule, select Edit Decision No Path. Choose Send to a new step and click Continue.
This is called 400. Email B. Click Save and Continue, then fill in an Action Name (Send Email
B). Leave the default for Run action and choose the Action (Send Batch Email). Click the button
in the Email field to search for and select a different email (click on it), then click OK in the Email
Search window. The Email Group is shown automatically after this selection. Leave the rest of
the defaults and click Save and Close.
Now the program looks like this:
Now we'll finish the Yes path by moving these members on to a lead scoring program. On the
menu in step 300. Email A, select Edit Step Path. Select Send to a new step and click
Continue. Enter the Step Name (500. Move to LS Program) and click Save and Continue. Enter
the Action Name (Move to LS Program) and choose the action (Move to Another Program). At
the bottom of the window, click the4 button in the To Program Step field. In the Program Step
Search window, you can search on the Program Name or Program Step Name to find the step
1006 of 1162
to which you want to send members. Note the that Program Name is shown in the first column
of the results, and the Step in the second. Click on a Step to select it and click OK.
Finish the No branch. In the step 400. Email B, select Edit Step Path in the menu. Select Send
to an existing step. Select the same step that the Yes path ended with: 500. Move to LS
Program. Click Continue. The program flow is now complete and looks like this:
1007 of 1162
8. Now that the program is set up, you can pass it off to your Customer Administrator to test the
program. Then you can Enable it to begin processing Contacts.
To test the program using the test contact group, your administrator must choose Program >
Test Program. You can uncheck the System Date and Time Override, but leave Test
Notifications checked and make sure it's your email address in the field. Double-click on all the
steps in the Program Steps pane to move them to the Selected Steps pane (you can test up to 5
steps at a time). Click Begin Test.
The Administrator will see the test results in the window and get test notifications by email.
1008 of 1162
9. The Administrator checks the results to ensure that the program is doing what it should be
doing, then passes it back to you. Now you must set up the permanent Program Feeder. This
will be from a contact group that you want to use consistently for A/B split testing and then feed
to a lead scoring program.
10. You can Enable the program now. Select Program > Enable Program. You will see three options
for enabling the program; click Enable for the correct option. Note: Each option has its own
attributes that suite it best for different types of programs.
22.8 Deleting Programs

To delete a program:
1009 of 1162
2. On the menu next to the Program name in the Tree View (the left-hand pane), click Delete
Program.
3. If the Program has other elements that depend on it (such as Program Feeders to feed members
into the Program), the Dependency Check dialog box opens to allow you to Edit (re-assign) or
Delete (remove from the application) each dependency. In order to delete this Program, you
must re-assign all dependencies. The dialog box closes once you have done this. Note: If the
Edit and/or Delete buttons are greyed out in the Dependency Check dialog box, you may have
to manage or remove these dependencies from the original item listed.
4. Once you have resolved all dependencies, or if there were none, the confirmation dialog box
opens. Click OK to permanently delete the Program from the application.
Warning! If you click OK, the Program is permanently deleted from the Eloqua application.
22.9 Editing the Program Flow

We can modify the path of a program through the program flow chart.
To edit the Program flow:

1. On the menu next to the Program name in the Tree View (the left-hand pane), click Edit
Program. The program flow opens in a program page in a Diagram view (like a flowchart).
2. Click on the applicable step's setup menu and select Edit Step Path. Select whether you want
to go to a new Step, an existing Step, or a Decision Rule.
1010 of 1162
22.10 Managing Program Builder Folders

You can use folders and sub-folders in the Tree View in Program Builder to help organize your
programs.
To create a folder:
2. In the Tree View, on the menu next to the root folder (Programs) or another existing folder, click
Create New Folder.
3. In the Create New Folder dialog box, fill in a Folder Name and (optionally) a Folder Description
and click Save and Close. The folder is added to the Tree View in the location and with the
name you provided once the Tree View finishes refreshing.
To move a Program to a folder:

2. In the Tree View, on the menu next to a program, click Move to Folder.
3. In the list shown in the Move to Folder dialog box, select the folder to which you want to move
the program.
4. Click Move to Folder. The program is moved to the specified folder.
To delete a folder:
1011 of 1162
1. In the Tree View, on the menu next to a folder, click Delete. Note: The folder must be empty for
you to delete it. That includes programs that may have been archived or expired from the folder.
2. If you are sure you want to delete the folder, click OK in the confirmation dialog box that opens.
If you have decided not to delete the folder, click Cancel.
Warning! When you click OK, if the folder is empty, it is permanently deleted from the application.
Note: If there are any programs in the folder when you try to delete it, you will see a message box
indicating that the folder cannot be deleted until any programs associated with it (including archived or
expired Programs that are not shown in the folder) are moved or deleted. In this case, click OK, then
move/delete any associated programs, including those that are archived or expired. To view Archived
Programs, on the menu next to the programs folder, click View Archived Programs.
22.11 Troubleshooting feeders

Scenario: You have enabled the program and feeder, and contacts are not being fed into the program.
Possible Reason(s): There are additional parameters that can limit the flow of contacts into a
program, they include: Evaluation Time Restrictions; and Advanced Options - Evaluation Date &
Further Restrictions. These areas have been identified image below. Check these areas to ensure
they are configured correctly.
1012 of 1162
1013 of 1162
22.12 Viewing the path of a contact through a program

To view a contact's path through a program:
1. Navigate to Contacts > Contacts.
2. Search for the contact for whom you want to see the path through the program.
3. Click History Log > Program Activity.
4. After you drill down on the programs that the contact has been through, double click on the
program in question and it will drill down to the steps the contact took through the program:
Please Note: If the contact is in Priority Mode or Bulk Mode, the program path is not recorded.
22.13 View or Edit Program Details

To view or edit the Program details:
1014 of 1162
1. On the menu next to the Program name in the Tree View (the left-hand pane), click Edit
Program.
2. From the Task bar, select Program > Edit Program Details.
3. Edit applicable settings
4. Click Save
5. Program Name:At a minimum, a program name needs to be assigned, other, more advanced
options are also available:
Description:Used for a detailed description of the program (if required)
Place in Folder: Select the Folder in the Tree View in which the program will be
placed once saved. If you leave this set to the default, then the program is saved
to the Unfiled system folder
Contact Owner Field:If applicable, set the Contact Owner Field to identify the
"business" owner of the contacts. For example, this might be an Owner or Owner
ID field.
Process Ownership Rule to use when uploading contacts:Select an existing
...Ownership Rule from the picklist to process contacts when they are uploaded.
This is used to set the default ownership of the member (Contact, Prospect,
Company, etc). The Step awaits action by the step owner or executes an
automated action on behalf of the step owner.
Custom Object Records from this set may be used:Custom Object Records from
the selected set may be used in this program. This allows you to select the
Custom Object that can be allowed to enter the program.
Run Mode:The Run Mode is read-only and shows you whether the program is
Enabled or Disabled. By default for a new program, this is left Disabled, ensuring
you have full editing capabilities. The program can also be placed in Testing
Mode.
Allow Members to enter the program multiple times:Allow members to enter the
program multiple times"If this is checked, a member is allowed to flow
through a program more than once. If unchecked, a given member is only allowed
to enter the program once. If they are removed from the program, they cannot reenter. We don't want any contacts to enter this program more than once, so make
sure this checkbox is not selected. Note that a message about re-enabling this
feature appears when you save the details.
Automatically Disable program on specified date:Select this option, then select a
date and time from the picklists, to make sure that a program stops running at a
specified date and time. This is to prevent activity after a specific cutoff date (for
1015 of 1162
example, after the end of a contest or promotion or after an event has taken
place).
Default member type:Set up the default member type associated with the
program (Contacts, Prospects, Companies, or Custom Object Records).
22.14 Accessing/Viewing Feeders

You can view a feeder and it's status by expanding the Program in the folder tree. The feeder in this
example is disabled (indicated the greyed-out icon), to enable click 'Enable Program Feeder':
1016 of 1162
This is an example of an enabled feeder:
1017 of 1162
23 Sales Tools
OracleEloqua's Sales Tools extend Eloqua's functionality to support the Sales effort, like Eloqua
supports the Marketing effort. Engage helps Sales create consistent, on-brand emails; Eloqua
Discover gives salespeople a prioritized view of their hottest, most engaged prospects, and Eloqua
Profiler provides an at-a-glance summary of each contact's activities over the last months.
Eloqua for Sales (which includes Engage, Discovery, and Profiler)is included with all Eloqua
packages, with different numbers of user licenses.
23.1 Profiler
Note: Before you can access the responsive version of Profiler it must be installed in your
Eloqua instance, once installed the customer administrator can customize the options that
appear to those using the program. Learn more about installing and configuring Profiler.
Profiler is one of Eloqua's Sales Tools. It presents valuable information about contacts in an easily
accessible and data-rich format that can be viewed on desktop computers, tablets, and mobile
devices. With Profiler you are able to view the contact details for a potential client, their activities, their
lead score value, and so on. It is designed specifically for use with iOS and Android devices, giving
marketers the option to access Eloqua's Profiler functionality from their mobile devices when they are
on-the-go.
1018 of 1162
23.1.1 Installing Profiler

Before you can use Profiler you must install the app and configure the settings for your Eloqua
instance.
To install the Profiler app:

1. Follow the Profiler installation URL provided:
https://login.eloqua.com/?ReturnUrl=Apps/Cloud/Admin/Catalog/Add/512cc250-bf75-4b6498c2-9ce3858a18e1/D3-01-E2-AB-6C-23-36-17-7C-B1-44-49-89-11-D0-C3
4. Configure Profiler:
1019 of 1162
i. Select the check boxes next to the options that you want to enable for your instance.
ii. Map the social fields that will appear in Profiler, select the field that corresponds with
each social networking platform.
Note: Contacts may have more than one account in a single social networking
site, the field mappings section allows you to specify from which account fields,
personal or professional, Profiler should draw information.
iii. Click Save.
Learn more about re-configuring Profiler.
23.1.2 Re-configuring Profiler

The options that appear in Profiler depend on the settings that were selected when the app was
installed. If you would like to re-configure these settings, you must do so through the AppCloud
catalog.
1020 of 1162
Warning:If you click Re-Configure you must go through the entire configuration process
To re-configure Profiler:
1. Navigate to Settings > Setup, then click AppCloud Catalog.
2. Click the Catalog tab at the top of the screen, then find Profiler on the list of apps.
3. Click Re-Configure, the Profiler Global Settings page opens.
4. Re-configure the settings as needed.
5. Click Save to save your settings, then click Proceed to complete the setup.
23.1.3 Accessing Profiler

Note: Before you can access the responsive version of Profiler it must be installed in your
Eloqua instance, once installed the customer administrator can customize the options that
appear to those using the program. Learn more about installing and configuring Profiler.
Profiler can be accessed in the following ways :
1021 of 1162
Direct: https://login.eloqua.com/apps/salesTools/profiler
Autologin: https://login.eloqua.com/autoLogin?LoginPrefix=<Login
Prefix>&Url=/apps/salesTools/profiler
SAML: https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/autologin?LoginPrefix=<Login
Prefix>&ReturnUrl=/apps/salesTools/profiler
SFDC IDP: https://secure.eloqua.com/sso/sfdc/v1/svp.aspx?LP=<Login
Prefix>&RU=/apps/salesTools/profiler
You can also directly access a contact's record in Profiler using their email address. Simply add the
following to the URLs above, and insert the contact's email address where needed:
/contacts?emailAddress=[enter contact's email address]
23.1.4 Accessing contact records in Profiler

Profiler allows you to view contact information on your mobile devices using a convenient and device
friendly interface. When you log in to Profiler for the first time you will see a welcome message on the
home page, this message informs you that you can search for contacts using a name or email address,
as described below.
To search for a contact in Profiler:
1022 of 1162
1. Select the
icon in the upper right-hand corner of the Profiler screen.
Note: You can also use the Search Contacts field that appears on the search page when
you open the app.
2. Enter the name or the email address of the contact for whom you would like to view information.
A list opens showing all contacts matching your search criteria.
3. Select the name of the correct contact from the list. Their contact record opens displaying their
details and activities. Learn more about the information provided in Profiler.
After your first visit to Profiler, a recently-viewed contacts list is displayed on the homepage. This
convenient list makes it easier to locate the contacts that you may be dealing with on a regular basis,
or with whom you are attempting to establish a connection. From this recently viewed list you can
select the contact's name and you are taken directly to their contact record.
1023 of 1162
1024 of 1162
23.1.5 Viewing data in Profiler

When you open a contact record in Profiler, that contact's name, title, company, and lead score are
always displayed along with an icon showing their initials.
You are also provided with a number of icons that make it easier for you to reach out to a contact.
These icons allow you to quickly and conveniently call or email the contact, or locate them using
Google Maps. Here you also have access to their social media accounts if that information is available.
You can see all of this information in more detail by selecting the Details tab described below.
Contact data is provided under three tabs in Profiler, each of these tabs provide different useful
information that is easy to understand and navigate. With the contact record open in Profiler, select the
corresponding tab to access the information described below.
Summary
This tab presents the contact's activities in the following ways:
Activities: This is a graphical representation of all the contact's activities within a specific date
range. You can use the calendar icon in the upper right-hand corner of the graph to change the
date range, select 30 days, 6 months, or 1 year as needed. The bars in the graph are broken
down to categorize the types of activity that occurred, for example, how many times the contact
opened or clicked an email. You can filter the results by selecting which activity types appear in
the graph. By default, all activity types are shown, tap or click the activity type label below the
1025 of 1162
graph to hide the corresponding data. You can also view the full activity details for each bar on
the graph, simply tap or click an individual bar and the Activities tab opens displaying the
included activities in detail.
Latest Activities: This section shows the contact's most recent activities. From here you can
view a preview of each email or webpage that the contact interacted with. This can give you a
good idea about the contact's interests.
Activity Breakdown: This section provides a breakdown of the contacts activities, these are
the same categories that are represented in the activities graph. The activities are grouped
based on type. You can select any of the categories and all relevant activities open in the
Activities tab, where you can view more details.

Activities are grouped in the following way:
Emails Sent: The number of emails sent to this contact.
Emails Opened: The number of times emails were opened by the contact.
Emails Clicked: The number of times that links in an email were clicked.
Web Page Views: Visits to tracked web pages.
Forms Submitted: Number of forms that were submitted by the contact.
External Activity: Data captured for the contact's non-Eloqua (external) activities, such
as attending a webinar, tradeshow, etc.
Activities
This tab shows you all of the contact's activities, all events (email sent, email open and so on) are
listed with the time and date on which they occurred. Here you can select any event and a thumbnail
image will open (if the thumbnails option is enabled), or select Preview to see the email, form, and so
on in more detail. If you want to search for specific events in the contact's record, you can do so using
1026 of 1162
the search field located under the Activities tab. To view the activities from a specific date, select
and enter a date in the Go To Date field, then select Apply Filter to filter the results.
Details
This tab provides you with the contact's details, here you can see their phone number, email address,
and address in detail. You can also view their social media handles and their email subscription status
here. Knowing their subscription status is useful for explaining why, for example, a contact has no
email activity.
23.1.6 Adjusting the lead score model used in Profiler

A lead score value is displayed for each contact in Profiler, this value is based on the lead scoring
models configured in your Eloqua instance. You can customize which models appear for Profiler users
by adjusting the permissions settings in Eloqua.
To change the lead scoring model used in Profiler:
1027 of 1162
1. With a contact profile open, select the lead score icon to the right of the contact's name, a dropdown list opens displaying the available lead scoring models in alphabetical order, the model
that is currently being used is indicated by a check mark.
2. Select a new lead scoring model from the list, the new model is applied to the record and the
lead score icon is updated to reflect the change.
Note: When a Profiler user changes the lead scoring model for a contact, the selected model is
saved as the default. All subsequent profiles that this user views will use the previously
selected lead scoring model.
23.1.7 Setting up activity notifications in Profiler

The Profiler Web Alert function allows you to set up alerts that will inform you each time a contact, or
anyone from the same domain visits your website.As a Profiler user, you are able to configure this
setting on a per-contact basis. The web alerts function is very useful as it provides you with the
opportunity to follow-up with contacts after they have expressed interest in your product/materials by
visiting your website.
Note: The Web Alert function must be enabled for Profiler when the app is installed, if it was not
enabled initially, you can re-configure the app in the AppCloud Catalog. Learn more about reconfiguring Profiler.
To set up web alerts in Profiler:
1028 of 1162
1. Open the profile for the contact for whom you wish to set up notifications.
2. Select the +Alert button below the contact's name, the Setup Alerts window opens.
3. Select or clear the check boxes to specify in which cases you want to be notified.
4. Select Save, the window closes and your web alert preferences are saved for this contact. You
will be sent a notification email informing you of the contacts activities according to the settings
you configured above. When you select This Contact's Activity (in the notification email),
Profiler opens to the contact's Activities tab where the referenced activity is displayed.
1029 of 1162
23.1.8 Profiler integration

Profiler can be embedded in several Customer Relationship Management (CRM) systems, including
Oracle Sales Cloud, CRM onDemand, and Salesforce. This integration makes it easier and more
convenient for you to access the sales tool from within your chosen system.
Note: If you already have an older version of Profiler embedded in a CRM, you must replace the
login URL.
Adding a Profiler link to Oracle Sales Cloud

There are two main steps that you must follow to add a Profiler link to your Sales Cloud account:
1. Create a Profiler link
2. Add the link to a layout
Step 1: Creating a Profiler link.
To create a Profiler link:
1030 of 1162
1. Login with your Administrator credentials.

2. Click the Navigator icon, then under Tools click Customization > Application Composer.
3. In the left-side pane, select Marketing from the Application drop-down list.
4. Expand Objects > Standard Objects > Sales Lead Contacts, then select Actions and
Links.
5. Click the Create icon (
) to create a link, then enter the following information:
Display Label: Profiler

Name: Eloqua_Profiler
Type: Select Link
URL Definition: Enter one of the following URLs:
Direct:
def eURL="https://login.eloqua.com/apps/salesTools/profiler?emailAddress=" + nvl
(PrimaryEmailAddress,"")
Auto-login:
def eURL="https://login.eloqua.com/autoLogin?LoginPrefix=<Login
Prefix>&Url=/apps/salesTools/profiler?emailAddress=" + nvl(PrimaryEmailAddress,"")
SAML:
def eURL="https://secure.eloqua.com/sso/sfdc/v1/svp.aspx?LP=<Login
Prefix>&RU=/apps/salesTools/profiler?emailAddress= " + nvl(PrimaryEmailAddress,"")
6. Click the Validate icon (
) to validate the script.
7. Click Save.
1031 of 1162
Step 2: Adding the Profiler link to layouts
To add the Profiler link to a layout:

1. In Application Composer left-side menu, locate the object used in Step 1 of this document, then
click Pages.
2. Under the Details Page Layouts section, select the layout to which you want to add the link,
then click the Edit icon (
).
3. Click the Edit icon next to Contact Overview Form.
4. Under the Available Fields column, select the Profiler link that you created then click the
arrow to move the link to the Selected Fields column.
5. Adjust the link's location on the list using the up and down arrows next to the list, then click
Save and Close.
When you open to a customer you will see the Profiler link as shown below:
Embedding Profiler in CRM onDemand

When embedding Profiler in CRM onDemand, there are two main steps that you must folllow:
1. Create a web applet
2. Add the web applet to a page layout
Note: You will need to create two applets one for leads and one for contacts. The instructions
below are for Contacts but you can follow the same procedure for Leads.
Step 1: Creating a web applet for contact and leads
To create a web applet:
1032 of 1162
1. Login to CRM onDemand with your Administrator credentials.

2. Navigate to User > Configure > Admin.
3. Click Application Customization.

4. Under Record Type Setup, click Contact.
5. Under Pay Layout Management, click Contact Web Applet, then enter the information below:
Name: Enter a name. (Example: Contact Profiler)
Location: Select Detail Page
Type: Select URL
URL: Enter one off the following URLs
Direct:
https://login.eloqua.com/apps/salesTools/profiler?emailAddress%3D%%%Emai
l_Address%%%
Auto-login: https://login.eloqua.com/autoLogin?LoginPrefix=<Login
Prefix>&Url=/apps/salesTools/profiler?emailAddress%3D%%%Email_
Address%%%
SAML: https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/autologin?LoginPrefix=<Login
Prefix>&ReturnUrl=/apps/salesTools/profiler?emailAddress%3D%%%Email_
Address%%%
Height: Enter 800
1033 of 1162
6. Click Save.
Step 2: Adding webs applet to page layouts
To add an applet to a page layout

1. Navigate to User > Configure > Admin.
2. Click Application Customization.
3. Under Page Layout Management, click Contact Page Layout.
4. Choose the page layout that you want to modify
Note: It is not necessary to configure Steps 2 or 3. Click Step 4 (Related Information) to

continue.
5. In the Not Available Information column, locate the web applet that you created, then highlight it
(single left-click) and click the > arrow to move it to the Available Information column.
6. Select the applet in the Available Information column, then click the > arrow to move it to the
Displayed Information column.

7. Click Finish.
Important: Repeat the above steps for Leads
Embedding Profiler in Microsoft Dynamics 2013

Profiler can be embedded in Microsoft Dynamics 2013.
To install Profiler in MS Dynamics 2013:
1034 of 1162
1. Navigate to Settings > Customization > Customizations > Customize the System
2. Select Entities > Contact > Forms
3. Double-click the form you want to add Profiler to (example, 'Main').
4. Click Insert in the top menu.
5. Add a One Column Tab. Name it whatever you like.
6. Add an IFRAME to this tab.
i. Name: IFRAME_Profiler
ii. URL: http://about:blank
iii. Label: Eloqua Profiler
iv. Ensure that Restrict cross-frame scripting is unchecked
7. Select the Formatting tab. Modify the height by setting the number of rows (try 20).
8. Select the Dependencies tab. Add email as a dependent field.
9. Click OK to close the IFRAME window.
10. On the Form model, click Form Properties.
11. Click the Events tab.
12. Under Form Libraries, click Add and then click New.
i. Name: new_EPPOnLoad
ii. Type: Script (JScript)
iii. Click Save and Close
13. Now double-click on the newly created Form Library new_EPPOnLoad.
14. In the Text Editor copy and paste one of the following code snippets (depending on your login
choice).
i. Direct Login
var newUrl = "https://login.eloqua.com/apps/salesTools/profiler?emailAddress=" +
document.getElementById("emailaddress1").title;
Xrm.Page.ui.controls.get("IFRAME_Profiler").setSrc(newUrl);
ii. Auto-Login
1035 of 1162
var newUrl = "https://login.eloqua.com/autoLogin?LoginPrefix=<Login

Prefix>&Url=/apps/salesTools/profiler?emailAddress=+ document.getElementById
("emailaddress1").title;
iii. SAML SSO
var newUrl = "https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/autologin?LoginPrefix=<Login
Prefix>&ReturnUrl=/apps/salesTools/profiler?emailAddress=+
document.getElementById("emailaddress1").title;
Note: Replace LoginPrefix=<LoginPrefix> where prefix is a 4 character

identifying code like 'ELQA'. You can alternatively use <siteID> with your site ID
- a numeric code, like '33' (it may be much longer). If you do not know what your
prefix is, log a Service Request ("SR") via My Oracle Support
(support.oracle.com). You can also choose to ignore this parameter and it will
attempt to log you in using the first Eloqua saved credential it finds.
15. Click Save and click on the newly created library.

16. Click OK
17. Click Save
1036 of 1162
18. Publish the Model.

19. Repeat for the Leads entity, if desired.
Embedding Profiler in Salesforce

The users that can see Eloqua Profiler in your CRM system is dependent on the views/layouts you
have set up in your CRM system and in which of those views/layouts you insert the Eloqua Profiler
component.
Note: If you want to test Eloqua Profiler without making it available to your entire sales or
marketing team, you should assign yourself a contact/lead view to which nobody else has
access and then add Eloqua Profiler to that view.
There are three main steps you must follow when installing Profiler using Visualforce:
1037 of 1162
1. Create a Visualforce page for contacts and leads

2. Adjust security for Visualforce pages
3. Add Visualforce pages to contact and lead layouts
Step 1: Creating a Visualforce page for contacts and leads
You will need to create two (2) Visualforce pages one for leads and one for contacts. Then you will be
editing your existing Contact and Lead views by inserting the appropriate Visualforce pages into their
corresponding views. Below, we will cover the installation for a Lead view, however the steps required
for a Contact view are mostly the same but for a few minor text items noted.
To create a Visualforce page:

1. Log into your Salesforce.com account using your administrator credentials, then navigate to the
setup interface using the options in the upper right-hand corner of the screen.
2. Navigate to Develop > Pages > New.
3. Provide a Label and a Name for the Visualforce page.
Note: These items will only be used when managing layouts and sections and will not
be visible by users simply reviewing a lead record. The name can be whatever you want
but it must contain only alpha-numeric characters and must not have any spaces.
4. In the Visualforce Markup tab, copy and paste the code that corresponds with your choice of
login options:
Direct: <apex:page standardController="Lead"><apex:iframe
src="https://login.eloqua.com/apps/salesTools/profiler?emailAddress={!lead.email}"/>
</apex:page>
Auto-login: <apex:page standardController="Lead"><apex:iframe
src="https://login.eloqua.com/autoLogin?LoginPrefix=<Login
Prefix>&Url=/apps/salesTools/profiler?emailAddress={!lead.email}"/> </apex:page>
1038 of 1162
SAML: <apex:page standardController="Lead"><apex:iframe

src="https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/autologin?LoginPrefix=<Login
Prefix>&ReturnUrl=/apps/salesTools/profiler?emailAddress={!lead.email}"/>
</apex:page>
Salesforce IDP: <apex:page standardController="Lead"><apex:iframe
src="https://secure.eloqua.com/sso/sfdc/v1/svp.aspx?LP=<Login
Prefix>&RU=/apps/salesTools/profiler?emailAddress={!lead.email}"/> </apex:page>
Note: For your contacts Visualforce page, replace {!lead.email} with {!contact.email}
5. If you wish to enable this on the salesforce1 mobile app, select the check box next to Available
for Salesforce mobile apps.
6. Click Save.
Step 2: Adjusting security for Visualforce pages
Salesforce.com has default security that prevents certain users from viewing Visualforce pages unless
the security on those individual pages is customized.
To adjust the security for a Visualforce page:

1. Navigate to Develop > Pages.
2. Click Security for the pages you created.
1039 of 1162
3. Add user types to the Enabled Profiles list, these are the users that should be able to view
Eloqua Profiler.
4. Click Save.
Step 3: Adding Visualforce pages to contact and lead layouts
The steps below describe the procedure for adding the Leads page to a layout, the same steps can be
followed for the Contacts page you created.
To add a Visualforce page to layouts:

1. Navigate to Customize > Leads > Page Layouts on the left-side pane.
2. Select the layout in which you would like to insert Eloqua Profiler (either the one you are testing
or the one that your sales team uses to review Lead records).
3. Drag and drop the section into the area of the layout in which you would like Eloqua Profiler to be
displayed.
1040 of 1162
4. Name the section. Ensure that the two check boxes are selected, and select a 1-Column
Layout.
Note: The section name is what will be displayed above the section within the Lead
view to ensure that the name is something that will be relevant and intuitive to your sales
users.
5. Go back to the top area (the area from which you dragged and dropped the section) and select
Visualforce Pages (under Custom Links). Select the page you have just created for Leads, and
then drag it into the section you just made.
1041 of 1162
6. Hover over the top right corner of the Visualforce page (inside the Section), a wrench icon
appears make sure it is the one for the Visualforce page and not the entire section.
7. Click on the wrench icon and ensure that the settings shown below are what you see:
8. Click Save to save this layout.
Important: Repeat the above steps for Contacts.
Embedding Profiler in OKTA with SSO

This guide explains how to seamlessly configure and access Profiler through OKTA.
Configuration
1. Configure Profiler in OKTA with SSO
2. Accessing Eloqua Sales as OKTAapps
Step 1: Configuring Profiler in OKTA with SSO
Profiler is an app you can access via a URL from any location. It could be launched standalone in a
browser but is most commonly are embedded inside a CRM system. Once configured, you need to
update Profiler to work with OKTA so that access is seamless.
To configure SSO with OKTAinto Profiler:
1042 of 1162
1. Enter the following URLs:

https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/autologin?LoginPrefix=<Login
Prefix>&ReturnUrl=/apps/salesTools/profiler
Note: Replace LoginPrefix=<LoginPrefix> where prefix is a 4 character identifying code like

'ELQA'. You can alternatively use <siteID> with your site ID - a numeric code, like '33' (it may
be much longer). If you do not know what your prefix is, log a Service Request ("SR") via My
Oracle Support (support.oracle.com). You can also choose to ignore this parameter and it will
attempt to log you in using the first Eloqua saved credential it finds. Replace <IDPid> with the
IDP unique ID from your SSO setup.
Note: To find your IDP unique ID in Eloqua, navigate back to the Identity Management Provider
interface. Right-click on the name of the Identity Provider you set up for OKTA and click Open
Link in New Tab.
On the new browser tab, look at the URL and copy the ID that appears after "....Display/".
Once you have this properly formatted URL, as long as a user has an OKTA session active in their
browser, the URL can be accessed from any location on the Internet and it will allow seamless access
to Profiler.
1043 of 1162
Step 2: Accessing Profiler as an OKTA App
If you wish to allow users direct access to Profiler from Apps in OKTA, you can do the following.
1. Repeat the SSO Configuration section above to create a new SAML2 template for Eloqua
Profiler.
2. While creating the SAML2 template, add the following to the Default Relay State field:
ReturnURL=%2FsalesTools%2Fprofiler
23.2 Profiler Stream

Eloqua's Profiler sales tool can be accessed using Profiler Stream, this application allows you to view
a contact's activity in a simple graphical and tabular format, as described below. Eloqua also provides
a responsive version of Profiler that allows you to access the same information on-the-go using tablets
and mobile devices. Learn more about responsive Profiler.
When you open a contact record in Profiler Stream, the contact's name, title, and company name are
displayed in the top-left corner of the window, along with their lead scoring information. A lead score is
based on two values: profile and engagement.The profile value corresponds with a contact's positions
within their company, represented by a letter from A through D (for example, a CEO might score higher
in this area than a VP).The engagement value, represented by a number, is generated based on a
contact's activity.The lead score is represented in two ways: as an alphanumeric value, and as a
graphic. In the graphic, the flames represent the engagement value and the $ boxes represent the
1044 of 1162
profile value. If a contact does not have any activity, or if you do not currently have any lead scoring
models configured in your Eloqua instance, the profile $ boxes and engagement flames are displayed in
gray. Learn more about lead scoring. Contact information such as email address, phone number, and
twitter handle (if available) also appear in this section.
Note: Profiler Stream is the default. To return to Classic Profiler, add ?stream=false to the
Profiler URL, below is an example of Classic Profiler:

As an Administrator, you can choose which information and options will be available to users viewing
contacts in Profiler Stream.
To configure the settings for Profiler Stream:

1. Navigate to Settings > Setup, then click Sales Tools (in the Administration section), the Sales
Tools Administration window opens.

Note: If the Sales Tools icon is not present, you may not have the correct security
permissions to access this functionality; please contact your Eloqua administrator to
enable this feature. Eloqua users access the Sales Tools settings page via the following
URL: https://secure.eloqua.com/apps/SalesToolsAdmin/. Note that the final "/ " is
required in order to access this page.
2. Click Profiler in the left-side column under Sales Tools.
3. Click the On/Off switch next to each of the categories under Profiler Settings to enable or
1045 of 1162
disable the features as needed. The following is a list of the available options:
Web Alerts: With Profiler you have the option to be notified via email whenever a
particular contact, or anyone with the same email domain, visits your website.You can
configure the settings to either allow or block Profiler users from creating these alerts
(notifications).If web alerts is set to off, the option will not appear when viewing a
contact in Profiler Stream. Learn more about using Web Alerts.
Thumbnail Previews: When thumbnail previews is enabled you are able to see a
preview of an email or website in the contacts activity history. If this option is enabled
(set to On), a thumbnail is displayed by default.
If you disable the thumbnail previews option, when you view a contact's activities and
click the name of a particular email or web page, you are shown the following message:
1046 of 1162
Date Format: By default, the list of emails included in a contact's activity record in
Profiler Stream includes the date and time that the email was sent:
If you want to display only the dates, set the Date Format switch to Off.
Search: When the search is disabled you are only able to search for a contact by their
email address, this must be an exact match. When search is enabled, you also have the
option to search by the contact's name.
External Activity: Activities that a contact performs outside of Eloqua are called
External Activities. Here you can select which external events will appear in the
activities feed. This is useful as you may have many external activities configured in
your instance, but may not want to display all of them on contact records. Only the
activities whose switch is in the On position will be displayed.
1047 of 1162
The list of external activities from which you can choose must be configured in the
External Assets and Activities section of Eloqua, prior to enabling or disabling them in
Profiler Stream. Learn more about external assets in Eloqua.
4. Click Save when you are done configuring the settings.
23.2.2 Accessing Profiler Stream

The method in which you access Profiler Stream depends on your role at your organization and which
permissions have been granted to you. The methods of logging in are:
Through your CRM:Eloqua Profiler interacts with a variety of CRM systems. Please refer to
Configuring Profiler for Salesforce and Configuring Profiler for Microsoft Dynamics CRM. for upto-date CRM compatibility information and instructions on how to embed Profiler inside your
CRM.
Through a direct URL: Depending on where your instance of Eloqua is located, you can use
the following URL to access Profiler Stream: https://secure.eloqua.com/apps/profiler
Note: If you access Profiler Stream using a direct URL, a search field will be presented
after you log in. Here you can enter a contact's email address, or first or last name to
search for that contact. If more than one contact is found that matches your criteria, a
list is shown from which you can choose the correct contact. Click on their name, and
1048 of 1162
their record opens.
You can also access a record for a contact directly using their contact ID number:
https://secure.eloqua.com/apps/profiler/index.aspx?contactId=[Enter Contact ID number]
Or using their email address:
https://secure.eloqua.com/apps/profiler/index.aspx?emailAddress=[Enter contact email
address]
If you are on instance 2 or 3 of Eloqua, your URL will be
https://www02.secure.eloqua.com/apps/profiler or
https://secure.p03.eloqua.com/apps/profiler, respectively.
Through an Eloqua Contact record: You can open Profiler Stream through a contact record in
Eloqua. Navigate to Contacts > Contacts, then search for the contact that you want to view.
Double-click on their name, the Edit Contact window opens. Click Launch in Profiler in the
Summary tab.
23.2.3 Filtering contact activity in Profiler Stream

After you have opened a contact's record in Profiler Stream, you can view their activity in a variety of
ways.You are able to filter the results to show specific types of activities, and specific periods of
times.
To filter a contact's activity in Profiler Stream:

1. Select a time frame in the upper right-hand corner of the window, this is the time period for which
you need activity information. Choose from the following options:
3m: The past three months, based on the current date.
6m: The past six months, based on the current date (the default).
1y: The past year, based on the current date.
Custom (Calendar icon): This option opens up a calendar chooser from which you can
select the start and end dates to further narrow down the results.
1049 of 1162
The data presented (in both the buttons on the left-hand side and the graph directly below the
timeframe chooser) are updated based on the time frame that you select.
2. Choose one of the six buttons on the left side of the window to filter the activity data for this
contact. The following is a description of each filter:
Emails Sent: The number of emails sent to this contact in the specified time frame.
Emails Opened: The number of times emails were opened by the contact.
Emails Clicked: The number of times that links in an email were clicked.
Web Page Views: Visits to tracked web pages.
Forms Submitted: Number of forms that were submitted by the contact.
External Activity: Data captured for the contact's non-Eloqua (external) activities, such
as attending a webinar, tradeshow, etc.
When you click on a filter on the left, any matching results are shown on the right. The data is
displayed in two ways:
Each item is displayed in a list showing the date and time (if enabled). You can click on
the item to show a thumbnail image, and a link to a preview of the email, web page, or
form. If you do not see the thumbnail and/or the preview link, your Eloqua administrator
may have disabled thumbnails and previews. Please contact him or her if this is the case
for your Eloqua instance.
By default, all data is shown for all activities in descending chronological order.
Note: A maximum of 1,000 (one thousand) items per activity type can be viewed
in Profiler Stream.For example, if you have 1,000 Email Sends, 1,000 Email
Opens and 1,000 Email Clicks, only the first 1,000 Email Clicks will be displayed.
All results are displayed on a graph showing the contact's activity over time. Hovering
your cursor over any point in the bar graph displays a pop-up detailing the activities
associated with that time point.
1050 of 1162
Use the search field to find data related to a specific activity (for example, web visit),
specific email or form for this contact. In the search field in the upper right-hand corner,
enter the desired search string, if any matching results are discovered, they will be
shown in the area below the graph.
23.2.4 Adjusting the lead score model used in Profiler Stream

A lead score value is displayed for each contact in Profiler Stream, this value is based on the lead
scoring models configured in your Eloqua instance. Learn more about configuring lead scoring models.
To change the lead scoring model used in Profiler Stream:
1051 of 1162
1. In an open contact record, click Settings in the upper right-hand corner.
2. Click Leadscore Model from the drop-down list, the Choose a Lead Score Model window
opens.
3. From the drop-down list, select the lead score model that you want to use then click Ok, the
new lead score model is applied to the contact profile.
Note: If there is more than one lead scoring model, the most recently used model will be
used as the default.
23.2.5 Setting up activity notifications in Profiler Stream

The Profiler Web Alert function allows you to receive notification emails each time a contact, or anyone
from the same domain as a contact visits your website.As a Profiler user, you are able to configure
this setting on a per-contact basis. The web alerts function is very useful as it provides you with the
opportunity to follow-up with contacts after they have expressed interest in your product/materials by
visiting your website.
1052 of 1162
Note: The Web Alert function must be enabled for Profiler Stream in the Settings section of
Eloqua, the option will not be available if it is not enabled. Learn more about configuring Profiler
Stream settings.
To set up web alerts in Profiler Stream:

1. In an open contact record, click Settings in the upper right-hand corner.
2. Click Web Alert Setup from the drop-down list, the Web Alert Setup window opens.
3. Select or clear the check boxes to specify in which cases you want to be notified.
4. Click Save, the window closes and your web alert preferences are saved for this contact. You
will now be sent notification emails informing you of the contacts activities according to the
1053 of 1162
settings you configured above.
23.2.6 Configuring Twitter fields in Profiler Stream

Profiler Stream gives users the ability to enter and save a Twitter handle of a prospect or contact.
Profiler will then display a list of the prospects (contact's) most recent tweets in a feed.
Configuration consists of two high-level steps:
Creating a contact field
Mapping the Twitter ID field
Note: In order to have the activity data in Profiler Stream display for your reps, they will be
required to enter their Eloqua User login credentials which means that you will need to load
them into the Eloqua system as user records.
Creating a contact field
To create a contact field:
1054 of 1162
1. Navigate to Setup > Fields and Views (under the Database section).
2. Click on the add (+ ) button to begin creating the field.
3. Choose Add Contact Field from the list of available options.

4. Enter an appropriate display name for the field, such as TwitterID.
1055 of 1162
5. Leave the remaining options as they are and click Save.
Mapping the Twitter ID field
To map a Twitter IDfield:
1056 of 1162
1. Navigate to Setup > Social Media in the Administration section.
2. Select the Twitter contact field you created above in Creating a contact field.
3. Click Save.
23.2.7 Configuring Profiler Stream for Salesforce

Eloqua Profiler can be installed in Salesforce.com as a Visualforce page/component. Who sees
Eloqua Profiler in your CRM system is dependent on the views/layouts you have set up in your CRM
system and in which of those views/layouts you insert the Eloqua Profiler component. If you want to
test out Eloqua Profiler without making it available to your entire sales or marketing team, you should
assign yourself a contact/lead view to which nobody else has access and then add Eloqua Profiler to
that view.
Configuring Profiler for Salesforce.com consists of two high-level steps:
1. Step 1: Creating Visualforce pages
2. Step 2: Inserting Visualforce pages into their corresponding views
Step 1: Creating Visualforce pages

Two separate Visualforce pages need to be created: one for leads and one for contacts.
To create Visualforce pages:
1057 of 1162
1. Navigate to Setup > Develop > Pages > New.
2. Provide a Label and a Name for the Visualforce page. These items will only be used when
managing layouts and sections and will not be visible by users simply reviewing a Lead record.
The Name must contain only alpha-numeric characters and must not have any spaces.
3. In the Visualforce Markup tab, copy and paste the following code depending on your choice of
login options:
i. Direct:
LEAD
<apex:page standardController="Lead"><apex:iframe
src="https://<podURL>apps%2Fprofiler%3FemailAddress
%3D{!lead.email}"/> </apex:page>
CONTACT
<apex:page standardController="Contact">
<apex:iframe
src="https://<podURL>apps%2Fprofiler%3FemailAddress
%3D{!contact.email}"/> </apex:page>
Note: <podURL> for your company can be determined by the browser URL when
you log into Eloqua: www02.secure.eloqua.com, secure.p03.eloqua.com,
secure.eloqua.com.
ii. Auto-login:
LEAD
src="https://login.eloqua.com/autoLogin?LoginPrefix
1058 of 1162
=<LoginPrefix>&Url=/apps/profiler/index.aspx?emailA
ddress={!lead.email}"/> </apex:page>
CONTACT
<apex:iframe
src="https://login.eloqua.com/autoLogin?LoginPrefix
=<LoginPrefix>&Url=/apps/profiler/index.aspx?emailA
ddress={!contact.email}"/> </apex:page>

iii. SAML:
LEAD
src="https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/autologin?
LoginPrefix=<LoginPrefix>&ReturnUrl=apps%2Fprofiler
%3FemailAddress%3D{!lead.email}"/> </apex:page>
CONTACT
<apex:iframe
src="https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/autologin?
LoginPrefix=<LoginPrefix>&ReturnUrl=apps%2Fprofiler
%3FemailAddress%3D{!contact.email}"/> </apex:page>

1059 of 1162
iv. Salesforce IDP:

LEAD
src="https://secure.eloqua.com/sso/sfdc/v1/svp.aspx
?LP=<LoginPrefix>&RU=apps%2Fprofiler%3FemailAddress
%3D{!lead.email}"/> </apex:page>
CONTACT
<apex:iframe
src="https://secure.eloqua.com/sso/sfdc/v1/svp.aspx
?LP=<LoginPrefix>&RU=apps%2Fprofiler%3FemailAddress
%3D{!contact.email}"/> </apex:page>

4. Save this page.
Step 2: Inserting Visualforce pages into their corresponding views

Salesforce.com has default security that prevents certain users from viewing Visualforce pages unless
the security on those individual pages is customized.
To insert a Visualforce page into its corresponding view:

1. Navigate to your list of Visualforce pages, and for both the Contact and Lead Visualforce pages,
add to the Enabled Profiles list the user types that are to be able to view Eloqua Profiler.
1060 of 1162
2. Navigate to Customize > Leads > Page Layouts on the left-hand pane.
3. Select the layout in which you would like to insert Eloqua Profiler (either the one you are testing
or the one that your sales team uses to review Lead records).
4. Drag and drop a section into the area of the layout in which you would like Eloqua Profiler to be
displayed.
1061 of 1162
5. Name your section. The Section Name is what will be displayed above the section within the
Lead view to ensure that the name is something that will be relevant and intuitive to your sales
users. Ensure that the two checkboxes are checked and select a 1-Column Layout.
6. Go back to the top area from where you dragged and dropped the section and now select
Visualforce Pages (under Custom Links). Select the page you have just created for Leads and
1062 of 1162
then drag it into the section you have just made.

7. Hover over the top right corner of the Visualforce page (inside the Section) and note that a
wrench icon appears make sure it is the one for the Visualforce page and not the entire section.
8. Click on this wrench icon and ensure that the settings shown below are what you see:
9. Save this layout.

Youre done! To implement Eloqua Profiler for Contacts, repeat the steps above using the block of
code for Contacts and the Contact Layout used by your sales team, and change display titles as
necessary.
23.2.8 Configuring Profiler Stream for Microsoft Dynamics CRM

Eloqua Profiler can be embedded in Microsoft Dynamics CRM (MS-CRM).
Configuration differs depending on the MS CRM version:
MS CRM 2011
MS CRM 3 and 4
Installing Profiler in MS CRM 2011

The following will describe the process for installing Eloqua Profiler as an iFrame to a Contact view.
The same can be repeated for a Lead view.
To install Profiler in MS CRM 2011:
1063 of 1162
1. Navigate to Settings > Customization > Customizations > Customize the System
2. Select Entities > Contact > Forms
3. Double-click the form you want to add Profiler to (example, 'Main').
4. Click Insert in the top menu.
5. Add a One Column Tab. Name it whatever you like.
6. Add an IFRAME to this tab ms crm 2011 1.png
i. Name: IFRAME_Prospect_Profiler
ii. URL: http://about:blank
iii. Label: Eloqua Profiler
iv. Ensure that Restrict cross-frame scripting is unchecked
7. Select the Formatting tab. Modify the height by setting the number of rows (try 20).
8. Select the Dependencies tab. Add email as a dependent field.
9. Click OK to close the IFRAME window.
10. On the Form model, click Form Properties.
11. Click the Events tab.
12. Under Form Libraries, click Add and then click New.
i. Name: new_EPPOnLoad
ii. Type: Script (JScript)
iii. Click Save and Close
13. Now double-click on the newly created Form Library new_EPPOnLoad
14. In the Text Editor copy and paste one of the following code snippets (depending on your login
choice).
i. Direct Login
window.EPPOnLoad = function() {
document.getElementById("IFRAME_Prospect_Profiler").src
=
'https://secure.eloqua.com/apps/profiler/index.aspx?ema
ilAddress=' + document.getElementById
("emailaddress1").value;
}
1064 of 1162
secure.eloqua.com.
ii. Auto-Login
=
'https://login.eloqua.com/autoLogin?LoginPrefix=<LoginP
refix>&Url=/apps/profiler/index.aspx?emailAddress=' +
document.getElementById("emailaddress1").value;
}
iii. SAML SSO
=
'https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/autologin?LoginPre
fix=<LoginPrefix>&Idp=<IDPid>&ReturnUrl=apps%2Fprofiler
%3FemailAddress%3D' + document.getElementById
("emailaddress1").value;
}
1065 of 1162
attempt to log you in using the first Eloqua saved credential it finds. Replace
<IDPid> with the IDP unique ID from your SSO setup.
15. Click OK. Ensure the Event is enabled checkbox is checked if present.
16. Click Save and click on the newly created library.
17. Under Event Handlers, set the Control to Form and Event to OnLoad and then click Add.
i. Library: new_EPPOnLoad
ii. Function: window.EppOnLoad
iii. Enabled: checked
18. Click OK
19. Click Save
1066 of 1162
20. Publish the Model.

21. Repeat for the Leads Entity, if desired.
Installing Profiler in MS CRM 3 and 4

The following will describe the process for installing the Profiler in a Contact view. The same can be
repeated for a Lead view.
To install Profiler in MS CRM 3 and 4:

1. In the Customize Entities area, double-click Contact then Forms and Views then Form (for the
view you are using for your Contacts).
2. In the Common Tasks side bar (on the right), select Add a Tab, provide a name for the tab (e.g.,
Eloqua Profiler), click OK and you will then see the new tab appear.
3. Click on the tab and then, again from the Common Tasks side bar, select Add a Section.
Provide a name for the section (e.g., Eloqua Profiler), click OK
1067 of 1162
4. Then, again from the Common Tasks side bar, select Add an IFRAME.
i. Name: IFRAME_Prospect_Profiler
ii. URL: about:blank
iii. Uncheck the Restrict cross-frame scripting checkbox
iv. For MS CRM 3.0, You need to adjust another option in the Formatting tab and ensure
Automatically Expand to use Available Space is checked:
Note: You do not have to use Prospect_Profiler as the latter part of the name, but
you do need to format the name with the underscores and you need to make
absolutely sure that this name matches up case sensitive to the name you site
in the javascript code you enter into the OnLoad interface later.
1068 of 1162
5. Go to the Dependencies tab and add the E-mail field to the right hand column:
6. Click OK.
7. Select the section you have added (within the new tab you have added).
8. Go back to the Common Tasks side bar and select Form Properties.
9. In the first interface you are presented, select OnLoad then click Edit. Make sure Event is
Enabled is checked.
10. Enter the following Javascript into the OnLoad text box:
i. Direct
var emailAddress =
crmForm.all.emailaddress1.DataValue;crmForm.all.IFRAME_
Prospect_
Profiler.src='https://<podURL>/apps/profiler/index.aspx
?emailAddress='+emailAddress;
secure.eloqua.com.
ii. Auto-login
1069 of 1162
var emailAddress =
Prospect_
Profiler.src='https://login.eloqua.com/autoLogin?LoginP
refix=<LoginPrefix>&Url=/apps/profiler/index.aspx?email
Address='+emailAddress;
iii. SAML
var emailAddress =
Prospect_
Profiler.src='https://www/login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/a
utologin?LoginPrefix=<LoginPrefix>&Idp=<IDPid>&ReturnUr
l=apps%2Fprofiler%3FemailAddress%3D'+emailAddress;
attempt to log you in using the first Eloqua saved credential it finds. Replace
<IDPid> with the IDP unique ID from your SSO setup.
11. Go to the Dependencies tab again and ensure that E-mail is put to the right hand column.
12. Click Saveand Close.
13. Go back to the Customize Entities area.
14. Click Publish.
15. Repeat for the Leads Entity, if desired.
1070 of 1162
23.3 Engage
Engage alleviates the need to constantly re-create emails that are frequently used throughout the sales
process.Ensuring sales professionals are using marketing-approved messaging, branding and
content, it also allows for personalization and tracking of each email template sent. Engage makes it
easy to send relevant, trackable emails on the go.
What's it in for the marketing side of the house?

Create your "sales-emails" in the same place you create your regular marketing campaign
emails.
Control the marketing content your sales team sends out to their prospects.
When sales adds a new contact on the fly, it is synchronized with Eloqua and your CRM.
Emails sent through Engage are recorded in Eloqua and within the CRM on the contact record.
Engage is part of Eloqua Sales Tools, a powerful suite of easy to use sales intelligence and
productivity tools that accelerate the sales cycle by helping sales professionals easily identify, track
and engage buyers. Engage can be added to your new or existing Eloqua subscription. Please speak
with your sales rep or account manager for details.
23.3.1 Accessing Engage

Prerequisites:
Your user account must have an Eloqua license and be able to log in to Engage. Engage
licenses are separate from the main application licenses. For pricing information and to
purchase Engage licenses, please contact your Account Manager.
Supported browser. For a complete list of supported browsers, refer to the Certified and
Supported Browsers topic.
To access Engage:
1. Navigate to the following URL:
https://login.eloqua.com/apps/engage
2. The Eloqua Engage splash screen is displayed briefly.
1071 of 1162
23.3.2 Adding attachments to Engage emails

To add an atttachment to an Engage Email:
1. On the toolbar, click the Attachments icon, highlighted here in yellow:
2. On the next dialog box, scroll through the list of Attachments until you locate the one you wish,
or begin by typing its name in the search field. The list of available attachments comes from the
files stored in the File Storage area of the Component Library in the core Eloqua application.
3. To attach a file that already exists in your Component Library, locate the file in the list and
double-click on its name.
(Note: if a filename is indicated in blue, this means the file was uploaded by you into the File
Storage area.) You can perform the above steps for as many files that you wish to attach,
however bear in mind that the more files and the larger their size, the longer the processing may
take during the Email send.
1072 of 1162
4. A new button appears at the top of your Email for each attachment that you have added, in blue:
5. To delete the file from your Email, click the
on the right side of the filename button.
23.3.3 Adding field merges to Engage emails

To add a Field Merge to an Engage email:
1. In your Email, click where you want to position the Field Merge.
2. Click the Field Merge button in the toolbar.
3. To locate the desired Field Merge, either scroll through the list until you find it or search for it by
typing its name in the search field. The list of Field Merges available in Engage is populated
from the Component Library in the main Eloqua application, therefore you must first create the
Field Merge there in order to use it in Engage.
1073 of 1162
4. Once you have located the desired Field Merge, double-click on it to add it to your Email in the
location selected in Step 1 above. Field Merges are highlighted by a yellow background to
visually stand out from the rest of the Email:
5. Repeat these steps for any additional Field Merges you wish to add.
6. Click the x in the upper-left corner of the Field Merge browser to return to the Email.
7. Now that you have Field Merges in the body of your Email, all contacts must have entries in
their contact record for both of these fields before the Emails can be sent. After you click Send
to send the Email, a dialog box will open that will require you to enter a value for each field for
each contact where one is missing, for example:
Note: The following elements are located in the Component Library in the core Eloqua Email editor
cannot be created using Engage:
Email Headers
Email Footers
Shared Content
Dynamic Content
Signature Layouts (can be edited in Engage but not created)
Signature Rules
However, if the template you used when creating the email in Engage has Field Merges in the Headers
or Footers, they are processed when the Engage email is sent. You can edit the Headers and Footers
in Engage, provided they were in the original Email template.
1074 of 1162
23.3.4 Adding hyperlinks to engage emails

Hyperlinks can be added to either text or an image in your Email. Text will appear highlighted in blue
and underlined. Hyperlinks that are associated with an image will redirect the recipient to the web site
you have chosen once the image is clicked.
To add a Hyperlink to an Engage email:

1. To add a Hyperlink to a text element, select the text and click the Hyperlink button in the
toolbar.
2. In the dialog box that opens, enter the web address for the hyperlink in the field at the bottom.
3. When you have entered the correct hyperlink, click Done to return to the Email canvas.
4. If you wish to track when a recipient of your Email clicks on a link to take them to this page,
select the checkbox next to Redirect (for untracked pages).
5. To add a hyperlink to an Image, right-click on the Image and then click the Hyperlink button in
the toolbar.
6. In the dialog box that opens, enter the web address for the hyperlink in the field at the bottom.
7. Click Done.
23.3.5 Adding images to Engage emails

You can enhance your Engage Email by adding Images, Hyperlinks, Attachments, Field Merges and
Signatures directly from within the Engage Email Editor.
To add an Image to an Engage email:
1075 of 1162
1. Place your cursor is at the position in your email where you want the image to be placed. It can
be moved later if desired.
2. Click the Image icon the toolbar to open the Image Browser (highlighted in red):
3. The Image Browser opens. Images that have been uploaded to the Component Library in the
main application can be selected by either scrolling through the thumbnails using the vertical
slider, or by typing its name in the empty field at the top of the Image Browser. Matching results
will be displayed as you type more characters.
4. Note that this is a type-ahead search, meaning as you type more characters the results will be
narrowed down accordingly.
5. Once you have located your image, with the cursor where you wish the Image to be inserted,
double-click on the thumbnail to insert it into your Email.
6. If the Image is not already in the Component Library, it will not be available in the Image
Browser. You may have another image stored on your local computer (or network location) that
you wish to use in your Engage Email. In such a case, you must first uploadi the Image to the
Component Library by clicking the Upload button in the lower-right corner of the Image
Browser. The Upload wizard opens. Click the Cloud image to open an Explorer window from
1076 of 1162
which you can browse to the desired file. Select the file and click Open.
7. Click Save to upload the file to the Eloqua Component Library. After clicking Save, the
thumbnail of your uploaded image is displayed in the Image Chooser. Follow step 5 above to
add it to your Email.
8. You can resize the image directly within the Email by single left-clicking on it to add handles to
its four corners and then drag the handle(s) to the exact size you wish. Should you wish to
revert back to the original size, simply click the back button (Undo) in the toolbar at the top, and,
conversely, to Redo the resizing, click on the Redo button.
23.3.6 Adding recipients (contacts) and a subject to Engage emails

Once you have created your Email, the next steps are to add contacts (recipients) and a subject before
being able to send the Email. Adding contacts can be accomplished in a variety of ways.
Adding individual contacts
To add individual contacts to your Email:

1. In the To: field at the top of the Engage window, type in the email address of your first recipient
(contact). As you type more letters of the recipient's (contact's) name or email address, Engage
begins to check the contact database and will display a list of possible matches as a drop-down
list. Note that if there are many potential matches, Engage only displays the first few. If the
one you are looking for is in that short list, click on it to add it to the list of Email recipients.
1077 of 1162
Once you have entered the first contact name or address, press Enter or your space bar in order
to add the contact to the list of recipients. You can also click in the Subject line in order to add
the contact (navigate outside of the To: field). One of the following will occur:
The contact is found in the Eloqua database, in which case it appears in blue:
The contact is not found in the Eloqua database, in which case it is initially displayed in
yellow:
while it is updated (being added to the database) and then changes to blue once it has
been added to Eloqua; or
The contact is found in the Eloqua database but has either chosen to unsubscribe
globally to all Emails (as shown from the Contact Record Preferences tab in the core
Eloqua application) or has been marked as a bounceback, in which case the contact is
indicated in red.
In the case of a global unsubscription, after typing the Email address, Engage displays
the following message:
(Note: If you open the unsubscribed contact's record in the core Eloqua application and
change the subscription status while composing the Email in Engage, you will have to
exit and re-login to Engage for the change to be reflected.)
If you attempt to add a contact in the To: field that has already been added, you will see
the following error in the upper-right corner of the window:
1078 of 1162
2. If you prefer to add a contact that you know does not already exist in the contact database, you
can fill out a short form right in the Engage window. To add a contact manually:
Click the + sign in the upper-right corner of the To: field.
A pop-up dialog box opens, into which you can enter the contact's information:
Email Address: Defines the email address of the contact. This field is required.
First Name: Defines the first name of the contact.
Last Name: Defines the last name of the contact.
Company: Provides the company name of the contact.
Title: Defines the contact's job title.
Country: Defines the country where the contact lives. For example, in order to
comply with spam regulations, you can use the master exclude list to prevent
sales representatives from sending emails to contacts that live in a particular
country.
Note: The contact information can be added later during a form submission or by
updating the contact's record in Eloqua.
3. Continue adding contacts as per the above steps, either by typing their email address in the To:
field or adding them manually one by one. Although there is currently no limit as to the number
of contacts that can be included in an Engage email, it is best practice to send only to a small
group (about 250). Emailing larger groups of contacts is best handled in the core Eloqua
application.
4. If you prefer to add several contacts at once from an external list, select the Email addresses
from the external file (e.g. .csv, .xls, .txt) and paste them into the To: field. Engage performs
the same check as if you had entered the names manually (verifies whether the contact already
exists in the database or if the person has unsubscribed or been flagged as a bounceback). For
example, if you have created the following list in Notepad:
1079 of 1162
and then copied to the Clipboard, then in Engage, place your cursor in the To: field and using
Ctrl+V, paste them into the recipient field. Engage then performs all checks against the
database:
5. Once you have added all contacts, you must add a new subject to the Email. If you are using
the New Email (Blank) template, begin typing in the Subject Line to add your customized
subject (you cannot highlight and replace the text). Until you change the subject, the Send
button is disabled. You will not be able to send an Email until you have added at least one valid
contact and a new subject line.
6. After all the above steps have been completed (at least one valid Email address and a new
Subject are entered), send the Email by clicking the Send button in the upper-right corner of the
window. The Email is sent to all valid contacts (the ones indicated with a blue background).
You can still send the Email if there are invalid (red) recipients, however those addresses will be
ignored when the Email is processed by Eloqua, and data for those contacts will not be included
in the Engage reports. If the Email is sent successfully, you will see the following alert in the
upper-right corner of the window:
7. Any invalid addresses (shown in red) will remain in the To: field when sending the Email
(however you must have at least one valid recipient before the Send button is available). In this
case, the following warning is presented when you press Send:
8. There is a possibility that even though contacts may be shown in blue (valid) in the To: field that
during the actual sending of the Email, Eloqua will determine that the address is part of a Master
Exclude, meaning based on certain criteria (for example, user's domain), Emails cannot be sent
1080 of 1162
to that person or those persons. In that event, this is the error you will see:
9. If you decide to discontinue creating and sending this Email, click Cancel in the upper-right to
return to the main Engage screen, where you can view Reports or create another Email.
10. Once your Email is sent, you can view the status for each recipient by clicking on the Reports
tab in the upper-left corner. Learn more about viewing reports in Engage.
Adding multiple contacts from a CSVfile
To add Contacts using names in a CSV file:

1. The names you wish to add to your recipients (To:) list in your Engage Email should follow the
following format in your CSV file:
FirstName LastName EmailAddress
for example:
2. You can add your CSV file, highlight (select) the addresses you wish to add to your contacts list
(recipients) and copy the names to your Clipboard by using Ctrl+C (Windows) or Command+C
(Mac).
1081 of 1162
3. Click the Action Menu (gear icon) in the top-right corner of the Engage window and select
Toggle Bulk.
4. In the lower-right corner of the Email window, the All Contacts area is shown. Click the
button.
5. Click your mouse button in the empty box and press Ctrl+V (Command-V on Mac) to add the
names to your Email.
6. The names are added to your list of contacts.
7. If you see any trailing spaces at the end of the list, for example if the cursor is shown on the line
below the last name, you must delete that space in order to avoid any failures when sending the
Email.
8. Click Add in the bottom right.
9. After clicking Add, Engage looks for any missing values for each contact according to the Fields
required for that Email (for example, for use in Field Merges).
1082 of 1162
Example: In the screenshot below, Engage found that the two contacts that are being
added do not already exist in the Eloqua Contact Database. Each one that is new is
indicated on the right-hand side with a yellow-colored icon showing how many Fields for
that person do not have information. In the example above, Alex (Email address
jimsmith@russia.ru) already has a First Name and Email Address value but is missing a
value for one of the Contact Fields. For the second contact, with the Email
alex@harpers.com, note that the number is shown as 2 because there are two fields in
his record that require values.
10. If when adding a Contact via this method you see the following:
you are being warned that the Contact has unsubscribed from Emails in this Email Group, or
has globally unsubscribed from all Emails coming from your organization. The exact reason can
be verified by opening the Contact Record in the core Eloqua application. In addition to showing
the red exclamation point icon in the All Contacts box, Engage adds a red badge to the
Contacts list in the To: field to alert you to this potential problem:
In the scenario above, only three of four contacts that were added to the Email are valid; one of
the four will not receive the Email until his or her Contact Preferences are changed or updated in
the core application.
1083 of 1162
Reusing Contacts from a Previous Email

Once you successfully send an email to a group of contacts from Engage, you can reuse that contact
group when creating a new Email without having to retype their names. This can be useful if you email
the same group of contacts on a regular basis, for example to send them updates about a particular
project or product.
To reuse contacts from a previously sent Email:

1. In Engage, click Reports on the left-hand pane.
2. On the right-hand side, select the Email that contains the contacts you wish to reuse. Engage
shows you the number of contacts used and their names.
3. In the top-right corner of the Engage window, click the New Email button.
4. A blank Email template opens, with the names from the Email you chose in step 3 pre-populated
in the To: field. It is important to note that reusing the contacts from a previous Email always
opens a blank template, and does not include the content from the previous Email. If you wish
to send an Email to a group of contacts previously used, as well as using the content from that
Email you must first create an Email as a template and then populate the contacts as required.
5. To reuse the same group of contacts, type a subject for your Email and create the Body content,
just as if you were creating a new Email from scratch.
6. You can modify the list of contacts you are reusing, if necessary, by deleting one or more of the
existing ones, or adding others just as you would if creating a new Email.
1084 of 1162
7. Once your contacts, Subject and Body of the Email are complete, click Send at the top right of
the Engage window to send the Email.
23.3.7 Adding signatures to Engage emails

Using a Signature in your Email can determine how likely a recipient is to read through the entire
message and continue on the engagement process. While you cannot create Signatures from within
Engage, they are created in the Eloqua core platform and can be added to your Email in Engage before
sending.
To add a Signature to an Engage Email:

1. Click the Signatures button in the toolbar.
2. In the Signatures Chooser that opens, either scroll to the one you wish to use, or begin typing
the name in the blank field.
3. With your cursor placed at the location in the Email where you wish the Signature to appear,
double-click on the name of the Signature to add it to the Email.
4. The Signatures are created in the Component Library of the core Eloqua application and can be
used in Engage. The Signatures can include User Field Merges that pull values from the
information stored in the profile of the User who is sending the Engage Email. In the Signature
Layout editor in Eloqua, User Field Merges are shown as text with grey backgrounds, as
follows:
In the example shown above, the Signature includes the First Name, Last Name, Company,
1085 of 1162
Business Phone, Address 1, and Address 2 User Fields, as well as a graphic. The User Profile
Field Merges are not processed in Engage; the Signature Rule is processed in the core
application and sent to Engage. Note that if you decide to save your Engage Email that
contains a Signature as a template, the Signature becomes text and will no longer be
dynamically updated during future sends. When the Email is sent, the Field Merges are
processed and will appear in the recipient's version with the correct values.
5. Once the Signature is added to the Email in Engage, any Field Merges are displayed not as text
with a grey background, rather enclosed within ### characters in front and in back, as shown
below:
The FirstName User Field Merge is displayed in Engage as ###FirstName###. The Last Name Field
Merge is shown as ###LastName###, etc. During the Email send process, Engage parses those User
Profile Fields and populates with information from your profile. Subsequently, when the recipient
opens the Email, the correct values from your User profile will automatically be shown.
23.3.8 Creating Engage emails using a blank template

Emails in Engage are created using a template, which can be a predefined one (from the core Eloqua
application or from within Engage), or you can choose a blank template to start with a clean canvas.
1086 of 1162
To create an Email using a blank template:

1. In the upper-left corner of the Engage window, click New Email under the Navigation heading.
The Email Editor opens to a blank canvas.
2. Add your email content.

To add text, begin by typing in the empty canvas below the formatting toolbar.
To apply formatting to the text, highlight the desired character(s), then click on the bold,
italic, underline, superscript and subscript buttons, just as you would in any Rich Text
editor.
You can also align your text using the four buttons in the second group, from left to right:
Left, Center, Right and Full. Finally, if you have a list (bulleted or ordered), use the
1087 of 1162
buttons to increase and decrease the indentation, respectively. Remember you

must always highlight the text you wish to format prior to applying one of the buttons.
If you wish to change the font color or the color of the text background, select the text or
block of text you wish to format, then click on the 'A' or paintbrush buttons, respectively.
When you click on one of these buttons, the color picker opens:
There are a few ways in which you can change the text color or background. You can
click in the box on the left and drag the circle throughout the palette until you have
located the correct color and release your mouse button. You can also drag the vertical
slider up and down, enter the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) or HSB (Hue, Saturation and
Brightness) values (if known). You can also enter the hex code in the # field at the
bottom right of the color picker without having to use any of the other methods. No
matter which method you choose, the color that will be applied is always shown in the
two boxes at the top right of the color dialog box and they correspond to the values
selected in the two columns.
Clicking on the small colored circle in the lower-right corner of the color picker dialog box
will change the HSB value to the same as your RGB value if they are different and you
wish for them to match.
To change either the font or font size, highlight the text you wish to change and click on
the font drop-down or font size drop-down to apply the settings.
1088 of 1162
3. Preview your email.
Note: You can cancel your email at any time by selecting Cancel from the gear menu,
or clicking the back button in your browser.
4. When you are ready to send your email, click Send.
23.3.9 Creating Engage emails using existing templates

In many cases, you may prefer to use a template that already contains content and formatting for your
Engage Emails..
To create an Email based on an Eloqua template:

1. In Engage, to see all Templates, click on the All Templates button in the top-left corner.
1089 of 1162
On the right-hand pane, all Email Templates will be displayed. The default view is Grid
(thumbnails), however you can easily switch to a List View by clicking List in the upper-right
corner of the window (shown below on the left and right, respectively). Note that if you see the
message "Thumbnail not Available" in the template Grid View, it will be updated once you
refresh the page (it means that the template is new and hasn't yet been generated on the
preview page).
2. If you know the Template Group (folder) in which your Template is stored, click on the name of
the folder to display thumbnails (or a list) of templates contained with that folder.
You can either type in the name of the Template in the Search field at the top of the window, or
use the vertical scroll bar on the right-hand side to move through the list. If someone has
created a template and marked it as Private, only that user will be able to use the template, and
1090 of 1162
it will not be shown in the grid. Note that to limit your search to one Template Group (folder),
highlight that group prior to performing your search. To search all folders, click All Templates
before performing your search.
3. Once you have located your desired Template, single left-click on its thumbnail image (or name,
if in List view), and the Engage Email Editor opens. Some differences between using a blank
(New) template vs. a pre-existing Template (X indicates available):
Feature (Element)
Blank Template Pre-existing Template
Text
Image
Field Merge
Hyperlink
Signature
Dynamic Content
Email Header (create)
Email Footer (create)
Group/Ungroup and Lock/Unlock elements
Shared Content
4. Edit your email content:

If there were Signature Rules in the original template, and you send an Email from
Engage based on that template, the Signature is initially updated the first time you send
the Email, and that update becomes plain (static) text in the Email template in all future
sends. For example, if you have a FirstName LastName rule in your pre-existing
template, normally whenever you send an email from Eloqua those fields are
dynamically updated. In Engage, those fields will be updated with your FirstName and
LastName (based on the field merge) as text (no more dynamic processing during the
send). If at a later time you wish to use another name in the signature, you will have to
overwrite the one that was originally processed as per the above steps.
Headers and Footers can be edited in the Engage Email if the original Email Template
included them from their Eloqua Email, including any Field Merges that may be present.
However you cannot create new Headers and Footers in an Engage Email.
Choosing a pre-existing template does not mean that you cannot modify its content.
Although many elements are already in place in the Email, you can reorder, edit, delete
and add content to the template. In order to save the changes for future use, follow the
steps above to Save as a Template (you cannot overwrite a template). One of the
many benefits of using pre-configured templates is that they may have headers and
footers, as well as Dynamic Content that you cannot create in Engage.
1091 of 1162
The Toggle Borders button, the one located furthermost on the right, allows you to
show the sections in your Email, much like gridlines in a word processing document or
diagram, however this functionality is only available for Templates that were created in
the core Eloqua application, and not in Engage, as shown in the following sample Email.
In the example shown above, the elements of the Email from the template that was
created in the core Eloqua application are bordered by dashed or dotted lines to give you
a visual representation of the structure of your Email.
If, however, the same template was created in the core Email Editor in Eloqua, and one
(or more) of the elements is (are) locked, meaning their position and content cannot be
modified, when you base an Engage Email on that template, any locked elements will be
1092 of 1162
shaded with a pink background. For example, the same Email as shown above, if a
section is locked in the core Editor, looks like this:
and when you use the same Template in Engage, the locked section will look like this:
1093 of 1162
You will not be able to modify or delete any content that is shaded in pink in Engage. To
modify that content, you must first modify the Template in the Eloqua core Email Editor,
and create a new Email in Engage (it will not dynamically update). Learn more about
viewing reports in Engage.
5. Preview your email.
Note: You can cancel your email at any time by selecting Cancel from the gear menu,
or clicking the back button in your browser.
6. When you are ready to send your email, click Send.
1094 of 1162
23.3.10 Previewing Engage emails

You are able to preview Engage emails. The preview feature allows you to validate the email content
prior to sending. Therefore, you no longer need to send test emails (to yourself or colleagues), which
saves time and helps maintain accurate reports.
The preview displays the email that will be sent to the first recipient, and populates any necessary field
merges (body, signature, etc), dynamic content, cloud content, and so on. You are able to preview your
email and return to editing, as necessary.
Note: You can cancel your email at any time by selecting Cancel from the gear menu, or
clicking the back button in your browser.
To preview an Engage email:

1. Create a new Engage email or open an existing template.
2. Click Preview.
Note: The Preview button will be enabled once the To and Subject fields are populated.
3. Click Back in the preview screen to return to the Engage email and continue editing or send the
1095 of 1162
email.
23.3.11 Deleting saved templates inEngage

To delete a saved Template:
1. Click New Email in the top-left navigation pane of the Engage window.
2. Without making any changes to the Template, click the Action Gear in the top-right corner of the
application and select Delete.
3. If you were not the creator of the template, or have permission to delete it through your user
security settings, the Delete option is greyed out.
4. Deleting an Email Template in Engage will also delete it from the core Eloqua application, since
they are shared between the two products.
1096 of 1162
23.3.12 Saving Engage emails as templates

You can save your Email as a template for future re-use. Note: Each time you log in to Engage, the
application looks for a folder in Eloqua with the naming convention engage-personal-folder-xxusername where xx-username is replaced by your user ID and the username you use to log in to
Engage. For example, if your user ID in Eloqua is 44 and your login name is John.Smith, your personal
folder will be called engage-personal-folder-44-John.Smith. If this is the first time you are logging
in to Engage, these folders do not yet exist, therefore a folder with that naming convention will be
created in three places: Component Library > Images, Component Library > File Storage and
Emails. These folders can be moved to another location within Eloqua without affecting future logins.
However, if you rename or delete the folder, it will automatically be re-created the next time you log in
to Engage. Email Templates, Images and Files are stored initially in those personal folders but can be
moved to another location at any time.
To save your Email as a Template:

1. When you are ready to save your Email, click on the gear icon in the upper-right corner of the
Engage window.
2. Select Save As...

3. In the Save as a template dialog box, enter a Name for your template and the Subject. Then
select the Template Group to which the Template will be added. The term Template Group is
the same as Email Group in the core Eloqua application, and determines certain elements that
will be pre-populated, such as Headers and Footers.
1097 of 1162
Email Groups in Eloqua are configured in the Setup area under Assets > Email Groups. In
order for the Email (Template) Group to be available in the Engage picklist, you must enable the
Make this Email Group available in Eloqua for Sales checkbox on the Email Group settings:
If you create an Email in Engage and do not enable the above checkbox, when you attempt to
create an Email and wish to use your private template, it will not be listed.
4. If you wish to save this Template so that only you can see and use it, check the Make Private
box. If at a later date you wish to enable others to be able to use this template, you will have to
save it as a new template and make sure not to check the Make Private box again.
5. Click Save to save the Template.
23.3.13 Viewing advanced reports in Engage

Advanced Reports are accessed by clicking the Advanced Reports button at the top center of the
Reports window.
Advanced Reports take the reporting capabilities and information a few steps further by providing
information on activity performed by the User account with which you are currently logged in.
1098 of 1162
You can modify the timeframe for which this information is displayed by clicking in the Start Date: and
End Date: fields. A calendar opens from which you can select your desired date(s).
The total number of records for this agent (Eloqua user) are shown is shown in the table (matrix) below.
Not only does this matrix include information viewed in the Engage reports (Email Address, Sent Date,
Opens, Clickthroughs, and Email Name), but addess Bounceback (both Hard and Soft) data as well as
the Email Type (HTML or Text). This is a valuable way in which to see an overview of all activity
performed by one Eloqua agent (user) in a single report view.
Once you are viewing this report, notice the down arrow next to the name of the Email Address for each
Email recipient that this agent sent. Clicking on that down arrow displays a drop-down with the
following choices:
Choosing Edit this Contact opens the Contact Details window, in which you can add information to
the Contact's Contact Record, as shown here:
1099 of 1162
By updating any of these fields, or entering information that was not originally included for that contact,
when you click Save (or Save and Close) the Contact's record and data will be updated in Engage.
You can modify any of the fields on the Contact Details screen, including the ability to Unsubscribe
this Contact from Emails.
The second option on the drop-down menu, View Contact's Email History, provides information, Email
by Email, on the date the Email was Sent, the Type of Email (was it a one-time Email sent to that
person, a Quicksend from Eloqua, or a Test Send using the Test Send feature in the core product). The
Sender (and batch name if applicable), the IP address of the Sender, whether the Contact was
captured as a Visitor, the Last Time the Email was opened, the number of Opens and Clickthroughs for
that Email, and finally, the Company IP address.
1100 of 1162
To view a preview of the actual Email, click its name in the Email column and it opens in a new
window.
Clicking on the dropdown double arrow in the Email Opens column displays a pop-up with the dates
and times of when the Contact opened that particular message, just as a list for quick reference, as
shown below:
The third option on the drop-down menu from the Email column, View Contact Activity Overview,
provides more detailed information on this contact including, if provided, his or her phone number,
Email address, Company Name and other information.
If you wish to be able to print out or view (save) all information on these data, click the Export button at
the top-left of the window and choose either Print the report, or save it in Excel format.
23.3.14 Viewing reports in Engage

Once you have sent an Email using Engage, you can view a report by clicking on the Reports button in
the navigation tree in the upper-left corner of the Engage window:
1101 of 1162
General Notes:
Activities that are tracked in Engage reports are the number of Emails Sent, Opens and
Clickthroughs.
Email Opens are captured each time an Email is opened by the recipient in his or her Email
client. However, many Email clients have images disabled as the default setting in order to
prevent the display of spam images. This setting often can be turned on or off by the user. In
the case where the user has turned off automatic image viewing in his or her email client, the
initial Open action will not be captured in Engage until the user enables the image(s) for the first
time. Subsequent opens will then be captured.
Links in the email that are clicked by the recipient are captured in the Engage reports in the
Clickthroughs column.
You can see the report statistics sorted by Sent Date, Subject, or Email right in the Engage
interface:
To view the report for a specific Email:

1. Click By Email in the upper-right corner.
2. After clicking By Email, sort your report by selecting to view the data by Sent At (Date and
Time) or Subject, as well as the sort order (Ascending or Descending):
3. Select the one you wish and the report is dynamically generated for you:
1102 of 1162
4. The number of Contacts who were sent that particular Email is indicated by the Sent box, the
number of times the Email was opened is shown in the Opens box and the number of times a
Contact clicked a link in the Email is the value next to Clicks. Clicking on the number in the box
next to any of these labels opens up a more detailed view of the contact's activity, which
displays a read-only preview pane on the bottom of that window. You can resize the size of the
split panes by dragging the divider line up or down:
1103 of 1162
5. To view a Contact's Email open and clickthrough activity, click in the box that displays the
number of opens as of or clicks as of, respectively. This will open the user's record in Eloqua
Profiler. Learn more about Profiler.
1104 of 1162
23.3.15 Engage integration

Engage can be embedded in several Customer Relationship Management (CRM) systems, including
Oracle CRM onDemand and Salesforce. This integration makes it easier and more convenient for you
to access the sales tool from within your chosen system.
Engage activities, including full emails, can be synched over to your CRM.The time it takes for a new
contact or template to appear in your CRM depends on the integration rules setup between your Eloqua
instance and your CRM.
You are able to access Engage via the CRM by embedding the login url. If your CRM is Salesforce,
Engage also supports using Salesforce as an identity provider.
Embedding Engage in Oracle CRM On Demand

This document describes the steps for embedding the Engage application in an Oracle CRM On
Demand environment.
Note: If you are using Salesforce as your CRM environment, please see the Engage Setup &
Configuration Guide for installation instructions.
Note: For instructions on how to perform the necessary configuration in Oracle CRM
OnDemand as part of the integration with Oracle Marketing Cloud, please refer to the Oracle
Eloqua Marketing Cloud Integration with Oracle CRM OnDemand Configuration Guide.
Prerequisites
Administrator access to the Oracle CRM On Demand ("CRMOD") application.
Configuration
The high level steps are as follows:
1. Create a contact web applet
2. Configure the page layout for the Engage app
Step 1: Creating a Contact Web Applet
To create a Contact Web Applet :

1. Log in to Oracle CRM on Demand ("CRMOD") as an Administrator.
2. Click Admin in the upper-right corner of the application window.
1105 of 1162
3. Under the Application Customization section, select Application Customization.
4. Under the Record Type Setup section, click Contact.
5. Under the Page Layout Management section, click Contact Web Applet.
6. To create the new Contact Applet, click New in the top-left corner below the Contact Applet List
heading.
The window that opens contains several fields that require input in order to configure Engage in
your CRMOD instance.
1106 of 1162
The recommended settings are:

Assign a name to your applet. It is recommended that you use Engage.
For Location, select Detail Page.
For Type, since this is a web applet, select URL from the drop-down list.
In the URL field, enter the URL to the page to which the User will be directed. You must
know the instance ("Pod") in which your install is located at Eloqua in order to correctly
configure this URL.The two options include:
a) Email Templates: The format for this URL is: https://<your_
instance>/apps/engage/index.aspx#sendTemplateToContacts/%%%Email_
Address%%%
b) New Email: The format for this URL is: https://<your_
instance>/apps/engage/index.aspx#sendBlankEmailToContacts/%%%Email_
Address%%%
In the URLs above, replace <your_instance> with one of the the following, based on
your Eloqua instance (it is the same as the URL you use when logging into Eloqua):
secure.eloqua.com
www02.secure.eloqua.com
secure.p03.eloqua.com
For the Description field, enter a description for the applet. Although this is a free-form
field, it is recommended to use a simple description such as "This is the Engage
application". The description you will appear on your Contact Applet List in the Admin
console, so it is a good idea to make sure the purpose of the applet is clear.
In the Height field, specify the height (in pixels) for the amount of real estate (space) the
Engage Editor will occupy in the screen. We have tested values for this setting and
recommend a setting of 750 or greater.
7. Click Save. The Engage applet is now listed under the "E" heading, and shows the name and
description you have entered from the steps above.
Step 2: Configuring the Page Layout for the Engage app
To configure the Page Layout for the Engage app.
1107 of 1162
1. Log in to Oracle CRM on Demand ("CRMOD") as an Administrator.

2. Click Admin in the upper-right corner of the application window.
3. Under the Application Customization section, select Application Customization.
4. Under the Record Type Setup section, click Contact.
5. Under Page Layout Management, click Contact Page Layout. The Page Layout Wizard
page opens.
6. Each type of User Account (system-generated) can have its own Contact Page Layout for
Engage. Click Edit next to the name of the User Account for which you wish to create the Page
Layout.
7. On the first tab, Step 1 (Layout Name), type a name for your Contact Page Layout (e.g.
1108 of 1162
Engage), and, if desired, a description.
8. It is not necessary to configure Steps 2 or 3. Click Step 4 (Related Information) to continue.

In the Not Available Information column, locate the Web Applet that you created above. Once
you have located the applet, highlight it (single left-click), then click the > arrow to move it to
Available Information. In the Available Information column, locate the applet, single leftclick on it and click the > arrow to move it to Displayed Information.
As a result of performing this step, Engage will be available for anyone logging in to Eloqua who
has the access rights associated with the Account under which you have created this layout.
9. Click Finish to save the Page Layout.
10. Repeat steps 1-9 above for each account type you wish to enable for Engage access.
Embedding Engage as a tab or button in Salesforce

This section will walk through modifying Engage so it is seamlessly available to Sales users inside
Salesforce.com.
There are two ways Engage can be deployed within Salesforce:
1109 of 1162
As a top navigational tab

As buttons on the Lead and Contact Page layouts
Embedding Engage as a tab in Salesforce
To embed Engage as a tab in Salesforce:

1. Log in to Salesforce. Click on your name in the top-right corner of the page and select Setup.
2. Navigate to Administration Setup > Create > Tabs. Click edit next to the Engage tab setup
for your Salesforce.
3. Click through the Tab settings until you are on Step 3, where you enter the URL for the button.
Here you should see the URL for Engage. Replace the existing URL with one of the following:
SAML:
https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/autologin?LoginPrefix=XXXX&ReturnUrl=apps%2
Fengage
SFDC ID:
https://secure.eloqua.com/sso/sfdc/v1/svp.aspx?LP=XXXX&SFDisplayInline=true&R
U=/apps/engage/index.aspx
Note: Replace LoginPrefix=<LoginPrefix> where prefix is a 4 character identifying code

like 'ELQA'. You can alternatively use <siteID> with your site ID - a numeric code, like
'33' (it may be much longer). If you do not know what your prefix is, log a Service
Request ("SR") via My Oracle Support (support.oracle.com). You can also choose to
ignore this parameter and it will attempt to log you in using the first Eloqua saved
credential it finds.
4. Save your changes and refresh the browser. You should now be able to click on the Engage tab
and be logged in seamlessly to Engage. Ensure you are logged in to Salesforce from your
dedicated Salesforce domain and not the standard login.salesforce.com.
1110 of 1162
Embedding Engage as buttons on Salesforce Lead and Contact Page layouts
There can be multiple Engage buttons on the Lead/Contact page layout within Salesforce. The
following steps will walk through modifying the two most common buttons.
To embed Engage as buttons on Salesforce Lead and Contact Page layouts:

1. Log in to Salesforce. Click on your name in the top-right corner of the page and select Setup.
2. Navigate to Administration Setup > Customize > Leads > Buttons, Links, and Actions.
3. Find one of the buttons you created for Engage and click to edit.
4. Enter the following URL:
https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/autologin?LoginPrefix=XXXX&ReturnUrl=ZZZZ
Replace the XXXX in the URL with the same LoginPrefix values you used when setting
up Profiler in the previous section.
5. You most likely have multiple Engage buttons on the Lead/Contact objects. Each button will
have a different value for ZZZZ in the Step 4 URL. Below are the values to enter for ZZZZ for
each button on the Lead/Contact objects.
Send Blank Email To Contacts:
apps%2Fengage%23sendBlankTemplateEmailToContacts%2F{email_address}
Send Template Email To Contacts:
apps%2Fengage%23sendTemplateEmailToContacts%2F{email_address}
Open Engage with a specific template: apps%2fengage%23template/{template_id}
1111 of 1162
Open Engage to a blank email: apps%2fengage%23template/newEmail

Open Engage with a specific template and email address:
apps%2fengage%23template/{template_id}/{email_address}
Open Engage with a specific email address and the template chooser:
apps%2fengage%23sendTemplateEmailToContacts%2f{email_address}
Important: You must replace {email_address}:

For lead objects, replace {email_address} with {!lead.email}.
For contact object, replace {email_address} with {!contact.email}.
Note: To determine your template id, open the template in Eloqua or Engage. The
template id will be displayed in the URL.
6. Save all the changes to your buttons and test by loading a Lead/Contact. On a Lead/Contact
record, clicking these Engage buttons should give seamless access to Engage. Ensure you are
logged into Salesforce from your dedicated Salesforce domain and not the standard
login.salesforce.com.
Embedding Engage in OKTA with SSO

This guide explains how to seamlessly configure and access Engage through OKTA.
1112 of 1162
Configuration
1. Configure Engage in OKTA with SSO
2. Accessing Eloqua Sales as OKTAapps
Step 1: Configuring Engage in OKTA with SSO
Engage is an app you can access via a URL from any location. It could be launched standalone in a
browser but is most commonly embedded inside a CRM system. Once configured, you need to update
Engage to work with OKTA so that access is seamless.
To configure SSO with OKTA into Engage:

1. Enter the following URL:
https://login.eloqua.com/auth/saml2/autologin?LoginPrefix=XXXX&Idp=YYYY&ReturnU
rl=apps%2Fengage
Note: Replace LoginPrefix=<LoginPrefix> where prefix is a 4 character identifying code like

'ELQA'. You can alternatively use <siteID> with your site ID - a numeric code, like '33' (it may
be much longer). If you do not know what your prefix is, log a Service Request ("SR") via My
Oracle Support (support.oracle.com). You can also choose to ignore this parameter and it will
attempt to log you in using the first Eloqua saved credential it finds. Replace <IDPid> with the
IDP unique ID from your SSO setup.
Note: To find your IDP unique ID in Eloqua, navigate back to the Identity Management Provider
interface. Right-click on the name of the Identity Provider you set up for OKTA and click Open
Link in New Tab.
1113 of 1162
On the new browser tab, look at the URL and copy the ID that appears after "....Display/".
Once you have this properly formatted URL, as long as a user has an OKTA session active in their
browser, the URL can be accessed from any location on the Internet and it will allow seamless access
to Engage.
Step 2: Accessing Engage as an OKTA App
If you wish to allow users direct access to Engage from Apps in OKTA, you can do the following.
1. Repeat the SSO Configuration section above to create a new SAML2 template for Eloqua
Profiler.
2. While creating the SAML2 template, add the following to the Default Relay State field:
ReturnURL=apps%2Fengage
Configuring SSO with OKTA
1114 of 1162
23.4 Discover for Salesforce

23.4.1 Overview
Eloqua Discover for Salesforce radically changes the way sales views buyers. In one click, sales
professionals know exactly who to call next. They see a prioritized view of the most engaged
prospects and get email or alerts when actions occur.
Discover for Salesforce Configuration Guide
If you want to create prioritized lists of leads and/or contacts in your CRM, you may be interested in
configuring sales prioritization views.
23.5 Sales prioritization views

You can integrate with your CRM in a way that provides your sales team with a prioritized lead list or
contact calling list. Optionally, you can also include links to Oracle Eloqua Engage and Profiler.
Learn more about how to configure sales prioritization views in Salesforce.com.
23.5.1 Configuring salesprioritization views in Salesforce.com

This guide describes how you can create a lead or contact calling list for your sales team in Salesforce,
allowing them to prioritize by lead score and other criteria. Optionally, you can also include links to
Oracle Engage and Profiler.
1115 of 1162
Configuration Prerequisites
Salesforce administrator privileges

CRM integration is set up in your Salesforce instance
The Lead Score property from Eloqua has been synchronized to a property in Salesforce
Configuration
The configuration requires the completion of the following high level steps:
1. Creating the properties
2. Creating the view
Creating the Properties

This configuration involves creating new properties in Salesforce to show the Lead Score Images.
These images (typically composed of dollar sign and flame icons) appear inside the Salesforce View
and link users to Profiler and Engage. There will be a total of 16 images (A1, A2, A3, A4, B1, B2, B3,
B4, C1, C2, C3, C4, D1, D2, D3, D4).
Note: The only required property is the Lead Score property, which is a prerequisite for this
configuration. The properties below are optional, but provide visual cues and a better user
experience.
To create the optional properties:
1116 of 1162
1. (Optional) Create the LeadScore Image property:

a. Create the 16 different leadscore images or download the example images.
For example:
b. Upload the 16 images to Salesforce.

i. Inside Salesforce, navigate to Documents.
ii. Click New to create a new document.
iii. Upload the image and then Save.

iv. Open the document and click View File.
The image opens in a new tab.
v. Copy the URL from your browser address bar into a document or spreadsheet so
you can reference it later. Note:This is the URL to the image. You will need these
image URLs later.
vi. Repeat for each flame and dollar sign image.
c. Create a new field to lookup the appropriate image based off the lead score rating value.
In other words, if the lead score is A1, then we want Salesforce to display the A1 image.
i. Inside Salesforce, navigate to Setup > Leads > Fields.
ii. Create a New Custom Field.
iii. Step 1: Choose the Field Type. Select Formula.
iv. Step 2: Choose output type. Select Text
v. Step 3: Custom Field Definition Edit. Insert the following code, with your own
data substituted for the information highlighted below:
IMAGE(
CASE(<API Name for Lead Scoring Field> ,
"A1", "<A1ImageURL>",
1117 of 1162
"B1", "<B1ImageURL>",
"C1", "<C1ImageURL>",
"D1", "<D1ImageURL>",
"/s.gif"),
"Lead Rating")
vi. Step 4: Establish field-level Security. Select which profilers get access to this
field.
vii. Step 5: Add to page layouts. Select the page layouts that this field will show up in
viii. Save
Here is an example:
1118 of 1162
Note: Your image URLs and Lead Scoring API name will differ from the example
shown above.
2. (Optional) Create a property to link to Engage:
a. Create and store the Engage icon inside Salesforce.
ii. Create a New document.
iii. Upload the Engage icon and then Save.
v. Copy the URL in the address bar. Note:This is the URL to the image. You will
need the image URLs later.
vi. Copy the URL from your browser address bar into a document or spreadsheet so
you can reference it later. Note:This is the URL to the image. You will need this
image URL later.
b. Create a new field that displays the Engage icon, by performing the following steps:
Note: The icon will contain a hyperlink to Engage, with the lead's email address
populated in the To field. Alternatively, the URL could take the sales rep to a
specific engage template.
HYPERLINK("<Login
URL>&Url=/apps/engage?sendTemplateEmailToContacts/" & Email, IMAGE
("<EngageIconURL>", " "))
Note: Specify the URL that you typically use to access (i.e. login to)
Engage.
vi. Step 4: Establish field-level Security. Select which profilers get access to this
field.
1119 of 1162
vii. Step 5: Add to page layouts. Select the page layouts that this field will show up in.
viii. Save.
3. (Optional) Create a property to link to Profiler:
a. Create and store the Profiler icon inside Salesforce:
ii. Create a New Document.
iii. Upload the profiler image and then Save.
v. Copy the URL from your browser address bar into a document or spreadsheet so
you can reference it later. Note:This is the URL to the image. You will this image
URL later.
b. Create a new field which will show the Profiler icon with a hyperlink to the specific
profiler for that contact:
HYPERLINK("<LoginURL>
/apps/cloud/admin/galactus?returnPath=/salesTools/profiler/contacts?emailAddr
ess=" & Email , IMAGE("<ProfilerImageURL>", " "))
Note: Specify the URL that you typically use to access (i.e. login to)
Profiler.
vi. Step 4: Establish field-level Security. Select which profilers have access to this
field.
vii. Step 5: Add to page layouts. Select the page layouts that this field will show up in.
viii. Save.
Creating the View

This section is about creating a View on the Lead tab which will show a list of all the leads sorted by the
lead score.
1120 of 1162
1. Inside Salesforce, navigate to the Leads tab.

2. Click Create New View.
3. Specify a meaningful name for your new view.

4. Specify Filter Criteria - Filter the view
Filter By Owner
The view can show all leads, my leads or leads in a specific queue. My Converted Leads will
show all the leads that are assigned to the user that is currently logged in. Only one view is
needed instead of creating a view for each user.
Filter by Additional Fields
The lead score value occasionally can be empty or invalid. Therefore, by default, filter out the
following:
Lead Score not equal to
Lead Score not equal to A
In addition, filter out any custom property. For example: Region, Territory, State, etc
5. Select Fields to Display Add fields that will appear in the view.
Add the fields that will appear in the field, at a minimum add in Lead Score, and Name of the
contact. Make sure you add all of the optional fields that you created in the Creating Properties
section.
1121 of 1162
6. Save the view.

7. Sort on Lead Score by clicking the heading of the column inside the view.
Note: You can configure the same view on the contacts tab by adding the same properties to
the Contact object and then creating the same view on the Contacts tab.
23.6 Sales Tools Administration

As an administrator of your Eloqua instance, you can configure settings for Engage and Eloqua Profiler
using the Setup area of the core application. Examples of these settings include enabling or disabling
of thumbnail images, the ability to add attachments or images to an Email, and many more. This
document describes each setting and how changing them affects what Enage and Profiler users will
see when using the product.
Engage
Eloqua Profiler
1122 of 1162
23.6.1 Configuring settings for Engage

Important: If you are logged in to Engage while making changes to the Administrative Settings, you
must either log out of Engage or Profiler and back in, or refresh your Engage or Profiler browser window
in order to see the changes reflected in the User Interface.
1. If you use Eloqua, navigate to Settings > Seup > Sales Tools (in the Administration section).
If the Sales Tools icon is not present, your security settings do not allow you to access to this
functionality; please contact your Eloqua administrator to enable this feature.
Eloqua users can access the Sales Tools settings page via the following URL:
https://secure.eloqua.com/apps/SalesToolsAdmin/.
2. On the left-hand panel, select Engage.
3. The settings that you can configure are divided into two categories: Recipients and
Templates. The default settings are shown in the following screenshot:
4. The first setting in the Recipients section, Allow recipient auto completion, when set to ON
will automatically suggest a recipient (contact) you type in the To: field of your Engage Email, if
it already exists. When the corresponding address is shown, clicking on the address will add it
to the Recipient list. If the address is not found (the contact is not yet in the Eloqua contact
1123 of 1162
database), the Email address will be added once you finish typing.
5. Click the ON button to toggle the setting to OFF if desired. If OFF, when you enter Email
addresses (recipients) in the To: field, no suggestions will be presented. Click Save to save
your change
6. The second setting, Restrict the maximum number of recipients to enables you to enter a
value which will prevent the Engage user from sending the Email to more than a desired number
of recipients. Engage is designed to send Emails to a smaller group of users than the core
Eloqua product. It is recommended to use Engage when sending to approximately 250 or fewer
contacts, however this is not a hard-coded value. Note that the default setting is OFF. To
change the maximum number of recipients, click the OFF toggle switch until it is ON (green)
and enter the number of recipients in the field directly below. The minimum value is 1. Click
Save to save your changes.
The Templates section of the Engage settings enables you to configure the following settings,
according to your preferences.
Allow creation of public Engage email templates: As an Engage user, you may wish to
create templates for your own use only. Engage gives you this capability as a checkbox on the
Save as a template dialog box. If you wish all templates to be private, which will hide these
templates for anyone other than your user login, change the ON button (toggle) to OFF.
The default setting is ON. If you do not change this setting, when an Engage user chooses to save an
Email as a template, there is a checkbox that will set the template as either private or public:
1124 of 1162
If set to OFF, there is no option to make this template available to all Engage users:
Allow insertion of images in Engage email templates: The Engage toolbar includes an icon
that allows a user to insert an Image in the Email.
1125 of 1162
If you change the switch to OFF, the Add Images button is removed from the toolbar:
and you will not be able to add an image to your Email.

Allow attachments in Engage email templates: By default, this setting is turned ON. When
turned on, the Add Attachments button is displayed in the Engage toolbar:
When toggled to OFF, the toolbar does not display the Add Attachments icon, thereby preventing
the Engage user from adding a file attachment to the Email:

As an Administrator, you can choose which information and options will be available to users viewing
contacts in Profiler Stream.
To configure the settings for Profiler Stream:

1. Navigate to Settings > Setup, then click Sales Tools (in the Administration section), the Sales
Tools Administration window opens.

Note: If the Sales Tools icon is not present, you may not have the correct security
permissions to access this functionality; please contact your Eloqua administrator to
enable this feature. Eloqua users access the Sales Tools settings page via the following
1126 of 1162
URL: https://secure.eloqua.com/apps/SalesToolsAdmin/. Note that the final "/ " is

required in order to access this page.
2. Click Profiler in the left-side column under Sales Tools.
3. Click the On/Off switch next to each of the categories under Profiler Settings to enable or
disable the features as needed. The following is a list of the available options:
Web Alerts: With Profiler you have the option to be notified via email whenever a
particular contact, or anyone with the same email domain, visits your website.You can
configure the settings to either allow or block Profiler users from creating these alerts
(notifications).If web alerts is set to off, the option will not appear when viewing a
contact in Profiler Stream. Learn more about using Web Alerts.
Thumbnail Previews: When thumbnail previews is enabled you are able to see a
preview of an email or website in the contacts activity history. If this option is enabled
(set to On), a thumbnail is displayed by default.
1127 of 1162
If you disable the thumbnail previews option, when you view a contact's activities and
click the name of a particular email or web page, you are shown the following message:
Date Format: By default, the list of emails included in a contact's activity record in
Profiler Stream includes the date and time that the email was sent:
If you want to display only the dates, set the Date Format switch to Off.
Search: When the search is disabled you are only able to search for a contact by their
email address, this must be an exact match. When search is enabled, you also have the
option to search by the contact's name.
External Activity: Activities that a contact performs outside of Eloqua are called
External Activities. Here you can select which external events will appear in the
activities feed. This is useful as you may have many external activities configured in
your instance, but may not want to display all of them on contact records. Only the
activities whose switch is in the On position will be displayed.
1128 of 1162
The list of external activities from which you can choose must be configured in the
External Assets and Activities section of Eloqua, prior to enabling or disabling them in
Profiler Stream. Learn more about external assets in Eloqua.
4. Click Save when you are done configuring the settings.
1129 of 1162
24 Segments
Segments, found under the Contacts tab in Eloqua, are groups of contacts that are generated based on
filter criteria and contact lists. Segments can filter contacts based on criteria like whether or not they
receive a newspaper, or whether or not they visited a landing page.
Segments are used to feed email distribution in campaigns, they allow you to specify which contacts
are included then customize the subsequent actions for those contacts:
24.0.1 Examples
Segments can be very general, like "Email Opened", or very specific, like "Arborists who live in
Minnesota". Create segments that are appropriate for your company's needs.
In most cases, it is more efficient to create small, targeted segments, that you can combine together to
reach the entire audience. Creating large, complex segments that are only appropriate for a single
campaign is more time-consuming and prevents you from being able to reuse common segments in
future campaigns. As always, your business needs should determine how you create your segments.
Consider the following examples of segments:
Example 1: Segment organized by job title
1130 of 1162
In this example, you want to create a segment that includes only executives that you consider to be
decision-makers among your contacts. Based on your product knowledge, you know that the primary
purchase decision-makers are the CEO, the CTO, the CIO, and the CMO, along with SVPs, EVPs,
and VPs for these functions. When you create your segment, you can then filter based on those job
titles. The following example includes all C-level executive:
Example 2:Segment organized by sales territory

It is relatively easy to create a segment by sales territory if every one of your territories corresponds to
a single field value, such as a specific state, city, county, or zip code. For sales territories that are
harder to define, such as territories that cover multiple states, or portions of different states, you can
use multiple selection criteria to capture the whole area.
For example, suppose your filter needs to cover an entire city as well as a few zip codes outside the
city. Your filter would then need to include both the city and the extra zip codes.
Specifically, consider the example of Kansas City. There are two cities called Kansas City:one is in
Missouri, and the other is in Kansas.If you created your segment based only on city name, you would
include contacts from both cities. To select only one, you would need to include the state. In the
following figure, the sales territory includes Kansas City, KS, and a few postal codes just outside the
city. The contacts meeting this criteria are placed in a segment called "Kansas City KS Sales
Territory."
1131 of 1162
Example 3: Setting up exclusion criteria

In a special case, you can choose to universally exclude some contacts from all segments. Your
Customer Administrator must set up these "System-Wide Exclusions" for you. You can set up
System-Wide Exclusions based on a wide variety of criteria, but System-Wide Exclusions are most
frequently used to exclude all email addresses that belong to a competitor's domains, or a competitor's
partner's domains.
24.1 Creating new segments

Eloqua allows you to create segments to organize your contacts, segments are groups of contacts that
are sorted together based on specific filters and contact lists. You can create a segment, then specify
which contacts you want to include. These segments are then added to campaigns to specify the
intended audience.
To create a new segment:

1. Navigate to Contacts > Segments, then click Create a Segment, the Template Chooser
opens.
2. Select an existing template, or select Blank Segment, then click Choose. A new, untitled
segment is created.
3. Click the action menu (gear icon) then select Settings, the segment details window opens.
4. Enter a name and description for the segment, then click Done, the window closes.
5. Click Save to save the new segment.
After you have created a segment, you can populate it with contacts in the following ways:
Filter criteria: This option allow you to filter contacts based on a wide variety of associated data,
including email and landing page activity, visitor information, and contact and account fields.
Filters are the key component of segments:you can create numerous filters to ensure you cover
1132 of 1162
the population you wish to target.

Individual contacts: This option allows you to search for and add individual contacts to the
segment.
Uploading contacts: This option lets you upload a group of contacts from a CSV file
Shared filter or shared list: This option lets you add shared filters or shared lists, picking from a
list of saved common resources.
24.2 Adding individual contacts to segments

You can select individual contactsto a segment, this is ideal when you want to ensure that you include
a specific contact in your segment.
To add an individual contact to a segment:

1. Navigate to Contacts > Segments, then open an exiting segment or create a new one.
2. Click the + icon in the left-side pane, then select Individual Contacts, the contact list editor
opens.
3. Click the + icon in the right-side pane to add a contact to the list, the Add Contacts window
opens.
4. Use the search bar to search for the contact that you wish to add.
1133 of 1162
5. Select the contact and click Add Contacts.The contact is now listed in the contact list.
6. Double-click on the contact list in the left-side pane, and re-name it. This will help you easily
identify what that filter is for when you return to the segment in the future.
7. If wanted, click the + icon in the left-side pane to add more contacts using the other options
(Filter Criteria, Upload Contacts, Shared Filters and Shared Lists).
8. Click Save to save the changes to your segment.
24.3 Adding contacts to segments using filter criteria

This option lets you select contacts based on a variety of criteria, such as their contact fields, lead
scoring, email activity data, form activity, and visitor information.
To add a contact using filter criteria:

2. Click the + icon in the left-side pane, then select Filter Criteria, the list of filter criteria opens on
the right side of the editor. By default, the list shows all filter types. You can narrow down the list
by choosing different filter types from the drop-down list.
1134 of 1162
3. Double-click on a filter type to add it to your segment filter.

4. Double-click on the filter in the editor to configure it, a configuration window opens. Enter any
required information, then click outside the window to close it.
Note:Some filters include comparison operators that you select from a drop-down list.
For example, for email-related filters, the list is "on", "before", "after", "within","within
last", and "not within last".
5. If needed, add and configure additional filters from the list. If you are including multiple filter
criteria within you segment filter, you can modify how those filters interact by clicking the AND
button to toggle it between AND and OR.
AND andOR and their impact on contact filtering:
1135 of 1162
Suppose your filter criteria has two filters:"Opened Any Email" and "Compare Contact Fields",
as in the following example:
The filter selects contacts whose salesperson is MichaelGruber, who have also opened an
email at least once within the last two weeks.
If the segment was configured with an OR, however, the filter would select all contacts whose
salesperson is Michael Gruber, and all contacts who had opened an email at least once within
the last two weeks. The ORresults in a much larger group of contacts.
Be sure to use ANDand ORthoughtfully to achieve your filtering goals.
6. Double-click on the filter criteria in the left-side pane, and re-name it. This will help you easily
(Individual Contacts, Upload Contacts, Shared Filters and Shared Lists).
If you want to add other filter criteria, individual contacts, shared lists, shared filters, or upload contacts
from an Excel or CSVfile, you can do so by clicking the plus icon. When you are done constructing
your segment, click Save.
24.4 Adding uploaded contacts to segments

Eloqua gives you the option to upload an Excel or CSV file to add contacts directly to your segment.
To upload contacts to a segment:

2. Click the + icon in the left-side pane, then select Upload Contacts, the Contact Upload Wizard
opens.
3. Click the cloud icon, then select the file that you want to upload, then click Open.
1136 of 1162
4. Follow the prompts to map your fields to Eloqua's fields in each step of the wizard. Click Finish
when you are done, the wizard closes and your uploaded data appears in the left-side pane.
5. Double-click on the uploaded list in the left-side pane and re-name it. This will help you easily
(Individual Contacts, Filter Criteria, Shared Filters and Shared Lists).
24.5 Adding shared filters and shared lists to segments

You can also add contacts to your segments using Shared Filters and Shared Lists, this allows you to
pick from a list of saved common resources. You can view the available shared filters and lists by
selecting SharedLibrary from the Contacts menu.
To add a shared filter to a segment:

2. Click the + icon in the left-side pane, then select Shared Filter, the Shared Filter Chooser
opens.
3. Select the desired shared filter from the list, then click Choose. You are given the option to
Make a Local Copy or to Add Shared Filter. Click one of the options and the filter is added to the
segment.
Note: If you chose to create a local copy, or if you have the required permissions to edit
the shared filter, you can re-configure the filter as needed.
1137 of 1162
4. Double-click on the shared filter in the left-side pane, and re-name it. This will help you easily
To add a shared list to a segment:

2. Click the + icon in the left-side pane, then select Shared List, the Shared List Chooser opens.
3. Select the desired shared list, then click Choose. You are given the option to Make a Local
Copy or to Add Shared List. Click one of the options and the list is added to the segment.
Note: If you chose to create a local copy, or if you have the required permissions to edit
the shared list, you can re-configure the list as needed.
4. Double-click on the shared list in the left-side pane, and re-name it. This will help you easily
If wanted, you can click the + icon in the left-side pane to add more contacts using the other options
(Filter Criteria,Individual Contacts, Upload Contacts).
24.6 Filter and list operations

With Eloqua, you can perform the following operations on segment filters and lists in the left-side pane
of the segment editor:.
Flatten: Converts a filter into a contact list. The new contact list contains all of the contacts that
met the filter criteria at the time that the filter was flattened.
Merge: Creates a contact list from two or more filters or lists, all contacts are included in the
new contact list. If there were contacts common to both filters or lists, they are included only
once in the new contact list.
Intersect: Creates a contact list from two or more filters or lists, only the contacts that were
common in all filters and lists are included.
Trim: Creates a contact list from two or more filters, only the contacts that were *unique* to one
filter or list are included.
1138 of 1162
To flatten a segment filter:

1. Right-click on the segment filter that you wish to flatten then select Flatten, a confirmation
window opens.
2. Click Flatten, the filter is converted to a contact list.
3. Click Done to close the window.
4. Double-click the flattened list then change the name to something more meaningful.
To merge, instersect, or trim segment filters and contact lists:

1. Press Shift or Ctrl, then click to select the segment filters or contact lists that you wish to
modify.
2. Right-click the components, then select one of the following options:
Merge: A contact list containing all of the contacts from the merged filters is created, the
original filters or lists remain unaffected.
Intersect: A contact list containing the contacts that were common to all the filters is
created, the original filters or lists remain unaffected.
Trim: Select one of the filters from the drop-down list as a target in which to trim from. A
contact list containing the contacts that were unique to the specified filter is created, the
original filters or lists remain unaffected.
3. Click Done to close the Segment Set Operations window. A new contact list is created and
added to the left-side pane of the editor.
4. Double-click the contact list, then change the name to something more meaningful.
To delete a segment filter or contact list:

1. Right-click the segment filter or contact list that you wish to remove, then select Remove. A
confirmation window opens asking you to confirm that you want to remove the selected
elements.
2. Click Remove, the filter or list is removed from the left-side pane.
If you wish to add additional contacts to one of these contact lists, see adding individual contacts to
segments.You also have the option to share a list or filter in your segment, and switch a filter from
included to excluded. Learn more about sharing filters and lists and excluding segment elements.
1139 of 1162
24.7 Excluding segment elements

When you add a contact list or segment filter to a segment, the contacts in that list are included in the
segment by default. However, you can also use contact lists and segment filters to exclude contacts.
Example: You could choose to exclude people who opened an email in the last week from a
segment that focuses on re-engagement. Or, you might want to exclude contacts who work for
one of your competitors.
Using the segment editor, you can easily toggle filters and lists to specify inclusion or exclusion. You
can view excluded contacts in the contact viewer.
To exclude the contacts in a segment filter or list:

2. In the left-side pane, right-click the segment filter or list of contacts that you want to exclude,
then select Switch to Exclude. The segment or list indicates how many contacts are now
excluded.
To once again include the contact list or segment filter, right-click the name in the left-side pane and
select Switch toInclude.
1140 of 1162
24.8 Sharing filters and lists

You have the option to share a filter or list in your segment, provided that it is a local copy, or one that
you have created yourself. Sharing a filter or list makes it available to other users in the application, this
can save time as it allows common filters and lists to be reused.
To share a local copy of a filter or list:

1. Navigate to Contacts > Segments, then open an exiting segment or create a new one, the
segment editor opens.
2. In the left-side pane, right-click the filter that you want to share, then select Share, the Share
Filter window opens.

3. Enter a name in the Share As field, and (optionally) add a description for the segment.
4. Select a folder in which to store the shared filter, then click Share.
5. If the filter was successfully shared, a window opens with the following options:
Use Shared Filter: The shared filter is used in your segment and any changes that you
make in your segment will be applied to the shared version.
1141 of 1162
Use Local Filter: A local copy of the shared filter is made to which you can make
changes without affecting the shared filter.
24.9 Editing segments

Eloqua allows you to edit existing segments, this can save you time as you can modify a previously
created segment rather than create a completely new one.
To edit a segment:
1. Navigate to Contacts > Segments, then click Open an Existing Segment, the Segment
Chooser opens.
2. Select a segment in the chooser, then click Choose to open it.
3. Make any necessary changes to the segment. See creating new segments for more
information.
4. Click Save to save the segment with your changes.
24.10 Deleting segments

When a segment is no longer needed it can be deleted from Eloqua.
Important:You cannot delete an active segment. Active segments are segments that are
currently part of an active campaign, and are labeled Active in the upper left-hand corner of the
segment editor when you open the segment. If you wish to delete an active segment, you must
first deactivate it.
1142 of 1162
To delete a segment:
1. Navigate to Contacts > Segments, then click Open an Existing Segment, the Segment
Chooser opens.
2. Right-click on the name of the segment that you wish to delete, then select Delete, a
confirmation window opens.
3. Click Delete, the segment is deleted from the application.
24.11 Viewing segment contacts

Segments are groupings of contacts that are generated based on filter criteria and contact lists. You
can view the contacts that are included and excluded in your segment using the View Contacts...
button in the segment editor.
To view the contacts in a segment:

1. Navigate to Contacts > Segments, then open an exiting segment or create a new one, the
segment editor opens.
2. Click View Contacts... in the upper right-hand corner, the View Segment Members window
opens. There are three tabs in this window to choose from:
All:This is the default tab, it lists all contacts that are included in a contact list or that
meet the segment filter criteria. Any contacts that are excluded will not be listed in the All
tab.
Included: This tab lists all contacts that are included by a filter or list.
Excluded: This tab lists all contacts that are excluded by a filter or list.
Example: The following segment has one segment filter, Has Country Field, that
includes all contacts with a value in the Country field, and one contact list, Excluded,
that specifies four contacts for exclusion:Charlotte Brown, Maxim Engel, Adela
Kolodziej, and Huyen To:
1143 of 1162
Unlike the other excluded contacts, Charlotte Brown meets the criteria for the Has
Country Field segment filter, but is also included in the Excluded contact list. When you
click View Contacts..., she is not be listed in theAll tab, which lists all contacts that
form the segment, but is listed in both the Included and Excluded tabs:
1144 of 1162
You can also change the contact view in the window using the drop-down list in the upper righthand corner.
3. If you want to export the list of segment members, click Export... in the bottom left-hand corner
of the window. Fill in the required information and select if you want to export the data in Excel
or CSV format, then click Export.
4. Click Close when you are done, the View Segment Members window closes.
1145 of 1162
25 Shared Filters
There are three types of shared contact and company filter criteria you can use in the application.
These can all be used in any mix of up to 15 criteria within a single filter:
Field Filters
A field filter is based on the values found in one or more specified fields in the contact record. For
example, you may filter to find contacts that are located in a specific city (Detroit), work for a company
in a specified revenue range ($10-100 million), and have one of several job titles (VP, CIO, or CMO).
You can use a field filter to carry out a number of different functions, adding the results to a segment or
Program. For example, you can filter contacts:
Geographically - By city or cities, state(s) or provinces, country or countries, region (such as
NA, LA, EMEA, or APAC), postal or zip code, or area code.
By the job title or role of the Contact - Include or exclude specific titles or roles.
By IP address, email address, or domain - Allows you to create suppression lists for your
competitors, exclude Contacts from your company's domain(s), exclude private email
addresses (such as *@yahoo.com or *@gmail.com). In some cases, you can also identify
domains in specific countries by the country identifier in the domain (for example, ".de" for
Germany or ".ru" for Russia).
By the company information - The company name, DUNS number, age, size, number of
employees, revenue, or industry.
By agent or salesperson - Define sales territories to create tailored segments and contact lists.
By product interest or products already installed or used.
By subscriptions (for example, to subscription groups or newsletters) or consent status for
receiving additional emails or other communications.
By timing - Based on when the contact record was created or last updated.
By partner status - Whether the contact is a partner or is affiliated with a partner.
By Lead Score or Lead Rating - Generated by applying lead scoring criteria to contact
information in Eloqua.
By checking for blank - For example, to create a contact list of contacts with information
missing from their profile data
By a combination of these criteria.
Activity-Based Filters
Activity-based filters capture the activities the contact has carried out regarding your marketing
collateral and channels. For example, a contact may have been sent at least three emails in the past
1146 of 1162
three months, opened two, and clicked-through on one. The criteria you set may reflect a typical profile
for a potential customer.
Inactivity-Based Filters
Inactivity-based filters capture mostly things that the contact did not do to interact with your marketing
collateral or channels. For example, a contact may have been sent at least three emails in the past
three months, but did not open any of the emails and did not visit your website. You may use this type
of information to target contacts for further lead nurturing activities.
25.1 Viewing the number of contacts in a filter

You can view the number of contacts that are returned from the marketing database by the Filter.
To view the number of contacts in a Contact Filter:

1. Navigate to Contacts > Segments.
2. On the left-hand pane, select the Filter Criteria for which you wish to know the number of
contacts.
3. If the number of contacts is not already displayed, click the Refresh button (indicated by the red
arrow in the following screenshot) to obtain the results of your query. It may take a few seconds
before the results are displayed.
Once the results have been returned, the Criteria you had selected will be updated with the
number of contacts returned by that filter (as indicated by the green arrows in the following
screenshot):
If there are more than one Filter Criteria in this Segment, the total number of Contacts for all
filters in the Segment will be displayed at the top, as a sum of the results of each Filter (in the
example above, 4508 unique contacts).
1147 of 1162
25.2 Viewing contacts in a filter

You can view the Contacts that are returned from the marketing database by the Filter.
To view the Contacts in a Contact Filter:

1. Navigate to Contacts > Shared Library.
2. Click Shared Filters.
3. Navigate to (or search for) the Contact Filter, then double-click on its name. The Shared Filter
opens in edit mode.
4. Click the Export button at the bottom-left corner of the window.
5. In the drop-down dialog box that appears, enter the email address to which the notification of the
filtered Contact List should be sent.
6. Select whether you wish the list to be created in Comma Separated Value (.csv) format or
Excel (.xls).
7. Click Export.
You will receive an email at the address specified in step 5 above with a link to the download location.
1148 of 1162
26 Oracle Eloqua Glossary
A
Account
An account is a data entity that contains the explicit data around a company or an organization.
Multiple contacts can be linked to a single account.
Account Field
An account field is a property associated with an account which can be populated. For example,
account type, billing address, business phone, and so on. You may define any additional custom fields
that you require to track accounts.
Account View
An account view is an arrangement of account fields that can be customized. The default account view
is displayed when a new account is created.
Activity
An activity is an action taken by a contact on assets that are tracked in the system. For
example,opening an email, clicking an email, viewing a web page, downloading, performing a keyword
search, referring web pages, and so on.
Asset
An asset is a building block for campaigns, which consists of emails, landing pages and forms. An
asset may contain reusable components such as global sections, signature layouts or images.
Authenticated Microsite
Auto Synch
1149 of 1162
Auto synch is a one-way scheduled import of data from a Customer Relationship Management (CRM)
or external system to Eloqua.
B
Basic Microsite
A basic microsite is the most straightforward type of microsite: a simple http:// domain. You can
register your own domain, use an existing domain, or register a new domain using Eloqua's built-in
domain registration tool. Basic microsites are ideal in most contexts, where no sensistive data will be
transmitted between the browser and the web server. The Modern Marketing Tour site is a basic
microsite.
C
Campaign
A campaign is a specific set of assets used in communicating a go-to-market message with the
objective of moving an individual from one stage to the next in the evaluation process. A campaign
provides an easy drag and drop interface to automate your marketing communications, and provides
roll up reporting which gives you a holistic view of how your marketing effort is performing as a whole.
Marketing in Eloqua is based around the use of campaigns which can be built out using Eloquas
Campaign Canvas. This functionality can also be extended to include ROI reporting by implementing
Close Loop Reporting in your Eloqua database.
Campaign Approvals
Campaign approvals facilitate the verification of content (emails, landing pages, and so on) prior to
activating a campaign.
Campaign Automation
Campaign automation is the ability to configure a campaign to automatically deploy assets, make
decisions and take actions based on scheduling, known information or behaviors of contacts. This
includes the configuration of feeders (lists, filters, forms); deploying assets (emails); manipulating lists;
setting contact ownership; managing preferences; sending notifications; and augmenting data entities.
1150 of 1162
Campaign Canvas
The campaign canvas is the workspace where a user can drag and drop campaign assets and actions
and define their relationships to each other from an integrated marketing program perspective.
Campaign Management
Campaign management is the ability to search, view and manage campaigns through folder stuctures
and overviews.
Campaign Response
A campaign response is an action that can change the stage of a lead and associate that lead stage
conversion to a specific campaign.
Cloud Component
A cloud component extends the functionality of Eloqua Landing Pages. It pulls content or logic from
Eloqua or from 3rd parties, and displays it on a landing page. Examples include: Progressive Profiling
Forms, Twitter Feeds and Facebook Social Sign On.
Component
A component is the building block of an asset. For example, the components for an email include
images, field merges, hyperlinks, headers and footers, and so on.
Component Library
The component library is the area where components (such as images, field merges, shared content,
and so on) are stored for easy access and reference.
Contact
A contact is a data entity that contains the explicit data around an individual person in the database.
Contact View
A Contact view is an arrangement of contact fields that can be customized. Contact views enable you
to view specific contact fields according to your preferences.
Customer Relationship Management (CRM)
Customer Relationship Management (CRM) is a system for handling sales, marketing, and customer
service interactions.
Customer Relationship Management (CRM) Integration
1151 of 1162
Customer Relationship Management (CRM) is a system for handling sales, marketing, and customer
service interactions.
D
Data Tools
Data tools allow the user to create automated rule sets defined by the user's unique business
requirements for managing data in the Marketing Database.
Deduplication Rule
A deduplication rule allows you to check data entities (contacts, accounts, visitors, leads) to ensure
that there are no duplicate records. You can create a deduplication rule that uses multiple fields, partial
matches, and phonetic matches to identify records that are duplicated.
Dependency Checking
Dependency checking occurs when a user attempts to delete or move an asset or component. The
system will automatically check to determine if any other assets or components are dependent on it
and will then notify the user and permit them to take specific action.
Design Editor
The Design Editor is a "What You See Is What You Get" (WYSIWYG) editing tool that allows you to
view the item in the editor as it will display for end-users.
Dynamic Content
Dynamic content allows different email or landing page content to be substituted depending on rules
and associated criteria.
Dynamic Content Section
A dynamic content section is populated via a dynamic content rule that associates content to a
database value.
1152 of 1162
E
Eloqua Insight
Eloqua Insight is the business intelligence tool that is used to manage reporting in Eloqua.
Email
An email is a digital mail piece that contains marketing messages and is delivered electronically. An
email can be created from a template, from an upload, from a copy, or from scratch.
Email Batch
An email batch is the event of an email being deployed to a List.
Email Deployment
Email deployment is the ability to send an email to a specific set of ad-hoc defined email addresses or
to a list as an email batch. The event can be configured to be sent immediately or scheduled for a
specific time (or time period).
Email Editor
The email editor is an email editing tool that allows users to create emails from pre-saved layouts and
styles. Users can create and edit emails in either the design editor (WYSIWYG), or the HTML editor
(source code). You are able to import, create and use email templates within the tool.
Email Testing
Email testing consists of testing: (a) the components within an email (e.g. ensuring that hyperlinks are
working); (b) the rendering of an email within various popular email clients; and (c) the deliverability of
an email.
Event
An event is an online or offline activity where multiple people are assembled together for a live
discussion.
External Call
An external call is a transfer of data to and from Eloqua from external source or CRM.
1153 of 1162
F
Field
A field is the field of data associated with your data entities (contacts or accounts).
Field Merge
A field merge is the ability to dynamically insert a database field value into a content section of an email
or landing page.
Filter
A filter is a set of criteria that are applied to entities in the marketing database in order to create
segments. Criteria can be based on contact, visitor, lead, preference, account, or other custom data
sets tied to the contact.
Footer
A footer is a special content section at the bottom of an email that contains hyperlinks, usually to optout or subscription management pages or methods. A footer also contains additional information (such
as the sender's postal address) to ensure CAN-SPAM compliance. It may contain additional
information such as legal disclaimers, trademark notices, and so on.
Form
A form captures submission data from visitors or other servers. This includes the front end, with which
the visitor interacts and is inserted into a web page or landing page; and the back end, which contains
field mappings to the database.
Form Editor
A form editor is a WYSIWYG editor tool that allows the user to create web forms, including the front
end that is presented to the visitor, and the back end that contains database field mappings. You are
able to import, create, and use form templates and styles.
Form Prepopulation
Form prepopulation is the ability to have form fields on landing pages pre-populate with database
values for the unique contact.
1154 of 1162
H
Header
A header is a special content section at the top of an email that contains hyperlinks, usually to
preferred viewing formats or refer a friend (viral email marketing) options.
HTML Editor
The HTML Editor is an editing tool that allows you to modify the item in the editor using the source
code.
Hyperlink
A hyperlink is a word, phrase, or image that you can click on to jump to a new document or a new
section within the current document. Hyperlinks can be inserted into emails and landing pages and
have specific properties associated with them to show the relationships between different assets.
I
Internal Event
An internal event is a trigger that fires an outbound external call.
K
Known Visitor
A known visitor is a visitor record that is linked to a contact.
1155 of 1162
L
Landing Page
A landing page is a single HTML page that is created as a unique asset of a campaign. A landing page
lives outside of a corporate website and serves as an "entry door" to a website from a specific
campaign. It can be imported into or created within the system and then hosted by the system.
Landing Page Editor
The landing page editor is an editing tool that enables the user to create landing pages from pre-saved
layouts and styles. Users can create and edit landing pages in either the design editor (WYSIWYG), or
the HTML editor (source code). You can also use the tool to import, create and/or use landing page
templates.
Landing Page Testing
Landing page testing is the verification of (a) the rendering of a Landing Page and b) the rendering of
any inserted Form - in various popular web browsers.
Layout
A layout is a pre-set arrangement of elements for an asset - such as headers and footers, sidebars,
text, and images. New layouts can be configured by a user to be reused in future asset creation.
Lead Score
A lead score is based on two values: profile and engagement.The profile value corresponds with a
contact's positions within their company, represented by a letter from A through D (for example, a CEO
might score higher in this area than a VP).The engagement value, represented by a number, is
generated based on a contact's activity.
Lead Scoring
Lead scoring allows you to specify which leads are most promising when you pass them over to your
sales department, providing guidance about where sales should focus their efforts. You can score on
any data stored in Eloqua, including changes to the buyer's record, such as title or annual revenue, and
activities like web visits, form submissions and event attendance.
List
1156 of 1162
A list is a set of contacts that will be used in a campaign. It can be static or dynamic depending on the
presence of a filter. It can also be combined with other Lists.
List Build
List build is the activity of creating a list of contacts for a campaign.

List Preview
List preview is the ability to view the contacts that are in a List during or after it has been built. If the List
is built with dynamic components (i.e. a filter) the list may render different results at different points in
time.
M
Marketing Database
The marketing database is the collective set of all data entities in Eloqua. They include: contacts,
accounts, visitors, leads, components, activities, and so on.
Marketing Operations Center
The Marketing Operations Center is an area in Eloqua where administrators can monitor key services
through the dashboards, enable and disable all services simultaneously for testing or maintenance
purposes, as well as create, modify and delete announcements.
Microsite
Multi-step campaign
A multi-step campaign is a highly customizable marketing tool. You can add elements such as emails,
landing pages, decisions and actions. You can then configure these elements and connect them in a
flow that works for your campaign. All elements can be added and configured directly on the campaign
canvas. This greatly decreases the time required to assemble and configure a campaign.
1157 of 1162
O
Opportunity
An opportunity is a potential deal that you want to track through a campaign and which is part of the
sales pipeline.
P
Page Tag
A page tag is a tool which allows you to mark or categorize a page or groups of pages on your website
to gain more valuable tracking, contact or visitor segmentation, and reporting.
Page Tag Group
together.
Plain Text
Plain text is an email format that has no rich formatting and can be read easily on a mobile device. It is
created automatically when emails are created or imported, and can be verified before deployed.
Plain Text Signature Layout
A plain text signature layout is a version of a signature layout that does not use rich text: it does not
include formatting or images. Creating a plain text version for each of your signature layouts ensures
that contacts who have opted for plain text rather than HTML-based emails receive the right
information, thoughtfully styled.
Profiler
Profiler is the tool for viewing a contact's activity in one single graphical and tabular format in an easily
accessible and data-rich application. Profiler makes up one of the components of the Eloqua Sales
Tools, along with Discover and Engage.
1158 of 1162
Program Builder
Program builder is an automated workflow module. It allows you to create automated workflows to
replace repetitive manual tasks. Programs are useful for many things, such as lead scoring, nurturing,
data modification, and so on. Every program is composed of a combination of two kinds of elements:
program step (which defines an action for every contact record that exists in the step) and decision rule
(a qualifying question that must have a yes or no answer).
R
Report
A report is information you can display or print that provides a summary of your data.
Reporting Dashboard
A reporting dashboard is a visual representations of your report data. There are standard out-of-the-box
dashboards and you can also build your own custom dashboards.
S
Sandbox
A sandbox is an environment used for testing new or current functionality prior to deploying the feature
or data to your production Eloqua environment, without affecting the original (production) system.
Secure Microsite
Security Group
1159 of 1162
A security group is an entity that allows administrators to control what levels of access users have to
assets, features, interfaces, and so on. There are several out of the box security groups and you are
able to build additional security groups to suit your business needs. The ability to build custom security
groups is part of Oracle Eloqua Security Administration Cloud Service.
Segment
A segment is the primary way of grouping contacts in Eloqua. Segments are used to define the
members of a campaign. They can be created using any combination of contact filters, contact lists or
uploaded contacts.
Shared Content
Shared content is reusable content snippets that you can create once, then reuse in different emails
and landing pages. It allows you to "build once, re-use everywhere" for your most valuable common
pieces of content.
Shared Filter
A shared filter is a contact filter that can be used across multiple segments.
Shared List
A shared list is a static list of contacts that can be used across multiple segments.
Signature Layout
A signature layout is a template for automatically inserting Eloqua sender information into emails. You
can create a standard signature layout that defines how signatures should look and what information
they should contain. This allows you to maintain consistency in corporate branding, and it makes it
easier to generate signatures for a large number of employees. A single signature layout can be created
which then dynamically pulls in the details of the sender.
Signature Rule
A signature rule links a specific sender to a contact based on the field values in that contact's record or
custom object. With signature rules, emails can be sent on behalf of many different people at once in a
batch email deployment.
Simple Email Campaign
A simple email campaign is an email marketing campaign created without using the campaign canvas.
The simple email campaign wizard lets you quickly and easily create a campaign and activate it within
a few simple steps.
Single Sign-On
1160 of 1162
Single sign-on (SSO) is a capability that allows you to seamlessly access the Eloqua platform from
your internal SSO provider without having to enter Eloqua user credentials.
Social Relationship Management (SRM)
Social Relationship Management (SRM) is a system for overseeing and interacting with your
customers in terms of social media.
Social Relationship Management (SRM) Integration
Social Relationship Management (SRM) integration is the transfer of data between a SRM and Eloqua.
Subject Area
A subject area is a collection of attributes and metrics that are compatible with each other when
creating custom reports in Eloqua Insight.
T
Template
A template is a sample of an asset or campaign that stores information about the style and layout,
including font styles, placeholder sizes and positions, background design, and color schemes. A
template may have been created and saved in the system, pre-installed or imported for use as a
starting point for new assets or campaigns.
U
Unknown Visitor
A unknown visitor is a visitor that exists without reference to a contact.
1161 of 1162
V
Validation Rule
A validation rule is used to ensure that data uploaded into Eloqua or submitted in a form complies to a
specific criterion (validation type). You can validate whether there is a submitted or uploaded field
value, the data type and length, and whether the value is in a specified data set. In addition, you can
replace particular values with values that you specify (for instance, to normalize data before its stored
in your marketing database).
View
A view is the pre-configured way in which users (agents) in your Eloqua implementation can see the
data associated with data entities.
Visitor
A visitor is a data entity that represents a unique cookie. The tracked activity data from that cookie is
associated with the Visitor. There can be multiple visitors linked to a single contact.
W
Widget
A widget displays such information as upcoming scheduled campaigns, recent email sends or data
from Eloqua Insight reports. You can customize your Eloqua home screen by adding a selection of
widgets which will display useful information when you log into Eloqua.
1162 of 1162

Oracle Eloqua

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Oracle Eloqua

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

http://docs.oracle.

2015 Oracle Corporation. All rights reserved

1.0.2 The Campaign Canvas

1.1 Certified and supported environments

1.2 Configuring Your User Profile

1.3 Language Support

1.4 Template choosers

1.4.1 Using the template chooser

2.1.1 Creating email groups

2.1.2 Deleting email groups

2.1.3 Editing email groups

2.2 Client security configuration

2.2.2 Setting up General Security

2.2.3 Setting up Password Complexity

2.2.4 Setting up SSH Keys

2.2.5 Setting up IPWhitelist security

2.2.6 Setting up FrameablePage Whitelist

2.2.7 User Password Expiration

2.3 Single Sign-On (SSO)

2.3.2 Configuring Single Sign-On (SSO)

2.3.3 Configuring SSO with OKTA

2.3.4 Configuring SSO with Salesforce

2.3.5 Configuring SSOwith Salesforce (IDP and User Provisioning)

2015 Oracle Corporation. All rights reserved

2.4.1 Configuring the HIPAA add-On

2.4.2 Using Eloqua with the HIPAA add-on

2.5.2 Secure microsites

2.5.3 Authenticated microsites

2.6 Replication Sandbox

2.6.1 Initiating instance replication

2.6.2 Cancelling instance replication

2.7 Security Groups

2.7.1 Select List Asset Security

2.7.2 Adding users to security groups

2.7.4 Changing license availability for members of a security group

2.7.5 Configuring Asset Creation Settings

2.7.6 Navigating the Security Settings Interface

2.7.7 Action Permissions

2.7.8 Default asset permissions

2.7.9 Interface Access

2.7.11 User Licensing

2.8 Asset Security

2.9 Configuring campaign details and financials

2.10 Configuring company display defaults

2.11 Creating custom campaign fields

2.12 Creating custom login URLs for CRMintegration

2.13 Setting up the master exclude list

2.14 Uploading users using a CSV file

2.15 Managing image permissions (access rights)

2.16 Eloqua asynchronous tracking scripts

2015 Oracle Corporation. All rights reserved

2.17 Cookie law country list

2.18 Database Encryption

2.19 Stopping a batch from sending

2.20 "Run As User" for Campaigns and Programs

3 Oracle Eloqua AppCloud Apps

3.1 Available apps

3.2 Push IO app

3.2.1 Installing the Push IOapp

3.2.2 Adding the Push IO cloud action to your campaign

3.3 Salesforce.com Campaign Association app

3.3.1 Installing the Salesforce.com Campaign Association app

3.3.2 Adding the Salesforce.com cloud action to your campaign

3.4 Social Sharing app